so ede Ar 4 ala) sense hab apr adel) “ y ruta tlt Radiata tat TE I Kun) lat it hr sist ji Gt ts matt : intel tre ; wh ht 17% EEE re btedy nu gies: : : Aie ‘et i Led An tn Iren Wy ale i ne len h y ; pt i tgssbeis ja rare Ho Sens au im ach ea ; i He Dr QU Bat Eee À les 0 HT x repens i à i ni lehnen ne Matra das Be Inn due 4 Un sbsieteiaieien en er i \pheurte tsi bint diel piptorsiers KA CODE ne ne tibia etal stutaletel ia RÉ EN EN INA en AH ra ad ar ad wisp tededier vy ! bre Ten rent Bl : igen KO Me fantaisie aaa! tite Ron ne IR Anm tes ptccesaieisies dora eh nn . ‘ états QUEUE ! Neko era rs À , . ir r i [ thie ool 1 . “ eine ein H joe ÿ « ‘ ii oghadetd ababeretedecg’ 1 at dal H pie late alate defeats: N . stint ala tas g NL : HMS 4 HART y 1 ‘ retenu ite) are pau bats ey is . lee } ee pie CROIENT . à b Nha tal Me ses f we + «1 hen Walaveteberc aig tete . 4 MERE MINS LE ei eh ta HODP 4 tous ROUE IKT ce ern DADON PH) hp nt UT Ent préiateteie] COIN N fate mtr pie slaterarelebil oie! . Bone Dar x dns : HET IE ai ste sey” Mae soci L doit DOUTER N : HOTEL x ONE Dos . Eire lp raise eal, CET NEE kit rhe rr Bern Dr erent April arete "ver HE HUE) be hte pony ale end DEAR + rl ge COCOON “ DONC DID 1 un 4631 Tine CONSEIL PERMANENT INTERNATIONAL POUR L'EXPLORATION DE LA MER RAPPORTS ET PROCES- VERBAUX VOLUME III | EDITION ANGLAISE | NS —— 2% 4 BENE RAL REPORT ON THE WORK OF THE PERIOD JULY 1902—JULY 1904 WITH 10 APPENDIXES EN COMMISSION CHEZ ANDR. FRED. HOST & FILS COPENHAGUE AOUT 1905 we CONSEIL PERMANENT INTERNATIONAL POUR L'EXPLORATION DE LA MER - RAPPORTS ET PROCÈS-VERBAUX VOLUME III ——+\ EDITION ANGLAISE a D GENERAL REPORT a ON THE WORK OF THE PERIOD JULY 1902—JULY 1904 WITH 10 APPENDI XES EN COMMISSION CHEZ ANDR. FRED. HOST & FILS COPENHAGUE AOUT 1905 CONTENTS Page (encralmNevicway ala rei aan an Met MER NE ER Le era were ee SER APPENDIXES Appendix A—C: Hydrographical Investigations pas Appendix A. On the occurrence in the Atlantic Current of Variations periodical, and otherwise, and their Bearing on Meteorological and Biological Phenomena; by OTTO PETTERSSON. With 16 figures in the text. (With an introduction PE Wt net) ae ara Ret PE en 2) ens TE OO A DT 1—26 — B. The Hydrography of the Fzroe-Shetland Channel in 1902 and 1903; by B. HELLAND-HANSEN. With 4 figures in the text ............... I—7 — C. On the Influence of the East Icelandic Polar Stream on the climatic changes of the Færoe Isles, the Shetlands and the North of Scotland; by MARTIN KNUDSEN. With 3 figures in the text................. 1—8 Appendix D—K: Fisheries- and Biological Investigations Introductory Review by P. P. C. HOEK fis RPANR ONRMVESHPAIONSSE PE ER EEE EC CE ECC LCL I—V 2. Biological and fisheries investigations. ....................... VI—XX Appendix D. On the Production and the Conditions of Production in the Sea; by IR IBRUGSIDHT no 8.0.0.8 cls ooo coon Ce UO. Ce nec oH ciel 1—12 -- E. The Occurrence and Distribution of the Eggs, Larv and various Age- Groups of the Food-Fishes in the North Sea; by Fr. HEINCKE. With 4 Eure san INS WEL ooo ee OUND Ot I—39 — EF. On the periodic Occurrence of the principal Food-Fishes in the North Sea and Skager Rak; by H. HENKING. With 26 figures in the text and 23) CHATES Sy sr ee EE RoE Mee Men hai ole chee de leiete ne shee ed que pe orne 1—28 — G. Short Review of the Results of the international Investigations (mostly Norwegian and Danish); by JoHAN Hyorr and C. G. JOH. PETERSEN. With robes gig!) 7 mete tin fine MES RC MOMIE I—43 — H. Provisional Report on the Natural History of the Plaice based on the Work of Committee B in the Period ending June 30, 1904; by WALTER _ GARSTANG. With 3 charts, 10 figures in the text and 9 tables....... I—53 Appendix H'. The Distribution of the Plaice on the Dutch Coast; by H.C. REDEKE. With 4 figures in (HERG), GCG AS et: I— 10 —— J. Statistics of the North Sea Fisheries (Part I). The Fisheries of the various Countries ly 12h PA CAO ER eimgl Velo Wh Moai) oon oging ogee ono eon Hoe I—126 — kK. Statistics of the North Sea Fisheries (Part Il). Summary of the available Fisheries Statistics and their Value for the Solution of the Problems of Overfishing; by H.M. Kyte. With 1 chart and 2 figures in the text.. 1—58 ae FN ee eo Du EEE, Mg rw u be _ GENERAL REVIEW _ The aim of the international cooperation for the study of the sea is: to pre- Introduction Aim of the inter- pare for a rational exploitation of the sea on a scientific basis! on of the sea Since the time, when the International Council for the study of the sea was formally constituted and held its first meeting on the 22”! of July 1902 at Copen- hagen2, a comprehensive study of the hydrographical conditions, biology of the food-fishes and plankton of the northern seas, has been begun in the interests of the fisheries and of fisheries legislation, under the direction of the International Council and the Bureau in Copenhagen, by the various national committees of the nine participating states, namely: Belgium — Denmark — Germany England and Scotland — Finland — Holland Norway — Russia — Sweden. The principal endeavours of this study, which strives to arrive at practical ends by common international work along scientific lines, are: I. The investigation of the hydrographical conditions obtaining in the North Sea, Norwegian Sea, Barents Sea, White Sea, as well as in the English Channel Ni so and Baltic, and the connection of these conditions with the circulation of the investigations ‘waters in the ocean. II. The study of the biological conditions of the animal and plant worlds in these seas, with special regard to the food, the reproduction, growth, and the distribution and migrations of the different food-fishes. III. The solution of the problem, how far the deep-sea fishery as a commercial industry stands in general on a rational basis; whether the quantities and the consumption of fish, taken from the seas mentioned, are in a proper proportion to the production occurring under the prevailing natural conditions, and whether any disproportion between production and consumption arises from a general or local overfishing, or from an injudicious employment of the fishing apparatus at present in use. t Résolutions textuelles de la Conférence internationale pour l'exploration de la mer, réunie à Stock- holm 1899, p. 1. 2 Procès Verbal de la réunion du Conseil permanent international pour l'exploration de la mer, Copenhague, Juillet 1902. Rapports et Procès-Verbaux des réunions. Vol. I. p. 1—37. : Concentration of the biological investigations Special problems — 2 — Each of these principal endeavours embraces a number of special questions, which were formulated in detail at the Conferences in Stockholm 1899! and Chris- tiani 19012, and were definitely included in the program of the international investigations by the resolutions of the authoritative meeting in Copenhagen 1902°. It is clear, that the large and varied tasks undertaken by the international investigation of the sea, could not be completed within the space of two years. Foreseeing this, the first international Conference in Stockholm in 1899 unanimously recommended to the participating states, that the proposed program of investigations should be given at least five years for its accomplishment*. The Christiania Con- ference also resolved to recommend to the participating states, that a space of at least five years should be at the disposal of the investigations. As it appeared, however, at the authoritative meeting in Copenhagen 1902°, that grants had been preliminarily voted by some of the participating states for the period of three years only, and the wish was in some cases expressed at the same time, that practical results should be chiefly aimed at, the International Council, having regard for these limitations in fact and in time, resolved® to concentrate the biological investigations of the first years on certain practical and important problems, and in particular, to make the two following problems the object of investigation in all the countries interested in the fisheries of the North Sea and neighbouring waters. (a) The migrations of the principal food-fishes of the North Sea fisheries, especially of the cod and herring. (b) The question of overfishing of those parts of the North Sea, including the Skager Rak and Kattegat, mostly fished in by the British, Dutch, German and other trawlers, with special regard for the plaice, sole and other flat-fish, as well as the haddock. To ensure uniformity in carrying out these investigations, two Committees” were formed by the International Council, each under the direction of a convener; one of these, Committee A, was to investigate the problems connected with the migrations of fishes, the other, Committee B, the problems connected with over- fishing. The investigations of Committee A extend over the entire region under survey in the international scheme, more especially, the North Sea, Norwegian Sea and Barents Sea; the investigations of Committee B are restricted to the North t Conférence Internationale pour l'exploration de la mer à Stockholm 1899. Resolutions tex- tuelles. p. 2—28. A 2 2. Conférence Internationale pour l'exploration de la mer à Christiania 1901. Texte des Reso- lutions. p. 127. 3 Procès-Verbal de la (première) réunion du Conseil Permanent International pour lexploration de la mer à Copenhague, Juillet 1902. p. 1—37. Rapports et Proces-Verbaux. Vol: I. 190203. Copenhague, 1903. 4 Résolutions textuelles de la Conference internationale pour l'exploration de la mer réunie à Stockholm. 1899. p. 1. 5 Proces-Verbal de la réunion du Conseil international pour l'exploration de la mer réunie à Copenhague. Juillet 1902. Annexe A. Rapports & Proces-Verbaux. Vol. I. 1902-03. p. 32. 61. c.: p. 16—19. 7 Proces-Verbal de la réunion du Conseil international 4 Copenhague de 1902. p. 18 et p. 29. Sea, Skager Rak and Kattegat. In order that the investigations of the fisheries conditions in the Baltic should keep pace with those of the other seas, a third committee, Committee C, was instituted for the Baltic. It was evident from the beginning, that the statistical portion of the investiga- tions would play a prominent role, especially for the problem of overfishing. Accordingly, special weight was laid on statistics in the program of Committee B. The experience of the first year showed that it was necessary, however, both for the working out of certain problems as for a general treatment of fisheries statistics, that the Bureau itself should undertake the elaboration of the material sent in by the various countries’ As regards the hydrographical work during the seasonal cruises, no occasion arose for introducing any further limitations into the program accepted at the Stockholm and Christiania Conferences, than those which would arise of themselves, _ during the progress of the investigations, from the force of external circumstances and natural conditions. It was foreseen, indeed, that great hindrances to the work would arise from storms and unfavourable weather conditions, especially in the colder periods of the year. These hindrances would chiefly appear in the first few years, so long as all the participating countries did not have steamers at their disposal specially constructed and equipped for such investigations. This was declared an indispensable condition for the successful accomplishment of such a program, by the Conference at Christiania Unpreventable shortcomings in the scheme of observations also arose, because some of the countries taking part in the work were not yet ready with their preparations in 1902, and Belgium did not join the investigations until the spring of 1903°. It seemed advisable, however, to postpone any changes in the original hydrographical program, until the first few years’ experiences had been gained. In the elaboration of the hydrographical program at the very beginning, at the Stockholm Conference, the greatest care had been taken to ensure the agree- ment and uniformity of the methods of observation, and to determine exactly the accuracy and the amount of error in the instruments, as well as the physical and chemical constants of sea-water of different origin. The aims first-mentioned were attained by the institution of the Central Labora- tory at Christiania’. The determination of the constants of sea-water, which was considered an extremely important preliminary investigation for the international study of the sea, was made by M. Knupsen in the interval between the Stockholm of 1899 and Procés-Verbal de la Réunion du Conseil international à Hambourg de 1904, p. 12, 13 et p.20, 21 2. Conference internationale pour l'exploration de la mer, réunie à Christiania 1901, p. 2, sub. D, 3 Procès-Verbal de la réunion du Conseil international Copenhague Février 1903. Annexe G Rapports & Procés-Verbaux. Vol. I. p. 86. 4 Procés-Verbal de la réunion du Conseil international Copenhague, Juillet 1902, p. 22 & 23. Rapport sur le laboratoire central 4 Christiania. 1902—1903. Rapports & Procés-Verbaux. Vol. I. p- XL. Id. 1903—1904. Rapports & Procés-Verbaux. Vol. II, p. XX. I 2 2 Statistics Program of the hydrographical investigations Constants of sea-water Knudsen’s Tables Reports on administration, etc. Report on the organisation of the international work Bureau Publications = = the first meeting of the International Council in Copenhagen in 1902. The costs of the preparation of the “Hydrographische Tabellen”: amounted to 18,400 Kroner. About one half was defrayed by contributions from scientific societies and academies in England, Norway, Sweden, Germany and Russia, and the remaining half by a contribution from the Copenhagen Carlsberg Fund and the International Council for the study of the sea. A review over the general aims and administration of the international investiga- tions, is contained in the two administrative Reports, for 1902-1903 and 1903—1904 2, submitted to the governments of the participating countries, and in the Proceedings of the International Council’ and of the three Committees A, B and C+, published in the course of these years. In the present Report, the Bureau wishes to supplement the earlier Reports by the following Review over the organisation of the scientific and practical work of the international investigations, its methods, means and results, in so far as these have Hens ned a état HA CRETE at ie pres en time. The direction of the work is entrusted to the International Council for the study of the sea, whose executive organ is the Bureau. The Bureau has its seat at Copenhagen and consists of three ordinary members, the president, vice- president and the general-secretary, and of four extraordinary members, the hono- rary treasurer residing in Copenhagen, the director of the Central Laboratory, and of two other members chosen by the International Council. When the Bureau has to consider general questions regarding finance and administration, or wishes to make proposals to the participating countries or to the International Council, the outer executive is consulted and this consists of the ordinary and extraordinary members together. The scientific assistants of the Bureau are: First assistant (physicist), Docent Martin KNUDSEN. Second assistant (biologist), Dr. H. M. Kyte. Technical assistants, as draughtsmen etc. are called in by the Bureau, according to requirements. In addition to the Reports of Administration and of Proceedings, the Bureau has also the duty of editing and publishing the following series of scientific reports. : Hydrographische Tabellen, nach Messungen von KARL FORCH, J. P. JACOBSEN, MARTIN KNUDSEN und S. P. L. S@RENSEN, herausgegeben yon MARTIN KNUDSEN. 2 Rapport administratif sur 1902—03. Copenhague. Septembre 1903. 52 p. Rapport et Suiits. Verbaux, Vol. I, 1903. — Id. sur 190304. Copenhague, Octobre 1904. 39 S. Rapports et Procés-Verbaux, Vol. II. 1904. 3 Procés-Verbal de la réunion du Conseil à Copenhague, Juillet, 1902. — Id. à Copenhague, Février 1903. — Id à Hambourg, Février, 1903. Rapports et Procés-Verbaux, Vol. I et II. 1903 et 1904. 4 Procès-Verbaux des réunions des commissions spéciales. Edinbourg. Septembre 1902; Copenhague, Février 1903; Stralsund, Juillet 1903; Amsterdam, Decembre 1903; Hambourg, Février 1904. Rapports, et Procès-Verbaux. Vol. I et II. 1903 et 1904. — 15 a. Bulletin des résultats acquis pendant les courses périodiques Of this series, the following have been published: Bulletin for 1902—1903. Four numbers: for August and November 1902, and for February and May 1903. — Idem for 1903—1904. Four numbers: for August and November 1903 and for February and May 1904. b. Publications de circonstance Of this series, the following have appeared: No. 1. C. G. Jou. PETERSEN, How to distinguish between mature and immature Plaice throughout the Year. 8 p. 1 pl. July 1903. No. 2. Martin KNUDSEN, On the Standard-Water used in the hydrographical | Research until July 1903. 9 p. July 1903. | No. 3. The Literature of the ten principal Food Fishes of the North Sea. In the | form of compendious monographs. 112 pp. 10 Pl. August 1903. No. 4—5. Martin KNUDSEN, Ueber den Gebrauch von Stickstoffbestimmungen in der Hydrographie. —, Gefrierpunkttabelle fiir Meerwasser. Zusammen: 13 S. September 1903. No.6. Harry M. Kye, On a new Form of Trawl Net, designed to fish in mid- water as well as on the ground. Preliminary notice. 8 p. November 1903. No.7. P. J. van BREEMEN, Ueber das Vorkommen von Oithona nana Giesbr. in der Nordsee. Mit einer Karte. 24 S. November 1903. No. 8—9. T. Wemyss FuLron, On the Spawning of the Cod (Gadus morrhua L.) in Autumn in the North Sea. With a chart. —, À new Mark for Fish. Together: 14 p. March 1904. No. 10. G. O. Sars, On a new (Planktonic) Species of the Genus Apherusa. 4 p, With a plate. March 1904. No. 11. Marin KNUDSEN, ot Tabelle, Anhang zu den 1go1 herausgegebenen hydrographischen Tabellen. 23S. Mai 1904. No. 12. Catalogue des poissons du nord de l’Europe, avec les noms vulgaires dont on se sert dans les langues de cette région. 76p. Mai 1904. No. 13 A. Die Ostsee Fischerei in ihrer jetzigen Lage (Erster Teil). I. Uebersicht über die Seefischerei in den dänischen Gewässern innerhalb Skagens. Im Auftrag von Dr. C. G. Jou. PETERSEN bearbeitet von ANDREAS OTTERSTROM. II. Uebersicht über die Seefischerei Schwedens an den süd- und östlichen Kü- sten dieses Landes. Bearbeitet von Dr. Fırır Trysom und Arr. WOLLEBÆK. Zusammen 59 S. 6 Taf. Juni 1904. c. Reports on the Results of the International Investigations The present report is the first of this series. The Bureau is the executive organ of the International Council. Its sphere of work is controlled by the regulations drawn up by and for the Inter- national Council, as well as by its own business-regulations, which have been communicated to the Council. 1 Procés-Verbal de la réunion du Conseil de Copenhague. Février 1903. Annexe F: Reglement du Bureau, Rapports et Procés-Verbaux. Vol,ı. 1903, p. 79—85. N 2 Central Laboratory Committees CUP GT The Central Laboratory in Christiania undertakes the duties of testing the apparatus and methods and of supervising the uniformity of the observations. Its sphere of work is controlled by rules and regulations' drawn up by the Interna- tional Council and is superintended by a director chosen by the Council. The officials are: First assistant: Dr. V. W. Exman, physicist. Second assistant: Dr. CHARLES J. J. Fox, chemist. Annual reports on the work of the Central Laboratory for the years 1902—1903 and 1903—1904, have appeared in the Reports of Administration for those years?. During these two years, the Central Laboratory has been specially engaged in the following labours: 1. The Laboratory has provided the expeditions fitted out by the various countries with hydrographical apparatus. 2. It has controlled the water-samples sent in by the participating countries. 3. The Laboratory has prepared normal-water and holds it at disposal. 4. The apparatus and instruments employed for the hydrographical investigations, which have been sent in to the Laboratory, have been tested there. 5. New apparatus and instruments (water-bottles, current-measurers, ground-samplers etc.) have been constructed by it. 6. Various special investigations have been undertaken by the Laboratory (as, of the gases dissolved in sea-water, the compressibility of sea-water etc.). To ensure efficient direction of the work in each region, the Bureau has the right to take counsel with experts and bodies of experts, who are called together for this purpose to a place determined by the Bureau. Of such meetings, the following have been held: at Edinburgh, September 1902: Meeting of Committees A and B, - Stralsund, Juli 1903: — — — C, - Amsterdam. December 1903: — — oa B, - Copenhagen, July 1904: — — the hydrographical assistants of the laboratories of the participating countries. In addition, Committees A, B and C met at Copenhagen in February 1903, and Committees A and B at Hamburg in February 1904, when meetings of the International Council were held at these towns 3. The resolutions and protocols of these meetings were laid before the Inter- national Council, which decided how far these were to act as guiding rules for the international work. As mentioned earlier (page 2), three committees of experts were formed by the International Council in July 1902. These committees are at present constituted — as follows: 1 Procés-Verbal de la réunion de Copenhague, Février 1903. Annexe B. Règlement du laboratoire central. Rapport et Procés-Verbaux. Vol. I, 1903. p. 64—67. 2 Rapports et Procés-Verbaux. Vol. I. 1903, p. XL-XLIV. — Id. Vol. IT. 1904. p. XX— XXIV. 3 For the Proceedings of the meetings held by the Committees, see Vols. I and II of the “Rap- ports et Procès-Verbaux”. = MEZ Committee A: For the problems concerned with the migrations of the principal Commitee A food-fishes of the North Sea. Members: Dr. Josan Hjorr, Bergen, Convener. Prof. D’Arcy W. Thompson, Dundee. Mr. WALTER GARSTANG, Lowestoft. Prof. Fr. HEINCKE, Heligoland. Dr. N. KnıpowitscH, Petersburg. Dr. C. G. Jou. PETERSEN, Copenhagen. Dr. H. C. Repexe, Helder. Committee B: For the investigation of the biology of the Pleuronectidae Committee B and other fishes taken by the trawl. Members: Mr. WALTER GARSTANG, Lowestoft, Convener. Dr. T. Wemyss Futton, Aberdeen. Prof. Fr. HEINCKE, Zeligoland. Prof. G. Girson, Louvain. Dr. C. G. Jou. PETERSEN. Copenhagen. Dr. H. C. Repexe, Helder. Dr. F. Tryzom, Stockholm. Committee C: For the problems concerned with the fisheries in the Baltic. Commitee C Members: Dr. F. Trysom, Stockholm, Convener of Committee C,, (for the north-eastern part of the Baltic). “Dr. C. G. Jou. PETERSEN, Copenhagen, Convener of Committee C, (for the south western part of the Baltic). Prof. Kart Branpt, ÆX%e/. Prof. O. von Grim, Petersburg. Prof. H. Henxine, Hanover. Mr. J. A. Sanpman, Zelsingfors. | The duties of the conveners of the commitees are fixed by the rules and regu- lations passed by the International Council’. They have to arrange the reports sent them by the members of the committees, to draw up summaries of the results and to transmit these to the Bureau of the International Council. Preliminary (annual) reports have been sent in by the conveners and published as Appendixes to the Reports of Administration for 1902—03 and 1903—04. Two general summaries are added to this Report as Appendixes G and H: namely, one by Dr. J. Hjorr and Dr. C. G. Jon. PETERSEN (chiefly concerning the Danish and Norwegian fisheries investigations), in which the work of Committee A during the years 1902—03 and 1903—04 is also reported on, and a second, on the work of Committee B, by its Convener, Mr. W. GARSTANG. In addition, the Conveners of Committee C, Dr. Perersen and Dr. Trysom, have 1 Procès-Verbal de la réunion de Copenhague de Fevrier 1903. Annexe E. Rapports et Procès- Verbaux. Vol. I. 1903, p. 77. — ‘sastn.io [EUOS =ea8 ou) Jo lool ‘Z229P I “iG “(puejosıjapj) SUOT (222020212020207 “I -BOLISSAUT SaTIoysy 20707 “AG pur jeor3ojorg UUDUYPOAS “1G ‚suored CID) -TJSSAUT arydeısonpAy andEny “iq SaHausy pue | [eotsojorq “suotjestjsaaur jeoryd -eisoipky Yazuzunıy 'O Old -a.ld HeAOUEE Pie M id "T*N 065 Jo you onegt “(stojsulsjayy ur UJog) “Ue }SISSY ‘SUOTJESIISAAUT SOTIOUSY} “pupung py / ud “se ‘SUOT}LSIISOAUL [BOTS ‘(S10jSuIS[oy] Ur ]IV) "Kıe) -2109S (123940037 Py yy 10200 zıwupuvs “PF / NU SE purl Aqstusyo 7227/7761 PARIS) yryd "Zen 201014 aplinaay ‘Wy we00q AGE? SOVIET COREG PUETUTH -urg pue erumog JO SHIN yuejsisse jeoryd SE STE Cha -visoipAy 1022972 oy 'yd ‘pue LUCHESH BAU TEMS! 1, Oi YOM PAY HUSA MRE N ED) jeorycieaBorpAy “amor YZ, 301d 'Uaworg Aopoay 7, 3014 JuapIsaıd 13212207 SAapupr JON "SUOTJEO hr | (27207 © A EN | = -suomeärsaAaur SOLIOUSIF - UE ia en ie [eotsojorg ‘yynoutAyg ‘A1e}9.109S pue jeo | un EL ae oe Br pue 10}0911 ‘wayp / 7 Id ‘(uopuorf ur |]W) uueuo ysysuq | -tBororg 177229 Aare N “wopdury; paytun au) jo uon || -Kimamag ‘40/2277 JU IN "was *SUOT}UST}SOAUT -BIOOSSY [POIS0[OI auTIe OU AayIARP TT AA “AWN PUETS UT YWON ay} JO wed wregynos | uoyyueld 5709 7 ‘7 “IG yjnows Tq ‚suorearsaA "SPROT ML "N ‘SUOTIPSIJSOAUT [voTydvis | -ur jeOrsmejs ‘Adejetoag JUB)S ‘jUapIselg “07/2407 'M 7 US -oıpAy ‘smayyopy [CG “AN -ISSW “ayI4p “AZ AA N ‘SON “SUOTIESIISAAUT jean }uo is -oYsty pue 21N)[N9T13 jo pavog SES AD UMAZIS DIN “J FIN DÉC suoneänsaA LOSJNVT 720 ‘9S ‘BEN ‘(usSequodo5 ur |1V) h sul DIIS40T ‘I ‘IN OS ‘kW *SUOTILSTISIA PALIER PUEROIIDUEE Se SIC SOIENT TOR punT7-Sasgussayy D IQ | -ur uoyued ‘yjafwasQ FD | -09S “‘waspnuyy uno 200 oi) apunol en suomeänsaA a "SUOTJBITISSAUT [PO DIL as ION WU 1dexS an) Zen N 7 ae PO || aydesSorpsy esp aan | 12750 ‘Fx OD 2030adsursumssum THE LUE CN ae | An br -e.1001pAy CASE EN NE *SUOTJESIJSOAUT SATIOUSI pue [eo 7854924, 7 I, ure)dey ORNS OM Jo) TTA MEIC ‘suoTjes f uasunyof ‘IF aa || -180[o1q 72543737 “Yof D 9 iG Jusp -1saAur SATIOUS | 22224726 “syof "IQ -Iselq 435412427 YO] 9 D iq puaysO 72227097 [IN ‘ une | PU9ISO 72228227 jy “1d ‘Ruue sau enrBoJor | pusrsO ‘adr 77 IN ‚S[SSSMIIETFUF ou} 0} eae ae re DO I Se „ellınyeu 9.1T0JstE],p PSN. ‘ ‘vag "suoryeansaAur Deu sq} 10} "ureanoT ‘208729 9 old | ay} JO Jopaırı eu} Aq uayer tUNLS [O4 AT CEE IGOnG qstoiskyd “taautsue ‘pueyse 747027277 TA -Iopum St WOT}aJtp-ssaursnq SU] DONNE nos aaurdus ‘sjassnig 7402927 "UN : ‘ga}}IUIUI0 ON ‘suoTyesyjsaaut jeorydeisoipAy ay} Fo À apis Jeorwoyo pue) 20572) ZW ‘jOId SUOT]ESTSSAUT suorwätjssAuf JO UOTSON SUOT}PST]SAAUT OY} JO 1039911 29}}IWIWIOD FU} JO SRE Aıyunoy | a 10} sjuejsissy pue sjsteradg m nn — — — — — — — — ——— — — — — — — — — — — — — [ —"…"’…"’ "…" suonednssAu] JO UOISOY PUB erfeuosiag . D NÉ] ‘punss1Q 0} W[OY907S Wo. omjeg 24} jo qed “Asturayo ‘wjoyys019 2577024707 FA „en “uejsIsse PUO9aSs ‘wyoY 0035 20937701 'F 'Pued ‘soisAyd ‘JUEJSISSE Js. ‚suorjeärjssAaur SaLıaysy [eor} -ovid pue [89180101q "zuoghaz 7 ‘Binquayjoy ‘apuvyl yy °F 'JO1d | "wW[OoyUN90IS ‘wossrayaq ‘QO 301d | “WOYYIOS ‘20ghAT 7 “IG 3 ‘2mque09 7037) \Z d Old uspaMm “Sınqusmoc, ‘40415 0UD ue jivd sarpeuysturmupe pue P9MS . UJa}SaM au} pue ALY IoderS quamon "7u947SpuDS ‘AA f oe 9 jeotydesBoupky ‘054427 "0 ‘31nqu2409) ge rte -eönssaur-uoyyuejd 7027) 7 q Jod || uaos) “GUIAQAASDT “4) uoleg ja *(syaeyo) ‘aumodg TD wedey | | “(sorsmpejs-Joyueun) 79017 sam "N | "(oeAle] ee | | s333-ysy) 0S 'g wwasuy uyof “1 | ‘jauuvYyo PuejjayS— 20124 ‘(191898 se | ("uopuo ur ||Y) ‘vag UEIS2M 105) 95 (4 wvumog sapunxar SW | Hiog Kaausta ush00 2 | "ÂIE)2109S zuvjpvag ZW “IN plvog ASIA USHJ09S at} 10} -10N 24} Jo „ed useyyNOS ‘(uoyyue]d) wosgwoyL “M CAF "301g ABYIAP A M IN pueyoos eas ‘usepreqy “WV W ‘74779 W ‘AZ "N : | ‘SPPOG ‘Ww L ‘IN UJION au} JO Jıled usoy}ION, ‘(uoyyuejd) usapısqy 77026 47 “IC | ‘\uapisaig 07/2407 MA ‘A US -(Aydvaso.1pAy) aepund 9S 14 ‘wospragoy [ 7 "N *SUOTJLSISAAUT SOLIOUSY, ‘usapieqy Zoynz SSI NZ 10 | Er *sISA| | "pugjsp zag —opie A : Ur] eur jeotuay> 107 ‘wupwusnoey IE ‘IQ au} 0} ‘ALta}sam (v[quu97 -uojyuejd pue 801002 10} ‘09227 °F “UN +, Sa10Wl0g eu} JO uOI} BAON JO JSE09 au} se 18} ‘sısäjeue 19JEMVIS ‘SaToysy jazoddns au} 10} 9a};}1WIW0D,, ay} -da1Ip [elsuad ay} sey urewodg EISEN se ‘Klose :veS sjueleg | -uowes ‘4301007 10} 707097055 74 ‘AN | Jo Jopemy ‘5572/2215 ‘7 “iq | eMedwy pus sumymarnıay jo EU ‘puejurg JO JIN9 ‘AS0[0103}9 WU 'saLiausıy vag sjUeieg ay} 104 || JueunIedeaq ayL “9a]}TUIWIOD ON reg a4} Jo yed uiszse | ‘4301002 10} ‘oywayISJOSST 7A “IN Re | :V2S SJU2IU au) 104 | ‘9813 UT IV eee Fe Yep Ye] gl | ‘vaS YON ula1seo ‘yuRjsisse [VO180[01q 920/204 ‘7 'purd ; 4 à =UJLOU ‘vag UEIS9MION *juejsisse jeoryd NOOBS AUS CANIN! OG CEES ean AP MION sation ‘WaSUnel-punjyjazy 'Z Pur) “Juejsisse soLlausyy 7007 72247 "pued “uonlod u12S2M-y}nos pue ulayjnos ‘vag uJION -IOpJOH UE TLV: quejsisse |Poryde1801pAu ‘AAvN “UNIT ~Yuopuasooy woe JA RP “IN “quejsisse [eOrSo[org cr rs uva 'f ‘q ‘PurI0390 "JuejsIsse “Tepe ‘24902 ‘D ‘A “id :Â1832103S ‘wep : -12Jsuy ‘2040p0T wD de) wep.Jajsuuy RER RER. MH eee PueIIOH — TO — -asodind JU} O} payıns Stoweajs 10430 Aq mo parLılea ale "sI9LUE9IS IIUJOSNOLIEN "7 ar RE a nt om ia be m a I *(suorpesnjsaaur sarlaysy ay} Jof) “ueyeSau | -219H ‘SIOJSUIS|9 FH ‘WNeSNJ satieysry ‘7 ‘(suoneSnsaAuT jeorsojorq | asa, ‘SASINIO JoJurM OU} 10} pasn 2q JOUUVO Jr : >: DUEBIULT “Jo¥9.1q-99T UL SL Pa}ON.suOd Jou ST jr se “u 6z EN LE | RE Teenie) EHO ISTT ee TIE Ei kan ‚Sag, em ut -URJSUOY ‘sIoFJJursja 7] ‘ ,uorsstunuosg BYSESO]OIG-Ysyeiso.ipAy,, 2) Jo A1oyeloqey “1 "UOHBIIOSSY [vITSO]OIG auLieN] ay} 0} : - Zuiguojag YOvA-uIV|IS EN ST | BUOUIIO,, SUL “69 + BUONO, "© *A1O}BIOQU] [VOTSO[OT_ eure JF04saMOT a *SUOT}ESTJSOAUT 9} JINS 0} p219}[E M UJSU[ ur || suo} 161 * Agpxny,, ‘1 "A1oye.toge] [vorsojorg survey yynoWwALg “1 Puejoug w SE Jo lomen wesjs e st, Asjxny,, SUL "SIoyeM USIUE au) : ur AjaAtsnjoxa pasn ST PUUAUOT]E)SM]EOTSO [OT k TaASUALYIIG aIPION USIUEC et} 0} ssuojeq „punssurjes,, 24. £ à an “og usdeyusdo) “Kıoyeroger) uojyuzig "& ‘SUOT}VSI}SOAUT UOJ}UE[d pur IESCRE ON or eae rol SPpesspjeyuyTiopseig “Oo a eorydesso1pAy ay} pue satioysy au} 10} yJoq pue IE Re uasvyusdod Klopelogerf jeorydeisompig +z AAA QE ‘puejsoy puke S20127 ay} je osje “Bag Y}ION « PUNSOUTTES:: ‘pivaAa|noqpurss Mo usdeyuadoy pue Jegapey] ‘yey JodeyS oy} ur suoresrsoAut «OUT» ‘SUOTJESTISSAUT SITIOUSU 10; Aloyerogerg "I au} 107 Ajferods pakojdma st Joy], IL "99. SUOT} : Fe -VAJaSGO JO SOTI9S 1E[NB21 10} UT Pajjeo osje st ’ 2 N Jeeppue 4 PUL Jopurp Isa M 24} Je sdrus-Jugty = RÉPONSE ees Oe Oy ay} JO souvsisse ayy, ‘vof yova Jo syjuou |e ose F "sönj-wWesjs pair "2 || Jo suoryeönssAur sarlousyy 10} A 10}210q Eh Fe HO SON mE SE OTR AEN PEAR :(sasin1o ‘pue ‘AjIsieatug, SU} Jo A1oje10qe Ty on TER a nn > ears [euoseas ou} IOJ) „SIaA [BOTWIayo-[25T30/090x0} pur jeannssermeyg *f TUNIS [OT S[assnig JO wimhesnj AIOJSIFH jeingen UT PORN REL pa -sastato jeuosess | © zSg | -uomoadsur satiaysty *ı || ‘Ajstaatug, ay} Jo aynyrsuy jeotsojooz 'z au} SULINP SUOT}ESI}SOAUT SaTIaYsy 10} pasn osje ; £ ASS i ST „SIHAUY,P ajjA,, ‚(aWuesjs-uoryoadsur SU], ST Rie SEE UP ANG SECU SE RN Ayroudeo REINE : ns SOUEN] no payloM se R HEUT = S}[NSa1 au} alayuM suormyrsur IYT}UEIDS uch) s.t3wes}g SIOUIEIIS PUE SUOHNINSUJ * II IST — iil [0014 1SE[ ayy Sur221109 L'EL EU 10N] „NeladeyS,, aueu au} PeAT9991 seu fasn 0} ynd u33Q SouIS SEH (a | ‘(1 suoryeot) | -SaAUT au} 10} }[INq Zurag st Jauvays Mau y "E (Br TEE "„e[0o3s50H, | -(Apıesk syyuou 2/12) suoryearysaA * SPW» $,W[OYYI0}S JO Aloyeloqer[ |[eormayg *z | Rene =UT SOHOUSI OU} or por MSID[MEIT-LUE2)S. "7 euysnyo,, ‘ Ayeg., 2 *UOISSIUIMIOD [eOFSO]OTq [eotyde1soi1pAq pes juatUIaAOD ay} Aq SUOTJESTJSSAUT ‘PUNSASUIAS 'S 'W'S "I | YSIPAMS a} JO uorje]S auLem ‘Ouiog ‘1 Se ay} JO [esodstp st} ye paoejd ‘essaaA KAEN "I | = ; x rs ‘sasInio jeuosvas ay} 107 paXojduia Bien Gag + 10y33sp[oQ,, "z ‘,puepoog 10; pieog | SI AL 0 "Sn 'H ‘suorjestjsaaut au} JINS 0} ‘u0] 06% “eel, "SH "1 AISUSTA,, ayJ jo Asoye.1oge’y suaapiaqy up =z | puef109S P919)[V I9fMen-weajs e ST ,19YH29SP[09);, sy], > . "Aysıaarun BY} JO ioyeroqe TT :oapunquy ‘i | | ‚sıejnarpuadısd "NSMOIPuUeXaIYV = "SUO] ‘zog 10Jow-weajg *E |, ay} UseArjog MUSÉE Jo Yous] B sey 3] ‘JSE00 suoreänssaur jeorpeid pue oyrusras p9193S1821 ‘S[ASSAA SUIIES AUWOS "z 5 0 eIssuny uew.ing; 34} UO suorypadxs sy} 107 Jg usaq 10} uormpadxq :JSP0D UPUIN ay} UO ‘Z : oyynıq 9££) Auuemsomieag feipuy,, ‘1 sey _AUUPMSOA\IOg Talpuy,, Iauiva}s SU] & x Zınqsısjag uy ‘1 “1894 ay} Jo syyuow 6 Surinp suoneönsaAur SOLOUSL pue sUTIeUT oymuaros ||"0'Poo& + * SIES [Peur STE HEURE ABMION UO saLlıed SES [OUUOIJ» Jetuvays ou, SALE NA SEREMEREL ENB UO WOSERSS TER ‘22Z19pI0Z au} ur pue JUN [axe], ay} UT suoreärsaAur -(Zurpjing Surimoqysteu e ur yno parues aie ay} 10} pasn sz pue ‘stiojsng jo pirog young + Mnaatusaz,, “2 | SUOTESIJSSAUT [eoryde.soipsy ayy, “q'N) 3 au} 0} ssuojaq _MNesellIee7,, Aalueajs OUT * uepoM„ "I "12 P[2H{ ‘uoneIS [esr30[007 ay} ye 'suor BESICH, *SUOTILSTISAAUL a} IO} PIOUCIIE -PSIJSSAUT BAS UJION ay} 107 K1oyetoger] Ajjerseds Zn-wesjs e st ,UepoA\., AUT, ‘19AOUUBFZ ur ulate, SPULE NOHEN -Talayosyaes Tayasinag,, ay} Fo Aloyerogeg *E eu JO syeoq surysy TES LS ‘purjos - A[[EUOISE290,, pesn a. s[assad Jayj}O au, 00$—00} aawesjs Surysıqg "r “IH je uoneis feomsojorg uerssnug Koy "= -uoreJS [BIISO[OTG PUEIOSI[OF] ey} JO juoq RES Laas : JIOM Jeordojorq ay} 10} uonaag “qr fre -IoJoLU au} Ose se ‘KLıeinaar pasn st yy MU G'S -[OF., lbs Surpery, *& SuoM yeotydesBouphy ayy 107 uonpsg “er 1) JO u}Sue] e sey pue suoneönssAur ay} IO; Yrnq ‘PUE[OST2 R ary usaq sey „UOPISSOg,, NOUISSUDDIERLEN SMUT je uore}s JEOTSOJorg, ur ‘seas UEUIID ay) JO uoreänsaaur sm au} 70 Ye 5 ? 320q-10J0N, IO} uOISSHUWOI uerssnag “AOM ay} JO > RAR = ral . 5 Ar: ee ZA each sent in a Report on the present condition of the Baltic fisheries. These have been published together as Nr. 13 À of the “Publications de circonstance”. (See the list of these publications, p. 5.) In order to carry out the scientific and practical investigations in the regions! to be explored by the different countries, national committees were formed by most of the participating states. The appended list gives a review of the organisation and personalia of these national committees. See List I, p. 8 and 9. Means for With regard to the means for carrying out the national investigations, the Fe aaa first to be mentioned are the laboratories and steamers, fitted up for the scientific investigations Work, which are at the disposal of the various countries. As regards the labora- tories, some of which were specially instituted for the present investigations (e. g. the Swedish station of Borns), others of which had already for many years been successfully engaged in marine investigations (e. g. the laboratories of the Kiel Commission, the Danish Biological Station etc.), reference may be made to the papers and annual reports etc. published in the countries concerned. Several of these are not exclusively restricted to the carrying out of the investigations, but are also open and available for the studies of home and foreign scientists, as for the wider treatment of problems concerning marine biology; of such institutes, the Heligoland Biological Station, the Zoological Station at Helder and the Marine Laboratory at Plymouth, may be named. In this connection, the course of study founded at Bergen on the initiative of Dr. Jou. Hjorr has to be mentioned here. For some years, a course of study extending over several months, on the theory and practice of marine investigations, has been conducted in the laboratories of the Royal Norwegian Fiskeridirektion and in scientific institutes of the town of Bergen by various specialists of the Fiskeridirektion. The majority of the steamers have been specially built for this purpose, some have been chartered for longer or shorter periods, others are inspection-steamers etc. belonging to the Navy or other departments. The seasonal cruises, the prac- tical fisheries investigations and the other biological and hydrographical investiga- tions are carried out by means of these steamers. The material obtained during the seasonal and other cruises of investigation, is worked up scientifically by the analysts, the physicists, chemists and biological specialists, according to the program framed by the Conferences at Stockholm and Christiania. See List IJ, p. ro and 11. Methods With regard to the hydrographical portion of the work, the general method followed in the international investigations is to take soundings and water- and plankton-samples from various depths, simultaneously at fixed stations at sea and at different periods of the year. The seasonal cruises are made in the beginning . of the months of February, May, August and November. The same stations are visited during each of these seasonal cruises, so far as unfavourable weather- conditions do not prevent it. These stations form an outstretched observation-net t Proposals for the hydrographical subdivision of the regions to be investigated were made at the Stockholm Conference, and for the biological and fisheries subdivision at the Christiania Conference, TER over the regions investigated, as is shown in the accompanying Chart (Plate I). The red points on it indicate the stations which were visited on the seasonal cruise during August 1003. The aim of this method is to determine the changes occurring during the course of the year in the hydrographical conditions and in the distribution of the plankton, and also to some extent in the distribution of the (so-called pelagic) fish-eggs, larvee and young fish floating in the sea. List III gives a review over the seasonal cruises carried out by the various countries. The seasonal cruises are naturally not suited to the study of the problems ._ connected with the influence of the deep-sea fishery on the stock of fish and the migrations of the fishes, nor those concerned with the biological investigation of the sea in general. In these cases, the scientific investigations must employ the methods of the practical fisheries and study their results, partly by control-experiments on the fishing-grounds and investigations in the laboratories, partly by critical treatment of the statistical data collected in the various countries. Of great importance in this connection, are the measuring and setting out of marked fish, especially flat-fish, in the North Sea, the Skager Rak, Kattegat and Baltic. This method is used systematically on a large scale in the international investigations. List III: Seasonal Gries Aug. 1902- May 1903 | Aug. 1963--May 190% Regions investigated and uber of the stations on the seasonal cruise August 1903 tn Aue) Nov. Bebr,, May f Eastern entrance to the English Channel, \ Southern part of the North Sea: ro stations. Denmark... | Aug. Nov. Febr., May | Aug., Nov. Febr., May f Danish’ waters: 27 stations. \North Atlantic Ocean: 20 stations. England.... | Febr., May Aug., Nov., Febr., May | English Channel: 18 stations. (Eu of Bothnia: 31 stations. Finland .... | Aug. Nov. Febr., May | Aug. Nov., Febr., May ||, Gulf of Finland: 27 stations. Baltic: 15 stations. Germany... | Aug. Nov. Febr., May | Aug. Nov. Febr., May f Aal Seat = stains: \ Baltic: 12 stations. Holland.... | Aug. Nov. Febr., May | Aug., Nov. Febr., May | North Sea: 9 stations. Norway.... | Aug, Febr., May Aug., Nov., May Norwegian Sea: 12 stations, Russia ..... Aug., Nov., May Aug., Nov., Febr., May | Arctic Sea: 26 stations. ‘Scotland ... | Aug., Nov., May Aug., Nov., Febr., May | North Sea, northern part. Norwegian Sea: 29 stations. Sweden .... | Aug., Nov., Febr., May | Aug., Nov., Febr., May aes en ten Baltic: 5 stations. Total... 30 cruises 39 cruises 271 stations on the seasonal cruise of August 1903 The practical fisheries experiments and investigations are carried on during every season of the year, in cruises which last several days or weeks, even some months, by the specially built or chartered steamers. List IV, p. 14, 15 and 16, * 3 I 1 + H | E9g‘r2 -* “12303 las ee ds betes "10 = | ES 00e 5.06.080 “+ ysy oO Lzg‘ gr a sein a eee | mn seu punou . :painsvaut ysty 0 CRE . EN = Fr Ysy 190 Loli :: *je30 = :p UST ae? usy punoy Sr EE RUE €1ri 1210} NER sy WELT = Re ST Jaq] Sarr eae EU ee er as es $ sree" (6220677212 Bajos) S2]0 Sb FAO + Se Ti < a Se III 7200202 (9722607722 ©2705‘) S2]0S ger 008827972 77) SAL STEHT ‘no Jas ysy pay 'q BIETE (05522072 74) 21d :9no yas ysy parle -q ‘skep zı Jo uonipadxs 1 :jauuvyD ysysuq SND TES. WEEE WEEN I edviedy au) U0 an “Buoys 's£ep ZI JO Wortpadxa 1 : Jauueyg) YsTsuy säep ZI Jo suonipadxa € :¥ag YIoN ulm uoTpadxe 1 ‘ose ‘aSe1eay at] uo d chien SE HO) suonipadxp Le skup OI jo suoripedxa £1 : vag UNION Sp OF JO SWORE Ge Bus se t ‘ :suotyipadxg "® SISO easel SU 0 ‘ . sappads snoriea es an ie ‘satoads snoriea JO 00061 "eo (sum äma snssopsoddupy ‘snisfapSan pue CPE TRS CE ne ee > DIYAAOUL snpoy ‘vssayojg 52793401 fe ee Zs del 5 foe 2 -2377) 000€ “ed :7no jes Ysy payer, “q x a a N q "YJOE 13q0]20 0} puzz wal u q = N à P de ‘SOSINIO [BUOSEES 9U} 07 Pa] HIOM SET GG Jaquie}des wos pue ‘y}9z your — pPuz ROGUE NCIS CN UE URE JR OÙ UE Kteniqe yy to.y ‘eas YON ay} UT Sastnio z Ateniqa A wolf es YON ou} ee g ‘yjor saquiaydas 0) 39 HV woy yyrı quads 0) 182 IA ‘puejoo] pure saoieq oy} 0} esımıo I PUEISOT pue saoieq ayy OF asmm 1 £ :suorpedxg 'e :suompadxeng iv ‘stayjo pue sored gihı‘bz oe Sera detec "9 :painseatu SIT ‘à pi Le aa sen ap (æpnosuoinerq yset oy} ‘skeı gyı) zStz DH 3 ne le DEN 4 :7no 795 Ysy PAIE “q ROMA N q . a . Sif) Woy, WHICH GEE Gen cies | Cease Seen Glee ou vun as uvIs[ag eu) ur Sng-tueags ay} UM skep 1Z AUT SS BUN SO On aa RATE Wnts [og LO[24 94} UT on} y Een ay} ur Im-wesjs ou} JM shep 6 : ‘yseoo oY} Woy UO 1ayjIN} suorjesissaur !ske (0) ae a p Sue se ua he BI LIE SHOES ONE Sonn 30 NED ; Fe “suontpadxay u | «SPAUV.P IA; 2} UJFA sasınıo © SSUOHTPSAXH :suorpadxg “ev . ) (9503 o (13qus3des 0) dn) ; eee (jsn8ny wou) Kos Yo6r zo6r suonesysaAuf SOHOUSI] pue SUOHIPAdXA : A] Isl] — Le) — ‘(skep cr Jayjasoye) aazıopınz auf ur „Mnsaulss7,, Jotuwsjs UM (doquiay -dos ‘Aquf Ken ‘yauep) sastnıo 7 ‘os(y ‘sjaU YJIM syuauitiedxe ‘ ysy JO Surspaeun ‘æAI] pue sose-Ysy orsejed ay} JO vor ‘(svp £) ,MnoaWs97,, Jalueals UM 99Z1pIN7 ut uornıpedxa ‘ospy ‘Ysy JO Zumpew ‘aly, pue ssso-ysy orsejad ay} JO uorngr.ysIp ay} LO SUOT}ES -TsaAur $syuattiadxe sartaysy :asoding "SUOTJESTISIAUT SSLIAUS Our = (— 5) ‘son ‘o1—"9 — :9 | -uaros !uonejuario Areurwuroid : asoding UETIC ee ur Bo) lt ed ra REP 1) “AON bear et PHENOIET (= or) Get Cm 6 = Æ Gr Ne ee a :suonipodx ‘E (=~ 8 ) yorep we AUCUN LT ee 5 En Te as = (skep $ ) ‘aqaq “I—uv[ "ge ‘dxo 1 R ichs er a : ;suonpadka 25 ‘(skep 9 ) yore "8— xa ‘I Se ee | :suortpadxa w| 120th 1830} AE? SS are} EEE te tar Nes pige 8798 SION L£gSz usy 1340 LES = (52211/27520 ‘9)) yooppey fee ace + (onasopiov 9) yooppey ates AP Om cae ono (98822078. 77) ered DEEE : (ps52074 7a) 2314 ‘2pEW 219M Ysy JO s}Uatuainsvaut 00002 :paumsvatt usıy 0 PSE +painsvatl YstT “9 | tobr saquiaydag 07 dp ‘sjassaa-Sutysy 194j0 gar nn (05527078 74) SIT Een (oss3/71 7a) 2314 pur srautvays-Burysy *, Woprasod,, ‘,,EHESIOH,, :7no jas Ysy poyaey ‘Q no yes YS Pepe 4 | ay yprm ulesaA-Talayosyoasg Jayosjnaq ay} ‘sored is sored Aq pajoastp sasın.o snoJowmu ay} Suture. SunoX au) jo uoynqrysip ayy Jo syrur Sunok oy} JO uonngenstp 24} JO SILLur -U09 aiay U9AIS aq EU ajou JIOYS W U11SES ayy JO uomeurwlejsp :esoding usjsea au) JO Loneulunejap :esoding $o61—z061 :aJoN -(oweig pur j.le.les (Ep #1) es € st 0} PIN) des 8 — ‘€ 0} POI) es Bee. == 9285 ‘18101 er een eu PET ‘soge]) Ainf 91 — © N axon) cibe (snzxfopSn D) NooppeH Aueuries) ; "(opunurune Ay ae ae ers rents COT Sane aaa * (28821072 JJ) >>reld 0} jpry) ounf re —yı ‘dxe “1 sone (SRE ES ak ipaimseaut ysty ‘9 2 ‘ysy Sunok ee S859 ou} JO UOmeänseAuf gig onen: (05527278 IT) arte pue ware, ‘sss9 ou} Jo uorpearsaAur a pn :3no Jas US Pa -q fsjuswtiedxe sariaysy ayryusros : esoding er SE ae 5 'sJuswrLiadxa satieysy Syryuaros :asodimng ‘(sÄep D en an = Si + *(skep , oz) nf g—ı — + (skep £) 4 nr i £) ‘sony late — 7 ER 61) Kinf es — € ‘(s£vp ei) eut gi = l (skep zı) 390 “bz— fr dxa ‘1 :v2S YON ‘(sep eng ear = :suonipadxy 'e 91) yours, *Se—"or % ) an “(ekep ‘a ‘(skep 6) ‘uv :L1—16 -dxo 21 2238 UNION : : or) yore "71—'5 Axa “1 :¥ag UNION :suonipedxg ‘eB ere ‘Oya Jets a sure Zurwea.gs sno.loumu ‘Os|y ‘oye qeads ‘Bury Sur an -wva.js ‘siapunoy Zuno< sno.tatunu ‘ospy fee Se mono | 26 ma Sgt I (S24D.07702 DIU. UF) [84 ME ENT TR ue ni A Re (panuuo9) FE RE (Sean = = en ne i) PUETUT Sper °°°: © (pmyanoıun SHPDT) POI ee : 5 "painsestu UST vL 18907 (1777777 Fe a) vag ER, bo cc. (or CDS) 1n01} vag ons CUS), uoues Are 1810) sees sy Jey HO gofz "8907 : (2952074 7) 21d (28522078 ‘ZI ) 21d Eger ° 890) :pa.insesw Ysty ‘2 _ipaimseat ystq “9 | 25 ---- DE = us punoy (Soyhe Hasen "(25527074 VER) a9reld 26+ a ccc (vs 527077 ar) aoe ZoL ss cr. usy jet 130 :Jn0 Jes Ysy Paie “4 go jes Ysy poste “q | 669 7 (wssappyd ‘ref PIG UspaMs ‘'aueeyS pue PUEI[EF] JO 35800 ‘soul, pue :painseaw ysty ‘9 ay} uo US yey SUNO jo SOUIIINOSO SIPU-JJEIP UM SJUoLINIEdXa sariaysty GRQn seer cease (25521077 74) 29g ayy UO suoryestjssaup snany—-eun| “Zz ‘skep SE ‘“Iaqtisoaq—JequiaAoN "2 :no yas sy Poste ‘q JAR OY} WIM sjusutedxs *S]QU-JL.Ip pue [Men SU} UT 2 SAHOUSEA ‘skep SE ysnsny—Ajnf{ “1 sjusuitiadxy ‘shep SE sn8ny — {nf +1 :suoT}Ipadxy "e :suormpedxy ‘ev ANAS] ECT APS EME sotoads snoLIeA PAUE anes tii SE STE satoads ShOTIEA - :paimseaut SI ‘9 :peinsvet Ust] ‘2 RUB OLDE PE re ""saraads snoLIeA EEE “ setoads snorteA OSM JUEJSUO9 UT SEM ,19H99SPION),. ‘Jno jas ysy Po °q :7m0 Jas usy parxleyy Q Monet 0 PUEeNOIS ‘sn JUEISUOI UT SEM , aseesp[OH,, ‘SN JueJSUO9 UT SEM DISPO), :suormpadxy °B :suoripedxy 'e Oggi 1: zo61 UT se Ysy SUUES at} RE. 2061 ur se ysy aus ayy, OO a ee: 121}9307je BER tt tere 5 © :poinseour ystq ‘ | UOUWIES pue poo Usels ‘NOoppey ‘pop Poo autos :ano/ges ay PHVA “4 -sjuauitiadxa sarraysy | "painseaut USA “Oo Jsyneulrredxe) semeusy :suoneärsaAur (eorBojorq pue peorydesd eas = ‘sJUSUITIedxe sarlausıy eıssny ‘suorjestysaAur [BOTSO[OIq pue jeorydeis lol GGG Sm m eosin Ge “suorjeärjssAaur jeorgojorgq pue jeorydeis x -o1pAY :vag SJU218 al ur sastn1o 61 Es eae "suonmeodxr e || O!PAU :¥aS sjuoreg at ur sasinio gt :suorjipedxy à ESL OH TPE Gre | ‘suoryipedxy te "SUOTJEOTISIA "SUOTJEOTISIA "SUOTJEINSIA -UI [edTBojorg pur jeorydeiso1pAy :¥ag -UT [es190jo7g pue jvotydetso1pAy :vas -ur jeorsojorg pur jeorydeisorpAy : vas UNION 24} Jo zed useyjiou ayy ur pue YON ou} JO ed utoyjsou ay} ur pue UNION ou} Jo qed uieu}Iou ay} ur pue LEMION LENS ULTSaM.ION, oY} UT SISTNIIN Ppepus}xo BOS ULTSOM.ION, 9} UL SOSTNID pepus}xo LENS UPIS2 MION au} UT SASINID papue}xo :suonipadxg '® :suonipsadxg “ev :suormmpedxgy ‘e 3 81867 TON QE RE | eran OR as: EME Geo ysy punoy grsz re ADR TE EN ysy punoy “Use WT (ois Gas Eee Bu RT ysy FEI :peinseatu sry ‘2 || 002% 18307 :painseau ystq ‘9 || 825 1810} DEP. NRA ESS E US punoy (eme )) Lac 1830} OT " (S2227 pue sau SLR LE See ysy We PUETIOR : CESR (2405712 D270S\) sa10S -2XDUL SUQULOY 7) |\IIq pue JOqINT, oa UGE © orme tacks sa as (0sS21072 77) >Dreld - On (szenöpne vaj0S‘) 8210S :mo yas ysy paie q | 65% << ++ oe: (25522074 77) >>2reld :no Jas sy paie 'q | Jaquie}dag 0} dn) | snsn i QE ne RE £o6r G Vase) Aryuno ZOOL (panuyuoo) SUONESHSIAUL SOHOUSI pue SUOHIPIdXA : A] SIT — 17 — vives a review over the cruises, made by these vessels up to September 1904, où _ which the fisheries experiments: the measuring, marking and setting out of fish ete. were made. The same cruises were often utilised for investigations on the occurrence and distribution of the fish-eggs and larvæ, the rate of growth and geographical distribution of fishes, their conditions of food and reproduction. Re- ports on certain results of these investigations have already been given in numerous publications, which have appeared in the various countries. A list of these is given in Appendix F of the Report of Administration for 1903—04. For the most part, however, these investigations have not yet been completed; the results of some of them have been sent in to the Bureau, and are published here as appen- dixes of this General Report. (See Appendixes D, E, F, G and H.) A brief report on the present state of the investigations is given in the introduction to Appendix A as also in that to the Appendixes D—K. These introductions are uot so much intended to show, just at present, the results attained by the international investigations, but rather to explain the plan and purpose of the investigations, partly also, the methods followed in working out the various problems. The Appendixes which are published in the name and for the responsibility of the authors, may be considered as so many “Capita selecta” concerning various problems in details, chosen from the field of the general investigations. No one will be surprised, that these treatises are not quite evenly representative of every field of the study of the sea; in this first report on the general work, indeed, only those papers on the investigations could be included, which were known to contain definite even though preliminary conclusions. ! Copenhagen, October 1904 HERWIG PETTERSSON Hoek 1 The General Review has been translated from the German by Dr. H. M. KYLE. General-Report: 1902 — 1904 5 PL I of the Hydrographical Stations RANCE | August 1903 a a Mmmerien ermine | Axel & Aamodt? ith Etabl Kbhvn APPENDIXES Remark: The appendixes are published in the name and on the respon- sibility of the different authors. APPENDIX A ON THE PROBABLE OCCURRENCE IN THE ATLANTIC CURRENT OF VARITIONS PERIODICAL, AND OTHERWISE, AND THEIR BEARING ON METEOROLOGICAL AND BIOLOGICAL PHENOMENA, WITH AN INTRODUCTION BY OTTO PETTERSSON WITH 7 AND 16 FIGURES IN THE TEXT Li and their bearing on meteorological and biological phenomena. % th; 2 1 D A ; teal oe ar UI i an INDRODWET ORY: To gain a general view of the circulation of the waters, and the distribution of the plant and animal forms of life, in the north eastern part of the Atlantic Ocean, we must first of all consider the bathymetric features and the topography of the bottom of the sea. j There is a deep region, the Norwegian Sea and the Polar Basin, surrounded by coastal banks, which extend in the north-east to the submarine plateau of the Barents Sea, and form to the east, the Norwegian coastal bank “Havbroen”, and in the south, the still shallower North Sea plateau. The North Sea plateau is furrowed by a deeper channel, the so-called “Norwegian Channel”, which permits of the communication of the deeper water-layers of the Norwegian Sea with the Baltic through the Skager Rak and Kattegat (Fig. 1, p. III). The eastern coastal banks of the Norwegian Sea extend from the entrance of the Polar Basin, N. W. from Spitzbergen, along the Norwegian coast and north from the North Sea and Shetland Isles, as a submarine ridge (Wyville Thomson Ridge) as far as the Færoes, and from these islands to Iceland (Fzroe-Iceland banks). The large Icelandic submarine plateau is connected with the Greenland coastal plateau by an elevation of the sea-bed in Denmark Strait. These barriers cut off the deeper regions of the Norwegian Sea from those of the Atlantic Ocean, at a depth of about 400—500 m. The area of the deeper region3 of the Norwegian Sea, south GE SOrIN LS AD OEL CM Ne CRUEL TS 2,000,000 1) kilometer The area of the shallower coastal region’, is about........ 2,600,000 4 — the Barents Sea and White Sea with about 1,500,000 DO — Rate the Norwegian coastal banks, “Havbroen” 180,000 D _ Consisting of | the North Sea with the Belts............ 600000 D — CHERBAIC aly 3 dnc 6 AUG RE CIE iG Ree OR rc 360,000 D = 1 The Introduction has been translated from the German by H. M. Kyte. 2 Reference may be made to the bathymetric chart (Fig. 1) and to the recently published paper by O. Kriimmel: Die deutschen Meere im Rahmen der internationalen Meeresforschung. August 1904. 3 The topography of this region of the shallower banks, which borders the deeper region of the Norwegian Sea, has been described in detail in the recent work of the Director of the Central Laboratory: “The bathymetrical features of the North Polar Seas with a discussion of the continental shelves and previous oscillations of the shore-line’. The North Polar Expedition 1893—1896, edited by F. Nansen. Vol. IV. Christiania, 1904. Bathymetric chart Topography Area The Atlantic Stream Branches of the Atlantic Stream PETTERSSON —INTRODUCTORY aT Tp aes In addition to these, there are the deeper regions of the Polar Basin and the Siberian and North American coastal banks, concerning which we have as yet no exact data, also, the Greenland coastal banks, the area of which can be estimated at about 700,000 E km. If we omit the whale and seal fisheries, the entire fishery is carried on only over the shallower coastal banks and plateaus which border the deep region of the Norwegian Sea. We should commit an error, however, if we left out of consideration, in studying the biological conditions of the food-fishes, the deep region of the sea of 2,000,000 km, where no fishing is carried on, and limited our investigations to the 2,600,000 © km of the rich fishing banks and shallower plateaus. Attempts have already been made in earlier years to gain a fundamental insight into the problems, which have now been taken in hand by the international work, partly by means of a general statistic of the fish caught by the various countries in the North Sea, partly by means of the biological and statistical investigation of a certain specially rich fish-area!, which might serve as an index of-the productivity, as regards fish, of a tolerably large region of the sea. The reasons, why little progress has been made along these lines, become evident when we consider the results of the hydrographical and biological investiga- tions of recent years. The hydrographical investigations lead us to believe, that a close relation exists between the occurrence of certain food-fishes in our seas and the distribution, on the surface and in the depths, of the so-called Atlantic water (or more strictly, of the oceanic water of over 35°/.. salinity, coming from the more southerly regions of the ocean over the submarine banks between Scotland and Iceland). This is the well-known warm current of the North Atlantic Ocean, which was formerly believed to be an offshoot of the Gulf Stream. The international investigations have shown, that in recent years the Atlantic water has entered the Norwegian Sea almost exclusively between the Færoes and Scotland over the Wyville Thomson ridge. Another branch, which presses towards the north between Iceland and the Feeroes, passes ordinarily not at all or but a little distance beyond the crest of the submarine bank between these islands2. The Atlantic water has a higher salinity (35:00°/o to 35'60°).) than the remaining water of the Norwegian Sea with a salinity of somewhat under 35 %oo, but is specifically lighter than the latter owing to its higher temperature, and thus streams into the Norwegian Sea as a surface-current. Owing to the influence of the Earth’s rotation, it is then bent to the east and sends a branch round the Orkneys and Shetlands over the northern North Sea plateau into the depths of the Norwegian Channel as far as to the Skager Rak. The trawl-fishery is carried on in this water of Atlantic. origin over the whoie northern North Sea plateau (deeper than 80m) as far as the Dogger Bank, and over the western and southern slope of the Norwegian Channel (Great Fisher Bank, Jutland Bank etc). The ı As for example, the Moray Firth, the Lofoten banks etc. 2 A similar hydrographical situation was also detected in these regions by the Danish Ingolf Expedition in the summer months of 1896 and 1897. See: Den danske Ingolfexpedition. TI. Hydrografie af M. Knudsen. Pl. I. Kobenhavn, 1890. ap re PETTERSSON—INTRODUCTORY Bathymetric chart Fig. 1 main branch of the Atlantic Stream in the Norwegian Sea, takes, however, a northerly direction along the Norwegian coastal bank, its water-masses being distributed on the surface over the great depths of this sea and sending thence various branches, both to the N. W., N. and N. E. These portions of the warm Atlantic Stream only remain so long on the surface, however, until the density of the water has on cooling become greater than that of the surrounding water. The Atlantic water is then covered by water of a different origin and forms intermediate AC yes PETTERSSON—INTRODUCTORY 2 PS = aan ES = =Z SS August 4896 ? Surface chart eee Coastal and bank water Arctic water tlantic water northwards along the coastals banks of Bear ° RAMS 3 ; n IER RAT Island and Spitzbergen and south of Bear Island 3. RRS NC . . N Itisa general character of all these oceanic under- N N REN : . dokm. Ne currents — which can be explained on hydrodyna- “ ° netland Bergen mical grounds — that they always flow over the 4 ar ig. 4 deepest depressions and channels of the sea-bottom. tC Ryder och K. Rordam, Hydrografiska undersögelser utförda pa den östgrönlandske expedi- tion. 1891 och 1892. 2 F. Nansen, The Norwegian North Polar Expedition 1893—96. Scientific Results. 3 L. Breitfuss, Petermann. Mittheilungen. 1904. Heft II. Vol. III. Atlantic Water Arctic water Continental coast-water PETTERSSON—INTRODUCTORY eV The distribution of the Atlantic water, according to the depth, is shown by the two hydrographical sections on page V, of which Fig. 3 represents a’ section across the Norwegian Sea between Lofoten and Jan Mayen! and Fig. 4 a section across the North Sea? along the 60% degree of Latitude for January 1903. The Atlantie water is denoted by shading. From the chart as from the sections, we see that water-layers of different origin, designated by strokes and points, also occur in addition to the Atlantic water. Thus, on the left (western) side of the Atlantic water-area in the chart, and on the left side and underneath in the section Fig. 3 (Norwegian Sea) there is Arctic water (shown by strokes); and on the right (eastern) side of the Atlantic area on the chart and Fig. 4 (North Sea section) as far, for example, as the coast of the Scandinavian Peninsula, there is so-called coast- or bank-water (shown by points). The sections Fig. 3 and Fig. 4, which are on thé same scale of lengths and depths, give a representation of the distribution of the Atlantic water in the deep Norwegian Sea and in the relatively shallow North Sea. The quantity of that water is greater indeed in the Norwegian Sea than in the North Sea, but in the former sea it seems to play but a secondary role in comparison with the surrounding water-masses. The principal mass of water in this region consists, namely, of cold water of Arctic origin, which forms both the surface layer between Greenland and the Atlantic area, and the deeper layers, 2—5000m deep, of the Norwegian Sea. In the Norwegian Sea, therefore, we find Arctic water both on the surface and in the depths. Both arise, in part, from the Polar Stream: partly, from the ice- bearing Greenland Polar Stream and the East Icelandic Polar Stream ordinarily ice-free, and partly from the Icelandic coastal stream which forms a branch of the latter; in part, from a mixture of the waters of the Polar Stream and Atlantic Stream. Opinions still differ regarding the origin of the Arctic bottom-water °. The peculiar characteristic of this water, which fills the large troughs of the deep region of the Norwegian Sea from the bottom to the level of the submarine ridge between Scotland and Iceland, about 400—600 m below the surface, is its low tem- perature, which goes down to — 1.3° C. and is the lowest to be found in the deep regions of any of the oceans on the Earth‘. On the eastern side of the Atlantic Stream and in the Barents Sea, in the Norwegian Channel and in the Skager Rak, we find a mixed water which is formed of Atlantic water and coastal water from the fjords of the mainland and the so-called Baltic Stream coming from the Skager Rak. Arctic plankton-forms are sometimes found in this eastern boundary-water of the Norwegian Sea and North Sea, especially in spring. This has led to the sup- ı Constructed from F. Nansen’s preliminary account of the first cruise of the Real Sars” in Lens: 1900. 2 According to the German investigations during the fishery cruise in January 1903 with the steamer “Poseidon”. Mitteil. d. deutschen Seefischerei-Vereins. October 1903. 3 See F. Nansen, “The Oceanography of the North Polar Basin’; Norwegian Polar Expedition, Nr. 9, p. 146; and O. Pettersson, “On the Influence of the Ice-melting upon Oceanic Circulation”; The Geographical Journal. September 1904. XXIV. Nr. 3, p. 319. 4 With a single exception, namely, in Bransfield Sound in the Antarctic regions, where O, Nordenskiöld has recently found a temperature of — 16°C. at a considerable depth, — VII — PETTERSSON—INTRODUCTORY position, that a communication can be established between the Arctic water on the west side and the Norwegian coastal water on the east side of the Atlantic Stream, in such a way that, either the Arctic surface water flows locally at times over the warm Atlantic area in the colder periods of the year, or the Arctic water, as drift-water, presses towards the east underneath the layers of Atlantic water through certain deep channels in the coastal bank e. g. through the Norwegian Channel. This question is not yet decided. Only so much may at present be said with certainty, that the animal and plant life of the plankton and of the bottom, in the eastern boundary-water of the Norwegian Sea and North Sea and in the fjords where stich water enters, contains a not inconsiderable number of Arctic and boreal forms. This means, that the Atlantic Stream does not form ie an absolute barrier between the western and eastern boun- dary-waters of the Norwegian Sea. Noevidence has as yet 4%, been found by the internatio- fathoms! Meter. nal investigations in favour of the hypothesis, that these organisms are to be regarded Dire as relicts of the glacial period VE + etc. in the Scandinavian seas. Orford Ness B8 B7 B6 BS B TES i iLNov. _ILNov TIFzESITEn 2653507 Re 105: It may in general be Fig. 5 said, that the Atlantic Stream constitutes a boundary — though not an absolute one — between the Arctic water of the Norwegian Sea and the coastal waters of its boundary regions. The Norwegian Sea with the Barents Sea comes within the influence of the Atlantic water flowing in between the Færoes and Scotland. Of the true North Sea: the Norwegian Channel, the Skager Rak and the deep northern plateau as far as the Dogger Bank are directly affected by this influence. The southern shallower North Sea plateau is hydrographically divided from the northern by the Dogger Bank, and receives its contribution of Atlantic water chiefly through the English Channel. The water which enters the North Sea through the deep gut of the Channel, comes from a southern branch of the Atlantic Stream and has a some- what greater salinity and higher temperature than that which enters the northern North Sea round Scotland. Sometimes, the presence of water of lower salinity is detected even at the western end of the Channel, arising probably from coastal water coming from the Irish Channel". At the eastern mouth of the Channel, the Atlantic water remains unmixed only over the depressions between the English and Dutch coasts. On the shallow t Donald J. Mathews: Paper read at the meeting of the Hydrographical Assistants, July 1903. * 5* Northern North Sea plateau Scuthern North Seu plateau PETTERSSON—INTRODUCTORY SAU 2 plateau between the Dogger Bank and Holland, the Atlantic Channel Stream quickly loses its identity, as a mixed water is formed from the Atlantic water and the river water flowing from the mouths of the Rhine, Scheldt, Weser and Elbe. This can be seen from a comparison of the following hydrographical sections. (Fig. 5 and 6)". The German Bight and the south-eastern part of the North Sea between Jutland and the Dogger Bank contain this water chiefly. It is only in the deep guts and channels of the sea-bottom between the English coast and the western slope of the Dogger Bank, that a communication takes place at times between the Atlantic water on the northern North Sea plateau and the water entering through the English Channel. Although the separate character and movement u © N I 3 H+ H3 H2 H1 ty On cia LEFT 7 7325 T3469 Tip Meter. 16°5 434, aes PA 136% le) Fathoms!! Meter. 93-E3456 3 MOT SRE 98 N € = (0) “er sives Fig. 6 of this water is difficult to determine, owing to the strong tidal currents in the Channel, yet systematic temperature-observations have succeeded in showing, that a true “Channel Stream” exists in the south-western part of the North Sea, the velocity of which in October—November 1903 was estimated at 6cm per second or 5km per day on the average. As the investigation of the movements of the water in the southern North Sea may be expected to have great practical impor- tance, because the migration of the young fishes and the fry of certain flat-fishes seem to stand in relation thereto, stream observations in these regions, both in- directly and directly (by current-measurers used on light-ships), are proposed. t The sections, which are taken from the Bulletin of the International Study of the Sea for Aug. 1903, Noy. 1903 and Febr. 1904, show that the Atlantic water (of over 35 °/oo salinity) occurs in much greater mass at all periods of the year in the neighbourhood of the eastern entrance to the Channel (Ostend and Orford Ness) than further to the east (Helder-Dogger Bank). 2 See: E. von Everdingen und C, H. Wind, “Oberflächentemperaturmessungen in der Nordsee’ Publications de Circonstance, Nr. 14. Copenhague. 1904. N TOR PETTERSSON—INTRODUCTORY Two different branches of the Atlantic Stream enter the North Sea, one round the Orkneys and Shetlands to the north of Scotland, the other through the Eng- lish Channel. This can be seen from the surface-chart. The Dogger Bank and the Fisher Banks form a kind of water-shed! between the two hydrographical regions. The isobathe of 80m. divides the region of the banks from the northern, that of 4om. from the southern region. The Norwegian Channel with the deep part of the Skager Rak may be considered a fourth hydrographical region. The Skager Rak forms a funnel, through which inflows of water from both regions, especially from the Norwegian Channel, enter the Belts and the Baltic through the Kattegat. These inflows have here the character of under-currents, as speci- fically lighter water from the Sound and the mouth of the Kattegat, forming the so-called Baltic Stream, is flowing on the surface. The hydrographical profiles of the Kattegat, the Belts etc, show the inflowing and outflowing water-layers in the form of two wedges superimposed on one another in opposite directions (Fig. 7). It is only in rare cases, that the water-layers of the under- and upper-currents are moving in opposite directions. Usually, the whole water-mass is moving in the same direction, but in such a manner that, with a heightened hydrostatic pressure from the south (caused, for example, by a change of wind from the Baltic side), the upper layer is moving more rapidly northwards than the RN a lower, and vice versa. On account of this to and fro movement of the water of the under- and upper-currents, the friction of the layers on one Fig. 7 another and on the sea-bottom causes such a mix- ture of waters to arise, that about two-thirds of the oceanic water which enters the Kattegat is carried out again to the ocean with the Baltic Stream. In the channels also, where two hydrographically different water-layers cannot be distinguished, as in the English Channel and the Sound (southern part), we may consider the movement of the currents to be much more intermittent than continuous. The inflow of water from the Channel into the North Sea! reminds one to a certain extent of the outflow of warm water (from the region of the Bay of Biscay) and of cold water (from the Irish Sea) through a narrow opening. The current-changes which appear at times in the Sound, have some similarity to the inflow of Baltic water into Lake Malar’. The general hydrographical situation in the regions to be investigated has thus been described in the briefest manner. t This relation was first discovered by the investigations of the German Gun-boat “Drache” in 1881, 1882—1884. With regard also to the tidal currents, the Bank region, especially the Dogger Bank, forms a boundary between the tidal waves entering by the Channel and the north of Scotland: see ©. Krümmel, 1. c, 2 Cronander, Om ytström och bottenström i Kattegat. Svenska V. A. Handl. Bd. 38, Nr. 2, 1894, P. 25. 3 M. Knudsen, Ein hydrographischer Lehrsatz, Annalen der Hydrographie und maritimen Meteo- rologie. Juli, 1900. 4 Donald J. Matthews: 1. c. 5 H. Witt and G. Lundell, Nägra hydrographiska iakttagelser i Mälaren och Saltsjön under Fe- bruar och Mars, 1895. Branches of the Atlantic Stream in the North Sea English Channel Annual periods + Annual periodio fluctuations in the circulation of the Gulf Stream Correspondence of the fluctuations of the Gulf Stream with other phenomena PETTERSSON— INTRODUCTORY DL es These conditions were already known in the main from earlier investigation, before the beginning of the international investigations, and in not a few cases, even in details. There remains yet to investigate, if these hydrographical conditions are con- stant from year to year and from one season to another. A solution of this question can only be gained by the method chosen by the international investiga- tions, namely, simultaneous observations at the same oceanic stations at different periods of the year and over a Series of years. A period of two years is naturally insufficient to settle this question. If we bring into consideration, however, the results of the preliminary observations made over a period of 10: years before the international investigations began, and also the phenomena accompanying the fluctuations in the circulation of the oceanic waters, which clearly indicate an annual periodicity, the evidence for a flood- period of the Atlantic water during autumn and an ebb-period during spring, gains greatly in weight. A brief account of these things is given in this Appendix. It is shown: that, during the autumn months, there is regularly an inflow of warm water through the deep channels in the most easterly divisions of the North Atlantic water-system, in the Barents Sea as in the Kattegat and Belts, whilst cold currents prevail in the spring that the volume Gi the Atlantic Stream north-east of Shetland, as also the temperature and salinity of its waters, increases from June to September; that the water-level in the Norwegian Sea, the North Sea and the Baltic shows an extraordinarily well-marked annual period, the highest water-level on our coasts occurring in October, the lowest in March. These phenomena are related to the fact, determined previously in 1897 and 18982, that the real circulation of the Gulf Stream in the region of the trade winds, extends only as far as the Azores during spring (March), but in the course of the summer and autumn gradually spreads to the east and north-east. ‘This flow of the warm surface-water of the tropical and subtropical regions continues like a wave through the North Atlantic Ocean, and is felt in the most distant regions of the Atlantic Stream system as a rise in oceanic level and a quickening of the warm under-currents. Investigators will require to pay the greatest attention in the future to the study of the periodic and unperiodic fluctuations in the hydrographical conditions, as it has been shown, that a large group of phenomena undergo corresponding variations. The most important of these are: meteorological phenomena (pressure and temperature of the atmosphere), plankton-biological phenomena (occurrence of various plankton-species), migrations of fishes. t Or rather, in October and December with a secondary minimum in November. See diagrams in the Appendix. 2 See Appendix. — For studying the problem of the variation or non-variation in the annual water- and heat-convection of the Atlantic current, the boundaries of its eastern ramifications, such as the Barents Sea, Skager Rak and Kattegat, should be chosen. Hydrographically, these seas are among the best known. The projections of the Atlantic current entering there disappear at intervals, being then replaced by water of different origin. This too is a point in our favour, as it facilitates this kind of research. Sections across the middle part of the current, somewhere be- tween theShetlands and Faeroes, should be resorted to only asa secondary means of evidence. As long as this evidence can- not be founded on rational dynamic principles, or on exact current measurements, an est- imate of a current’s intensity from the diameter of the water- layer is to be erroneous. In one unit of time the smaller and more rapid current may carry a greater mass of water through a given section than a greater current of less veloc- ity. Far more reliable results can be expected from an in- vestigation of the origin of the current itself (in this case a | PS ——— 4203268 LEE SG | Fig. 1. Current chart of the Barents Sea [after Knipowitsch a. Breitfuss] Atlantic current branches EZ=Z=Z — = _ as undercurrents ==} Cold arctic current the Gulfstream-circulation proper of the Trades), that is, if the pulsations of this area are found to be in concordance with the variations of its remotest current-branches. The courses of the Atlantic current branches in the Barents Sea represented in the Barents Sea current chart on this page, are determined by the troughs and deep channels of the sea bottom. 1* Barents Sea Heatwave in the Barents Sea APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON — 4 — Regarding this great body of Atlantic water, which enters the Barents Sea, or the so: called North Cape current, I quote the following passage from Dr. L. Breitfuss?: “The geographical position of the North Cape current and its ramifications is constant, quite as constant, as is that of our rivers. Seasonal changes occur, but only in the in- tensity of the current, in the range of its temperature and in the degree of concentration of the salt held in solution by its water’. Of what nature are these changes? The answer is contained in the following tables, giving the salinity and temperature of dif- ferent waterlayers found at varying depths in the most southerly of the current ramific- ations during June and November: Lat. N. 70°30’ June Noyember Depth in M. Temperature Salinity Temperature Salinity 0 BR AD ONE ECS + 3°62 34°70 Voo 50 2°°89 34°65 3°°65 34°83 100 2°°45 34°76 3°°65 3483 150 2°°59 34°78 3°85 34:96 200 2°00 3479 32774 34°96 Bottom 2°10 34:83 | BOF 35:07 “The rise of temperature, amounting for the upper layer to about 0°80, for the lower to about 1°°5, cannot possibly be attributed solely to the summer heat transmitted perpendicularly from the surface. Quite as impossible is it to attribute the increase in salinity towards winter, amounting to 0‘10—0:24 °/o9, to the continental affluvies, which doubtlessly have a stronger diluting effect upon the sea in June than in the autumn.” “We are here confronted by a more powerful agent than either the heating of the sea surface during summer in these latitudes or the dilution of the surface water by continental freshwater’. / “In my opinion, this agent is the Atlantic current itself, whose dynamic intensity in these parts of the ocean attains its maximum during November or later.” So far Dr. Breitfuss?. The Russian investigators have thus detected the occurrence of an annual expansion of the Atlantic current in the autumn. The accumulation of warm water during this season, which chiefly affects the deeper waterlayers, is represented in the following diagram of temperatures?, which comprises a period of 3 years. The hydrographic variation, which it represents, can thus be regarded as the outcome of authentic observations of existing facts, not as the representation of an instantaneous hydrographic situation. The Barents Sea is thus annually invaded by a heatwave, that raises the temperature of the bottom layer from 1° in June (the cold season of the water) to 5° or more in November (the summer of the water), culminating during the latter part of the autumn. This heatwave does not penetrate the waterlayers perpendicularly from the surface. It is an outside impulse from the West, originating in an accumulation of Atlantic water. This t Ozeanographische Studien über das Barentz Meer. Peterm. Mitt. 1904. II. p. 46. 2 N. Knipowitsch, Expedition für wissenschaftlich-praktische Untersuchungen an der Murmanküste. I. p. 520. 1902. \ — $ — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON statement is born out by the synchronous variation of the salinity. The expansion of the North Cape current is accompanied by an abundant immigration of cod and had- dock, of which more will be said later. 1898 1899 1900 NT VIE VIE IX X XA XI 0 OW WV MA VE VOL IX X XI XX I M I I V M Wm kK X XI XI 1 Fig. 2. Variations of the temperature of the water in the deep (250 m. Motowskijfjord), after Knipowitsch The last projection of the North Sea current of Atlantic water enters the deep- channel of the Skager Rak as undercurrent. Observations comprising more than ten years, indicate an annual expansion in these parts of the deeper waterlayers, which usually cul- minates in November, but in some years is retarded to February or longer. The accom- panying diagrams, of a section between Skagen and Christiansand (Norway) in August and November 1893 and in February 1894, show the Atlantic water (here undercurrent) shaded in the figures, as in previous sections. From these diagrams it will be seen, that the expansion that year culminated in November, a fact which is borne out by the extension of the waterlayer and the rise of temperature alike, the latter also attaining its maximum during this period. In February 1894, the ebb of the Atlantic water sets in. Beside the February section from 1894, there is another of the corresponding month 1896. This is altogether different: the Atlantic water being then still in flood. Here two different types of years are represented. If 1893—94 be chosen as typical of the conditions of normal years, February 1896 must be considered as representing another different set of years. As in the Barents Sea, the flooding of Atlantic water sends a heatwave towards the mouth of the Kola-fjord, so the accumulation of Atlantic water in the Skager Rak depths sets up a heatwave, which enters the Belts through the Kattegatr. The effect of this under- current of southern Bank-Water entering through the deep channels of the Kattegat is, that the deepwater of the western part of the Baltic and the Belt-Sea attains its maximum of temperature in November. In the Baltic proper, even as far as east of Bornholm, the undercurrent penetrates during most years, replacing the relatively cold water of the previous winter with warmer. The most remarkable circumstance of this phenomenon is, that the invading water does not enter as a bottom current into the deep basin east of Bornholm, but occupies an intermediary space between the bottom layer and the surface layer, thus forming a wedge of warmer water between two cold layers. : « M. Knudsen, Beretning fra Kommissionen for videnskabelig Undersogelse af de danske Farvande. II. 1899. p. 49. Skager Rak Heatwave in the Kattegat | APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON a à 2 x & URLS 2 He cis S È B 3 Site N g Sees SAS & 2 N ess te FE MEN EAU ES MISST ry SET P Ys SE Ki = ose 1X % XXX 000 i X x N XX) N i IM AXX u x} oi KX FX (X i KX 9,91 un = Sooo DSL SES = SE SEES SITES Sn == SEES = SSS OSS POSES OOO SOS SS SEES SEITE II 2) Cty Ty sL91 1 76871031 8FZF 55 SSD M smpemmony 9% SE ORE T, 2 m nn Gi GG m @ 5 0 $ ao I s Se a = S > > > ae À = a = S 5 gQ S a a Ss » > vs 8 Ss $ 8 x Ss S 8 § S S > Ss Ss à Ss I Ss 1 - a — tree = S| = ESS A SES SEI = RSS PR ESS «x voran I TI jee ge 9687148193 Pussuensuy-uegens Or ORE GE 7) se £697 40N OF = 7 — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON Bornholmdeep Noy. 6t 1893. 16°2’ Long. E. 55°23’ Lat. N. Oct. 11th 1901. 15°39’ Long. E. 55°20’ Lat. N. Depth in Meter Temperature Salinity Temperature Salinity 0 85.C 7:66 °Joo 12°°90 C 723 foo 10 855 793 12°°85 = 20 8°55 754 12°°74 723 30 8°65 PSS 12°:60 TDS 40 8°45 7:50 5°28 7:68 45 855 TS 4°98 (min) 8:30 50 3:90 (min) 9:93 8°73 10°23 60 7°-oo(max.) 13:49 10°°90 (max.) 1276 70 5°90 14°64 6°52 14°89 80 4745 15°27 475 15°64 90 2°80 (min.) 16:28 4°65 (min) 15°93 The above tables show this phenomenon, as observed in the autumns 1893 and 1901. The situation is probably that of normal years, although exceptions are on record. During the invasion of this warm undercurrent, the biology of the sea assumes some interesting features. East and west of Bornholm, the trawl brought a quantity of flat fish to the surface, among which spawning plaice 260—263 mm. in dimension and flounders of 270—280 mm! were found. The eggs of these fishes were found floating in depths, where the water was supplied directly by the undercurrent. A number of flatfish in spawning condition were again found by the German fishery-expedition December 1903 in the southern Baltic. On the contrary, all experiments with the trawl in July and August, when the cold bottom water still fills this depression in the bottom of the Baltic, have given a poor return of flat fish, of which the majority were out of spawning con- dition or not yet ripe for it. The biology of the deep layers of the southern Baltic is thus regulated by the hydrographic conditions, especially with regard to the immigration and spawning of flat fish from the Kattegat. The undercurrent must enter the depression by the sound between Scania and Born- holm, its passage south of that island being barred by shoals, such as the “Adler-Grund’” etc. In October 1901 measurements in 50 m. depth in the Sound between Scania and Bornholm showed that the water flowed into the inner Baltic with the extraordinary velocity of 57 cm. a second?. The surfacelayer (0—40 m.) moved in the opposite direc- tion with a velocity of 19—23 cm. a second. In February, the warm waterlayer of the deep basin east of Bornholm is generally replaced by cooler water. In some years, however, as in; 1896, 1898, 1899, the deep layers keep their high temperature longer. t F. Trybom, Iakttagelser om fisk m. m. fran Skagerack och Kattegat i Augusti 1901 och Februari 1902 samt fran Ostersjôn i Oktober 1901. p. 10. Svenska Hydrografisk Biologiska Kommissionens Skrifter. Hafte I. 1903. 2 Hydrographic-biological Researches etc. by P.T. Cleve and O. Pettersson. p. 12. Svensk Hydrogr. Biol. Kommiss. Skrifter. Hafte I. 1903. Undercurrent of the Baltic Velocity of the undercurrent Great Belt Kattegat Heatwave in the Kattegat Northfishes and Southfishes North Sea Banks in Summer and Autumn APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON QU Observations of more than 10 years, 1889—1899, show the mean temperature in the depths of the Great Belt to vary as follows": Mey ce bo 4 4793 € AGE. à 2 10070 C November.. 11°:5 C In the Kattegat, the fluctuation between a warmer undercurrent in the autumn and a cooler in the winter and early spring is very marked. All along the deep channel of the Kattegat lightships are anchored. The most northerly of these is anchored off Skagen, the one farthest south, off Schultz Grund, just at the northen entrance to the Great Belt. On board these vessels hydrographic observations have been made daily since the year 1881. Comparing the mean tempera- tures in 23 m. depth, we find that: The temperature at the entrance to the Kattegat is about 4°:3 C. higher than at the entrance to the Great Belt during July—August—September. During October—November — December the temperature of the Belt-entrance is about 0°°7 C. higher than at Skagen. A heatwave from the Skager Rak thus penetrates into the Baltic during the autumn. i In the spring, the undercurrent carries cold northern Bank-Water through the Kattegat into the Baltic. This annual fluctuation regulates the biology and fisheries of that sea. In proof of this statement, we need only to mention the mackerel-fisheries of spring and summer and the herring-fishery with drift-nets in winter, which begins as soon as the southern Bank-Water sets in. The first hint of the existence of such a fluctuation was given in 1877 by the German investigators Möbius and Heincke. These observers communicated their discovery, that among the migrating fishes, fishes that periodically visit the Kattegat without spawning there, one group (10 species) only appear there during the first part of the year, whereas another group (18 species) appear only during the latter half of the year. Further it became evident, that the former group migrated from the Norwegian Sea, while the latter had their origin from the Atlantic?. This phenomenon was explained in 1890 by the discovery of the annual hydrographic variation of the Kattegat3, In 1899, the connection between the fluctuations of the undercurrent, and the thermal periodicity of the deeper layers was elucidated4. Since then, another phenomenon of this kind has been discovered by the Danish biologist Dr. C.G.Joh. Petersen. Cod above a certain size is scarce in the Kattegat in summer, but abounds there in winter. There are, however, exceptions to this rule, of which later will be spoken. Generally speaking, the relations between hydrography and fish-migrations have been first, and most thoroughly, studied in the Kattegat. A clear conception of the growth of the Atlantic current in autumn can be formed from the accompanying section (Fig. 4 and 5), which from the slope of the North Sea t M. Knudsen. Beretning 1. c. 2 Mobius und Heincke, Die Fische der Ostsee. Berichte der Commission zur Untersuchung der deut- schen Meere, 1877—1881. II. p. 278. 3 O. Pettersson och G. Ekman, Grunddragen af Skageracks och Kattegats hydrografi. Kgl. Sv. Veten- skapsakademiens Handl. Bd. 24. (1891). Nr. 11, p. 147. 4 M. Knudsen, Beretning fra Kommissionen for videnskabelig Undersggelse af de danske Farvande. Il. 1899. p. 49: i i aa — 9 — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON plateau east of Shetland extends northwards over the deep region of the Norwegian Sea. The diagram is constructed from deepsoundings made at the same stations in June and in September 1899 by the*Swedish expedition to Greenland. The shaded area represents a cross-cut section through the core of the current, the salinity of which exceeds 35-25 °/o0. From June to September a powerful expansion of this core had taken place, as is shown by the figure. From the following charts (Fig. 6, p. 10) it appears, that the annual fluctuation of the northern seas in reality is due to periodic variations in the Gulfstream-circulation of the 900} 1000 Fig. 5. Section of the Atlantic current, September 1899 Atlantic. Preliminary to the international exploration an investigation! was carried out tor one entire year (1899) regarding the variations in salinity, temperature, and plankton of the surface-layer of the North Atlantic. The accompanying surface charts give the position of the areas of 36%/00 and 37°/oo salinity. The Gulfstream-circulation proper formes an eddy surrounding a sargasso-sea. In March this eddy touches the Azores. The area between the Azores and the African coast is during this season filled with colder water of less salinity. In November and December the area of Gulfstream-water has expanded in a north-easterly direction towards the coasts of Africa and Southern Europe. The area of tropic (Desmo-) plankton has done likewise. During the first months of the year the Gulfstream-area contracts, regaining its most westerly position in March. Variations in the Gulfstream- circulation As final proof of the ebb and flood of the Atlantic current the following diagrams Annual fuctu- (Fig. 7, p. IT) are given. They are derived from the latest publications of meanvalues of ı Cleve, Ekman et Pettersson, Les variations annuelles de l’eau de surface de l'océan Atlantique. Appendix A ations in the waterlevel APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON NO — the Swedish, Dutch and German water-gauges and represent the annual fluctuation in the waterlevel at the North Sea, the Kattegat and the Baltic coasts. So long as only Swedish and German observations were at hand, this fluctuation was ascribed to the riverine supply of fresh water to the Baltic. In opposition to this conjecture stood, however, the synchronism which the Baltic and Kattegat level fluctua- tions evinced with one exception (the nonappearance of the maximum in February) by the water-gauge at Varberg (Kattegat). If, on the other hand, only Dutch observations had been accessible, the inferences drawn from them would certainly have pointed to the wind as originator of the fluctu- ations. Now, since a comparison of facts has shown the analogy of the fluctuations in AM | N ZAHN, N MAIS SS “ a7 Fig. 6. Gulfstream-circulation in March and November 1899 the North Sea, the Baltic, and the Kattegatr, such inferior explanations are excluded, and we must acknowledge the fluctuations to be the outcome of a general pulsation of the ocean, extending from the tropics to the Polar Sea. The fluctuation of the north- ern seas is analogous with that of the Atlantic. . t A very interesting paper on this subject is H. Geelmuyden’s “Resultater af Vandstandsobservationer paa den norske Kyst”. VI. (Norske Gradmaalings Kommissionen). On page 18 the following quotation is to be found: “The fluctuation (in the waterlevel) displaying its minimum in spring and a corresponding maximum in autumn is very marked at all the Norwegian stations. Towards north, however, the appear- ance of both is delayed.” Prof. G. explains the fluctuation as being the result of atmospheric pressure, winds etc. ‘ It is a wellknown fact, that in Bohuslän on the Skager Rak the water annually attains its highest level in October and its lowest in spring. ee APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON A meteorologic phenomenon, which is obviously connected with the flow of the Influence of the annual Atlantic current in autumn, is the characteristic retardation of the seasons peculiar to period, Retard- one part of Northern Europe. The eastern part of Europe has a continental climate. The coldest month is January, the hottest July. This rule holds also for the coast of the Atlantic proper. Thus in Scotland, Ireland and the southern and western part of England January is the coldest month of the year. But in the countries surrounding the Norwegian Sea, the North Sea and the Baltic, as f ex. the Shetlands and Færoes, 1 OÙ OT M VO MI VI VII IX x XI XN ation of the seasons 2 o 2 Varberg o < | Kariskronn o Swinemiinde L_ | Waterlevel&of the Dutch North Waterlevel of the Baltic : Swedish Waterlevel of the Baltic: German Sea coast. Average for the years coast. Average for the years coast. Average for the years 1884-1901 1887-1900 1882-1897 Fig. 7. the Scandinavian peninsula a. o., the conditions are otherwise, the yearly maxima of cold and heat being retarded, so that February is colder than January. This fact is usually ascribed to the amount of heat accumulated during the warmer season in the seawater. This explanation holds for the Baltic, where the 30-50 m. deep homogeneous sur- face layer in the course of a year can alter its surface temperature from 17° to 1°5 C., indicating a debit of heat from the sea to the atmosphere of about 500000 Kilogram calories per square meter. The extraordinarily mild climate of the Baltic islands Goth- 2% TA 4 APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON ei Tat land, Bornholm a. o. in autumn has been ascribed to this! circumstance. But for the open ocean, other considerations must be taken into account, and we must distinguish between the real and the apparent debit of heat from the water. If we calculate the difference in the quantity of heat stored up in a column of water of one square metre diameter from the surface down to the under-limit of the Atlantic water at one of the stations of the international investigations at different seasons of the year, we obtain the apparent value of the exchange of heat between the sea and the air or the amount ot heat, which the water would have lost or gained supposing, that it had remained in the same place between both observations. In order to know the real heat-debit, we must also take into account the amount of heat, which has been brought to the spot with. the waters of the Atlantic current in the meantime. In want of reliable current obser- vations, the following considerations may help to form an idea of the daily interchange of heat between every square meter of the Atlantic area of the Norwegian Sea and the atmosphere. Heat exchange The heat given up by the water is mainly absorbed as latent heat by the water, between Sea : . : 9 . ann Which evaporates from its surface. According to the most reliable observations? Atmosphere 3°77 Kilogram water are given off from every square metre of the Norwegian Sea between 61° and 66° Latitude. The latent heat corresponding is 2260 units. To such circumstances we must ascribe the fact, that the temperature of the air West of Lofoten is about 27° higher in January than the normal, and likewise the retardation of the winter season, which for that place goes so far, that the coldest day at the island of Röst falls upon the 25 of February. Correspond- But apart from this retardation of the seasons, it may be, that the climatic conditions eee of northern Europe would show the same stability as those of the tropical countries if of the air and the yearly periodicity of the Atlantic were not troubled by unperiodic perturbations. of the sca Already before the commencement of the international investigation, the existence of such perturbations had been proved. The following diagram (Fig. 8) shows the corre- spondency between the oscillations of the surface temperature of the sea in January and February during 30 years at the stations Utsire, Hellis and Ona at the west coast of Norway and the variations of the mean temperature of the air at Orebro in the central part of Sweden. The full-drawn line represents the variations of the temperature of the water, the dotted line those of the air. Besides such fluctuations in the amplitude of the period, there frequently occurs a shifting in the phase of the period or a delay in the appearance of the maximum flow of the Atlantic current, which can be delayed from November to January and even longer. ! Influenee ofthe The very opening-year (1902—1903) of the international investigation was typical of perturbations these abnormal conditions. The full-drawn line in the diagram (Fig. 9, p. 14) represents the normal annual variation of temperature in the surface-layer of the sea off the Norwegian west coast in Thorshavn (Feroes), Papey (east coast of Iceland) and the named Norwegian t ©. Pettersson, Ueber die Beziehungen zwischen hydrographischen und meteorologischen Phäno- menen. Meteorol. Zeitschrift. August 1896. 2 Of Professor Mohn during the cruise of the Vöringen in 1876—78. 3 It must be observed, that the mean temperature of every place in the southern part of Sweden shows the same oscillations on a greater or smaller scale as those observed at Orebro. — 13 — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON west coast stations. The monthly means are calculated from the observations of the Norwegian Meteorologic Institute in Christiania and the Danish Meteorological Institute in Copenhagen!. Comparing the dotted line, which represents the actual variations Se 75 76 T1 78 #79 va 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 87 98 99 00 Of 02 03 On . RS | nea en En! LP EN E HSE NU oceans 573 BNP NS UD PAS none LEE ‚dan butt 5% FAN ENT CLR Yo NG we ae m mi, ae Py: ke -3° -3° -4° 4° -5° Fig. 8. Temperature of the sea at the Norwegian coast and Temperature of the air in the central part of Sweden Temperature of the Water ———W— Temperature of the air during 1902—1903 of the Norwegian stations to this, we find a large deficit in the intensity of the heatwave 1902 owing to the retardation of the maximum. Only January brings t Prof. Mohn has kindly placed the observations made in 1903 and 1904 at my disposal. APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON — tl — Anomaly of compensation in shape of a surplus of temperature in the surface layer during this and the temperature : : - : 2 10 of the water the following months until April 1903, ‘the flow of the Atlantic current thence subsiding. oF he Smikee This hydrographic situation is still more pronounced in the temperature curves of in 1902—03 . . 5 Thorshavn (Færoes), where it appears as a retardation of the phase of the period, the maximum occurring a whole month later than usual. This fact is still more obvious if for the temperature variations at the surface, we substitute those at 200 m. depth, where the periodicity and the disturbances of the Atlantic current are fully developed. The surfacelayer is in direct contact with the atmo- sphere, and its variations of temper- ature become more or less the retarded reflection of changes in the terrestric seasons. The Scottish station Sc. 8 lat. 61°32’ N. long. 3°10! E. is situated west of the entrance to the Norwegian channel. Here the Atlantic current bifurcates, sending one branch polar wards through the Norwegian Sea, another across the North Sea plateau into the Skager Rak. In summer the surface is covered by a layer of coastal water up to 100 metres in thickness. At 200 m., however, pure Atlantic water is always found. This site, therefore, is very favourable for sound- ing the core of the Atlantic current. The tables on p. 15 give the tem- perature and salinity at 200 m., the store of heat in kilogram-calories of the 200—300 m. layer (calculated from the freezing-point by using the ther- Variations of mal constants of pure water), and the difference in that heat store found to have arisen the temperature . : 5 ee 6 à in deeper layers IN the interval of two successive seasonal cruises, + denoting gain, — loss of heat. The [North Sea] quantity d denotes the daily mean of this loss or gain. We find, that the maximum temperature and salinity of both years (8°67 C. and 35°26%o0 in 1902 and 8°79 C. and 35°30%oo in 1903) was recorded in November or December for the 200 m. depth, whereas the minimum salinity and temperature was observed in May or August. This is a verification of the statement previously made, that the flooding of the Atlantic current takes place at the end of the year. The max- imum increase in heat occurred between August and November. November to May, 1902. b ZOO D WU ON VE UN HO ZX XX I I 1903. U ı — 15 — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON _ the water gives off large quantities of heat by convection to the atmosphere. The values for this given by the tables are, however, only apparent. In reality, the loss of heat of the water is much greater, as the water is not stationary, and new stores of heat are continually supplied by the Atlantic current. 1902 1902 1903 1903 1903 Aug. 28 Dec. 9 Feb. 10 May 6 Aug. 12 t° Teas 82:67 82-03 7°:36 62:88 S 9/00 35:14 35°26 35°23 3524 35° 16 W 686000 805000 803250 698500 641000 De, — é — A + 119500 — 2250 — 104750 — 57500 ö + 1160 — 36 — 1132 = SO 1903 1903 1904 1904 1904 Aug. 12 Nov. 19 Feb. 19 June 2 Aug. 18 t° 62:88 8°79 7°95 6°°78 mA Sifco 35716 35°30 35°14 39°19 39°26 W 641000 820250 789500 660550 726500 ee, — —_— oe —— —— A —+ 179250 — 30750 — 128950 + 65950 Ö + 1811 — 334 — 1239 + 856 Besides this annual periodicity, we trace with great exactitude the effects of a non- periodic disturbance. The temperature diagrams below (Fig. 10, p. 16) show the differing char- acters of the years 1902— 1903 and 1903—1904. In the former a postponement in the phase of the flooding occurred. The heatwave probably culminated between December 1902 and February following. The diurnal apparant loss of heat for the 200—300 m. layer was 36 units of heat only to 334 units in November 1903—February 1904. The dimi- nution of the heat store continued till August 19031; 1904 the situation was reversed, a strong afflux of warm and salt water then occurred, which brought up the temperature from 6°78 C. (on the 2" of June) to 7°74 C. (on the 18 of August), the salinity likewise increasing from 35°19 %/oo to 35:26 0/00. The effect of this fluctuation of the Atlantic current upon the hydrography of the Skager Rak is shown in the diagram below (Fig. 11, p. 16). It gives the maximum level and temperature of the Atlantic water at the Swedish station S Skag. 8 in the centre of the Skager Rak. The same variations observed in 200 m. depth at Sc 8 (the entrance to the Nor- wegian channel) are recorded at S Skag 8 (the centre of the Skager Rak deep), the limit of the scope of the Atlantic current. At S Skag 8 too the culmination occurs in November, the Atlantic water there attaining its highest level, 60 m. below the sur- face, and maximum temperature 6°47 C. in November 1902 and 7°40 C. in November 1903. The ebb sets in in May, in August the rising again commences. The postpone- ment of the heatwave in 1903 is evinced by the relatively high temperature and water- level (r00 m.) of May 1903. 1 N.B. in the 200 m. depth of course. The water to 100 m. below the surface was heated from ‚the atmosphere in May—August. Variations of the temperature in the deeper layers of the Skager Rak 1 TE SUITE FETES Le APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON = 16 <= The extremely well defined ebb of May 1904 observed at Sc 8 is apparent in the exceptionally low waterlevel at S Skag 8 during that month. The occurrence of the Atlantic flooding during the latter part of the year and of 6° 6° Fig. 10. Temperature of the Atlantic water at a depth of 200 m. Scottish Station Sc 8 1902—1903 = ——— 1903—1904 OM. 6:47 35.01 7.07 35.04 6° “on 60h 35.05 ii C12# 3501 7&0f 35.08 1 57813503 200 eat) 5°68 835.03 563 So: Fig. 11. Waterlevel and temperature of the Atlantic water in the Skager Rak at station S Skag 8 =: the ebb ‘during its early part corresponds to the phenomenon known to meteorologists as the retardation of the annual heat- and cold-maxima. The disturbance in the hydro- graphic periodicity, evinced by the postponement of the flooding, answers to another most important phenomenon, viz. the occurrence of warm winters in northern Europe. — ii) — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON The period 1902—1903 affords an excellent instance of this, that winter, as everybody knows, being noteable for its warm and stormy weather. The cause of this was the intense activity developed by the centre of the barometric depression in the North Atlantic. It is not my intention in this paper to deliver any opinion on the ultimate cause of the connection of hydrographic and meteorologic phenomena. My present purpose is only to discuss the relations found to exist in the manifestations of both. As already mentioned the flooding of the Atlantic current in the period 1902—1903 culminated later than usual. December 9% to February ro the temperature in 200 m. depth at Sc8 fell but 0°64%. This slight apparent loss of heat suggests a more aboun- dant supply of water from the Atlantic current than usual. In the course of winter this salt and warm water is carried northwards into the Norwegian Sea, where in lat. 70° it formed a surfacelayer of great magnitude. The deepsoundings of the Norwegian cruiser Michael Sars, February 1903, show, that in 70° lat. this layer extended from the iceborder about 4°30’ long. W to 11° long. E. East of the O meridian the thickness of this layer was found everywhere to exceed 500 m. the temperature varying from +3° to +4°C.; atthe surface the temperature ranged between + 4°38 and + 6°05 C. The accumulation of warm water caused the iceborder every- where to recede considerably. In the surfacewater atlantic plankton was found every- where between the 69°" and 70°" lats., even among the drifting icefloes near Jan Mayen?. A host of climatic and biologic phenomena accompany the anomalous hydrographic conditions of the winter 1902—1903. Among these we need only mention the mild and stormy character of the weather, the postponement of the spawning-period of the cod, the postponement for more than 2 months and partial failure of the Lofoten cod- fishery and the migration along the Norwegian coast of arctic animals such as seals (Phoca groenlandica and annulata) and the white whale (Delphinapterus leucas). Specimens of these were found in the very harbour of Christiania. The following winter the flooding commenced earlier. This is evidenced by the large increase in the heatstore during August—November of the 200 m. layer at Sc.8 and of the 60 m. layer at S Skag. 8 (see table pag. 15 and diagram fig. 11). The Norwegian Reports also contains a statement to the effect, that the temperature and salinity of the southern Norwegian Sea already in November 1903 were relatively high, and that plankton of southern origin abounded there. The hydrographic conditions of this year approach nearer to the normal state than those of the previous year. The climatic conditions of both years differ too. A glance at the accompanying synoptic charts (Fig.12, p. 18) representing the weather of the true winter-months, January, February, March of 1903 and 1904 will show this to be the case. The accumulation in high lats. of warm water during 1902— 1903 acted as recruiting ground for cyclones and barometric depressions. The trend of 1 Were it possible to compare the heat total of the water column from surface to bottom (350m. in December and in February (which is not practicable on account of the heterogeneity of the surface- layer) the result would give an increase of 52875 calories in the heatstore of the water. 2 See the description in the Norwegian annual report 1902—1903, p. 4. by Dr. Hjort in: Aarsberetning vedkommende Norges Fiskerier. 1 Heft. 1903. The author states, that among this southerly plankton of the surface specimens were found of such plankton as in summer only inhabit the deep regions (the boundary layer of Arctic and Atlantic water), among these he mentions Boreophausia and Nyctiphanes. 3) See the Norwegian Report for 1904, Heft 1, p.95. Anlage .\ ww Warmwater- area in the Nor- wegian Sea 1902—1903 Climatic and biologic ano- malies in the winter 1902—1903 Barometric condition in the winter 1903 and 1904 Correspond- ence of the hy- drographical and meteorolog- ical conditions in the winter 1897—98 APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON — 18 — the isobars in the northern Norwegian Sea reveal the constant recurrence of such meteorologic phenomena. The hydrographic anomaly ‘of 1902—1903 with its characteristic postponement of the Atlantic flooding and formation of an extensive warmwaterarea in the northern Norwegian Sea, is not unprecedented. The mean atmospheric temperature of the pre- ceding warm-winter 1897—1898 for Scandinavia (Stockholm) was December 3° 1, January 4°.3, March 2°1C. above the normal. The hydrographic state of this year too was characterized by the formation during the cold season of a warmwater area in the Januar 1903 Februar 1903 Marz 1903 Fig. 12. Mean monthly isobares northern Norwegian Seat. The accompanying sketches (Fig. 13 and 14, p.19) show the relation of hydrographic and meteorologic phenomena of that year. It is noteworthy, that the winterfisheries of the Scandinavian coast failed both years. This was the case with the Lofoten cod-fishery, and also with the herring-fishery at Bergen and in the Skager Rak. December 1895, the warm-winter next precedent, was noted by an exceptionally high level of the Atlantic water in the Skager Rak. This winter too the previously abundant winter-fishery of herring at the coast of Bohuslän ceased. t Observation of the oceanic temperature between the south apex of Greenland and the Orkneys and between Norway and Spitzbergen in November 1897 as well as of the distribution of atmospheric pressure in January 1898 occasioned the prognostication of these matters, which appeared in the periodical “Ymer” for 1898, Heft 2, p.,180, and Heft 3, p. 244. a a = \ — 19 — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON _ The statements made above disclose the near connection of the disturbance in the annual hydrographic periodicity with important climatic and biologic occurrences. The relation to each other of these phenomena merit a close investigation. The disturbance is here treated of as unperiodic. Its investigation is of too recent date to allow of its regularity being proved. A glance at the representation on pag. 13 of the annual variation in the water- and air-temperature during the cold seasons of the past 30 years will, however, satisfy us of the existence of such a regularity. The general impression is that the maxima and minima of the water- and air-temperature during the cold season reappear with great regularity every second year. This suggests a two-years period for the disturbance in the hydrographic periodicity. Meteorologists have long been acquainted with this phenomenon, which is known as “the even and odd years’’!. The “even” of the past 30 years have as a rule been characteristic of more temperate winters than have the “odd”. The diagram shows that this rule applies to the oceanwater Fig. 13. | Temperature 2 of the water March 1898 Fig. 14. Mean monthly isobares for January 1898 as well as to the atmosphere. Even the exceptions to the rule such as f. inst. the period 1886—1887—1888*, appear in the hydrographic series If we take the proved regularity of the years 1874—84 and 1893—1899 to be the effect of some systematically operating agent, we must regard the irregular period 1886—1888 as due to the interference with the two-years period of some stronger disturbing agent. The joint tendency of this and other, biologic, phenomena seem to foreshadow the existence also of secular periodicity in the oceanic circulation, the origin of which must be of cosmic nature. One phenomenon Secular periods of this class is the appearance and disappearance in the Skager Rak of the winter-herring. Since 859, the earliest date recorded, this fishery has returned with intervals of on the whole 111 years, though frequent irregularities in its appearance have occurred. The elucidation of this problem belongs to the future. The all-engrossing task of the present is the study of the annual periodicity, its disturbance and accompanying t Woeikoff, Die Schneedecke in paaren und unpaaren Wintern. Meteorolog. Zeitschrift. Febr. 1895. 2 N.B. The punctuated area means atlantic water. 3 Known in meteorologic litterature as “the cold spell’. 4 A. Ljungman, Nordisk Tidsskrift for Fiskeri. 5. Aargang. Kobenhavn 1880. APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON TOO EE phenomena, the existence of which have been fully proved by authentic observations, conducted according to the claims of science. The manner in which prevailing hydrographic conditions affect the living organisms of the sea is twofold. They either depend entirely on the motions of the water for their temporary residence, in which case they are drifted by the sea-currents £ inst. from higher into lower lats., or being stationary within certain geographic limits, their physiologic functions are affected by modifications resembling climatic changes in the salinity and temperature of the surrounding water. Plankton, animal and vegetal, fish-eggs and larvæ belong to the former, fishes to the latter category. For instance we may assume, that the atlantic plankton found by “Michael Sars” Febr. 1903 in the neighbourhood of Jan Mayen was conveyed thither by the retarded flood of Atlantic water. Another example is this: Annual changes According to observations made by the Swedish Greenland-expedition in 1899 the m une plankton-character on the northern slope of the North Sea plateau had completely changed from June to September. The list of principal forms given below is compiled by Professor Cleve and is illustrative of this condition. Norwegian Sea 61°—62° Lat. N., 0°37—1°19 Long. E. 31. May—2.June1899. Phaeocystis Poucheti, Chaetoceras decipiens, Calanus finmarchicus from 25 m. depth and in deeper layers. 8. September 1899. Ceratium macroceros, tripos, Paracalanus parvus, Centropages typicus. Calanus finmarchicus was met with at a depth of 100m. only and in abundance in greater depths at 60°55’ Lat. N. and 0°20’ Long. E. As the hydrographic situation exhibited corresponding modifications it may be inferred, that the plankton of September entered the Norwegian Sea with the Atlantic water". All plankton-biologists agree, that the hydrographic state of the Norwegian Sea is closely connected with the character of the plankton pervading it. As to the ultimate cause of the annual variations in the character and distribution of plankton, opinions differ. From the observations of the “Michael Sars” during her first cruise in 1900, it is evident that, judging by the specimens of chief species collected, the boundaries of the different planktonregions are nearly concurrent with those of the three waterareas, that we discern, i.e. the Atlantic, the Arctic and the littoral or bank water. According to Cleve each kind of water is predominated by a special type of plankton. Thus Tricho- and Sira-plankton (T and Ti) denotes Arctic, Chaeto- and Styli- plankton (C and S) Atlantic, Tripos-plankton (Tp) littoral water. To the annual variations in the hydrographic state correspond modifications in the distribution of plankton-types. This feature is wellknown in the Skager Rak. Cleve’s analytic studies of plankton collected monthly during the past 10 years at two stations on the Skager Rak coast, have proved beyond doubt the correspondence of hydrographic x Specimens of the wellknown southerly form Velella spirans were in September collected even east of the Shetlands. 3 \ b SRE URL APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON and plankton variations therein. The tendency of these changes is for the plankton of the Skager Rak to assume an arctic character in spring, an atlantic in autumn. The periodicity of the plankton-variations is, however, more pronounced in the west of the North Atlantic and Norwegian Sea. Early in the year an excessive develop- ment of vegetal planktonlife takes place in these parts. It is preceded by a period of sterility, the winter. In the borderregion of Atlantic and Arctic water, the former being richer in animal, comparatively poor in vegetal plankton, an exuberance of planktonlife developes during summer, in which a few wellrepresented species of large Copepoda predominate affording ample nourishment for cod, herring a. o. fish. Nor is this plankton- wealth confined to the surface-layer. The layer subjacent to the Atlantic current and ‘separating it from the cold bottom-layer displayes similar characteristics. The abundance of nourishment occasions the big summer fisheries off the coasts of Iceland, Shetland and the Feroes. In the following I will try to trace from an hydrographic point of view the corre- spondency between the periodic and unperiodic changes in the state of the Ocean aud) the fish migrations. The fish-species Du predominate in the borderregion are here mentioned as “North-fishes” The species, that inhabit the Atlantic current proper, are here men- tioned as “South-fishes”. The arctic water proper is not inhabited by food-fishes!, conse- quently there are no fisheries. The term “South-fish” is not synonymous with tropic fish, nor does “North-fish” imply arctic fish such as the arctic cod or the “Lodde”.. Nor do I propose to use this classification in the same sense as once Moebius and Heincke, who thus nominated fish- species appearing as casual visitors to our seas, neither residing nor spawning there. The geographic distribution of the “South-fish” is in the temperate Atlantic. That of the “North-fish” is in the Norwegian Sea and surroundings of Iceland and Færoes, i.e. every place where Arctic and Atlantic water comes into contact. It follows, that both categories of fish are found at such places as for instance the sea around Iceland, the North Sea and Skager Rak, where enter the ramifications of the Atlantic current, forming a commixture with different local sorts of seawater. The category “North-fish” comprises many of our common food-fishes, f. inst. the ling, the cod, the winter-herring, the haddock a.o. The abundance of these in the North Sea and on the coast-banks of Scandinavia occasions the big winter-fisheries of cod, herring etc. The classification into ‘“North-fish” and “South-fish” however is of necessity a relative one. As already stated the “North-fish” mostly inhabit the borderregion of the Atlantic water. We know, however, that the Atlantic current is subject to annual periodicity as well as to unperiodic changes, the effect of which is to cause shiftings in the position of the borderarea. These shiftings have connection with the fish-migrations, The field of t Food-fish is inclusive only of such fish as is used for human nutriment. The arctic water is inhabited by a fish the “Lodde’”, which as food for cods, coalfishes etc. plays a part of the greatest impor- tance in the economy of the seas. North-fishes and South-fishes The North-fishes Periodicity of the fisheries in the Barentz Sea Longlinefishery on the North Sea plateau in summer and in the Skager Rak in winter APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON So hydrographic changes and fish-migrations extends far beyond the precincts of the North Sea into the Norwegian Sea and northern Atlantic. The origin of these variations is the alternate encroachment of Arctic and Atlantic water upon the littoral shoals and plateaus of the Barentz Sea, the Scandinavian peninsula and the North Sea. In spring when the Atlantic flooding subsides, the Barentz Sea is invaded by Arctic water and the fisheries off the Murman Coast cease. Further north in the vicinity of the never-abating flows of the North Cape current good catches of cod, etc. can still be made with the trawl. With the setting in of the Atlantic flood a vast immigration of food-fishes into the Barentz Sea takes place. The food-fishes frequenting these parts therefore have the character of “South-fish” rather than of “North-fish”. In the autumn 1902 this immigration of fish from the Norwegian into the Barentz Sea was studied in all its phases by means of fishing-experiments in the deep channel extending from Nordkyn eastwards into Barentz Seat. The fishery conditions of the Barentz Sea have been minutely examined through the scientific fishing-cruises of the Russian Commission. In summer and autumn, when circumstances best favour the sojourn of our “North-fishes”, there is, however, a vast region to the east of this sea, in which all attempts with the trawl prove fruitless. This is the region of pure arctic water. In the chart on pag.3 the compass of the trawling in summer and autumn according to Russian data? is given. Could similar lines be traced for the spring-fisheries, their position would be somewhere in the west part of that sea. On the slope of the North Sea plateau towards the deep of the Arctic sea, the core of the Atlantic current is found all the year round from surface down to a depth of 400—800 m. In the two sections on pag. 9 the isohaline 35:25 °/.. outlines a çros- section of the current. Underneath the Atlantic current and separating it from the cold arctic bottomwater is the layer, whose opulence in Copepoda and fish is mentioned on pag.20. Here in summer the Swedish fishermen carry on their fisheries by line close on Shetland in 1$50—200 m. depth. In the hydrographic sections it is evident, that the position of this layer in June is closer to the surface than in autumn. To the latter period the fishermen are obliged to set their lines further north and at greater depths, 300—400 m., in order to catch the ling, the halibut a.o. In winter when the Atlantic flood subsides and Arctic water predominates, these fishes are caught in the Skager Rak. Recent investigation’ has proved beyond doubt, that the hydrographic. periodicity exercises influence on the return of the trawling in the North Sea. The fishery statistics ı K. Dahl, Fiskeriforsog med Skolpen. 2 L. Breitfuss writes: “The biology of the Murman Sea is the outcome of above-mentioned hydrologic elements. As soon as the temperature of this sea sinks below zero, the bottom-fauna undergoes a complete transformation. The trawling outside the Gulfstream area had as a rule but negative results. ... As a rule the food-fishes remain at the Murmancoast and the fjords from May to the end of October, when they again in a northwesterly direction seek the open sea” (Vortrag, printed in: Verhandlungen des V. Internationalen Zoologen Congresses. Nachtrag). ' 3 Professor Henking’s paper on the Fishing in the North Sea by German trawlers (Mitteilnngen des deutschen Seefischerei-Vereins No. 1, 1901) bears evideuce to this statement. Professor H. divides the foodfishes of the North Sea area into summer- or winter-fishes, according to the season (Winter = Noy. —April, Summer = May—Oct.), to which they appear in greatest number (see tables pag.15 et sequ.). Henking’s “winter-fishes” are identic with the “North-fishes”, his “summer-fishes’”” with the ““South-fishes”. — 23 — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON in use being purely quantitative were not adapted to this kind of study. Previous to the commencement of the international work, however, the Fishery Board for Scotland and the Deutsche Seefischerei-Verein of Germany had each arranged for the employment of a new method in collecting statistics, by which not only the total but also the species, size, gender etc. of the individuals in every catch is recorded. Data thus collected intimate, that the frequentation of the same fishinggrounds by North-fishes is variable according to the season. Thus the percentage of fullgrown cod in every catch brought in winter by trawlers from the Dogger Bank into Ganesan harbours is double that of summer. The supplement F by Professor Henking, gives instances of this founded on statistic data of the above-described kind and treating both of North-fish and South-fish. According to these the frequentation of the former is greatest during the ebb of the Atlantic water, that of the latter during the flooding. It suggests a permanent migration of the food- fishes inhabiting the North Sea. It has already been stated, that cod above a certain size quit the Skager Rak and the fjords of Norway during summer, returning there in winter. Dr. Hjort’s account! of the cod-migrations in the Norwegian and Barentz Sea as well as the recent observations by Dr. Schmidt? of the seas surrounding Iceland give to hand, that the lifecyclus and migration of the North-fish compass an area of consider- able geographic extent. We know that Iceland is surrounded by cold arctic water, a projection of the Base Greenland polar current. In the borderregion of this cold littoral water and the Atlantic current south of Iceland is the spawning-place of the cod in spring (chiefly March and April). The eggs are found only where the temperature of the water is above 5°C. The cold water to the north and east of Iceland is void of spawning cods and cods-eggs. Eggs of certain arctic fish-species take their place. The spawning-period over, a large portion at least of the cod go west and northwest following the course of the coast-current and that of the mines current. Later on in summer the fisheries commence on the northcoast of Iceland. The fishfood is here in abundance, the large Copepoda & Schizopoda predominating in the border region of Atlantic and Polar water. The herring shoals now caught with drift-nets during summer on the north- and east-coasts of Iceland seem to undertake wanderings of a similar nature. The fishing for herring commences off Cape North thence gradually proceeding southeast-wards. Thus in course of summer all food-fishes inhabiting the borderregion: the cod, the herring, the fish-brood north of Iceland pass east-wards. Dr. Schmidt says: “We are here evidently confronted by a general eastward movement the cause of which no doubt is the influence of the warm eastgoing current along the north coast of Iceland during summer.” The observations made by the Danish Ingolf-expedition 1895—963 have proved the existence during summer of this comparatively warm eastgoing current. On the coastbanks of northwestern Iceland the East-Greenland polar current meets and mixes with the last projection of the Atlantic Irminger-current, the water of which 1 J. Hjort, Fiskeri og Hvalfangst i det nordlige Norge. Bergen, 1902. 2 J. Schmidt, Fiskeriundersogelser ved Island og Færoerne i Sommeren 1903. Skrifter udgivne af Kommissionen for Havundersogelser. Nr. 1. Kobenhavn, 1904. 3 Den Danske Ingolfexpedition: II. Martin Knudsen, Hydrografi. Kobenhavn, 1898. Influence ofthe hydrographical periodieity on the trawling in the North Sea Life-eyclus and migrations of the cod Migrations of the herring + 8 100 APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON — 24 — has a temperature of 6° — 7°C. During summer this mixed water is further heated on the comparatively shallow coastal plateau of northern Iceland till its temperature measures 5°—6°C at the surface and 2°—3°C. at 200m. depth. During June—August the fish and fish-brood travelling with the Irminger current to the north of Iceland find thermal conditions almost equalling those of the south-side during springtime. Besides nourishment is here in abundance consisting partly of plankton, partly of arctic fishes such as the. “Lodde”. As soon as winter sets in the hydrographic situation in the borderregion of the polar current is entirely changed, a sufficient ground from which to explain the wandering towards east and southeast of the North-fish. It is noteable, that the herring of the North-Sea area also migrates in this direction, beginning at the Shetlands gradually passing the Dogger Bank and so on to the Skager Rak. Finally the appearance at times of large shoals of herring off the Swedish westcoast in winter should be born in mind. Since the commencement of the last herring-period in Skagerack - Gullmarefjord 13 16 Nov1893 Skagerack- Gullmarefiord 16-18 Dec1896, MN Adantiscies Wasser 2 = o 10 20 J0 Mae: a == — - a 0 0 20 JoMelen > Fig. 15 Fig. 16 1877 and 1878 the hydrographic conditions prevalent in these parts at such times have been the subject of a careful study. The winterherring is a North-fish not inhabiting the Atlantic water proper, but the mixed water (Bank-water) of 32 °/oo—33°/oo salinity*. During the ‘“herring-years” the level of the Atlantic water was found to remain at comparatively great depths outside the coastal shoals. These were covered by a layer of Bank-water some 30—4om. in thickness: which through the deep-channels entered into the fjords. Within this layer the herring was always found. December 1896 when the herring-fishery failed the level of the Atlantic water had risen so high close to the coast as to leave only a layer of about 7 m. thickness between it and the surfacecover of diluted Baltic water. This is shown in the accompanying hydrographic sections. Up to the present time the migrations of the fishes have been ascribed solely to tendencies of food-seeking and propagation. The discovery of the connection of fish- migration with hydrographic conditions is in no way inconsistent with this theory. The fishspecies here in question have distinct periods of feeding and spawning. ı The connection of the December-February Herring fishery on the Swedish Skager Rak coast with the invasion of the coast-banks by this mixed water of 32 °/oo - 33 °/oo salinity in 1878—79 was discovered by G. Ekman; see G. Ekman, “‘“‘Hydrografiska Undersökningar, 1878—79’ in: Bih. Göteborgs och Bohusläns Arskrift 1880 and the description in “Grunddragen af Skageracks och Kattegats Hydrografi” 1. c. p. 112— 122, by G. Ekman and O. Pettersson. — 25 — APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON The accomodation ot these periods to the annual hydrographic periodicity is not more incongruous than is the wellknown fact, that the animals of the dry land, f. inst. the migratory birds, have adjusted their migrations and physiologic functions to the predominant climatic conditions. The south-fish is an inhabitant of the Atlantic water proper and appears in greatest number at the flooding of this water. The mackerel, the hake, the Belone belong to this category. The question whether the sardine and other fish-species only found in the southern North Sea extend their wanderings through the Channel into the Atlantic must be left to the future to solve. In any case the most important fishmigrations are those under- taken within the southern North Sea itself. Dutch investigations have shown, that both flatfish and shellfish of this region undertake seasonal wanderings between the continental shoals and the Dogger bank. As already stated the North Sea south of Dogger forms hydrographically a semi-isolated area. Recent Dutch! observations show, that this is the case in a biologic sense too. North of Dogger where the interchange of water by the way north of Scotland and the Shetlands takes place on a large scale between the Atlantic and the North Sea, the migration both of South-fish and North-fish seems to attain far greater dimensions. As an illustration of this the experiences of Professer Henking in his study of the hake may be quoted. The hake is a typical South-fish, which to the fisheries of Spain and France is of the greatest importance. In our lats. it arrives towards the end of summer with the setting in of the Atlantic water and disappears again in winter. Henking says?: 3 “The hake is remarkable in this regard, that the difference in quantity caught during summer and during winter is surpassed by no other known species. During winter (November— April) the total catch averages 2 pounds, while in summer the daily catch averages 100 pounds. | Appendix F contains an account of the appearance in the North Sea and Atlantic of this fish. The mackerel too must be considered a South-fish although its predatory habits and strong swimming capacity bring its rovings far beyond the compass of the Atlantic water proper. So far the influence of hydrographic periodicity on fishery conditions may be con- sidered as proved. The hydrographic periodicity, however, is subject to disturbances chiefly appearant in the retardation of its maximum from autumn to winter. In what manner do these disturbances affect the fishery conditions? The full answer to this question which practically is of vital importance will not be at hand for years yet to come. Summarizing the experience of these two years we should say, that to the : H. C. Redeke, Vangststatistieken van hollandsche Stoomtrawlers 1903—1904. Mededeelingen over Visscherij, Nr. 130, Oktober 1904. Dr. Redeke says (1. c. p.217): «Zoo blijkt uit dit statistisch onderzoek, en hierop zoude ik ten slotte nog even de aandacht willen vestigen, dat, gelijk reeds menige andere waarneming ons leerde, het zuidelijk deel van de Noordzee een min of meer zelfstandig gebied vormt. Hoewel er in het noorden geen zichtbare grenzen bestaan, heeft dit gebied toch zijn eigen vischwereld, zijn eigen bodem-fauna, zijn eigen plankton, kortom zijn eigen levende natuur, waarin slechts zelden zwervelingen uit het noorden indringen». 2 Henking: Die Befischung der Nordsee etc. L c. S. 5 and 6. Appendix A 4 The South- fishes Migrations in the southern North Sea Migrations in the northern North Sea APPENDIX A: PETTERSSON Bde ee ns disturbances of the hydrographic situation correspond an. the hydro. equal magnitude in the winterfisheries of Scandinavia. . graphic situ- Each of the winters 1903, 1898 and 1896, in which the flooding was retards ation on the NY chers noteable for the failure of certain of the winter-fisheries. The statements rendered in this paper will appear sufficient to remove regarding the existence of a near connection between hydrographic, meteo biologic phenomena. It is desirable therefore, that the statistical investigati ns | Beh as of our seas pay careful attention to dhe annual variation of hydrograp hie, plankton-biologic conditions which occur in these seas. ’ APPENDIX B THE HYDROGRAPHY OF THE FÆROE-SHETLAND CHANNEL IN 1902 AND 19035 BY B. HELLAND-HANSEN WITH 4 FIGURES IN THE TEXT (TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY H. M. KYLE) Since August 1902, a rich material has been collected during several seasonal cruises in the Færoe-Shetland Channel which forms part of the Scottish region in the inter- national investigations of the sea. This material has been worked up and has now been published in two larger papers: “Hydrographical Investigations of the Færoe-Shetland Channel and the Northern Part of the North Sea during 1902” by the present author, and “Scottish Hydrographic Research during 1903” by A.J. Robertson. As the results of these investigations are also of importance for the other North European seas, a short summary of the contents of the papers mentioned will be given in the follow- ing pages. The observations in the Channel have been made along two almost parallel lines: a northern from a point N. W. of Shetland to the Færoes, and a southern, which runs from a point S. of the Færoes to Fair Island between the Orkneys and Shetlands. Schematic sections along the more southerly of these two lines are shown in the Figures 1—4 (p.'5) for four different periods. Only one complete series of observations in the Channel is available for the winter half-year, viz. for December 1902, as heavy storms have rendered work impossible in the other months of the seasonal cruises. The peculiarities of the hydrographical conditions in the Channel, which have appeared each time during the investigations of these two years, are as follows: the Atlantic Stream (“Gulf Stream”) has always been passing through the Channel as a surface- current on its way towards the Norwegian Sea; water from the western part of the Norwegian Sea has been streaming on the surface round the north of the Feroes into the western part of the Channel; and lastly the heavy cold bottom-water, which fills the depths of the entire, large basin of the Norwegian Sea, was pressing along the bottom of the Channel. The dimensions of these different water-masses and their mutual relations, change greatly within a tolerably brief space of time, as the figures clearly show. The regional variations have also been found to be very great, so that it is necessary to have stations quite close to one another in order to be able to follow the variations. As the network of Scottish observation-stations has been fairly complete, however, it has been possible to study these variations in a much better way than hitherto. If we investigate the Atlantic Stream, first of all, we find that it changes very greatly in extent, in rapidity of flow and partly also in direction. Its main portion is represented APPENDIX B: HELLAND-HANSEN = à — in the figures by trebly crossed lines, indicating water of higher salinity than 35°25 co. The Stream enters the Channel from the Atlantic in a direction varying between north- east and south-east, and when in the Channel, follows a more northerly course along the Shetland bank. In August 1903, the Stream came along the southern section, so that Fig. 4 gives partly a longitudinal section through the Stream whilst the other figures are cross-sections. In 1902 and 1903, the Stream was limited as a rule to the eastern half of the Channel in the neigbourhood of the Shetland Isles, which may have been quite surrounded by the strongly saline Atlantic water. From time to time, indeed, the Stream fills almost the whole surface of the Channel between the Faroes and the Shetlands; but these are obviously only exceptional cases. The depth of the water which streams through the Channel into the Norwegian Sea, can in general be placed at ;—600 m.; the relatively unmixed Atlantic water, with a salinity of over 35°25 °/oo, has a depth varying between 200 and 500m. With the help of V. Bjerknes dynamic theory, numerous approximations haye been calculated for the rapidity of the Stream’s flow?. These calculations have given the following results amongst others: in August 1902, the average rapidity on the surface was about 10 sea-miles per 24 hours (0:2 m. per second); in December of the same year, it was probably a little less; in May 1903, it was about 15 sea-miles (0:3 m. per second) and again about 10 s. m. in the following August. The rapidity of flow varies but little in the upper few hundred meters; some- times the greatest rapidity of flow is at a depth of about 100m. Great masses of water are therefore carried by the Stream into the Norwegian Sea. An attempt to calculate this quantity for August 1902 gave 4,000,000 m3 per second. The Atlantic Stream send offshoots into the North Sea, partly through the opening between Scotland and Shetland, partly round the north of Shetland. A distinct periodicity occurs in this inflow of Atlantic ocean-water into the North Sea. It has long been known, that the northern North Sea plateau (north of the Dogger Bank) was covered by water of very high salinity, which in summer had a temperature as low as ca. 7° C.; the true North Sea water of lower salinity lies above this bottom-water as a layer 40—60 m. thick. The temperature remains almost the same throughout the whole year, but was a little higher in December 1902 than, for example, in August. Regular obser- vations have now shown, that this North Sea bottom-water is of Atlantic origin and that it comes into the North Sea almost exclusively in the winter half year. In December” 1902, it began, as a branch of the Atlantic Stream, to pour into the North Sea round the north of Shetland; later, in the first months of 1903, it possibly came mainly to the south of Shetland. The Atlantic water was then cooled down in the North Sea during the cold period of the year; in winter, the temperature at the pottom is a little higher than in summer, as the minimum spreads but slowly down into the depths. This water remains for the most part in the North Sea throughout the whole summer until the next winter; its movements in all probability are but slow. The same conditions are probably repeated regularly and not restricted to the two years spoken of here. The low bottom-temperature occasionally found in summer by earlier investigations speak in favour of this. The reason why the inflow of the Atlantic ocean-water through the t) According to the method, described in Sandstrôm and Helland-Hansen’s paper: Ueber die Berechnung von Meeresstrémungen (Report on Norwegian Fishery and Marine Investigations. II. 4. 1903.) ~ Ne >} N, — 5 — APPENDIX B: HELLAND-HANSEN Færoe-Shetland Channel into the North Sea, is at its maximum in winter (in March in 1903, according to Robertson) and minimum in summer, must be sought for in several different circumstances. Thus, the magnitude and the direction of the Atlantic Stream play some part; secondly, the force with which the East Icelandic Polar Stream opposes the Atlantic Stream; also, the amount of inflow of freshwater from the Baltic ERX ASE, a SST OOS SEK ROSSI NE N & RU e { PES KN SEKI ER Ce NON TE RER i TERY EN RS IS SZ) POS © CY OXON KOSI NOY RR DD 2S Ss RR RR REEL = SE LS Se CAV 2 HOEK—INTRODUCTORY material in a better condition, it was to be expected, that a useful summary would be more readily attained for the Kattegat than for the North Sea, with its much more complex conditions. On the other hand, owing to the similarity of the problems, a conclusion applicable to the Kattegat would also be of some value for a judgment of the conditions in the North Sea. As with the plaice, the statistical data regarding the other important food-fishes of the North Sea (sole, turbot, brill, haddock, cod and herring) are next subjected to a critical review; whatever might be of use in answering the question, whether overfishing and decrease of fish is really taking place or not, is then brought together. Briefly reviewed, the results, so far as the available statistics permit a judgment, are as follows: Plaice (Pleuronectes platessa) and haddock (Gadus acglefinus). It cannot be said, that the quantities of these species landed since 1892 have undergone a decrease; the current stock in all probability remains almost constant, in spite of the strenuous fishing. A deterioration has occurred, however, in the composition of the current stock of both these species: the quantities of the large fish landed have greatly decreased relatively, those of the small have greatly increased relatively; the average size of the plaice and haddock landed has therefore decreased. With regard to the sole (Solea vulgaris) and turbot (Rhombus maximus), the statistics show an unmistakeable decrease, as regards the total quantities caught in the North Sea: the quantities of the large fish have continually decreased, and the quantities taken of the small have not sufficiently increased so as to maintain the total quantities at the same uniform level. Brill (Rhombus laevis). The quantities taken do not show a decrease. With regard to the cod (Gadus morrhua), the available data permit no con- clusions to be drawn regarding the North Sea, as the quantities stated in the statistics of the various countries are too greatly mixed with those taken outside the North Sea, at Iceland, the Færoes and elsewhere. The quantities of the herring (Clupea harengus) have increased on the whole. With regard to the total quantities of all fish landed; these give no occasion for very pessimistic views regarding the fisheries as a whole. Nevertheless, when we remember, that the trawl fishery of the North Sea is chiefly concerned with the catch of the species mentioned, namely, plaice, haddock, sole and turbot, it must be concluded from what has been shown regarding these species, if any value at all is put upon the statistical data, that these fisheries are in a more or less critical position. By this is to be understood, however, not that an exhaustion of the fisheries is possible, but that the trawl fisheries are gradually becoming more and more dependent on the smaller classes of food-fishes, as well as on those species which were formerly disregarded. The efforts of the Bureau have also been directed to other statistical labours. From previous reports and preliminary investigations, it appeared exceedingly probable, that the catch of smaller and less valuable specimens of plaice is going on at certain parts of the North Sea and in cetain months on such a large scale, that it must certainly be considered harmful to the regular production. The atten- tion of the Bureau was specially drawn to this matter on the part of England. D] Statistics of small plaice HOEK— INTRODUCTORY — BOWIE — The Bureau was thus induced to bring it before the meeting of the International Council of the 25 and 26% of February 1904, and in the following manner: I. The International Council considers it highly desirable, that full and careful statistics be collected at the chief ports of entry on the question of the destruction of small fish, with especial reference to the size, place and season of capture of young plaice and other flat-fish, and desires to bring before the governments concerned the necessity of allocating out of the funds for fishery research at their disposal, a provision sufficient for the thorough carrying out of this work. II. The International Council resolves that it is desirable, that in the event of a law being passed in Great Britain giving powers to make experiments for restricting the destruction of under-sized flat-fish, powers be also taken by the various governments concerned to make experiments for restricting the destruction of under-sized flat-fish. These proposals were accepted. In order to make the material as uniform as possible, the Bureau drew up a circular with regard to the collection of the statistics, special reference being made to the measurements of the plaice. This circular was sent to the nembers of the Council in April 1904, and contained the following: 1. The total quantity of the plaice landed at the port has to be determined monthly. So far as this cannot be carried out by direct weighing, measure- ment of volume, enumeration or other manner, a subsidiary estimate has to be made. 2. It has to be ascertained, what proportions of the total quantity are formed by the various trade-divisions (e. g. large, medium, small). 3. Measurements of the fish in the smallest category are specially to be under- taken. Such measurements are to be made as often as possible and for as many specimens as possible, and should indicate the total length, from the snout to the tip of the tail, to the nearest 05 cm. 4. It is of the utmost importance that the ground, where the measured fish came from, should be ascertained with the greatest possible exactness. 5. The collection of the statistics is to begin as soon as possible; in order to procure immediately an explanatory model for Point 1, the monthly total quantities for 1903 should be ascertained as far as possible from existing statistics. This may be done according to the chief trade-divisions already in use. 6. It would be of the highest value, for a number of the purposes of the international investigations, if these statistical enquiries were not restricted to the plaice, but were extended to include other flat-fish as well. 7. Whilst the procuring of the necessary material is the work of the separate states, the Bureau untertakes the further elaboration of the material sent to it. The most of the countries concerned began the collection of the material in April and May; measurements and other data concerning many thousands of plaice have been forwarded to the Bureau up to October, even longer by some countries. The further elaboration of the material has been commenced; the conclusion of the — OWI — HOEK—INTRODUCTORY work and the preparation of a report on its results could not be made in sufficient time, however, to be published in the present General Report. When the Bureau had taken over the statistical work, Committee B, which, as already mentioned, was originally formed to work at the problem of overfishing, could then devote its attention entirely to the biology of the Pleuronectidæ and other fish taken with the trawl. Several reports, though preliminary in part, have already been made on the results of these investigations. These are shown partly in Appendix E of this General Report by Prof. Fr. Hemcxe, partly in Appendix G by Dr. Jou. Hjorr and Dr. C. G. Jon. PETERSEN. The “Preliminary report on the natural history of the plaice, based on the investigations of Committee B”, sent in by Mr. W. Garstanc, the convener of the Committee, is entirely devoted to this theme and is published as Appendix H of this General Report. To this is added as Appendix H’, a special report by Dr. H. C. Repexe (“The distribution ‘of the plaice on the Dutch coast”). These reports together form a valuable addition to our knowledge of this fish; neither of them, however, is to be regarded as completed. Mr. GarsranG reports on the results of the experiments with marked fish, on the migrations of the plaice, which are divided by him specially into summer and winter migrations, on the intensity of the fishing, the rate of growth of the plaice, the experiments on the transplantation of the plaice, on the vitality of fishes taken with the trawl, and finaliy on the trawling experiments and the protection of undersized fish. Briefly summarised, his results are as follows: From the experiments with marked plaice, it appears generally, in his opinion, that the plaice of the eastern and southern parts of the North Sea show a fixed southerly tendency in the winter months, which changes to a northward and seaward tendency in the course of the spring and summer. On the other hand, the tendency on the western side of the North Sea, north of latitude 53°, is distinctly northerly in winter. ; With respect to the intensity of the fishery, it is clear from the experiments with marked plaice, that this is much greater on the coastal grounds than on the deep-sea grounds further from the coast. With regard to the rate of growth of the plaice, the experiments with marked and recaught plaice give in general such different results, both for the various sizes and the various grounds, that the further treatment of this problem must be postponed for the present. The transplantation experiments have given important results, according to Mr. Garsranc. On the one hand, it appeared, that the plaice on the Horns Reef ground are not able to attain their maximum increase of growth there; in his opinion, their growth is stunted, probably because this region is overpopulated. When these fish are transported, however, to the Dogger Bank which has a better store of food, they increase rapidly and greatly in size; their rate of growth is greatly increased. The advantage, which the fishery might reap from such a transplantation when made on a large scale, is pointed out by Mr. GARSTANG. The results obtained by the experiments on the vitality of the fishes caught by the trawl, seem to show, according to Mr. Garstang, that but few of the small ar re) Investigations on the natural history of the plaice Garstang’s report Vv Redekels report Fisheries investigations in the Baltic Distribution of the plaice in the Baltic HOEK—INTRODUCTORY — SION — plaice taken by the fishermen under the ordinary conditions of the trawl-fishery will live when returned again to the sea. Passing to the trawling experiments carried out by the investigation-steamers, Mr. GarsranG reports, that the material placed at his disposal enables him to calculate the following factors for many of the 100 North Sea fishing grounds estab- lished by him and for the four quarterly periods (January—March, April—June, July—September, October—December), viz.: a. the average size of the plaice captured; b. the average catch per hour, for plaice above and below 30 cm.; and c. the proportion of small plaice, under 20 cm., in the catches. The author calls special attention to the following general results: (1) In the whole region between the Dogger Bank and the coastal grounds, the average size of the plaice taken is considerably greater in the winter quarter] than in the summer quarter, especially than in autumn when the size is at its minimum. On the other hand, the impression is gained, that the maximum size on the Dogger Bank occurs in summer and the minimum in winter. (2) It appears from the fisheries experiments, that the small plaice are in much greater quantity on the eastern part of the North Sea than on the western, even in one and the same depths. Mr. Garstanc concludes his report by referring to the importance of the results obtained by him for the problem of the undersized fish; so far as can be judged as yet, in his opinion, an increase in the number of small plaice on the coastal grounds would still further retard their growth there; the question then arises, whether such results would be of general advantage to the fisheries or not. Dr. REDEKE traces the variations in size etc. of the plaice taken on certain fixed stations as uniformly as possible throughout the year. He describes the migrations undertaken by these fishes and discusses their causes. He has come to the general conclusion, that the distribution of the plaice in the North Sea near the Dutch coast is a function of or varies with the size, and is so regular, that one can almost say the size of the plaice varies in centimeters as the depth varies in meters. To Committee C, which was established somewhat later than the other com- mittees, was entrusted the fisheries investigations relating to the Baltic. Its work was really introduced with the meeting at Stralsund in July 1903, where programs were discussed and determined as to the main lines. The work has begun with the preparation of a work, in which reviews over the fisheries (fish-grounds, apparatus, statistics, laws and regulations etc.) are to be given for the various countries participating in the Baltic fisheries; the intention being, to form afterwards a general work on the Baltic fisheries from these separate reports. Two of these reviews (for Denmark and Sweden) have been sent in and published by the Bureau‘; that for Germany is almost completed; those for the other countries are in preparation and will appear soon. With regard to the actual investigations, no final reports are yet to hand. Those for the western part of the Baltic have been specially concerned with the t See: Publications de Circonstance Nr. 13 A. (p.5 of this General Report). — XOX — HOEK—INTRODUCTORY distribution of young plaice, and from the German side, a first report was published in December 19031, a second in December 19042, whilst a notice published at the same time on the occurrence of young plaice in Neustadter Bay may be regarded as a thirds. In Appendix G of this General Report, Dr. PETERSEN, the Convener of Committee C 2, which is specially concerned with the plaice in the Baltic, pays attention to the occurrence of the plaice in these waters. The chart (Tab. IX) which he gives with this Appendix, indicates in the Baltic the boundary-lines to the east of the pelagic eggs, the pelagic young fish, the bottom-stages of the young and the adult fish of the plaice. Meantime, Dr. PETERSEN has published an extensive paper in the XII" Report of the Danish Biological Station, in which he describes, where and under what conditions plaice-eggs may develop to young fish in the waters within the Skaw+. This paper is based on the international material available up to that time and was prepared as an explanation of these matters. It also concerns the problems taken in hand by Committee C2 for the Baltic. From his investigations, Dr. PETERSEN comes to the conclusion, that the eggs of the plaice which are met with from the Skaw as far in the Baltic as Bornholm, can as a rule pass through all the pelagic stages to the bottom-stages only where the water renders it possible for them to reach the coasts at certain periods. The young can then come on to the low, clear beach lighted and warmed by the sun, which seems necessary for their development, whilst those which are obliged to remain in the cold, dark and deep water-layers of the Baltic obviously die as a rule. In the eastern part of the Baltic, as in the Gulfs of Bothnia and Finland, the investigations have been specially concerned with the salmon and eel. These investigations belong to the program of Committee C 1, whose Convener is Dr. F. TryBom. They have begun with the marking and liberation of specimens of the species named. These investigations are making good progress though no reports are as yet to hand. The purely biological investigations may be but briefly mentioned here. The better means at present at the disposal of the investigations naturally lend them- selves at the same time, exceedingly well to the investigation of various questions important in biological regard, though these questions are only indirectly connected with the main problems taken in hand. As examples of these biological investiga- tions, Prof. K. Branpr's work on the cycle of physiological changes in the sea and the importance of nitrogen compounds for the production in the sea, may be mentioned. This is a continuation of several investigations carried out by V. HENSEN ı Krüger, A., Ueber die Verbreitung junger Schollen an der deutschen Ostseeküste im Sommer und Herbst, 1903. Mitt. d. D. Seefischerei-Vereins. 1903. 2 Reibisch, J., Weitere Untersuchungen über die Verbreitung junger Schollen an der deutschen Ostseeküste im Sommer 1904. Mitt. d. D. Seefisherei-Vereins. 1903. 3 Duncker, G., Junge Goldbutt (Pleuronectes platessa, L,)in der Neustädter Bucht. Mitt. d. D. See- fischerei-Vereins. 1904. 4 Petersen, C.G.Joh., Hvor og under hvilke Forhold kunne Rodspættens Æg udvikle sig til Unger indenfor Skagen? Beretning fra den danske biologiske Station. XII. 1902 og 1903. Kjoben- havn, 1904. Investigations on the salmon and eel Biological inyestigations Brandt’s work Other biological investigations HOEK--INTRODUCTORY Le EXO long before the beginning of the international investigations. In Appendix D, the present General Report publishes a paper by Prof. K. Branpr on the production and conditions of production in the sea, which will assuredly contribute to the elucidation of the phenomena connected with this theme. The main object of the work reported on in his paper, was to improve the methods of determining quanti- tatively very small amounts of nitrogen compounds, silicic acid and phosphoric acid, so that trustworthy observations might be made on the vertical and horizontal distribution of these food-stuffs and their dependence on the seasons. When we remember, that it is these inorganic substances, which are at the disposal of the marine plants in such small quantities, that they control the amount of the production in the sea, further, that marine animals are dependent on plants for their existence, nothing need be added to what has been said above to show the fundamental im- portance of these investigations of Prof. BRANDT. Other biological investigations — e.g. over the part played by the bacteria in the sea, on the occurrence and distribution of various plankton-animals (as Calanus finmarchicus) which form the main constituents of the food of fishes, also experiments to ascertain whether the fin-rays, vertebrae etc. of fishes vary when the eggs and young are reared in waters of low salinity — have also been taken in hand, but have not yet so far advanced, that the results can be published in this General Report. It is hardly necessary to call attention to the great importance of these biological investigations, even for the solution of fisheries problems. Just as the physical and chemical investigations are preliminary to the study of the hydro- graphical conditions, so the biological investigations and observations are necessary for the just understanding of fisheries problems. Only when exact knowledge of all the biological conditions and phenomena is to hand, will it be possible to form a true and reliable picture of the occurrence, distribution and migrations of the animals, and of man’s influence on their abundance. APPENDIX D PRODUCTION AND THE CONDITIONS OF PRODUCTION IN THE SEA Bish Ke BRANDT TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY H, M. KYLE att eS os ee oe ee ee ee Cf ee ae a din À dE, à PT PPT A ne practice of agriculture has received great benefits from scientific investigation of the cycle of chemical changes on land, by agricultural chemists, plant physiologists, bacteriologists, animal physiologists and by distinguished advocates of agricultural economy. It is now a question of utilising the experience and the results of investigation gained on land for an economy of the sea. It is self-evident that in this, we must take account of the special conditions which the organisms living in water experience as con- trasted with the life surrounded by air. As many results of science have already been adopted with advantage in the management of ponds, we may be allowed to expect that similar principles can be introduced into the management of the sea, in such a way that the natural production can be helped out in the most rational manner possible. For all investigations which have as end the ascer- taining of the productivity of a given area of water, a knowledge of the organic and inorganic changes in the sea and the discernment of the natural relations between pro- duction and conditions of production are quite indispensable. We have to thank V.Hensen! for the advancement of the aims and for the methodical grounding of all general marine biology. As I myself have been engaged in this field for 17 years, I have taken some pains to advance this branch of study as much as possible after the opportunity offered itself, with the organisation of the international investigations of the North-European seas, to make some voyages in the North Sea and Baltic on a German research-steamer, well equipped for scientific work, and to investigate some questions of general importance with the help of colleagues, also to improve the already existing methods so as to obtain results free of error. Just as on land, the true production in the sea, that is, the formation of new organic substance, arises exclusively from plant-life. It is only the plant which, owing to the possession of chlorophyll, can form organic materials from inorganic (carbonic acid, water and a number of salts) in the presence of light. The animals on the other hand, are all consumers; they must all take the organic materials necessary for the building up of the body and the maintenance of life from the plant-kingdom. On the death of animals and plants the complex organic substances which composed their bodies, break down again, in consequence of the activity of certain bacteria, into the same simple inorganic materials from which the plants construct organic substance. The determination of the true production depends therefore entirely on the plants, 1 Ueber die Bestimmung des Planktons oder des im Meere treibenden Materials an Pflanzen und Tieren. (5. Bericht d. Komm. z. wiss Unters. d. deutsch. Meere. 1887). 1* APPENDIX D: BRANDT SSA which occur in the sea chiefly in the form of extremely small chlorophyll-bearing organisms. The ocean in its entirety is comparable to very uniform and thickly populated pasture-land. The microscopic plants (diatoms, Peridineæ and fission-algæ), which compose this pasture, are distributed like the finest particles of dust through the upper water-layers, sufficiently permeated by light. It is only where the land rises above the oceanic pasture which covers the greatest part of our Earth, that larger plants, such as sea-weeds, red algae, green alge and sea grass, are found on the very narrow and also very defective ledge of the coast. On the thickly populated pasture — of the land as of the ocean — the stock of plant-life appears to be very scarce because the newly formed plant-substance is con- stantly being preyed upon, yet a closer investigation shows immediately that a very important amount of useful organic substance must in truth, be constructed in the course of the year. There is but one method for determining the production of plant-substance in the sea, namely, the plankton-method instituted in 1887 by V. Hensen of Kiel. This method seeks to determine, as exactly as is possible in anything, the quality and the quantity of the smaller plankton-organims contained in a column of water of known dimensions. ‘To ascertain the production for a region, it is necessary to make such hauls regularly once a week during a year at the same places. The same has to be done at other coast- places. The counting of the plankton, though it takes time, is quite indispensable, as it is only by exact numerical determination of the plants on the one hand and of the animals on the other, that we can estimate the production and consumption. For the commonest forms of plants and animals occurring in the plankton, we must determine by repeated investigation and observation, the rate of reproduction, the duration of the. various developmental stages under varying conditions and the total organic changes of the species concerned; also for the commonest animals, the amount of food required and the kind of food. All these must be determined before we can estimate the production from the numerical data, obtained from a series of observations extending over at least one year. This is best done if, for the few dominant plant-species, we consider the quantity taken in the first haul as capital, the reproduction as interest, and then from previous knowledge of the rate of reproduction, calculate the year’s production from the interest. After one more year the capital is again almost as small as at the beginning. The interest has all been consumed. From the quantity and species of the animals, as well as from their ascertained requirements in the way of food, we can prove catch by catch, if the consumption has been as great in reality as the calculation has made it. The production of plant-substance in the sea may then be compared with that on land by arranging the chemical composition, as to quality and quantity, along parallel lines. We may determine how much organic substance in general, and in particular how much albumen, fat and carbohydrates, are formed per unit of surface during the course of the year, on the one hand for land e.g. a pasture, on the other hand, for water. The two more closely studied, main groups of plankton-flora, the Peridineæ and the diatoms, are very nearly related in composition to the best forage, and in autumn the plankton of Kiel Bay has in general almost the same composition as pasture’. 1K. Brandt, Beiträge zur Kenntnis der chemischen Zusammensetzung des Planktons. (Wiss. Meeres- untersuch. III. Kiel 1898). ee APPENDIX D: BRANDT The very numerous hauls of plankton made during the German quarterly cruises, have been subjected to enumeration by Dr. Apstein, partly with Dr. Rauschenplat, in order to determine exactly, the horizontal and vertical distribution of the principal plankton- organisms in the regions of the North Sea and Baltic, and their relation to the seasons of the year. The results of the investigations for 1903 will be published this winter, those for 1904 not before next summer. The opportunity has been utilised also, to make special hauls for the investigation of the chemical composition of the plankton. A portion of this new material has already been worked out by Dr. Stiehr. Further investigations will also be set on foot to ascertain the structure, development, reproduction and habits, of the characteristic plant and animal forms of the plankton and their relation to other organisms, as well as to the outer conditions of life. Work is also being done on the plankton-methods, viz. comparison of the different nets, the quantities of the smallest plankton-organisms escaping through the pores of the nets, and the best method of quantitative estimation of the hauls. With respect to the last, Dr. Apstein has just published an essay in which he maintains the indispensability of counting the plankton and the unserviceableness of mere estimates ?. - Whilst these investigations are intended so to perfect Hensen’s plankton-methods that a great, coherent investigation of the true production (e.g. in the North Sea) may be made in the not distant future, other preparatory work is also being done, which will contribute to deepening and extending the value of the results reached by the plankton- investigations. The aim of these new investigations is to learn more definitely, the general conditions of production in the ocean and to determine the factors on which the produc- tion depends ?. As the existence of animals is dependent on that of plants, so are these again dependent on the general conditions of production for the amount of production. To gain information concerning the productivity of a region of the sea, it will probably soon be sufficient to make an exact investigation of the general conditions of production, which are very much simpler and more uniform in the sea than on land. For this, we shall require to take into consideration, the scarce but indispensable food-stuff of plants dissolved in the water, and also the intensity of light — both of which investigations have been but little pursued hitherto — as obviously, the varying amount of the production in the sea depends mainly on these two factors. This will only be possible, however, when we have made more detailed and extended investigations and are better informed than at present, of the natural relations between the conditions of production and the actual production. The plants produce just so much organic substance as is allowed by the general conditions of life in the land- or water-region considered, and in fixed relation to the amount of inorganic food-materials at their disposal. In this, however, they come under the law of the minimum. If one of the indispensable constituents of plant-food is present in very small quantities, the production is also small. The production ceases entirely if one of the indispensable constituents is absent. Almost all marine plants, macroscopic or microscopic, take the nourishing salts not 1G, Apstein, Die Schatzungsmethode in der Planktonforschung (Wiss. Meeresunters. Kiel). * K. Brandt, Ueber den Stoffwechsel im Meere, 1. u. 2. Abhandl. (Wiss. Meeresunters. IV. u. VI. Kiel. 1899 und 1902). : The prelimin- ary work al- ready carried out for the determination of the actual production in the North Sea and Baltic Theconditions of production Investigation of the nitrogen compounds APPENDIX D: BRANDT Ges from the ground, like land-plants and sea-grass — the only marine blossoming plant, but from the surrounding water. This holds good for all alge, for the small floating plankton- alge as for the ground diatoms and the larger fixed alge. The food of the alge, of by far the great majority of marine plants therefore, must consequently occur in dissolved condition in the water, and the sea-water itself is like a very weak solution of plant-food, which contains all the inorganic materials necessary for the formation of organic substance. If we consider the composition of the sea-water on the one hand and that of marine plants on the other, we find that there are but few isolated inorganic substances; and these are available for the plant-life in such relatively small quantities, that they — having regard to the law of the minimum — command the amount of the production in the sea. The substances of chief importance, according to the present state of our knowledge, are the inorganic nitrogen compounds (ammonia, nitrites and above all nitrates), salts of phosphoric acid and silicic acid. Very small quantities of these food-stuffs occur in sea-water, of many indeed only traces. For the building-up of organic substance in marine plants, the silicic acid is much more necessary than the nitrogen compounds, and these again are required in greater degree than the phosphates. Exact chemical analyses have therefore to be made with regard to the composition of the principal plankton-plants, in order to learn, how much they require of these food-materials which occur in traces. Further, detailed investigation is necessary concerning the content of sea-water in regard to these rare food-materials, in order to judge how poverty in the one case, richness in the other, may arise. Lastly, simple experiments are also wanted to test the correctness of the conclusions, which have already been won from the chemical analysis of the organisms and of water. According to the methods used in modern agriculture (ee: by employing a method recommended by Zuntz! for fresh-water ponds), we can determine the food-stuffs which are especially favourable to the growth of the various forms, and which of the food-stuffs is present in minimum quantities at certain times and in a certain region of water, by adding the separate food-stuffs, which possibly are present in minimum quantities, to the sea-water containing living plankton-plants to be investigated. The results of these three series of investigations must agree with one another. Also, for the further elucidation of the results gained, we require to have bacteriological investigations, investigations of the bottom and also of the composition of the water in general, in addition to the usual hydrographical investigations. Of these manifold investigations, which are quite indispensable for a deeper insight into what is going on in the sea, only a portion could at first be carried out. Above all, it is necessary to improve the methods for the quantitative determination of very small quantities of nitrogen compounds, also of silicic acid and phosphoric acid and to such an extent that trustworthy information may be gained regarding the horizontal and vertical distribution of these food-stuffs and their dependence on the seasons of the year. The greatest difficulties are presented by the nitrogen compounds, ammonia, nitrites and nitrates, which must be distinctly separated as much as possible. In his work recently published, on the method of the quantitative determination of nitrogen compounds in sea- water, Dr. Raben? has also given a number of values for the quantities of nitrogen 1K. Knauthe, Die Karpfenzucht, Neudamm 1901, p. 147 et seq. ? E. Raben, Ueber quantitative Bestimmung von Stickstoffverbindungen im Meerwasser, nebst einem Anhang über die quantitative Bestimmung der im Meerwasser gelösten Kieselsäure. (Wissensch. Meeresunters. VIII. Kiel 1904). Te APPENDIX D: BRANDT compounds occurring in the waters of the North Sea and Baltic. 44 samples of surface- water from the North Sea and Baltic contained on an average 0:08 mgr. of nitrogen pr. liter in the form of ammonia, and 0'189 mgr. of nitrogen in the form of nitrites and nitrates, altogether 0'279 parts of fixed nitrogen in a million parts of water. In the investigations of Raben so far published, a difference according to the seasons of the year is not clearly marked. We should expect, however, from general considerations, that the nitrates especially, which are the most important, would show a regular decrease or increase according to the seasons of the year. In the analyses made by Dr. Raben of the water-samples collected in 1904, such a difference appears very clearly both in the Baltic and in the North Sea, as is shown in the averages below. The number of the various samples analysed is given in brackets. 1 liter of surface-water from the open Baltic. Nitrogen as ammonia Nitrogen as nitrites and nitrates February (13)....... 0:068 mer. 0-199 mer. May (IBleccbodebose 0:065 » 0-170 » Auzust ISERE ECS 0:057 » 0:095 » 1 liter of surface-water from the open North Sea Nitrogen as ammonia Nitrogen as nitrites and nitrates February (12)....... 0:063 mer. 0'216 mer. EMA VAS) rae stoners. 0:065 » 0217 » NWSE, (1B) 564 eee 60 0061 » 0079 » It is of great interest, on the one hand, to see the agreement of the values for February and May, and on the other hand, the very small amount of nitrates during August, both for the Baltic and North Sea. The great diminution in the nitrates and nitrites during the warm period of the year 1904, | consider to stand in relation to the great decomposition of the nitrates and nitrites by the so-called denitrifying bacteria, which are more active in warmer than in colder water. Investigations are in progress at present, with the aim of reducing as much as possible the size of the error still occurring, though closely determined, in the quantitative deter- mination of nitrogen compounds. At the same time, it is also being determined why and from what circumstances, Dr. Feitel and I obtained different results in our direct examination of freshly obtained samples from Stettin harbour and mill-water in August 1904, from those obtained by Dr. Raben, who examined thoroughly, some weeks later, sterilised samples from the same regions. From the determinations of Raben, we may assess the average content of the water of the North Sea and Baltic in organic nitrogen compounds, at 0:2 parts at least in 1,000,000 parts of water. The question is now, if this amount is sufficient to explain the quantity of albuminous nitrogen in marine organisms. Earlier investigations! have shown that 1,000,000 parts of sea-water from Kiel Bay contain on an average only 0:03 parts (0:0097—0:052) of albuminous nitrogen. Consequently, about 7 times as much inorganic as organic 'K. Brandt, Beiträge zur Kenntnis der chemischen Zusammensetzung des Planktons (Wiss. Meeresunt. Bd. 3. Kiel 1898). Derselbe, Ueber die Bedeutung der Stickstoffverbindungen für die Produktion im Meere (Beihelte z. Botan. Gentralbl. XIV. 1904). APPENDIX D: BRANDT — À — nitrogen occurs in the western Baltic. Even in the case of the greatest quantity of albuminous nitrogen yet found, the quantity of fixed nitrogen occurring in inorganic form, is at least four times greater than that in the other form. For land-plants, such an extensive absorption of the food-stuffs, which must be taken from the ground through the roots, is impossible. It is also known, that the absorption- coefficient as regards nitrogen compounds, amounts to only a few per cent for the land- plants. That the small plankton-algæ can use up the food-stuffs to such an extraordinarily greater degree, is readily comprehensible when we consider, that they float in a solution, even though weak, of plant-food, that they take up the food-stuffs over their entire, relatively very large surface and that they are in general distributed in the upper, light- illuminated water-layers in a sufficiently uniform manner so as not to disturb one another too much in the absorption of the food-stuffs of their immediate surroundings. We may believe that the absorption-coefficient e.g. for nitrates, is greater than 50%. Conse- quently, the nitrogen compounds will be in sufficient quantities in general in the northern seas, even though it is not altogether excluded, that they may occur in minimum quantity at many seasons and under special conditions. It is quite different in the warm seas. It is a very striking fact, that the plankton- organisms occur, not in very much greater, but to all appearance in smaller, quantities in the tropical than in the colder seas in spite of better light and higher temperature, though we might expect and it has many times been asserted that they did. I have endeavoured in an earlier paper to explain this by the following hypothesis!: “If the denitrifying bacteria of the sea, like the closely investigated denitrifying bacteria of the land, develop a strongly disturbing activity at higher temperatures, only a relatively small production would take place in the warm seas in spite of much more favourable conditions (according to the law of the minimum), owing to the great disturbance amongst the indispensable food-substance; whilst, in the cold seas, more nitrogen compounds would be at the disposal of the producers owing to the retardation or suppression of the disturbing process.” It is necessary, therefore, to seek for the denitrifying bacteria in the sea and determine at what temperature they are most active. The first investigations have been made by Erwin Baur”, who showed that denitrifying bacteria with a high temperature- optimum occurred in Kiel Bay. By means of different culture-methods, Gran® has also discovered several species of another group of denitrifying bacteria on the Dutch coast. The German quarterly cruises gave us, later, many opportunities to add to and determine the wide distribution and relative abundance of both groups of denitrifying bacteria in the open North Sea and Baltic *. Sterilised culture-solutions according to the methods of Baur and Gran, were mixed during the cruises with I cc. of water or a small sample of the bottom-soil. These rough cultures taken at different seasons of the year showed different results. The Baltic was always found to be richer in these disturbing bacteria than the North Sea. In August ' Ueber den Stoffwechsel in Meere 1. u. 2. Abhandlung (I. c.). Ueber die demnächst beginnenden inter- nationalen Untersuchungen der nordischen Meere (Verhandl. V. Internat. zoolog. Congress. Berlin 1901). 2 Ueber zwei denitrifizierende Bakterien aus der Ostsee 1901. (Wiss. Meeresunters. Kiel. V]). 3 Studien über Meeresbakterien I. (Bergens Museums Aarbog 1901. Nr. 10). 4 R. Feitel, Beiträge zur Kenntnis denitrifizierender Meeresbakterien (Wiss. Meeresunters. Kiel. VII. 1903). K. Brandt, Ueber die Bedeutung der Stickstoffverbindungen für die Produktion im Meere (Beihefte z. Botan Centralblatt. XVI. 1904). nh) EE APPENDIX D: BRANDT 1902 and 1903, they occurred very commonly, but in August 1904, more rarely than at any period of year yet investigated. In general they seem — apart from this exceptional case — to occur in greater abundance in August and February than in May and November. All the samples of denitrifying bacteria, even those taken in February, thrive better in the warmth than in the cold. The two groups of denitrifying bacteria act differently physiologi- cally and their distribution is also different. The one group, reared in Baur’s culture- solution, occurs in general in greater quantities and more uniformly in the North Sea and Baltic than the other group reared in Gran’s culture-solution. Whilst the latter play their part on and in the bottom-soil chiefly, less on the surface, and are but seldom found in the middle layers, we may meet with Baur’s denitrifying bacteria in almost all layers of water and in the most varied bottom-samples. They occur almost always in the surface-water of the North Sea and Baltic, and they are even more numerous in the bottom-samples from the Baltic than Gran’s bacteria, but decidedly less than these in the bottom-samples from the North Sea. Though it appears from the general distribution of the denitrifying bacteria in the home-waters, that they play an important role in the sea, and though it appears very probable also, from the evidence regarding their better growth in warm water, that the relative richness of the cooler seas is connected with the smaller disturbance of the nitrates and nitrites, yet detailed investigation is wanted concerning the denitrifying bacteria of the warm regions of the sea and the content of the tropical seas in regard to nitrates and other nitrogen compounds. If such an investigation shows, contrary to expectation, that the warm seas have just as great or even a greater content of nitrates than the colder, then my hypothesis regarding the disturbing role of the denitrifying bacteria in the tropical seas cannot be maintained. We should then require to give a new explanatory hypothesis and investigate more closely. The other plant food-stuffs occurring but in traces, e.g. calcium phosphate and silicic acid, would then come into consideration. The termination of this further investigation will be gained most quickly by well-regulated rearing experiments with separate culture-solutions. First of all, our endeavours must be directed to make the methods of receiving and preservation, and of the quantitative determination of the silicic and phosphoric acids, as free of error as possible, and to determine for the home-waters the amount of these food- stuffs during the different periods of the year. Since the beginning of the quarterly cruises of the ‘‘Poseidon”, water-samples have been collected suitable for this purpose, and then examined in the laboratory by Dr. Raben for their silicic and phosphoric acids. Up to the present, Dr. Raben has only reported on the quantitative determination of the silicic acid dissolved in sea-water, based on values obtained from 25 analyses during the year 1903. If we also take into consideration the silicic acid determinations of water-samples taken in August and November 1902 and in February, May and August 1904, all made by Dr. Raben, we now have 61 quantitative determinations, 27 for the North Sea and 34 for the Baltic. The average of all these determinations is 0:91 mgr. SO, per liter, for the Baltic alone 0'978, for the North Sea 0°84. I give below, the average of the 34 analyses of the open water of the Baltic, the number of the various samples examined being given in brackets. Appendix D 2 Investigation of the silicic acid and phos- phates, dis- solved in sea- water APPENDIX D: BRANDT eg August 1902 (4) 1:037 November 1902 (3) 1:26 February 1903 (2) 1°45 May 1903 (1) 0°65 August 1903 (1) 0:93 November 1903 (6) 1:084 February 1904 (6) 1‘015 May 1904 (2) 0:655 August 1904 (2) 0:926 mgr. per Liter. These figures are of interest in several ways. From August 1902 on to November and then to February, the amount of the dissolved silicic acid increased. In May 1903, the amount was very small; it was greater in August and still greater in November. In February 1904, the amount was not so high as in the preceding year; but in May 1904, there was again a very small quantity which again increased towards August. If we exclude for the moment the abnormal value of February 1904, we obtain a curve which agrees with the annual changes in a group of plankton-plants, viz. the diatoms. This parallel would be still clearer, if investigations had been made in the intervals between the seasonal cruises. As shown first of all for Kiel Bay and then for other North-European waters also, the minimum of the plankton occurs in our waters in February and March (according to the year). Immediately afterwards follows the spring-maximum, which is caused by the luxuriant growth of the diatoms (chiefly Chetoceros). In the period from May to July or August, the total quantity of plankton organisms is relatively small. In late summer and autumn a second maximum occurs, which is smaller in volume than the spring-maximum and comes in part from the copious development of certain diatoms (especially Rhizosolenia), but chiefly from the fact that the large Peridineæ (Ceratium) have the main period of their development in October. As the number of the Ceratium gradually decreases towards February, the quantity of the plankton-organisms diminishes to a minimum. The spring maximum is to be explained from the circumstance, that the plant food- stuffs are greatly stored up in the winter — dissolved silicic acid amongst others — and then the rise of temperature and increased intensity of the light, render an immense production possible of quite definite diatoms (Chetoceros). These diatoms require a very large amount of silicic acid; the dried substance of Chætoceros consists of silicic acid to about one half, that of Rhizosolenia to about one third. Before the period of propagation in 1903, the water was richer in dissolved silicic acid than at any time previously. In conse- — quence of the very great demand for this food-stuff — occurring still only in small quantity — the conditions of nourishment became so bad, that the propagation ceased and the resting-stages were formed. In fact, after the diatom-maximum in May of both years, the amount of silicic acid was very greatly reduced. That the silicic acid occurs at a minimum at this time, and that the diatom-propagation is thus suddenly brought to an end, appears very probable from the fact, that about 1 part of diatom silicic acid occurs in a million parts of water at the period of the strongest increase of the diatoms. At this period the relation between dissolved and diatom silicic acid was about 1:1; it is thus many times more unfavourable that the relation between the inorganic and organic forms of the nitrogen compounds. In consequence of the small demand during the summer months, a similar enrichment of the water as regards silicic acid, again takes place in the period from May to August or September, and this in most years brings on a late summer maximum of diatoms, which soon disappears and is almost always much smaller than the spring maximum. It consists ies APPENDIX D: BRANDT mostly of Rhizosolenia, which require less siliric acid, so that a further increase in the dissolved silicic acid may go on in to November. It is not yet explained how the cessation of this second diatom maximum occurs, nor how it is replaced by the luxurious growth of Ceratium. The spring maximum of the diatoms is very different in different years, as I have shown from volume-curves in an earlier publication’. In 1891, the quite unusual case occurred, that the spring maximum of the diatoms was smaller than that of the autumn. The relatively small amount of dissolved silicic acid detected in February 1904, as shown above, leads to the conclusion that the spring maximum will have been unusually small in this year also. Such a conclusion stands in agreement with the great abnormality, that the Ceratium forms were already occurring in great quantities in the middle of June. If the diatoms have not increased so greatly in the spring of 1904, the silicic acid must have been used up so much, that only the minimum is present for Chetoceros, conse- quently, the other food-stuffs have been used in less quantities than usual and the Ceratium forms (constantly occurring in Kiel Bay) have been able to propagate very ah about two months earlier, in consequence of the greater nourishment. Though | have hitherto considered it almost impossible, that phosphoric acid could occur reduced to a minimum, basing this conclusion on the older information in literature concerning the amount of this important food- stuff in sea-water, yet, from the new analyses of Raben, which have given very much smaller values than the earlier investigations, | must recognise the probability that, just as the silicic acid is at a minimum at the end of the spring maximum, so the Ceratium propagation in autumn is dependent on the amount of dissolved phosphates. The fact that the autumn maximum is caused by the propagation of plant-species different from those of the spring maximum, shows that plants, with different food-requirements, find the most favourable conditions of life and above all of nourishment at the different periods of the year. According to the as yet unpublished investigations of Dr. Raben, concerning the best method of exactly determining the amount of phosphoric acid in sea-water, this amount seems to vary a great deal. In February and May, only a small quantity of phosphoric acid occurred (0:14—0-25 mgr. P, O, in the liter), but in autumn, a great deal usually (to 1°46 mgr. in a liter of Baltic water), so that much phosphoric acid is present at the beginning of the propagation-period of Ceratium. Rearing experiments on the commonest plankton-plants under the influence of different food-stuffs, offer a means of determining their food-requirements, and the most favourable composition of sea-water as a nourishment-solution for plants. From such experiments, with which I am at present engaged, it appears that the addition of calcium phosphate alone, in autumn, causes a very distinct increase of microscopic plankton-plants, whilst without this the propagation is extremely small. From similar experiments, Knauthe (l. c.) has already shown it to be in high degree probable, that the poverty of plankton, which has been remarked in ponds and freshwater lakes during the summer, is due to the lack of phosphates. As the method of quantitative determination of phosphoric acid in seawater has already been so far tested by the above-mentioned preliminary investigations, that accurate results may be expected, a large number of investigations on water-samples taken from the North Sea and Baltic at different times should now be made. These will show whether the phosphates occur at a minimum according to the period, e.g. in 1 Die Fauna der Ostsee, insbesondere die der Kieler Bucht (Verhdl. Deutsch, Zool. Gesellsch. 1897). 9" APPENDIX D: BRANDW a summer. From the analyses of the chemical composition of plankton-organisms, which Dr. Stiehr has carried out at Kiel during the past year, it has been determined, just as for land-plants, that Ceratium and Rhizosolenia require about 2°5 times as much nitrogen compounds as phosphates. Less phosphorie acid is thus absorbed than nitrogen. At the time when it is at a minimum therefore, the phosphoric acid must be present in the sea in still smaller quantities than the nitrates. We must remember, however, that owing to the high molecular weight of the phosphates, the absorption-coefficient for these, according to the law of osmosis, will be smaller than for the nitrates. APPENDIX E THE OCCURRENCE AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE EGGS, LARVÆ AND VARIOUS AGE- GROUPS OF THE FOOD-FISHES IN THE NORTH SEA ACCORDING TO THE INVESTIGATIONS OF THE BIOLOGICAL STATION AT HELIGOLAND BY FR. HEINCKE WITH 4 FIGURES IN THE TEXT (TRANSLATED FROM THE German By H. M. KYLE) CONTENTS Introduction ....... SR Un Meee Gar KAM Mone DA D euro Oba oe Mere de A. Apparatus and methods used = f 4 B. Method of determining the age of fishes ................... SE RL N 5 CM Statementzo athegresults PE EE ees ee eee nee Eu a Hy 1. Plaice (Pleuronectes platessa) ................ 5 2. Flounder (Pleuronectes flesus)........ 3. Dab (Pleuronectes limanda)................... 4 Long-rough dab (Hippoglossoides platessoides) ... . uals 5. and 6. Cod (Gadus morrhua) and DCS { Craie acglefinus REES 7. Whiting (Gadus merlangus).................-..-:- : RER NEN. \ 8. Concluding remarks....................... , ee Introduction The first condition for a right understanding of the habits and habitats of the food- fishes of the sea, and in general, of the production of the sea as regards useful fishes, is an exact knowledge of the occurrence and distribution of these food-fishes at all the various stages of their life,'from the ege on to the adult mature form. The plaice is the most important, ground-dwelling food-fish of the North Sea. In the interests of the sea- fisheries we wish to know, under what conditions the plaice lives in the North Sea, how it nourishes itself and reproduces its kind, whether an overfishing of the stock is going on, if it is a stationary or migratory fish in the North Sea, and whether, according to the answer to this question, an influx from other seas is occurring to compensate for the fish removed or not, and whether finally, fixed protective legislation at certain regions of the North Sea has a possible prospect of good results or not. In order to settle these and many other points, we must of necessity first investigate and determine above all possibility of objec- tion, the following facts. Where and when does the plaice spawn? Where and in what relative amounts are the free-swimming eggs and the planktonic larve hatched from them? When and at what size is the metamorphosis of the plaice-larve complete and does their life on the bottom begin? Where are these youngest bottom-stages of the plaice to be found, how fast do they grow there, and what size do these young plaice reach at the end of their first year? Where do they live and how large are they in the second, third and following years of their life? At what size and in what year of their life, do the plaice become usable for a rational fishery, at which age are they mature for the first time, and where do they frequent at that time and in the following years of their maturity ? How old can a plaice in the North Sea become in general and — in connection therewith — through how many years can they, by production of eggs, contribute to the maintenance of the stock? Do the plaice make regular migrations in the course of the year from one part of the sea to another, how far do such migrations extend and do the older plaice travel further than the younger? and so on. What we must know regarding the plaice first of all, holds also for the other important food-fishes, especially for the cod and haddock, and then also for the turbot, sole, dab, whiting ete. The Biological Station of Heligoland, as a cooperator in the international study of the sea, has endeavoured as far as possible to determine these points concerning the natural 1* APPENDIX E: HEINCKE a ee history of the food-fishes by special exact observations. It has been obliged in the main, to restrict its attention to the region specially assigned for the German investigations, i. e. the eastern and south-eastern part of the North Sea, and the western and southern part of the Baltic, but chief attention naturally was devoted to the North Sea. With regard ton the south-eastern portion of this sea — the true German Bight — we had already col- lected, long before the beginning of the international investigations, a large number of observations regarding the natural history of the food-fishes, which could now be utilised and their correctness tested by fresh investigation. The following have taken part in carrying out the investigations — both at sea as well as at the laboratory of the Station — the director Dr. Heincke, the subdirector Dr. Ehrenbaum, the scientific assistants Dr. Strodtmann, Dr. Bolau, Dr. Maier and Dr. Immermann. Ehrenbaum and Strodtmann have investigated the eggs and larvæ of the food-fishes; Heincke their youngest, fully-formed stages; Heincke, Maier and Immermann the determination of the age and maturity; the last-mentioned and Bolau the distribution of the older fishes; Bolau their food and their migrations as determined by the setting-out and recapture of marked fish. The following account of the most important results attained through the investigations of the Biological Station, is accordingly to be looked upon, as a comprehensive common report of all the workers mentioned. As already mentioned in the beginning, the observations on the natural history of the fishes are to form the basis for an exact knowledge in the future of the habits and con- ditions of life of the food-fishes, for a rational comprehension of the productivity of the sea as regards food-fishes, for an answer to the questions whether overfishing is taking place in the North Sea, if protective legislation is possible with any chance of success, and for many others. One may also add, that these observations are the only possible basis for many of these questions, for all but one absolutely indispensable. Several very serious demands are therefore made on the investigation of this region. The first of these demands is, that very many observations must be made, in order to gain the broadest basis for our future knowledge. Above all, it is necessary to obtain many continuous series of similar observations. We must take whole series of tow-nettings for eggs, for example, during the months-long spawning- period of a food-fish, such as the plaice or cod, at short regular intervals and simul- taneously if possible, at several places of the often widely-extended spawning region. Again, in order to determine exactly the occurrence of young plaice of the first and second year, we must fish for these at one and the same suitable spot with suitable apparatus throughout the entire year, if possible at weekly and not less than monthly intervals. To take a third example, in order to comprehend the migrations of the plaice within a fixed region throughout the year, e. g. in the German Bight, we must mark and set out not merely several hundreds but several thousands of plaice. Lastly, such series of observations, when once successful, must be continued for a certain minimum number of years, in the same manner as is done in other scientific fields with all series of observations, if the general rule, free from chance fluctuations, is to be learnt. = ies APPENDIX E: HEINCKE We must confess that the investigations of the Biological Station up to the present in no wise fulfil, and indeed could not fulfil, this demand for numerous and continuous observations. We have made our observations, partly by means of the research-steamer “Poseidon”, partly with the vessels of the Biological Station, in the neighbourhood of Heligoland and in the shallow waters (“Wattenmeer”) and estuaries of the German coast, from the island of Rôm in the north to Borkum in the west. It is only for the neighbourhood of Heli- goland, however, that we have gained continuous series of observations of moderate com- prehensiveness. This was not possible on the cruises with the Poseidon. From October 1902, when the voyages began, up to the present (beginning of November, 1904), it has been at our disposal altogether 122 days, and of these, 100 at most were working days at sea. In addition, we utilised the quarterly cruises of the Poseidon to make tow-nettings for fish-eggs at its stations, and occasionally also some hauls for the larger fishes. All these cruises, however, were not sufficient to make a satisfactory number or continuous series of observations; above all, it was unfortunately not possible to fish for the eggs, larve and youngest fully-formed stages of the fishes, at a larger number of places within the extended spawning grounds of our most important food-fishes, nor at sufficiently varied periods during the long duration of the spawning time. The following account of our results shows everywhere these gaps in the observations. They are the consequence of the manifold difficulties, which always arise at the beginnings of so extensive a work and can only be overcome gradually. The second demand, contained in the aim of our labours, requires that every single observation is to be of the greatest exactness possible, and that the facts are to be learnt as they are in reality. This demand for exact and certain observations is even more important than that of numerous observations. Its importance becomes clear at once, when we picture the difficulties which all observations still meet with at sea, simply on account of the sea, and consequently, the great danger there is of drawing hasty, wide reaching conclusions from imperfect, unsuccessful obser- vations. Some examples will illustrate this point. It may be desired to ascertain the occurrence or absence at a certain place in the North Sea of the pelagic eggs and larve of a food-fish, e. g. plaice; granted that the eggs and larvæ of this species are so well known that they can be distinguished from those of all other species with certainty. Long experience in this field has taught us that a certain observation can only be gained in such a case, when hauls are made after Hensen’s example with good egg-nets from the bottom to the surface, and not merely horizontally, but above all vertically. As we cannot fish well with one net everywhere and for all purposes, we must constantly employ several well-tried instruments one after the other, to obtain a trustworthy observation (we use 3 to 4 different kinds). The employment of a net in only one way — e.g. the hori- zontal surface net — will in all cases bring an uncertain, in many cases quite a false result. No eggs and larvæ at all may be caught, for example, though they are present in reality in quantities. The difficulties are quite similar if we wish to determine the occurrence and distri- bution of the fry of our food-fishes, after they have given up the larval stage or better called, the purely planktonic life, and have either changed to a complete bottom habitat or have reached such a size and capability of free movement, that they can no longer be counted with the plankton, helplessly subject to the movement of the water, even though APPENDIX EH: HEINCKE Gj in the free water over the bottom of the sea. Not only are quite other kinds of fishing apparatus required here than for the eggs and larve, but these new apparatus for young fish must also be of many different kinds and satisfy specially strict conditions, if they are to display the actual facts in any way exactly. In order, for example, to be able to deter- mine for certain, if the first, youngest stages of the plaice and dab (Pl. limanda) occur at a certain part of the bottom of the sea or not, we must employ a net with sufficient stretch to cover a large area, with a ground rope sufficiently sharp to bite into the ground and lastly with a mesh in the bag as small as possible, in order that small flatfish of 10— 12 mm. in length can be caught in it. With such apparatus, we must fish at the most different depths, from close to the shore to 100 m. and more, and sometimes slowly, some- times) fast; the latter especially, if we wish to take young gadoids like the cod and had- dock, as well as flat-fish. Again, other apparatus are necessary for the sure capture of the larger, active fish- larvæ, e.g. herring-larve, and young gadoids of 3—10 cm. and over, which swim in the | free waters of the upper and middle layers. They must have, especially, as wide a mouth as possible in order to be able to fish through a relatively large section of water; they must — at least at the hinder end — have sufficiently small meshes, and they must finally, also be strong and resisting and permit so much water to pass through, that they can be towed according to requirements with a moderately great velocity — several nautical miles per hour — without tearing or otherwise hindering their fishing-capacity. They must, lastly, be usable at different depths. All these conditions, again, cannot be fulfilled by a single kind of net alone; several different nets are constantly to be used at the same time, in order to be able to determine the true state of things. If only one kind of net is used, quite a false result may be obtained, e.g. the absence of a certain species, which really occurs in abundance. The experience, that very different and specially constructed apparatus are necessary, and that several of them must constantly be used at the same time, in order to determine for certain the occurrence of the eggs, larve and later young stages of the food-fishes, is one of the principal results of our investigations in this field. This experience holds also, however, for a much larger field in the investigation of the occurrence and distribution of the food- fishes, namely, for the capture of larger and the largest fishes. It may be considered cer- tain, that the practice of the sea fishery has no single net which takes all fish dwelling on the spots fished. Even more, there is not a single net which, even if it catches only a portion of the fish present of a species, e. g. the plaice, brings up a true, at least a natural, representation of the various sizes on the ground. The large otter trawl ordi- narily used in the deep-sea fishery of the North Sea, with about 90 foot head-line (com- mercial trawl), catches, for example, the small plaice under 12 cm. not at all or only in relatively very small quantity; they escape through the meshes. This same net, further, catches more flat-fish or more round fish, according to the nature of the ground rope and according to the rapidity of sailing during fishing. Smaller ground nets with smaller meshes, on the other hand, bring up naturally the small plaice under 12 cm., but of the larger kinds, they obviously take relatively much too few. Lastly, it must still be mentioned that there is, for large areas of the bottom of the North Sea — namely, all those with more or less stony rough ground — still no apparatus Se eS APPENDIX E: HEINCKE whatsoever, which can give us any trustworthy information regarding the fish-population of such grounds. The line-fishery is often the only means available here and it is a very untrustworthy method. It unfortunately yields no information whatsoever regarding the younger stages of the fishes. Although all these things are tolerably well-known, as a matter of fact, or should be known, they must always be repeated again, and they require the greatest consideration When it is a question of scientific fishery experiments and of the estimation of their results for wide-reaching conclusions, or for the formation of theories regarding the migrations of the food-fishes etc. We are of the opinion that very many wrong inferences have hitherto been made in this connection. Above all, it is necessary to strongly guard against drawing wide-reaching conclusions from negative results in scien- tific fishery experiments, and against building any hypothesis on them. On account of the undeveloped condition in which our technique of the scientific fishery is at the present time, it is, for example, practically never possible to conclude that no young plaice or young cod in their first year occur in this or that spot, because no one has as yet found them there. Only in single, quite few and quite special cases have we a certain right to make such a conclusion. On the other hand, the proof furnished by a positive observation is incontestable. We rely — especially in this account of our results — only on them. Positive results, however, have only sufficient value for further conclusions, when it is possible to distinguish with perfect certainty the captured eggs, larve and early young stages of food-fishes according to their true species. The difficulties here have also been greater than desirable, hitherto. For example, the eggs of two of our principal food-fishes, the cod and haddock, are not always to be distinguished from one another in the early stages of their embryonic development, and this holds also for the larve of some nearly related flat-fishes, especially when the pigment characteristic for the species is lost in preserving. Our observations have shown, that very many erroneous determinations are contained in earlier works on the larve and young forms of the food-fishes. The exact separation of the various age-groups of the food-fishes has proved to be quite an indispensable, though very difficult work. The methods used hitherto, of measuring the numerous fishes of a catch and then of distinguishing the age- groups by the maxima and minima of the curve constructed from the measurements, has - turned out to be very untrustworthy in most cases, and given rise to many wrong con- clusions. The discovery of Reibisch of Kiel, that the layers in the otoliths of fishes showed the periodic, that is, the yearly growth of the fishes, has first displayed the possi- bility of a true and exact determination of the age. We have devoted special attention to this matter and applied the investigations of Reibish on the otoliths, to many thousands of fishes. At the same time, similar signs of periodic growth have been found on numer- ous other parts of the bony skeleton of fishes, and closely studied. We believe we are in the position to record a number of positive and certain results from this work. APPENDIX E: HEINCKE BoP eae A. The apparatus and methods used 1. The fishing for planktonic eggs and larve. For this we have four different nets in use, two for vertical and two for horizontal fishing, or in other words, for quantitative and qualitative hauls respectively. A detailed description of these apparatus and the method we use in fishing with them, is given in the work of Ehrenbaum and Strodtmann on the eggs and young forms of the Baltic fishes (Wissen. Meeresunters. VI. Abteilung Helgoland. 1904. p.57 et seq.) The most important of these nets is the quantitative egg-net, designed by Hensen (see Hensen u. Apstein, “Ueber die Menge der im Winter laichenden Fische”. Wissensch. Meeresunters. II. Abteilung Kiel. 1897. p. 1 et seq.). It is furnished with silk- gauze No. III and so measured, that it filters vertically a column of water of ca. !/s m? by an average velocity of 0-5 m. in the second. Then the actual catch of the net has to be multiplied by 3, in order to obtain the number of the eggs and larve occurring under one square meter of the surface. The great importance of this net is twofold. Firstly, it fishes through the entire column of water from the bottom to the surface, and thus gives information whether eggs and larve occur at all at a definite spot in the sea. Secondly, it gives information regarding the quality, i.e. the relative abundance (per square meter of the surface) of the planktonic eggs and larve im a fairly large, uniform region of the sea. Numerous parallel hauls, which we have made with this net, have unmistakeably confirmed again and again the assumption underlying all Hensen’s quantitative plankton investigations, viz. that the fish-eggs and larve floating in the sea within a region of limited extension, are equally distributed. Consequently, the quantitative egg-net of Hensen is, in fact, the only apparatus at present, which can give us any, approximately true information with regard to the occurrence and quantity of the fish-eggs and larve of the different species. The information given below for the various species, has been gained with this net particularly. A fault of this net is, that it takes very small quantities of eggs, on account of its small dimensions. Thus, the occurrence of very sparsely distributed eggs of a species (1 or but a broken piece, per square meter) may escape detection, if no parallel hauls or only a few, are made with it. Also, the small number of the eggs and larve taken, is naturally a dif- ficulty otherwise. This is helped out by using the so-called large quantitative vertical ~ egg-net which has a diameter at the opening of 2:5m. (the foremost ring is in the form of a hinged closing hoop), and in a vertical haul filters the column of water contained beneath ca. 2 square meters of the surface. The manipulation of this large net is cer- tainly difficult and, especially in the superficial layers, untrustworthy, whereas it is of good service where, as in the eastern parts of the Baltic, the planktonic eggs are quite absent in the upper layers and only occur in the deeper. To take very large quantities of eges and larvæ, our qualitative horizontal nets are of use. A suitable apparatus for the surface layers is the well-known and often de- scribed Heligoland young-fish net, constructed by us. For horizontal fishing in the deeper layers, at a certain distance about 5 to 10m. from the bottom, we use the so-called Heligoland otter young-fish net which is described in detail and figured, in the work eee, = 9) — APPENDIX E: HEINCKE cited above of Ehrenbaum and Strodtman and in Appendix E of the Proceedings of Committee B, Amsterdam, December 19031. The bag of the net is constructed either of fine-canvas, canvas, so-called ‘iron’-yarn, or silk gauze Nol, and is about 3 m. long with a beaker or bucket at the end. This is made fast to a quadrilateral frame of gas-tubing ca.18mm. in diameter. On the under side of the frame, there is a zinced iron plate of 72 x 72 cm. surface, movable on hinges, which can be fixed by iron bars at an oblique angle of 125° inclining downwards and forwards — the so-called ‘shearing-board’: The whole net is connected with a wire warp of 7 to 8 mm. thick, by means of 6 wire bridles of the same thickness. The net is let down perpendicularly to the required depth, and the boat going quite slowly or even drifting, it fishes steadily almost horizontally at the fixed depth, as it tends to go down- wards from the strain on the rope and the resistance of the water pressing on the shearing- board. This net has proved to be very useful for the capture of the larve and young forms of the food-fishes, which occur usually in greater numbers in deeper layers of the water than in the upper, but it is also very useful for the qualitative fishing of eggs in deeper water. The net has already had a wider distribution and is at present being used in neighbouring countries. 2. The fishing for pelagic young fish. For these, we chiefly employ two different kinds of nets, in addition to the otter young-fish net, with which tolerably large, fully-formed young fish of several centimeters long are occasionally caught. Firstly, the so-called Hjort’s ring-net, constructed from the model of the net used by Dr. Hjort for pelagic young fish. A conical net of hemp of about 51/4m. long with a detachable bucket at the end, is fastened to a round ring of zinced gas-tubing 31/s cm. thick with a diameter of 2-60 m. The net is connected to a 7 mm. strong steel warp by means of 3 bridles each 4 m. long, and is towed very slowly or simply when drifting, through the water. To keep the heavy ring near the surface or above a certain depth, a skin or leather buoy is made fast to it with a sufficiently long line. This ring-net of Hjort’s fishes excellently the smaller pelagic young fishes, at various depths, but does not stand rapid towing and can therefore catch relatively few fish — the quick swimming young fish, as herring and mackerel etc., almost not at all. Our second pelagic young-fish net is the so-called Heligoland three otter-boards net which we have constructed for our own special purposes. It is an apparatus of the largest dimensions. The net is conical in shape, made of hemp, with 600 meshes round, 30 m. along the side, and so made that the size of the mesh decreases gradually through 20 stages from 8 cm. in front to 3/4 cm. behind; then follows a cylindrical sack of 4 m. in length with 600 meshes, */2 cm. wide, in the round. The sack can be closed behind. The opening of the net is hung to a hemp rope of ca. 2:7 cm. thick and is 45 m.in circumference. Three pairs of eyes or loops are made in the hemp rope at distances of 14 m. apart, to which the 3 otter-boards are attached by means of shackles. These 3 boards are of oak, 3 cm. thick, 1m. long and 70 em. broad, strengthened with iron bars. Of these boards, the two upper have quite the structure of trawl otter-boards and are also used by us for the Heligoland young-fish trawl, to be described below. The third or lower board is constructed somewhat differently ; it is weighted with iron only on one of the shorter borders, not as is usual on the longer 1 Conseil Intern. p. l’explor. de la mer: Rapports et Procès-Verbaux des Réunions. Vol. II. 1904. p. (62). Appendix E 2 APPENDIX E: HEINCKE — 10 — border, and this border weighted tends to go downwards in fishing. Each board is connected by 4 chains to a bridle of 12 mm. wire-warp; the three bridles are each 90 m. long and are shackled on to the large steel warp of the Poseidon. The manipulation of the net is done in the following manner. The warp with the 3 bridles runs from the winch over a large block fastened to a boom on the foremast, and on running out lets the 3 boards, lying loosely together with the attached net, go overboard into the water. When the 3 boards and the bridles are some distance out in the water and the ship is set in motion, the 3 boards spread out from one another in 3 directions, in consequence of their structure and the peculiar manner of fastening the chains to the bridles. The net thus opens of itself and remains open so long as it is pulled through the water. The width or stretch of the net depends upon the speed of the ship, the depth in which it fishes and the length of warp out. If the net is quite open, it has a triangular opening of about 100 square meters, if only ?/s open — which is more frequently the case — it has always still 50 square meters as the area of the opening. The advantages of this net, which has proved an excellent net, are various. Firstly, the easy and convenient manipulation from the steamer, where a steam-winch, strong, steel warps and a boom are disposable for shooting the net. Then the possibility of towing relatively fast — we fish ordinarily with a speed of 3 to 5 nautical miles per hour and mostly foran hour. Thirdly, the size of the net, which, along with the speed, allows, not only the pursuit of the young fish through large stretches of water and the catching of many, but also the capture of larger fish. For example, we have taken herring up to 24 cm. in length with it (in January 1904, we caught in an hour’s haul in the mouth of the Elbe, ca. 5400 herring and sprat of 7 to 16 cm. in length), also whiting — up to 26 cm. in length, and plaice and flounder of similar size. On the other hand, the net also catches small, even the smallest young fish and larger larve of 1 cm., also smaller, in. quantities. Fourthly, the possibility of fishing in all layers of water, even just above the ground. Thus, in the Skager Rak we once let out a length of 350 meters warp, and the net was for some time on the ground. It brought up various whiting and haddock up to 35 cm. in length, and smaller ground-dwelling animals such as sea-urchins, polyzoa etc. In July 1904, we made two parallel experiments with Hiorts ring-net and the 3-otter-boards net, at the same spot on the slope of the western Skager Rak, over 109 m. in depth; both times the hauls were made at slow speed, for one hour close to the surface. Hjort’s net brought in 130, the 3-otter-boards net about 1000 young fish of 2-5 to 11 cm. in length, the larger of which were only in the latter net. On hauling in the 3-otter-boards net, it was observed that many, obviously hundreds of fishes, probably young, escaped through the meshes and were lost. A fault of the net is that it lets many young fish escape, as mentioned above, as the meshes are only small enough in the hinder part of the net. If we make the meshes smaller in front, the permissible speed and the power of resistance of the net are distinctly lowered. Perhaps it is advisable to construct a smaller, similar net in addition to our large one, which would have smaller meshes of about 3 to 4cm. at the opening. 3. The fishing for small and the smallest bottom-stages of the young fishes. After we had, at the beginning of our investigations, used the so-called Petersen trawl suggested by ©. G. Joh. Petersen, we constructed in consequence, a specially small net re es eS” lO ee t-on Es Ë int APPENDIX E: HEINCKE with bag of very small meshes, for the capture of the youngest bottom-stages of the food- fishes. We call this apparatus the new Heligoland young-fish trawl. It is a trawl of 20 m. in length, 5 m. in the wings in front, 3 m. in the bag and 12 m. in the true middle part of the net. The ground-rope and head-rope measure each 14 to 15 m. in length. The two wings, which each join on to ‘3 of the front part of the middle portion of the net, are constructed in the same round shape as the middle portion. The ground rope is a so-called leaded rope, i.e. a hemp rope with lead weights round it. The width of the meshes of the net, decreases from ca. 4 cm. in front to '/2cm. behind, by 9 stages; the mesh in the bag, which is 3 m, long, is also '/ em., and is reduced on tarring the net to 4mm. The bag is closed by a rope. The same two otter-boards are used in this trawl, as serve for the upper boards of the 3-otter-boards net. The chief differences between this and the ordinary otter-trawl are, that the upper and lower parts of the net are exactly alike; it differs from Petersen’s trawl by its smaller length and the quite different structure of the wings. Its great capacity for taking the bottom-fishes seems to be due to this special construction, as well as the leaded ground-rope and the small size of mesh in the bag. It bites deep into the ground right from the wings; the edges of these are arched inwards like the middle portion of the net; lastly, the small mesh does not permit even the smallest of the bottom fishes to escape. We fish with this Heligoland young-fish trawl at all depths and even on tolerably rough ground, usually however but a short time, about 15 to 30 minutes and with the low speed of 1 nautical mile per hour. With longer fishing, the net fishes so well and is often so full, that it is difficult to get it in and it may be torn, though on the whole, it has the advantage of great resisting power. This net undoubtedly catches the youngest stages of all our food-fishes; we can well believe this at least, for the plaice, dab, long-rough dab, whiting (G. merlangus), cod, haddock, Gadus Esmarki and others. We have not rarely obtained several hundreds of the commoner species from the most different depths down to 140 m., thousands indeed in a single short haul of 20 to 30 minutes; in addition also, numerous individuals in older stages and even quite large specimens, 50cm. and more. The catches of the various invertebrates of all classes were, in many cases, enormously large. As a specially striking proof of the great fishing capacity of this net, it may be mentioned that we have taken the interesting small gobioid, Crystallogobius Nilssoni, which has hitherto been considered a rare fish, in thousands of specimens. A second net we employ for the capture of ground-dwelling young fish with good results, is the so-called shrimp-net or trawl, which the fishermen of our shallow seas (“Wattenmeer”) use for catching Crangon vulgaris — but with the difference, that we fix the net to otter-boards instead of a beam, and make the bag of the same thick material as for the Heligoland trawl. The shrimp trawl differs from the Heligoland traw] by its smaller size (10 m. in length, of which 3m. go to the bag; 6m. in breadth, in front) and by the complete absence of wings. It fishes just as sharply and is usable in the same depths as the other — but it catches much less. . 4 The fishing for the larger bottom fish. For this purpose, we ordinarily use on our research-steamer the large otter-trawl with ge APPENDIX E: HEINCKE Rot 90 foot head-line, as used on the German steam-trawlers. We vary the experiments with this net, employing different kinds of ground-rope and different cod-ends (with different sizes of mesh). Further, we employ a smaller otter-trawl of only 50 foot head-line, the so-called Hjort’s trawl from data given by Hjort. We have not yet used a beam trawl on the Poseidon. On the motor boat of the Biological Station at Heligoland, we employ mostly a small otter-trawl of 50 foot head-line, also a small beam trawl. B. The method of determining the age of fishes We begin here with the determination of the age of the plaice and other flat-fish by means of the otolith-rings. It was first pointed out by Reibisch, that the otoliths of the plaice showed alternating dark and white rings in addition to a white kernel by reflected light, and that a dark and white ring together denoted a year’s growth. Along with the Kiel naturalists, we have extended these investigations on the otoliths to other fishes, and have deepened the entire investigation and examined the otoliths of . many thousands of fishes. If we examine, in the summer months, the young plaice of about 30 to 50 mm. in length, which have been born without any doubt in the beginning of the same year and therefore belong to the O-group, according to the notation used by C. G. Joh. Petersen and adopted by us, we find that the otolith by reflected light shows: an inner white kernel and an outer dark more transparent ring. The inner kernel consists frequently, further, of an inner small, particularly white, kernel point, round this a thin darker ring — the inter- mediate kernel ring, and a broad white ring — the kernel ring which forms the chief mass of the kernel. If we now examine other young plaice of about 100 to 150 mm. in length, caught on the same ground and at the same period of the summer when the 30 to 50 mm. plaice are taken, we find the otoliths very different; they consist now of white kernel, dark ring, white ring, dark ring. Such plaice belong to the so-called I-group of Petersen, that is, they have lived one full year. In plaice of 180 to 220 m. in length, examined in the summer, the rings of the otoliths of the I-group are increased. by another white and dark ring; we have here the II-group of over two full years and so on. Consequently, the number of the completed years a plaice has lived, is indicated by the number of the white otolith-rings which are present outside the kernel. This method of determination is, according to our thorough investigations, always reliable. We find further, that the white rings contain more organic substance than the dark, the latter more inorganic; also, that the former are formed in spring, the latter in summer and autumn; and that the growth of the otoliths ceases probably for a time in winter, from which arises a sharper boundary between an inner dark ring and the next following white ring. In the plaice, the first 4 to 6 white rings succeeding the kernel, can usually be very clearly distinguished. In larger and older plaice, the otolith becomes thicker and more — 13 — APPENDIX E: HEINCKE opaque, and the new annual rings appearing become thinner and thinner, so that the deter- mination of the age from the otoliths becomes more uncertain, even when sections are made. As the majority of all the plaice taken in the North Sea are, however, not over 6 years old, this difficulty is not much met with in practice. It is especially remarkable, that the investigation of the otoliths almost always permits, with sufficient certainty, the separation of the 0-group of plaice, i.e. those which have not yet completed one full year and are thus in the year of their birth, from the plaice of the I-group and later years. The results of our method in analysing a catch of plaice according to number, size and age, and the value of this analysis for the determination of the age can be seen from Curve of Sizes --0----0----0-- a --1----1----1-- | Curve of the various age-groups 130 Den with 0,1, 2, 3 and 4 white --8----8----3-- otolith-rings (Age-groups0—IV) 120 --4----4----4-- cm 10 Il le 13 4h 15 ie 18 9 CO CELUI SN RECENSE: NT ES) EEE TN) Fig. 1. Analysis according to size and age, of a catch of plaice made with the 90-foot trawl on Sylt inner-ground on March 19th 1904 (1024 specimens) the accompanying curves (Fig.1). The otoliths of all the plaice represented here (1024), the result of a single catch, have been examined for the number of white rings. It will be observed that, (1) groups of 5 years occur together, one however greatly predominant, in number, (2) the curves of sizes of the separate groups greatly overlap, (3) the maxima of the curves 1, 2 and 3, representing the age, have exactly the same position as the 5 maxima of the curve of sizes and (4) the average difference in length between the I- and II-groups is about 6 em., that between the II- and III-groups about 8 cm. From such differences we may perhaps learn, in what year of life the plaice of the North Sea grows most in length; to judge from this case, it is about 8 cm. on the average in the third year against 6 cm. in the second year. In other flatfishes, especially however in the gadoid food-fishes, the otoliths do not APPENDIX E: HEINCKE AY EE form such favourable characters for the age-determation as in the plaice, owing to their irregular lines or their relatively greater thickness. The separation of the 0- and I-groups can be made here also, almost always without great difficulty, but the older stages are often very difficult to distinguish or not at all, by means of the otoliths. It was desirable therefore, to discover, if possible, still other anatomical signs of the age. First of all, the scales had to be thought of, as undoubted age rings had long ago been discovered in them, e.g. in the carp. Recently also, J. Stuart Thomson had closely studied, with some success, the age-layers on the scales of sea-fishes. We have also examined the scales and found them useful for the determination of the age in a few fishes, e.g. in the lemon dab (Pleuronectes microcephalus). We have soon discarded the scales, however, as we discovered other organs more suitable. An extensive and thorough investigation of all parts of the bony skeleton showed us the noteworthy fact, that the growth in length, breadth and thickness of all bones of the skeleton, is periodic and that the longest of these growth-periods, viz. the year, was constantly marked in special layers, though with very different degrees of clearness in the different bones, and only in relatively very few with a sharpness suitable to a rapid, certain and at the same time, practical determination of the age in practice. The investigation showed further, that in the bones when air-dried, just as in the otoliths, two layers always belong to each year’s ring, one white and one dark and transparent by reflected light. The white layer contains more bony cavities and is, correspondingly, relatively poorer than the dark layer in connective tissue with fixed calcareous matter. The yearly growth, which probably ceases completely in winter, as in trees, begins always with the formation of a white layer, then is continued with the dark layer and ends usually with the form- ation of boundary lines more a less sharply marked. The bones which display the age-layers most clearly are, in general, the vertebre, especially the inner aspects on the walls of the cavities between the vertebre, further the flat bones of the gill covers, especially the sub- and interoperculum, lastly, certain parts of the bony shoulder girdle and pelvic girdle, especially the coracoid and scapula. To these may be added, the so-called urostyle and the neighbouring bones, forming with it the end of the vertebral column, viz. the epural and hypural bones, certain parts of the SHENOY apparatus of the jaw, the hyomandibular. It is not the same bones of the skeleton in all species, which show the age-layers most distinctly. In the plaice, it is the vertebre — the rings on the inner side of the cone — and the sub- and interoperculum, which determine the age almost as clearly as the otoliths. This holds also for the turbot. In the sole, it is practically only the verte- bre that can be used. In the gadoids, the flat bones of the pectoral girdle, the coracoid and scapula, are best suited for the determination of the age, especially in the cod which, for the rest, is one of the most difficult species on which to determine the age. For the haddock, the vertebre especially are very useful, and quite exceptionally, likewise the rounded swollen lower part of the Clavicula of the shoulder girdle, characteristic of this species; a section across this bone is usually sufficient for a certain determination of the age. In the herring again, the vertebræ are very suitable, also, especially for the O-, I- and II-groups — the bones of the gill-cover. The proof, that these layers in the bones are just as good age-layers as those of the otoliths, can be undoubtedly displayed by us and others from numerous comparisons, e. g. ee nee APPENDIX E: HEINCKE the number of the otolith-rings agrees with the number of rings on the vertebre in one and the same fish. The extension of the age-investigations from the otoliths to other parts of the bony skeleton of fishes, gives an essentially wider and more certain basis than hitherto, for the determination of the age. The information they give, render it possible above all, to detect and to distinguish also the age of the older and the oldest stages of the food-fishes. For example, the annual rings on the bones of the gill-cover enable one to detect with certainty, that large plaice from 60 to 70 cm. in length are 20 years old and more, and that, from the 8 year onwards, the yearly growth in length is small in comparison with the earlier rate of growth and decreases more from year to year. A turbot of 19 pounds weight (21 lbs. English) is at least 11 years old, a large cod of 100 to 120 cm. 9 to 11 years. Large Norwegian herring of about 300 to 350 cm. in length are 6 to 8 years old. C. Statement of the results It may be explained in the beginning, that special cruises for the investigation of the egos and larvæ of the food-fishes, were only made by our research-steamer “Poseidon” during March 1903 and 1904, in July 1903 and in June 1904. On the other hand, in the important spawning months of January and February, either no hauls at all could be made or only in February during the hydrographical seasonal cruises, and then, only quali- tative hauls for the most part. During 1902, 1903 and 1904, eggs and larve were also sought for during the May seasonal cruises, mostly qualitatively, more rarely also quanti- tatively. Cruises with the Poseidon for fishery investigations, for the young and larger fish, were also made in October and November 1902, in March, July and September 1903 and in January, March, June and July 1904. It must also be specially mentioned here, that everywhere, where a series of hauls of all kinds was made, the temperature and salinity were also determined. 1. The plaice (Pleuronectes platessa) Eggs and larvæ. Plaice eggs were fished by us during the March cruises in such small quantities, that we must believe that the spawning period of the plaice was practi- cally over by this month. A further sign of this was, that just as many larve (74) as eggs, were taken altogether (all the vertical hauls taken together). The largest quantity of eggs and larve was taken on the Gth of March 1903, N.W. from Heligoland near the 40 m. line (German Station I), namely, about 32 per square meter of surface; almost as large a number was met with close to this spot, both to the north (Sylt outer ground) and to the south (N. from Terschelling), but only on the 40 m. line. Smaller quantities were also found nearer to the land, about the 20 m. line, both in the southern and northern parts (to 56° N. L.) of the region sailed through. In the open North Sea (Great Fisher Bank, Dogger Bank), plaice eggs were often met with singly but APPENDIX E: HEINCKE 2G never in great quantities. Of the larve, some were often far on in development (stage when the fin-rays were forming), so that from this also, it may be supposed that the height of the spawning period was already over. On the May cruises, plaice eggs were no longer met with in the North Sea, here and there, however, larvæ and several times older stages, but never in any quantity. In the hauls made in the open North Sea, on the Dogger Bank and Great Fisher Bank, these larvæ were obtained only very rarely!, e.g. once on the northern part of the Great Fisher Bank and on the western edge of this bank (German Station IV); more frequently, though still on the whole rarely, on the stations near the coast within the 40 m. line, in the north near to the Jutland coast and in the south in the German Bight. The small number of plaice larve, also of the younger plaice (without fin-rays) met with in May, leads one to suppose that the largest quantity of these had already taken up the bottom habitat. Amongst the numerous young flat-fishes in the latest planktonic stage, which were taken in July, the plaice never occurred in the open North Sea. The planktonic plaice larvæ, according to our observations in the North Sea, reach a length up to 17 mm., yet, as a rule the metamorphosis to the adult form and the pelagic life, are ended at 14 to 15 mm. in length. The youngest bottom-stages and the O-group. The smallest completed bottom-stage of the plaice observed by us (incomplete stages i. e. still in the process of metamorphosis, were never found on the bottom), measured about 13:5 mm. in length. We have taken these earliest bottom-stages, and the somewhat larger stages to 50 mm. in length, from the beginning of June to the end of August, and with but isolated exceptions only within the 20 m. line in the immediate neighbourhood of the land, mostly on sandy ground, more rarely on muddy ground. We have hitherto obtained the youngest stages from 14 to 25 mm.in length, always and only when we fished with suitable small-meshed hand-nets and shove-nets quite close to the shore in 0—3 m. in depth, thus within the tidal region; for example, at the base of the rocks and on the sandy island at Heligoland. At the latter place we take them, for example, in June, often in quantities in the so-called “Seyen”, that is, the small, shallow pools left on the beach of the island at ebb-tide, in whose loose sand warmed by the summer sun the small plaice like to revel. The somewhat older bottom- stages of the O-group (from 25 to 50 mm. in length) were mostly found at the same spot, but also in smaller numbers further out, 2 to 4 nautical miles from land, on somewhat deeper ground, 10 even 20m. in depth. On the 9th and 10th of July 1903, we caught 2 small plaice of about 30 to 40 mm. in length, with the Heligoland trawl on sandy ground in 16 and 25 m. depth, the one 20 sea miles W. from Amrum, the other about 25 sea-miles from land at Vyl lieht-ship.‘ In the open North Sea, we have only once taken a small plaice of the 0-group in our numerous hauls with the Heligoland trawl and the shrimp trawl, which otherwise brought up many thousands of small young fish, especially many young flat-fish of the species Limanda and Drepunopsetta. This specimen was 48 mm. long and was taken on the South-west Patch of the Dogger Bank, where we fished on fine sandy ground within 19 to 32 m. Its otoliths showed no white ring round the kernel. 1t would be of the 1 The determination of these larve with certainty, and especially their separation from the dab (Pleur. limandu), leaves much to be desired on defective preservation. a aa — 17 — APPENDIX E: HEINCKE greatest interest to learn, whether such plaice of the O-group occur frequently and regu- larly on this south-west patch of the Dogger Bank, the shallowest part of the open North Sea. The still older plaice of the O-group, of over 50 mm. in length, have been fished in very large quantities in late summer and autumn, but with few exceptions, always within the 20 m. line and here almost constantly in the neighbourhood of the land, especially, on the shallow sands of the Elbe and Weser estuaries in the “Wattenmeer” and imme- diately off the shallows of the German coast. The 0-group occurs here, without exception with the I-group. Both groups considerably overlap as to size. Towards the end of their first year, i.e. in December, the young plaice reach an average length of about 7 to 8 cm., from 9 to 10 cm. as a maximum, according to our observations in the German Bight of the North Sea. We have, unfortunately, not made any extended obser- vations as yet, regarding their habitat in winter. The plaice of the second year, therefore of the I-group, which have lived a complete year, reach an average length of 13 to 16 cm. in the German Bight of the North Sea, from 18 to 20 cm. as a maximum. These also, we have only taken — with very few exceptions — within the 20 m. line, where, with the plaice of the third year (U-group), they form the great mass of the so-called under-sized plaice on the young- fish grounds. The richest of these young-plaice grounds lie off the islands of Amrum and Sylt in the north, off the mouths of the Elbe and Weser in the centre, and off the islands of Juist, Borkum, Ameland and Terschelling in the west. The third year’s group of the plaice just mentioned (Il-group), reach an average size of 18 to 20cm., about 25 to 28 as a maximum. We have found it in great quanti- ties within the 20 m. line, outside this line also, though in smaller quantities, as far as the 40 m. line, but beyond the latter line only very exceptionally. It is the fourth year’s group of plaice (III-eroup), with an average length of 25 to 27 em., which is first caught in quantities worth mentioning in the open North Sea beyond the 40 m. line, although it has also been met with in greatest numbers within that line. These discoveries — which, it must be remenbered, are limited to the period March to October — have shown without exception the noteworthy fact, that the occurrence of the young plaice, from the coast to the open sea, is arranged like the steps of a ladder as regards the increase in size; the smallest and youngest occur quite close to the land, the largest and oldest the furthest out. The curves added here (Fig. 2) give the percentages of 7 hauls of plaice made by us on the 23:4 and 24'k July 1903, on a ground to the north-west of the island of Juist as far as the 40 m. line: 5 hauls with the 90-foot trawl and 2 with the Heligoland young- fish trawl. We see (1), that the number of plaice caught increases as we pass from the open sea towards the coast, (the number 1561 of the haul made close to the land with the Heligoland trawl, should be multiplied several times for a true comparison, as this haul lasted only 35 minutes, whilst those with the large trawl were always much longer, from 2 to 4 hours); (2) that the average size of the plaice steadily decreased from the sea towards the land, from about 24 cm. to 9 cm. The two parallel hauls with the large and the small trawl (V and Va) at the same place, are worthy of remark; they show very clearly, that the hauls with the large trawl do not take all the size-groups present, and Appendix I 3 APPENDIX E: HEINCKE = gos that many more of the smaller plaice are only retained by the narrow-meshed young-fish trawl. Just as remarkable is the fact, that a haul with this latter net, on the same spot and immediately after haul I with the large trawl, brought in only 5 plaice, of which none were under 24cm. in length. From this we may conclude that smaller plaice, than those shown by curve I, did not really occur there in any quantity worth mentioning. I. 40m. 70sm. fr.Land, 133 plaice 90 f. Trl. % 30 er IT. 37m. 50&m.- — 116 — = i N TII. 30m. 30sm.- — 121 — = % 28 si IV. 25m. 16sm.- —- 767 — = Pe : va Sm ined aes = Hebets oy Hi : i Ya r VI. Ym, 2sm.- — 1561 — |= % 22 % 20 % 18 % 16 % 14 % le % 10 % 8 % 6 % 4 | i % 2 i an UE 2 Fy ER ODN NN tm 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 2 30 82 34 #36 38 52 65 Fig.2. Analysis of 7 hauls of plaice with the 90 foot trawl (I—V) and the Heligoland young-fish trawl (Va & VI), arranged according to size. The numbers are the percentages of the total caught each haul. The 7 hauls were made on the 23rd and 24th of July 1903, on a line north-west from the island of Juist as far as to the 40m. line. The results of the 7 hauls just mentioned. are again represented graphically in the accompanying table (Fig.3) in somewhat different form, in order to show the relation between the size of the plaice and the depths and distance from land more clearly. With regard to the distribution of the various size-groups of the plaice in the winter months, we still lack sufficiently numerous observations. It is probable, that the relations are somewhat different from what they are in the summer. Many places of the coastal waters within the 20 m. line, where small and medium plaice, to 30 cm. in length, are caught in quantities in the summer, are fished in winter without result, at least from November to February, as e.g. in the neighbourhood of Heligoland. On the other hand, it has repeatedly been shown by positive results, that relatively more large plaice of 40 to 60 cm. occur even on these grounds in winter, from January to March, than in summer. a= OP APPENDIX E: HEINCKE . Otherwise, the plaice of the older years (6 and over) are relatively, and indeed absolutely, more numerous beyond than within the 40 m. line. The two sexes of the plaice. Commencement of maturity. We have determined the sex of very numerous plaice and found, (from 43,500 specimens in round numbers), that in every 100, about 53 are males and 47 females on the average. Within our region of observation the females are, on an average, somewhat larger than the males at the same age; how much larger they are, cannot as yet be exactly determined. So far as the age is concerned, at which the plaice becomes mature, i.e. spawns for the first time, we have not found a single female which did not possess at least 4 white otolith rings and had therefore completed 4 full years, amongst the plaice which were undoubtedly ripe and whose otoliths were examined. On the other hand, we found several males which were ripe after 3 full years. The average size 0. 6 0 6 a % 30 35 0% 505m 75 80 Sm of the plaice at first- maturity in the Ger- man Bight of the North Sea is for the males, about 30 to 35 cm. for the females 35 to 40 cm. The yearly in- crease of growth in the plaice is greatest in the 2rd to the 4 year, especially in the 3", according to our investigations; HO : . : " th ee Me Fig. 3. Distribution of the plaice caught in the 7 hauls mentioned, graded BANOS WAS CM TENT according to depth, distance of the fishing-ground from land, and their maturity, the yearly average size. growth gradually be- comes less and is very small in the older stages. We have examined some large plaice of 66 to 70 em., which were certainly 20 years old and over that, and had consequently spawned 15 times and more. Unfortunately, we have caught relatively few large plaice, as yet, of over 55 cm. in length, probably because we have made relatively few hauls in the open North Sea and it appears from our observations already mentioned, that the largest and oldest plaice are caught furthest out in the sea. We have not been able, as yet, to determine from our own observations, at what parts of the North Sea the spawning or fully-ripe plaice collect together in large shoals. The Spawning time must occur between January and April, with the maximum probably in February, but hitherto, we could only begin our investigations as a rule in March. A moderate number of large ripe plaice was twice taken in this month, 30 sea-miles N.W. from Heligoland and on the Oyster Bank; a smaller quantity was found c. 65 sea-miles N.W. on the 40 m. line, in the so-called Clay Deep, the southern mud bank on the southern part of the Jutland Bank. These discoveries of spawning plaice were made in 3" Juist Distance from land in sm. 40 m. Line SLOOPY UL syIdeq 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 S009 155 60 °65 70 75 80 Sm. APPENDIX E: HEINCKE == Of the same region where the plaice eggs were found in March. It may be considered, that a spawning ground has thus been discovered W. and N.W. from Heligoland between this place and the 40 m. line. At the end of September, we caught a number of large plaice up to 60 cm. in length on the Great Fisher Bank and north of this on the Fladen ground. Amongst these, the spawn was running from one female of 60 cm. in length, and several males were nearly ripe. We have examined a large number of plaice with regard to the degree of matu- rity of the sexual products. This is a method partly of distinguishing between the ovaries and testes which have never spawned and those which have spawned at least once, i. e. it can show the limits between the unripe and ripe plaice. Hitherto, this examination of the sexual products has been the only sure way to determine ripeness; the signs given by C. G. Joh. Petersen of the beginning of maturity — the appearance of rough scales on the gill-covers and fin-rays in the males, and in both sexes the appearance of white rings round the red spots — are uncertain. According to our observations, it is true, the really ripe males always have rough scales to a more or less extent on the gill-covers and fin-rays, in contrast to the quite smooth females, and this roughness is as a rule quite absent from many young and still obviously unripe males; it is clear, therefore, that this secondary sexual character, as a matter of fact, does develop at the age of so-called puberty (first on the fins, then on the cheeks), but it does not make its appearance at a sufficiently well-defined period, but so gradually, that a sharp distinction of the ripe from the unripe males is impossible by its means alone. The appearance of the white rings round the red spots is quite useless for the determination of first-maturity; they occur rarely, it is true, before this period, but they are also very often absent or extremely slightly deve- loped in plaice distinctly mature for a long time, even as large as 60cm. Probably these rings are more strongly developed in the main, only at the actual spawning time. The investigation of the sexual organs enables us also, to ascertain the interval which elapses between the end of one spawning period and the beginning of another, and the rapidity with which the formation of new sexual products proceeds. We have observed, that the most developed sexual products in the middle of July have reached stage IV on our scale, the majority however, only II—-III or III, that is, the eggs were clearly recognisable with the naked eye or at most already flattened against one another. On the 8 of July 1904, we caught 10 large plaice of 40 to 56cm. in length, north from the Dogger Bank, the sexual products of most of which were in stage III—-IV, but one female of 53 cm. and one male of 41 cm. were in stage VII, i.e. had not quite spawned, as numerous ripe eggs were present in the mostly emptied ovary of the one, and some milt still ran from the other. The migrations of the plaice in the German portion of the North Sea. Direct positive results with regard to the migrations of the plaice, are only given by the marking of the fish and setting them out again into the water. In the 2 years from the 25% of September 1902 to the 24 of September 1904, we have put out 4015 marked plaice in all, 1764 with aluminium rings and 2251 with marks of vulcanised india-rubber. To obtain the percentage of fish returned, we must deduct from these, 800 which were only set out on the 23 of September 1904. Of the remaining 3215 plaice, 372 were recaught, i.e. 11:6 %o of the number set out. These numbers are much too small to give a satisfactory basis for further conclusions, even with regard to the German Bight. We a APPENDIX E: HEINCKE shall content ourselves here, with stating the most obvious of the positive results of the experiments and with making a few appropriate and, it appears to us, simple and certain conclusions. The greatest quantities of these 3215 marked plaice, viz. 2004 specimens or 63 %o, were set out in only two regions, namely, in the neighbourhood of Heligoland (20 sea-miles round) and in the neighbourhood of Horns Reef. Of 1320 plaice set out at Heligoland, 183 were recaught; no less than 168 at Heligoland itself, within 1 to 443 days of replac- ing them in the water, and only 15 in other parts of the North Sea. Of the 689 plaice set out at Horns Reef, 90 in all were retaken, 83 at Horns Reef, therefore near to where they were set out, within 1 to 184 days and only 7 in other parts of the North Sea. Of the 15 plaice set out at Heligoland, but retaken elsewhere, 10 did not leave the German Bight (i.e. Borkum — Tail of Dogger Bank — Horns Reef); the interval between the setting out and recapture varied from 68 to 354 days; the places of recapture lay in . all directions. Of the 5 others, which had migrated out of this'region only one was retaken to the north, namely, on the Little Fisher Bank after 472 days; the other 4 had gone to the west and south-west, one in 116 days as far as Puzzle Hole (c. 145 s.m.), the second in 313 days, as far as the eastern edge of the Brown Ridges (c. 180 s.m.), the third in 125 days, to off Scheveningen (c. 200 s. m.), the fourth lastly, in 281 days to off the mouth of the Maas (c¢. 210 s. m.). Of the 7 plaice set out at Horns Reef, but not recaught there, none were retaken over 120 s.m. from where they were put into the water; 4 had gone to the south, 2 in 28 and 29 days as far as Norderney (88 s.m.); 3 to the north, 1 in 43 days as far as Lökken in the Skager Rak (c. 120 s. m.). Concerning the plaice set out in other parts of the North Sea than at Heligoland and Horns Reef, some of those retaken are especially remarkable, namely, 7 put out on the Great Fisher Bank at the end of September 1903. With the exception of one, which had gone easterly as far as Holmen’s Ground (c. 85 s.m.) in 104 days, all had wandered to the south, one for example in 138 days to the Oyster Bank (c: 170 s.m.), another in 214 days to Graadyb (c. 195 s. m.) The noteworthy results of these experiments seem to us the following: (1) The great majority of all the plaice marked were retaken within the same narrow region in which they were set out. Of all those set out in the German Bight, only a few, about 3 to 4°/o, were recaught beyond the bonndaries of this region, and most of these had gone to the south, west and south-west along the German and Dutch coasts. It cannot as yet be concluded, therefore, that the great mass of plaice, especially of the still immature, in the German part of the North Sea, make relatively extensive migrations yearly, over 50 to 100 s.m. and more in one direction. The critical value of this conclusion is frankly not very great, as yet. We do not know, for example, whether the plaice set out at Heligoland, and recaught there only after a large number of days, have not in the interval wandered some distance away and returned; we must remember also, that the probability of retaking the plaice marked, is greater where and when the fishery is greater, and smaller when the plaice wander far and distribute themselves in all directions. It is quite possible, therefore, that relatively many more plaice have in reality wandered far beyond the region investigated, than the experiment allows one to suppose. APPENDIX E: HEINCKE = OE ae (2) The plaice may wander very quickly at times from one region to another. The two plaice which had gone from the Horns Reef into the Norderney district (c. 88 s.m.) in 28 days, had travelled daily on an average not less than 3 s. m., and this holds good also for a plaice which had wandered from the Horns Reef towards the Skager Rak, ca.120 s.m., in 43 days. To obtain certain conclusions here, many more plaice must be set out yearly than has hitherto been the case, and the experiments must be continued over a larger number of years. The question whether two or more distinct local races of the plaice exist in the North Sea, has not as yet been closely investigated by us. We have, nevertheless, some grounds for believing, in agreement with English naturalists, that two races occur, viz. a southern plaice, extending from the English Channel to Heligoland, and a northern plaice, extending from Heligoland to the North, the first of which is constitutionally smaller than the second. We have once received spawning plaice of very small size, . caught at Borkum by a German sailing cutter in the month of March; one female with running spawn, measured only 22 cm. . : Speaking in general from our experiences, the biology of the plaice in the eastern parts of the North Sea presents the following picture. The spawning of the eggs takes place on wide areas from the 20 to the 40m. line and even further out; from these areas, the larvæ, when they approach the end of their metamorphosis, wander — at least the great majority do — into the warm, shallow waters close to the shore and pass the youngest bottom-stages there. From the end of their first year onwards, the young plaice migrate gradually in a mass, as they become larger and older, further out to sea into greater depths, and one finds, furthest from land in the open sea, scarcely any but the older groups of 5 years and over. 2. The flounder (Pleuronectes flesus) The eggs and larve. The data concerning these are not quite exact, in so far as the eggs could not always be distinguished with certainty from those of the dab and the sprat, nor the larve from those of the dab. In our vertical hauls during the March cruises, 91 eges and 79 larvæ were taken altogether. Thus, the spawning period for the flounder seems also to be over, for the most part, in March. At Heligoland, we found flounder eggs from the end of January to the middle of April.. In agreement with our earlier observations, the main quantities of the eggs and larve were met with over depths of 20 to 40 m., yet nearer the 20 than the 40 m. line, thus somewhat nearer land than for the plaice. They were found in this zone, both in the southern and northern parts of the region fished, as far as Skagen, and especially numerous N.W. from Heligoland. Beyond the 40 m. line, they occurred but rarely, and not at all in the open North Sea. Older larve (in the metamorphosing stages) were not yet noticed in March. They appear, however, in the plankton at Heligoland in the second half of April and beginning of May with greater regularity, and are 9 to 12 mm. long. Similarly, isolated specimens were found during the seasonal cruise in May e.g. on the outer Jutland Bank on the 40 m. line. In May, the older metamorphosed stages :are already met with in brackish ar. BeNOR Te» APPENDIX E: HEINCKE water and in the rivers, in smaller qnantities also in the ‘‘Wattenmeer”. The larvæ leave the open sea, as a rule, before the migrating eye has reached to the ridge of the head. Young and older stages. Just as we have never found the eggs of the flounder in rivers or in brackish water, we have on the other hand, never observed the first bottom-stages (about 13 to 15 mm. long), and on the whole, the 0-group, except at these places; for example, on the sandy beach at Twielenfleth on the Elbe a little below Hamburg, where we caught them with the hand-nets in very large quantities on the 12% of June 1903. How far the flounder of the 0-group occur in the “Wattenmeer”, has yet to be determined. Flounder of the I-group occur together with plaice of the same size in the “Wattenmeer”, and occasionally also off this, as well as in the rivers and in brackish water. Flounder of the older years’ groups are accustomed to venture considerably further out to sea; we have met with them regularly, in great numbers, between the main- land and Heligoland as well as close to Heligoland on the rocky ground of the island, especially in autumn and winter, further, in isolated specimens as far out as the 20 m. line all along the German coast. | The flounder grows much more slowly than the plaice, and does not grow to so large a size; we have taken them up to about 50 cm. only. A female flounder of 42 cm. in length, caught at Heligoland in November, was at least already 8, probably however 9, years old according to the rings of the otoliths and the bones; a plaice of similar size is only 4 to 5, at most 6, years old. Corresponding to this, the flounder reaches maturity at a smaller size. We have received spawning flounder of 23 cm. and onwards; in Scotland, mature flounders have been observed at only 18 cm. in length. We have taken flounders with running spawn in the beginning of January, once in great quantities off the mouth of the Weser just beyond the 20 m. line. In March, we found similar flounders or specimens just spawned, further out to sea, 30 sm. N.W. from Heligoland and at Borkum Reef on the 40 m. line, also in the neighbourhood of Horns Reef and on the southern Mud Bank. The biological character of the flounder is similar to that of the plaice, but it is more of a coast-fish and passes the first years of its life on the bottom, mostly in brackish water and in rivers. Like the plaice, it spawns always in salt water; its larve wander from there during the metamorphosing stages towards the coast and the first bottom-stages, which, like those of the plaice, are always formed perfectly symme- trical, are found in quite shallow water immediately on the shore. 8. The dab (Pleuronectes limanda) Eggs and larvæ. 5124 eggs and 228 larve altogether were taken in the vertical hauls of March 1903. The developmental stages of no other fish were taken m such enormous quantities. This arises partly, from the fact that the spawning of this fish is at its height in March, partly because the dab is certainly the commonest fish within the region investigated. The eggs were found in greatest numbers in the shallower parts of the southern North Sea, between the 20 and 40 m. lines. The maximum, with ca. 800 eggs and larve per square meter of surface, was met with to the north of Schiermonnikoog over 27 m. in APPENDIX E: HEINCKE MEN de depth. A spawning centre obviously occurred here. Very large quantities of eggs were also found, however, to the north and west of this, in the deeper waters between the Dogger Bank and the Dutch-German coast. The quantities decreased further to the north beyond Horns Reef, occurred only sparingly at the Skaw and were quite absent in the hauls over the deeper parts of the Skager Rak. On the Dogger Bank itself they were somewhat scarce, but again became more numerous on its northern edge and then, in the direction towards the Great Fisher Bank, they gradually decreased. They also occurred afterwards at the Great Fisher Bank to the amount of 25 per square meter of surface. Older larval stages were not taken in any quantity worth mentioning. In May also, we still found very large quantities of dab eggs, though not to such an extent as in March. We obtained the largest quantities of 50 to 70 eggs per square meter on our Stations I (40 m. line, N.W. from Heligoland), II (south-east corner of the Dogger Bank), XV (southern Horns Reef) and V (northern portion of the Great Fisher Bank); at the last place, the spawning had without doubt begun later than in the southern North Sea; (even in August, considerable quantities of dab eggs were taken on the Great Fisher Bank and some single eggs also, at the end of September). We took somewhat smaller quantities, but still worth mentioning, of 20 to 30 eggs per square meter on Stations III and IV (south and west of the Great Fisher Bank) and XIV (south of the Jutland Bank). On the other hand, but insignificant quantities were taken at all the Stations VI to XII lying within the region of the Skager Rak. Dab eggs were taken at Heligoland from the end of January to the middle of July, in greatest quantities from March to May. Larvæ were also taken with the eggs, as a rule often in very considerable numbers and always in young stages of development, before the formation of the fin-rays. These stages, however, are mostly no longer quite young but are so far advanced, that their separation from plaice larve of similar size, as above mentioned, presents considerable difficulties. In July, further advanced larve of the dab were taken in no small numbers at numerous points of the region under survey. They were mostly in the earlier and later stages of the formation of the fin-rays. Thus, all stages of the metamorphosis were observed, partly from the planktonic speci- mens, partly from those taken on the bottom, and at the same time a very striking fact was displayed. It appears namely, that the dab is distinct from all other flat- fishes in that the stages, where the left eye is already on the ridge of the head, are never taken in the plankton. The dab thus changes over to the bottom-life at an earlier stage of metamorphosis than its nearest allies, the plaice and flounder, in which all the metamorphosing stages are always planktonic. Specimens with the eye on the ridge, usually 15 to 17 mm. long, represent already the earliest bottom-stages. In these, the body-pigment, which develops eee during the first period on the bottom, is seen in active process of formation. The earliest bottom-stages and the fully-developed 0- “emery of the dab have been taken by us, from June on, at very numerous places of the entire region under survey, in the eastern and northern North Sea, from the mouths of the Elbe and Weser as far as to the 100 m. line between Scotland and Norway, in depths from 1 to 100m. and maton the most varied conditions of salinity and temperature, from 31 to 35 per mille and 6 to 13°C. Beyond the 100 m. line, they gradually became scarcer. It was remark- nd — 25 — APPENDIX E: HEINCKE able, that we took the 0-group of the dab in almost every haul, but in none in very great quantity (100 to 1000), as e. g. whiting, cod, Drepanopsetta etc. of similar age, although we should expect this judging from the enormous number of eggs. The largest quantity we caught, amounted to 57 and was taken in one of our hauls with the Heligoland trawl, which usually lasted from 20 to 30 minutes, on the 215 of July 1904 in 37m. on the northern portion of the southern Mud Bank. It is further remark- able, that we have taken the youngest stages, the 0-group of the dab, extremely seldom in quite shallow water immediately on the beach, as is the rule with the plaice and also the flounder; almost without exception they were found in deeper water. This great and striking difference between the occurrence of the plaice and flounder on the one hand, and that of the dab on the other, as well as in the distribution of the youngest bottom-stages, is shown also in the older stages. These stages of the dab are distributed over the entire region investigated, intermingled with one another, and never in such a graded distribution from the coast outwards as with the plaice. Young dabs of 6 cm. in length, were found at numerous places from the Great Fisher Bank southwards as far as the beach at Heligoland, to the mouth of the Elbe and to the “Wattenmeer”, in common with others of 15 to 20 cm. and larger. At Heligoland, we have several times caught, on previous occasions, thousands of dabs of the I- and II-groups with one haul of our small trawl in about 10 to 20 m. depth. Dabs of the most different sizes are so regular in their appearance in the hauls with the large trawl, that we were once very much astonished at not catching a single dab, either in our large or small trawls, at a spot beyond the 100 m. line, 58° N. L. and 1°10'E.L. in 134 m. It seems almost, as if the limit of this, the commonest of the North Sea flat fishes, occurred here. In the Skager Rak, we have taken dabs at even greater depths than 100 m. According to our observations, the dab becomes mature at a very small size, in the Heligoland region, at any rate, from 16 cm. onwards. We have not yet made very close investigations into the age of the dab. The picture which the biology of the dab in the North Sea offers us, is essentially different from that of the plaice, as our observations show. The dab appears to be distinctly a stationary fish, as the eggs, larvæ and all the older stages of the adult are distributed uniformly and beside one another over a wide area. A graded distribution of the various age-groups, according to depth and distance from the coast, does not occur; just as little is there a migration of the metamorphosing larve from the sea to the coasts in order to reach the bottom there — a phenomen so characteristic for the plaice and flounder. 4. The long-rough dab (Drepanopsetta platessoides) Of the eggs and larvæ of this species, 77 eggs and 8 larve altogether were taken in the vertical hauls of the March cruises of 1903. The height of the spawning was, how- ever, not yet passed in March. The greatest numbers, 36 eggs and larve per square meter of surface, were taken at the north edge of the Dogger Bank. Quantities of 12 to 20 per square meter were found on the Great Fisher Bank, and of 6 to 8 in the neighbour- hood of the Skaw. Further, small quantities were also taken on the outer Horns Reef ground. In the south eastern portions of the North Sea, they were practically absent. On the May cruises Drepanopsetta-larve were found regularly, especially to the north of the Dogger Bank and in the vicinity of the Great Fisher Bank; they were mostly Appendix E 4 APPENDIX E: HEINCKE SOR UE young forms, often in the stage when the fin-rays are forming; eggs were still found in the beginning of May. Some eggs and larve still occurred in May at the Skager Rak Stations VI—XII, though fewer than on the Great Fisher Bank. The largest planktonic larve of Drepanopsetta we have caught in the North Sea, measured about 26 mm. in the fresh condition, the smallest fully formed bottom-stage 1. e. with completed metamorphosis, was about 24 mm. It may be expressly mentioned here that, just as in the dab so also in Drepanopsetta, the change from the planktonic to the bottom-life often occurs before the completion of the metamorphosis, as we have not rarely found the latest transition-stages already on the bottom. The 0-group of Drepanopsetta, from about 24mm. in length onwards, we have as yet never found in the southern parts of the North Sea, but only to the north of the southern part of the Dogger Bank, as far as the slope of the North Sea plateau towards the ocean and the Norwegian channel, in depths of 22 to 148 m. (Skager Rak), mostly on muddy sand or purely muddy ground, with a bottom-temperature of 6° to 9°C. and salinity of 35:1 to 33:2°%o0. We took it in greatest quantities (from 35 to 220 in one 20 minutes haul of the Heligoland trawl) on the Great Fisher Bank (66 m.), and north from the Fladen Ground (134 and 87 m.), less on the slope towards the Skager Rak, still less south of 56° N. L.; only on the western edge of the Dogger, were 12 per haul still caught. All these hauls were made in July; the largest specimens of the O-group then taken, measured 45 mm. in the preserved condition. Older Drepanopsetta of the I- and Il-groups etc. have only been taken, in our hauls with the large and the young-fish trawl, in essentially the same region in which we took the eggs, larve and young bottom-stages. We have taken Drepanopsetta only in quite isolated examples south from the Dogger Bank, on the Oyster Bank and Heli- goland Ground, and then always somewhat larger, over 20 cm. in length. Most of them were taken on the 100 m. line and beyond, north of the Fladen Ground and on the southern slope of the Skager Rak, further on the Great Fisher Bank, just where the majority of the bottom-stages of the 0-group were found; lastly, in the deep region north of the Dogger Bank, somewhat less on the northern and southern Mud Bank. Younger stages from 8 cm: on, were found together with the older of 30 cm. and more in length. It is remarkable that we never caught very large quantities in the hauls with the large trawl, at the most, 350 specimens in one haul. Concerning the age, rate of growth, commencement of maturity, spawning etc. we have as yet made no observations. ; The long-rough dab seems, therefore, a flatfish which is limited in its occurrence almost entirely to the northern North Sea. It gives the impression of being a stationary fish, whose biological character is similar to that of the dab (Pl. limanda/. 5—6. The cod (Gadus morrhua) and haddock (Gadus aeglefinus) The eggs and larve of these two species must preliminarily be dealt with together, as they cannot always be separated with certainty according to the species. Their eggs can only be distinguished, when the embryos are so far developed, that they show the pig- mentation characteristic for each species. We have therefore not been able to determine, how many egos of cod, and how many eggs of haddock were contained in each of our hauls, but had to be contented with determining, whether the well-developed embryos NOTE APPENDIX E: HEINCKE represented only the cod, or only the haddock, or both species. The occurrence of larvæ of both species can always to some extent be settled with certainty. A confusion of the larvæ of the cod with that of the saithe (Gadus virens/, which might easily occur, will scarcely come into consideration in the present work, as the saithe plays no great part, probably, in the region investigated in March. In March 1903, altogether 3750 eggs of these two species were taken in the vertical hauls; amongst these, there were only 114 with certain haddock-embryos and about twice as many with certain cod-embryos. Of the larve taken with these eggs, 65 in all were those of the haddock and 534 those of the cod. From this, the following is clear. As the spawning time of both species, to our knowledge, is essentially the same (January to May), many more haddock larve should be taken than in the case in reality, when we consider the relative numbers of the cod and haddock in the North Sea, namely, that the haddock is relatively much more abundant than the cod. We may conclude with certainty therefore, that our March cruises have not, in the main, lit upon the principal spawning grounds of the haddock so much as those of the cod. From observations made in previous years, it appears, that very great masses of haddock eggs occur about the middle of March in the open North Sea to the north of the Great Fisher Bank, between 59° and 60° N.L. On the other hand, we have never found spawning haddock in the southern North Sea, though spawning cod have been taken; consequently, cod eggs and larve are certainly to be expected here principally, if not almost exclusively. Haddock. In the neighbourhood of the land, as far as to the 40 m. line, unmistake- able haddock eggs and larve were taken during our seasonal cruises either not at all, asin the southern part! of the North Sea, or only in very small quantities, as in the neighbourhood of Horns Reef and at the Skaw. In the south eastern parts of the North Sea, haddock eggs become somewhat more common to- wards the centre between the 40 m. line and the south edge of the Dogger, and increase further in numbers in the neighbourhood of the latter. On the Dogger Bank and beyond its northern edge, they were often just as numerous as those of the cod, taken at the same time. Haddock eggs were also found in the few hauls made on the Little Fisher Bank. On the Great Fisher Bank, the number of the well-developed, certain haddock eggs amounted to about three times those of the cod, in a total quantity of 300 eggs of both species per square meter. Cod. Cod eggs and larve were taken in March at all the regions investi- gated, almost without exception, from the 70 m. line in towards the land they were distinctly scarcer and were sometimes quite absent. (treater abundance of eggs, to over 100 to 450 eggs and larve per square meter, occurred N.W. from Heligoland within and beyond the 40m. line in the centre of the southern corner of the Dogger (Clay Deep), further, on the north corner of the Dogger and the centre of the Great Fisher Bank. Contrary to expectations, few cod eggs were found on the Jutland Bank and at Horns Reef (10 to 30 per square meter); they only increased to the west of this in the neighbour- ‘In the Heligoland plankton, we have previously taken but few isolated haddock eggs — 1—2 yearly. 4* APPENDIX E: HEINCKE SS OQ Ges hood of the 40 m. line (40 to 100 p. square meter). In the neighbourhood of the Skaw, as in the true Skager Rak, their number was very small. Eggs and larve of cod and haddock in May. Both the eggs and larve of these two species were still taken at most of the German Stations in the beginning of May; ‘altogether, there were about ?/s as many larve as eggs, a sign that the spawning time was essentially already past. At Station I, some few eggs only were taken, at Stations II to VI but increasingly towards the north, eggs and larve of both species. The maximum, at Station VI (northern Fladen Ground) amounted to 72 eggs, as well as 6 larve of cod and 48 larve of haddock per square meter. Considerable numbers of haddock (24 per square meter) were also found on the west slope of the Great Fisher Bank (St. IV). On the Skager Rak sta- tions, eggs and larve of both species were found in very varying quantities. On the Little Fisher Bank, the Jutland Bank and at Horns Reef (Station XIII—-XV), they also occurred, but in very small numbers. It is very remarkable, that the size of the larve of the cod and haddock, taken in the May hauls, did not exceed a total length of 10 mm. as a rule. The fully formed cod. The smallest fully formed bottom-stages of the cod taken by us, had a length of 25 mm. in preserved condition (alcohol); this was in the middle of July. The average size, at which the larval stage of the cod ends, in the region under our survey, cannot as yet be stated with certainty, owing to the lack of the necessary complete data. We have searched at very many different places (over 100) for the young bottom- stages and the 0-group of the cod, in our region from the mouths of the Elbe and Weser as far as the Dutch coast, N. W. of the Dogger Bank and to the 100 m. line, over this easterly as far as the Skager Rak, chiefly in June and July in the open sea, but also from August to December on the coasts of the German Bight. The noteworthy result of these observations, is, that the 0-group of the cod is distributed over the whole of our wide region in the summer and autumn months, and occurs, though not at every part of the sea, yet, in each of the somewhat larger regions. The smallest bottom-stages under 30 mm. in length, however, have as yet only been found by us in the northern North Sea (northern Mud Bank and Great Fisher Bank). This may only arise, because we have insufficient observations for the southern North Sea for June and July, We found specimens of 30 mm. and onwards at several parts of the southern North Sea. e.g. between Heligoland and the Dogger Bank on the 40 m. line, on the southern Mud Bank as well as far to the north, on the 100 m. line. We have found specimens of 40 mm. and onwards, from the middle of June to the beginning of July, also quite close to the land, e.g. at Lister Deep near Sylt in 10m. depth in great quantities, and in the mouths of the Ems and Elbe, in the latter river, as far as the opening of the North Sea- Baltic canal. The greatest quantities of these young cod of the 0-group — from 100 to over 200 specimens in one haul of our young-fish trawl — were taken in the first half of July, on the Great Fisher Bank and the northern Mud Bank (27 to 66 mm. long); many more also (from 40 to 100 in one haul), in the middle of June between Heligoland and the Dogger Bank on the 40 m. line, as also in the Lister Deep at Sylt, and in the Skager Rak at 108 m. in the middle of July; somewhat fewer (20 to 40 in one haul), on the southern Mud Bank, N. W. from Heligoland on the 40 m. line, on the sands at the mouth of the Log) = APPENDIX E: HEINCKE Elbe, in the Clay Deep at the south corner of the Dogger, and in the deep water of the north-west corner ot this bank, as well as on the eastern parts of the Oyster Bank etc. The temperature and salinity of the water, where these small cod were taken, varied from 6° C. and 35°%oo salinity in the region of the Great Fisher Bank, and beyond the 100 m. line in depths of 70 to 134 m., up to 20° C. in the shallower coastal waters of the southern North Sea at 10 m. depths, and down to salinities of 31-30 and less pro mille in the mouth of the Elbe. The places, where we obtained most cod of the O-group in June und July, agree in general with those spots, where most eggs and larve had been fished previously. Never- theless, it is indisputable, that, as the eggs and larve were not found in the immediate neighbourhood of the coast, the young fry must have spread out from the regions, where they were born and thus succeeded also in coming close into the land. It is remarkable, that we caught practically no young cod in our hauls with the surface nets (Hjort’s net, three-otterboards net), which brought us numerous other young fish of the year. We obtained some few specimens, of 3 to 5 cm. in length, but three times with these nets, namely, once respectively on the Fladen Ground, at Horns Reef and on the east edge of the Dogger Bank, in the middle of July. It seems, there- fore, as if the pelagic life of the young cod in the North Sea ceased soon after the com- pletion of the metamorphosis, and that, when they haye once changed over to the life on the bottom, they rise again but rarely into the upper water-layers. The further fate of the O-group has been investigated by us on the German coast and at Heligoland. Whilst we found them in June mostly 3 to 5cm., at the highest 8 cm. long, in July mostly 4 to 6cm., at the highest 11 cm., in August some were already 12 cm. and in September 13cm. At the beginning of October the most of the young cod on the coasts of the mouth of the Elbe were 10 to 15 cm. long, the smallest but 7, the largest 18 cm. We found them at Heligoland to be from 6 to 18 cm. in length in October and from 12 to 20 cm. in November. It may reasonably be doubted, whether all these small cod belong still to the O-group, and not — at least some — to the I-group, and this can only be solved by close investigation of the age on the otoliths and bones. We have already made such determinations, but not yet in sufficient number as the cod is a very difficult subject in this regard. We may, however, believe, e. g. that a small cod of 17 cm. in November certainly belongs to the O-group, another of 20 cm. on the other hand already to the I-group. We have reasons for believing, that the small cod at Heligoland are on an average about 14 cm. at the end of their first year, 18 cm. perhaps at a maximum and 8 to 10 cm. at a minimum. Cod of the O-group kept in our aquarium grow very quickly in the summer and autumn, especially with good feeding, e. g. from the beginning of August to the middle of September not less than 1mm. daily on an average, from the middle of September to the end of October, still '/2 to 1/3 mm. daily; in the middle of November we had cod of the O-group in our aquarium up to 15°5 cm. In the open sea, the growth would certainly be greater. Shortly before closing this report, we were able to make some further hauls with the young-fish trawl on different stations of the seasonal cruises, from the 14th to 23r4 of November, and in some of them we captured the cod of the O-group. In the deep sea north of the Dogger (69 m., Stat. III), these measured 6 to 13 cm., at St. XI (southern slope of the Skager Rak) 7—9 cm., at Stat. XV (off Sylt, 25 m.) 6 to 18 cm.; the two largest APPENDIX E: HEINCKE ee of these — 17 and 18 cm. — might belong to the I-group, whilst those of a complete series from 6 to 15cm. are certainly all of the first year. Cod of the 1-, II- and III-groups. We estimate the average length of the I-oroup of cod of the southern North Sea at 20 to 25 cm. during their second summer, that of the Il-group in their third year at about 35 to 40 cm. Both of these groups will naturally overlap considerably as to size, just as with all fishes. With regard to the occurrence and distribution of these three groups (of the second to the fourth year), it is a remarkable result of our hauls, that all three groups of the young, immature cod are found everywhere intermixed over the whole region under survey, and that there is no regular division according to age and size. We have taken cod of 16 to 25 cm., of the I-group therefore, both in depths over 100 m. on the Fladen Ground and in the Skager Rak, and at the German coast and at Heligoland, also on the Great Fisher Bank, to the west and east of the Dogger Bank, at Horns Reef and elsewhere — and the same holds good for the other groups. At Heligoland, especially, all three groups are met with, both close to the rocky ground on the island and further off the whole year through; the fish of the II- and Ill-group are relatively more abundant further out to sea, than those of the I-croup. The two former groups, therefore cod of about 30 to 50 cm. in length, are taken in quantities with hand-lines from spring to late autumn. On account of our insufficient observations up to the present, we cannot yet state with certainty, at what age, and at what size the cod spawn for the first time in the North Sea, or in the southern North Sea in particular, chiefly because we have not yet had the opportunity of catching large quantities of spawning cod, or cod approaching ripeness, or even. those which had spawned. It is certain, that we have taken such cod in small number from 60 cm. onwards in length, and it is probable, that some spawn for the first time at 50 cm. or a little greater length. We learn from the bones, that a cod 50 cm. long has lived at most 4 complete years, and we believe — provisionally —that the cod does not spawn for the first time, until it has lived 4 complete years, prob- ably at the end of its 5th, at latest the 6th year. We kept a female cod in our Heligoland aquarium from September 1902 to June 1904; it spawned there in January 1904 (but not in the previous year) and measured, in June, 66 cm. in length. Its age, according to the vertebræ and bones, was 51/2 years. It had therefore spawned at the end of its 5th year for the first time, but the sexual products had begun to ripen in autumn 1903, therefore after the completion of the 4th and in the course of the 5th year. Our further investigations on the age permit us to take as tolerably certain, that a North Sea cod of 75 cm. in length is at least 7 years old, one of 85 cm. at least 8, of 95 cm. in length about 9, and of 100 to 110 cm. in length at least 9 to 11 years old. Certainly, the yearly increase of growth aiso decreases here after the beginning of maturity. Such large and older cod have been found within the region under our survey, mostly far distant from land in the open North Sea in summer; in winter, however, especially on our March cruises, they are also common near and on this side of the 20 m. line and often quite close to the land, e.g. close to Heligoland, Horns Reef etc. It is known, that very large and dense shoals of large cod, quite near spawning, occur on the trawling grounds to the north and south of Horns Reef between the 20 and 40 m. line in winter, especially in December, and give occasion to a very rich fishery. We have, unfortunately, not yet had a. APPENDIX E: HEINCKE the opportunity of fishing there at this time for the mature cod; we have met with these on our seasonal cruises, only in March 1903 and 1904, and always in small quantities only, as also on the fishing grounds of Borkum Reef, Oyster Bank, Heligoland, Sylt inner ground, Horns Reef and southern Mud Bank. The biological picture, which we obtain of the cod in our region from the investig- ations sketched above, is strikingly similar to that of the dab (Pl. imanda). The cod appears here asa stationary fish, whose developmental stages from the egg to the spawning fish are all passed through within the same region; to such a degree, indeed, that all the stages are found intermingled at the most different places, without anywhere or at any time, showing a graded distribution according to age and depth. Only the larger and older specimens seem to make any migrations worth mention- ing, as, in the summer they live more in the open sea, e. g. in the south-eastern parts of the North Sea, whilst in winter — assuredly for the purpose of spawning — they frequent the shallower parts of the region from the 40 m. landwards. The largest cod of 1 m. and more in length and 10 and more years old, live furthest from land apparently and in the deepest part of the region. We are not yet able to show positive results concerning the migrations of the cod by means of the marking and setting out of fish. The fully formed haddock. The smallest fully formed young haddoch taken by us, measured 24 to 26 mm. in pre- served condition. We are unable to state, as yet, at what average length the transition from the larve to the adult form is completed. The oceurrence and distribution of the fully formed haddock of the first year — of the 0-group — shows an important and very striking difference from that of its two nearest allies, the cod and the whiting (Gadus merlangus). We have hitherto taken them ouly north of 55° N.L. and mostly far out to the north of 57°N.L. in and over the great depths from 60 to 100 m. and more. We have captured but one single specimen south of the Dogger Bank, on its south-eastern edge in the so-called Clay Deep from 47 m. (middle of July, 1903), also once a single specimen on the southern Mud Bank in the three-otterboards net (middle of July, 1904). The greatest quantities were found in the first half of July, 1904, north from the Fladen ground on muddy ground at 134m.; 2 hauls of our Heligoland trawl, of 20 minutes in all, brought up here 237 small haddock of the 0-group from 3 to 10 cm. long, most of them 6 and 7 cm. Large quantities (from 40 to 50 in one haul) were also taken, further to the north of the first-named place in 106 m.; otherwise, we mostly obtained only 1 to 10 specimens in one haul with the ground-nets. It was remarkable, that we brought up but very few young cod at the places, where we obtained many young haddock on the ground, and conversely, where many cod of the 0-group were found, very few haddock were taken. The former occurred chiefly on sandy, the latter on muddy ground. Another remarkable difference in the occurrence of the O-group of cod and haddock was also observed; in our surface nets (three-otterboards net and Hjort’s net,) we obtained the cod very rarely, as already mentioned, and always only in some few specimens, where the had- dock was often abundant. Our greatest catch of young fish wilh the three-otterboards net was made on the slope of the Great Fisher Bank towards the Skager Rak over APPENDIX E: HEINCKE S39 — a depth of 103 m. on the 12th of July 1904, and brought up over 1000 young fish in one hour from 1 to 15 m. depth, consisting of about 900 whiting and 100 haddock, the latter from 3 to 11 cm. in length; cod were quite absent. On the following day, further to the east on the southern edge of the Skager Rak, in 184m., we obtained not a single haddock with the ground net, but 29 haddock of 3 to 10 cm. in length with the three-otter- boards net. A haul with the Heligoland trawl on the Fladen Ground in 83 m. depth, on the 9t of July, only brought up some few whiting; a haul with the three-otterboards net at the same place, in about 1 to 30m. depth, gave several hundreds of young fish, mostly whiting, but also 17 haddock from 3 to 6 cm. in Jength. We may therefore conclude, that the young haddock of the North Sea retain the pelagic habitat after the completion of the larval stage longer, and up to a greater length (11 cm.) than the cod, or otherwise, comes up from the bottom into the upper water-layers oftener than the latter. It is similar in this to the whiting. The salinity of the water at those places of the North Sea, where we caught young haddock of the O-group with the ground-net, varied from 34:6 to 35:1°/oo and the corre- sponding temperatures from 6:5° to 7:1°C. On the other hand, the salinity and temper- ature of the surface water-layers, in which we found the O-group with our pelagic nets, varied from 32:1 to 35:1%oo, and from 12:4° to 15:7° C. The low surface salinity of 32 °/oo was found in the Skager Rak (Baltic stream), where 35°/oo was found at the bottom. As some haddock were also taken at the bottom here, though very few, we may conclude, that the young haddock, from 3 to 10 cm. in length, may stand well a somewhat great and sudden change in the salinity and temperature of the water. From lack of sufficient material, we cannot as yet say with certainty, what average size the young haddock reach at the end of their first year. Similarly, our investigations concerning the older stages of the haddock from the I-group to the spawning age, are also very deficient, especially as regards the determination of the age from the otoliths and bones. Nevertheless. we have some certain discoveries to show, and these allow some few, but important conclusions concerning the biology of this fish. In July, 1904, we caught not only many haddock of the O-group, but also large quantities of the succeeding age-groups, in the north-western part of the North Sea on the 100 m. line with our shrimp-trawl. These captures, which along with some smaller, we were able to make in various parts of the northern North Sea in the middle of November of this year, shortly before closing this report, gave some data regarding the relation between the O-group and the I-group. The accompanying curve (Fig. 4), gives a graphic represen- tation of the size-relations of the 1836 haddock taken in these hauls. From the hauls 1 and II, which were made at the same place, but the one with the Heligoland young-fish trawl, the other with the large trawl, we see at once, that the first net (I) with its small. meshes catches chiefly the small and smallest fish from 3 to 10 cm., representing here the 0-group of the haddock, but the larger, belonging to the I-, II- and succeeding groups, in smaller numbers. The large trawl (II) has taken no haddock under 14 cm., those from 15 to 21 cm. chiefly, also a goodly number from 24 to 32 cm. in length. We learn from this table the following: (1) The curve, giving the measurements of all the haddock taken on the 10% of July, shows two deep and one shallower depression and two high and two lower maxima. The deep minima lie at 11 and at 22 and 23 cm.; they obviously separate the 0-group, with the maximum at 6 cm., from the I-group with ie cie APPENDIX E: HEINCKE the maximum at 19 cm. and further, the latter also from the Il-group with a maximum at 26 cm. The shallow depression at 30 cm. seems to indicate the boundary between the II- and III-groups, with the apex of the latter at about 32 em. From this, the haddock taken in July of 3 to 10 cm. in length, would be 2 to at most 6 months old (0-group), those of 14 to 21 cm. 14 to 18 months (I-group), and those of 23 to 27 cm. 26 to 30 months old (II-group). (2) In November, the size-groups are essentially different. The curve (III) clearly shows a very deep depression at 20 and 21 cm. and another shallow one at I. 100 m. line. Heligol. trawl. 287 spec. 10. July, 1904. “fo DUT) RON MERE EEE II. 100m. line. L.90ft. trawl. 990 specimens. fe 10. July 1904. 35 \ ss. TIT. Northern North Sea. Large and Heligol. trawl. 559 spec. Mid Nov. (1904. 0-,.2- Grp \-group, I-group (of the first, second years). 30 25) 20 50 Fig. 4 Analysis of catches of haddock in the northern North Sea, according to length and number. Percentage curves. 1836 specimens altogether of 3 to 50 em. in length. f und II were made — in July, 1904 — at the same place, one after the other (58° 0° N. L. — 1° 10° E. L. 100—134 m.), the first with the Heligoland young-fish trawl, the second with the large 90 ft. trawl. III is composed of 4 different hauls made, from the 10th to 22nd of November 1904, at different parts of the northern North Sea in 64 to 100 m., partly with the young-fish trawl, partly with the large trawl. 27 to 30 cm., also 3 distinct maxima at 17, 26 and 33 cm. It is certain, that the first maximum at 17cm. represents the O-group, which have thus grown, on an average, from 10 to 11 cm. in the four months from the middle of July to the middle of November, therefore very considerably. The maximum at 26 cm. may represent the I-group, which have therefore grown about 7 cm. on an average, in the four months. Whether the max- imum at 33 cm. represents the size of the Il-group must remain uncertain. (3) The 0-group in November and the I-group in July are relatively but little distant from one another as regards average size, namely, only about 2 to 3 cm. Although it is certain, that this separation of the various age-groups in July and November will have to be altered on further more exact investigations, especially the posi- tion of the minima and maxima of the curves, some correct conclusions may yet be drawn Appendix E 2 APPENDIX E: HEINCKE NA already, namely firstly, that the young haddock of the 0-eroup grow very quickly in the months of the summer and autumn, and may be about 14 to 17 cm. long at the end of their first year, and secondly. that the rate of growth must be much slower in the winter and spring, perhaps only half as great or even less. Our investigations of the age of the haddock, from the otoliths and bones, are as yet, too defective to permit of certain results. Nevertheless, we have found, that haddock, taken in March of about 25 cm. in length, were at least 2 full years, perhaps already 3 years old, according to the rings on the bones; those of about 30cm.in March, were at least 3 years old, perhaps already quite or nearly 4 full years old. Concerning the occurrence and distribution of the youngest stages of the haddock, our investigations give a most important result. These small haddock of 14 to 20 cm. in length and mostly of the I-group, have been taken in the northern North Sea at many places, even in the Skager Rak. On the other hand, they were found only in quite insignificant quantities in the southern North Sea, and none at all under 18cm. in length, even though we fished at the same places with various nets, quite small-neshed nets also. Further, we have always found the fish of 20 to 25 cm. in length, to be in very small quantities in the southern North Sea, and only those of 25 to 30 cm. and over, occurred more frequently. The great majority of all the had- dock, taken by us in the southern North Sea, consisted of larger and older fish of 35 cm. onwards to 60 and 70 cm. and more. The catches of the trawl and line-fisheries show the same thing. From our investigations on the age we believe, that the larger haddock of about 45 cm. onwards to 70 cm. and more must be considered 5 to 10 years old. We cannot as yet determine from our investigations, the size and age at which the haddock spawns for the first time, with certainty, but can conjecture it with some amount of probability. In March, 1904, we captured altogether about 1500 haddock from 16 to 66 cm. in length at six different places of the North Sea from the Barren Ground in the south to the Great Fisher Bank and the Skager Rak in the north. These were measured and examined as to their sex and degree of ripeness of the sexual products. The great majority of these haddock were found at the spawning time, i.e., they were almost ripe, had running spawn or were even spent. The smallest female distinctly ripe, measured 28 cm., the smallest ripe male 26 cm. The great majority of all the ripe fish measured, however, 32 to 36 cm. It may be considered certain, that the majority of these were going to spawn for the first time in their life. They were thus about 33 to 34 cm. long on an average, at first-maturity, and the majority were probably just four years old, in any case three. It is only the hauls just mentioned, made in March, which have given some conclu- sions regarding the places, within the region under our survey, where large quantities of spawning haddock occur. With exception of the haul on the Barren Ground, these were all made in the northern North Sea. Otherwise, with quite insignificant exceptions, we have never found spawning haddock in the southern North Sea. Numerous large haddock (to over 90 cm. in length) used, in earlier years, to be taken in quantities with long-lines by the Heligoland fishermen and by ourselves on the fishing-grounds in the neighbourhood of Heligoland, in autumn to De- cember, and in spring from the end of March onwards, but only extremely seldom were a= IBM Se! APPENDIX E: HEINCKE any found with almost ripe or quite ripe sexual products. Apart from these, all those taken in autumn were in various stages of-ripeness, those taken in the spring were all spent. We have several times caught medium and large haddock on our June and July cruises; so far as their sexual products were examined, they were all spent or — in July — in process of developing new sexual products for the ensuing spawning period. We may therefore conclude with considerable certainty, that the mature haddock spawn only exceptionally in the southern North Sea, but that, they not only occur there in the last months of the year before the spawning time, often in great quantities, but also return after the completion of spawning, often in very large swarms. We can thus recognize distinct migrations from and to the spawning and feeding regions; and these migrations extend at times over very great distances. Positive observations on the wanderings of the haddock, by means of marking and setting out fish, have not yet been made by us. The picture, which the above investigations present to us regarding the biology of the haddock, is essentially different from that of the cod. The haddock is distinctly a migratory fish. It is born in the northern, deeper parts of the North Sea, in greatest quantities on both sides of the 100 m. line, and it always passes here the first and, with few exceptions, also the second year of its life. It is only from the beginning of the third year, but mostly only in the fourth, that it undertakes further migrations; thus, the haddock come to frequent the shallower regions in the southern North Sea, in seeking for the feeding places there. When they are becoming ripe, they return again to the northern North Sea in the course of the winter, in order to spawn there (from January to April). On the completion of spawning, they migrate again to the south to the feeding places — and it appears, as if this to and fro migration were repeated regularly each year. 7. The Whiting (Gadus merlangus) The eggs and larve of this species may be regarded as rightly determined for the most part, although, in many points of the region investigated, especially in the May hauls of the northern part of the North Sea, confusion with other gadoid eggs of the pollack — poor cod groups (pollachius-minutus) is not impossible; the eggs and larvæ of these groups are insufficiently known, but are probably very like those of the whiting. In the quantitative hauls of March, 2000 eggs and 257 larvæ were taken altogether. By far the greatest quantities, from 100 to over 400 eggs and larve per square meter, were taken in the centre of the south border of the Dogger, in the so-called Clay Deep, where great masses of the eggs of cod and dab were also found. Apart from these, about 130 eggs and larve per square meter were taken 40 miles N. W. from Heligoland in over 40 m. depths, of which the great majority (?/s) were larve. Both stations seemed spawn- ing regions, as the eggs were taken but sparingly in the intervening regions. The quantities of eggs taken at all other parts of the region investigated were smaller, although they never quite failed in the south-eastern North Sea. As with the cod eggs, they were very rare or were quite absent in the immediate neighbourhood of the coast. North from the Dogger and from Horns Reef, the whiting eggs were met with only in small quantities: their number was also very small on the Great Fisher Bank and in the Skager Rak. They were absent at the Skaw. Be APPENDIX E: HEINCKE Neen At the beginning of May, eggs and larve of whiting occurred at almost all the sta- tions, and the eggs so outnumbered the larvæ, that the end of the spawning period seemed far distant. The greatest quantities were found on the northern part of the Great Fisher Bank at Stations V and VI with 98 and 204 eggs and larvæ per square meter, then at Stations IV and II west of the Great Fisher Bank and on the Dogger Bank, with 44 eggs and larve per square meter. At the end of May, eggs were still found, though in smaller quantities. A maximum with 59 eggs and larve per square meter occurred at Station V in the Skager Rak. Some eggs were still found even in the middle of June 1904, in the southern North Sea. The larvee were in all possible stages of development, even to the fully formed little fish. Young forms of 20 to 23 mm. were taken already at the end of April. We took the whiting eggs at Heligoland from the end of January to the end of May. The O-group of the whiting (first year). As in all gadoids, so with the whiting, the boundary-line between the later larval stages and the fully formed young-fish cannot be sharply drawn; it lies between 15 and 20mm. in length. We have found these youngest stages of the fully formed whiting and the larger fish of the O-group in the summer months, especially from the beginning of June onwards, everywhere in the entire region under our survey, from the mouths of the Elbe and Weser to the 100 m. line and mostly, in greater quantities than any other young of the food-fishes. We took them in great quantities both with our young-fish trawl (up to 1000 and more in half an hour) and our pelagic nets; once, we took 900 specimens in an hour with our three-otter boards net. The following remarkable phenomen occurred in our numerous hauls in July. The smaller and younger whiting of 2 to 5 cm. in length, were taken pelagically in far greater numbers than on the ground, where, as a matter of fact, they were very rarely observed under 4 cm. in length, and only from 5 cm. and more in great quantities. For example, amongst the 900 whiting taken in the great haul with the three-otterboards net, as mentioned above, only about 50 specimens were from 6 to 7 cm. in length, all others measured only 2 to 5 cm. the most 3 and 4 cm. Conversely, of several thousands of young whiting, which we caught in 2 hauls with our young-fish trawl on the southern Mud Bank in July 1903, only a small percentage was under 5 cm. in length, most meas- ured 5 to 8 em. Further, it was found to be characteristic of many of our pelagic young fish hauls, that the largest fish taken in them were almost always whiting, and that our three-otterboards net caught those from 20 to over 25 cm. by no means seldom. We may therefore conclude, that the whiting of the North Sea retains the pelagic habit for a very long period in its youth, even longer than the haddock and longer than the cod especially, and that it often rises in great quantities into the upper water-layers after its first descent to the bottom, even in the older stages. In agree- ment with this, we have noticed in our aquarium, that young cod and whiting of the O-group show a characteristic difference in their habits. Whilst the young cod prefers to remain on the bottom and to seek hiding-places between stones and plants, the whiting always moves about more in the middle and upper water-layers. It is well known, that the young whiting, so long as they are still small and lead a pelagic life, are almost always found together with jellyfish (mostly Cyanea). Whether this characteristic resort of.the young-fish, close beside the jelly-fish, even between their tentacles— as we have often remarked in our aquarium and sometimes near the surface in the eS Sy Qi APPENDIX E: HEINCKE open sea — is a kind of true commensalism or not, and of what kind, is not yet known. It is certain, that we have practically, never taken the pelagic whiting in our surface net without also taking the jelly-tish, and usually, the more whiting there were the larger was the number of jelly-fish. For the rest, we are unable as yet to say definitely, from lack of definite observations, how far the young fish of other gadoid species, e.g. young had- dock and cod, also live together with jelly-fish; wa may only mention, that all our pelagic young-fish hauls contained jelly-fish, and that haddock and cod, if they occurred in such hauls, were always found together with whiting, and the latter was in the majority almost with exception. When the young whiting of the 0-group descend to the bottom of the sea, they also succeed in getting to the coast very quickly and even tolerably far into the mouths of rivers. We have, for example, found them in quantities, from 55 m. in length and more on the sands of the Elbe estuary along with young plaice, in July and August, and once together with cod as far as the opening of the North Sea— Baltic canal. They penetrate also into the “Wattenmeer” and in autumn are in very great quantities, in length from 6 to 15 em., both here and on the entire coast of the southern North Sea; at this time, they already mix with the I-group and with small plaice and cod. Many hundreds may be taken here with one haul of the narrow-meshed ground net. Small shrimps (Crangon) form part of the chief food for the young. Beyond the rocky ground at Heli- goland also, we have found young whiting of the O- and I-groups in great quantities in autumn. From lack of sufficient and suitable investigations we are unable as yet to say, how large the whiting is on an average at the end of its first year, and how large the various older stages (l-group etc.) are. We have observed in our aquarium, however, that the whiting crows relatively very quickly in its first year. A young and well-fed whiting, for example, grew from 60 to 115 mm. in length from the 30 of July to the 19 of September i.e. in 50 days, therefore on an average 1:1 mm. daily. In the middle of November, whiting of the 0-group reared in our aquarium measured up to 14cm. in length. With regard to the occurrence and distribution of the older stages of the whiting (from the second year onwards), it appears from all our observations, that they are . distributed like the O-group over the entire region investigated, and the age-groups show no separation in place or time. We have taken whiting of all sizes and stages, beside one another, both beyond the 100 m. line in depths of 100 to 200 m. and in close proximity to Heligoland and the German coast, and usually in no less quantities in the depths of the northern North Sea than in the shallow parts of the southern. We have not yet closely investigated the size and age at which the whiting are ripe for the first time. Whiting with running spawn have often been taken at various places in the region under our survey, from March to June; in great quantities at Heligo- land from March to May at sizes from 18 to 49 cm. As spawning whiting have already been observed at a length of 20cm. and less, we may conclude with tolerable certainty, that the maturity of this gadoid begins earlier than with the cod and haddock, probably at the end of the third year, perhaps exceptionally and in the smaller males even earlier. The biological picture we get of the whiting, agrees in general with that of the dab and cod. Like these two species the whiting is a stationary fish, whose eggs, larve and fully-formed individuals of all ages occur everywhere at the APPENDIX E: HEINCKE == 32° same spots, and intermingled with one another, within the region investigated. The whiting has this in common with the dab especially, that it is the most abundant species of its genus in the North Sea. A specific characteristic of the whiting, which distinguishes it, especially from the cod but also from most other gadoids, is the strong tendency towards a pelagic habit of life during the first year, which, also, it never seems to give up entirely in later years. 8. Concluding remarks We have still to describe a large number of observations, made in the region nnder our survey, concerning a number of other food-fishes, above all the turbot, sole, witch (Pl. cynoglossus), sprat and herring, but these observations have not yet been so far worked up, as to enable us to make a comprehensive report regarding them. If we summarise the results of our investigations in the German portion of the North Sea, described briefly in preceding pages, it appears, that many important facts concerning the distribution of the food-fishes could already be determined in the two years since the beginning of our investigations, and that a view has been gained of the right course to be taken, in order to advance. It is also clear, however, that very great gaps have yet to be filled up in our region by new and continued observations, in order to attain the end placed before the international investigations. As regards the earliest developmental stages, the eggs and larvæ of our food-fishes, more frequent observations must above all be made in the months of January to March, and especially in February, in the northern North Sea; further, special attention must be paid to the, as yet, but little known eggs and larve of certain gadoids, e.g. of the saithe (G. virens), pollack (G. pollachius) and of the pouts (G. luscus, G. minutus nnd G. Esmarki). As regards the young fish in their first year, similar investigations are desirable in May and June, especially in the northern North Sea, in order to know, more accurately, the transitional stages between the larve and earliest bottom-forms, even for the haddock and cod, and their occurence as regards the especially latter species; these are specially necessary at such parts of the sea-bottom, where the ordinary fishing apparatus cannot as yet be used. With respect to the occurrence, migrations and spawning of the older stages of the food-fishes, the following investigations have still to be made. Research-cruises must be undertaken in the winter months, in order to deter- mine, for the North Sea, the regions and periods at which great collections of spawning plaice, cod and haddock occur. The number of marked plaice set out must be considerably increased and similar experiments have to be made with the cod and haddock. The method of determining the age of the food-fishes has to be ‘extended and applied to more species, and at the same time, their rate of growth must be tested experimentally. Lastly, more exact investigations are to be made regarding the proportion of the sexes, and the fertility of the fishes and also, regarding the various stages in the maturation of the sexual products. 39, 2 APPENDIX E: HEINCKE Additional note In the preceding report, an explanatory remark has been omitted from Section C (“Statement of Results”) p.15, with regard to the extension of the cruises made by the Biological Station in the North Sea, in search of the eggs of fishes. ‘This remark is necessary, so that others may know in what parts of the North Sea we have made hauls for fish-eggs. The following note may be expressly added, therefore: In March 1903, these cruises extended from Heligoland in a north-westerly direction over the Dogger Bank as far as to 56° N. L., and in a northerly direction, as far as the neighbourhood of Horns Reef and the Jutland Bank. Further, some hauls were made to the east and to the west of Skagen. In March 1904, egg-hauls were only made incidentally, and that, chiefly at the 17 fixed trawling stations of the “Poseidon”, with exception of the extreme west and south. Thus, the occurrence of the eggs and larve within a large part of the North Sea, especially the whole of the very important north-western part, has practically been omitted, so far, from our investigations. APPENDIX F ON THE PERIODIC OCCURRENCE OF THE PRINCIPAL FOOD- FISHES IN THE NORTH SEA AND SKAGER RAK, BASED ON THE RETURNS OF GERMAN FISHING-STEAMERS BY H. HENKING WITH 26 FIGURES IN THE TEXT AND 2 CHARTS (TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY HM. KYLE) CONTENTS oir} 1 Ù ht Introduction PE EE RE I. The northern North Sea .. : N II. The southern North Sea.... ET DRE x RN oe 5 III. The region of the Skager Rak............... RN TA JUN Retrospect nr are Re et oo e à Is, in response to the invitation of the Bureau of the International Council for the study of the sea I give here some observations on the periodic occurrence of the principal fishes, based on the rich statistical material of the “Deutsche Seefischerei Verein”, I am nevertheless well-aware, that in so doing, I am raising an old and a difficult problem. It has been well-known for long, that most of the fisheries are carried on at certain periods and that the existence of such periods is almost always conditioned by the habits of the fishes. If the fish occur in quantities worth catching, the fishermen as a rule are soon on the spot and do not move until the catches no longer repay the costs of the time and labour. Thus arises a fishery-period?. The occurrence of fixed period appears most clearly, when we consider the catch of any single species. For hundreds of years, the great herring fishery in the North Sea has begun, continued and ended at fixed times as if along a pre-arranged course. The Scandinavian waters, however, present an even more classic example of the fishery-periods. In the unique fjords and along the fringe of the mainland in front of them, seasonal periods of a special kind occur in addition to the annual fluctuations. The Norwegian cod fisheries also furnish a classic example. Advanced posts of the fishermen are already on the watch in December to see, if the cod shoals are approaching the Lofotens. The telegraph sends the good news far through the land, and the fishermen like the fish are quickly on the spot, and in the course of April they . both disappear again together. Similar examples might be given in quantity. I may further mention here, only the mackerel, which is the object — apart from the important fishery in the Channel — of a considerable drift-net fishery from the coast of Norfolk and Suffolk in the North Sea in May, June, and further, in September and November; but in August and September on the other hand, it engages the attention of the Norwegian and Swedish fishermen in the Skager Rak and north-western portion of the North Sea. In the neighbourhood of the German coast, the mackerel is a rarer guest; but it appears here regularly also, though with fluctuations. It penetrates close to the coasts of East Friesland. In 1902 it was comparatively abundant, and was taken in quantities at Heligoland in the summer of 1902. In 1903 it occurred only rarely, as in the years preceding 1902 generally. The garfish (Belone vulgaris) is similar. Its fishery near the coasts lasts from ‘April to July. In 1902, it occurred here in but small quantities, but at the end of May to the beginning of June, it gave rise to a rich catch at Föhr and Sylt. 1) A fishing-period of quite a different kind is seen, e. g, in the oyster fishery; the limitation of the fishing to the cold season of the year is conditioned by the circumstance, that the oyster must reach the consumer living. This is difficult in the warm months, especially as the spawning period then affects the condition of the animal. : | 1* APPENDIX F: HENKING — À — The same fish (“geep”) appears once in the year, at the end of April and in May, on the Dutch coast and it is said there, that “southern winds and warm weather” are the cause of its appearance. I may yet mention lastly, that a young herring, in company with the sprat, is accustomed to appear every year, from the middle of November to the end of March, in the mouth of the Elbe, usually in great shoals but also only sparingly (as in the winter of 1903—04); further, that the plaice and haddock have also their special fishing-period in the German Bight. These examples should be sufficient to illustrate the variations in the quantities of fish, and reference to the species better known as migratory fishes, such as salmon, eel, sturgeon and shad, is hardly necessary. Whilst the regular variations in the occurrence of each of the food-fishes, which like the herring, cod and mackerel give rise to special fisheries, have long been known, the same may also be said regarding the smaller fisheries near the coast. In both, the fishermen are accustomed to rely upon the appearance of the fish at certain times, just like the peasant upon the fruit of the land. The fishery of the steam-trawlers is different. There is no longer any fishery- season for these, lany natural pause, as is shown in the above-mentioned fisheries. We might therefore make the supposition, that the stock of fish on which the trawlers depend, would remain at all times approximately the same. This is not the case however. The unequal quantities which the various steamers bring to land, the changing of the fishing-grounds and lastly the formation of special tendencies amongst the captains of the steamers, show that it is not so; there are some who especially search for the “prime” fish, 1. e. the most valuable flat-fishes such as soles and turbot, and others who specialise on the cod, haddock etc. It is just the increase of specialisation and chiefly of experienced fishermen, who can still here and there make a good catch, where others obtain little or nothing, which should make one careful in drawing conclusions from a negative result. Conclusions from the catches of fishermen alone, regarding the migrations of fishes are especially, extremely risky and in no way trustworthy without the most thorough proof. Who would conclude without further investigation, for example, that we are dealing with a migration between the two following places, because the North Sea herring fishery begins in June not far from the Shetland Isles and is carried on in November at the entrance to the Channel? What was believed by the old Hamburger Andersen 150 years ago, is no longer main- tainable. The catches of the fishermen therefore, raise problems mainly, the solution of which require special investigation. The fishermen ordinarily use only one fixed method and the information derived from this, is often not sufficient for conclusions free of error. The trawl-fishery is such a one-sided method. It analyses only a mass of water, which lies 1—11/,m. over the bottom. It is not easy to know therefore, whether even the true ground-fishes may not rise at times from the bottom-layers, or bury them- selves in the ground, and may really be present, even though the trawl takes them, if at all, in but small quantities. j If the catches of the fishing-steamers are analysed, accordingly, for the frequency of the various species, the analysis is exclusively of the bottom-layers, which alone are fished by the trawl. The source of error arising from the net passing through the upper water-layers on hauling in, may be neglected here as unimportant. =] — APPENDIX F: HENKING The greatest difficulty in the way of estimating the value of the catches of the steamers lies in the exact determination of the fishing-grounds. I believe, however, that we have succeeded in determining the fishing-grounds with sufficient accuracy for the years 1902 and 1903, to be spoken of here. How that has been done has been explained in the annual report of the Deutsche Wissenschaftlichen Kommission for 1903". The catches of the Geestemünde steamers have served for the calculations of 1902; for 1903, those of the Bremerhaven steamers have been added. In the course of 1904, thanks to the advances made by the circles concerned, similar data for Hamburg, Altona and Nordenham have also been placed at the disposal of the Deutsche Seefischerei-Verein. This attained, the whole fleet of German steamers has been won over to the work. In the following, a review will be made over the various fishing-regions which come into consideration. I. The northern North Sea I include in this the Great Fisher Bank, the Fladen Ground, the Long Forties and the portion of the North Sea plateau lying to the north of this, as far as the Shetlands in the west. The material for 1902 has been gained from 137 voyages of steamers. In the months of May, June and July the northern parts of the North Sea are not frequented by the fishermen from Geestemünde. The number of the fishing days, including the days sailing, amounted to 1355. In 1903 the northern North Sea was visited by only 23 steamers with 230 days in all. As the German steamers do not fish in the north in all months of the year, the material has therefore some gaps. Nevertheless there are always certain signs, the breaks in the curves of the catches can be filled out by estimations. The quantities of fish in 1902 and 1903 were constituted as follows: 1. Haddock (Gadus aeglefinus L.). The average catch per day over the whole year, amounts in pounds (:/, kg.) to: 1902 1903 I Sortiere. er 72°25 pounds 33°79 pounds LNG rere dain PCSI 130:23, 7, Sa, IT een. BONLO9L PIE DV RON Wen ar... 25592 , SOOT hy | Whiting (cf.2)... 21831 , SOE | Two distinct maxima occur in the catches in 1902, namely, a smaller in March, a larger in August. These two maxima are found equally in all four sorts. In 1903, the first maximum occurred already in January, the second in July to August. x Will appear in print shortly: Die Betheiligung Deutschlands an den Internationalen Untersuchungen, Bad. I. (Berlin, Salle). D a | APPENDIX F: HENKING EVENE The greatest catches in both years were made in the warmer months. The hydrographical depth-charts appended, show that in 1902, oceanic water of over 35'25 % extended in August far over the North Sea plateau. In this month, it is true, only three German steamers were fishing in the north, but I am quite certain, that the rich catches of haddock are not made in the water with high salinity, but in water under 35°25 °/oo. In November again, the German steamers were fishing further north than in August; as the curve of 35°35 °/oo water is inclined towards the east, the catches were made in the medium kind of water with 3500—35:25 °/oo salinity. It is probable for 1903 also, that the catches of the few steamers were made in water of less than 35°25 °/oo Salinity. 2. Whiting (Gadus merlangus) is greatly mixed with the Haddock (IV sort) in the catches of the German boats. The maxima seem similar to those of the haddock. 3. Cod (Gadus morrhua L.). The average catch per day for the whole year, amounts in pounds to: 1902 1903 2S Orta mer 68:23 pounds 78°74 pounds NER Reais recs ee 10978 , 120520 178:00 pounds 208:27 pounds. The maximum here, occurs in the second half of the year. 4. Ling (Lota molva L.). Average catch per day in pounds: 1902 1903 20°79 pounds 15:91 pounds. Two unimportant maxima occurred in 1902, in March and October—November. In the months of mid-summer, there is an unmistakeable depression in the catch. The available portion of the fishery for 1903 is not in opposition to this, only, the first maximum is in April or perhaps May. 5. Saithe und Pollack (Gadus virens L. and Gadus pollachius L.). Average catch per day in pounds: : 1902 1003 23:89 pounds 17°09 pounds. A distinct maximum lies in October to December 1902, a second, indistinct, in March. In August, an unmistakeable minimum occurs. The available data for 1903 agree perfectly with these results. 6. Gurnards (Trigla). Average catch per day in pounds: 1902 1903 28:21 pounds 6:03 pounds. In 1902, a high maximum occurred in August, a smaller in February. wr tt — 7 = APPENDIX F: HENKING The available data for 1903 give quite different results, the high catches, especially, which help to raise the curve so high in August and September 1902, viz. 182:/, and 86 pounds respectively, are here absent. 7. Hake (Merluccius vulgaris Fl.) Average catch per day: 1902 1903 12:86 pounds 3:64 pounds. The hake had a prominent maximum in September with steep ascent from July— August, and just as steep a descent to October; then, from January to March there was a distinct falling-off to almost complete absence. In 1903, the average catch was distinctly less than in 1902. The reason for this lies, on the one hand, in that the catch for each of the months was less than in 1902, but more especially, in that this region was not fished in during September 1903. For the rest, the result is just the same as for 1902: the curve rises in July—August 1903. The form of the curve in December 1903 corresponds well with that for 1902. There is an almost complete absence of the fish in January to April (see Fig. 1, 2, page 19). 8. Catfish (Anarrhichas lupus L.). Average catch per day: 1902 1903 5:47 pounds 8:80 pounds. The curve of the catches of this species shows, for both years, apart from minor fluctuations, a tendency to rise during the first months of the year, but a distinct fall again from July—August onwards. : The maximum accordingly, lies about July, the minimum in January. 9. Sole (Solea vulgaris Quens.). This species lives in the more southern parts of the North Sea, and further is considered more a dweller in the shallower coastal regions. It is in agreement with this, that the sole is only represented in our catches by an average of: 1902 1903 ISO PSE 0°41 pounds 0:36 pounds US ieee Re 009 (y OO = DR TEE OT, 0°50 pounds 0:56 pounds. The quantities are too small to demand further consideration. 10. Turbot (Rhombus maximus L.). This species likewise lives more to the south and in smaller depths. Our catches agree with this. The average catch per day was: 1902 1903 Ellsort-. 02: 1°80 pounds ESOL sys reer eric 2°09 pounds LCDS RES ete OT Ur RSA PR 1) NA 2°57 pounds 3:68 pounds. The minimum lies in the cold months, the maximum in summer and autumn. APPENDIX F: HENKING ZN Se 11. Brill (Rhombus laevis Rond.). This agrees with the turbot in respect to its habitat. The average catch per day was: 1902 1903 0°77 pounds 0:62 pounds. The very small quantities do not permit further conclusions. 12. Plaice (Pleuronectes platessa L.). The following were the average catches per day: 1902 1903 I-I SONT ee ee 7:65 pounds 20°33 pounds TI Oe eects eer 19:86 , CON. ;; 27:51 pounds 29°34 pounds. A strong maximum occurred in August and September 1902, and the same maximum — is found in August 1903, (there was no fishing in September 1903). In both years, a minimum occurred in the cold months. 13. Pleuronectes cynoglossus L. and Pl. microcephalus Donov. or witch and lemon dab, are taken together. Both are northern forms, cynoglossus prefers in general, the greater depths, microcephalus the intermediate. The proportions of these two species, in the quantities landed under the common name from the various fishing places, cannot be made out from the existing statistics for 1902 and 1903. To clear up this point, our work must be continued. The average catch per day of both together was: 1902 1903 80:97 pounds 70:74 pounds. A distinct maximum lies in the winter months (about October to April), and a distinct minimum in the summer months (only about 8 pounds as the average per day in August of both years). 14. Dab (Pleuronectes limanda L.). This forms but a small part of the total catch. The average catch per day of fishing was: 1902 1903 6:35 pounds 11°39 pounds. The catch was largest in the winter months of both years (October—February). 15. Halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris Fl.) has only amounted to about 3 pounds per day on an average, for both years. As the fish has a great weight, this means but isolated catches, from which no general conclusions can be drawn. 16. Rays. Their average per day amounted to: 1902 1903 21°01 pounds 26:29 pounds. Most are taken in the months of November December, the least in July —August. The first months of the year have about the average. — 9 — APPENDIX F: HENKING 17. Angler (Lophius piscatorius L.). 1902 1903 o'7 (+ 1°14) pounds 3:19 (+ 1:05) pounds. It has thus a very unimportant role. It is brought to land chiefly in the first months of the year. II. The southern North Sea I include here the banks (1): Borkum, (2) Norderney, (3) Heligoland, (4) Sylt inner ground, (17) Sylt outer ground, (9) Clay Deep, (10) Barren Ground, (5) Horns Reef, (20) Horns Reef outer ground, (13) Southern Mud Bank, (14) Northern Mud Bank, (11) N. E. Dogger Bank, (12) Little Fisher Bank, (6) Jutland inner ground, (18) Jutland outer ground. It is difficult to separate the banks for general statistical purposes, as they lie close to and join one another. Consequently, it is only rarely, that the steamers fish one single bank exclusively. It seems preferable, therefore, to take these banks together, provisionally. So far as the steamers give detailed returns of their catches, it is possible to enter into an analysis of separate banks. All the banks mentioned have this in common, that they lie almost completely in the German Bight of the North Sea, connected as by an outstretched hand by the Dogger Bank, which points towards the Skager Rak like an extended finger. The hydrographical conditions are also characteristic, as is shown by the bottom- curves on the subjoined Charts for 1902 and 1903; along the coast, there is a broad stream of weakly saline water, in the centre, there is a curve of 34°/, salinity, which varies relatively little in the various months and is fairly well limited outwards by the curve of 34°8 °/oo salinity. ’ Water of 35°%/oo salinity not rarely pushes down from the north, however, far over the outer banks, as for example, in May and August 1903; on the other hand, the southern Atlantic water may also penetrate from the Channel far into this part of the North Sea, as was the case in February 1903, and drives the water of weaker salinity close in to the coast so that greater and more rapid gradations of salinity occur there. The temperature also varies considerably in these tolerably flat parts of the North Sea; this can be readily understood tor the immediate neighbourhood of the coast, but even at station D1 near the centre of the region, temperature-variations from not quite + 5° to almost + 15° C? have been observed (1903). It is evident without further explanation, that periodic fluctuations in the stock of fish, including also the food of fishes, are extraordinarily favoured by the manifold factors mentioned, viz.: 1 The numbers are the same as those used in a paper to be cited later (p. 19, note). 2 As in this summary generally, I speak here only of the bottom water-layers. Appendix F 2 APPENDIX F: HENKING PRO (1) the presence of weakly saline coastal water with the Atlantic water of high salinity further out, (2) the mingling of northern Atlantic water with more southern Atlantic water from the Channel, — (3) the variations in temperature, and lastly (4) that the strong tidal currents in the south, gradually change over into tidal rest in the north. The extent, to which fluctuations in the stock of fish occur, may be seen from the following summary. The material used for 1902 comes from 869 voyages (of steamers) of 6,615 days duration, and for 1903 from 869 voyages (of steamers) of 6569 days duration. ; ; 1. Haddock. The average catch per day over the whole year amounted to: 1902 1903 IySOrtiet ee 163°74 pounds 104:82 pounds TR RAM Peep fer eae 11605 , 11835 ,„ LN RE ah 25022 à 9 ASOD ; IV Nele. 190'43 Br 58750 ” It may be remarked generally, that the IV {sort represents a mixture of small haddock, whiting and, in inconsiderable quantities, small cod also, and is consequently better left out of consideration. For both years, 1902 and 1903, two distinct maxima occur: a very high maximum comes in July—September for all three sorts, then a rapid fall is succeeded by a small rise in November, whilst a period of good hauls especially for the larger haddock, occurs in January (1903), February (1902). A well-marked and distinct depression then lasted for three months, from March—May in 1902, February to April in 1903, and a further three months for the larger fish, in 1903 from October onwards and in 1902 from November onwards. The distinct minimum for 1903 thus occurred at the same period as the inflow of the southern Atlantic water of high salinity. 2. Whiting with an average in round numbers of 1902 1903 239 pounds 132:28 pounds may ‘be left out of account here, as it is mixed with the IV sort of haddock. 3. Cod. The average daily catch is: 1902 1903 1 Sorte 114°46 pounds 06:36 pounds I mse tee ie DOOR 21506 , 338:29 pounds 312°32 pounds. The cod has a very distinct depression at the same period in the both years, namely, in the summer months May (1903) June (1902) to September—October. It is well-known, that the cod often reappears in great shoals in October—December. From November to March—April, the catches were well over the average (see Fig. 15, 16, p. 25). Sp = APPENDIX F: HENKING We have thus a phenomenon before us, quite similar to the great cod fisheries of Norway, which are likewise at a maximum in winter. The picture can be still further perfected, as we know from detailed journals of the banks of Heligoland and Sylt outer ground, that the cod had practically disappeared from there in September—October 1902. : 4. Ling (Lota molva) shows the following averages: 1902 1903 9:93 pounds 8:17 pounds. The maximum lies in March—April with somewhat more than twice the average amount, the minimum in June; both years agree in this. In the remaining months the catch is fairly uniform (Fig. 19, 20, p. 26). 5. Saithe and Pollack (Gadus virens and G. pollachius). These species are no common in the southern North Sea. The average catch per day amounts to: 1902 1903 13:83 pounds 8:25 pounds. The catch shows but little variations in the various months. From the special journals of catches, it appears, that these fish appear only occasionally and in small quantities on the most southern banks, e.g. in the winter of 1902 on the Horns Reef Banks, likewise however in May—June; a shoal of them occurred at Heligoland in November 1902. Single specimens are taken on the southern Mud Bank. At Borkum, they were absent in December 1902. We may therefore consider these species, when they occur in the southern parts of the North Sea, as visitors from the north 6. Gurnards (Trigla). With the two species Tr. gurnardus and Tr. hirundo the weever (Trachinus) is also included. , The average catch per day is: 1902 1903 52:56 pounds ca. 48 pounds. The take of these fishes in December, January, February, March of both years was practically nil. Then it suddenly rose and reached its maximum with 129'48 pounds in June 1902 and 131°60 pounds in May 1903. This agreement is almost ridiculous, when we remember, that more than 70 steamers with 450—500 voyaging days form the basis of the calculation for both years. 7. Hake (Merluccius). The average catch pr. day is: 1902 1903 28°73 pounds 17:33 pounds. The curves, representing the occurrence of this interesting fish, are in perfect agree- ment for both years; from December to May it occurs only in traces, but the quantities increase from June onwards and reach a maximum in August—September; then they rapidly decrease and vanish towards the end of the year (Fig. 3, 4, p. 20). * 2 APPENDIX F: HENKING = OY The hake occurs but seldom apparently on the most southerly North Sea banks, from which we may conclude, that it comes from the northern North Sea. 8. Catfish (Anarrhichas). The average catch per day amounts to: 1902 1903 5:92 pounds 553 pounds. It is caught in all months: the curve has a steep rise and the maximum is almost at the same place (March or April) in both years, then there is a gradual decline to the minimum in December with almost complete disappearance. 9. Sole (Solea). The following is the average catch per day: 1902 1903 | [ISO TRE eee 6:82 pounds 8:94 pounds | ER EINER ONE PO OVE AS, | TOE Pa te ee COL, Bose, | 9'43 pounds 13:15 pounds. : à 1 The catch is fairly uniform in all months, but on the Sylt outer ground there was a considerable rise over the average in October—November 1902 and again in November— December generally in 1903. The most southerly banks of the North Sea are specially productive as regards soles 10. Turbot (Rhombus maximus). The average catch per day amounts to: 1902 1903 Slit Govt co a 19:61 pounds 15°90 pounds USSR ae are ne So DATE 37°74 pounds 40°67 pounds. Both years agree in having a distinct and sharply rising maximum in May and June; _ the quantity at the maximum is more than double the average. A second smaller maximum lies in October, extending in December in 1903. The remaining months show considerably smaller catches. 11. Brill (Rhombus laevis). The following is the average catch per day: 1902 1903 7:43 pounds 6:94 pounds. No specially remarkable fluctuations occur in catches of this species, just as might be expected from the small average. The fluctuations, such as they are, indicate a slight increase in winter. 3 12. Plaice (Pleuronectes platessa). The average catch per day is as follows: 1902 1903 1-11 SOHtirea meer 41°79 pounds 35:60 pounds UU ihe ere yee eens DOM DIE, 17945 , 336° 00 pounds 21505 pounds, — 13 — APPENDIX F: HENKING The average for 1903 thus shows a very marked decrease from that of 1902; the greater part of the decrease lies with the small plaice. How far it is really so, could only be determined by extensive measurements. The curves showing the results of the catches are again extraordinarily similar in both years, a fact which can only stand in relation to the special habits and habitats of the plaice. The fluctuation in the catch of the small plaice is very considerable; the curve rises rapidly from the minimum in February to the maximum in June to August (Fig. 7, 8, p. 23). In addition, a smaller rise is noticeable in the late months of 1902, which has to be referred to the circumstance, that an unmistakeable renewed abundance of the smaller plaice occurred on many banks, e. g. Heligoland, Sylt outer ground, partly also the Southern Mud Bank. The increase of large plaice occurs chiefly in the months of late summer and autumn. 13. Witch and lemon-sole (Pl. cynoglossus mostly and microcephalus). The average catch per day amounts to: 1902 1903 617 pounds © 4°34 pounds. The fluctuations in the quite insignificant catches are not in general sufficiently distinct to require special illustration here. 14. Dab (Pl. limanda). The average catch per day amounts to: ; 1902 1903 à 10°44 pounds 6°03 pounds. \ pt The catch varies but little, yet a distinct maximum lies about March—May, a mini sf mum in December to February. é 15. Halibut (Hippoglossus). This is an inhabitant of the colder regions; the average catch barely reaches a pound, a proof of its rarety in this region. It was taken, however, somewhat more frequently in March—April of both years, but in still quite inconsiderable quantities. 16. Rays play no small role in the southern North Sea. The average catch amounted to: 1902 1903 42°05 pounds 42°28 pounds. A great agreement in the catches of the two years! They agree also, in that the greatest catch was made in December (to February 1902), whilst a second increase occurred in June—July (Fig. 23, 24, p. 27). A number of other species, as angler, dog-fish, sturgeon, conger, need not be con- sidered here, but the mackerel requires a few words. Mackerel are taken in all months except January to March‘, and on all the banks from Borkum to Norderney, Southern Mud Bank and along the coast as far as the Little Fisher Bank. 1) Nevertheless, ca. 200 pounds of mackerel were landed from the Little Fisherbank in February 1902. APPENDIX F: HENKING — 14 — In 1902, they were found in somewhat greater quantities in June, and again in 1903 in unusually great numbers during May; they were also caught by the steam-trawlers in considerable quantities on the banks of Norderney, Heligoland and Sylt. If we compare this with what has been said previously (p. 3) regarding the occurrence of the mackerel in the neigbourhood of the coast, we obtain an interesting picture of the occurrence of this migratory fish in the southern North Sea. III. The region of the Skager Rak (Skager Rak, Hanstholm, Hirtshals, the Skaw) In this region, the trawl fishery is limited to the southern, shallower part, or the margin of the mainland on the Jutland coast. The deeper, northern part of this water, has not hitherto been fished. The hydrographical conditions are of especial interest, in that the weakly saline coastal waters grade, so to speak, in layers into the highly saline waters of the Skager Rak with relatively sharp transitions (as shown by the accompanying chart), and the periodic fluc- tuations in those conditions, which have been specially studied by the Swedish naturalists, are accompanied by corresponding changes of temperature. Otherwise, the conditions here are less complicated than in the southern North Sea, because the fresh-water outflow from the coast and the slope of the bottom are quite unimportant. In 1902, the fishery was carried on here by 725 steamers with 5,929 voyaging days, in 1903 by 809 steamers with 6,865 voyaging days. It may be mentioned here again, that these figures do not refer to the total catch in the Skager Rak, but only to the portion which forms the basis for the following contribution. 1. Haddock. The average catch per day amounts to: 1902 1903 MSOF Ra hare 81°23 pounds 57°10 pounds Met 10784 , 10449 , NT ENTER era 50616 , 40309 , TV ee a ae ete 383:89 , 85605 , WouI RIN. cals co 200'84 , 16870 , For both years and especially clearly in 1903, the maximum for the larger haddock (sorts I and Il) lies in the months May, June and July; a minimum jut as distinct in January (February) and November December. Exactly the same is the case for the small haddock; the curve rises like a mountain from the minimum in the months of spring, reaches its maximum somewhat later than that of the larger haddock and then suddenly falls again in November—December. The precise data in the journals of the catches confirm the picture given above. | | | _ . met ‘ — 15 — APPENDIX F: HENKING 2. Whiting are not always separated from the small haddock, and the quantities have therefore been mentioned above. So far as they are distinguished, the largest maximum lies in October, a smaller from March to May (1902). In the following year (1903), the maximum occurs in March—April, but is absent from October. 3. Cod. The following is the average catch per day: 1902 1903 IBS Oni AMEN AURAS 202°41 pounds 17784 pounds NE cds Min ease we tan SON. 133835 „ 350'57 pounds 31619 pounds. Both years show two maxima, namely, in June and again in about December. Depressions occur between these two periods (Fig. 17, 18, p. 25). The data in the journals of the catches for 1902, show similar positions for the two maxima; but the summer maximum is somewhat later, in July. 4. Ling. The average catch per day is: 1902 1903 45°65 pounds 40°64 pounds. The curve showing the fluctuations in the catch of this species, is extraordinarily similar in its course to those of the cod, and both years are the same in this; a very great depression in April—May and a second smaller depression in October, are separated by sudden elevations with maximum points in August and December—January. The latter may apparently be delayed into February. The more precise data of the journals of the catches show the same movement in the same fluctuation in the intensity of the catches (Fig. 21, 22, p. 26). 5. Saithe and Pollack play an important role in the Skager Rak. The average catch per day is: 1902 1903 165'21 pounds 103°18 pounds. The curve of the catches is almost identical with those of the cod and ling, viz. a distinct maximum in July (1902) or August (1903) and a second in November (1903) or December (1902). The journals for 1902 show quite the same curve. The elevations in the curve for these species are very prominent, thus in 1903, the greatest depression of the average in February, with 18°94 pounds, is contrasted with a maximum of 198'79 pounds in August. In 1902, the catch was greater and the maximum in July was as high as 348°69 pounds. 6. Gurnards play but a small part in the Skager Rak. The average catch amounts to: 1902 1903 6°77 pounds 5°83 pounds, APPENDIX F: HENKING ME NE The catch is quite small in the winter months, December to April, and increases in summer and autumn. In October 1903, it reached an average per day of 27:5 pounds. 7. Hake. The remarkable occurrence of the hake in the Skager Rak is of as great an interest as its occurrence in the other regions mentioned previously. The average catch amounts to: 1902 1903 72°16 pounds 30°21 pounds. In spite of these great differences in the total quantities, the occurrence of the species during the various months is quite the same for both years, and the separate curves are very similar. i} There is practically no catch in January, February, March, April. Then a sudden rise with high maximum in June (159 pounds average, 1903, as high as 413 pounds, 1902); then a steep fall and gradual attenuation to December (Fig. 5, 6, p. 20). 8. Catfish. The average catch per day amounts to: 1902 1903 15°11 pounds 16°94 pounds. Both years agree in having the maximum with an average over 40 pounds in July, the minimum at the end or beginning of the year. Further, the form of the curve is very similar for both years. It is also remarkable, that the April maximum which occurred for the southern North Sea, is distinct likewise for the Skager Rak. 9. The sole only occurs in small quantities in the Skager Rak; the average catch per day only amounts to: 1902 1903 ISort AR ee 0:63 pounds 0:69 pounds NET der. O22 ia Gaon as 0:85 pounds 1°01 pounds. In spite of these insignificant quantities, there is an unmistakeable minimum in the warm months (July, August) and a very distinct maximum in the winter months, December— February; these are clear for both years and are seen also in the precise data of the journals. February of 1902 stands highest with 656 pounds, thus exceeding the February average cf the southern North Sea, the true home of the sole. 10. Turbot. The following is the average catch: 1902 1903 EN sort vee ee 2:06 pounds 2°83 pounds IT. ee TEIL INA NO 4:07 pounds - 3°89 pounds. The agreement in the catch of the two years is remarkable. Both agree also, in having the minimum in summer and a considerable maximum in the last months of the == 7 — APPENDIX F: HENKING year. They differ in that a greatly increased catch also occurred in the spring of 1902, which was not quite the case in 1903; in the latter year, on the other hand, a high average occurred in August. 11. The brill shows the following averages: 1902 1903 1:45 pounds 1°58 pounds. As with the turbot and sole, there is a distinct minimum in the summer and a maximum inthe winter. The greatest average of both years, with 8°31 pounds, occurs in December 1903, the same month in which the turbot had the highest average, viz. 16:06 pounds. The sole had also a relatively high average in this month, viz. 3:15 pounds per day or 1227 pounds alltogether. 12. Plaice. The average catch per day amounts to: 1902 1903 IT GOMb ced ooo Be 7:37 pounds 8:04 pounds TG SRE VATS A 2 OB ae TOO; 48°30 pounds 27°73 pounds. The minimum for both years, with ca. 1/, of the general average, lies in the summer, for 1902 in July (and the data of the journals confirm this), further in June for 1903. Both years agree also, in that the maximum lies in September with almost double the general average; further, the curves agree in having a broad elevation in the months August—November. (Fig. 9, 10, p. 22). 13. Witch and lemon-sole have an average per day of: 1902 1903 230°77 pounds 220'60 pounds. This is a very remarkable agreement, when we consider the great numbers which form the basis of the calculations. Further, the curves for the two years show quite a striking resemblance, even in the small fluctuations, and only differ in that the highest point i.e. the maximum falls in May for 1902, but in June for 1903, whilst it occurs in July according to the journals for 1902. It is quite unmistakeable, that the minimum lies in December—January; the curve rises high above this in all the remaining months. (Fig. 13, 14, p. 24). 14. Dab. The average catch per day is: 1902 1903 30°82 pounds 35°99 pounds. The course of the curves is exactly the same as for the witch and lemon-sole; a minimum in January is followed by a rising increase in the catch to the highest point in May. From this onwards there is a rapid, though not quite uniform, fall to the depression in December. Appendix F 3 APPENDIX F: HENKING Sn 15. Halibut. The average catch per day is: 1902 1903 3:20 pounds 3:03 pounds. A small increase in the catch is noticeable in February and March and also in August—September. 16. Rays contribute considerably to the catches in the Skager Rak. The average per day is: 1902 1903 72°15 pounds 70°34 pounds. In the summer months, from about May to October, the catch is under the general average, with a minimum in June (1902) or Juli (1903). The catch in December to March lies high above the average. (Fig. 25, 26, p. 27). In addition to the unimportant species taken by the trawlers and mentioned in an earlier page, as angler, dog-fish and mackerel, some special species are taken in the Skager Rak. The Norway haddock (Sebastes norwegicus) and the Great Silver Smelt (Argentina silus) may be specially mentioned here. Both live in the deeper water-layers and are only caught apparently in the summer half-year. Further, the occurrence of herring in the catches of the trawlers is interesting. The trawl is not usually the right apparatus for taking the herring’, and even here it has only the character of an extra-catch, on account of which the opinion has occasionally been expressed; that the herring are not taken on the ground but in the higher layers on winding in the net. This does not seen altogether a satisfactory explanation. I will content myself with stating the following data of the herring catches in 1902—03. 1902 1903 MH Eee eer 800 pounds Ia ann 1200 pounds FT JUNE TAPER ER COO 5 n EDEN $0 5cc0n60c00 1300 , 1 MOCLODER een Co AU INET COVA Iga ee 200 November 13,950 , m» SONMEMIEH socsonon26: 100 ‘5 a) December re 1100 October ues tenner Seer: Gain DENovemberer pre DIO) à „December... regen 100) Retrospect It appears from the summary, given in preceding pages, that considerable fluctuations occur in the stock of almost all the food-fishes, considered at the different periods of the year. In view of the considerable material which forms the basis of our review, it can hardly be considered, that the fluctuations in the curve of the catches is referable to the t Nevertheless, this is the usual method of fishing for the winter-herring in the mouths of the Elbe (see p 4). — 19 — APPENDIX F: HENKING captains of the boats wishing to avoid the capture of certain species at certain periods of the year; there remains no other possibility, therefore, than that the number of fish in front of the trawl has actually varied. . This means the admission of a migration; as a simple breaking-up of denser shoals or the collection of scattered fish in shoals can only come in question, when wide areas are connected with the phenomena. The migrations may take place in two directions: 1) vertically, into higher water-layers not fished by the trawl, 2) horizontally, into other parts of the sea. — 80 I a & 4 89 NO 12 Fig. 1. Hake: northern North Sea, 1902 7278 ane 12 Fig, 2. Hake: northern North Sea, 1903 N.B. The figures 1—12 under the line represent the months (1 — January etc.). The figures alongside the curves represents the average catch per day in pounds (® = o's kg, = 1°1 Ib. Eng.). It may be accepted, that both kinds of migration may participate in producing the fluctuations in the curve of catches. We have therefore to ascertain if the facts given above speak for the one or the other. In this I consider the data given as facts; the ascer- tained agreement — almost astonishing in many cases — in the course of the curves for the same region for two different years, as is shown in Fig. 1—26 (p. 19—28), does not permit us to consider the fluctuations due to mere change. According the position of the maxima in the various months, we can divide the fishes into summer- and winter-species — as I have already done in a previous work’. So far as the true North Sea is concerned, the division given there is a suitable classi- fication. It will appear from the following, how far variations from it occur in the wider region now considered. 2) Henking, Die Befischung der Nordsee durch deutsche Fischdampfer (Mittheilungen des Deutschen See- fischerei-Vereins, 1901, Nr, 1). # 6) APPENDIX F: HENKING — 99) — SAVENT NE Fig. 5. Hake: Skager R: } oe HET i I Fig.4. Hake: south. North Sea, 1903 ie A 3 ‘a ES Sot APPENDIX F: HENKING The haddock (Gadus aeglefinus L.) is a summer-species. It is taken in greater numbers in summer than in winter over the whole southern and northern North Sea, in the Skager Rak and in the Kattegat. Why does it occur in increased quantities almost everywhere within this large region at the same time? Once upon a time the probable explanation would have been, that it sought the bottom-layers more in summer than in winter. The case is quite different with the hake (Merluccius). It is known as an inhabitant of both sides of the Atlantic and as a swift predatory fish. In the most southern parts of the North Sea it is only a somewhat rare visitor. It is probable therefore, that it comes from the north, where it is more frequently caught. Whether the hake, so far as large quantities are concerned, is a stationary inhabitant (stand-fish) of the North Sea, may be doubted. The notion of an emigration on a large scale has greater probability. In the first three to four months of the year it is hardly taken at all (see Fig. 1-6). Then it appears in ever-increasing numbers, perhaps with the inflow of Atlantic water (see annexed Chart for 1903, May-curve). We may picture how the first shoals quickly spread over the plateau of the northern North Sea and appear in dense masses in the Skager Rak (Fig. 5—6) and Kattegat already in June; in August they also cover the southern North Sea in considerable numbers (Fig. 3—4), whilst the shoals following lead to the maximum-stock in the northern North Sea about September. They thus undoubtedly enter into more weakly saline and warmer waters. Pettersson states, that the hake spawns on a bank off the Swedish coast north from Marstrand in August of each year, and disappears completely in September. It is possible that it wanders back generally to the Atlantic Ocean at this period. After Sep- tember it quickly becomes rarer everywhere (Fig3—6). Late in the year, a second increase in the catch occurs only in the northern North Sea — as if the fish were on the return journey. The possibility of extensive migrations arises also from the circumstance, that the hake occurs in the catches of the trawlers only as large fish seemingly, more rarely as medium-sized specimens. The measurements made by us, show the folloving: Place of capture Date of capture Total length Mouth of the Skager Rak.......... 18. June 1904 58— 84 BAS TOOIN ER ES EE end of June 1904 70— 93 PMT RE EEE EN TE PER end of July 1904 43— 82 pe VAT ER EEE 20. October 1903 39--44, 54—100 Eros, 0 Peak ee ER PRE 15. July 1904 65— 95 Ba MECS ARE SRE ES 6. July 1904 65:5—103 [RIGHTS INGOT EC MN ere 13. December 1903 76— 81 (only 2specim.) ROMS OA ramen, Er NE 25. June 1904 50, 72—105 The correctness of the picture sketched in the foregoing will have to be ascertained by further investigations ï. 1) The picture agrees in general with the data given by Fulton for the catches of trawlers in the northern North Sea for the year 1901. Two maxima also occur here, often quite unmistakeably, but somewhat later in the year. See Fulton, North Sea Investigations, II. (20. Ann. Report, Fishery Board of Scotland. Pt. III, Table III, 1902), — 540— — 480 — — 420 — — 360 — — 300— ho — 180— 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 do W va 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lo 1 12 Fig. 7. Plaice: south. North Sea, 1902 Fig.9. Plaice: Skager Rak, 1902 & — 360 — —300- u Fer À — 240 — LE H — 180 — IN Seo = [i foe Gln el Om nh Fig. 8. Plaice: south. North Sea, 1903 Fig. ro. Plaice: Skager Rak, 1903 f means large plaice (sorts I und Il) N.B. In Figures 7—10 À «... — small — (sorts III) \ | — total amount tae — 23 — APPENDIX F: HENKING Catfish (Anarrhichas) shows certain resemblances to the hake, though the same extremes do not occur. The plaice (Pleuronectes platessa L.) is taken in greatest quantities in summer over the whole North Sea (Fig. 7 and8). Whether this arises simply from local causes, or whether regular migrations of considerable extent also occur here, e. g. to or from the English Channel or Kattegat, where the greatest catches are made in the winter months, I cannot yet venture to say. In the Skager Rak, the catch shows a small rise in autumn (Fig. 9 and 10). The gurnard (Trigla) is distinctly a summer-species in the southern North Sea, in the Kattegat just as distinctly a winter-species. For the northern North Sea and the Skager Rak such certain distinctions cannot as yet be made. If a fish appears as a summer-species in the one region and as a winter-species in the neighbouring, the suspicion arises, that we have to do with a fixed condition, i.e. a migration. More cannot be said at present, particularly as several species are included under gurnards in commerce, though Trigla gurnardus predominates. The witch and lemon-sole (Pleuronectes cynoglossus and microcephalus) show an interesting contrast to the plaice; compare Fig. 7—10 with Fig, 11—14 They are distinctly summer-species, especially in the Skager Rak (Fig. 13 and 14). It seems to be different tor the northern North Sea, yet nothing can be said for certain as the material is not sufficiently comprehensive. In the southern North Sea they occur more uniformly and only in small quantities (Fig. 11 and 12). The dab (Pleuronectes limanda) shows a similar condition to the foregoing, and the curve of the catches is similar both for the North Sea and Skager Rak. Sole (Solea), Turbot (Rhombus maximus) and Brill (Rhombus laevis) are similar to one another in occurrence but essentially different from the species mentioned above. In the Skager Rak, their catches show a distinct depression in the summer-months, and they thus seem to be winter-species here. In the southern North Sea their occurrence is more uniform. The saithe and pollack (german: “Kôühler’’) must be treated carefully in seeking for wider interpretations, because two species are included here (Gadus virens and G. pollachius), the proportions of which in the total quantities have yet to be ascertained. Regarded as one species, it can only be said, that they are taken by our steamers chiefly in the winter-months of both years in the northern North Sea, but on the other hand in the summer-months, with a second increase in November—December, in the Skager Rak. We may therefore conclude, that a migration of these fishes takes place between the two regions, and the southern North Sea is but little concerned in this migration. In the most southerly parts of the North Sea, the saithe and pollack are obviously visitors only coming from the north in greater or smaller shoals. APPENDIX F: HENKING — 24 — Fig. 11. Witcha. Lemon-sole: south. North Sea, 1902 Fig. 13. Witch a. Lemon-sole: Skager Rak, 1902 & 6 — 320 — = 280 — = 240 — 200. — 160 — en 120 JE 8 Ge 7. Seo Wi We Nalsıa SB INC LE Wile Fig.15. Cod: south. North Sea, 1902 Fig. 17. Cod: Skager Rak, 1902 = E05 = 60 — (NET SET lo 1m 12 We Sie 4h CSG Boi: IN ale Fig. 16. Cod: south. North Sea, 1903 Fig. 18. Cod: Skager Rak, 1903 means large cod (sort I) i N.B. In Figures 15—18 Bee , Appendix F 4 m — total amount r Bi, u APPENDIX F: HENKING ONE The cod (Gadus morrhua L.) shows very interesting fluctuations in the quantities, which might lead to the view, that migrations occur between the various regions. ‚I have considered the available data from this standpoint and may therefore sketch out the following picture: in the true summer months, considerably fewer cod occur in the southern North Sea! than at other times (Fig. 15 and 16). They have perhaps, under the influence of the rising temperature, migrated to the Skager Rak, where at the time when the southern North Sea is poor, rich catches are being made (Fig. 17 and 18). The northern North Sea may also recieve immigrants from the south in late summer. & — 80 — : — 60 — =, Noy = ey hn EGS er SPO I IR I 2) 34 5 6 77-8 1S) oz Fig. 19. Ling: South. North Sea, 1902 Fig. 21. Ling: Skager Rak, 1902 — 60 — => fa 8 90607289 mo wR 8 9 10 Il Fig. 20. Ling: North. North Sea, 1903 ae 22. Le su Rak, 1903 The Skager Rak gives off something of its store to the Kattegat, so that an increase takes place here in the first half of the following year; like the southern North Sea, however, the Skager Rak receives a new increase from the north in the months towards the close of the year. There is thus an increase in the quantities of the cod in the southern North Sea in the winter months. t I speake here only of larger fish, which can be brought to market, Small undersized cod occur in summer also, but I do not know in what relative quantities. pt — 27 — APPENDIX F: HENKING It can by no means be said, however, that the view given is the only possible explanation. Further material must still be obtained for the comprehension of the matter. Such material exists already perhaps in the report of the Committee on the migrations of the fishes. The Ling (Lota molva) has a double maximum. The one lies in winter and is distinct in the Skager Rak (Fig. 21— 22), also in the southern North Sea, though somewhat later. In the Skager Rak a second maximum occurs in the middle of summer (Fig. 21—22). g — 160 — — 120 — = 702 ne ho BG EO Te [PB Oh GP er To 0h te Fig. 23. Rays: south. North Sea, 1902 Fig. 25. Rays: Skager Rak, 1902 & = [k= — 80 — 40 — D 2 SAME ON UNE) NT TI RTS TON ARR ONCE OMIS Fig. 24 Rays: south. North Sea, 1903 Fig. 26. Rays: [Skager Rak, 1903 . Lastly, the rays, under which are to be understood the two species, Raja clavata and R. batis chiefly, may be mentioned. Further information concerning their relative proportions, has yet to be obtained. The rays are of interest in that they show a distinct depression in the Skager Rak during the summer months and a very high catch in the winter (Fig. 25 and 26). The same holds for the southern North Sea, yet a distinct and repeated increase in the summer is noticeable here (Fig. 23—24). APPENDIX F: HENKING Basie) a As appears from the foregoing data, the periods in the occurrence of the food-fishes make a somewhat “kaleidoscopic and varied” picture. Perfect clearness cannot as yet be brought into the matter, we are still too much at the beginning of the investigations. | As yet we know too little, of the living conditions of the various species in the different : parts of the sea, of their food, down to the plankton, and of their rate of growth. Even _ 4 regarding such an important feature as the spawning-period, every year brings new | surprises. With increasing knowledge of this region and a continuation internationally of the hydrographical investigations of the sea, we shall perhaps succeed in ascertaining the order of the fishery-periods in the North Sea, and their causes. MISPRINTS Page 6, Line 8, for: 35-35 Jo read: 35.25 °/o0 — 9, — 13 from beneath, for: May and August read: February and May sojua:pnwu goer ove oot 0000009 * “rojewmopy 009 00 00% 008 002 oo! 5 ee 12QU2A0N jsnäny (sasınıo jeuoseas ay} JO suoneötsaAur ou} wo) cO6l woyog-kas au} JE AJUIES ayy JO eyep YA | VAS HLNON 3HL 40 LYVHO —— cS ve} T ‚punoig 13/nQ ‘jaay SUIOH * “yueg Jassoq MS " \ ‘PUnOIr, Jano ‘pueynr " | “punosy 1a]nO WAS + ne A “punoin uapely * "yurg Jaysıg ea * = “ wlaypon " | “HUB pnw wWeyynos * | aimed HOUSE OMT | \ \ —t "yueg 12880QG'4AN * \ \ | et | 7 | ; \ \ ß A te | Pa uopuoT \ "punosg ualıeg * ‘daag 481 * EZ 'SIEUSHIH * 5 | | \ >, \D \ -wjoyjsue " \ \ / -punoig Jouuf ‘puepnf * \ \ d - \ KE 07? EE u —— u, MEN 3, GS ve} ‘Jay SUIOH * —F | "punoin jauuy ‘AS * 20752407 pred Se alot 4 SSS “wnyI0g 0} Aauiapion : ee IN \ Le k = | x PL | 1" \- = + spunoissulys}4 94} 40 ef a a ms | | Tr | | Ä auhy uo \ans220N PS | | c \ \ /aNnvılo 387 À le % ALT] fe (Re RE” a 4 xipuaddy POGI—ZO6I :HOdey Telausn 0000009 "I vorm new 00e Ove o8t ‘10JOW10/1M 009 Ayuyyes JaquaAoN Aew Aseniga,j (sasmı9 Jeuoseas ay} JO SUOHRSHSPAU! ay} LOI) E06l wonog-eas ay} ye ÂJIUNES ay} JO eyep YM VIS HLHON AHL 40 LYVHO ‘PUNOIND IQ ‘yaay SWIOH * “Aug sad30q MS " “‘punosH 1a}nO ‘pueynr * *punoip J2}nQ WAS ", ‘punosH uapely * “yURg Jaysıg yeouH " = “ wauyoN " Aug pnw moymnos * “yueg Sasa aT : dog IN * “punoip uaueg * ‘daaq AeiD * “SIEUSUIH * “LOUJSUEH : "punosg JaUU] ‘puryne * “yueg Ja: ‘J22Y sulo "punoig sauuy AS " “purjosiaH * “winyiog 0} Aausapion : ‘TON “Burjayasiay 0} wnysog AGAR ERR Aw Rk elm Sele ae ne ne à ZE | IH | | 1 \) N ce | Km 02 09 0 or \ ur, | au / re CRUE. Be N —— AGEN an \ our’ au wo 2 SORA 4 xıpuaddy F06I— 2061 :Hoday [EAAUSD ny h D RE NE AY RUN x F f ee i Se 5 i ER “ j 3 N k i APPENDIX G D SHORT. REVIEW OF THE RESULTS _ OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERIES % INVESTIGATIONS (MOSTLY NORWEGIAN AND DANISH) BY JOHAN HJORT an C. G. JOH. PETERSEN si 10 PLATES AND 7 FIGURES IN THE ee (TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY H. M. KYLE) Page Introduction er PURE Re ARE woh fe Edt ANR EAU EE A ER PNR ER RARE de 3 1EGeosmaphical@distnibutionVor. nehes PE EEE EEE NE 3 l)ÉTheldeephbasin or the Norwenlan Sears MERE eee eer EE CPE CPP TERRE 4. 2) The deep basin of the Atlantic Ocean and the southern slope of the great marine ridge from Greenland ito) the sNoxthy Sean banken snare PE EE een ET RP RER 5 3) Slope of the coastal banks of the North Atlantic towards the North Atlantic basin......... 7, 4) Depths. less than 200m. 0... ec TENTE a ee ee 8 5), The migratory pelagic fishes! 00.5.4). sai) soso ee dae NE ene Oe ae 11 i Methodssotwork and) cenerall results EEE NN eee eee 13 A. Methods of work and apparatus: V. Hensen’s quantitative hauls of pelagic fish eggs. Catches of the fishermen. The represen- tative statistic. Investigators are obliged to do practical work themselves. Zoological and systematic preliminary investigations of the young fishes. Methods of measuring. The mark- ingot living wishes; ‘Study/ot acess...) a eee eee 13 B. Examples of the results obtained: 1. Kees, larve and young fishes 2.2.2). APR ee eee Ne es oe 17 a. The young stages of the genus Gadus (cod group)......................... eee > Als b. The young stages of the genus Pleuronectes (flounder group). ................... 20 c. The peculiarities of the Baltic ee Tee pee NO ME SR at ee 0 om cor 21 4. "Ihe; OS LR ee Pease Cm ese OO RE Mn GR Ren GAG co aore ne 22 2. The older stages of fishes ( fishes):./.......4-2-.-0-:0--- ECO 22 The biology of each separate species of fish must be separately studied.................. 23 a. Niviparous blenny i. och) os a dings AC RPM ER oc nn N Fo 23 b.. EN 2... are nn er Re conne de bn BAS Orting coco oc con 23 6. Cd... lan ange Aero Tach TE LE ee n ae LE Wise 6.00 ao ur u 23 3..Othersresultsf ne ea ee RUE SEI ER SEN EEE ee 24 a: New regions of. fiShing.......1 esse ee ae ee 24 b. New economically important species of animals. Pandalus borealis. Nephrops norvegicus. Ommatostrephes ‘todarus =: u... decease eel ae se ike oc nee aoe en ee 24 c. How to make as much as possible from the productivity of the sea. Restrictive REGULON Nex See Paihia PS ary eke cas MR SA SE CNT RE OR RER oct 0 de 24 d. Hatching. Transplantation of small plaice. 00 25 TTL; Natural history. ofthe code aye tee RENNES RENE RS Re 27 1) ‘Spawning period... nee Cecio ane RE Ron Re ea ee Po PU 2) Natural history of the cod-durmenits first) year 33 3) Rate of growth, migrations and the fisheries of the cod .................... cscs eee sees 37 CONTENTS FT ee ; INTRODUCTION iF is self-evident that the common work of marine investigation, in which the North- European nations have joined, must take its commencement from what we already know con- cerning the sea and the life of the sea. From the beginning therefore, the investigations have been so instituted as to use and further the methods and results which existing institutions have already worked out in this field of enquiry. The international work is so closely bound to these results that it is often impossible, in the following review of the later work of the last two years, to show what comes from the present and what from the earlier investigations ; moreover, it was to some extent the same naturalists who conducted the work formerly as at present. We have thought it better accordingly, for the sake of continuity and the deeper inter- relations of the work, to keep chiefly to the facts and we have laid less weight on what both series of investigations have obtained separately. We would point out however, that the historical development is such, that the new and extended international investigations are in all essentials based on the results achieved by the earlier; the aim of both is the same and the means are of the same kind, but the new means regarded from the purely quantitative standpoint are greater. We have every reason to expect that the results will likewise be greater. The following report will perhaps confirm this view even though all the material is far from haying been worked out. I. GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF FISHES The region within which the international investigations are being pursued, offers in its various parts the most varied physical conditions for the life of fishes and the practical fishing industry. Thus, experience has shown above all that depth, temperature and salinity, have the greatest influence on the occurrence of the various species of fishes and on the richness of the animal life. . Ié follows therefore, that the first preliminary condition of all fisheries investigations, whether practical or theoretical, must be an exact and purely geographical knowledge of the various parts of the ocean, and that only on such a basis, can wider plans be built for the detailed study of the natural history and migrations of the various species. 1* APPENDIX G SNA In this respect, the international investigations have been able to build upon the results of earlier expeditions. The Wyville Thomson Expedition and the Danish Ingolf Expedition have collected valuable information concerning the North Atlantic Ocean. From the earlier English and Scottish investigations also, we have numerous data concerning the distribution of the fish- fauna in the different parts of the North Sea. The investigations of recent years haye rendered it further possible to collect a much more comprehensive material; and much more information especially could be gathered concerning the fishes, because apparatus was for the first time employed, calculated to make larger catches than those used by earlier expeditions; also, the endeavour has been made, in connection with the hydrographical investigations, to procure systematic information concerning the physical relations under which the fish taken lived. We shall therefore begin the following description of the principal results attained hitherto from the international fisheries investigations, with a survey of the geographical information. which exists concerning the general distribution of the fishes within the region under investigation. 1) The deep basin, which occupies the entire central portion of the Norwegian Sea, has depths as great as 3700m. in its centre, and by far the greatest part is more than 200m. deep. ‘Towards the east, south and south-west, this deep-sea basin is bounded by banks which, in spite of many depressions and elevations in the sea-bottom, form a continuous surface from Spitzbergen to the Denmark Straits and slope down towards the great depths of the Norwegian Sea. The numerous hydrographical investigations of the years 1900—1904 have shown, that the great masses of water occupying the central portion of the Norwegian Sea possess an uniform character. All water-samples from depths of 1000 to 3000 m. showed the same salinity and the same temperature both in summer and in winter; namely, on an average 34,92 °/oo salinity with a variation of 0.04 °/oo, and a temperature varying between —1.1° to — 1.22: A glance at the chart of depths (Plate 1) gives us a picture of the distribution of the cold bottom-water in the Norwegian Sea. The depths over 600m are shown on the chart in various shades of blue. We may say in general, that the region of the Norwegian Sea marked by the blue colour has everywhere cold water at the bottom, otherwise all the coastal banks, distinguished by brown colour, are covered by warmer water. 5 It has been concluded from the homogeneity of these water-masses, that they have but a very slight movement. As to the origin of the bottom-water of the Norwegian Sea, the hydro- graphical investigations have led to the conclusion, that it arises from the wide region between Jan Mayen and Spitzbergen, where the bottom-water rises to the surface and where the salinity and temperature are the same as at the bottom further south. ; Numerous fishery investigations, by means of which endeavours have been made to learn the fish-fauna of the deep basin, have shown that the same characteristic forms obtain from the southern Shetland-Feroe Channel to as far north as Spitzbergen, namely: = 5 = JOH. HJORT ax» C. G. JOH. PETERSEN Cottidæ: Cottunculus microps, subspinosus. Liparide: Careproctus Reinhardti, Paraliparis bathybii. Ophidüdæ: Rhodichthys regina. ' Lycodinæ: L. murena, flagellicauda, frigidus, pallidus, similis, eudipleurostictus, seminudus. the shark: Somniosus microcephalus and . the ray: Raja hyperborea. The earlier statements, that this fauna was present only in sparse quantities, have not quite been confirmed. Thus, for example, on the 29th of August 1901, at 63°13’N.L., 6°32’ W.L. we obtained 34 Paraliparis bathybii, 1 Rhodichthys regina and 17 Lycodes frigidus in a two hours haul with a large trawl of 50 foot head-line at 1735m. depth. Similar good catches have also been made in the Shetland-Feroe Channel; further, to the east of Iceland at 66°20.5' N. L., 12°10’ W. L. the Danish investigation-steamer Thor’ obtained 4 Raja hyper- …borea, 1 Somniosus microcephalus and 20 Hippoglossus hippoglossoides on 225 hooks at a depth of 855 m (bottom-temperature — 0.60). Thorough investigations to determine the limit of this deep-sea fauna in the upper layers, showed that it could be sharply defined. Thus, for example, on the 29th of June 1902 at 62°32’ N. L., 1°56’ E.L. a long line was set out, the one end of which was at a depth of 390m. and temperature of 6°.1, the other at 450m, temperature — 0°.2; the length of the line was ca.2200m. At the deeper end, fish of the deep sea (Raja hyperborea) were taken, at the other end, fish of the coastal banks (Sebastes, Macrurus). This limit has thus the practical - importance, that it marks the division between the worthless species of the Arctic and the useful species of the coastal banks. With the changing of the oceanic currents this limit rises or falls, so that the useful species appear higher or lower on the slope of the coastal Bi; banks. Differences may also appear between different regions of the Norwegian Sea, according as the oceanic currents are stronger in one or the other. We should especially expect, to find great differences where the strongest currents meet, for example at the Feroe-Iceland ridge, just as it has been found that the limit along the long slope of the Norwegian coastal banks can be different at different places. 2) We find the greatest contrast to the depths of the Norwegian Sea in the deep basin of the Atlantic Ocean and on the southern slope of the great submarine ridge which, from Greenland to the North Sea, forms the boundary between the two seas. The hydrographical section (Fig. 1) shows the relations of salinity and temperature in the ocean, above and on both sides of the Feroe-Iceland ridge. The salt Atlantic water, which presses from the south over the ridge, is brought to a sudden stop (interruption?) by mixed layers, which come from the north. On the north side of the ridge, the low temperature of 0° lies in depths which vary between 450 to 600 m.; the surface of the ridge is washed by layers of 2°—4°, whilst the southern slopes indicate water of 6° down to a depth of 700 m. The Danish Ingolf Expedition has shown that the animal life, especially the lower animals, is different on the two sides of the Færoe-Iceland ridge. Our fishery investigations have shown us that a triple fauna exists here in agreement with the hydrographical conditions, namely, the APPENDIX G ER arctic in the cold water on the north side, the atlantic in the warmer layers on the southern side and even a fauna on the ridge itself, just as we find on all the coastal banks of the Norwegian Seas; this will be described later in greater detail. If we fish in a straight line from the Feroe Isles southerly towards the Atlantic Ocean and in different depths, we find the first Atlantic fishes, Centrophorids, which we know from the Portugese and West African coasts, already at 400—600m. These appear at the same time with such forms of the coastal banks as the halibut, Spinax niger, Chimera monstrosa etc. In greater depths on the other hand, e. g. from 700—2000 m, Da ALT Da hts Doll DA we find the pure Atlantic fish-fauna; amongst ER ; à these are fish which remind one strongly of the 5 species on the coastal banks, and are so similar to these indeed, that a very close examination is required to discover that they belong to other though nearly allied species. There is, for example, a Chimera (Ch. mirabilis) which stands near to the Chimera monstrosa of the coastal banks, and we find a small shark (Etmopterus princeps) which is related to the Spinax niger of common occurrence in the Nor- wegian fjords. In addition to these forms, which are so nearly related to the fishes of the Norwegian Sea, the majority at these depths consists of such widely different and Atlantic forms as e. g. the Notocanthide (N. bonapartei), Murænidæ (e. g. Synophobranchus pinnatus), Haloporphyrus eques) Halargyreus (affinus), Trachyrynehus (Murrayi), various species of Macrurus especially of the genus Coryphenoides, and the above- mentioned Centrophorus. The great richness in individuals on the southern slope of the Iceland-Shetland ridge is Fig. 1. . of great biological interest. In a single haul of an hour at 61°7’N.L., 9°33’ W. L. a catch of about 300 fish could be made by a trawl of 50 foot head-line at 765 to 828 m; amongst these fishes August 1905. were: 4 Chimera mirabilis Coll. n. sp., 14 Spinacide (Centroscyllium Fabricii), Emopterus princeps, Coll. n. sp., Centrophorus (squamosus), 15 Notacanthus bonapartei, 73 Haloporphyrus eques, 94 Halargyreus affinis, Coll. n. sp., 74 specimens of the genus Coryphænoides (C. rupestris and æqualis) in addition to several specimens of various other forms. In a similar haul of the trawl at 59°23'N.L., 7°50’ W. L. at a depth of 1057 m, 127 fish chiefly the same species were caught. These hauls with ordinary large apparatus give a new picture of the richness of the great depths of the Atlantic Ocean, a region whose peculiar character has just been disclosed Tee JOH. HJORT ann ©. G. JOH. PETERSEN for the first time, but to whose varied biological and physical conditions no detailed study has as yet been devoted. Although this Atlantic deep-sea fauna has the greatest interest for the study of the geographical distribution of animals, this region has of necessity been kept in the background of the international marine investigations for the sake of the economically more important regions. We may mention here also, that the Danish investigation-steamer “Thor”, using large pelagic nets, has made the first catches of bathy-pelagic eggs and young stages of deep-sea fishes. The first steps have thereby been made towards a study of the natural history of these deep- sea fishes. a Whilst the great depths of the Norwegian Sea and the Atlantic Ocean have relatively _ Still masses of water, the upper layers to a depth of 700—800m. show some change and movement. The conditions of life here, must accordingly be much more varied and diverse, and it is not merely the momentary relations which have to be considered but the whole change throughout the year. 3) The slope of the coastal banks towards the depths of the Norwegian Sea must be regarded, both from the biological and physical standpoints, as a specially charac- teristic region. This region embraces the depths from 200 to ca. 600 m., on the long stretch from Spitzbergen and Iceland to the North Sea. It may be divided geographically as follows: the slope and banks of Spitzbergen, the Barents Sea with the bank of Bear Island, the Norwegian coastal banks from Barents Sea to Romsdal bank, the Norwegian channel, which runs along the west coast of Norway from the ae to the entrance of the North Sea into the Norwegian Sea, the slope of the North Sea banks, called ‘“‘Tampen” by the Norwegian and Swedish fishermen, the Feroe-Island ridge, the east slope of the Iceland bank. A few years ago, only small portions of these large regions had been investigated with fishing apparatus, and the first comprehensive survey of all these parts of the ocean, now ren- dered possible by very extensive investigations and experiments, represents an important result. It is evident from what has been said above, that this region passes over into the cold area of the Norwegian Sea at its lower boundary, and in such a manner that the boundary ‘between the two regions is subject to certain fluctuations upwards and downwards into the depths. As average depth, perhaps 500—600 m. can be taken. In the layer between 200 and 600m. there are great variations; we have found that temperatures from + 1.5° to 8° can occur, and these differences will probably have great influence on the vertical wanderings of the fishes along the slope, the more so, because the variations of temperature are connected with similar variations in salinity and currents. The fish of this region belong everywhere to the same species, and this holds good over the whole stretch from Spitzbergen and Iceland as far as the North Sea slope. The most important forms economically are the following: ling (Molva molva), tusk (Brosmius brosme), Norway haddock (Sebastes marinus), cod (Gadus callarias), halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris), APPENDIX G Sey Qos catfish (Anarrhichas minor and latifrons), rays (especially Raja batis and lintea), more rarely larger specimens of haddock (Gadus aeglefinus). These species play by far the greatest role and occur especially in the upper part of the region. Deeper down and near to the boundary of the cold water, these forms are joined by the following species: the blue ling (Molva byrke- lange), the black halibut (Hippoglossus hippoglossoides), Macrurids (especially M. Fabricii), the great silver smelt (Argentina silus) and the arctic shark (Somniosus microcephalus). Closer study of the numerous hauls made during the investigations, at depths from 200— 600 m., shows many other things. It appears for example, that the ling constitutes the chief portion of the summer catches amongst the round fish, on the stretch from the Shetlands to the Lofoten Islands, whilst the cod is so rare over the same region especially in summer, that in a series of experiments with long lines, only one cod on an average was taken on 700 hooks. Further north, e.g. in the Barents Sea and on the stretch from the Færoes to Iceland, the relation is different. Here the ling occurs only sparingly, whilst the cod is caught in distinctly greater quantities. The fishery investigations have also shown us, that the quantities of the above-mentioned fishes are not constant, either at all places or at all seasons of the year From the experience of the fishermen, as also from the scientific fishery experiments, it appears that the ling and likewise the halibut, collect together in shoals at certain times and places where, at other times, but few are found. The halibut is especially abundant in late” autumn on the Norwegian coastal banks, whereas only a few are taken in summer, the ling on the other hand appears chiefly in the summer. In the Barents Sea, the regular migrations of the shoals of cod can in general be determined already. They move in the summer far to the east and return again in winter towards the west. More will be said concerning this in describing the natural history of the cod. The condition of the bottom has great influence on the quantitative distribution of the fishes. On the coastal banks are depressions, flats or elevations. The depressions have mostly soft, muddy bottom, whilst the higher flats, slopes and elevations are often covered with sand, gravel and stones, from the size of millet seed to that of ballast stones. The fishery investiga- tions have shown that in the muddy depressions (e.g. the Barents Sea or the stretch between the Lofotens and Romsdal bank) only a poor fish-fauna occurs, whilst good catches can be made on more stony ground. From this arises the necessity for investigating the bottom, and great pains have been taken to do this on the Norwegian fisheries investigations. During the summer, the Norwegian and Swedish fishermen fish with long lines in this region for the above-mentioned species, at 200—500 m. depth. 4 4) The portions of the region under observation which lie in less than 200 m. have however, by far the greatest importance for the study of the fisheries and natural history of the fishes. These comprise the following banks: the Iceland bank, the Romsdal bank, the northern and southern Feroe bank. the Lofoten—Tromse bank !. the North Sea, 1 To these are joined a series of smaller banks along the Norwegian coast, which are so small however, ii they can be indicated only by the aid of larger charts. Se 1gl = JOH. HJORT ano C. G. JOH. PETERSEN The smaller the depth the greater are the changes in the physical conditions and the more varied is the animal life. Whilst it may seem right to regard the vast area of the sea- bottom which lies between 200 and 600m. as one single characteristic region, neither from the point of view of the natural history of the fishes nor from the study of the actual fisheries, can we consider the above-mentioned banks, whose depths are all less than 200m, as a group of regions similar to one another; we find everywhere so different physical conditions, so different animals and fisheries, in the various depths from the beach to the 200 m. line, that we must seek to form still narrower districts. It may be said in general, that 3 regions can be distinguished on all the known banks. The first region embraces depths from 60—200 m, and is characterised chiefly by the following fishes: Plat-fishes: witch (Pleuronectes cynoglossus), long-rough dab (Drepanopsetta platessoides), megrim (Zeugopterus megastoma), as well as younger (smaller) specimens of the halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris). Round-fishes: haddock (Gadus aeglefinus), cod (Gadus callarias), green cod (Gadus virens), whiting (Gadus merlangus). For the fishery, the witch amongst the flat-fishes and the haddock amongst the round- fishes have by far the greatest importance. It is characteristic that the plaice, the lemon sole and the dab are absent or occur but sparingly. It is of general biological interest further, that we find the young of the fishes which inhabit the slope of the coastal banks in this region, e. ¢. small and medium-sized specimens of the ling, tusk, catfish, Norway haddock, great silver smelt and halibut in quantities, and it is only the younger stages of these fishes which chiefly occur in this region. The second region embraces the depths from 20—60m. It is chiefly characterised by the flat-fishes (plaice, dabs, lemon soles, young specimens of halibut, e.g. of 20—40 cm. in length) and the younger stages of haddock, whiting and cod. The witch is absent, the ling, tusk and the larger haddock occur only sparingly. In this region are the spawning grounds of the cod and haddock. The third, the littoral region from the beach to a depth of 20m, is above all the region of the young of most of the useful species, namely, plaice, dabs, cod and haddock during their first year. For the better understanding of the physical relations of these three regions, we shall consider more closely the largest and most important of the banks mentioned here, namely the North Sea banks (see Table IT and II). ; As a rule, this is considered as inclining uniformly from the German Bight down towards the northern slope. A closer examination of the bottom of the North Sea bank shows however, that the actual conditions are essentially different, as a series of irregular depressions and slopes occur here. Along the east coast of Scotland and north of England, the 40—50 m. lines run parallel and very near to the coasts. From Flamborough Head, the 60m. line bends strongly from the coast towards Hanstholm on the Jutland coast. Thus, the North Sea bank is divided by the 60 m. line Appendix G 2 APPENDIX G Om into a southern shallower and a northern deeper region. The transition between these two regions is very sharp at some places. On the north edge of the Dogger Bank, for example, 2% the bottom falls within a distance of a few miles from 60 to 90m. Further to the east the boundary is less sharp, because the 60-80 m. deep Great Fisher Bank inter- venes between the two regions. 2 We have stated above, that the fishes of the two deep regions are very different; not less diffe- rent are the hydrographical con- ditions, if we examine them at Helgoland. different periods of the year. If Sos we compare the two longitudinal a hydrographical sections of the North Sea, from Heligoland to » the slope of the Norwegian Sea Ss (Fig. 2 and 3), we see that the entire mass of water has almost everywhere a temperature = OEL nl Mays name summer (August) the conditions have changed. In the deeper layers (below 60 m.), the same conditions of temperature have persisted, but on the shallower “real banks we now find temperatures up to 10° and 14°. We thus have the great main difference between the two regions, that a [3 the yearly temperature-fluctua- tion amounts at most to one degree in the deep water, whilst ‘variations of 6—8° may be found in less depths. The differences in the catches from the different parts of the North Sea are in agreement Oc 43 EICH SE à à ‚Norwegian Seg Om Hordmeer Sch -/00 -200 -300 0494 15458 % Dogger Bank 622 | 5510 25m) Mar 7. | 1905 1 620 {3505 D Horizont. 1: 3000000 Vertih. 1:2.500 (lem Fig. 2 3499 SSS RU A Ee 616 13503 83% 0/0 39 15 15. Nordsee North Sea Ht BRESSA SHOAL 1545 92: 100 | 400 300 Te RE CS Se with these great differences in the physicai conditions. One who knows the North Sea fisheries will be able to conclude, from the com- position of the catches on the market, from what parts of the North Sea they come. It may be added also, that the configuration and nature of the bottom exercise a great influence on the distribution and abundance’ of fishes, apart from the hydrographical conditions named. Many fishes prefer stony, others sandy ground. Where there is a depression in the bottom, the water- masses often remain at rest, soft mud then collects and the gaseous condition of the water becomes unfavourable for animal life. On such places accordingly, only small catches are made. This is especially distinct in Swedish and Norwegian fjords, but similar phenomena may be found in the open North Sea. Thus for example, hauls with the trawl have shown that there is a barrier (Bressa shoal) in the northern North Sea, which shuts off a more southerly depression, about 40m deep, on the muddy bottom of which but few fish live, whilst on the barrier itself and further north a richer animal-fauna is to be found. 5) In the foregoing, we have only con- sidered the fishes which live on the bottom and are caught there. Of even greater prac- tical and scientific importance however, are the migratory pelagic fishes. Carried along by the various marine currents, these fishes also distribute themselves on various bio-geographical regions which are limited by the cur- rents, not only vertically but also horizontally. Thus, in the Norwegian Sea, the polar current, the Atlantic current and the coastal streams; in the North Sea, the Atlantic current, the coastal streams of the western and southern North Sea and the weakly saline Baltic stream of the eastern North Sea, exercise different influences on the geographical distribution of the pelagic animals and fishes. Helgoland. Om 023 = oc JOH . HJORT anv C. G. JOH. PETERSEN -/00 - 200 North Sea Fic, 3 Bu Sear SENRASERRE S S APPENDIX G } a The most important pelagie fishes within the region of the international investigations are the herring, the garfish and the mackerel. We must add to this, that almost all the economi- cally important species are pelagic, especially in their earliest stages. Of the international investigations accomplished up to the present, some have importance also for the comprehension of the geographical distribution of these fishes. Herring have been taken by driftnets in the most different parts of the North Sea, and it was thereby made apparent, that their sexual organs were differently developed according to the distribution of the different streams; for example, the ‘Michael Sars” in September of this year, caught the “fat-herring” in the eastern Baltic stream of the North Sea and ripe spaw- ning or spawned herring in the Atlantic stream to the west, or the western coastal stream. These important observations should be thoroughly studied further on the working hypothesis, that the ‘“fat-herring” of the eastern North Sea belongs to a branch or race spawning in spring on the Norwegian coast and is distinct from the summer or autumn herring spawning on the western and southern North Sea banks, and that the boundary between the oceanic currents is also the boundary of these two races. The international research-steamers have also been specially engaged in the study of the pelagic young stages, as the catches of the fishing steamers can give no information inzthis direction. In sections IT and III, more detailed evidence will be given of the great influence, the oceanic currents have on the distribution of these pelagic young fishes. During the observational cruises in the Norwegian Sea, observations were also made on the pelagic wanderings of the fishes, which were formerly believed to lived only on the coastal banks or on the slopes of the Norwegian Sea towards deep water. Thus, the following fishes have been observed in the uppermost on to 180m. deep, out in the Norwegian Sea far from the coasts and over depths of 1800—3600 m; herring, cod, haddock, green cod and Norway haddock (Sebastes viviparus); west from Iceland also, the large shark (Somniosus microcephalus), likewise herring and Norway haddock in considerable quantities, the latter for example to the number of 65 on 600 hooks over 2900 m depth. The young just hatched were also taken in large quantities over great depths, both near Norway and near Iceland. Having endeavoured in the foregoing to give a survey of the geographical distribution of the different fishes, we will proceed in the following pages to an account of the fisheries investigations themselves. The earliest fisheries investigations during the sixties of last century showed already, that all practical fishery questions, with which wide circles were then engaged, could only be under- stood and solyed by thorough acquaintance with the natural history of each separate species. For this, the investigation of the development, rate of growth and migrations of the different species, are of special importance. In the following pages, we give first of all a short survey of the general methods of work, and of the aims and results of the international fisheries investigations (Section II), and then as a special example, the results in more detail of the investigations into the natural history of the cod (Section III). II. METHODS OF WORK AND GENERAL RESULTS A. Methods of work and apparatus It can be readily understood that, ever since fisheries investigations have been insti- tuted at all, endeavours have also been made to bring a variety of methods into use for the investigation of the nature and amount of the fishes within the area investigated; it was immediately felt that advance had to be made according to a fixed plan, if general conclusions were to be in any way cbtained from the results of the investigations. It would be quite ideal naturally, if we knew what species and how many individuals of each species were present in the waters to be studied, how quickly they grew and so on. For a small inland sea such an investigation is often easily carried through; it is therefore easy to understand, why such investigations have already been carried much further with regard to fresh water than for the sea (rational practice). In the investigation of large areas of the sea again, the matter becomes more difficult and more complicated, as it is not so easy to gain a view over the momentary fish-quantum, and as fishes wander to and fro as a rule. Accordingly, in order to obtain as good results as possible in such an area, various methods have of necessity been resorted to. We shall mention the most important of these methods in the following. One of the earliest endeavours to institute systematic investigation of the fish-quantum in a section of the sea, was certainly V. Hensen’s quantitative hauls of pelagic fish- eges with apparatus specially constructed for the purpose; his methods are still in use, though in more or less modified form, and advance has been further made on the road indicated . by him, especially after the apparatus had been enlarged; nothing is now easier than to demonstrate the presence of a species of fish at the spawning time by the capture of pelagic eges. Though it has not been found easy to calculate the existing fish-quantum by means of vertical hauls and purely quantitative determinations, yet the fishing for eggs in this manner and also by means of horizontal hauls has everywhere yielded splendid results. Nevertheless, in order to ascertain the resorts of spawning fish with greater accuracy than can be attained from the pelagic eggs — not all fishes also have pelagic eggs — it has been necessary to proceed to the capture of the fishes themselves with real fishing apparatus. The next thing necessary was to study the catches of the fishermen, as these can easily be procured at certain places and at certain times. In this way, good information has been obtained concerning the mutual quantitative relations of the fish-species occurring in the hauls, and it has been possible to study their size at the beginning of maturity, and amongst other things, to ascertain their food by investigation of the contents of the stomachs. APPENDIX G ge Where such catches were obtainable in great quantities, it has been possible to go a step further and obtain from a close study of a large number of catches (journals) an idea of a number of other catches, that is, a representative statistic to a certain extent. In this way, the appearance of the fishes at different periods of the year has been ascer- | tained; and without actually fulfilling the requirements of a true statistic, namely, that it | should give information over the total quantities, this method has yet learnt us which species form the main contributions of the various fisheries (trawl-, long-, line-, snurrevaad- or driftnet-fishery). In the countries where the true statistic is only slightly represented, the representative statistic has naturally had the greatest importance. Nevertheless, it is not possible to remain at this stage; in as much as we should like to follow the life of a fish, so to speak from birth to death, it has constantly happened that the data obtainable from the practical fisheries fails in some point or other. Hither for example, the quite young stages of the species concerned are not brought in at all by the fishermen, or the species is not taken at certain periods of the year and in such assortments that the required information is forthcoming; consequently, special investigations with profes- Sional apparatus had to be undertaken. The great expeditions which have been fitted out within recent years for the purpose of investigating the animal-life in the sea — especially at great depths — have been restricted mainly to the use of fishing apparatus which had only the width of a few meters (dredge). In the international investigations however, with, itis true, a somewhat different program, stronger fishing apparatus chosen from that which fishes the most and best, has been employed in all lands; the modern ottertrawl especially, has proved to possess an extraordinary importance for these investigations. In the shallower parts of the sea, to a depth of ca. 200 m, it has been possible to use directly the ordinary ottertrawl with a stretch of ca. 30 m. in the ordinary manner of the fishermen. The principal change made, has been to surround the narrow end with a sack of smaller mesh in order to gain possession of the smaller fishes also; in addition, many other attempts have been made, e. g. in Scotland, to study and to improve the fishing- capacity of this apparatus. In the deeper seas, especially near Norway and Iceland, it has been necessary nevertheless to employ the ottertrawl in much deeper water, at a depth of some thousands of meters, and a change was thus necessitated in the use of the ordinary fishing apparatus. The change consisted chiefly in this, that only one line was used in towing the trawl and that the two otterboards were connected by means of a crowfoot, so that both could come on board at one place, i. e. over one gallows (see Dansk Biologisk Stations Beretning, VIII). This modification of the apparatus has everywhere proved itself of prac- tical use during the international investigations of late years, at Iceland and Norway. The investigations have also been obliged to employ other apparatus. Thus, long-lines have been much used, both lines lying along the ground and lines floating in the upper water-layers. Seines for fishing on the coasts have also done good service, complementary to the trawl-fishery, for the investigation of the young of the flatfish and gadoids. Drift-nets, especially for herring, have been much used, especially from Norway; it is easily seen however, that the investigation of a mass of water perhaps 100 times deeper than the driftnet is either very imperfect or very protracted; we are lacking here an investigating apparatus for the capture of fishes and other larger animals, e. g. inkfish, which live up in the water, an appa- 25 JOH. HJORT anv €. G. JOH. PETERSEN ratus which would lead to a result quicker than the driftnets. Several endeavours have been made to procure such an apparatus, but up to the present always without practical result. If it must be admitted therefore, that the technical part of the investigations has made great progress, there still remains much to be desired. The unevenness of the bottom of the sea offers insuperable difficulties at many places to the use of all apparatus designed for towing on the ground, and if we occasionally remedy this by the use of other apparatus, such as long-lines and set-nets, we do not altogether obtain the wished-for results. We have spoken here chiefly of the apparatus for the catch of larger fish, and younger fish in the bottom-stages; but, for the capture of fish in their youngest stages, when they are usually pelagic, the investigations have employed other apparatus with important results. We do not feel satisfied with the few young fishes which can be obtained by means of the so-called pelagic net of but small size, and attempts have therefore been made to exchange the tolerably close material of this net for another which has a somewhat wider opening, and the mouth of this net has now been as much enlarged as is possible from the practical stand- point. In order to take more young fish than can be done in vertical hauls, such large nets have been towed for many minutes in a more or less horizontal direction through the masses of water, where the young of the fish concerned were believed to live. In this manner, for example, Dr. Hjort obtained fine collections of young fishes in Norway. Of recent years however, the so-called young-fish trawl — constructed by Petersen and described by Schmidt (Fiske- undersegelser ved Island og Kæroerne, pp. 37—38, fig. 11) — has been more and more used for the pelagic fishing of young fish in the sea. It is constructed on the principle of the ottertrawl, but the net consists of thickly woven hemp, ca. 19 threads to 3 cm. With this apparatus many hundreds of hauls were made at Iceland and the Færoes in the years 1903 and 1904, and extraordinarily large collections of pelagic organisms, especially fishes, have been brought home. The apparatus was used both at the surface and in great depths, and by a peculiar modification of the lower ends of both the poles which hold the net open, it has been used on the bottom with success, both over soft muddy ground and where the bottom was covered by not too large stones. The youngest bottom-stages of many fishes which have not been taken in any other way, have been obtained with this young-fish trawl, especially of flat-fish. Its fishing-capacity is so great, that many thousands of pelagic young fishes have been taken by it on the shallow coastal banks in the course of 10—20 minutes. Further out in the open sea, on the other hand, the young fish appear to be much less numerous per cubic meter of water; by increasing the duration of the hauls however (to several hours), the success has been attained of catching the eggs and young of characteristically deep- water fishes, concerning which we have hitherto had practically no information, in no small number. To the first results of the new investigations in the open sea belonged the obtaining of large collections of pelagic fish eggs which were in part quite unknown in literature, in part wrongly described; before these collections could be worked out in the manner required by the investigations, a purely zoological systematic preliminary investigation of the young fishes has been necessary. Considerable literature concerning the young fishes and their determination, existed in various countries certainly, especially in England, Scot- land, Ireland and Germany, and the endeavour has also been made to describe the fish-eggs; for several portions however, a critical revision has been considered necessary, and it was especially APPENDIX G — 16 — necessary to hatch out the living fish-eggs on board the investigation-vessels, in order to follow the development etc. of the fish quite from the egg onwards, by means of these young and by series of older stages. Ehrenbaum has contributed much to our knowledge of the coast- fishes of the southern North Sea in a work recently published. Williamson in Scotland has described a series of stages of Pleuronectes cynoglossus. Petersen in the Meddelelser fra Kommissionen for Havundersegelser, Bd. I, has represented a series of stages both of this fish and of two other species of Pleuronectes, and his investigations over the remaining Pleuro- nectidæ are to be expected in the near future. Johs. Schmidt has undertaken the inves- tigations of the gadoid species. The preliminary investigations are thus making good progress. A method which has already been employed for many years in the service of the fishery investigations, especially by Petersen for the Danish waters, is the method of measurement. If a quantity of fish of any species has been taken, it often happens, on measuring and arranging these fish one after the other, according to a plan like the subjoined (Pl. IV) showing the cod from east Iceland, that they form various groups according to size, i. e. that certain lengths are represented by far more fish than others, for example 5, 12, 22, 33, 61, 68 cm. in the subjoined plan. In this plan therefore, there are 6 such lengths, With other fishes, e. g. several of the Pleuronectide, a different number of groups appears, and at other places, e. g Denmark, different groups are found for the cod than those given. Investigations concerning the appearance of such groups at different periods of the year, have now shown that they signify the yearly growth of the fish as a rule. It must be remembered that, in a given region, all cod usually spawn together at the same time of year and not in equal portions throughout the year. It will be understood therefore, why the young of the different years is of such different sizes in the plan, and that, from such a measurement of a very large number of fishes of all sizes occurring in a region, we can obtain an impression of how quickly the fish grow on the average. This method is at present in use almost everywhere, where thorough investigations are being made, and it has appeared from these, that the fishes grow very differ- ently under different conditions. As the method is so generally used we shall not dwell further upon it, but mention only that it can give a view over the rate of growth and age of fishes only in general; the age of the individual can often not be determined by it. This want in connection with. the measurement-method seems in part to be helped out by other methods for the age-determination of the fishes, namely, by investigation of the otoliths (ear-stones) ; these investigations have been carried out by German scientists especially. Possibly the inves- tigation of the bones will also give information concerning the age; too little has as yet appeared, however, for one to be able to judge concerning this method. Quite a different method of obtaining information concerning the rate of growth and migration of fishes is that of marking living fishes. This method has been brought into use, chiefly by the Danish biological station, and has led to extraordinarily great results so far as the plaice is concerned. To the living fish two bone-buttons are attached, which are held in position by a silver wire and a number is burnt on one of the buttons. It has been shown that fish marked in such a manner can live and grow. When a number of fish thus marked were set out in Danish waters, a portion of them have been caught again and sent in by the Danish fishermen within a short time; the same thing has happened in the North Sea, where many thousands of plaice have been set out of recent years. If the fisher- EIT sth ee ah ee a JOH. HJORT ann C. G. JOH. PETERSEN men state where the marked fish have been recaught, it is possible to determine, in addition to their rate of growth, also their wanderings during the time which has elapsed, and to gain in this way good information concerning the biology of the plaice, which would otherwise be difficult to obtain. It has also resulted from these marking experiments that the number of marked fish returned is extraordinarily great; thus, the Danish experiments have shown, that 43.4 °%/o out of 1099 jplaice set out in the North Sea have been recaught within 14 months, 58.5°/o out of 121 plaice marked in the Skager Rak were recaught within the same period, and in the northern Kattegat even 80 °/o of the marked plaice have been returned within 4 months. In addition, it has to be noted that a portion of the fish recaught are in various ways lost, i.e. not returned. Through these high percentages, one gains a good notion of the intensity of the plaice fishery in the North Sea and Danish waters. The marking-method has also been used for other species as well as the plaice, e. g. for the cod and eel, and it will assuredly prove to be practicable, with certain modifications, for various other species of fish. It is indeed of the greatest interest to be able to determine how far the migrations of the fishes extend, and if we could also learn fixed recognition-marks for the fishes from different waters, this would have an extraordinary importance. The scientist who has first begun such race-investigations on fishes, is Fr. Heincke. His race-investigations, based on measurements, number of vertebræ and so on, are well known. For other species also, the number of the vertebre and fin-rays seem to have great importance. Thus, we know that the plaice of the Belts have a smaller number of fin-rays than those of the North Sea and the Skager Rak. From such race-investigations, carried out on dead material, various conclusions can already be made; but the inheritance and constancy (fixity) of the characters cannot be determined in this way. Purely experimental attempts at rearing the young fish, such as are in the program of Committee C 2, are necessary in order to solve such questions. ee ee Te Se : B. Examples of the results obtained a ’ . 1. Eggs, larvæ and young fishes 1 The economically important fishes can be divided, as regards their natural history, into two groups: fish, with floating pelagic eggs, fish, which lay their eggs, demersally, on the bottom. The eggs of the first group develop, and their larve hatch out, whilst floating in the water; those of the second group, on the other hand, carry through their development on the bottom. The small larvæ which come from the eggs are pelagic in both groups, the duration of the pelagic stage is however, different for almost every species. In some species the larvæ seek the bottom, in others the larvæ remain pelagic during their change to young fishes, even much longer in some cases. As the first pelagic stages are in the highest degree dependent on the movements of the surrounding water, an exact investigation of this period of life has great importance for understanding the fate of the eggs and larvæ, and also, the distribution of the later, first bottom- stages. For this reason, specially great attention has been devoted to these investigations, and this had the practical advantage also, that it was easier to find the free-floating eggs, larvæ and young fishes with pelagic nets than the demersal eggs on the bottom with dredges and trawls. Appendix G 3 APPENDIX G PER tae Hensen has made the endeavour to determine the quantity of the spawning fish by counting their eggs, but this has proved to be impossible up to the present, partly owing to the lack of uniformity in the distribution of the eggs, arising from the currents and the distribution of the spawning fish. N On the other hand, it has been shown that the study of the distribution of the earliest pelagic stages gives us a means of determining the distribution of the spawning fish-shoals, and this study had the double importance: on the one hand, of finding new spawning-grounds (e. g. fishing-grounds) and on the other hand, of giving a view over the geographical extension of the spawning-region of a species. The solution of these problems by fishery experiments in search of the large spawning animals only, would have been connected with much greater difficulties. Thus, the investigation of the pelagic young stages has the double importance of ascer- taining the distribution of the spawning fishes and the fate of the eggs spawned. We shall display what may be reached in this direction by some examples. a. The young stages of the genus Gadus (cod group) On the south coast of Iceland, Schmidt! has investigated the distribution of the eggs, pelagic larvæ and young fishes at various distances from the coast (Ingolfshöfde), and has found that the small larve and young fishes which come from demersal eggs, were floating in the immediate proximity of the coasts; further out, he found the larve of the pelagic eggs, and still further out beyond the coastal banks, the larve of the purely pelagic, viviparous fishes. Particulars are shown in the following table: During the 1st and 2nd of June 1903, the fishing was carried on at each station at the surface for 5 minutes with the pelagic net and 10 minutes with the pelagic trawl. Dinde ram ane Gone 4 nautical 10 nautical 23 nautical 54 nautical 57 nautical 95 nautical miles miles miles miles miles miles Depthainemeterse PEN RES 32—70 86 106 1044 over 1080 | 1440—1880 Total number of pelagic eges. | 300—400 100 3 0 0 0 Total number of pelagic larvæ 3 291 182 50 50 300 Percentage of pelagic larve from À DEMAIN EE, 200080060008 100 %o 93 Yo 67 0/6 0 0 0 TARE GTI ocgbehoodoouses 0 TO 33 0/0 100 %o 0 0 Pelagic viviparous fishes...... 0 0 0 0 100 %o 100 %o From this example it appears, that the larve and young fishes which come from pelagic eggs, are to be found further away from the coast than the larve of the demersal eggs. The further study of the fate of the pelagic young fishes proves that the duration of the pelagic BE stage is different for each species. This can be exemplified for the most important species of the genus Gadus especially. i 1 Jobs. Schmidt, Fiskeriundersogelser ved Island og Kæroerne i Sommeren 1903. Skrifter udgivne af Kommissionen for Havundersogelser, Nr. 1, p. 41 (Dansk), Kobenhayn 1904. — 19 — JOH. HJORT any C. G. JOH. PETERSEN To be able to demonstrate this, it was necessary to study the systematic of the various stages thoroughly as these were formerly little known. We are at present, especially through Schmidt’s researches, in a position to be able to distinguish very early stages of the different species. At Iceland, the investigations of the steamer ‘Thor’ have shown that the 4 most impor- tant species, green cod (G. virens), cod (G. callarias), haddock (G. eglefinus) and whiting (G. merlangus) seek the bottom and give up the pelagic mode of life in the order named. The green cod and the cod go later as small young fish nearer to the coasts and are found, for example in summer, close to the shore on the Iceland coast; the young of the haddock on the other hand, could be found in quantities principally in deeper water, for example, at a size of 4—6 cm. in depths of 63—72 m.; the young whiting remain pelagic for a very long time. We have made similar observations on the Norwegian coast and in the North Sea. During 1904 especially, a very comprehensive material has been collected by the various investigation-steamers. As however, it has not been yet possible to complete the great work of determining and coordinating the material, we shall give here only a short description of the results obtained by a single steamer (“Michael Sars”) for the years 1900—1903, stating at the same time, that the results for the year 1904 will agree with these in their entirety, perhaps even display the relations of the separate regions much more clearly. The Norwegian material for the years 1900—1904, has been arranged in such a way that a chart with the number of stations in series has been drawn up for each of the four species, green cod, cod, haddock and whiting. On each chart is stated: 1) whether the young fish are pelagic or bottom-stages : 2) whether their size is greater or less than 2 em; and 3) whether the stations were made before or after the first of June. _ It would be desirable perhaps, that the charts should also contain data of the hauls which give no results for one or more of the 4 species of gadoids. As negative experiments however, had to be made in great number, and this had not yet occurred on preparing these charts, we shall only mention them in the following text. A comparison of the 4 charts, PI. V—VIII, will give for the rest an idea of the extent of the observations. Chart 1, Pl. V refers to the 83 stations on which cod of the 0-group were found in the period from 1900—1903. It appears from the chart, that pelagic young fish over 2 cm. were found after the 1st of June only in the Norwegian Sea, with but one exception. In the many hauls which were undertaken in the North Sea, on the surface and in the middle layers, . we only obtained other gadoids after the 1st of June (see e. g. Chart 4). We find the small larve under 2 cm. in the North Sea, chiefly in the neighbourhood of the coastal banks; for the Norwegian Sea, the numerous catches of these stages have not been marked, so as not to put too much on one chart (see Section III). The relation is therefore as follows: pelagic cod over 2 cm. (up to 9.5 cm. indeed) have been found in the Norwegian Sea, whilst only a single pelagic cod of 2.5 cm. was found in the North Sea. The numerous investigations of the year 1904 have shown, that the small cod in the North Sea seek the bottom already at a size of 2 cm, and that they have been found 1 Schmidt, 1. ec. p. 81—84. 3 APPENDIX G 2 OO = exclusively or quite predominantly in shallower waters, especially on the coastal banks. In the Norwegian Sea on the other hand, they remain much longer pelagic, not only those which are carried over great depths by the oceanic currents, but also those which remain on the banks. Chart 2 Pl. VI refers to 26 stations where Gadus virens was taken. It appears from this chart, that at a size of over 2 cm. it was only found on the Norwegian coasts. Chart 3 Pl. VII shows 71 stations at which the 0-group of Gadus eglefinus was taken. The distribution of the small haddock agrees with that of the young cod. It appears however, 1) that more pelagic haddock were found in the North Sea than the cod and 2) that very large young of G. eglefinus, to over 11 em. long, are occasionally met with pelagically in the Norwegian Sea. : Chart 4 Pl. VIII refers to 44 stations where the 0-group of Gadus merlangus was fished. With some few exceptions all these belong to the North Sea, and the young whiting are here found in masses, both under as well as above 2 cm., and they were taken both before and after the 1st of June. They have been taken pelagically in the Skager Rak, in drift-nets over 54 m., and also in the North Sea, to a length of 30cm. From this Chart 4 it can also be seen directly how many hauls were made in the North Sea without taking large young fish of the other species; since then, in 1904, many more hauls have been made with similar results. From this Chart, accordingly, the same conclusion can be made for the North Sea as for Iceland, namely, that the four species named show quite a distinct order in leaving the pelagic stage. First the green cod, then the cod, then the haddock and lastly the whiting seek the bottom and the coasts. This relation plays the greatest part in the distribution of the bottom stages of these fishes, which will be shown for each species and each part of the region under observation in a later more detailed report of the international investigations. b. The young stages of the genus Pleuronectes (flounder group) In the foregoing portion, it has been shown that the young stages of the cod-group are distributed in the sea in a different manner for each species; there is no doubt however, that quite analogous relations also hold for the flounder-group. Certainly, the occurrence of the latter has not yet been so closely investigated, that one can draw up charts of wide areas for these species whilst still in the pelagic stage, but their occurrence in the Skager Rak and the remain- ing Danish waters is known in general, so that various facts of essential importance can be made clear. In the Kattegat, there live, amongst others, adult individuals of the following 5 flat-fishes: plaice, flounder, dab, witch (P. cynoglossus) and halibut, though in different quan- tities. They are all taken by the fishermen, but the halibut, though it occurs quite as far as Kiel, is yet not common till we come to the Skager Rak. Of the fry of these 5 species, only | those of the 3 first named are met with inside the Skaw; and they are found here in all stages from the egg onwards etc. The pelagic eggs of the plaice appear already in winter and then the pelagic young fish; later (in spring) the fry of the flounder appears and lastly that of the dab (during a great part of the summer); but even in the first bottom-stages, after the trans- formation has taken place, a characteristic difference is shown in the occurrence of the young; the bottom-stages of the plaice and flounder just transformed can only be found in quite shallow water, but a few feet deep, on protected and warm sandy shores, whilst the bottom- — 91 — JOH. HJORT any C.G. JOH. PETERSEN stages of the dab are never found on such places, but only in water ca. 18 m. deep. This difference in occurrence is so characteristic, that years occurred between the first discovery of the young of the plaice and flounder and that of the dab; in fact, it was possible to find them at many places, only after the new young-fish trawl had been brought into use, and always in deep water. By this relation therefore, the young of the dab is at once distinguished from that of both the other species; but between these two also, there is a characteristic difference in distribution as one nears the Baltic; the young of both, it is true, occur together on the shallow sandy shores of the Kattegat and Belts, yet certain places seem better suited for the flounder, others for the plaice; the bottom-stages of the plaice, however, have not been found in the Baltic further than the south of the Danish islands, whilst the flounder has been met with quite to Finland, where they have been discovered in 1904 by Sandman. With regard to the fry of the witch, no specimen of this species of a length less than 10 cm. has ever been found inside the Skaw in spite of the most zealous search, though the adult stages are extremely common in the deeper parts of the Kattegat; when however, the international investigations from Denmark began, some quite developed bottom-stages were found in the depths of the Skager Rak; but the true resort of the fry is probably to be sought for still further out towards the open and deep sea along the coasts of Norway, Iceland, the Feroes and Shetland; in the greater part of the North Sea also, it will probably be quite absent. The fry of the halibut has never been met with off Denmark. The smallest individuals found by us were ca. 30 cm. long. It is curious that the fry has been able to escape notice hitherto at most other places also. But in this year, this fry has been found in extraordinarily deep water in the Atlantic Ocean south from Iceland: it must also occur naturally, along the Norwegian coasts though it has not hitherto been discovered there. The facts described concerning these 5 flat-fishes show therefore, that of 5 species which live in the Kattegat so close to one another that it is quite possible to take specimens of all 5 species in one single haul of the trawl, only the 3, namely plaice, flounder and dab, go through their entire development from the egg to the adult fish in the Kattegat; whilst the fourth, the witch, appears only as individuals of relatively grown-up form, from which we must conclude that they wander in at certain times from the deepest part of the Skager Rak and at other times wander out again; and the specimens of the fifth species, those of the halibut, are to be considered as visitors, coming from a stock whose true resort is to be found extremely far distant from the coasts of Denmark. This conception of the occurrence of-these fishes in the Kattegat, has only been learnt and could only be learnt by systematic investigation of the special biological features of each single species in its various stages. c. The peculiarities of the Baltic In the Baltic the distribution of the age-groups of several species of fish has quite a special character, which is associated with a decreasing salinity towards the east and north and also with characteristic conditions of temperature. It is now generally accepted, that the eel (Auguilla vulgaris), which is to be found as adult as far as St. Petersburg, never spawns in the Baltic; and the latest Danish investigations have confirmed, that its larvæ (Leptocephalus brevirostris) occurs only in deep water (c. 1800 m.), e.g. south from the Feroe Isles, but could not be found APPENDIX G BAERS NE in the North Sea. More investigations are still wanted however, to elucidate the occurrence of the young eels, and we shall therefore not discuss this species any further. The flounder (Pleuronectes flesus) and the turbot (Rhombus maximus) occur in almost the whole of the Baltic, and Sandman has this year shown that both species also spawn there. But, though the adult plaice (Pleuronectes platessa) occurs in decreasing numbers as far as the Stockholm archipelago, young fish of this species have never been found east of Bornholm, though spawning plaice and eggs in quantity have been found east of that island (see Chart, Pl. TX), Concerning the cod (Gadus callarias), that it occurs in great quantities at Finland has been proved (Sandman), but it is improbable, to judge from the present investigations, that it can spawn in the Baltic. It must therefore, like the plaice, wander into the inner parts of the Baltic in half or quite developed condition. It can be readily understood that the unfavourable influence which the brackish water exercises in general on the true salt-water species, is more fatal for the young than for the larger fish; yet is impossible to say beforehand, which species can best resist the influence of the brackish water in the young stages. For this, an exact investigation is necessary and for each species, a task of Committee © 2. For the species of fish whose young cannot live in the Baltic, it will always be impossible to do anything by artificial rearing. Special enquiries have often been made by fishermen of these regions concerning this, yet to distinguish exactly which species could be reared and which not, must be left to future investigations. d. The herring The herring has demersal eggs which are deposited as a rule on sandy or stony bottom, and whose distribution is only ascertained with difficulty. A good method of finding the spawning places was accordingly to capture the newly escaped larve. The spawing places on the Norwegian coast are but little known; the most northerly places known hitherto were those of the Romsdal bank. During the numerous fishery experi- ments on the coastal banks, the small herring larvæ were however, found in the last few years in spring on the various small banks (Halten bank, Sklinna bank) up to 65° N. L. and after- wards also, the spawning herring were taken in drift-nets and discovered in the stomachs of ling. It has not yet been possible to make a systematic investigation of the occurrence of the herring larve either in the North Sea or in the region of the Norwegian coastal banks, as so many and so difficult other problems had to be solved. At Iceland, Schmidt has shown that the young herring larve are limited to the same region as the young cod (see Section III). They were only found on the south and west coasts — of Iceland within the warm Atlantic water, and were absent in the cold water of the north and east coasts. Information from the fishermen agrees with this; they state that they have never seen spawning herring on the north and east coasts of Iceland. 2. The older stages of fishes (“larger fishes”) It has already been shown, that the young of the various species of fishes occur differently and live under different conditions, according as they belong to one or other species. It is oo ae JOH. HJORT ann ©. G. JOH. PETERSEN quite as characteristic, however, for the older stages (the half- or fully-grown fish), that they should keep each by its own species, so that one can indeed affirm that there are not two species which have quite the same distribution or exactly the same mode of life. The biology of each separate important species must accordingly be studied by itself, if we wish to penetrate deeper into the comprehension of their relations and habits of life. We are acquainted with fishes which pass their whole life in small enclosed fjords, and with others which always wander about in the various layers of the ocean and only periodically come to the coasts at certain times of the year. If we wish to attain to an understanding of ‘the period decline and increase of the fisheries, it is worth while to study exactly the habits of life of each single species. a) We know that the viviparous blenny (Zoarces viviparus) and various smaller fishes pass their whole life in the smallest fjords; if their number decreases or increases we must accordingly seek for the reason, firstly, in the purely local conditions. We call such fish stationary or non-migratory fishes. Other fishes are like the eel, which also lives in small fjords and in fresh water, but has come in from the ocean during its youth and remains only until it is grown; then it wanders back again to the ocean; it is thus a temporarily stationary fish. Again, the mackerel and garfish are true migratory fishes, which appear only for a short time in the year at the coast or in the fjords, chiefly only to spawn; then they disappear again into the open sea. b) The plaice is one of the salt-water species which have been studied the most; its habitat during the various stages of life and its migrations, are known by the marking of thousands of specimens; so closely has it been investigated that methods were devised to increase its yearly productiveness in the Kattegat and North Sea, by interfering at the stage of life prejudically affected by the fishery and by helping the small plaice over the difficulties which nature had placed in their way (see further Appendix H). c) The cod has likewise been closely studied from Iceland to Norway and the North Sea, and there are thousands of measurements with regard to it from the most different regions. We would refer to the writings of Joh. Hjort and simply mention here, that as regards this species also, the question of cultivation and increase of the quantities by artificial rearing has played a great part amongst the fishing population of the various countries. Fish-rearing establishments were, however, erected before any knowledge had been gained of the occur- rence of the young fish in the waters where the stations were erected, and before it was known whether the stock of fish was to be considered in general as a small local stock, which might be influenced by a relatively few millions of small young fish just hatched, or as the small part of a great whole on which not even thousands of millions of small young fish could exert any influence worth mentioning. It is possible that we have to do with small conditions of things at some places, at others however, with enormously great; with regard to this, the investigations seem already to have given an answer in part. The investigations on the biology of the older fishes consist, partly of fishery experiments with different apparatus, partly in the study of the fisheries themselves and their results; by means of these, the occurrence of the species in the different periods of the year can be given APPENDIX G op on charts. We have ascertained, that the plaice is never taken in quantity at greater depths than 100 m., whilst the cod is common at depths of 300 m.; the halibut has been found at 600 m., the ling at 400 m. Below 800—1000 m. are found the true deep-sea fishes, which are without economical importance. 3. Other results By means of these investigations on the biology of each separate species, an enormously great material has been collected for the solution of all the questions belonging here; at the same time: a) new fishing grounds have been found which were previously unknown to the fishermen, e.g. on the Norwegian coasts and at the Færoes. } b) new economically important species of animals were found, e.g. ane nor- thern prawn (Pandalus borealis) at Iceland; the species had previously been discovered in great quantities on the Norwegian coast during the Norwegian fishery experiments. | The Norway lobster (Nephrops norvegicus) occurs so frequently at various places at Iceland that it might, if used, provide the raw material for a special conserving industry (similar to what is done in the Mediterranean). The ink-fish (Ommatostrephes todarus) was found in enormous quantities at Iceland and might, as it is much used as bait, indeed as very valuable bait, be made the basis of a special fishery, as is now done at other places, e.g. in Norway at certain times of the year. c) Nevertheless, the most important results of these investigations are not to be sought, in general, in these more or less previously expected discoveries; such discoveries have as a rule been made, and in the future will certainly also be made, only in the far distant waters which do not directly touch the countries having the greatest interest in the rational exploitation of the fisheries, e.g. in the North Sea itself, where all the banks have already been fished and where all important species of fish serve as food for man. Here, the results. are to be sought for in quite a different direction. In these waters, which are situated so favour- ably to the markets (high prices, fresh fish) and for carrying on the fishery — on account of which the fishing is much more intense than in more distant waters, the problems are not solved by much fishing. It is a question much more of how to obtain as much as possible from the productive capacity of the ocean, and opinion is getting stronger that the countries must do something here, either because it is feared, that the intense fishery will diminish or has already diminished the productive-capacity, especially of valuable species, or because it is believed that by means of suitable regulations a still greater production than the present can be reached. To be able to determine whether the yearly product of the fishery of one or other species has decreased, it is necessary above all things to have an accurate system of statistics over a long period of years; such a system, however, can naturally not be produced within such a short time as has elapsed since the beginning of the international investigations; further, the movements of the fishing-fleets, improvements in the methods and many other things are hindrances to the attainment of such uniform statistics, so that it will perhaps be long before we possess a system which really displays something concerning the decline of a particular fishery, what is considered as over-fishing (see paper “What is over-fishing?” by C. G. Joh. Petersen, Jour. of the Mar. Biol. Association, vol. VI, No. 4, December 1903). é The results of the latest investigations have shown us, however, that this is not indeed _ oe: - SOR JOH. HJORT anv C. G. JOH. PETERSEN ‘the kernel of the matter, regarded from a practical standpoint. Speaking practically, it is quite indifferent whether the historical development has brought about a decrease of a fishery or not, if we can only state the means by which it may be restored. In Petersen’s opinion, this can be done in the case of the plaice (see Appendix H). The Danish investigations have shown, by the marking of plaice in the North Sea, that an extraordinarily large number of marked fish are recaught by the fishermen and returned, so that we may conclude therefrom, that it is above all man who is weakening the stock, and that we can increase the production of the yearly quantities for the use of man by suitable regulations, in this case especially, by forbidding the landing of plaice under a certain size. Petersen has attained to these results only after many years’ investigations, as it was “necessary to study the life of the plaice and also the influence of the fishery on it, and at the same time to ascertain in what manner man could best interfere in the matter. By reason of the great tenacity of life displayed by the plaice and on account of the manner in which its various age-groups are distributed in the sea, he has especially recommended the prohibition of the landing of the smaller fish and believes that this will be the best method. But how the matter should be arranged as regards other species to be protected, is a question which can only be answered with regard to the North Sea, when an exact knowledge of the fisheries and of the natural history of the fishes has been attained. Various regulations can be thought of (width of meshes, close periods, closed areas etc.), but which of these would give the desired results in a given case, would require such a thorough investigation as has been made in Denmark in the case of the plaice. d) It has been shown above, how it may be expected to improve the fisheries of a certain Species by protective legislation, but the idea of finding other ways, by which the results of the productivity of the sea may be increased, is also at hand, and for a long time the idea of artificial rearing of the eggs of fishes has played a great part in discussions. _ As will be described more closely in Section III, concerning the natural history of the cod, investigations are at present being arranged in Norway to determine, if the setting out of pelagic young fish, just hatched, into Norwegian fjords exercises any influence whatever on the quantity of young cod some months old, and if the local stock in these fjords is thereby markedly increased compared with other neighbouring fjords where no young is placed. For the large stock of cod in the ocean, such artificial propagation of pelagic young fish will scarcely have any importance whatever. There is nevertheless another way to obtain greater usefulness from artificial propagation; namely, by rearing small young fish until they are so large that they remain on the bottom and are to some extent stationary; when they are then set out, they remain on the spot and are not carried miles away by the currents, as happens otherwise to the small pelagic young fishes. The small plaice become stationary bottom-animals at about 1 cm. long and when some months old; if they were reared in quantities and set out when 1 em. long and some months old, much would be attained. Such experiments have already been undertaken at various places and been successful with a small number of individuals. Endeavours similar to these have already been taken up in the program of Commitee C 2 and work is being carried on in various countries in this direction. Appendix G 4 APPENDIX G j : LOG ss Before this end is achieved however, there is still another way to increase the stock in the North Sea and in the Kattegat, namely by transplantation of small plaice from the regions where overpopulation exists, to others where they are in smaller numbers but on the other hand, grow much faster. i ; VD TE This transplanting method, which has given good economic results annually for a long period already, can undoubtedly be also used in larger waters, and investigations as to the degree to which this may be successful at various parts of the North Sea, have already been carried out by Committee B. The Danish investigations have shown that a transportation of young plaice from the coasts to other parts of the North Sea, to the north and west coasts of Jutland, brought in a greater amount to the fishery, as the recaught marked fish were more valuable than all the transplanted young fish together. These experiments have been carried out on too small a scale as yet, they merely give us a sign from and to what places the transplantatio) is-to be made. For the rest, reference may be made to Appendix H with regard to this matter = Se € men. ia ere 0 ñ Me N PERERTENT Pa, - Il. THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE COD From the most ancient historical accounts (Sagas), we know that the cod fisheries have played a most important role in the region of the Norwegian Sea for hundred of years. They represented there the true great fishery, in comparison with which all others were in the shade: In the southern part of the ocean, in the North Sea, the cod also played an important part certainly in the products of the fishery, but it entered more as an additional catch along- side of other economically more important fishes. Of the various cod fisheries again, those fisheries which were carried on during the spawning season had a special character. In Norway the spawning cod was thus given a special name (“Skrei”) and the skrei-fishery was spoken of in contradistinction to the others. Both the fisheries as well as the natural history of the spawning cod, have accordingly had a prominent place in the fishery investigations for a long time, and we shall begin the following description with this section of the life of the cod. 1. The spawning period a. In the Norwegian Sea as in the North Sea, the cod collect in shoals at certain Spawning places during the spawning time. In the Norwegian Sea the spawning period em- braces especially the months February—April; at that time it is almost exclusively the cod that is found on the spawning grounds, and they press together in great quantities on a narrow spot. In the North Sea, on the other hand, the conditions are of a more complex nature; the cod spawns here at various periods of the year and many other fishes, especially the haddock, also spawn at the same place and in the same quantity. It was advisable accordingly, to undertake the important task of gaining a view over all the banks where spawning cod can be caught in the different regions, by means of scientific investigations of various kinds. As mentioned before, it is well-known that Hensen has endeavoured to determine the amount of the spawning cod in the North Sea by quantitative investigations of the pelagic eggs. The circumstance however, that pelagic eggs of many species occur in the North Sea at the same time, makes such investigations so to speak, very difficult or impossible. One is obliged therefore, altogether or in any case for the most part, to determine the amount of the Spawning cod themselves. This can be done either by special fishery experiments or by study- ing the journals of the catches of the fishermen. In the Norwegian Sea, it has proved that, in addition to the fishery experiments, the in- vestigation of the pelagic eggs is a valuable aid in the search for the shoals of spawn- ing cod. We shall therefore consider here the investigations in the Norwegian Sea first of all, 4" APPENDIX G Round the Norwegian Sea the sea-bottom slopes for the most part rapidly from the coast and this forms a slanting declivity, the so-called “landbakke”. At some places however, it expands in depths of 54— 90 m. to smaller or larger banks, which are in part directly connected to the coast, as at Iceland, and partly cut off from the coast by deep channels (the majority of the Norwegian banks). It has been known in Norway for hundreds of the various small banks, in depths of 36—126 m., and for just as long a period, a great coast fishery has been carried on at these spawning places. In the course of the last 20 years, a North Sea fishery of spawning cod has deve- loped from the coast fishery, and is chiefly carried on on some of the banks lying far from the coast. A few years ago, a series of similar banks had never ‘been inyesti- atus, and no certain in- formation was forthcoming concerning the regions of the sea in which the cod shoals chiefly spawned. By comprehensive investigations of the distribution of the cod eggs in the year 1901, it appeared that these were only to be found on the coastal banks and never over the great 4 depths of the Norwegian Sea, and that they had a limit towards the north almost at the years that the cod spawns — both on the declivity as on) gated with fishing appar- — 29 — JOH. HJORT ax C.G. JOH. PETERSEN island of Sörö (West Finmark); also, that in the whole Barents Sea only single cod eggs were Spawned (in some fjords of Finmark). From Sörö to the North Sea the cod spawns, however, on suitable spots and partly on the steep coast declivity, partly on the banks. Through numerous investigations in the years 1902—1904, all the banks of the Norwegian coastal sea have now been systematically studied, so that we have at present a view over all the larger spawning places of this sea; this is of importance in two ways. Firstly, the region where this economically important fish occurs at the spawning time, has been sharply determined geographically; and secondly, various new and important places for the fishery have been demonstrated. As an account of these would carry us too far in this brief statement, we shall only describe here the conditions on some small specially characteristic and typical banks. The greatest cod fisheries in Norway take place on the stretch from and at Lofoten to Tromso. Near to the land here, there is a series of banks lying in depths under 90 m. and indicated on the accompanying Chart (Fig. 4) by Roman figures. They are, as the Chart shows, separated from one another by channels not exceeding 300 m. deep. When the spawning time ap- proaches the cod collect on these small banks exclusively. In different years, the appearance of the shoals may vary somewhat, both as regards time as depth, but it holds good as a rule, that they collect on the slopes of the small banks towards the channel and that they gradually make for the edge of the banks in order to spawn. The fish shoals are thus crowded to- gether on a small space, a factor of importance for the fertilisation of the eggs. As not only the masses of fish but also the eggs floating on the surface of the water are thus concen- trated on a very limited ground, it was possible to find the spawning fish-swarms by this means so that the quantity of the eggs, in the entire water to the surface, was investigated. For example, on the region represented on the accompanying charts, the following quantities of eges were taken during April 1901 in a horizontal haul of 5 minutes duration with a net of 1 m. diameter: On Welles farming, lei Wy. PP EME EEE ER 8470 and 3565 eggs In the channel between banks I and IL........................ 10 — Ovi jie Toes JDL Goancoaceas Olea era ht Aa race AO Ceo ROR ET NCIS 3636 — In the channel between banks IT and IIL...................... 170 — Gin Merle AUTRES Eee ee ed a 957 — On en NT RE ES cack Et A CE RT 2333 — On the slope of the bank towards the depths of the Norwegian Sea 83 — Beyond the coastal banks in a great number of hauls............ 0 — This experience, that the region of the floating eggs is so restricted during the spawning of the cod, led to comprehensive fishery experiments to determine likewise the occurrence of the adult cod. This appeared the more important, as previously, only banks II and VI had been fished, whereas practical fishery experiments had never been made on banks I, III, IV and V. P In agreement with the distribution of the pelagic eggs, the fishery experiments showed that very large quantities of spawning cod occurred on bank I, the Malangs ground. Thus, the re- search-boat could take as many as 5800 cod on 17,800 hooks in one day, and afterwards in APPENDIX G — 30 — the course of a month, the research boat along with other steamers and sailing vessels took ca. 700,000 cod. During the entire spawning season (February— April) ca. one and a half million cod were taken by these boats. The fishery experiments and the investigations into the occur- rence of the pelagic eggs showed therefore perfect agreement in their result. If we now look closer at bank I, as shown on a larger scale on Chart (Fig. 5), it will seem astonishing how locally restricted the fish can also be here. There is shown on this chart an oblique quadrilateral which bounds the place on which spawning cod could be chiefly caught during the experiments of 1902. From the many figures representing the investigated stations at which no cod were taken, it appears that energetic investigations were also carried on outside the — quadrilateral. ; The appearance of the fish shoals is also determined to a certain extent by hydrogen conditions, the cold currents especially causing the fish to seek deeper layers. On the other hand, the fish seem to come much nearer the coasts in very warm years. Thus in 1903, the occurrence of the cod shoals on the Malangs ground was essentially different, the fish were then found even in the fjords; and the whole coastal waters had a temperature (up to 6) distinctly higher than the average temperature for the season in other years. — 3] — JOH. HJORT ayn C.G. JOH. PETERSEN Similar investigations were afterwards made over the entire region from Tromse to as far as Romsdal bank. It was shown therewith, that the various small coastal banks were different; on some, spawning cod were found, on others not. It seems that the depths from 54 to 136 m. are preferred by the fish for spawning in the Norwegian Sea, and only the banks with flats of 54—72 m. and placed very near to the coasts, seem certain year by year to be “skrei’’-banks. On the western coastal banks of the Norwegian Sea‘, at Iceland and the Feroe Isles, similar investigations of the pelagic cod eggs and of the spawning of the cod shoals, were made during 1903 and 1904 and the result was, that no cod eggs could be found beyond the coastal banks and the 180 m. line. All the eggs are therefore spawned in the neighbour- hood of the coasts and carried by the currents not far from the coasts. The distribution of the eges on the Icelandic coasts is most interesting and important. From the chart (Pl. X.) it is seen that the cod eggs were distributed in April 1904 along the south coast of Iceland from Westerhorn to Reykjanes and along the west coast to Cape North, on the east and north coasts however, no cod eggs occurred. Along the western part of the south coast, from the Westmann Islands to Reykjanes, they were found in great quantities. In the cold water of the north and east coasts the cod eggs were practically not at all spawned. The experiences of the fishermen confirm these facts. On the south coast, they catch spawn- ing cod in spring, mostly in March and April, and especially on the stretch from the West- mann Islands at Reykjanes, somewhat later on the west coast also, especially on its southern part, whilst the conditions on the north and east coasts are different. Here the fishery, which is carried on in the summer and autumn months, consists of younger and spent fish. At the Feroes also, pelagic cod eggs have been found in April and beginning of May, but only over comparatively small depths (down to 180 m.). In the North Sea, as mentioned above, the conditions are distinctly more complicated. The investigation of the pelagic cod eggs is so difficult because many eggs of other species as well as the cod occur there and their determination, at least in the earliest stages, is only pos- sible by artificial rearing. Nevertheless, large collections of pelagic eggs and young larve have been made and are at present being worked at in the different countries; they will enlarge our stock of knowledge concerning the occurrence of the spawning cod. Numerous fishery experiments gave important and full material also concerning the distribu- tion of the spawning cod, but this at present is undergoing thorough investigation so that it would not be right to give a detailed description concerning it now. It may only be said that the numerous fishery experiments in the deeper, northern part of the North Sea have shown that no spawning takes place there during the spawning period of the cod of the Norwegian Sea (Feb- ruary— April). The conditions on the coastal banks, where great masses of cod collect to spawn in the winter months, February—April, are however different. This is especially apparent from the representative statistic of the different countries. The German, English, Scottish, Nor- wegian and Danish statistical data and journals of catches received by Committee A, show this with great certainty. Thus, the statistics worked out by Henking give the following: Henking distinguishes between coastal banks and the deep-sea banks. The coastal banks have a depth of 20—40 m. and extend from the Dutch coast to the Skager Rak. The deep 1 Schmidt, 1. c. S. 56—59. ] APPENDIX G 2. Bora North Sea banks occupy the middle parts of the North Sea with depths of 40—70 m. In the whole six months of winter, the trawl-steamers took quite as much on the average on the coastal banks as in the six months of summer. If we compare the average catch per day of voyage, in December with that in July to August, on a line from Horns Reef to the N. H. of the Dogger Bank, we have the following figures: é NE of South Horns Reet Horns Reef Dogger Bank Mud Bank outer ground inner ground December Hes AMEN MAR RARES 226 153 375 711 July =—AUSUSt EE RE ARE TRE ER 168 P 150 150 144 That this increase in the catch on the coastal banks in winter, arises from a movement of larger cod towards them, is seen also in a comparison between the relation of the small to the large cod. In summer the proportion is 1:1, in winter 2.2:1. In the last portion of the winter six months, namely, in the spawning period of the cod, the proportion on the special spawning places increases to 12 to 1. Henking has further shown, that whilst large cod seem to be tolerably evenly distri- buted on the coastal banks from Skagen to the Dutch coast in the first months of winter, the cod shoals collect in the later months of winter, in the spawning time, especially on the districts 1. Terschelling —Borkum and 2. Hanstholm—Hirshals. - From the material of other countries also, much valuable information is forthcoming. We hope that when this material has been worked out, it may also be possible to give a view over all the important spawning places in the North Sea; a geographical description of these at present would lead too far. How complicated the conditions in the North Sea are, appears from this, that in addition to these great collections of spawning cod on the shallow coastal banks in the spring (February—April), cod also spawn in midsummer (August—September) in the deeper parts of the northern North Sea. Fulton has shown this first in 1903, when he dis- covered cod with ripe sexual organs on the fish-market at Aberdeen in September. These were all fished in depths of 160—180 m. on the eastern slope of the North Sea bank in the Norwegian Channel. He succeeded also, in determining the occurrence of pelagic eggs at these places. It appears however, that this is of a local nature and cannot in any way be com- pared quantitatively with the spawning in spring. It is very interesting that this spawning occurs in great depths just where the lowest temperature of the locality is found, as these depths have the highest temperature in winter and the lowest during the summer months. Thus, it appears that the difference in point of time between the spawning period in spring and that in midsummer depends upon this, that the different localities in which the fish spawn, have” opposite kinds of temperature-changes; in both cases however, it seems that the cod of both localities spawn in the coldest part of the year. (See what has been said above concerning the temperature-conditions in the deeper parts of the North Sea). b) An important question theoretically as well as practically is: how large are the spawning cod? The shoals which collect in spring on the Norwegian coastal banks show sizes from F 50—60 cm. up to 150 cm. The curve of measurements shows, as a rule, a maximum of about — 33 — JOH. HJORT any C. G. JOH. PETERSEN 70 cm. It may be taken that fish of this size represent the first spawning year. The size may vary in the different years and within the different shoals which arrive, just as the maximum may be different on neighbouring banks. Almost all the fish of the shoals spawn, though some are sterile. The smallest size at which the spawning cod of the coastal banks are sexually ripe, lies between 50 and 60 cm. as a rule, yet very little under 60 cm. At Iceland the spawning cod are larger than at Norway. The maximum of the curve showing the ripe cod lies about 90 cm. in July (see Table Pl. IV), and the smallest sexually ripe have a size of 66 cm. All smaller cod were immature, according to the comprehensive investigations of Schmidt. Holt has investigated the maturity of the cod in the North Sea. According to his in- vestigations, some mature males and females occurred already at 55 cm., but the majority of the cod were first mature at 70—80 cm. Fulton has found mature cod of only 52 cm. on the east coast of the Shetlands, but only exceptionally. From the numerous measurements made for Committee A, a large “Skrei”-group can be distinctly detected in the North Sea. Whilst the hauls of the investigation-steamers in summer gave sizes of 30—60 cm. principally and in considerable numbers, cod of 65 to 100 cm. appeared in winter. Whilst an approximate agreement, with certain fluctuations, seems to rule from the northern Norwegian Sea to the North Sea with regard to the size at which maturity is attained by the spawning cod, different relations appear in certain Danish and Norwegian fjords. G.O. Sars long ago found and studied ripe cod of both sexes of ca. 30 cm. in length in the Christiania Fjord. This has been more exactly confirmed in recent years and in several of the fjords of the Norwegian east coast, where spawning cod of only 27 cm. in size have been found. In the comprehensive number of measurements transmitted to Committee A by C. G. Joh. _ Petersen, quantities of ripe cod of both sexes occur at 30 cm. in length, some even less than this. In this connection, it is of great interest that the sizes, which are characteristic of spawn- ing cod in the North Sea and Norwegian Sea, are quite absent from the Kattegat and Danish Belts. The question then arises, whether the smaller size at which these fjord cod attain maturity means, that they belong to a special race. We can only discuss this after we have treated of the natural history of the various age-groups. 2. The natural history of the cod in its first year In previous pages, we have seen that the cod-eggs spawned in spring, are found exclus- ively -on the coastal banks. During the months of April and May these eggs develop to larve and later to young fish. We shall now consider their fate in the different regions during development, more closely. In the years 1900 and 1901, the distribution of the eggs and young fish in the seas of northern Norway has been investigated at various times, the upper layers being fished with large nets at a large number of observation-stations. The drawing on the Chart (Fig. 6) has been based on the results of these investigations. The curve Nr. 1 shows the distribution of the floating cod-eggs, and this corresponds to the extent of the coastal banks shown by the dotted lines of depths. The other curves (II and III) show Appendix @ 5 APPENDIX G . ere the distribution of the quite small young fish in the sea, Nr. II in June and July 1901, Nr. III in August to September 1900. In June to July 1901, the small fish at a size of from 0.9 to 3 cm, could be obtained everywhere from the coast to the slope shown by curve III. Along with them were found numerous larve of such animals as spawn in the neighbourhood of the coast, chiefly small medusoids and jelly fishes. It is seen that curve IL lies distinctly beyond the coastal banks, and curve III, showing the distribution of the young fish in August to September 1900, even more so. The young cod had then a size up to 9.5 cm.; they were distant from the coast as far as to 120 nautical miles, and were found along with larve of animals of the coast. Whilst the . small cod are distributed fairly evenly in June, and their ability to swim is only used in floating, they begin to collect into small shoals in July and can be observed in quantities on the coastal banks, where they are chased by preda- tory fishes (especially the green cod, Gadus virens). At this time also, they begin to seek the coast - and the bottom, and still Distribution of the floating I more in autumn when there ce oad | à everywhere à gr the year movement of the water- masses and of floating ani- à mals towards the coasts: Fie. 6 From consideration of the three curves, it appears that the larvæ and young fish are carried away from the coast in the course of the summer, and the hydrographical observations carried on at the same time, showed that this movement is connected with a movement of the coastal water. : The investigation of the distribution of the first bottom-stages revealed the important and interesting result, that the small pelagic fishes are carried by these currents, not only away from the coast, but also in a northerly direction along the coast. For this reason, we find N i 2 » 70 nowhere on the Norwegian coast so many small cod on the beach as just in the northern part à of Norway, in Finmark, where they can be taken in hundreds in summer along the region À of the strand, with fine-meshed nets. Yet no eggs or at most but a few, are spawned there; the small cod of Finmark are thus not born at that place but much further to the south. The investigations of Joh. Schmidt at Iceland agree with these results. In June the mS pelagic young cod swarm in great quantities in the Icelandic coastal waters, but only on the re ke. 4 ad JOH. HJORT ann C. G. JOH. PETERSEN south and west coast of the island as is shown in the Chart (Pl. X). This distribution of the pelagic young cod in June agrees, as the Chart shows, with the distribution of the coastal water containing a salinity of about 35 °/oo and a temperature of over 5° C.! In July, many already began to seek the bottom and were found there on the south coast e.g. in depths of 47—72m. Very many however, still remain pelagic and can be fished, e. g. in July, along the north coast of Iceland. In August, the most have sought the bottom here, where they are to be found in the fjords in enormous quantities. In agreement with the hydrographical conditions in the Icelandic waters, the young cod are not however, carried away from the coast into the open sea, but move with the great coastal current in the direction from the south to the west coast, from there round Cape North to the north coast, and towards the end of August they begin to appear even on the east coast of Iceland and in September in the fjords there. It is therefore interesting, that practically no cod are spawned on this east coast nor on the north coast and that, for example, no cod of the same year occur in July. This was proved by numerous hauls at all depths, pelagic as well as on the bottom. Thus, whilst no cod of the same year (the 0-group) occurred in the fjords of the east coast in July, over 12,000 cod of the previous year (the I-group) were taken in only 6 hauls on the 23rd of July. From September onwards, the 0-group is found in increasing numbers and at the beginning of the following year, they are on the east coast, where none are born, perhaps in greater quantities than anywhere on the coasts of Iceland. During 1903 and 1904, extensive investigations were made in the North Sea by the various investigating steamers. Search was made for the young fish of the various gadoid species at several hundred observation-stations over the entire region, on the bottom and in all depths of water with large nets and fine-meshed trawls. It has thus been shown, that the young cod in the North Sea give up the pelagic habit and seek the bottom at much younger stages than happens in the Norwegian Sea. Only very few young cod of over 2cm. in length were found after the first of June, before that, however, they occurred in great quantities, especially in the neighbourhood of the coasts. It appears that their distribution is determined from the begin- ning by the fact, that they are born on the coastal banks and that the currents of the North Sea also help to keep them at the coasts or to carry them there. In the great northern part of the North Sea, there seems to bea relatively resting mass of water into which they are not carried. Accordingly, if we investigate the first bottom-stages of the O-group with fine-meshed trawls, we find, as is well shown by the existing material, that they occur in great quantities along the coasts, in the neighbourhood of the large estuaries, on the coastal banks and on the more southerly banks as far as the Great Fisher Bank. Further north in the deeper part of the North Sea, where the same temperature (6°—7° C.) rules the whole year round, they are not to be found or only in single examples. These conditions cannot be carried further into detail, as the whole large material has not yet been completely worked out; it may nevertheless be said, that the international investigations of the last two years have attained the important result of determining the distribution of the O-group in the North Sea with certainty, whereby one of the most important conditions for understanding the natural history of the cod has been fulfilled. 1 Schmidt, |. c. p. 72—76. APPENDIX G en The Norwegian fjords, the Skager Rak, Kattegat and the Danish Belts and fjords stand in close relation to the North Sea. Hjort and Dahl have already found from earlier investigations, that the cod also spawned in the Norwegian fjords; they found pelagic eggs there, but as a rule only very few larve, and the young cod of the O-group appeared first in autumn (September, October), In our opinion they had wandered in. there. The Danish Biological Station has during recent years continued the investigations on the biology of the cod, carried out previously by C. G. Joh. Petersen. (Report XI, 1900 and 1901.) The essential results of these investigations, which confirm the earlier, are: 1) that numerous cod spawn in the Kattegat and Belts; 2) that the pelagic eggs and larve of the cod are caught in the Belts, but that as a rule 3) the Danish waters are in summer very poor in representatives of the O-group, with exception of some few places and with the reservation that the quantitative occurrence is somewhat different in different years. ‘Thus, for example, more young cod were taken in 1902 than in 1901 and 1903. 4) the 0-group first appear in late autumn in the same quantity as the I-group. A comparison of these relations in the years 1902 and 1903 is of importance. 1902. During the spawning time of the cod, pelagic eggs were found in the Kattegat and in the Belts in February, March, April even to the 14 of April. In May, the larve and young fishes also began to appear, and at the end of May a quantity of pelagic young fish was found in the Little Belt. Pelagic cod appeared, though only in small quantities, in the Belts all through June, and in the latter half of June bottom-stages appeared, even of 2 cm, in length. In July and August, relatively few cod of the O-group were found, in spite of numerous searches in the Baltic, waters of Smaaland, the Sound and Ise Fjord; whilst in September many specimens of the O-group, in length from 7.5—12.5 cm., were taken im the zostera-vegetation down to 36 m. deep, north from F'yen. Although the quantities of the O-group found, cannot be called large altogether, the number was distinctly larger than in the earlier observed years, and this year is thus an interesting example of the change the quantity of young fish may experience in different years. It was quite different in the year 1903. In March and April, spawning cod (of the II-group, from 81 cm. on) were in the Great Belt. In April, the pelagic young cod began to appear, on the surface as in the middle layers, in the Great Belt and Kattegat, especially in the waters on the north coast of Zealand. In May, not a few cod of the O-group (2—8 in one haul of the sand-eel net) were caught in the Little Belt, in the middle layers at least 20 m.deep. In the Kattegat a large quantity of pelagic young cod was found in the middle layers; once about 50 were taken in a haul with the sand-eel net, as a rule 2—5. Their length measured from 0.5—2 cm, mostly 1 em. and under; some had still the yolk-sac attached. In the Great Belt, some single specimens were to be found pelagically. In June, there were still pelagic cod in the Kattegat, the largest 2 cm. long, as a rule 1cm., some just hatched larve were only 0.5 cm. long. In the Great Belt only a few were taken, yet some single pelagic young cod occurred still in July, even on the 2nd of August. In July, they began to appear on the a CET de. ede I JOH. HJORT ann €. G, JOH. PETERSEN zostera, though not so numerous as the I-group. With exception of some few places with resting water, extremely few specimens of the O-group were taken on the bottom throughout the entire summer. The O-group was eagerly sought for through the whole of autumn in Nyborg Fjord on the Great Belt, but found extremely rarely. Even in December, only a few specimens under 19 cm. were observed. The steamer “Thor” investigated all depths in the Kattegat with trawl and sand-eel net, both the middle and the bottom layers, but could not find any mentionable quantity of the O-group. From all these investigations on the natural history of the cod during the first year of life, we can conclude that the distribution of the first bottom-stages is dependent above all on the influence of the oceanic currents during the free, floating stage. According to the change of these currents in the different geographical regions and in different years, the distribution of the small young cod will also change. It is clear, that all practical considerations of at some time influencing the stock of the cod and of fishes related to it, must reckon with these important conclusions. As said above, experiments have been made in Norway in accordance with these experiences. Pelagic cod larvæ are being set out in some fjords, but not in others as nearly as possible similar. The quantities of the bottom-stages in both are to be compared later by exact inves- tigations. In this way, we hope after some years to win trustwortly material for judging the question, whether the setting out of cod larvæ is of use or not. 3. Rate of growth, migrations and the fisheries of the cod In all the countries which have joined our common investigations, a number of measurements of cod have been made in the course of the last two years, partly at the fishing-ports, partly on board the research steamers. A rich material of measurements, relating to the rate of growth of the cod in accordance with the method described in Section II, has thus been collected both from the Norwegian Sea and from the North Sea. From these it appears chiefly, that its growth is very different in different regions. We saw above, in the section on the spawning of the cod, that the first spawning group had an average size of ca. 70 cm. in northern Norway whilst the corresponding size at Iceland was 70 to 80 cm. Similar differences appear in the present material, perhaps in all groups. For this reason, it will only be possible to display the results of the measurements made when they have all undergone a thorough comparative examination, which up to the present has only been done in part. As a description of the results, moreover, would require a minute treatment of the matter, we must restrict ourselves here to a reference to Section II where the conditions at Iceland have been more closely exemplified. The information regarding the place of capture, obtained at the same time as the measure- ments, gives an insight also of the habitats of the various size-groups during the different periods of the year, from which again, conclusion may be drawn regarding the migrations of the fishes. At Iceland, the occurrence of the cod at all depths from 0—630 m. could be ascertained, though ordinarily in small quantities only, deeper than 270 m. APPENDIX G — 38 — At Norway and on the steep slope towards the basin of the Norwegian Sea between West Norway and Iceland, cod were found down to 360 and 540 m. deep. From his investigations at Iceland Schmidt, has worked out the following table, which shows the distribution of the cod according to size (age) and depth, within and outside the fjords of East Iceland. East Iceland, 24th —_28t July, 1903 Representation of the distribution of the cod according to size (age) and depth. Length Seydis Fjord Lodmundar Fjord Glettinganes of the cod depth 5.4 m depth 22 m depth 126—234 m mom | Each point represents 10 cod | Each point represents 100 cod Each point represents 50 cod 100—109 | © 90—99 © © © © © 80—89 CORO TOVOPOTOROMORORO) 70—79 (O} 2) (o) C} O) OVO) ©) COCO NME cece eter RER | ken ner O0000000000 50—59 | © © © © = CCS CO CC © © © 40—49 | & @ OO 0 © © 09&C & || & © 8 © 30—39 000 2029 0000000000 10—19 SONS SO © 0—9 (NB. The cod were taken on hooks.) It appears from this, that the Iceland cod seek the deep water at a length of 40 cm and onwards, whilst the younger year-groups occur principally in much smaller depths. / This can be taken as the general rule except at the spawning time, when the large spawning cod wander in towards the coast. The German representative statistic and the English and Scottish investigations of the North Sea banks, show principally that the younger, halfsrown cod are present on the shallower North Sea banks the whole year round. ‘Thus, for example, cod between 30 and 60cm. in length were taken at small depths in the trawls of the research- steamer “Huxley” and of the fishing steamers on the North Sea banks. 2 It must not be forgotten, however, that exceptions to this rule also occur. Thus, in the Barents Sea, not a few cod of about 20 cm. in length were found in depths of 200 and 400 m, and the O-group occurred at some places in the North Sea down to 100m. As we shall see later, cod are also pelagie in the water at times. These differences and irregularities appear still more clearly when we study the migra- tions of the cod, the most difficult of all fishery problems, for whose solution all methods of research and the investigation of all stages of life must be called in to aid. After the above sketch of the spawning-migrations of the cod and of the passive migra- tions undergone by their eggs, larve and young fish under the influence of the oceanic currents, we shall mention briefly in the following pages, their wanderings during the other stages of life. For this, unfortunately, we are not in the favourable position of being able to base our vite Vi. 08 — 39 — JOH. HIJORT an» C. G. JOH. PETERSEN conclusions on many experiences, observations and marking-experiments, as in the case of the plaice; we are chiefly dependent on à summary of the results of the many fishing experiments, which have been made at all times of the year and in the most different regions of the sea. With regard to the North Sea, Henking has given Committee A some time ago, numerous statistical data which he collected with regard to the catches of trawlers of the Ger- man fishing port, Geestemtinde, and he has added to his material a manuscript, in which he had made a summary of the results to be obtained from the data, according to his opinion. He distin- guishes between large and small cod. The large have a weight of 2.5 to 8.5 kg, on the average 4.8kg, and a length between 65 and 99 cm. The small cod weigh between 0.12 and 2.8 kg., on an average 0.6 kg; the length, 26 to 68 cm. On the off-banks with depths of 40—70 m., the difference in the number of pounds per day of voyage is relatively small the whole year round. In the six months of winter, the average number amounted to 275 % per day. In the six months of summer it was somewhat larger, viz. 341 % per day. The relation is different on the coastal banks with depths of 20 to 40 m, namely 465 th per day in the six months of winter and only the half of this in the summer six months. Also, if we consider the relation between large and small cod on the banks at the different periods of the year, a movement of the fish-masses towards the banks becomes evident. On the deep banks, the average proportion by weight between large and small cod is 1:1 in summer, whilst in winter it changes to 2.2:2, on the Dogger Bank even 6:1. Still more impressive is the proportion on the coastal banks, it is 1:1 im summer, which in the later months of winter, increases to 12:1 in the special spawning places. The Scottish statistics chiefly represent catches from the northwestern portion of the North Sea, thus supplementing the statistics of other countries. They have been worked out in detail by d’Arcy Thompson, especially for the coastal banks of Scotland. With regard to this region of the North Sea, it may be said that a distinct tendency to form two maxima can be detected, one during the spawning-time and one during the months of July and August. The latter maximum coincides with the appearance of the herring-shoals. These changes in the occurrence of the various sizes of the cod, can also be shown from the numerous catches of the research-steamers. They are specially clear in the catches of the English steamer “Huxley”. + This must occur to even greater extent in the Norwegian Sea, as the cod forms there the most important portion of the catch. The variation in the appearance of the cod-shoals there, has for a long time astonished both fishermen and scientific investigators alike. What chiefly determines the fisheries of the Norwegian Sea are the migrations of the cod, and it is characteristic there, both in Norway and at Iceland, that the cod are caught in geographically different regions at different periods of the year — during the spawning time and in the summer. If we investigate the stock of large cod in the Norwegian coastal waters out of the Spawning time, e. g. in the summer, we find but very few cod along the whole stretch from Tromso in the north, down to the North Sea. Thus, fishing with several millions of hooks on the Romsdal banks in summer, only one cod to 700 hooks was taken. Up to the present, there has never been so great à fishery on this long stretch in summer, that any trade worth mentioning developed from it, apart from supplying the market in the small towns and the APPENDIX G — 40 — daily requirements of the few dwellers on the coast. On the other hand, the fisheries of Fin- mark are carried on in the summer, to the north of this region where the spawning places are. And at this time and place, both large quantities of medium-sized cod as well as large spent fish are taken. It has been shown by the Norwegian and Russian research-steamers how the cod-shoals in the Barents Sea, migrate in early summer with the advancing warm Atlantic water-masses towards the east and later, in autumm or winter, return again. Many years ago, G. O. Sars described how the fish-shoals undertake great migrations in the region between Spitz- bergen and Norway, whilst pursuing their food, especially the Arctic Mallotus villosus. Above all is the result important, that the medium-sized cod (ca. 50 cm.) occur nowhere along the Norwegian coast in such quantities as just where none of them are born. 5 Schmidt has now found the same at Iceland. Here, the greatest fisheries take place in the summer and autnmn on the north and east coasts, where fish of 50—70 cm. especially are caught in great quantities, though all are born on the south or west coast of the island. These migrations undergo great variations from year to year, and it is just these changes which give us an insight into their origin. Thus, in the Norwegian North Atlantic expedition, G. O. Sars described how the cod sought the fjords and coasts of Spitzbergen in great shoals in the seventies of last century, and an important catch of fish was then made. He relates that all the cod taken were large, adult fish and that the smaller occurred nowhere. From this he concluded, that the cod must have been born on Norwegian coasts and wandered across there. During his investigation of the fjords of Spitzbergen in 1901, Hjort found not a single large cod. The seal-hunters who occasionally engaged in fishing, had the same experience. It is not yet possible to answer the question with certainty, where the large shoals which frequent the coastal banks at the spawning time, migrate afterwards. Henking puts forward the hypothesis for the North Sea, that the large cod which spawn in winter on the coastal banks, are pelagic in summer over the deeper North Sea banks. Hjort’s investigations in the years 1900—1903, prove that the cod are not confined only to the coastal banks but may migrate also far into the Norwegian Sea. Both west from the Lofotens and north from the Feroe Isles, large cod have been taken on floating long-lines and with drift-nets; the bottlenose whale fishers and the herring fishermen have also reported upon similar catches. . To the east of Iceland (66° 15'N, 12° 13° W) over 640 m., Schmidt obtained a considerable number of cod at 34—252 m. from the surface, viz. 50 specimens of a length of 75—110 cm. (none smaller) on 300 hooks. - It always appeared during these captures of pelagic cod, that they were following pelagic animals, herring, Mallotus villotus or Crustacea. As it has now been shown, that such pelagic animals as herring and ink-fish wander into the Norwegian Sea in considerable quantities, it does not seem beyond possibility that the pelagic wanderings of the cod have their own significance. On the other hand, it must be specially remarked that only by further observations and above all, by experiments with marking of the cod, can trustworthy information be obtained concerning the sphere and extent of the migrations, and especially of the pelagic wanderings. The Committee A will accordingly endeavour to carry out such experiments as the oppor- tunity offers, and these have already begun in various countries, without sufficient results as yet however, that mention can be made of them here. In our opinion, the most important — 4] — JOH. HJORT. ayn C.G. JOH. PETERSEN task in the study of the natural history of the cod in the near future, is to be seen in just these experiments, from which the first survey of the distribution of the different age-groups will be obtained for the whole region under investigation; and it may perhaps, be considered as a propitious result of the cooperation, that a comprehensive material has already been col- lected for the accomplishment of this task. These investigations on the migrations stand in the closest relation to important fisheries questions. Thus, in the Norwegian Sea, the great fluctuations in the catches of fish have played rene eee eee Spo Se SS SaaS SSS Teaser @| co| Go| a0} Go} Go| a0] ao] ao} a0} Go! Go} Go! Go| Go| G0] ao} a0] Go} aD] co} Ga! Go} Go| GD] Go! Go| co] aD} co] Go] G0} «o | Sa) a} <3) 9) =9] <3] <9] 9] <9) 23) <9) Go] GO| CO! Gd] 5] Go] GO] Go! 0d] Co] cH} cB] sl sl ss co] S| cS] COIS |B) S| =! ad) CO/ S| ot} also ssl 09] Co) Ss] oe] Se] =3| CO] | S] =| 9] Co] BS] Ge] | <3] CO] 2 3 24 et 23 h 22 11 = # k = 21 - IN N wi 20 Sl ny [nt IH 19 at 18 le. \ N I N 1 17 AIR al yt TIN 16 ] A al nl | i: 15 1 à i i ! \ 1 | 1 1 ler A 131 \ \ l | 44 \ Jr |! 12] Na | I 11 i \ y N \ 0 \ | A 9 \ 1 Vole 8 \ v 7 6 v 5 um | | 3 \ 1 Fig. 7 a great part since ancient times. Allzhistoricalgaccounts speak of years which”were specially rich and of years when the fish were absent, and though of recent years the entire technical equipment, of apparatus, boats etc. has considerably improved, the absence of the shoals still _ strikes deep into the conditions of the fishing people. Our investigations have consequently, also had the important task of studying, both the economic conditions under which the fishery is worked practically, as well as the influence of the oceanic currents on the occurrence of the fish on the banks. As the great fluctuations in the migrations can only be explained after further experience, Appendix G 6 APPENDIX G N sh the value of our present communication lies, not in the explanations, but in the exact descrip- tion of the existing conditions. In this connection, we might refer to the great importance of fishery statistics as an aid to the comprehension of the fisheries and the natural history of the fishes. For the divisions of the Norwegian Sea, detailed statistics are essentially easy to obtain, as only the cod, or principally the cod, is taken in the entire fishery, and the fishing grounds are restricted to the small banks. Accordingly, a good survey of the great fluctuation at the various fishing grounds can be obtained in Norway, for example, from the beginning of the statistics in 1868. As an example of such fluctuations we give here (fig. 7) a graphic representation of the Finmark cod fishery during the years 1868—1900. In the North Sea the matter is different, chiefly because the statistics up to the present, have given no information regarding the fishing grounds. Accordingly, the data of the cod landed contained the fishing at Iceland, the Færoes and west coast of Scotland as well as from the North Sea. How little worth, for example, the English statistics have, with regard to the quantities of cod landed from the North Sea, is shown in the following example. For some Grimsby steam-trawlers, who were asked for information regarding their voyages during the months of September to February, it appeared that 17 voyages were made in the North Sea, 11 on the west coast of Scotland and 5 to Iceland. If we look closer at the quantities of cod taken in each of the three regions, and landed from these 33 voyages, we have the following figures: inv the North Sea CEE TUE 476 cwts, 31 °/o of the total catch on the west coast of Scotland .. 455 — , 29.8 Vo — — — GS ddl ce RN 600 —, 39.2 Yo — — — The relation between the different sizes is as follows: large cod: from the North Sea ............. or 18 Om from the west coast of Scotland ...... 34.5 (0 tomaten tte tern eee 47.5 0/0 small cod: from the North) Sean nee 80 %/o from the west coast of Scotland....... 13 %/o frommlicelandme PAR en ice mene 7 % It appears from these figures, how necessary detailed information regarding the fishing grounds is, in order to profit from statistics in studying a given area of the sea, and that the statistics up to the present, giving only the data of the quantities landed, are not sufficient. It is accordingly, very agreeable that great improvements have been made during recent years in the statistics of the different countries, and that endeavours are being made so to arrange the statistics that the data may be compared one with another. It is well to remember, however, that this end will not be attained in the near future. ay — JOH. HJORT a C. G. JOH. PETERSEN Meanwhile, we must be content to use the available statistics for the nearest approxima- tions, and for a comparison of the catches in the different countries. Committee A has also endeavoured to utilise the data of the statistics in this way for some chosen years. The constantly increasing importance of the cod in the more northern parts of the region under observation, and the increasing catches of large cod in the winter months have been determined from such a compilation of the statistics. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES AND FIGURES | Plate I. Chart of depths, over the whole region under investigation. Plates LI and III. Chart of the North Sea, with data of the depths. Plate IV. Table showing the size-groups of cod caught at Iceland. Plates V—VIII. Four charts showing the distribution of the larve: Table V of Gadus callarias. — VI - — virens. — VII - — aeglefinus. — VIII- — merlangus. Plate IX. Chart of the Baltic, showing the distribution of the plaice. Plate X. Chart of Iceland, showing the distribution of the eggs and young of the cod. Red spots signify eges of cod present, number according to size of spot. Blue spots signify no eggs present. Stations are numbered 1 (April 14th 1904) — 42 (April 27th 1904). Fig. 1, p. 6. Hydrographical section across the Færoe-Iceland ridge. — 2&3, p. 10,11. Hydrographical sections of the North Sea. — 4, p. 28 Chart of the banks, Lofoten to Tromso. — 5, p. 30. Malangs bank. — 6, p. 34. Distribution of the floating eggs and young of the cod, at different periods of the year. — 7, p. 41. Graphic representation of the Finmark fishery. 1902—1904 Appendix G General - Report: Lol Vv an = = bp Vv 2 - © Zz Vv = + — © - - S = Oo in o = - Vv = > = u FI a = c o n E < Z en © = = T = [ea > 2 + = = © = u v 2 = = > = = x a z Ts, ng Ze Be Feterhead : SCOTLAND, / Ace? 5. Aamodt" ith Etabl Kbhvn err General-Report: 1902—1904 =. PI. I Appendix G Hoek-v: Holland ) ie ines ( ty à ) Yarmouth Lowestoft Giomer A INA ID Lamborough He N Aw E.Aamodt? lith Etabl Kbhrn, 2 CT ES 5 BR 3 ee ER Cr = ; a ead Pere E PLATE IV -1904 1902 APPENDIX G ENERAL-REPORT: G or Ma DeuoHMNn De M A EE OM dm MRA D EE LA M m D E 0 MN DE MN 1 A LE © M mau m ee ages siaJaurques ut CR PERL es = 5 ~ a t r 2 wo poo ony Jo ua à aa SS Cr ORS SB RR 0 OED GS Oras TE EEE EB LED EF TS URES! LOS) SAY CS ES GTS OA! (OS) EN ME Oa eet ey ee ee = Otoun Roses moins ma ao erotic - SSTISRRBRÉLERESSRSE 5 poo jo sıaqumy A Su 333 = HT Hie! => = =, a os == = mm. Cl © © [=] = LS 2) = = 3 sEo £ sun a ees a 2 83 Ö Le = = & > > a=) = E38 = me a EE — No = mt ne -® = = Si > Nis = Bon =} as = =. 322 = Br S Z 3 Le] 3 oO a O8 n 2 § N) © 2 = Hu = CE = = =| =p 3 = 3 Don 5 a = = he = zu = cs =) = ° = 8 = an =| a Br > =) oo Bit, S 5) ne 28 = 2 es = soc pa = C=} oo ip — on 3 = La 3 ° Be = o = =) = 3 5 Co Sp aus = = 2 oo SS oS o = = +» = S oO = = [=] oe n „Ra CR = 5 oe (= ° = + & © © Oo = 8 re fer & > 000 & 6) NS AS $ en = = Been rg lis ead 2 te) > ° =) sea r= =] oO Ba = = | Sa ° 000 o S > n == 2 Ep © (ARE TL | 5 ris es Zz 2 gr o 0000 o BSD Za u a ANS sire © = ° 0000 ° 5 zz SE © PD 20 O45 ry el ¢ Sno wes aE 5 9 000 o 0000 o o 4 1323 = E = oo FFTs S « > 00000 00 000000 ‘a x a mo 8 = © a = © = tee = © ta 000000000 000000 o °o o = | = CA Tr h =>) nu D bb © is 2 ae = ‚Bi 2 N EE à 000000000 o 000000 o Oo = a 8 © 5 = a - © w = 2 eS of 0000000000 o 000000 o o 2 ES MED a © i R = a, 8 5p eo 2 Le] 0000000000 Le] 0000000 o [e] cal 7 a ‘5 © as pe] cate > ae So ae od = o o o 00000000000 Le) 0000000 te} o fo} E à ago 3 © TS oes © 2 DONC © 0000000000000 0000000 oo oo o N _ 00% EB Own = = © fo 7 Le) o o ° 000000000000000 ooo 00000000 oo 000 ° a OMS =" a 3 8 EuS a 00 0 000 © 000000000000000 000 00000000 oo 000 ° ‘ TD o ._ Fe = is} cs) ~ ae = o oo 00000 Le] 00000000000000000 ooo 00000000 oo 000 fo} ~ | = = = © S T oo & EE © Le] oo 00000 Le] © 00000000000000000 000 000000000 0000 000 o i ; ® 27 oR Bes eo0o0o0c000000c Le] 0000000000000000000000000 000000000 0000 ooo ° = 9 © © a = 5 i Ei 3 a = 00000000000000 ooo 0000000000000000000000000 00000000000 00000 ooo ° n ze = u = S © oo 00000000000000000 oo 00 000 o° Le] Le] o 000 00 q T El a &p 000 000000000 00000000000 Le] fo} 0000 oo oo oO > : = Bw 10 M mau dm MN 1 DK 10 M mat OM po om jo mie © "ARS R nn nn See oc SRR SLEELESSBSSSREBBSBATARASSRSAAR AUG tS) a eS 3 = 4 1 BAamodt? tith Etabl Kbhvn. at. > ae + ee de + 1 F — \ | | ; | | | 1 Chart Nr.1: Gadus callarias 1900-1903 Pelagic young fishes, larger than 2 cm. Pelagic young fishes, smaller than 2 cm. Bottom stages, larger than 2 cn. Bottom stages, smaller than 2 cm. Bottom stages smaller, pelagic larger than 2 cm. Bottom stages larger, pelagic smaller than 2 cm. One of the Stations before June Ist. One of the Stations after June Ist, + EEE BE eee prea ae v & ie ART se Date 2 ire bn ge ai ni en ee: are ; General-Report: 1902—1904 o16 Het a ae en © AT ae See EEE eee PES ter Q = DREIER SRE OS AC PRE VS ‘Chart Nr. 2: Gadus virens 1900-1903 Pelagic young fishes, larger than 2 cm. | Pelagic young fishes, smaller than 2 cm. Bottom stages, larger than 2 cm, Bottom stages, smaller than 2 cm. O O e ® @ Bottom stages smaller, pelagic larger than 2 cm. @ Bottom stages larger, pelagic smaller than 2 cm. | 27 One of the Stations before June Ist. | 28 One of the Stations after June Ist, — ae SAME EC Een E — == 21 la. 1 | \ : | De ae at LE eneral- Report: 1902—1904 = Sem —— me (| 10° | \ —— | Chart Nr. 3: fale aeglefinus 1900 -1903 Pelagic young fishes, larger than 2 cm. Pelagic young fishes, smaller than 2 cm. Bottom stages, larger than 2 cm. Bottom stages, smaller than 2 cm. Bottom stages smaller, pelagic larger than 2 cm. Bottom stages larger, pelagio smaller than 2 cm. One of the Stations before June Ist. One of the Stations after June Ist, General-Report: 1902—1904 Appendix G - Pi. VIII () 10° 20° 0 30 = 00 m m m m m m m cm em m m m en EL Se = = = = — = == — un za = way NO aS Chart Nr, 4: Gadus © Pelagic young fishes, smaller than 2 cm. © Bottom stages, larger than 2 cm. @ Bottom stages, smaller than 2 cm. @® Bottom slages smaller, pelagic larger than 2 cm. ® Bottom stages larger, pelagic smaller than 2 cm. 27 One of the Stations before June st. One of the Stations after June Ist. ER = = a 3 Die General-Report: 1902—1904 Appendix G Distribution of the Plaice in the different stages of development AXEL E-AAMODT Ki@BENHAVN Eastern limit (approximately) for the pelagic eggs for the pelagic young for the young (bottom-stages) of the first year for the fullgrown fishes 4 oe SoU orem 00€ 000000 9:T > 1 4 X) XIGNadd Vy X Id FO6I—Z06L :1MOday-Ivuanan APPENDIX H PROVISIONAL REPORT ON THE NATURAL HISTORY © OF THE PLAICE, BASED ON THE WORK OF MMITTEE B IN THE PERIOD ENDING JUNE 30, 1904 ENT WALTER GARSTANG CONVENER OF COMMITTEE B WITH 3 CHARTS, 10 FIGURES IN THE TEXT AND 9 TABLES t (THE MS. WAS RECEIVED BY THE BUREAU ON THE 2d JANUARY 1905) a rr # pee ps dis ¥ CONTENTS PTE GS anne EE DU Cr EEE ae eer MER HOT ENT NE ER I Rn, Aa Eixperimientsswaithemanie disp lat cease terrae Riera PRE EN 1. Introduction (with Table I).......... a i, ee RE ER 2. Summer migrations (with the hart BLEI EC IN aie Me en AAA RE arenes 3. Winter migrations (with the chart: Pl. IN BEN IRINA N cas RATE de a 4. Intensity of fishing (with Table II & tn) RER TN Le RE eee ae Bun Rate: of) STOMIES MALTA PIECE EL AR Pe PON wl Pre eben ta es B. Transplantation experiments (with Table 1V bd Fig. A) ae ERS Co CEMIENIAN EN, 26e cceborcodotusacoocotentecstetoben D. Trawling experiments (with the chart: Pl. III, the Tables V—1X and the I E. The protection of undersized fish.............--.. 0.0. e eee sees tees ts N.B. Tables I—IV are inserted in the text Table V is given on page 28 Sa VEN oni AE NET SSG ee eds SY ‘ SEA) ee) ie AS — IX is inserted in the text At the request of the Bureau of the International Council for the study of the sea, and with the assistance of the members of the Committee, I submit a provisional summary of the work of Committee B, so far as this concerns the natural history of the plaice (Pleuronectes platessa). In preparing this report I have endeavoured to restrict myself as much as possible to an . objective summary of the facts placed at the disposal of the Committee. In places where I have departed from this attitude aud expressed any personal opinions, it should be understood that such opinions have been advanced for suggestive purposes alone and not in any way to pre-judge the conclusions which the Committee may ultimately adopt in regard to the matters under discussion. The primary object of the Committee is to make so thorough and profound an investigation of the natural history of the plaice and other trawl-caught fishes that it may be possible to apply such knowledge for the increase of the food supply dependent upon the trawling industry. The scope of the Committee’s work is therefore sufficiently great and the responsibility no less serious. i I trust that the present report upon the natural history of the plaice may be taken as evidence that the Committee have realised the magnitude of their task, and that they have confidence, with a continuance of the present means at their disposal, in their ability to bring it to a successful conclusion. In the collation and revision of the data dealt with in the present report I have been greatly assisted by my colleagues at the Lowestoft Laboratory, especially by Mr. J. O. Borley and Mr. R. A. Todd. A. Experiments with marked plaice 1. Introduction Up to the end of December, 1903, successful experiments with marked plaice had been " carried out by the investigators of Sweden, Denmark, Germany, Holland and England. Parti- culars have been received concerning the liberation of 6,239 marked plaice, of which 890 had been caught again by the fishermen up to June 30, 1904. The details for each country are given in the acompanying table. 1* APPENDIX H: GARSTANG COQUE Table I, showing the number of plaice marked and liberated to the end of 1903, and recovered to the end of June 1904 Country Marked Recovered Annual to Dee. 31st, 03 | to June 30, 04 Percentage SEEN. EN PERS 1178 101 8 "Jo Denmark ace eee 1220 387 29 Fo GERMANY ANS MEME 1919 157 8 °/0 Holland se 459 12 3% Hine andere en ar ee 1463 | 286 | 17° LOIS RER EN eee ee 6239 : 948 | 14 0/51 The object of these experiments was three-fold, viz., first, to throw light upon the natural migrations of the plaice in different regions and at different seasons of the year, secondly, to contribute to our knowledge of the rate of growth of this species, and, thirdly, to yield information concerning the intensity of fishing under modern conditions. The results attained under the first of these heads are clear and convincing, and will be dealt with in further detail below. Differences in the method of marking adopted in the different countries do not appreciably affect the conclusions which are to be drawn upon this point. But quantitative problems like the rate of growth and the intensity of fishing depend for their solution upon the suitability of the methods employed. A glance at the preceding table shows that considerable differences with regard to the percentage of fish recovered have been mani- fested in the course of the experiments. It is therefore desirable at the outset to make a brief statement as to the methods pursued in different countries. In Sweden, Denmark, Holland and England Petersen’s method of marking’ flat-fish has been adopted. This consists in passing a small piece of silver wire through the dorsal edge of the body, about half-way down, below the base of the dorsal fin, and in attaching a couple of small discs to the wire, one on the upper or eyed side, and one on the lower or blind side. The lower disc is invariably made of bone. In the Danish experiments the upper disc also consists of a bone button bearing a distinctive number stamped upon it. As, however, the number is liable under these circumstances to be obliterated after a few months by wear and decay of the bone, Dr. Petersen has added an additional brass disc bearing the same number and superimposed upon the upper bone button. Numbered bone buttons were also used in the earlier Swedish, Dutch and English experiments, but were soon replaced entirely by a special brass disc of concave form, which has proved to be a very satisfactory substitute. Little injury is caused to the fish by the use of labels upon Petersen’s model, and the rate of growth does not appear to be much retarded by the employ- ment of this method, although excessive looseness or excessive tightness of the wire gccasionally leads to abrasions of the skin. There is only one recorded instance of a marked plaice having already died before it was recaptured by a fisherman, viz., Da 220, which was caught near the Vyl Lightship four days after it was liberated in April, 1903. This instance, however, is of importance in showing that the percentage of marked fish recovered by the fishermen can only claim to be a minimum measure of the intensity of fishing, especially as regards the ı This is the percentage of fish recovered within twelve months after date of liberation, and is not expected to agree with the percentage calculated from the figures given (see Table III). a A Se es APPENDIX H: GARSTANG smaller fishes. There is other evidence also that the labels tend to drop off the smaller fishes after a certain lapse of time. Experiments have been made by the German investigators with the object of discovering another form of label which might expedite the process of marking at sea, which, by Petersen’s - method, naturally requires a considerable amount of time when large numbers of fishes are being dealt with. Im the German experiments two forms of label have been tried in succession, namely (1) an aluminium ring piercing the flesh shortly in front of the tail, and (2) a sharp vulcanite stud stabbed through the fish in the same region. Interesting as these experiments have been, I gather from Dr. Heincke! that he is inclined in part to attribute the low percentage of recoveries in the case of the German experiments to the relative unsuitability of the labels employed, especially in the case of the smaller fish. The slower rate of growth of the German marked fishes tends to support this opinion. For the present, therefore, it seems desirable to exclude the smaller German fish from any consideration of the problems of rate of growth and intensity of fishing as shown by the marking experiments. The still lower percentage of recoveries in the case of the Dutch experiments cannot be attributed to the method of marking, since the same methods were employed as in the case of the Danish and English experiments. In this case the paucity of the recaptures appears attributable to two causes, firstly, to the high percentage of very small plaice marked in several of the Dutch experiments, and, secondly, but chiefly, to the vitality of the fishes dealt with having been impaired by the great weight of the total catch of fish on those occasions. The highest percentage of plaice recovered has been attained by the Danish experiments, which have been carried out by means of a small trawl (50 ft. otter) usually dragged for a short — time only (half-hour to two hours). Under these circumstances, the plaice in the Danish ex- periments would be received on deck in a healthy condition. In the English experiments, although the trawl used was the full-size commercial trawl (either beam or otter), it was kept down as a rule for a short time, about one hour, the total catch of fish on those occasions rarely exceeding 60 kilos. The Dutch experiments were made usually after two-hour-hauls of the large otter trawl, and the weight of the total catch rarely fell below 100 kilos., exceeding 200 kilos. in several cases, and attaining nearly 400 kilos. in experiment no. 17. In view of these facts it appears fairly certain that the low percentage of Dutch recoveries is attributable in the main to injuries sustained by the fish in the act of hauling the trawl, which lead ultimately to a high mortality. After these preliminary remarks I may proceed to describe the general results of the marking experiments. The latter fall naturally into two groups, according to the season of the year in which they were carried out. All the Danish experiments and some of the Swedish, German and English experiments were carried out in the spring, from March to May. These show the summer migrations of the fish. The remaining experiments were carried out in the’ second half of the year, from July to December. These throw light chiefly upon the winter movements. Two charts (Pl. I and II) have therefore been prepared on which the general features of the plaice migrations observed have been graphically represented. ! Rapports et proces-vorbaux des Réunions. Vol. II. Report of the meeting of Committee B at Amster- dam. p.34. APPENDIX H: GARSTANG == 16) == 2. Summer migrations A few words as to the method by which the migration charts have been constructed will probably lead to an easier comprehension of the results there displayed. Particulars have been forwarded to me by the members of the Committee as to the exact locality of capture of each fish as reported by the fishermen. For each experiment the positions of recapture were first separately indicated upon large charts, the date of recapture and size of the fish being repre- sented at each spot. In the case of large experiments, e.g., Da 2, 3 and 5, it was then possible to draw a contour line around all the positions of recapture in each successive month. "The successive positions of these monthly contour-lines give a correct representation of the directions in which the fish gradually spread themselves as the season advanced. In other cases the general direction of migration could be shown by drawing a contour line representing the entire range of migration during the summer period, e.g., E 4 and 6, Adjacent experiments, the results of which were substantially the same, have been amalgamated in the reduced charts now published. In other cases the number of recoveries did not permit of the adoption of the contour method. In these cases (e.g., Da 15, D 13) the positions of liberation have been indicated on the chart, as well as the separate positions of recapture, the latter being connected with the point of liberation by a line. It is of course impossible to state how far the lines drawn upon the chart approximate to the real lines along which the fish migrated. The number of the experiments carried out by the Danish investigators in the Skager Rak, in conjunction with the restricted area of the experiments, has rendered it impossible without causing confusion to distinguish the exact range of the inshore migrations corresponding to the different experi- ments. On this account a single contour line has been drawn around the positions of recapture during April, May and June in the case of the Danish experiments 7, 8, 9, 10, 16 and 17. The positions of recapture after the month of June have been separately indicated for each experiment, and connected with the point of liberation in each case. With this explanation I hope that the charts will be easily intelligible. ; The Swedish experiments in the Kattegat, strietly speaking, do not represent the normal migrations in that area, since the fish were caught west of Skagen aud transplanted to the three positions around the island of Orust indicated upon the chart. The number of recoveries is too small to permit of any generalisations. : In the Skager Rak the plaice from the Danish experiments were recovered during May and June within the coastal waters with one exception. The general tendency of migration during this period was westwards and southwards. Several of the fish from experiments 9 and 10 (6 on the chart) wandered as far south as the entrance to the Lim Fjord. One was caught in June near the northern boundary of the Horn Reef Grounds. This fish, as in many similar cases, was one of the largest recovered from this experiment, the length on liberation haying been 33 cm. During the later summer months the fish from these experiments were mostly recovered in the offshore waters, and showed a general tendency toward the Holmen Grounds. An eastward tendency was shown during the spring months by the fish marked offshore in experiments 11 and 6 (2 and 4 on the chart) and one small fish from experiment 7 (5 on the chart) was recovered in November in the Aalbek Bight east of Skagen. West of Jutland the general tendency was directly westwards or north-westwards towards = — APPENDIX H: GARSTANG the Jutland and Holmen Outer Grounds, the larger fish showing the northward tendency in a pronounced manner (cf. experiment Da 4, —9 on the chart). i Experiments Da 5 and 2+3 (10 and 11 on the chart), north and south of the Horn Reef respectively, showed the same general tendency of migrations in a north-westerly direction ‘towards the Horn Reef Outer Grounds, which were reached in some cases during July and by the preponderance of recaptures in August and September. Two non-migrant fish were recovered in Graa Dyb in November, but the few remaining captures during the winter months (December and January) were taken offshore in a more southerly latitude than was shown by the great majority of recaptures during the autumn months. The fish in question were of small size (21 to 23 em.), and it is possible that they had migrated directly westwards from the point of liberation; but in view of the experiments shown upon the winter chart, it appears more probable that they had first migrated in a north-westerly direction and had then partaken of the general southward tendency during the winter months as shown by the German experiments to be described below. The German experiments in the Heligoland Bight showed a northward tendency on the Sylt Grounds in the spring months (experiment 13, —12 on the chart), but a distinct north- westward tendency during the later summer and autumn months. The fish marked off Heligoland were recovered during May and June in the neighbourhood of the island, but during July to September in two groups, an inshore group in the neighbourhood of the island and an offshore group extending from Clay Deep to the Southern Mud Bank. It is conceivable that the fish recovered in the offshore area had first migrated northwards in accordance with the tendency shown by experiment D 13 (12 on the chart), and then westwards from the Horn Reef Grounds; but it is more probable that the lack of continuity between the inshore and offshore areas of recapture is due to the small amount of fishing which takes place on the intervening ground, which is unsuitable for commercial trawling (Oyster Ground). As is shown by the results of the international trawling experiments, a distinct lowering of the average size takes place over this area in the autumn months, coupled with a marked increase in the abundance of plaice, which are obviously migrating at this season towards the offshore grounds. In October and November the recaptures from the German experiments were limited to the area south-east of the Dogger Bank. The winter recoveries are limited to three fish recovered during March, 1904, two in the neighbourhood of Norderney, clearly non-migrant fish, and another west of the Dutch coast, off Scheveningen. Whether the latter fish (28 cm.) had migrated westwards along the inshore grounds or had migrated southwards in the winter from the Clay Deep region must remain for the present uncertain. . The English experiments in the southern part of the Flemish Bight (14 and 15 on the chart) showed an exclusively northward tendency, the fish being recovered during the summer months on the Brown Ridges and Leman Shoals. From Winterton Shoal (experiment 16 on the chart), the fish were found westwards and northwards within a limited area during the summer months; but one fish (31 cm.) was recaught on the Shoal of the Dogger Bank in the following February. In the Leman Ground experiment (17 on the chart) the fish remained in the same region during the whole of the summer, some tending slowly in a northerly direction, others, especially the smaller fish, distributing themselves among the Leman Shoals west of the Swarte Bank. Two outlying fish were reported during June and July from grounds North APPENDIX: H GARSTANG ange West of the Dogger Bank and off Terschelling respectively, but the significance of these reco- veries must for the present remain doubtful. In the following winter period, January to March, the fish were all recovered off the east coast of England, north-west of the original point of liberation, the largest fish (33 cm.) reaching the trawling grounds off the mouth of the Tees in January. This north-westward tendency of the plaice off the English coast north of the Wash in winter time is shown by other special experiments shown in the winter chart. 3. Winter migrations In the Kattegat experiments were made by the Swedish investigators in July and September, 1903, the fish being captured near Anholt and transported to the Swedish coast near Göteborg: in each case. In the first experiment (no. 2 on the chart) the bulk of the fish seemed to have migrated during the autumn months directly across to the Danish coasts, four fish having been recaptured on Hertha’s Flak during the last three months of the year, and two others during the same period near the original place of liberation. From January to May of the following year most of the fish were recovered in the neighbourhood of Laesö, one near Anholt, and three along the Swedish coast south of Varberg. In the second Swedish experiment carried out in September (no I on the chart) none of the fish were recovered on the Danish coast during the remainder of the year, but were distri- buted along the Swedish coast south of Göteborg. In the following spring, January to April, fish continued to be recovered in the same area, but a considerable number were also taken on the Danish fishing grounds near Skagen. Possibly the period of migrations of plaice from the Swedish to the Danish coast is determined to a large extent by the hydrographic or weather conditions prevailing from time to time. In the North Sea experiments were made by the German investigators on the Great Fisher Bank and the Northern Mud Bank during September and October, 1902 and 1903 (nos. 17 to 21 on the chart). The recaptures in the winter months immediately following all show a pronounced southward tendency on the part of the fish in this region at this season of the year. The same feature is shown by the Dutch experiment 18 (no. 23 on the chart) on the Tail of the Dogger Bank. Plaice marked at this spot in July at first showed a northward tendency in their migrations (VII to IX), which was reversed, however, with the onset of winter, when the fish joined in the general southward migration. The German experiment no. ~ 4 (22 on the chart) and the English experiment 26 (26 on the chart), which were carried out in October, 1902 and September, 1903 respectively, show, it is true, a resultant eastward movement on the part of the fishes recaptured in the following November. It is, however, exceedingly probable that these fish began their migrations in a northward direction, which was subsequently reversed into a south-eastward movement. The German and Dutch experiments on the Horn Reef Grounds during July and November (3, 4 and 5 on the chart) are chiefiy of interest in showing the inshore tendency of the fishes in this region during the spring months. Owing to the absence of recaptures in the winter months, the actual direction of travel cannot be certainly indicated. The experiments in ques- tion, together with the German experiment 13 (12 on the summer chart) render it probable, however, that the great abundance of plaice on the Horn Reef Grounds during the spring months is largely due to return migrations of plaice from the offshore grounds. i ee Oe APPENDIX H: GARSTANG On the Ameland Gronnd experiments were carried out by the English investigators in December, 1902 (no 9 on the chart). In the three following months the fish were recaptured along the whole length of the Dutch and Belgian coasts from Ameland to the Hinder. In April and May they were recaptured in two groups, one near the original point of liberation and another in a distinct band between Yarmouth and Helder corresponding with the fishing srounds known as the Texel Ground, the Brown Bank and the regions near Smith’s Knoll. In July to September the separation between these two areas of recapture became still more evident, the one group being distributed over the Terschelling off-grounds as far northwards as Clay Deep, and the other in the region between the Brown Ridges and the Leman Shoals. The size of the fish on liberation recaptured in the Terschelling area was distinctly smaller than that of the fishes found off the English coast. The explanation of the facts is fairly clear. In January to March the largest fishes travelled the greatest distance from the point of liberation, so that the general size of the migratory fish in the southern half of the area was higher than that in the northern region. The English experiment no. 4 (14 on the summer chart) has already shown that the tendency of the plaice in this area during the spring time is in a northerly direction. Thus the plaice recovered between the Brown Ridges and the Leman Shoals in July to September are to be regarded in part as fish which had reached a more southern point during the preceding winter and gradually congregated in the north-western part of the area. Doubtless a considerable number of the fish had also migrated directly offshore during the spring months from the Egmond Grounds and the Broad Fourteens. On the other hand the small fish recaptured on the Terschelling Grounds during July to September are to be regarded rather as fish which had merely sanded themselves in the same region during the previous winter, to begin their offshore migrations in the fol- lowme spring. Experiments carried out on the Leman Ground (no. 11 on the chart) showed the same southward tendency of the majority of the plaice during the winter months, although a certain number migrated short distances to the northwards. The Leman ground is, however, on the line of division between two different natural areas, for along the English coast from the Wash to Berwick a northward tendency of plaice in winter clearly preponderates (cf. experiments 12 and 16 on the chart). Speaking generally we may thus say that in the eastern and southern parts of the North Sea the plaice evince a distinct southward tendency in the winter months, which becomes reversed into a northward offshore tendency during the spring and summer. On the other hand the tendency on the western side of the North Sea, north of latitude 53°, is distinctly northward in the winter time. 4. Intensity of fishing Owing to the fact that many of the plaice liberated in the course of the marking experi- ments were scarcely of marketable size, and in consequence of the fact that the smaller plaice are more liable to be injured by the process of marking than are the larger fishes, it is desirable to exclude the smaller fishes from consideration in any use that may be made of the marking experiments to determine the intensity of fishing under modern conditions. The limit of 25 cm. has been adopted in the present case, and the subjoined table shows the percentage Appendix H 2 APPENDIX H: GARSTANG SN ye of marked plaice of 25 cm. and upwards recovered by the fishermen within one year from the date of liberation. The coastal grounds are first treated from east to west and then the more Table II, showing the Number and Percentage of marked Plaice of 25 cm. length and upwards recovered by the fishermen within one year of the date of liberation Grounds where the Fishes Nationality and Number Date Dunes Number : 3 ei 3 of Plaice Percentage were liberated of the Experiments + of liberation liberated | Tecovered Katbegat.......,...::...0. Ss 2, 3 VII, IX. 03 269 50+ 1854 Skar era Da 6—14 IV. 03 A1 93 56:0 Westcoast of Jutland ...... Da 1—5, 15—17 IV. 03 | 578 249 41:8 German Bight RES D 13—15 III, V. 03 | 361 | 71 19:7 Dutch eoasts. E 1—3, 24, 25, 2729 |X, XII. 02, 03| ‘188 — 43 22:8 Deep Water, southern part of INorthuSea Goan sabecus E 4, 6, 7 II, V. 03 75 20 26°7 Leman Ground;........... E 5, 8, 9 V. 03 149 26 175 — NIS IT E 30, 31 XI. 03 105 22 21:0 From Wash to Flamborough E 10, 23 NI, VIII. 03 19 1 53 Aisiner Bank 5.2.69 esse D 3—5 (Aluminium rings) X. 02 51 2 4:0 — ER UNE D 19—24 (Vulcanite studs) IX. 03 124 9+ (eRe Doe cong Banks ON H 18—20 VII. 03 109 13 13:9 Horn Reef Outer Ground... E 26 IX. 03 26 6 230 central grounds of the North Sea. The highest percentage of recapture is reached in the Skager Rak and on the fishing grounds west of Jutland, where the percentage reached 56 per cent. and 42 per cent. respectively. Between the English and Dutch coasts the percentages shown are 23 per cent. for the winter experiments and 27 per cent. for the spring experiments. In the German Bight between Heligoland and the Dogger Bank the percentage yielded by the German experiments attains 20 per cent. Off the east coast of England, from the Wash to Flamboro’, the percentage recovered was very low, viz., 5 per cent., — a feature which is probably attributable partly to the fact that the inshore grounds within the territorial limit are closed against trawling', and also to the fact that a large area of rough untrawlable ground is present in this region, which has to be crossed by the fish before they reach the more frequented trawling grounds. It is perhaps significant in this connection that none of the fish belonging to this group of experiments, irrespective of size, were recovered during the first six months after liberation, — all having been caught in the second half-year. The German experiments on the Great Fisher Bank show a percentage of four and seven respect- ively. The Dutch experiments on the Dogger Bank show a percentage of 14. It seems from these experiments that the intensity of fishing is much greater on the coastal grounds than on the offshore areas, although the experiments need to be repeated for several years before the figures can be regarded as sufficient for reliable conclusions. 1 These conditions also prevail along the Northumberland coast. Only one out of the 55 recaptures from Experiment E 11 to 23 was effected by a trawler, — the rest by means of lines and salmon nets. eh eee APPENDIX H: GARSTANG distinguishing different sizes of fish, and the two half yearly periods Table III, showing the annual Percentage of Marked Plaice recaught in various groups of experiments, Liberated Recaught Experiments ae Length when recaught Recaught Place of liberation, Date ete. = ee ls 15—19°9 | 20249 |25 cm. and | Within In 7 to 42 = © LS ES 2 Total 0/0 cm. cm. longer 6 months months Shei Ses 3 à a El am DS ee les Kes NEN ER N 3 3 3 3 3 CA Zi A a LA Bee... 686 15 | 22 la ww. Ip By 1) 1] 03 4 Transplanted from Skagen: IV. 1902.) | mee and 3, Kattegat................ 492 223/269 || 82--| 167 + 32) 143) 501185 | 43) 87 (394) 79 + _ (Transplanted from Anholt: VII. IX. 1903.) Gr lady Skager Rak 5... 7. 121| 43) 37| 41] 39 |323 5 | 11°6/11| 27-0) 23) 56-0 | 38) 314 | 1 0:8 D (IV. 1903.) Da came Ce 17, Westcoast of Jutland |10991144377578|322 | 29:3 8| 5472| 19:1/242) 41-8 1308| 270 [14 12 (IV. 1903. D 1, 2, 6—12, 18, German Bight.... | 67%) 9/167501| 22 2:2 3] 0:6) 19} 28 | 10 15 112 1:8 q IX XI, 1902. Aluminium rings.) D 13—15, German Bight ..... ..... 922) 1215491361 118 | 12°8 47| 8:5) 71197 1108) 11:7 |10 1:9 (IV. 4903, Aluminium rings.) D 3, 4, 5, Fisher Bank............. 51 51 | 2 4:0 2 AS ON EE BHO it 2:0 1903. Aluminium rings.) i —24, Fisher Bank......... bese 126 2124| 9+| 7-154 9 72 | 5 40 | 44) 32 + . 1903. Vulcanite studs.) —17, Brown Bank and Ameland. | 116 39} 59| 18| 0 — 1.1903, Aluminium rings.) Heheolande ea. ANR 7 717) 3| 0 es ‚1903. Barkasse, Vulcanite studs.) ce I 17, Ameland—Horn Reef | 35011831121) 46 | 3 0:8 1} 08 2) 4:35) 1) 0:28 | 2 0.57 A 03 ae ae Dogger Bank ....... 26109 109 13 | 11-9 13 11:9, 5 ara 8) 15 0-35 3, 25, 27— 29, Dutch Coast. | 410) 241174212 90 | 22-0 2| 8345| 25:9) 43] 20:3 | 45) 110 145 |110 EG et Water, Flemish Bight || 121) 6| 40 75 26 [215 |11167) 5] 12:5| 201267 | 18 149 |8 | 66 E 5, 8, 2 Leman Ground........... 229) 15] 65149 | 41 | 17-9 |1| 67/14) 21-5) 261175 | 36) 157 | 5 | 22 (Spring. a an Ground ee 111 6105| 22 |19:8 el, Alassr 5) 45 inter, 23, Wash to Flamborough ..... 93 9 65 19| 5 5'4 4 61) 1| 53 5 54 . VIII. 1903.) 2, Northumberland Coast .... | 4701021310 58) 55 | 11:7 4| 3:9/33) 10-6] 181310 | 7) 15 |48 | 10:2 1X. 1903. Mr. Meek.) Horn Reef, outer Ground ..... 29 3) 26 7 1241 11333) 6230 | 2) 69 |5 |172 An examination of the Danish and German records of marked fish shows that on the Eastern Grounds the greater intensity of fishing in the inshore waters is attributable to the great fleets of sailing vessels (Danish seine-cutters, and German sailing trawlers) which fish … of the Danish and German coasts. Out of 302 plaice recaptured from the Danish experiments … nos. 2, 3 and 5 (south and north of the Horn Reef) between April, 1903 and April, 1904 inclusive, 233 were taken by Danish cutters, and only 69 by steam trawlers (54 English, 14 … German, and | Belgian), i. e., 77 per cent. by Danish cutters and 23 per cent. by steam trawlers. Again, out of 108 plaice recaptured from the German experiments nos. 14 and 15 9% APPENDIX H: GARSTANG — 12 — (near Helgoland) from May, 1903 to May, 1904 inclusive, 97 were taken by sailing trawlers, and only 11 by steam trawlers, i. e., 90 per cent. by the former, and 10 per cent. by the latter class of vessel. The excess of captures by sailing boats would be seen to be still greater if we were to omit from consideration those fishes which were recaptured outside the 20-meter contour line. A similar result is shown by the English records of marked fish recovered in the southern part of the North Sea, between the coasts of England and Holland. In interpreting these figures some allowance must be made for the greater facility with which marked plaice can be detected on small boats than on steam trawlers; but, whatever allowance be made under this head, it is fairly clear that the sailing boats capture at least as many small plaice as do the steam trawlers. Fuller details concerning the percentage of recoveries for all sizes of the fishes marked are given in the accompanying table (Table III, p. 11). 5. Rate of growth So much diversity has been revealed by the international experiments in regard to the rate of growth of plaice, not only of different size, but also on different grounds, that the full treatment of this problem must be reserved for the definitive report of the Committee. A large amount of additional information based on a study of otoliths and of frequency curves will then be available in addition to the evidence of the marking experiments. In the English and Dutch areas, adjacent grounds show very marked differences in regard to the rate of growth, and, as the fish migrate successively over the whole of this area, the monthly averages of growth which have been calculated from the existing data show con- siderable fluctuations. For plaice between 20 and 30 cm. in length the annual rate of growth appears to be about 7 cm. On the eastern grounds of the North Sea the Danish experiments provide abundant material for showing the normal rate of growth for marked fish of this size. The year’s growth on the Horn Reef Grounds lies between 4 and 5 cm., without making any allowance for the normal shrinkage of the fish after recapture and death. In the Skager Rak the Danish experiments show a higher rate of growth than that on the Horn Reef Grounds, the average growth appearing to be about 7 to 8 cm. in one year. B. Transplantation experiments In the spring of the present year (1904) the Danish and English investigators, taking advantage of the differences in rate of growth already revealed, carried out special experiments to determine the effect of transplanting a large number of small plaice from the coastal grounds to the offshore waters. Raat APPENDIX H: GARSTANG Among other experiments the Danish investigators transplanted 600 plaice from the Horn Reef South Grounds to the Skager Rak (57°12'N. to 57°21'N.; 8°45'E. to 9°17'E.) on March 1, 1904. All the specimens had a length of from 19 to 32 cm. at the time of libe- ration. The rate of growth of the transplanted fish corresponds fairly closely with that of the fish normally found in the waters of the Skager Rak. The average increase of four specimens recovered in July was 48 cm. This growth is at least twice as great as the average growth of plaice on the Horn Reef Grounds. In April and May the English investigators transplanted about 1,600 small plaice to the Dogger Bank from the English, Dutch and Danish nursery grounds. During the voyage from the Dutch coast, however, heavy weather was experienced, and most of the fish in the trans- plantation tanks were so injured by the movement of the ship that they were all moribund at the time of liberation. The other experiments were successful. On the 13% April 441 plaice were transplanted from Bridlington Bay to the Shoal of the Dogger Bank, and on the 25th and 26h May 706 plaice were transplanted from the Horn Reef Grounds, and of these 362 were liberated on the Tail of the Dogger, and 344 upon the South Shoal. The fish liberated on the Tail of the Dogger have grown at a slower rate than those set free on the South Shoal, but the number of recoveries is too small to show the average increase from month to month. Two fish recaptured in October showed an average growth of 8:2 em., which represents the growth on this ground in four and a half months. The results with regard to the remaining experiments are shown in the accompanying table, in which the average growth is shown from month to month for each experiment. The average growth of plaice upon the Horn Reef Grounds, based upon the Danish marking experiments, is also shown in the same table. Table IV, comparing the Rate of Growth of Marked Plaice after transplantation to the Doggerbank, with the Normal Rate of Growth on the Horn Reef Grounds Caught Horn Reef |Caught in Bridlington Bay, | Caught Horn Reef Grounds, Grounds and liberated |liberated on Dogger Shoal:| liberated on Dogger Shoal: Month onthe same: April 1903 April 13, 1904 May 26, 1904 of recapture ra ae avalos, | Eu: ae a38|8 8|® ¢ ei dem le zZ Eee EN SE “Siz 8|2 8 ARE SSS Wartung 14 14°) 23:9))| 0:2 Witenes De 10 10 | 245 | 04 Ve AE 28 | 266) 0:6 5 4 | 255 leg 1 | 1 202 | 0:0 Ve A u BED 1-2 3 2 | wala | BO) | MOT ee RSA Lau Wan. a2 ee Et later |: 37 ONU ACTE Bh Berl A NE 1 | 190| 90 | Rp: are: 2 41) Bsxo |) ON || all Tal ol eg ts NT 2317| 11-4 en Bao on ME CC az HS 7 217 115 SET a 3 | 233) 33 | | | I ca sah B) i) Bee BH) | | | | | INN. 2 8 | 2383| 45 | | APPENDIX H: GARSTANG oye The growth ‘of the Bridlington Bay fish is directly comparable with that of the Danish fish on the Horn Reef Grounds, since the fish in both series of experiments were marked and liberated during April. Six months’ growth had been attained in each case by October, when the average increase of the Danish fish was only 2°0 cm., whereas the average growth of the transplanted fish was 11°9 cm. In November the average growth of the Danish fish was only 3:0 em., whereas that of the transplanted fish was 13°7 cm. The growth of the transplanted fish on the Shoal of the Dogger is therefore between 4 and 5 times as great as on the Horn Reef coastal grounds. In six months they had already exceeded the normal growth of two years on the coastal grounds. The plaice transplanted to the Shoal of the Dogger from the Horn Reef Grounds had six weeks’ less growth at the beginning of the period than those transplanted from Bridlington Cm 14 | | I | XI AIT I I I W Fig, 1. Diagram, illustrating the Rate of Growth of Marked Plaice (1) under normal conditions on the Horn Reef Grounds and in Venö Bugt (Lim Fjord), and (2) after transplantation to Thisted Bredning (Lim Fjord) and the Doggerbank b Bay. In spite of this the average growth of seven fish by October was 11°4 cm., and of "three fish in November 11°5 cm. If allowance be made of about 1°5 cm. for the growth from April 13th to the end of May, it will be seen that the growth of the Horn Reef fish on the Shoal of the Dogger was approximately identical with that of the Bridlington Bay fish on the same grounds. In the accompanying diagram the normal growth on the Horn Reef Grounds and in Venö Bugt is shown by means of curves, and the growth after transplantation to the Dogger Bank and Thisted Bredning is also shown for the sake of comparison. As is well-known the Danish experiments with marked plaice in the Lim Fjord in 1895 showed a greater increase in the less populated waters of the Thisted Bredning than in those 5 = APPFNDIX H: GARSTANG of the outer Broad known as Veno Bugt. It is also well-known from Dr. Petersen’s classical account! that the Danish fishermen have been enabled to carry on a profitable industry for many years by transplanting small plaice from the outer waters of the Lim Fjord, or from the adjacent parts of the North Sea, to Thisted Bredning, taking advantage of the difference in rate of growth shown by Dr. Petersen’s experiments. It will be seen in the diagram that the difference between the normal growth of plaice on the Horn Reef Grounds and that of plaice transplanted to the Dogger Bank is still greater than in the case of the Lim Fjord experiments. The increased rate of growth on the Dogger Bank continues for a longer period of the year than in Thisted Bredning; and although the increase is not so great on the Dogger Bank in the summer months as in Thisted Bredning it greatly exceeds it during the later months of the year. The interest and importance of these results is unmistakable. On the one hand it is fairly clear that the plaice on the Horn Reef Grounds are unable to attain anything like their maximum potential growth. They are living practically in a half-starved condition, probably in consequence of great overcrewding (see below). On the other hand if these same fish can be transplanted on a commercial scale to the rich feeding grounds on the Dogger Bank where the population of plaice is very small, not only will the fishermen in the fall of the year be enabled to increase their catch of plaice on the latter ground, but the repetition of such transplantation work from year to year must contribute appreciably towards the re- stocking of this once prolific but now exhausted area. One condition necessary for the success of this work is that the fish should not be caught too soon after transplantation. It is for- tunate in this respect that the intensity of fishing on the Dogger Bank is very low during the summer months and reaches a maximum during the autumn and early spring. If plaice were transplanted there during the month of May, a sufficient number would survive in all probability untill the autumn months to appreciably increase the fishermen’s catches. In order to substantiate this statement it will be necessary to provide an approximate estimate of the population of plaice on the Dogger Bank. This point will be dealt with further on in connection with the results of the trawling experiments. C. The vitality of trawl-caught fish Reasons have already been advanced above in connection with the marking experiments in support of the view that the vitality of small trawl-caught fish is considerably impaired whenever the total weight of fish caught in any haul becomes considerable. The weight of the catch depends on the length of the haul and still more on the abundance of fish. The relative success of the English marking experiments upon plaice on the Ameland Ground, as 1 Petersen, Report of the Danish Biological Station, 1896. APPENDIX H: GARSTANG OU compared with those of the Dutch investigators in the same region, can only be attributed to the fact that the English experiments were carried out in the winter months, when the abun- dance of fish in this region is at its minimum, while the Dutch experiments were carried out in July, when the abundance of fish was practically at its maximum — since the nets employed, the duration of the hauls, and the methods of marking and liberation were practically identical in the two cases. A certain number of experiments especially directed to an investigation of this point have been carried out by the English steamer. On the Texel Ground in April the Huxley’ trawled for three hours, making a total catch of 84 kilos., chiefly plaice (P. platessa), dabs (P. limanda), grey gurnard (Zrigla gurnardus), and whiting (Gadus merlangus). The total number of plaice caught was 496. Upon hauling the trawl the fish appeared to be perfectly healthy. The sea was smooth; the sunshine was continuous but not hot, the air temperature being 13:6° C. After three hours’ exposure on deck the vitality of 215 of the plaice was determined by placing them in tanks of running water. The total mortality was 95 per cent. all the small fish below 20 em. being dead. The fish were left two hours in the tanks. In May on the Sylt Grounds the ’Huxley” again trawled for three hours, the total weight of the catch being 152 kilos. The plaice numbered 708. The plaice immediately after hauling appeared to be quite healthy, the vitality of 63 being tested in the tanks. After an hours exposure on deck 29 per cent. of the small plaice below 20 cm. were dead, and 16 per cent. of the total catch were dead, Next morning, after lying on deck for seven hours, all the plaice were dead, the vitality of 165 being tested as before. This was a night haul, the trawl being hauled at 1,30 a.m., and the deck was wet with showers of rain and some spray. Dr. Petersen accompanied the English naturalists on this occasion. Off Ymuiden in August another experiment was made, the trawl being kept down for four hours, resulting in a total catch of only 35 kilos. On hauling, a great mass of jelly- fish (Chrysaora, Cyanea) was found to be mixed with the fish. The total catch of plaice was 307, and, upon testing their vitality ten minutes after hauling, 77 per cent. were found to be dead. After twenty minutes’ exposure on deck 153 plaice were tested, and of these 151 were dead and the other two moribund. In this case the mortality of the fish was mainly attri- butable to the injuries caused by the stinging of the jelly-fish. Again, on the Broad Fourteens in August a seven-hour-haul of the trawl resulted in a total catch of 84 kilos. The plaice numbered 364; the other kinds present were soles (Solea vulgaris), gurnards, dabs, weavers (Trachinus), and thornback rays (Raja clavata). Immediately after hauling, the vitality of 73 plaice was tested and of these 21 (29 per cent.) were dead and 17 moribund. After exposure of one hour on deck 92 per cent. of the plaice were dead. The air temperature was 25.5° C.; sunshine was regular throughout, but weak, owing to hazy weather. Although these experiments are few in number, they tend to show that under the ordinary conditions of steam trawling few of the small plaice could be returned alive to the sea by the fishermen, since the men would rarely attend to this point immediately after the hauling of the trawl, even when the fish were received on board in a fairly healthy condition. lee APPENDIX H: GARSTANG D. Trawling experiments From the besinning of the international investigations considerable importance has been attached to the necessity of a thorough scientific exploration of the fishing grounds in the North Sea, in the course of which the various hauls of the trawl should be accurately analysed, the fishes counted, measured and weighed, and the general conditions of the experiments accurately noted. As mentioned in the Christiania programme the object of these experiments should be to provide material by which accurate charts might be prepared showing the distribution of the various species of fish in all stages of their growth. Although this ideal cannot be attained in a short space of time, I have made a preliminary attempt to generalise the results of the trawling experiments hitherto carried out, in order to show on the one hand what progress has beeu made towards the attainment of this object, and on the other hand to show which parts of the international area require increased attention from the steamers em- ployed. It should be understood at the outset, however, that although scientific experiments are able to throw light upon many of the same problems as those with which fishery statistics properly speaking, have to do, these experiments in no way replace the desirability of instit- uting a uniform organisation of fishery statistics, since a knowledge of the total quantity of fish landed at the ports is of primary importance for a correct understanding of the resources of the sea. On the other hand there are certain equally important matters upon which the most perfectly organised fishery statistics can never throw the same amount of light as properly conducted scientific experiments. Since the efficient regulation of the fisheries requires a proper understanding of the life histories of the fishes concerned, it is clearly of importance that investigations should be carried out in regions where the fishermen rarely fish as well as in regions which the fishermen most habitually frequent. Moreover, on the coastal fishing banks, where the intensity of fishing, so far as the plaice is concerned, attains its maximum, it is notorious that the fishermen do not invariably retain the whole of their catches. but frequently throw overboard a large proportion of the small or unmarketable fish. Fishery statistics and market measurements throw light on the quantities and sizes of the fishes landed, but scien- tifle experiments on the fishing grounds alone throw a clear light upon the actual proportions of large and small fish in different parts of the area under consideration. The steamers employed in the international trawling experiments are not all of the same build, but with the exception of the “Thor‘‘, employed by the Danish Commission, all the boats carry an otter trawl of practically identical size and form, as reported on a previous occasion!. The net in general use is a 90 foot otter trawl. The English steamer in addition carries a 43 foot beam trawl and a similar net has been employed by the Belgian Commission. Although the catching power of an otter trawl of this size slightly exceeds that of the beam trawl in question, the differance, so far as plaice is concerned, is very small, so that the results of the various experiments are fairly comparable one with another, with the exception of the smaller 50 foot otter trawl normally used by the Danish boat, and occasionally by the German steamer “Poseidon‘“. 1 Rapports et Proces-Verbaux des Réunions, vol II. (Amsterdam meeting, Appendix B.) Appendix H 3 APPENDIX H: GARSTANG AS) Se The results of the trawling experiments carried out by the internatianal steamers have been analysed up to June 30th 1904, and charts are appended to the present report which show the preliminary results of these investigations ?. The methods by which these charts have been drawn up are as follows. In the first place the position of all the individual hauls was indicated upon special large-scale charts for each successive season of three months?. By the side of these positions the average size of the plaice caught, the catch of plaice above and below 30 cm. length for one hour’s fishing, and the percentage of plaice below 20 cm. length was indicated®. A study of the individual data thus charted showed that on the offshore grounds the conditions and results were very uniform over extensive areas. In most of the countries concerned fixed stations for the trawling ex- periments were not adopted at the commencement of the investigations, but a large number of the Scottish experiments have been carried out at fixed stations month by month. A comparison between the results of the Scottish investigations from April to June in 1903 and 1904, as carried out in the Moray Firth, revealed a very striking uniformity at most of the stations during the corresponding periods of the two years. In order, therefore, to compensate for the small number of steamers specially engaged in scientific work, it was found possible to dis-. regard the yearly differences in the preparation of the charts, the main object of which is to show the normal or average characters of the different fishing grounds irrespective of yearly finctuations. The great number of experiments carried out by the research steamers renders it impossible, however, to show the results attained at each haul of the trawl in a graphic manner upon small charts suitable for publication. The international area has, therefore, been divided into a large number of small areas, (see the chart Pl. III), the average characters of which it appears to be possible to determine by means of the scientific experiments within the five-year period specified in the Christiania programme. In sub-dividing the North Sea in this way, attention has been paid to the depth of the bottom, the distance from shore, and the character of the ground. Wherever possible also an attempt has been made to make the boundaries of the lines coincident with boundaries known to be observed by the commercial fishing vessels. Henking’s { chart of the German trawling grounds and Olsen’s Fishermen’s Chart of the North Sea have both been considered in this connection. And although I am well aware that any attempt to sub-divide the North Sea at the present time into statistical areas must be of a purely provisional character, I trust that the scheme adopted in the charts appended to the present report will be found acceptable as a working basis. 1 The eight large charts appended to the M.S. of the present report could not be reproduced in redu- ced size. As the report has a preliminary character and as it was desirable to publish it as soon as pos- sible, it was thought better to omit these charts and to replace them by: a. a chart of the North Sea with the 100 grounds into which the author has divided the North Sea (Pl. I); b. a table (Table V, p. 28) summarising the localities where the hauls with the trawl were made over the 100 grounds in the different seasons; and £ c. a table (Table VI, p. 32) summarising for each ground, in the different seasons, the number and the average size of the plaice caught, the catch per hour and the percentage of those smaller than 20 em. The General Secretary P. P.C. Hoek 2 See Table V, p. 28. 4 See Table VII, p. 34 4 Henking, Die Befischung der Nordsee durch deutsche Fisehdampfer. Mitteil. d. deutschen Seefischerei- Vereins. 1901. N 4 À : Le AE APPENDIX H: GARSTANG The experiments carried out in the areas defined are separately enumerated as far as pos- sible in Table VII at the end of this report, and the sizes, numbers, and abundance of fish are separately distinguished for each experiment. In the case of areas where a large amount of fishing has taken place in the same season of the year, it has been convenient to combine a certain number of the hauls. This applies particularly to the narrow waters of the Scottish Firths and to a certain number of the Danish and English experiments, In order to generalise the results for each area in a form suitable for graphic represen- tation upon the charts, the average characteristics of each area have been calculated numeri- cally from these data for each quarter of the vear. The results of these calculations are contained in a special table (VIII), and the average features previously mentioned have been entered upon the charts! for each area separately, and for each quarter of the year. Although it cannot be pretended that at the present stage of the investigations the figures so displayed are in all cases thoroughly representative of the areas in question, it is possible by reference to the figures in Table VII, which shows the range of fluctuations observed in each area, to determine the repre- sentative or other character of the average figures displayed upon the charts. The object of those charts at the present time is not to claim anything like a final character for the figures in question, but to demonstrate such results as are of a representative character and to show that the whole plan if carried out completely will in a short term of years yield a reliable represen- tation of the sizes and distribution of the different species of fish over the international area. Although the collation of the material forwarded by members of the Committee may perhaps be regarded as a sufficient task at the present stage of the investigations, I may perhaps with advantage draw attention to some of the chief results shown by the treatment of the data adopted in the present report. A comparison of the quarterly charts showing the statistical averages in the different areas reveals certain marked contrasts in regard to the size and abundance of the plaice at different seasons of the year. Taking the chart for Jan- uary to March as typical of the winter period and that for July to September as typical of the summer quarter, it will be seen at once that over the whole area between the Dogger Bank and the coastal grounds the average size of the plaice captured is markedly higher in the winter than in the summer quarter. Neglecting the most inshore grounds as necessarily subject to considerable fluctuations, according to the depths investigated, it is apparent that in the winter quarter the average size of plaice in the area under consideration rarely falls below 30 cm., the sizes from 32 to 40 cm. predominating over the greater part of the area. In the summer season, on the other hand, an average size of 30 cm. is very rarely manifested, the average for the most part varying from 24 to 29 em. Taking the group of grounds from the Horn Reef to the Dogger Bank a difference of 10 cm. is shown to prevail in each of the four grounds into which this region has been sub-divided. In the spring quarter (March to June) the average size approximates to that in the previous season, but in general is slightly smaller. In fact over all the grounds mentioned, between the Dogger Bank and the coastal grounds, the average size attains its maximum in the ,winter quarter and its minimum in the summer. On the Dogger Bank, on the other hand, although the northern half of this bank is not well represented in the figures 1 Replaced by Table VI in the present publication. Er APPENDIX H: GARSTANG Country, Gear and Haul... Catch per hour, above 30 cm. — — below 30 — % below 20 em. ......... Average size in cm Country, Gear and Haul... Catch per hour, above 30 cm. — = below 30 — °/o below 20 cm. .,....... Average size in cm, . Country, Gear and Haul... Catch per hour, above 30 cm, _ = below 30 — Jo below 20 cm. ......... Average size in cm, ...... Country, Gear and Haul... Catch per hour, above 30cm. — = below30— °/, below 20 cm Average size in cm ua 1 “3 © Fig. 5. ill! October—December Fig. 2—5. Sections from 55° 50’ N., 2° 0’ E. to the south point of Fans. The positions of trawling experiments made in 1903 are marked by unbroken lines, those of 1904 by broken lines. one. A. Western extremity of section; B. Tail of Dogger; €. Horn Reef, South Grounds; D. Eastern extremity of section In the reference numbers of the hauls, (A) indicates the 90-foot Otter trawl, (B (C) the 50-foot Otter trawl. ) the large Beam trawl, ant The figures derived from net (C) are underlined. Y NET nee ; 2 7 5 2 v 2 Es 5 à = = Sg © < a gz S w oS a a wu 5 © a 9 a 20 2 23 1 à 22 02 ° 9 1 1 05 à 2 76 0 o o 0 oo oo 7% 36 39 3 40 37 42 32 32 27 1 a ' 1 A wi ; re — ri b ns 7 Fig. January— March a m aie 4 È 5 = 2s 2 2], Une seers 8 = 5 58 a 2 € sSrE£Ss {m {m u vu {m © ö Susuow 2 12 GS oh 0 i 1 241571 0 0 03 1 1 1 0 0 al 1 2 2 5774 39 268) à 0 0 0 00 o 0 17 0086 6 8 5 37 36 34 30 35 > = 39 29133 25 25 25 1 1 N 0 1 1 eel heel \ N i u u ls \ ï ï 7 = r hi + T == = = > + == + = Ze L 7 ae an Fig. 3. ril—June, at ig. 3. April } # =-3 LATTES io y = 5 2 2 SIEGE is S| 5) 8 = 2 à h < = = = Seen =| m| $ m = Ss o x= x a ww uo ololo ao = x 7 3 6 1 349 280 CN 03 De 0 0 1 46 106 55 13 2 95 340) 25 03) 2600 Su 0 0 0 04 00 3 21 79 2 65 6 43 4 30 3028 3025 24 22 25 19) i) 19 à TR = à ‘ h ve ! a Fig. 4 July—September; 5 à 2 = a a gs 4 z 2 oo (a) o à 5 16 4 n 5 o 0 9 22 43 oo © 2 0 40 27 26 I mn i TT = iad NOR APPENDIX H: GARSTANG 2 re 8 a © a a 3 5 = = < 35 Country, Gear and Haul... < z 5 = & Sulz z= u = m = x une us Catch per hour, above 30 cm. 2 1 3 12 9 BG oo == = below 30 -— ! 1 \ 8 21 16 1449 2125 0 25 0 5 7 7 9 8377 Oo below 20 cm. ........... rh = = 5 Sn EB 2 fag Average size incm,.. . ,,. i \ 1 ; ut N \ à | Ht A = = T = Fig. 6. January— March o 2 ENDET à a8 ES RTE MERE CMP MOTS Country, Gear and Haul..... 5 EURE a ge AS SURES SS Se TONS Re w w w w ww w =x =x x wr =x w = = 04 Catch per hour, above 30cm. © O5 3 34 2 8 9 807 5 5 0 _ = below 30 — 0 ir Al 1 2 1 10 48 4180 1224408 149 161 1200 193 % Helowa20lcma..... re... 0 0 61 0 oo 3 o 4 01 2 26 92 % Average size in cm SAT LE) R 3% 27 u © 262925 26 22 soon 5 ' Fig. 7. April—June [= ie Een a 2 me + 22 Kio © a RR 2 ons 5 Sn a ger S373 a 5% a 8 Country, Gear and Haul..... 23 = Sos 3 @ ~€ ses ST Lees ow m Gow 3G o à vu 8 ü rx u = u = Catch per hour, above 30 cm. 10 0 Bat fe, 25; 7 0667 GATE ee) fil = = below 30 — 7h 2 15 B74 5 B 15 152312 79 B4 329 147 203 176 747 0/, below 20 cm. ........... 76 67 58 044 4 4 0610 10 15 m 10 1 «16 10 Average size in Cm ,,.... . 18 20 19 252630 30 29 Jo 3020 24 2395 24 23 22 22 Country, Gear and Haul,.... cl EE M NET NE = Bi eee, SMEeUR Ste es x a wa ote ete ee) ceca hun Catch per hour, above 30 cm. 4 Cie (kt Yo wh oS Fete Ae x) = = below 30 — 3 5 79933 9 20 205 zu so 171 NB % below 20 cm. ......... 36 o Ras sr daran ie Average size in cm,...... Ao 33 25 2739725 25 25 2% 2% 26 © «19 B = i= = C Fig. 9. October—December Fig. 6—9. Sections from Skegness to Kamp. The positions of the trawling experiments made in 1903 are marked by unbroken lines, those of 1904 by broken lines. A. Western extremity of section (53° 10° N., 0° 20° E.); B. Lemon Shoals; C. Brown Bank: D. Broad Fourteens; E. Eastern extromity of Section (52° 49 N., 4° 38° E.). for all the seasons, it would appear that the maximum size is attained in the summer season and the minimum in the winter or spring. The explanation of these facts is to be found in an examination of the figures showing the catch per hour of the large and small plaice. Outside the 20 metre line of depth the. small plaice are very sparsely represented during the winter season, but attain a very marked APPENDIX H: GARSTANG ROSES abundance during the July to September quarter. Taking again as an example the series of grounds from Horn Reef to the Dogger Bank, and proceeding from east to west, the cateh per hour of the small plaice during the IS quarter on the four grounds numbered 30 to 33 inclusive is 75, 2, 1, and 0:6 respectively. Even the frequency of the larger plaice is rela- tively insignificant, being 18, 3, 2, and 2 on the same four grounds in succession. "These figures contrast markedly with the abundance of the small plaice on the same grounds during the summer quarter, when the catch per hour of the plaice below 30 cm. is 906, 664, 63 and 32 on the same four grounds. Other instances of the same character are to be found in the charts, and the explanation clearly resides in the offshore migrations of the small plaice during the summer months, as previously displayed in the description of the experiments upon marked plaice. Another point which is clearly revealed by the figures upon the charts is the far greater abundance of small plaice, even in the same depth of water, in the eastern than in the western parts of the North Sea. If the areas numbered 55, 56, 67, 68 and 69 be taken into con- sideration it will be noticed that not only is the percentage of the smallest plaice higher off the Dutch coast than off the English coast, but the actual abundance of the plaice below 30 em. is still more strikingly in excess on the eastern than on the western grounds under con- sideration. These results are also in entire agreement with the results of the marking experi- ments previously described, from which it was apparent that the plaice on the Leman Ground and Leman Shoals (nos. 68 and 69 on the charts) were largely derived by emigration from the Dutch nursery grounds. > a‘ The figures in fact, so far as they are based on a sufficient number of hauls, are so consistent with one another and with the experimental data previously discussed, that there can be little doubt as to the great progress already made towards a correct representation of the conditions which prevail upon the more important North Sea trawling grounds. These results are limited to the data yielded by the scientific experiments during the year and a half prior to June, 1904. It may be reasonably expected that the gaps which exist on a certain number of the grounds will be filled up im the further course of the investigations. In order to facilitate a comparison between the average figures shown in the charts and the separate figures resulting from individual hauls of the trawl, two groups of sections have been provided upon which the characters selected have been separately displayed for each haul of the trawl and for each of the four quarters of the year. The sections follow two lines: (1) From the north part of the Dogger to the Horn Reef Grounds (Fig. 2—5, p. 20) and (2) From the English coast north of the Wash to the Dutch coast south of Helder (Fig. 6—9, p.21). These sections have the advantage of showing more graphically the relation which exists between the average size as well as the abundance of small plaice and depth and distance from shore. ; In any future edition of charts concerning the trawling investigations it would be. a exceedingly instructive to add also figures showing the average weight of fish per hour and the average weight per fish in each of the areas finally adopted. As, however, the material on this point, at present placed at my disposal, is limited to the weight determined during the Dutch and English experiments, it has not appeared profitable to place these figures | — BB as APPENDIX H: GARSTANG upon the charts on the present occasion. In the accompanying diagram, Fig. 10, however, the average weight per fish for hauls of plaice of different average size has been graphically re- presented. The figures at- tached to the individual points upon the black curve of observed data represent the number of hauls from which the averages have been derived. On the same diagram a curve? is shown which represents the nor- mal increase of weight for individual fishes of suc- cessively greater size. It will be observed that in uy the case of hauls in which 37 the average size of plaice 2 is less than 30 cm., the © average weight per fish corresponds very closely with the normal weight of individual fishes of corre- sponding size. But from Fig. 10. Diagram, showing the relation between Average Size (em.) of Plaice and Average Weight per fish (gr.) for the number of hauls of the trawl enumerated (Dutch and English observations). The curve without figures shows the normal relation for individual fishes. 145 —— —— a ae ee ee oe | | es ee 10) 125) 15 15 20 225 25 275 30 325 35 35 4045475) 50 30 cm. upwards the ave- rage weight of the fishes at each successive average size tends to exceed appreciably the normal weight of individual fishes at the same size. This phenomenen is easily intelligible owing to the fact that the weight of the fish increases pro- 1 A single average curve, generally applicable over the whole North Sea area, appears to be impossible of attainment in the case of the smaller fishes, which show marked local as well as seasonal differences. The curve here presented is the mathematical curye, varying as the cube of the length, and based on the assumed datum that plaice of 20 cm. length possess an average Weight of 90 grams. It corresponds with the observed data that have been published by Fulton (XIltk Report Scottish Fishery Board, pp. 141—205) and Meek (Report of the Northumberland Sea Fisheries Committee for the year 1903, pp. 40, 41) as regards the weight of the larger fishes, but somewhat exceeds the average weights given by these observers for plaice of less than 30 em. length. The difference is slight by comparison with Meek’s data (about 5 per cent.) but somewhat greater by comparison with Fulton’s (about 10 per cent.) The excess is greatest of all (about 20 per cent.) by comparison with Archer’s data concerning fish from the Sylt and Horn Reef Grounds (Report from the Select Committee of the House of Lords on the Sea Fisheries Bill, together with minutes of evidence. London 1904, p. 80). j These local deviations from the ideal curve in the case of small fishes present a problem for further in- vestigation. Although other factors are doubtless concerned, it appears probable that the explanation is to be sought chiefly in the hibernating habits of small plaice in winter, which are themselyes dependent on the minimum temperature and its duration. During this period the fish do not feed, and consequently lose weight. The hydrographic inyestigations of the last two years (ef. Bulletins for February 1903 and 1904) show that the winter temperatures are much lower on the Eastern grounds than elsewhere in the APPENDIX H: GARSTANG VOA portionately to the cube of the length, so that in mixed hauls of fishes on the offshore grounds where the average size represents the mean between the sizes of fish of very different weight, the average weight deviates increasingly from the individual curve. Increased data wil render the curve shown in the present diagram more smooth an reliable. As an example of the use to which this curve of average weight may be put, I may refer to the question previously raised as to the possibility of drawing an approximate estimate concerning the population of any given area. The statistics recently published by Dr. Redeke! concerning the catches of Dutch steam trawlers during the last year, include figures showing the weight of plaice per hour captured by the commercial fishermen on the different fishing grounds in the different months of the year (Table IX). Converting Dr. Redeke’s monthly averages to the quarterly averages adopted Table IX, showing the average weight of Plaice caught per hour on the Dogger Bank by Dutch steam trawlers, the average size on ground 53, the average weight per fish, and the resultant average number of Plaice per hour, together with the average number per hour based on the trawling experiments, for each quarter of the year item ane 1ER ce ou | Average size | Average weight) No. per hour No. per hour (em.) (gr.) (steam trawlers) | (research steamers) Re 15 | 35 510 3 9 DV VA ee NOR 3:6 | 35:5 | 560 6 8 VII—IX ......... 9:0 42 | 1000 9 1 KU ae dees 4-4 36 600 7 27 in the present report, we find that on the Dogger Bank the commercial catch of plaice per hour in the four quarters of the year was 1,5 kilos., 3.6 kilos., 9.0 kilos., and 4.4 kilos. respectively. Taking the average size of plaice on the south part of the Dogger Bank Table VIII, ground 53) as representative, we find the average size to be 35.0 cm., 35.5 em., 42.0 cm., and 36,0 cm. in the same quarters respectively. The average weight of fish corre- sponding to catches of these different average sizes may be found from the curve just described to be 510, 560, 1,000 and 600 gr. respectively. Dividing now the weight of plaice per hour, as shown by the Dutch statistics, by the corresponding average weights per fish, we can con- vert the catch per hour of fish from the weight units of the Dutch statistics into their ap- proximate equivalents in numbers caught for each quarter in succession. These numbers are 3, 6, 9,and 7 successively. The figures resulting from the scientific investigations are 9, 8, 17 and 27 respectively. Im each case the average catch per hour of the scientific steamers was apparently greater than that of the commercial trawlers, a result which is probably due to the fact that the Dogger Bank in the Dutch statistics included the entire area covered by grounds 46 and 52 as well as that numbered 53 on the present charts. The abundance of plaice on the northern part of the Dogger Bank can be seen on inspection to be distinctly 4 North Sea, the probable result of which is a greater loss of weight during the winter in this area than — elsewhere. This, combined with the slower rate of growth in summer, caused by over-population, may very probably explain the marked deficiencies in the average weight of fishes from this area, as shown by Archer's investigations. a 1 Vangstatistieken van Hollandsche Stoomtrawlers, 1903-4. Mededeelingen over Visscherij, XI, 1904. PEN PA ES TEA sa dre nes" NOR a APPENDIX H: GARSTANG less than on the south part of the Dogger Bank. It is interesting, however, to observe that both methods of enquiry lead to the conclusion that the abundance of plaice on the Dogger Bank is greater in the six last months of the year than in the first six. An otter trawl of 90 foot headline is usually considered to have aspread of about 60 feet? and thus covers about 1/40 of a square sea-mile or about 1/12th of a square kilometre per hour, ‘assuming the rate of towing to be 21/2 sea-miles per hour. Taking the average catch of plaice per hour on the Shoal of the Dogger at about 15 fish and the area of the south part of the Dogger at about eight thousand square kilometres, it thus appears that the whole of this area, if once trawled over, would yield N — 1,440,000 fish. We do not at present know either the total quantity of fish which is landed from the Dogger Bank for any portion of the year, or the total number of voyages which are made by fishing boats to the same region; but-if we assume that three or four millions of plaice represent the maximum total catch of plaice on the south part of the Dogger Bank, in the course of a year, we shall obtain a figure which, though exceedingly rough, will probably serve for our present purpose. The intensity of fishing on the Dogger Bank as shown by the Dutch marking experiments (See table 2) was 13.9 per cent. per annum, say 14 per cent. or !/tk of the total population. Taking Y/sth as probably more closely approximating to the real intensity we may conclude that the total population of plaice on the south part of the Dogger Bank is not more than 15 or 20 millions. The annual addition of 5 or 10 million plaice by transplantation to the Dogger Bank would thus appreciably increase the catches of the fishermen on that ground, and would enable the transplanted fish to attain marketable size and weight far sooner than on the in shore grounds where their growth is arrested by the great density of the population. E. The protection of undersized fish Though not expressly stated in the preceding sections of this report, it must be apparent that the investigations in progress have been devised very largely in order to throw light on the various biological factors necessary for the scientific treatment of the “undersized fish question’. Before it is possible to recommend a special size-limit, or even to admit the pro- tective value of sizelimits at all in the case of trawlers, it is necessary that we should be sufficiently informed upon the following points concerning the life-history of the plaice: (1) the localities where small plaice are particularly abundant; (2) the extent and position of the offshore areas supplied from these ‘nursery grounds; (3) the size, age and seasons at which the small fish migrate from the inshore grounds; (4) the rate of growth on the inshore grounds; (5) the rate of growth on the various offshore grounds. 1 cf Fulton, XXth Annual Report Sbottish Fishery Board, p. 118 et seq Appendix I 4 APPENDIX H: GARSTANG Mot The Migration Experiments and the Trawling Experiments together have already thrown a large amount of new light upon all these points; but they have shown that the deficiency of the rate of growth on the inshore grounds is much greater than was ever anticipated. It is impossible to avoid the provisional correlation of this difference with corresponding local differences in the abundance of plaice, — the rate of growth heing remarkably deficient where the population reaches its maximum, and being remarkably high on some of the more distant erounds where the population is relatively low. This being so, it is scarcely a self-evident proposition that the protection of small plaice on the inshore grounds would lead to an increase in the quantity (weight) of plaice available for capture on the offshore grounds. According to my interpretation of the present evidence, a material increase in the numbers of small plaice on the inshore grounds would still further retard their rate of growth; and it is a debateable question whether this result would be to the general advantage of the fisheries, since it is now generally admitted that the problem of the impoverishment of the trawling grounds is one which depends more on a decline in the size and weight of the fishes caught than on diminishing numbers. The method of otolith-examination has, however, afforded a reliable means ef determining the age of individual fishes. The analysis by this method of the sizes of plaice on different grounds will in a short time yield a great amount of new information as to the rate of erowth in specially selected areas. It will then be possible to determine the precise law or relation, which exists between density of population and rate of growth on grounds of uniform character. These questions have further to be considered in relation to the intensity of fishing. The results already attained suggest that this intensity is much greater inshore than offshore, in consequence of the operations of the sailing fleets, the influence of which requires simultaneous consideration with that of the steam trawlers. I hope by these remarks to show, on the one hand, that the investigations in progress have a direct bearing upon the special problem at the head of this section, and, on the other hand, that the time has not yet arrived for definite conclusions to be drawn. In the meantime the results of the transplantation experiments are exceedingly encouraging for those who believe that the supply of fish in the sea can be increased by a rational exploitation based upon scientific experiments. APPENDIX Hi: W. GARSTANG TABLES V-VIII | ral Remark: For each country except Scotland the method adopted in the measurement of fishes was by centimeters, the fractional parts being omitted; thus, 20.2 cm. and 20.9 cm. were both recorded as 20 cm. The Scottish fish were measured to the nearest centimeter; thus, 20.2 cm. was recorded as 20cm., but 20.9 Cm. as 21 cm. The Danish averages were furnished to me by Dr. Petersen. The true average sizes are therefore to be obtained from the calculated average sizes given in the tables by the addition of o.5 cm. in all except the Scottish and Danish data. In the charts (represented in this publication by Table VI) the calculated averages have first been amended by the addition of o.5 cm. when required, and then expressed by the nearest whole numbre. pee Be APPENDIX H: GARSTANG — 28 — 2 January — March April— June 4 = 1903 1904 1903 1904 < = - == = en Nationality Nationality Nationality Nationality > 2 and Number Datum and Number Datum and Number Datum and Number | M 2 of Hauls of Hauls of Hauls of Hauls Pr, Da ı ; 24. IL i 2 DONS 28. II, 19. III Boe mia 3 seals ae Da ı 22. IIL 4 Da 1 20, III » 2 8. » 5 D: 5 26. II—27. III > 25. » 6 5 a D at 29. 9 9 Me ae à » 3 5. 22. » aos Io Da 2 4.—23. III » 6 7-—21. » ae 4: II ac et ee ve Da 4 21.—22. IV 12 Dar 21. III Da 4 9-—19,. » oly I4 Da 4 6.— 10. Ill D O7 » Na eae 15 den ee } SE Da 4 17.—23 IV 16 EL NL WA | oe: ÿ 2 22. IV, 17. V 17 DE 5-—- 6, III D'une 16. » D MN 17. IV 18 en Da 2 25. II » @ 23. IV ï D I 17. III 9 | DE 3 25.11 = go 20 RE ne D I 4.V ir 23 D 5 14. III ae ae 26 » I 12. » 30% 27} » I T3. >. tre DT 18. » EI 30. V, ı. VI E 3° pos 18. III | Da 13 22.—20. Il Da 4 10.- 11. IV | D 31 » it 25. » D I 18. III | ne = en ve 2 32 » I 25. » Ear) 6. I- 28. III E 8 1.—2. VI E 33 ID 2 II.—I7. » 34 un 35 E 2 14. IT ns 36 Dr 14. » D) x 19. III Boat 29. V | 2 37 » I Ig. » D » I Ile 5) 38 | E I 5.1 : 3 40 D 2 9.—10. I E I 28. V Y i = AT Le Be NÉS E 42 ID} 22.—23. III | D DR 10. I. 25. II + 23 || D 8 6-130 | je 3 De D 44 » I 7. III De 23.— 24. III a oe » E I 13. » ES 2.1—26. III 45 | De DE En SR 2 Vi Den 8. III n al z = E 47 AR BUS 31.1, 15. III H 48 ET 6. III » I 15. III E it 26. V » I \ awl over the 100 grounds (Nr. 1—100) of the ehart Pl. III 4 = Holland, S — Sweden and Sc = Scotland APPENDIX H: GARSTANG July—September October—December E 1902 1903 1902 1903 = } an = Nationality Nationality Nationality Nationality and Number Datum and Number Datum and Number Datum and Number Datum 5 of Hauls of Hauls of Hauls of Hauls Z Ss 4 17.—19. VIII nes Sok 2 ye 16. VIII IDE à 27. X 3 D. ni TO) y 6 29. X—27. XI 4 N Ar » 3 26.—27. XI 5 ekg » 7 9.—11. XI 6 D'66 » 8 17- X—18. XI 9 Au » TI 19. X—7. XI | 10 aren » 8 20.—27. X II sx > A 20.—28. X 12 ae bee sali 14 isin) | DA 3 15. X 15 Ne » 3 22.—23. X 16 PURE aa ge 17 te ales ns me 18 Da I 24.1X JOR i 14. X 19 Dey. 28. » iS er pees 20 Da 1 24. » 1D) ay 20. X ace 23 bss er u 26 Das 26. IX oat 27 1D = 27. » a ea 28 Dur] iin, NUN Bi 2 20.—21. VII | = 3 3 379 à 30 Da 3 28.—29, IX Are Wa”: D 3 10.—11. VII À Da 5 26.—28. IX DE FRET 31 | Ir, x 32 Da 3 30. IX, 1. X 4 FR Du 25.1X DT 22. X 33 f En 22. VII D at 29. IX 2 ,2I » 34 Da 2 25.1X | | el à 22. VII 35 Da 2 25. IX | | D 6 9. VII-5.IX | 36 9,05 5.—14.IX ID. # 13. VII te vc 37 1D) 12. VII : 5 | Da 2 26. IX 22 19.% 38 | 4 = 8. ee IX ET: 14. X, 26. XI 40 Dit 23. VII 41 D 23. » i Else 18. » AZ D 2 8.—24. VII 43 » 2 24. VI 44 45 | ate tes 46 | 4 oe | Le | Mr Oe late bi 9. XI 47 == | | D à Fev N E 6 Ss zu | De ‘ax | # | Ey 3 2.—3. 1X SEE: 13 Sein: APPENDIX H: GARSTANG — 30 — E January — March April—June © == & 1903 1904 1903 vo 2 ws En Nationality Nationality Nationality Nationality a and Number Datum and Number Datum and Number Datum : and Number zZ of Hauls y of Hauls ; of Hauls of Hauls < ES 49 E 2 7-1, 10 Hr 16. III ua Be IE i. HT ° 7.lll 50 15) A Io. » D :z ! E 2 DE) ES 12.—13. III a 1D) 2 s1 I I 16, IIL A ea ee ‘ 23. IV = IT 52 5 4 14.—15. Ill sae ER DAT 3. VI ot. 53 tel it 16. III E 13 11.—30. III DS 22.—26. IV E F2 H 2 55 CPE SEE AE 30. I, 17. » HS PE LE z 56 on Se » 2 16.—17. » H 3 57 We oat 11. III ve DE 1 T0 58 » u HUT) 630 ate oe Bl 2 20. I, 21. III => | E 8 15.—22. III | EN H ı 22. III 60 Ho 13. 111 | 5 Lo 15.—16. Ill H I 16. V yi Gi EN | t=, VW BL ir BE 3 — 6.—7.V | E 62 a NE sis B 9 V, 22. VI B 6 = Be 6.—8. II 63 E 2 21. Ill | Ts 19. II D ae 18 V1 » 21 64 » à 6.— 23. III B I g. Il RATE Ÿr ro EM 65 3,07 20.—22.1 jel 2 18. II BB 5.—6. V Br Wet ag 11. il 66 in oF 3.» AIME) | 24. VI 67 . Asia DATES ACT II. » 69 ORT EN E 4 14.—15. III E 11 26.1V—25.VI E 2 70 NS ra 5 4 19. I, ro. III » 4 | 9.11. VI » IO 72 | pase a core ee DU es SANT 73 5 BR Be oe D 7 20. IV—8. VI 74 Dar 11. III pia! Jee oe ROIS vill 76 DET, 9.» Eh BEER bre 77 iR Sc 6 II— II Se 5 | 5. VI 78 » 15 II—TII DT | 5. » 79 > au I—III ya 8. V 80 ) 2 I yy ea 5. VI 81 De A I—II Se 3 | 8. » 83 » 5 LIU RN aaa St, 84 > i I Sheu 9. VI 4 86 Dit 13. Ill Lhe RÉ : in 88 ee: a tn N Sc I2 13.—17. VI Sc 7 89 eae Sars do me » 21.V 2x - 90 aoe re Sc 12 I—II 4 » 6 12.—13. V Sc 5 j 91 eet er x. 2 I—Il Be see as 92 N x » © I—IIT Sc II 12, V—24. VI Se 14 93 AT D be we > 4 23. VI ye 96 Ser Til Sep ae ee 98 » 4 » d. 100 | APPENDIX H: GARSTANG July—September October —December = > F 2 1903 1902 1903 = o = = = Nationality Nationality Nationality ae Datum and Number Datum and Number Datum and Number Datum = of Hauls of Hauls of Hauls 2 100 17. 1X EM 9. XII JS à 17. XII 49 ye 17/0 TE are EN vie 50 | 51 a RE es 52 He 27. VII L: lo à a E 2 2. XI NE RM ce fH ı 30. » MA Ver 30. » El LH 22. XI HT 8. XI 55 26.—27. VII yt 2. 1X ae a lal 09 | SEX 56 21. VII a: oe aN Saves Bi | 18. XI 57 a. ID) ou | 20. VII ee Fe Dec CAR 58 H . XI I Ba Dora ns So) aL n 26. » Fa A | 1 20. » er 7. XI 60 re L 23 un Eger 25. » (El. ir Dy 6r 2 3% I 2 : 4. » N E I 28. » BB 30. » ies: B 8 VIII, IX a ee | hens | Lanta 62 3 EN eve SE a abs N ER 63 iB) Al 8.—10, VII jal 27. XI (Re wa | 64 xe ar Ki ER 19, i 20.XI | 6 E 3 14.VII, 24. VIII In, 1e 4% can 66 WED 19.— 20. VIII ut A BER fe | 67 » 17 5.VII— 24. VII pres aig ON Yon I 68 H 2 29. VII | is 29. VII—2.1X sr A E 5 11.—12. XII | 69 ae » Tie 3.VII—19.VIII ét ae Es FLE | 7 2.—20. VII sie ie 18. VIII at ae tes eh, 71 re » it 3. VII VEC ers dt mers 73 D 30. VI, x. VII {D x 19. VII a DE qe ay | 74. NT Sa ae Kew NÉ Sc 8 VII—IX Sc X—XI ur DS NII ie ee DR X—XII | 78 DU A1 VII— VIII Mae DE eT) XI—XII 79 » à VII, IX ei AR DRE XI 80 » » | | E : IX ee BEER Fe | boat | 81 Sc 8 VII—IX scar ae SOS X—XII || 83 > 7 VII nie ER Je | ne | 84 N: afer | | 86 A MCE | ae | 88 Bees Sea XII | 89 Sc 5 NVII—IX » 16 X, XII | 90 a : | ne | OF Se 9 | VI, IX Sc 7 | X—XII | 92 Du) vil Au | ce 93 de a 96 ian | 98 SCT Vill | | 100 APPENDIX H: GARSTANG m Ë ï + | 9f |So 6z |ggzr| o | © jr 12 IS É 6€ |S: Eenay 2% FE ‘LS | ı |gor | Z6r |oz |ZeSy]) o |ı |r z ÿ | = BE ae FES nf ı |6 see | Eu | gz jese | 24 | @ 709 | 999 | 6ı rete yp |r ie © ee Vz ©, |e Ie S ze ge |v'v'av'v 1€ lg |o |46 | 96 | eı,iros | 92 | o |Z2Z2 | LLL | ox \LgeSi| ge | 11 dee | pee | ce |gSZr || cS | xr jzok | Loe | br 826g D of DD 60oz o1z | Zi 6/01. zg | + |906 906 | Zr |66/+p| 6S | Er |6€/ zS/ | 61 0195! g gr (SZ £6 Le gov |gv'v'gvv of fo} 9 lo LS ay le ° @ © = cy iS v lz OT ... .. se .. O T 'o A Iv iv V 97 fo) 9 ı (Sa ge |€1 fo) un |e) II 6€ |66 [0] if jae & ze 9 wow & Ai Ar en fe 8 L Cr ze 68 o Eicon brag ate Viens ER AT y oz S 216 |S6 | vor | ye Seo) 0 | x | Er ze IV 1229 || Coy 110 | 9:0 a |@ 9 61 le ll aos le | Sale + ce 6 en ES | u hr Gr ae | 7 8 |[oz]|4r D gi nee az: Baer A RO) D | @ | se 20 ai {ise Ay Li ood ne oo © + + ÿ'o é Zz v Lx i |& jou ZI | gz vg oz |v 6 Ger |[£z]|lox = Tale a 2 91 gL | 1 €y | rr le 1S | 8 |gt ly \]zz]|86x 9 SI Pa nee secs PRES a Ber ro RUES ae ml ie eo om En lo Jh © jae |E £ Gz |x o | | + | ro av Aol .. ... ec eo. ... .. . fo) Zz I © [12] 12 Vv ZI GS AT vi | dz |olz COIN lex 12 a man free ys DE CE ia G) u © I 6 06 | £z 1056 ee = ee Seele > IS Ge | ce tee 9 gor I © Gr |o%2r | Le \Lzo Ieız |9 8 Sz S6 9 v01(; I CE jaye gz |Vor CAR €€ | zz 106 9 6 or | + | or OI Iz |zS ah | o |te €z | oz |gt | 9 9 © LE Vo |e IRkf£lor ise > w | 2 | 6 62 26 2 S © |€ |S le 6z jvıı ||o | z jz GLE](,| CE IST Gey ae | L ve |Sor var eo vn are lo | tie | 22 |e |5 © In fo 40 à je DL) © ee ee | Ce |p + + 98 (26 S | 6 | fer | gz 09 va. oa scale aos Son frac Co) 9 SI 9 Q) ou 1 a = 4 [71 Le u a H 8 2 3 Sl is ° B) = © US © BI 5 © ea £ | 2] à Elegige] 2 2| 5 Swan & | Z| 2) éke 2 |E à ONO ART ea em se Peale AE te emis “los a los Elo ot E © i Ele: .|o Aou E ps 9 CIE Q 1g bat E 0 a ZB GER © "J = = iz =| SEP RP a] 6 |S \EellelPeiP es] à 6 Sel) à NÉS ls elP =) 5 | 8 las 5 5 = ci = =5 os 5 = 8 = =5 De 5 =) & = DE Sai) 5 5 3 = DE . jeu pue | —— a all © El DO | aa || à cl 3] Punoss jo “oN 3 moy sed yo) | = “|| 8 moy sed yo | © | Sn anoy tad yoyeg | = = 8 | ınoy sed or) er = Joquiso9q —19q0190 JoqwesJdes—Arnf eun{— judy yore Arenuef nn “MEDBNO S,UasIejagd d PUL [ME119}J0 3237 OS ou} D ‘Mmenueasg ay} q ‘[AMe.).19770 395} 06 ay} suzaur puno13 oy} jo JequInU ay} SUFAOITOF VY “AN ademuosiod ou} pue "u OZ ULY} JoJJEUS 2594} JO ‘mou Jod yayea ou} 6 qysnes oorejd oy) JO o7IS 2681948 OY} pue JoquinU ou} SUOSR9S JuAANIp Am) UE PUNOAS 4989 doy DUISILEMMINS 6 IA TEL ‘sjoyoe q ur Aj [TqeI[at JOUE JO siaquinyy (+ ‘Weds 576 ‘yueg yug 276 (, 'puejpuy ivau wepr Ç gr ‘Sul][oyosiay, Jesu punois ay} Jo ıed {gr (, ‘uroz uey ssaj ydap ‘puno1S ayy Jo Jued a1oysur ¢/ or “ur oz Surpasoxs qydep Sued a10ysyo 2 01 (, Seas o | + Lo go [er] |x ARRET | £ y ooı FC) Al: ax fee to eat ne caine los |e : : fo) I + I ce IL v 36 2 . . . . . . ... 215 Vv 96 a = AR = ele |e Pile aloe. haemileoal|ace| Joc EE" ly sen aes v €6 2 © |r © || Fo gv |z BH a eg ee EEE Coy aaa ab Lee Cael bok) LE |z67 + | Cr |r gtr | fv |ggı v 526 a @ 4 ae | Z 1ÿ oı lo |S | +] 9g zy jogt || o 6 | +] 6 £r |jz6z lo |9 | +] 9 Sr log V 326(: a Zr |95 | 6 oSı | gz |sıtg| où | 6 |ogı See | ve |990€| zz | oz |1P a) || Me MNearope | ae lh Zany Nh oz | ÿ£ jooS y 06 o |zI jo eu | 2 (en Se = eo Hh © | Gr lo zı | ov LE 57318 ASS ES 9 ; v 68 = Zu ee o |+|+| + Jeris Gerz v 88 = g > 50 : = eae | (Eire lo) I tr |£ V 98 fq ’ © || @ |e z ty | LS lo | x | + | ex ge jor og 122210 vy ts a © de |e Ir |tE oz |} o | Sz |b 6€ | ef |pyor 7 | v1 or ixe Pose || 772 ca ke v 1C |v | x £8 < 5 d Se o ©) + © cr ob {0} © jo te 68 |1E o in © I er |b vıg ©. € ar OC ge ie lo |z | + zz 22 NEG to [où |b al of jor @) |) 1s {0} 6°¢ gf (67 VY 08 + | 912 | 12 gge | zE |gtog] 9 | zS |cor yS1| Le |96v1| 11 | HS |Sgr | 6c | 92 jezh6 | à | Sg |z£r Lie | gz |9%29 Wy 64 o |9 +] 9 IV |zvr |o | of jz i Ae 205 || © |e |] 45 te ge |S o ash € ve Exrr vg o |g2 |z of | ZE |ogE | o | 16 |6€ o£r | ze |Czoc| + | gt IV cz | € |xrzor jr | Pe 6 er | be \€6r Voll, ; @ jy | ap eye Ai \ || @ LE | © er |6z ZN lee v vs ate © |S |e Lz ge |g @ |) }n 12 A7 ; ; av © . . .. . I 6 + 6 gt oSS ... .. area) . .. . . Vv rah ! San : | + | 9 fz L gf |1tv || 0 | 6 jo 6 Iv La a ; eee a‘v‘q 14 : i ie : L9 | + |9£ ge | 61 |108 | zS | + SE S£ | oz 16 | op | + | +] 7 Le |S q ol | +|r 6 er | Of jor |e | Zr py 19 | ge (6ÿZc| S | or (67 62. | gz 6097 IE | ze jz v ze jog |v'v'av'a 69 SUR | € 6 loz 6z ge h6Sz a NES Z 2 av 39 co) ; 2 @ le le or | Sz 164 25 Iho) ; : É : a 49 ; : “Wr ir Zr gz | 62 |96€ | o | CT 12 ge |Z9 Gye Mn © ze loz adv ‘d‘v 99 | © a |e ca ae ME ee = Be RE | ie CE BSc (26%: Se er; II | 6z |gof v So Oy Vi | S GE lox | 2 | 4 Ex zu | Ge lGnr |l@ lpm le © 61 jor o|+|ı I 6z |Eı d‘ay t9 : poise ge 2 | eo lee €z | gz (6z/z | g |S ez gz | gz [SCC a ‘av £9 EN Fan Pos ece i Go lo SE ce | 11 vLE | 66|0 Ire i) nn aes ze ee ; N eee d 29 mS | gL | Sz \S64 | zx | @ TO | Or | Er o/gııe | 9 Sy TS | oz jogıı 3 | CE SVT TT 26) Ir |Z |ggr| S61 | tz \ghiz ES UE 1 | 91 642 | S6z | Sz [6/11 | g | 6 |167 | ooz | ve |PSez av 09 PL | + | gor | gor | gr |sSEz) ee À | c6 | x |Sror] gıor| Zr |€gSS | #6 | ı she | Ghz | Sr 2659| av 'v'av 6S o © + € o op |£r 133 ce |CZr a‘viv LS z tI |Shı| gSx SL ge |aSr 9 11 [VI cz 6z loS |w'gv'w'w 95 Z \Lr |obr}| gSı gly | 6x |6rEE | 6 | or |6E 6h | 92 |jobr | v'v 'av 'v SS On Ge ET Le 8 ge vet jo |9 |e 6 9£ 19/29 | vw ‘av 'v €S EEE Go ge |r fo} 11 | + II Iv |Elı vy cs : gi |) CEE @ |e a o£ |6g v is ; 6z | of |gS © | & en tr | Le |Lor x os @ iv |x S LE | ve or | 6 |r IS 6 of 28 v 6r ce Ÿ gor ZLi ... + nee woe mus. ... ... av ‘VW est Ig |}9 | Lz ee Co |o |€Sbr} €Sbr| gr jogrel vv ‘av ‘Vv 48h 8g |I gII 911 gl |z@ j€zS | gzS | gr lorcr ‘We Et. He ae o 8 + 8 g£ |cor av gr its @ © iv or | ze pet v St do Fe @ | fiw 9 gt jer ‘vy bP 2 é +|9o |+] 9 6€ |££z av er £ eo rar JAS | Se en Car | 1e |156 v'oav'v er .. .. . .. ... .. .. ene ... ... Ass Iv gs V oe 2) cv Y | & | APPENDIX H: GARSTANG abe me ++ reine Rif nee u ec Liege der Sams a = a t « ele lg | €o-or « fz « €] « ; 0 - @.| So: « ae ea) à Wa : E | 0 WF | E09 « “08 € | ı | Pr To \T0 OO ie & & garo or gI« | qozz « | S 60 180 | OOF [A He T T tr | vo'gı « Sze « y Bi .. . .. .. - . 0 & ro “QI « 2° Zee « © < à i T T the | to6 « IIGE (CIE ihe He L'o got Or Ge v et co 'Iz « Coz @ | I jer ss OLE OLE | Fe |, (G78 | SEE | | | | | ORE Sh | GTA GOT | hh vo ‘Ie & Lez « 8 wor |“ | 85 SF | 7 $96 FE Nell GET ER SCT PER ce en LE TAP Ne BD Er ae BBE 844) | & | 6 Go| SVORVESK = CoO) an ee € | © 9 | er g| SAlr T £ | 7 tee On ea i "u oz IE & LA & EEE SEE SEE fe We Z| & if | Voge € BOI « © ee |I@R2 NZ 96 |9T |8:86| SE) Gé\09 LT | & Te 24 |8 || 09 8 | to 8 L nf BOT G SONG Noor ler 66 re | |Ser| SL gar ce ye i \e | ee | 8 ee ‘L IL Loz « “je: Wa | 706 = 706 | 06 | &¢)| ZFIIS 46 \6L g Tg It oe « egze « | ‚paugwos may? | gy vor | ré 66 IT'S 6e ee a, Säle 866 866 06 628 TER SE Go NOE 8& Sef | vote « Ife « I |9 = © F F ge 08, g| ger @ | Ne ee I VOR G foe N “|40F |09 Ar OEM GT F9 07 LE ro TE | && 96 2 2 1 9 2 DE a 8 2 Sure . 2 ae z 2 N orl | 7 «| ar 97. |For | & |: series] "ke er. a Beet ; 0 th Co oz « v « z | « & 0 & OOL T T T a), Co '92 J] £ « 18 = Eee 8'6T |9'&F |S'98 |LOL Gr EE | Oe er fe ee re, : a = ae b a & 7 £oroz « ee « Deb: BG 0 20 gan) °°) © LA AT a € | boss « qote « it |S oz | FE | 9 8 | cé WE FOLIOS FE MISE NES T | 80:61 11 ss ele) mojaq auoN « 2 F re [zg'eo] G 06 | gr| log T OT 6 96 UNS = 87 « I—OI « Tale Wa || 9 0 9 8T el al 6 Ne 9 T ove “IT Ieq | T LT STE 5 > ; = ic 2 Be | 2 = 8 os D 8 aus | os D Sale! = Plz geh a ® Fi oe | © | o B OO No | o | o | 6 | o 3 = SaTIJUN0o ae i=l | aw © dR 5 | | | ee dy | PS ac: 3 UstayIp 2 oS, | =| 2 | ® lis SE Bewis/slelels| & lz EDS) = | 5 a = 8 renoue elele | e | & | à |© oS ae jo sjeunof |© =| 5 RER | à SEE | = SSE ea EURE) à Bu 8 ag ay} ur jney as = ee 5 | 3 8 | Be: = au} Jo “ON ge 3 5 e| à Inoy Jed y9E9 > sageJusalad pa.nseaw ysy Jo Jaquinyy is 5. yore —Arenue[ :190z1engd ‘1 ‘puejyoag = 9g ‘Upams—g 'puejoy—H ‘purjsuq—q Neuwgqg—eq AUD = q 'unnpg=g :sareuonen punoie jeu paysaul out :sueaw uum[09 ,SHIEUISY],, ayJ ur WA saındy J9yjO ou} :(d) [MV1}19}}0 sussisyeg UM 10 (9) JMEIJ19}JO 3007-05 ay} YIM saysjeo 24} O} JoJo soley ur sauusy ou] III ‘1d 1489 9) Wo UMOUS se (OOT—T ‘SON) Spunoad U paouedde ‘ave Au) JO WOSBAS NORA 40] (8912]d) BIBT FUME] OY} Durstaemmns ‘TTA aE, ‘pus-po9 jensn au} ‘(q) [Meajuivaq Aleurpio ay} YITA 10 (Y) [A\ed}10}}0 7007-06 ay} JIM saypjea ay} 0} zsuoryeuejdxJ uio} Â[peq « u1o} Apysıls = 110} JON (do) Z < E un C2 = {do} ki “A aS a = = AL. punouäyia < He) oD « Ge 2 @ 19439207 sineyz « 19495303 siney Z « « « gt “RHONOH AON © = 1N\0 cor W000 gz = £0 L'o 60S 125433 z'O ae) go £'o 6:0 z'O to Lo So So z Gz ECLET SCF 09 oS co “HANA H OFAN DHA "HA WwW a: oH "NH = A : DE EH x COON I IE (44 8 9 [4 if I € z ! mass 609 |19£ zz (oz Tes © Fete 12000) gs |Sor stg |S18 per | 3 : CHER bo | cis cue: Tena I € 3 iv if © 12 8 ae O9FG 6666 GF cr fe WE GES, ESF \996 O£I |SI goz j1z Peel eee: z € : ¢ F I Swno+ttmortn \o st ON a SO HS DS DO © 10 + n a) & Sinina mine minn NOW ANn+aA _« 9 | “rk To Oia a a « « « « yo'z I £o ‘Cr ro "bz to ‘fz Corl «I to's « ro'6 :I ro Sz « « « II « ro oz [II ro OL °'I £o EI "III « £o'9 ro tz ro 'zz’] ro ‘or « « « « II to'6 I vo "II ‘TIT to'S I to ‘61 to ‘61 £o br « £o‘pr to ‘Li Yo II « « « Co ‘Sz "TIT to-L'9 I ro'gz ‘Lz ro "gz ro "gz to ‘Lz « « « « bvo'Le‘9z {II to'9 J to 'gI « Co *Sz ‘III to ‘6z ‘92 ‘TI tobe « vo've « yo'zz « 0 'Sz-zz ‘TI ro ‘gt €o-gr «| Yo 'cı to 'zI « « « to ‘PL "III to Sz « to Sz « to Se J] ro "ZI {II to Sz « to ‘Sz ‘TJ £0'9 £o:S vo ‘or ro ‘91 vol Bro « « « "€ Id (v) 0Sı £6 zol a « « cord « ch (v)ır og SI « a « « fez (I « GCr-zSr (w)ogi-g/1 « TI « IgI « LLi « gLı (Ww) ıSı 18 A| « ovz a q 'e Ioz q‘e S61 +61 E61 « « 2-8 z61 eq 16 ILI 123 90 « « « « coq | 002 661 « « 961 eq 99d g61 L61 61 « « « cr eq sg « IS aq q vee « e £zz EG BAHN CO A ON HN OTH HH M ON 69 DD RH ON HN 69 + DID RDHAHAHAHHAHAH AHA 69 + MID ROH AOR A OH It of lz gz fz 61 Appendix H ) | 6S gige 9 |x SER | re ee VS | xi Cr | m2 | | 69} ve CN Ween |") a") ex Gr || C7 FES COS (GET tree j . of | 6 ie | Oe 8 || Wea | See een om ee = 0 u || OU « me ıı ; O@ | a. 8 are || °° | Ge) | SE 5 ors oO eee ze Vs I og I | voor « LI«| I |oS 66 | Lr zg || Sz jz | or | of | Z 66 fee ala ‘91 52 4 ~~ 166 I | to'ZL "TIT 61 «| € : eS ‚ze || vee || D: © | o£ | ox ILE elle is go 9) | TE I | ÿoro£ « IG) Ce or} 9 eats Gof || or | oS | oF | ~* jor US liv 25 OL it | IONS Si Rn es Ba Gor Gor | 9S | vy | = | © le = eli [ne “Le z | £o'or « €o ‘Ef rl 8 1202 ‘EI | O'OL lire Sof | 6z | oS | ra M6Cz br or ES Isıı |IS “1682 F/gQi vo Vlr Cor A To) 9 \ 9 8 lee ee en ale ae gs 2 Be I Iz i ge © ee a By ve 2 ae = = « \(w) a «| 9 2 © 3 D oz | I 6€ > On |} (A v4 5 167 JA VO'O I Aussen You] 73 8 a ae al & ge He ro || GSE || 92 | €9 | ex 61 S lex | : 61 S || toe « «Eli «| v DNS Sun OMS || GE || Bız || ae er z\S |g |gr 16 ler 9 | torı « «ggI «| © - 2 9 I for | gE | of | br lat ws |r |Z le at a | to'ı « «Gor «| © u107 an | go | WY ty ree | Sı | SE | oS EG ee le am lee zs 9 | tor « «ogi «| I | ¢s C'o 8 fo || eth | 89 | ge | + Bi Solita hil Am en Ne Ly eS | Cost « « Sh«| € €or | or £'o 96 || ex | eZ Nr LA TION CNT LA aS |E0:Sı VI « « pre) © iat | wat M7) Lob | oS | 67 | x cL 1 z|6 |Sz|Se |r : zl ¢ | €or « (w) ev al I |zs VI NIET | go zer || 19 | SE Ee WoO Le ie 29) er z | to'or « LC A Vv L S @ Gof | Z | gg | Sz mere Sale Nee lone WZ oP er IE | Co CT « « gf«| © Q © Zz Lot | r LS | 6€ Ca % En | y > lez Wr | oe « « LE«| oz ve € 120) LE | o€ | 09 | or Or i ite ol ; O1 Yee | corel « « G&«| I |ıS pa pue pues\i| 9 © © rege | 8S | pr QT ale le 3 ea ease | on @ « 62«| 0 !punoıS1o7sA0f| NS © z eras || 2 || Se |) Cee || tue || mi ie) 17 £ Va Cl Gor « (Ww) gz a] © 2 (se, ne an .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. oe . o ao Zz an « bL q| © pag + punox Cz) | o'r tne L'Va [4 6 zoI z Oor Scr z Oy 7 IL H| I log | EI RERO) a | x ns S:62 | 9 | 6€ bP 9 |rS nn |A or NS IS /,S | €or ‘III « Le«| © a S I 2 |) Ge 4 A | cae, | ime |e jie ym im for le ie? a © | 80% (vy) 61 a] © GE | Sn 6 eo ||| on | 107 | Ze | we Nee |? | |6 9 € “lee rt | vo'or « gI«| I | 6p | Oggi + ~* oggr +i) S’or |" : | ¥S | ob por ale rS or Oggi + I | bo'Ssı « SI«| © 0SzI + oSz1 +| 9'9I tz | 64, | OC | à né | Sm 0092 + | oo « 6«| I |er AS ie 95 || Gor = te | vZ LS 5 : uw iim 17 LS i | won & br«| € 6 9 @ VIE | rr | oS | CS | 6 9 ne À 73 6 1 | Vo" "TIT fr «| @ jooSz =| ~~ ese sel] zn | ee Luc | Oe nee ia £G | g61 0087 + I | vor’ y 6) 1 | LY or | or | 16 gt | Ze | zg | x > 1196 | 1 | oC|19 |I ass 66 or for « (Moral © Ma \\ Ure & SELS NS Oz © |e = es tia | wor NE SS«| I jor Orr SET S:9 L:6z | S | of | 6S Te 2 it à [x ; a z | vow « Lex «| OF © or € Got Gus || sae | Gf | HS | ao lo : fae Ie x 6 z| vo (ye « Iz1 «| 6 8 9 = URNS || °° | SVE) See lox Wee ar | 3 or z | So‘ “TIT 6 «| 8 (6) z6z 0. |z6 Lo& | x Lg | zE 72 oP eiieeiae or Where cL le | Co S "II Sat = Se AT gf 162 || € | SC | zg 6z |:: dr" jor |gI 62 S | to '92 ‘TIT « Slı«|9 u u1o3 AYSYSION ı PE | oe ZO str | o£ | Sa | S °° ANH NG ir | loz 9| tos FT (y) 6b q| S | Sr CA =< © ale |S ie © = A a ee} 2 | a |s 8 3|.| Baessis|s clé E e|E S ale a à a SPINOR eel 2 a a) ge | elle si) & € DEU ea | ee Q fe) ° a ° (e] © Z syıeway 8 51315 5 8 3 g 8 g 8 lo a areql jo sjeuınof g 5 = a Jaquinny ee ® a 5 = T8 | au} ur jney |R- =) og À 3 © g = = ay} JO ‘ON 3|< > o| = Inoy Jed yo}e9 = S38}u20104 pamseeul Yysy JO Jaquinyy = 8. = yore] —Arenuef :39,17end ‘I (ponuyuoo) TTA OIgeL I | 2894219 | 90 |go 39 COA Mey | GE | le ee lee In a cian ela ts DA ro IL] Lyo «| x |16 8294809 || Zo | zo S:o es || per || 40) ie a SE ed Hcl IE rye | +o T+] gto «| ¢ Sog+-z09 | C:Gz | zz ee give || Er | SZ | Er | Ter "| + |x |S6 Tr = QE 9j,S | to J Sto «| + 18941894668" | opr | ort | oe GE |\S-1z}| ZS | G12} ~~ Zor | TP or To jez | | ior FL ro « tro «| € © t89H/8t+068 ES || o-6z | ghz ty ge | or | SZ | Sı Go fo6r | 7 || |Sı \Zp1 |6z |x 1067 Wed | ro II I Cto «| z * a o'ge | ole vo eis | le | ul | @ SO Gt) PROS hr £o UP to | ggS os] 1 | 06 = Ei Bu | — | er | ele | Ag £ HA ee | ical ee he | Yo er "III ct q| I |98 2 ee : E Seg Pe se NS Hoy sae ee lee z | to I zig «| ı |#e Stilt b64lzg | SE | © | SI | got | 2 | Gy | Ze | 2 Ith LR -l\e loz |sr LE 1p @/,ıı) #o III+I gro «| 1 |tg o zo zo Gen oe 5 0017| °° [IT 001 00) O0) ne te : On Be SV to ‘II gol « + < lo |L'o ae Kos | GE 2 | & coca |e | lu Son) alls 2) ro « 9f9 «| € ce |e = er || SZ | Ge CNE MSc) 0l IG te Pale a eels ee | to « £Co «| z 4 OI |o'r ee Ory ||| wont) à | 20 Poe Ie a a Ele NO ce eee Ha Haz | to « of9 «| 1 |1g A pied ea — ie 35 DO 6 Pid owe cee ECS rary Cr, Gat lo are to « pro « z 5 6:01 | 6:01 — HIKE || 12 || Eloy I] == One aa ES) on | 6x Fer ro I zg «| I jog u tgl+€el+zgl}oeZ | giggeı Gtr | Eitlz| Lc |Iz'o | EC | Sg | à |icorS o1 |S/9r|Co££| arr | : |zo1S tJTx ro ‘III LSo «| ÿ = 209 +669 || C’ESı Lor | get || Got | 1 173180 20 || an PERO CASES GTS han |] SEN ETS DA to « ıSo «| € 9S9+859 | Z:6g |p | CL || 262 Sto | Zn | ES | bob nes jögı Erz | -* | °° |bor Cha to « oo «| z 699-+089-+Lt9 | 9:92 | 9:62 Wd Zee || S OL Gr eo 98S les)" ES) CCSN TOM ET “98S - | 3/76 to "| 6to «| 1 |64 ke) GO cz go Were | ee 8S ze Ig je in ioy ler |e | “Ide #192) vo TIT Il go «| € RT 6:8 |z'8 Po ||| CASE I) Siz |} “ey an) où Im elle ji ler 8/1 ro « ocL «| z €zl+o1l-+60L | VI | 60 S'o Cas hive | OS] Ge © in pees se 1% S D ar 1/01 ro "II €So «| x | gf 1ig-+90g+99/4-SzL || z:9c | 12 1S Gee || or | ZZ | gt | S’o |6oz || je | gr losı JE |r ** 602 tel | to « So «| I 10g-FE1Z :stu tL es gr || gee || Sı | 0g | be | ı |vgz | | Te go |r “ |hoz v ro III “It ÿSo os LL Li A vogerg oo oc 03 are 014 5 Du chi on llealoclac sit ec [Pose z 06 « TER ol | | Selle z | Cour « 164 tL Cr Su |] £e | Lo |e I z ic z | to’or Tq] « gor‘Lor«| z | it I ES oS | of | - 2e à I I ; [4 z | to'6r I « 101 «| I {o£ D wy || 048, bn g:c£ || or | 09 | of OI 1211088 or re | to'Sx « | « zıı«| € Go Se I Gx || 9:62 ob | 08 | or Jor vr | I ‘or r | torr « | « WIT | ov NT: a Gr | ge || ez lot | Sh |e jor Wy Nam let if is “lov o1| to'rı « |(g)orr ‘601 | 1 | 69 ads an | oe | ow I 6:19 | 61 | oS | TC 91 “Te |g ¢ SP Sela CHIRCOECERT (y) of xl z = I I | 8:62 | Sz | Sz | Sz | Sz |v I it u I “Ip @ | Sort III STH] I |99 cnr | Z Ir | Z:ez | S | SE | 49 | € |06 I pu ie |sc LC 06 IS | Co-z « « gz«| 6 gz | oe 9:6 9'923 gz | 99 |9 |eg or er | ‚9 9/P | COS « « Sz«| g 1107 Ajpeq an | 90 | ce v9 £'ez || S gz | Lo ev ae in em hee a Den ce tb | Co'r « « te«| Z 9 z v woes || Z| ef) So) o> Mere EE EC im | te GT 265 rer | Core « « £z«| 9 7 £ v Gof | or | ge | 7S | a os OUEN A NON vn We Mr “10S, 89 | Ole « « za«| S 9 © © one || Or | AS | 66 || oe Mem Peso eo fe |) Woy tod ii « Ie«| y S © = Ce | Sa] we || ie |} Ile JR 17 ts Ie 2197 & | Loony (yw) oz al € € = I L'oz Lo ce |e 3 = SS er: Zelle I | vo'gI « EG 1S II OVP || Seel >= || ae || 174, || 12 uP ote) © min ke 1 | | I | VO'ST "III oz | I |So i, £ Ÿ CHE | 7 Gr HS Seal So) Een PA ce BZ 1 | 706 ‘Ir | (gq) (q)6rg) + So 22 S'o ~ | O01 I para Poe sare Fr \Co' see « « 6h«) € Cr I So Soc 09 | oF ¢ : © z SS (etre | Coch « re | NT .. .. .. or .. «Beer .. .. Dar fo) af, £o ‘9 « « IC « I t9 u1o} 32N G | vo 64 || 612 € | rg | ox |Ire Pee tin We WS eels zg | tole « « Ly«| S On | & Il || 6:62 QI | 2g || ©: |gz ’ iS Whee “gz © ||| Somes x (Moral + 12 I € Seel 7 | Se GE | oo y Fear ee tir E ee SF, I | vo.6r « ge«| € ge | gr Ce | aoe Me) NP || i? |) ea elle Io Se LE 2103 1 | Yo'6r ‘TIT bey) © Gre | vy Woh, | Seg EN ae | arg || ME eee epee oe Nols rere lene || == lei 9/9 |VO'S ‘9 ‘II gi y ZI g| I | 9 Lg | gz 6:08 1155022 Pee | ive || fey Yh WS Pee ae ze ou [kurs En ins #18 |vorgr "St « |(g) Zir ‘xx q| € “ ooSt | oS joSyı | Zz} | © | gg | 6 foo |.) ZT Joby | Sy | © jooSx + I yore « 6z«| z O0 + | ZI + |gge + | eve + | 6g] 42 foSt | EN |g jeer | rr | -- joog + Il) oye SzH| I |09 eve Eve || gioz || -~ rei} ei Now) |A) nes |e Se role Wel | Forze « | « ILI«| g 4 ÿS | So SES Per I <2 jf ae | ae | cero) on ROSES Eh Se eon a | vows «| « ofr «| 4 : de ee ET Tot | ca ENT NES er Peur Se | eb z | Voz «| « gol «| 9 CAG U GS | arene WP! I eee on |) el ONE AGE Were ll zen af | toc « (y)691 ‘Zor q] S à L'98 |r'o 9:98 || for | ro | vr | gg 654 || Tor | ÿGo | 65% F8 | toro « (g)gıı ‘Sir «| ¥ +4 GAS es Ce |For | Oe Pe Wana ois ER) ee ne EE Z \vo'gr‘St TIT) (q) ira) € een ee ae | yoror « |. pocle |. [4 I yo OL TA ogqd| I |ı® on 668 Fe Co II « eat ee Man £- « FOLGE | GE £o'or « 6€ "gf « | zx D = Co or « LE « | xx 4 Wa | 68 | 0 £o OL “AT geeq| OF = ZoSt) ¢ xe Yo 'II « Ig «| 6 oS 6:01 vo 'II « SL «| g of 9er VO "ILIA 69 al Z ÿc6 | ÿ:6x to (q) ırı ‘ta + Li « +orı+tei« 9 Gel Gee tof « « €€r«}| ¢ ‘gt | o Yo er‘ « zeıe F 18 L to ’I ‘JA « ga, © LIT Zz €o'of « | « Gale | 1897 9 | €0-o€ « (q) PES qi ı | of = | Bory °A Sal ı | oz ( Cole « €9 «| z m 3 & EST NET Sea 6 | 88 | 84 \\Te).FE|' IE IST 167 FE | the | fot « zg « | 1 | gt 3 30 ag : E de 5 de wall 0 Jr £o‘Lr « gp « | x Ly « OF 6 FL & GE | &9 | SG || 8 3 WE IG ie 8. Jh co zz A] 19 «| & 9 0 9) es é ee oie ale allies Er go LI" A 6h « | xr |gr PI « gsr ST | GE 6e | <& | 98 |(82)76- ga jeg se | T6 & | forte « TORS IY, « OF a SE 66 G | 08 | ST | 06 res 0€ er go 'gı « yS «| € « F9 Fo | OF GLEE LE | GE | IT 0 00 We ler Hr £o°L « | eS « | a a & | SSF F | OF | 98 || T4 “WE 1g |E9 IE | hr | tordr « es aS « | 1 | Sr Aqaed sozig “ 86 0 86 < | 620 | ESiFE.86)) |) | lo) IG | SG" 86 T go'zz « 09 « | h NGC | 60 | OTE = DA PE | POW GD A NE ome EE NY) tr | Coee re « 6S « | € « 9 9 as oo 5 & MA AIRES Nr fe to 'Iz « gS « | az | WA Fe | ee FE ES er 5: LR ee Re fee [le an €0 Iz" AT iSeql 1 lu 8 eunf dy :1031end ‘& | CI CI 27 + || oor I “|r ; 2 JAP Fle vo « | 99L «|v LY or | 4:0 a 99 SCOOP SG Are z SEES] £ vo « | ToL «| € £'o go —+ || oor I dira al EI to « | 662 «| z 3 ; fo) a Ee lo af, | to « | tel «| ı | 96 .. .. oa Bes an DS on ‘0 o : . | lo DA ro "IIT | 6EL « I 96 a g'£T “er | Vr rer || 7S | gf | Z | S'o || ggı | ‘Igr|<£ oS\12 | vr | I || 98T JR: to “TI | zSo «|S = AM SJ .. . 6% 0 So 3.8 ae 0:8 o Brey pee ene fee ec 50 do ‘lo eX | +o ‘TIT | 162 «+ | à z £1 ocr ® zer | ÿ6 | 9 ze :|S |6 loriz Fa ze Boe | to « beg «| €. | a warnte Ge | ep goS || og | oz | S alla Ac © S ee | doc | gig « | z 5 = J 89 L9 ro | oz | €S | Sp | z = 16% aes (nee | we | |6b | o£) toy | zvoos| 1 | 26 [24 | | | < Re Fe ©) e | & ë 3 [519 & @ S © >| © = en Ss = Er 5 3 2 a Ss) GS ECS sl866le| 8 | 6 | s ; & saLıJunod 2 g < ee el E a A 3 Sl S I2,8|8|8| sg 2ee88 3 © |-| E IF, | suse a | > z SEEN | es @ = 81818 ~ |=I8IS 181 8 SE lel a lee ayeq | jo sjeumol | oo = = ® sale: Zee Sa lade E Vs ES 12e À su ur mey | © © ag an JoqtunN RE We & | SRE pe I ir a | = |e 2 Bar| oe ae ayy jo “oN | 5) < ° = | a | = | nou sed uyoye 2 S35P]U9919q peisvaul ysy jo Jaqunyy = | fe = yore — Arenuef :1931enç() ‘1 (panunuo9) ITA SIgeL GARSTANG APPENDIX H | | | | } | eıııl — 111) vor | | 14 £6 | Sıg ||" 3 ve |1ZS ofS¢| € lvo'oz ‘or « | Ho ‘ES+Cp«l r | 6S 9:18 bi | Sel +92 vo | or | $9} 1 ose “lz |S |z6z |z ose v to'61 « | to’zS+1S«lz | | 1S 61 cas NC O(OE II) Mae |) Core | fof) Eee reone "lg |@Iloz (66 |S zoL z ro 61 JA to'oS xl ı |98 Sor S o91 | o'ze te 12 | gz | 067 SASS lira le nf Oy? | 5 ro 'SI'AI (q) Sax y| © 0021| — 0021| 241 8 z6 | Lez IS cz 1692 oorz z ro'gı « to'6p «| z gee — ces) Bar | 00 ire | ue ae Pee oe cer Zz ro'6 JA! to'zC pl ı |SS wo Jan | CP ov (0) 6:9€ Gr | Go yp =? NOT Sr, Wee ae is NET | £ to'g9z « « ber«| ZL BAS © Co res NE Ge me | 2° | ee eo hr Ven Ike SES oy aie FRET ho ‘oz "A (qi £vr Al 9 1'S 647 |z'o est | ge | 6S | S Ip ‘| |Sırz |z Iv | 8 |€o'gz+Sz « « zg+19«| S | SI zor | LI 6¢e | Sx | 9£ | 6 | So || Siz ie 62691601 |r | Siz | zyz\€o'9z+Sz « | (y)Egtog«| + | v € I GAS lI) Ze || Moy I |) seit jh ter ENT | lz gi ¢ Co'tz « « gS«| € jeu ds || 2-1 LY g gle || ov | og | ~~ OI + MA) ol 9 £o'£z « « lS«|z = = erste || AS || Gig || ee L el re | ie SS £0 ‘zz AT « SS«l xr |ES So S'o — Oot I Al I | Ib: | = COLE vVzgal ı |zS Lo1 (He |) Gory || 7 || Zn eu Nis ee | “itz IA to gr « gti «| 1 | 2 I u — “+ | OO z Bailes ‘le ye tape te ro ‘or JA +hr al € lz Ge || 17 gift | St | o£ | Sr |: | pS Pye olf WA Netz flee les Nez Fo'IL'A fo ‘LE pl z II 6 a 6:€€ |'or | to | oz |: | So |: z |Z |S [rx NGG a ICONE (y)6S 4 x | 1S 62 Sı| tz L6z MTS ey |e gs IE Of |gz CONTE TOO zhig oS ; giz 28 giz | 6:zz Po | GS) | n ea je” | *- loc |E Sev = ro 'SI’IA to ‘rb | € ICE: vo |zı 8:9 Gz | zo | Er |Le 3 ale Ale I ro'tı « « Lgr«| z yal go |z'o 6:28 og | oz S ioe | coe | | ht | IS | S to I °AI (v) 981 qi ı |6r 962 : 962 || giz 1 | 9g | Pr | gra aes ne SN M CCE En Yo‘z1 « ro ge«| € || Ge SCz || Sız : 16 | 6 | Sez i ha re |e | Ste | I ro OL 'IA to rey| © | SZ ELE | oer : I | 66 | C0 pees “|G I89€ QUE | I to ‘9z'A (Dial x | gr | VLE VALE EE || © ‘ Cr | Ze | blr Sie aa WAS PN HE I ro OL 'IA to ££ yi) 1 | Lr | 9% $2 |Eko 1:98 182, So) | ole Kor 22 Hon ke 4 |91 9 to Sz" (q) cbr al 1 | OF eer ZI I ze Sx | 22) 8 . Cr eco low | | Cr I tor « (v)Iga| ı | SP | S:z SI I gizf || oz | ob | or g Peer tke je INS: = ro’lı « SSr«l x hr \Sez | GS gI || 1-92 SW Geet Li Lv A ee Zr z to6 «. Set | 926 | og | 62S | 2:61 I | of | ES | oLgr "jez |€9g 1066 | :: |94gr| ce to'g « ; ge «| € | £'ez b |€be | coz trı | 98 (fone POA sae TG cal gol JA to:L « ETN TAS | 8 v v iO oan EC) Sv | oS | ° zz wo Hone (heit ae cz Wee tol « RT CH gor 91 | 1068 | zzz | :: | à | vs | ze | ghot |: 2 j6rr/eSzzjeZo | | | ghof) 7/52 | VO gırg « | 991 ‘62 «| Z | Og 2 ORTE | HALT | So ones | Gale le oe | |STE | ter vo'St « |} orl «| 9 gory | +S |zSob | 661 | -- | x | oS | 6% || Sgze |: :|°°|° "|| 6 07/0667" || Sgze g to's « brizz«| S S:6LY 1 |S'eZp | coz | :: Jeo | o9 | oF | 8167 |°-|°")° °P |EGrr|192 |: |) gr6r ÿ tol « 61 «| # s6 CA à lets leo ES hi Mae Joe Le le ON ASIN to:L ‘IA Cr al € I to | Lo BE a ae SANS Selen ll | TS [Fite [Cele RES voll « «gel«| z L = S L'Sa 6z | cS | 6x | 12 Alpe or ir 200) 15 £ ro II’ (a) Lex 4l I er Szoıl gr || Zo01|. 261 | | 2 | Er | SS || Szor en |" GT erh |¥oS | ~~ || Szor I to pr « LII«| S \S-Zor | eb |zCor | eee | -: | b | cf | be || off en) 7 TN COS |Sor | loch Y to'6 ‘IA ot a! + 0:79 Ge |e) || tem | ni va | A dan ns) eee, Nr Rx || En € ro 'zı « « Of1 «| € 9io So eo : oS | of | : = SR m ju LE z © yo'zI « (q) 621 q| z og LY €9 || &Sz ua | IE | @ Sn 2552 Sa |16 |¢ “61T ge: to ga’ (w)oga| I lot 6:2 we |Lo 16€ |S-zg |S’zı | Sz 8 2 S 1 jz “Ig JA voor « SS «| x € 09 g'er so | ©'92 ne | || Si Gira ee "2b \S6 IZ "> | 6px 2/,% ro ‘zI'TA loıq| I |Z¢ gtr o ger || 1°61 ET EN Enr 20 lerr (PSI cle = to‘ £r « (V) 881 Al 8 19 Gta |) ca | ead? lI) EN hey ae | SN eee DE) LE) CSS CGR fines he || er z tof « « 601 «| Z ogte | S12 | Ltr | 612 © | © zS | 9€ || god : hg |IgE |£oz | : Iso € Yo'Iz « « BSI «| 9 Sele = Su | | © ie En | IB ee ee er | © ce z to'er « | (q) 1f1 «| S bz 17 oz Here || © gr | o9 | ce | oS JANSON Notes | oS CA to 62'A (ga) al tr ovet| L'Lx | Etczzx|| Loz 2 | CON NO CE) Corel EN ES CS \61Cz|g per oct g ro'zı « SIT | e | | 294 | 9:09 | 8'904 || gfe -1g | ve | 8 || bebe |" "1° °1461|2012|061 o6rz | 4/,¢ ro'zı « gol «| z OSA | stone || rofsre | az | Oo Ne) || | Su || OMe Cu ES :\Crrlog£r|ZZe | ~~ | oLdr L |\po cI ‘IT JA 66'Y6ql I | of £& Ge Cav RS MW Gee ei ols | Pil GE PE alin € |6 12 torer « \(q) /Cr-9£x «| Fr > . a0 . .. .. . ro) eens ice .. z « Cor « € ev Ee WE) os I | Aue San 9 Ge 9 z S Y iy gre | ov | oh | oz} "|S ae I I WA | 6 T T ae .. .. .. .. &, .. .. a 12 Or || Dr a | SE | En EE APPENDIX H: GARSTANG jou ads i Ip it 16/4 OI OI uioy Aipeq ON || geh | r'Gx | LLz 6zIE |zE |So | ~~ Tec o 6 ge mi | Ce Ge Sn TE ONE ige || it TON CO |Z » |r9Z 8 £0 tz IA (a) Ze a] 8 [43 ZI | oz |8'92| | set | FS |g |Co PS SE See IS LG So z £o ge « « 6L«| ZL er er | of (072 | Se zo 19 70 in ie jae Mee Vz 128 = Los « « LL«| 9 Iz S 91 |fooc|h |ıa |2el |© fre je loi Issn |Z mie | idl Ba «ogL«|S v 2 i) El les IES |e 16 ‘le he Ie ie Poe Hs) = ol N (yw) SZ «| + gic’ rg | 4:92 |izozit Iz |g9 |g |gte 27T or Co) jot | Le see ‘or/to"g "a ‘Le « |(y) gl+Z9+99 «| € 6h gor | ££ |€-Zele |1 |6S |g ope ‘|r IS | gor |roz | Le ‘ove L Cole « « Sg«| z Che 6 N 6z|| z Ge low I Ize) Wein late We be 29 v Co “92 “AT (y)t9 q| ı | 69 a de 35 a | | | (6) De ee (6) I Co IT « CA m 46) S v I religı | So |61 ze WS ie Ne) ze L tobe « « ge «| € S © t DENON |ES | Ze or "1 ou |Z “OT Y cove « « Sz«| z ÿ © T eel <= SZ Sz or i ee Ven AP lox 12 £0 -ve "TA (area ı |99 Che 12 ZI |S'oc|c Ge WEL VE Neo) ae I tr jov jz Co Y fo-9 « « 12 «| € Sy zt er |S) b |6g |Z {06 à li? os | © 06 @ LOL « « OL «| Zz 107% z 6€ || o-be) GS, |S6 | Vo ithe zu Ve | u irre 9 CONG N (v)sga| ı |59 u107 JON 9 © S 0:61 or |09 jor le) OT z vor « « OST «| z 0 à one on ad or Io oa o x ro 'z & (q) 6rı & I +9 d FL = FL |48 7 |\96 SG T OF | 2786 6 £0 gt ‘TA ve«| 4 « 9% G |6o2 |t'lz 61 |zg | ~~ Ze 22 14 1967 | °° | Zoe | ar vorlı « II ‘Or «| 9 «|| Szz | go | Liz |1Szl Toy |z6 | |So6 En: I |9£ |z6g | of G96 | %/,eh| Vo 'ST-E1 « Az GS «|| zeı | ph | 9°9 Eigz| coloc" | Lo ce I (ON |A BE ee ze tog « of «| y « Zz | 9:9 | Loe PAIN TAKE Sy gr | QG MT SL PA vo9 « 69«}| © «| 22x | Gz j|eSr |/€-9c) So}pr |€g |E lors € |oL \zat Sr |*"jorS | cz) Fo 610 « lor'vr‘er‘er'tZ «| z a Of |) Bro er id) Pe he 6 ie OZ | gr |Lel. | be 644 98 Vo 02.5 :A |or ‘Zr ‘6 ‘g*gg«| I |89 al BG | | ee | °° | OOE GEE az Kae g| wove « 6L«) 9 « &1 — GE New OOF \26 : 9 ‚Te ke & ro ‘TA og ‘SL«} S ll Gz |= Ge VOTE) IE |66 696 | @ \é6re |FFig9e | Lg | vor at) £4 zoo) r « 9 = | 9 GFE) OOT 66 : 0G |G 66 Wee core « lz Sz«| € « g i G GL | OO Ce |: “18 | 22166 Wig £0 "IA ge ‘Ie 61 «| © d FG = fe 601] — | — |@_ | 86 |rs& g G6E | TS\E8SG | LE] *OVA*A| Eeigrvıtig I eg 0e or ML'OT |Sszl vo|rb | CN |p || 17 I |62 jo |r ws £ Vo St "A (q) 921 al 4 : en |) Sie Stor age 260 SZ ig loz alee G Gr Ve 92 E FO & « ÿZ«ho wor an | Loz | PE | Cec |9'%z €1 |es |v {Zor te |SSxr |g Lgr L fo-L « « £L«| S 67 9 £z |o:97 61 |1g | °° ern gz loir 22 ¢ £0°9 “A (wel al # OCT 8 cel \eSe| vo|g |06 | | 007 Sar Gr he | On 09% = ro ZU IA yo Ly «| © 061 |. S:6. |Srogı |IS:Gz| °° |S |¥6 |ı oor G #6 |r (opera z €0 'gI « fo th «| zc 9S vg |g'lr |igoz Gr |Sg | ~~ floor Sr |Sg TITI z Lose’ fo tv«| I | 19 Tepe St, 6bhx | ¥:Se) x g {69 |z |6zC Pele Whe hé || (0143 = ro 'gL'IA to tb«| Sep | Zip solo) zw SC ro tea 2 22 NS x 0694 t £o"or "A £o Sy «hr |o9 18g z 628 || r'or| zoıg | ON | TS | -\-- u lea | ear £Goz| ez ro ‘oz ‘TA vo SS+rS | cz | 6S { ay 2 ES = Z ee a ss le s P| = 3 ee cS e | 3 > è ? = = à 1 © ° 1 ; Sis 2 sar.ıJunod S| 2 p ° D | 6. 5 on s "als [S/2leie/slelsisgisielele ltl se => wuarayıp am le | © sylewoy = Sioa te | si IsiSisisiSigieis e 3 a wınyeq Jo sjeumol z = = Jaquinyy = da E : : = RE |S ae 5 WS eS NS 8 Su a WAY LE cs 5 || ¢ @ | = = au} JO ‘ON 5| 2 Q = = fer o| = = 2 | oe ınoy ted yo}e9 : sadejusoie J paimseaw ysy jo Jaquinyy =} 2. sunf— Indy :1971en0 ' (panunuo>) TTA SIgeL APPENDIX H: GARSTANG 19 ‘be ‘te yueg Sanus 916 ‘116 06 1611 ‘E68 £oo1 ‘zgo1 8801 66666 ‘oLg oS11 ‘966 ‘Sox ‘Se zg11-+ 0001 + 656 zS11 + 0£Q G6Lr1+2001+1001 olıı ‘Leg ‘tg ogıı ‘Eooı ‘Ztg'1£g 1911 ‘gzy ‘stu} G1-£1 (TA uoneIs 611 ‘S11 £6 'z6 « u10} JON « « qyds J9N ysno1yy pazyo puepod qeu ads Sgn |! gi || wx) 67164 joc |ı |: WGexr | 1\v ST 94 rapt eit > leg joe || 2° | 2 le A ts (es z:09 zSı |oıS | /:Czl.6 gi |rE |€h loos |: |S |Z | Sr gor | 1S |Syr |iggei6x |Z |95 | 6x rc ahem calles) ToS LEI |\V’ge ||‘ © Ge leo en Wr Pe Tov 9 |IVE gta) °° GT jog | Se tr ee 619 | Soe | bib} Gels | TE NES |e |cre | xix jz | 4 1:58 GZ | oly -1€| 6r 9% Cr | zr OTO | à GSzge V9 rae 71 a WORE Os | °° | °° WAS allie fir |) ©) po: po: a As < : : ose TO 10) + | oor I Sy ae) 10 | I I go £0 09 |oS Zz O\jar V1 Tr |%o |/gStloz | 09 z tac | eh OL | 792) -° | of ou Eze | Gee |V6 | 71€ lo Lo L gz | ge | OO | 9S 2 rs 1S 9:et| 6€ | 19 k, TI TI z'ct|loo7 | °° 17 or zo |8'o Se! M | oz A TI To | 20 gee oz | 09 I 0'9 Lo |£:s “Ge «+ | xx ; ob Ge | 111 || 6'9e! te oSSe| 72S | 87/67 || eb vo | or Sz o:ge | Gor CT |\S-Le\r | 62 I tor | goz |96r |orof| 2 | rr 6 C'occ | 194 | ogrr | 1/2 So | ve TI Lys | veg rg | Ze cv z or | re |9o | 626 | 62 Lx ZO ZO = || =° oO eS Gh ge bo otter | Zo a €Gp | 1S | con |igztiZ | x12 Gz git ot |90 |laztie |18 I 292 | ge IE 672) Lt |69 ze Gor | gz |r e-rtloz | SS ZI gos | gg | cr. |ectiz | 6p 8 ge | ese | 42 LSE gr | SL 6 C'oz | SLI | 8% LEtip |z8 € 6er | Sor 98 |#roflo | 67 z 9S rg |So |getizr | 6r che [ee ae JMS VISU | Se Cr IL © 2 | | | 9S © € I z 6:22) 9 zz Su vo ro = = 02 LOOM : Gi z fr | TS] er KA G 12 I gStice | SP 19 Je ate || ER) G-LE) Ly | ov “| 2, [9:0 Ho) (to) |} I} los nz |r [ I I | a |) eS > ioe AE 6 6 co) TOY ECO ME og loola © | zg |) Sto | Gene) [item EM eye ey tay oye ee N ete ©) tone fan) 8 Ss ers | oye). on ane S'IL I |GoL |ig'oc| :: |ı LS |e ehr |: 2 S-ızz| vo |6ozz || LZ:6r) -* | z'o 1ıS | 6b |g6W |- ; 96 o 96 || Z-gr ~ loY 09 lozı |° 3 ot: Fa os al 5 on iter 5 : | Co ‘oz ‘61 « £o ‘61 ‘A Yo ' « vo 'tı « ro £1 “AT Co-e1 « Co‘fr « to 'zı « to Is “A yo ‘AI! Col & £o‘or « Co'Sr « COST. « Cost «| Co ‘Cr « to tı « £0 ‘6 to ‘61 ‘AI £o "te “A fo'g « £o "S « leat S |Eo"Zı “TILA Gre a ler zaqwodaes—-Anf : 1971800 ‘€ | at 5 .. ne oa ae as = .. on . .. © € vo "I « €Cor « € Re = Sr Meals Se pala ete lo He | coke « ZLI «| @ | gli ‘tZr ‘Sor oA a0 Onn u. 0.8 .. .. org . veloeleon 251 oan ae ae 50 | fo Ge: Co ‘fz ‘IA Tio « I C6 : 12 v 5 oe oS | of | | eg Mıa|ı |v bi aoa get oe) © | VOL GT “AT 926 «| Pr SSo1 686166 970 |! 6:9 So | vo | gel or | HS | 9. | ~~ |ÿ6 || Er lo |. IS Lo os jes Ih z/,€x| to "AAT Zoo «| €1 hia eds) oye of ete) 22 | ce | "0j ler Jules 2 8 | 215 reel sg | to “AL 990 «| cr 981 Sgt ‘fet | oy 2 | Srey || ASS) an | GP BP Wie eee ashe. | 8 Ie ich, ¥/,11| Corte JA zıo «| Ir L'or or | Lo |SZ:8El tr | of | 9 lo HPs | | ee ta | 91 a1 | COST. ZI «| OI ued “MS ei = EI eof Pa ee AS EC CES ESS =o eg z fr | CovL « 6« 6 dre vs vs ol Sara teat || log 2 6 Sales Bere le 6 sr | Eo’zı “A 9«|8 1'OI 36 £'o LiSv| tL | ve © “WEE NT rc (OT NO" |x pa poe IE ne | VOI "TA pSor «| 4 £ 0'9 0:9 2 1:1ÿ| oS | oS 3 SI mie 1/4 || © Sale £ | vo'gr « SS6 «| 9 © 996 ‘196 ‘056 'St6 | L117 our | ro || Zo! zS-| Le | ı “901 z|9 |\/r| of |x 1° oor 10/6 | to: « ggo «| S a se eT al = of Con) 22 | 7° | oo NE oser je IT ET BEZ RE ae | Yo'zı “AT 188 «| v = Aa NES || go go 001° ne Ne “ili z ln lie | Loos "A Szog|l € | 26 CA | j < = Ö Sa 8 3 S) = es Bo © > | [x S | > PA Gel = 3 8 3 a 3 $ o | o as 3 ae co oe CNRS 4 2 | sarqunoo | | © ie 9 5 ©. 5 | fs À 2 |: 2 JS ls)8 Als sadeels dat) 2 le gp au Le Bl © 2 sı.ewoy = = = 2. = see seen = sie 8) 81818 2 2 2 & ara yo sjeumol[ g BEER eins +) ‘OOF rn le Perifyallaail es ars g Se à a ge tbr ” TT ‘ur oz y 9€ |F9 Te a LS Le 6 pe | ceed 774 Yep Lo Lg « Sv ‘ovr « | or wel} ss] : Log « 6£1 « | 6 OT | | rer| + | zer egal | 26 |e Wee} ||| |r 1006198 | | 286 | SA Eos TK | gtr-Ler ‘ver « | 8 Co -LI‘gI « g6‘46 « | Z | @ 0 | 6 Fo) 00T 9 seal all A Ne OR A eg fe | £o'gr « 96 «19 : 9) FE |&C 66 ||. || ate MOEN PO iz “| OF Wel | fo 6c x ber « | S ere f 96 6 Fo 9%| |8 |66 | IGFE | | joe on We age || Na Sovk « Cyr ‘ivi « | dr S10ysyoO 06 6 8L GG OF \06 SEO aces fee eel le lt 6 > OF Oh tov TX ofr « | € “69h EINER 46\| + 06 \624 |z GT |) 7 [09 GENE | @LF | YWrFG|to 1E-+08 « STI « | & G je | Ai NSIS) SCI Nike WE WS RS ONG We JR || g | Co-6r 'x ter ‘eer rer « | 2 jor SW Ae | tite 16:9 66 Ge iG) OS WI | | | Ge 1 “|| 267 | FeTT|Sorsrt Li « ool « | 8 C F 6 6 T&|| 96 |S6 |08 F WE a mn? D | %o-41°} 661 « | Z & 68 & 9g Cle ~~ | | Nr | OWE QU Wie “|| 87 fr £0 ‘61 « vor « | 9 L 0 T ZA oe u T : alee | T T Co 61 « for « | S ‘ 8T F FL 96 66 | 82 6 NE We “16 dhe £o 61 « zor « | ÿ & 6 [A [A = | OC 0S) | 5 NA WE ais T | colı « 107 «| € © : A RA Ovo 5 0 Zi cata ER QUE 0° on Co LI « OOI « | Zz. 19413930} x 8 T 24 SG GF | 88. 18 “AYE 4 8 T £o ‘Lx ‘x 66 « | I 6 siney S © IT 0 IT Te 99 | FE \GE i | RS (HE 6§& ne | tor « a-e PSx « | © Nee 40 \49 66 6 |G | 98 IEE € WE 19 Wi “| ZZ lg | £oror « OSE « | z “|| PSE O | FIST 06 ~ |&& | 49 16 : Ste | NE 19 6 Zum fo6 « Lr « x 9 F 2 0 | || | D za REG, 2 va 9 typ | tole « gli « | © a & & 0 |" | OOF 6 5 | 16 & & | tole « Er «| @ G 6 at OOE | ~~ AZ WE WE dir Loge « Cin & | nS ‘ T | go |g0 OG \O9 | > We NP OUT ie & & | tole « SLI « | 9 “ | cé GS |SF 08 89 | LF (a 1108 | 87 188 P| fo-ge « blr « |S « FG Fe 0 HE 007 | #oildole ava 50 T cle Co ‘bz 1X OLI « + SW AE | aie GE 86 || 186 164 TA ; 106 | EE Td ip | took « Ler «| © ; = “110 3 a 0 T to 62 « gzI « | z Wa T GO |G0 sll Ses 09 a 3 WE WE We & | tobe « Gen @ ur iy Eg F ET rel gs log \Ge | te Vor le IF F "le £o lex gli eq! ı |© J9qtu299 1240390 :194.1end “Pv So S'o — — || o01 I i [ie (aaa I z £0 'IIIA Sze «| ı oor = ents es eal eee - : L : : : : fo) Fee Co « 681 Gillie 881-281 || oe gf |zo wit og | ce | ZL oe Pelle Er Jor jz 2 of Floh Co “TIA €1o «|r |€6 hre+ere || Cor | 66 | tro |gZ4Ell ge |oL |v 2 la Wat Pee à Je 17092 fo « gzo «|S I'l ier — |tprll WE }99 | °° 12 a et SEELE FR £o "XT ave «pr 6£E-FROI || o:£ Le |£'o |o:Sÿ|S'06 |S:6 | ° IZ |1|1|r jor |z | |e 819 fo « gio «| © 18461 || yor | vor | — lot 1g | 6r CZ |ı|Slzıır | vr || C2, L €o « Gro «| z off-+961 || zr z'I — 2:60 | ph | 9S : 6 Sole TS g > feet @ 174 £0 ITA pro og] I |z6 ay | 3 = 2 a o, > || © fo} io) 5 p, à © © ° a = | 3 a à ° aq © © A æ| © se 2/8 |°|lEls ss )Ekées es 8 lié les le syleway = Sl le 9 fe) so lala | © o Q a gm wnyeq jo sjeu.mof = fel iS. © B =| 5 alla = ie! 3 =) | @ = Jaqunyy a qe | See aR Alls lle oe 3 = 8 & “8 24} ur ney ule og ei 3 g es = au} JO ‘ON Ble = ET oO Inoy Jed yo}e9 5 sadejusalsd psınsesw usy JO JaqunN = 8. = ee eS — —— aaqusJdes—Anf :1971en0 ‘€ (panuyuoo) ITA SIdeL Svein || 20 121 |6'gr |] = | zo lot | og |hıS || || "|r (007 | Zoe} ~~ || px 2 Soe Fix S6| € | oe I 612 |grı|| “| ro | ¢ 16 \64g |" "|: ||: |r of Nobel: : 11618 ÿ | 8062 « (q) 76 al z Ion gII |T'ZL ~~ [61 | gr |LEz Bao ae Wiha EG | So Il Mere z | zo'oz « zo‘r H| x | 6S S Sg = |Z:60 NET | ZS L ws | EZ Cr GOW « « z«|z ch ov | zc |ege| be 14 |S ~~ |96 I ız |69 |S : 96 scare || ote Api (v)ı«|ı |¢s (6) € Gz |S'o |S:9£2| £6 |0S | Zr | ~~ Ilo e |e it “9 z | £O'SI [IX (q) 664| xr | ZS = 16 II |S:6Z |hgz|® |6 Jog | |TeT I PT | CGT) “| IgI | Bo Co‘tlelz | Ex giz C1 Gıız | Saiz'o | 9 |z6 | z |ESh I |6z |tır 6 “i oop e | ory « £o:£L«| 1 | 96 2 ove Sa 122 Lee co | or | re | 6 |C6r “lt |6ÿ | rot eV - | 6p Zz Log « Co'zL«|z |: < ol Gor | 6:66 |e:Sz|| °° |Sı |€g |z jor Sa nz loue ovr z zo ‘TT IX zo'Sy x |SS o 9 ¢ I 68 || oS | Zz | Sz OC 11€ |11 |g L : || of S |€o-Lr ‘or « 1brl € x 12 i7 || (S40) 1:92 || oS | zy |8 [At x |g |S I it € zo 6 « gr| z v v | to Fe} Zt |SZ |g a z | “Ne “|| 2x SLz | zo6 « (w) Zr «|x |6b x L — 2 Gzz Id er lau | 2 SIEHT ial keit z Borc x « g6«| Ir A II I oI ve or |1Z | 61 |r eS ee Sie ay Phi et OL « (q) £6 «| or A giz! ZL 11 |'oc € |6S | ge oz |: : gz |Lvp|o6z | ::| E94 | 4,8 | zog « (w)Elter rr «| 6 Ay Cr € or |E'Lz tz |g9 | gr |oS au id 157 oS GE | zog TIX «OI «|g = Grp S WEA? |) aca|| © |: €9 | 98 jieZor| OS \er |Z/g lege) | orız S COST « Sal Z | Ge) ec Oe epi "le Nay || om neue sales" nn oma feel nS | il aad K (vw) £ al 9 Perce 9 I S CO en ICS COS ES Er =P Oe Bee SS ee 6 ee lc zt zo le TX zo | S C1 4dooxa) ee 8 9 z |g:SE ll 62 |oS | xz jzo |zoS |-*| S$ \Sx\Sh1| g4z|grz}xz |°°| cof | 4%,69\Cogr-p1 « (v)«|r €1 L g |Soc| cr |6€ lo | © |ı6r | 12 oz | pL 69 |S ol nr s/1SI £o (vw) -St+ Cr JIx SseıHrer ‘gzr q] © PK) MU orm | — ore gt || | | 6x | 1g 00€ > Buell ee] = era al Kon fo'9L «| z @ = 2 el °° Le ey | EEE Mle) oui shed lise ase Dies tL Veal, “| © 7a COM Can zoe «| 1 gr Lo EST | 127 1) °° | 1 wert ZT [PP leone ey Soa 61 | vSr} °° | ÿZx / 1 £o'6 « £o'‘SLyl x | LY gt | Sg où ee = enzo? || ic WAS eee oe Sn 212 zT | TO "OT IX IL «| z | Sone || Leila || He dS] °° | Mae ea || eae lee EES So ate nee ioe |] 9 || em Fie zo ‘VI « it (ej) an HOY Ce | See | co Moe) @ 16 ||) |} °° Wowie eee eee ee | N z | zo‘6r « 91 «| z > en || eS I ee m. yey PO We ONE 1 ee OS Poe I ale ÿ || zo-6r « Mt NT) OS SF Or | 9ST stelg TE | -- ce za er ES ET (Sc He | zoe « LA «| z | ¢ ¢ R 468 || Sy | SS “IT 1S 19 A eg [ce 0 PA zo 'Ie « We ide y cr of |gzı | 6:00 | ı 69 | of 2 Mon een 9 ee | °° ee) Aa ee COGS KX Corer lee Pile ee | Gor Erz |rec| E ee | So a. CCE ailes 61 | ge Kaas gs Fer | zoSe « 6 «| S :U1B)199 aunt) [ps 9g | 45%] |goc! o1 | rg coma ; Sr |0g (056 Fe zo ST « g «| y jou 49729 [EJOL | Su ar el 2 Ve O7 | 2 Me oe heise eo? y fo Pe feel ue a, zo St « 9 «|e Lz HO EE) °° GIS Noy Ne ar erlassen Io |) a | ep UP: zo'SZ « + «| z GS || Tap az Wise ae WN ots |) a CE) CRC CON OSN CUS RD) 7 at | zo-Se-TX 4 Gj ne “ 606 |. — 606 | El | re | 99 (re À nn 38 |e9r\ | Fre | tr | to6 « 06 « “ F9 = F9 Sl SS) ten | | ze AE F | fog « 68 eq Toe I 00€ Zor] -° | Go |} ze | BL jo4e EE EN Er SM |obz\x || o4E | Ser | fo6 « « IZI «| € Loz z Soz |G:Z1|| "|x |e | SZ GC EN "|p | 46 |662| || Zee 61 og « (w)ozI«|z Sir || — Sie Were} 8 ae || Coy MHoyofss foo mie eo | == Nee) 66221 002 Bll Wow a (q) zg aj 1 | of L 9 |S'o TSE} Gr |ZZ |g == ar Wesley oles Lo |" D ED) RO T zo ‘OZ « 9z qd| I | tz ‘ FOI. 6 G6 Fe 16 JS INC 59 | eG GE GG ENS NC 9 | £o’vr « LOC AT (hans D NOT TE A PUTTEN CETTE 96 EL | 98. GGT || 08 | ET eo | || SSE @T|£o'tz'ez « £11 « | € Fi 2 Bic FR an 3 > a Be un “Io T Co'zz « BETTER z : 6 6 4 46 66 | 84 6 Se eee 07 ie ee |) T | to-ze « WOE Gp ar or à ge 0 | £ | 4 F | 96 WET || |: 9 |9 gar 287 | he | £o Sr « S6 «|€ : ST F | FL | 96 ee |84 | |6 1 Ge NN ar | fo-Sr « ve «|z ; IG 6 76 te 8 |78 | EL \96 ; @ ie | | Be T | £o°St « JON on Sir i sa SS A AGA ie ie. Er Go a | tees ssl dec UE ao =o 10° | Fr €0 "gz « ozI «|v > PRES à He ae Cr. Be 1e .. en dollars de OM on OD 0 &t),T Co “gz « 611 « © 2 | Os QU Wee SFG GE GS ee ES We zz 7 BE {iP | Cage « SIT «| z@ Pr tae a8 any >| oe 78 c.0 ZI gellselieall al: oo oc Be aH (ay T Co ‘oz « Sor « | t zı «| 2&0 | 8a \GEE oz Var 16d | EL Nee 72 109 16 | NES. 9 | Lola « ori Srr ‘tu « | 9 < ES cod .. = Iie .. .. .. Se, .eleeljlo.| ee wv. ws .. .. 0 T Co ‘ze « OII « ¢ « LE 0 LE oë| :: + leg Ge \F 520 \o [ro] re iq sen F aT Co 'Iz « 601 « | } “ | E08 | £F | SSE el EG | | 6 WE | | | | ler | 662 \é : FSI 6 |£0 Te ‘o7 « gor « | € a Sa 50 LE = a Fo ir 3.5 Rs voit ere Fa HD à £o ‘oc « Lor « z wa GE A (a) AS 108 08 er; G Hos all 3 iP L |. £o 07 x 7, qued «M's :¥ 6 gıt HOLE gLE €9£-+-z9e yueg sus :£— 176 +LS+ 108 ZSS--2SS--1tS LLE+-oLE+-SLE +le-+ ¢Le-+ Lot + 99-98 + SSE oSt-+tSb Sot-+-tot t6E-+-6gE SıS+roS+6°b+/5h zıt +oıt-+60b SgS-+-96t-+ 19¢ + 66£-+- zgE--oge (suny oz=Pr) JIA 3S Zet-+tg Lot+-Lge (« 22-91) 1A 3S (‘sw oz) ITA 3S 1s1nq| 339N | + | >A a Oy n u iN (e} £oz 99 on — an u DT HA le) a ON NAN AH AN MA MALTA Le] + Le) GARSTANG SEL RT APPENDIX H aaoqge pur ‘wo 0€ ‘19 OF mojadq 1230.1, ZIS IBvIOAY "wa 6£—of "wa 6z—oz "wo 61-0 [EJ0L ‘9 69—09 "ua 66—0S “wo 67— or "ua 6€—of ‘wo 62— 07 Jasuo] pur ‘wo oh .83uo] pue ‘wo of “wo 61—07 UID OI Mojeq (sınoy) yysned [eo] "um UT 9 tad y93e9 S988}U99194 psanseauu ysy JO Jaquinyy | ney yore jo uoneaneg "IX DX « ‘x « « "IX « DL « "IX IX x « ‘IX ‘IX IX IX TIX ‘IX IXTX TIX ‘xX USER « X CO ZI « CONTI Co cr « Morin « €o'1l ‘TIX Co'oz « zo'le « Co'gz « zo’ « zo’ « Co'L « ZONE zo’'or « tor, « z0o'9gE « z0 ‘02 'IX £ou ‘TIX aed saLIJunod jua.layıp 9} jo sjeu.mol ou} ur [ney ay} JO “ON Jequissaq—19q0}00 :1031end “Pv ‘ (panuyuo9) ITA eIdeL HAMHAHAHAMHHAMANHA OT aN SINHA OHA col DH HHA OS 1D punois yove uo [ney ay} Jo ‘ON puno.is ay} JO ‘ON © = 0 0 0 CO « L « AI = 001 001 go a0) T T (HOT a ten Mr à) « 2 OOI oS |9g | ro + | + 2 el I chy a z V | Ill Li a 9@_|| 66 ee eis) | eM) GE & | OF| + | F9L | | 20 | OF \é za ee « | X (6) [ge] 007 | \og |og | 08 | F 69 ca | OF A Cu || feito ANG: SER gt 5 9:01 \oor °|\&" |o& |82| SF E\ 8) seele |< lr | TON ve ¢ REINE ar = [eel 007 | ::: |sr |re | TG | 4 8 | FL| Fa 867 | © |98 |79 | TOL\ cer Sa EN ENT cr % 5 Zell Zn elle ere « n = a lager esse en) eo Wee | N me aN ese «- |F « x | 4 "1005 | 08 |g& |ge | °°: ro /90:0|60:0 1800| |F NENT take: are NS « = [zoe] oor| 162 Sz | | € || © |Zo 12 Cr SI a: Va ee er =. 9:98. |00L.| ea |e |< | FE £ | 07 90 | 926 09 | 808 | ST | « |8 on RE = |O0Z TT |98 | sc | FT CANCER OT IT 198 Fe | ga « | CEE EE: li esse 007 | |r |96 | & | 06 T | £8| 8 | 096 9 \8I6\9% | Co « | OF « « g « 9:98 |00E| + er |es |r 927 | + joe FE IFO) £69 | TF | 207 | FIG | \eogg) « |B | « Ix | n« (woz —) er10ysuT yf eee |00E | | |68 | OL || SE + | TE # | seg & |28e\FE | 66 GANG « « | ge (Woz-+) ex104sNO 2 le Gg |.OOT| © oc HE | re || 8 | + | @ | F | @ | G6 | T \8e | 9F | 06 Gila NT £ « III DOI 7:86 NTOL VD Te sa INT 96 | lO \¢9 | + | FOr | © | TG \TIE NT El ee AN « Teak STE || OOF ee TA | Ge || 6e | £&| 6 | 06 F9 |9& lore “ 9) « II 6 Ta || OOF @ SG | OF || OF =| 9 IF Wee D |08 \T& || 9 ley, « IX 08. 007 |: 8¢ | BF | & get | OF || 8& a lee ||| Bie « jE « Ill 9 | [se]! oor | or |06 |: ge | gol ¢ "| OF ENG 0e | € EZ « IX En a T a re Ne i 6 | se) | & har T \0F | ZF |F BR | « I IT S on : |00L\ "| 8 |69 ge “fee leg ||“ T zer € 9 x + ree |oor | Sr or | Lr (SZ:€| S:o\S-1 |SZ-r) ty Zz & He ot 5 I 2 pee | Fé || OOL | 6E |9F | SE || 2 2 ir & | & | Sor 08 |8F |48 | Ger] « |¢& « III 2 FE ||001 | Se | 0S | ça sc | 87196 ET F ie We cr logo | ea | FE à X Geo |oor| Zr | ©: | £g zz Elo] °°? [hepa 9 I DE Shz Sportal Y THA 001 |: = (010) a LO | kin || & ale § eq | 2 2, Ko € CSE | oor | z6 8 v Y + z6 Se |Z SL'61 S Y WV TILA > — _—— | | oz ||00L\ à \ee |89 | & |eer| For IFS Fo | 09 | rier |sE |G | SF « € « II—II z SE || 001 | : 08 | 08 | 9 |" @ TC) A NS je |G |) 3) II I Il > “= | de > | 5 a = 2 a 2 a || 9 = Ä SES ee 3 Zee ee 6 eat ee EN es Ses Sa ee le ee fe) = se. PEAR de » MELLE |e alii] si eile jel ais |e ls) Be | o 3 = = Boke 6 3 Sales 5 | = Saal lite 5 3 Be Go CA fe > & ° : ° 5 ° 5 3 4 ©, = og =} ®œ ® oO = © = a s | 5 3 = adejusdlad ınoy 194 yoyey yySneo ysy Jo Joquinyy = > > -Pugjjoog=ag ‘uapams = § ‘purjoy —=H 'Puesug—=y ewuusqg—eq Aueumy —g ‘unzpg—g :sonreuonen ‘(g) Meg weaq Aızurpıo ay) yyrM 10 (7) IAE) 1990 3007-06 94) UJIM sayopes ay} 0} saınay 1ay}o au) :(q) [MEH tayo s uasısjod YNM 10 (9) [Mey 19730 3007-05 ayy YIIM saypyeo au} 0} 19J21 5927272 Ur sandy ayy, :suorgeue[dxq Puno y9ea do] Sooeagae Ajaoydend) “IITA aR TS cm À cs a. Chan 5 zob |oor | oS = HOE Gs EN one za | PRET ET « IIA z #92 || oor | ce v or SE mes | 246 ae, « Il se 0:98 |] oor | SI 8 L GMT IN RE LES a z Vv X [98] | 007 | 08 ae ÉCRAN ©) XI VLE | oor | ve Ss or |sz |r 4 Sıyrallz « xl A |e 60€ |loor | I o 7 PL |e£ ON ea « I « x tige |'oor|£ 6 PA CO G « I « XI i Oge |'oor|z I @ WP |e (722 GQ | & Vv IIT ce CFE \66 | T & 106 |8S \F STI" EG € 2 « 6:82 |loor|z i Sa | cry l6rg |z Cr « (2 Vv XI , gE || LOT | SI = On [nn |°° £r « 9 a IA—A Ea Ne S:se |loor | SV I 96 Jol Er | °° 94 HM le cr « III ze jou ye in qe || I°Zz loor + 6 ı |bL jolz je |\Seg 7a | 4 Vv IX 26T \66 nn [A ler Teor2uge| £elareas| 9 © XI IIA I'SI || oor z |g |oz6 |€obz Q a z V IIA = || 00F | 0S oS T I ae T eq T ©) AT Ize |loor | cr I = © ji he ar ae > res IA ysy || 9’IE ||oor | Z © CE re | CS OS EC az Vv Ill 1€ SSzı :Iney sanoy fr 8E |O0T |: : COT \988 | 68 va |& 0) Ok 09 paanpar £065 fi o'Lı |loor | I “|¢ |pha jotg ||ST'S A S| sete sy X 0821 :jneysmoyıoy || 2’GT || OOL = BEE 5 L96T\0G0F| 8°9 | eq £ ©) XI peonpet tozs ir 6:91 |oor | | + | gr | zg |006 + | Lori6cZ |6SZr I |4lg \rggtSeS | ,Heqz| th V IIA FTG |O01 |. G |2¢ | 88 (FE | IL | FET 06 |8S20 T8 \S00E 629 | GZ Jar e) IA—AI gig |oor |: 2. |6€ | 65 1207 | + | Cr | €6zclorh oro] z Lz \vgog Strz6| SL'oc| 4 6 QE cx |6:q‘f:y| TA—A S6E |66 | °° | + | 4 | ee |E98 | "| 1 | &Z0 067 18668 86 |\EGOF\69FF| Sc) ed | TL ©) Ill II 192 |oor |‘: | 61 |€Z | g |£6 gr | Z9 |g |ogr “16g |gte |6€ ¢ alike, « TIL of VLE |loor zh | gt | oz 61 @ i) 7 94 aS Oe | [°°° v « z « XI Qe giv |'oor | #2 | 92 “NaS Nat Gx 00 We oz |Z | Jp BN A « XI-IIA | z'ct |loor | 09 | OF z i | it S © CA ; Gz Er; « « Lz o Lov |oor |oS | oS z i | i 12 CE ; ; z am « IIL oc re) TSE |loor St | ZZ |g : S:9 it | G to Hex 6 |\ien i Zz a | i Y X G6E 166 | SF |FG (IE gs | 9 | 66 GF \FG z ; 6 Gg 0) XI | git |oor | 1: |/9g | ee (or ©ı |Zo 26) nz 2 © er « III cz TIe jloor}/9 | 9h. |4y | x Gr uy A |Z + og ¢ Iv |ev |x 9 « z « XI ane Ne re > 5 Bad : lo ats 2 a ñ y ni GE Fe || OOF 6 |98 | & |FOL 6 | 06 \¢ 1669 FE |66G |GE 9 x T x X 68 || OOF GL | SE cae iE NEO Wh? WE gat & % T x XI : (007 OU 19:0 : PO) ic & GE eq £ ©) IT gre lloor| zz | ze | 9S (2 T| ı ac “16 a |e \s z @ || x V III 6x D |00E| 16 |\8& | EG IGGL). TI 127 |E9 FE Don FC PT of a | Zs « 6 & AL [oz] |\ oor GE EG | SE |8 EN a 6 177 G 6 |9 GG rd 6 D I 81 & > aS ee | TE 3 zZ > © = © = © = is) < i sole]... 9ı8|2| [Sell a) 2: 5 2 lee ul 5 Se RS =| elelsi2lelala,o ise) 5 |e) 2 Ble = os. 8 s/8/2|¢ SE) 8 | 2 Tis | ee ol Ba en © Bie Le] er de : CA be où 2 | “= © = og ay © ® @ G) Th D o bd 5 = nt Eu = pt Ch is A Q 5 2 a 3 = = ageJuaaıad ınoy Jod yo3e9 June ysy Jo Jequinyy = À = < (ponunuoo) IITA OIdeL | (ree |" | br [106 jpere] Lime ar)’ |1:q:v| IA‘AL | 2 ne der ae a é ce r é ae We In: |Z oe |Sor \€x 2 H € | & D EGG Gz ||oor | 1 | f | : sex || RM np ee OS aa] : De = vot oor) te |14 |S Le MEN (oe |) ITA novo de giz |loor oz lot l'or Se Ae le ich I I cal Ge as « III |v Bee ae a © &e > : ce @ ge 3 Z Boe cae 8 « | 2 IA 6€z |loor|***|z | IA | 6 066 TI Vv Vv | BoE ate ie ala) ee Ke rie i Be eee roe os ar ult. Weeedlqe Sol 6 lace s:v| mT |¢ oO O07 8 2 | A 161 oor]: | + |or | +S 6er | €9 |SZ |gger z |€€g SL | ox 1 qe © = Ni an gioz |loor -+ u te Lt \062 | + | 9 | Tr |L0o7 |616g |z or |ZhbS sex Slot gz qs 2 a M if a Goze floor; + |x |zo | Ze leer ar TN ae Eger ie > Be a 4 ly « IIA IP 6'91 || 001 + |z2zr | 88 eae 3 B ae + I ae gb lobr be |S€ a | z « IX—X 96e oor) : : zz (Lo | I je 2 reılgrar Ss V XI-IIA e6r oor} + |z job | gS !sıg | + | zx] Szlro€ Ses b é vor ee yee ie a & a 2 | S |e: ‘€:vl TA—A ag erie reel ue ne 7] . Cr |Gr © I I x | Aa a a zx) 6% ‘ose |p | vs jer | a @ | z 4 a E : i par 7 z | a ee ee € ITA = À 5 nee 8 c I z oo GL:z a I « IA ig ff ae CE Ne gt |g |S = || Sr anale ze 92 iv |b |o9 44 at & x 6r| gf |€ 6 |---\Zr Ich IZ Sz « I a 8 é loa tog ane ie: © ke I er | ee ar I bc ee Le z 192 Joby (SEE SLrias qs| 0 zz| 8gek6 |rL16 |---| oS lzgogl6tee| Sete] 4S qt 6 © | 661/€er |r60c Gites tir S112 | ee ee (a Till | | APPENDIX H: GARSTANG 8:92 || oor | Oz | oz | oz| oF |: =F + à | 2 g IL‘ 762166 8 gz | So! + |Eı ı je | 6 | + |gıe |92 |hg Loc |r ve a S « TIX Lilz|\oor}@ | 92 | o£; z |19 I | or | €v |ı |ébze|6S |SoZ |Le6r\gp | SLby| He WO) xx Vv XI-IIA 64z\oor |£ | of | zg] S 162 I | 6 | gr |x |6£gr|£o |SSS Igerıjeg £9 « €I z:q ‘II:w| IA-AI gıelıor ge | ce | gt) € |v Te tee ar | RES | 00 lower zz Sz'or « va a IH 69 gLlz\oorı | e | of | So € |6z | r | g | 61 |r Ih6Sz) gh 1694 8691164 || SZge « Zt |gr:q ‘I: ¥YI/IITA—IIA | 89 TOC “Fhe || Sal} Tor |] 2224] Com |) IVAN) ey ee VE Oe re 6 5 cg « z « IIIA Hs [exes a hia a Reo Gc an | ose els A esi jae = à 5 a IA 19 0:62 | Tor | I oy | 65| x |ge | | xt | Zr | + |ig6E |v |gSı Erz |e v1 « € |z:g'1:W |ITIA—IIA L2e\|66 |or | v9 | Se | | || wo erde) AN 7 War ll Gr ci © q IA r:ı@loor | oz | Sy | of] G |E go jer | zr +loz |? 6 |g |r ZL \HIAI| © « III 99 1:£€ |loor Zr | #5 | 62| «~~ \ex GQ pS Joe do. lor or jeer jl © I @ I « IX 0'Sc |loor |: | 8 06 | z fF | + |e | of |x |2Z6E |r [oe 760 6 zı ct € « A 9'gz|| 66 |9 62 | 19] © HIT vii ey W/, + |gge |€z Igor loze ıı lo CO | He qZ| 6 « II So £:Gz|loor or | or | of or|S So So |e |z jor |r |r 7 7 @ H I V IX g'ac || oo7 | I = 06| 4 ler || + | 11 |r Str | je {ror jg G6 « v « TIA 61 | cor| ~~" | of | og" |e SER ST, @_ | == joe “eee ip Ie Sa Sates HT z q TA mon aed | 982 | 001 ov | VS) "°° |r ::: [S'o |90 €1 “19 L oo Natcr (qe gril jr:q‘S:y | III “to yoo Sunemoo u | 7S} 66 | + |g | 8g| © ee | + |z | rer |6242] 5 eee Sıvalog | Gort) a Iz q A payuo (y) pq _ || FSeloor| + | 91 | 94] g ig | +] S Iz |z SEE |e ES 982 loz Lt |Hzeuede| 9 | c:q ‘Viv Ill ‘II | £9 6:01 | 001 | "|" eo \¢66l¢e | | \6O |SE ZE | | eee | OOF « 9 « XI IIIA LOL || OOF T | 6G6\%G | “160 | ve |eg2 |" “1d 1964 | Z°08 q SI d IAA |z give || 66 | + | 9 z6| ı (92) + |S | 77 |ı |S6Z |E | TON TOM |Z GcollHe YES |r:gv:v IX Lzz|ooı + | 9 zg| zrjiolt | + | 6 | orılız lo4gıız vor |gtStigze II |Heqeqt)| S V IIA 6:S$z||tor}~** | zz | Ze} z |1S +19 vy |ı jogııe (LEI grorSz | £z | He av) 4 2:9 9:7 | IA-AI |19 ztzlooı + | Vv Ssg| ıı S6r | + | Z gg1 zz otre SL \vegiieve Il |H? @I] € « IX - strz|66 + LS €6| x |S6z | ı | St | SZz\p |6Zrx| © 19 |6601Igr v H z TA —A G6:Cz 166. 4 + Zg| g 007 | + | 6 GLI\ or |\PSzz|x |46 |eL6r\per Sarre Ae] | erg ‘e:y Ill 09 Hana zlıl6 | + | + | Se} pLZigor | + | + | eh |gzı setz r |E #65 jooft Vr |HIAV|S | :q‘e:y!] IX-IX jo ney sanoyé/,; ese | © 91| 001 | ::: | + | 4 £6|oror| °° | xr | o£ |Stölegss| °° |S joge |S67S| S-¢ H v TA poire to, 32 Hz S:Yr | oor + | 9 | #6 |6pz.|h I GI | €€z||z6Gq| : : (or |€6E Egıg| Soc] ,He AS] or | &:q‘Z:¥ til ‘I 6S ige looı Ze | gb | Ze» |Z ge | € = see WS 17 We v oe lee a I « TIA 9:82 ||ocorj}or | SS | S “He roi BG | Ste te Wore No Vire, iar 6S « I V III gs Gof |loor | ££ | of | Lr “He I |Sı |S'o 9 & |e I ANS « I q IX Gee || oor | © z6 | 9 : 6 + |6 | + zS |ı (eb € cs « I « IIA Ize || oor | 4 69 | ve} © les S| Ae | 6x Zr | ex 611 |r See A I « Ill LS Sz || oor | I B 06| z |gSr | ı | 11 | zrılE Ego ov 1695 [er v H G Vy IX strz|66 |r S z6| ı |o% ı | © |Sg|ı crie Cac 6er berege Sept) U ZL |\€:q@‘v:y | XI—TIA £'Le | 101 | V Lx | gl} z SZ © | er | gS |r |eSh | 61 |SZ |1Se |Z 9 « € « TA £'ec || oor |< ov | zS| 9 |Sz + box | Or |r oS |x foe joz |€ z « [4 « III 9S -ınoy aed yo3e0 ut zbve||oor| + | rr | 2g] Z Issı | + | Zr | Get} 11 |eeg |r Jol | ZT Sy v H z « IX payimo(y)z6q 1 | 91c|66 |:::| + | gg} zılboh |: | @ | orb) 1S |oSgrh ~~ 6 1791902 vr |HI;aI| z V IIA ss 2 © 6 © 5 a © er a Sr © zZ ee œ 2 » > © as © ls 26) 8 |.) El ile) 8) sale) S 8, igs) Fe | gs = = = syıewoy 5 = Sia ° ° a ee a en) nee fe} oO LÉ o Sm a 5 = We Sal @ © -| Er) 8 | © @ | i i} | @ RE Sl AS © ei > ° (se, 3 b : 5 =I 7 5 5 5 5 : E | + ® =m 5 i ga où = oR . = DÉS) = 03 ae oO © 8 @® = ra © = = Er Se ei 5 fe) 2 ® a a 3 28E}U99194 Inoy sad uyaye9 qysnes ysy jo Jagqtunn es (penunuoo) JILA e1qeL GARSTANG APPENDIX H | =+ || oor | oor | ® | So |S'o x Een | « | I « | JITA 001 | £ve|\tor|6e | Er | 62| | |€o to |8°o L CIE is Seh | Gly « « 96 | -- | - SF Eee. nou 6 . o . el oe | RL | I 7 | TII 96 HIV||oo1)/o09 | CE | 4 © e}r | + “lof er or | |. Sl « GE val « TIA . EE - . . .. . ... u. lo | = | .. lee CL Lt! « | c « | TA C6 wed m :s | S:2p| o07 |loor | ::: |: Je ao | 220 | © a | ee I « TIX ued Su || zeit 007 | cg) | Ze | 1 L bye | + (fey or | r:S1| &. |© « | IX—X a yuegq Sims |! 0:7 |oo1ı |95 | zh | z 9 e|z | cor SL | he zıe en 6 « | XI-IIA ned “Mw sl 72)/66 | of | ZS | 9 S z | £ + oA or au | ¢-Le| ge Gr « | TA—AI Aueg Suns | 6 zy! oo7 | Zo | cf | 1 |: |6 gle | + gor \c6 je | | vee) « arn « | TA—AT ned MIS r€p)oo1|/ tS | gf | g | + ygerihd jes | x ea a ar Se a QE x at surg suuus | 26h |o0r 04 | 62 | 1 | lo bie | + og Sz it Peet = sq « 1g } « | IT“ z6 | €or }oor | 49 | fe nn eo SO) © En Cea Mee | Pc | eee | Sie « z | « (rer | 16 glz|\66 |, of | Sy| Zrjosı | xr} Sb | Lo | Ze |igttg gob 6261 YLec|6prr| coer, « gr | « | IX-X - ırz||66 |9 tr | 6€ | or|sez | Sr| PE | z6 | 6 |oost| ghz SSS SIST/gPS1| Sv'or| « | S « | XI—TIA S‘Lz||oo1 |or | tz | St zz|zg 9 | VI | gz | RTE « PARENT PLE || ror |'or | OL | vr} ı oz So var | € ZI « TAN Wels ©:er oo | zr | gS TI Goes oe al PES I « | IIX | Tot || oor | 0 | o£ | °° an by |6 I « IN 68 ger ||oor |oo | oF oe ef ey fe 61 « | IAAT | 88 L:£ti|loox |e | Lo |: I +|ı £ I « | II 98 Lob | 00165 | ıY ee er L | « UA | gS£||oor |oz | 09 | oz EI |Eo |go |£io | © « | IA 505 a = ono a) oc | . vests wine Sa Ier « I rg 9:82] 66 |zı | co | Se) jur De WEG Saal « IIX—X | o:zE| oor | Z gS | Lo) -- 168 2 | a M 9 « SGN oof|/oor}p | SS | ZE| + ve w || eu | © z « | A—AI g'o£ | 66, |Z | 6h} of) Z iv +|z |x S | « III |£g vzv||oor|€g | Si | z je Me vo | + Ve « XITIIA S:6€ || oor | gy | 2S Gi ire dees € « aw Lzv\\oo1| zZ | ge I Jo eo || °° 1220 « IT Ig 6 L£||oor1 | SE | 99 | 6 ::l9z 60 S'ı zo © « IX S:€C || oor | 6 ZL | vx zz vo Lı ro ÿ « XI—-IIA 0:62 |ooı or | OF | oS|::-\2r |r'o |S'o |go (LE 4 « TA—AI LSE|loor | LE | £9 200166 an die |p z | « I 0g L-1€ || oot | ¢ zl | Gz} 7 |egz | 6 | Loz) rz L | « TIX—IX €-Lz || oor | x ee | og] 9 |ivSr | © | of | &6 ie 4 « TIA L:Sz | oor | x ce oi} ee |, à CE en SI « DAN to:gz|oor | + | 6€ | 66 z |lız | x | ¥g | ger IT « WIL | 6z LIv||0o1|€g | ve € 9 Oe | @ leo 8 « LIN z'L£|loor |ze | 9 9 16€ zıı ve | z ¢ « TIA gLE||t01|y | 1) Zr) |€ jer jer So 9 « TA—AI zveloor ze | vS | zz} z |E Ko gr |ZLo Sı « III | gf CL ror ıe | €9 | Z of 6 | 61 | z L « IIX—X ze || oor | S So | of of1 | Z | vg | 6¢ 8 « SOLIDEN Seel Tor ınr | o£ | oz + | z | ol | v 61 « IA— AI | 9:22) oor|£r | SQ | Iz} x eh 9 | gz | 6 9 « nat 127 kıw|loor |€9 | 9f | x ge [Erz je | + © « TIA 2 z:ab.||OO1 | O9 | Ve | ~~ © 2 eu RS a V IA +L Sane RO Te een | Se | 5% ES Po = |) u a ITA 1 jed ur pa] Ane eat mo (y) iS'0§ gr | gue ||oor| pz | gr | of] ::: | uw || @ I GMS Sst I ENT || WAIN 97 glelloor | ız | gf] 1 | 6 z|L | + IT V IIA zl GSE or oe | v9 | Zi) + Id no AC I eI (1: ‘II:V| IIAZIIA Top] oor | Ze | tg |: : 6 Se om I « N tL z’gı || OOr en | lolo II sel ei II « IIA—II £ “| 8:61 1001 | "| ı ly| zeise |: | + | br br a TALE Moy 902—1904 Appendix H Contours 20 metres 40 80 200 AN a \ NE | vitzs) Je) gan N G5) wm, So) tay ede era) (92) ne peel) Nr ty ov Razer 1 vo i) ves jaws) 150 1A + > \ > nde meee a | : NOTE tel Rare sd MIGRATIONS OF MARKED PLAICE — SUMMER — Fish liberated from March to May, 1903, (exc. No. 1, in 1902) All recaptures shown up to June 30, 1904, except in cases mentioned. Places of Liberation marked thus ©, with Arabic numerals to distinguish the expenments. Contour-lines define the areas of recapture for different months or periods, with a few exceptions, In soma cases the positions of individual recaptures are also indicated within the contours, when possible without causing confusion Roman numerals represent the months of recapture (I. = Jan. elc,). Arabic numerals in brackets represent the original lengths (in cm.) of the fishes on liberation. Experiment Date | Remarks Fab berates 7. IV. 1902 | 15 recaptures near place- of liberation omitted. IV. 1903 | aly | 2. || 3 | The contours in these experiments overlap, and 2 || are not distinguished separatelÿ.— In no. 7, 4 + |[recaptures in 1904 are omitted. | The contours Include both experiments — 24 Recap- tures after Jan. 04 are omilied; all except two were East of 7* 12 after March ’04 (all near Heligoland) omitted | 2 alter October omitted. | & et Contours combined | 2 after Feb. 04 omitted | 4 after March ‘04 omitted. 60 30 foo 200 Joo #00 soo do 120 vo Mo 600 Kilometer 7 3000000 300 naut: rules General-Report: 1902—1904 Appendix H Contours 20 metres —= Cromer armani | \ Lowestolt@ fan Va arr ET any wog MIGRATIONS OF MARKED PLAICE — WINTER — Fish liberated from July to December: 1902, Blue (exc. No. 1); 1903, Red All recaptures shown up to June 90, 1904, except in cases mentioned. Places of Liberation marked thus ©, with Arabic numerals to distinguish the experiments. Roman numerals represent the months of recapture (I. — Jan., II — Feb, elo.) Arabic numerals within contour-lines represent the numbers recaptured wilhin the limits defined for the differant seasons. Arabic numerals in brackets e. g (29) represent the original lengths (in cm.) of the fishes on liberation. — Experiment [rin liberates Remarks 1903 | Seasonal contours red. 5 2 blue 1902 1903 1902 | 3 Recaptures in same place omitted 1903 | 1902 | Recaptures In 1904 omitted x 2 alter Feb. 03 omitted . 1903 R = March 04 omilled 5 Recaptures In-same place omitted, (Veen aimee ne od he 16 18#+42+14 ’ 11 20. X. 1902 4 1903 11 21. X. 1902 a6+12+62 | 22 1903 29 15. L 3 a D, 2 59 19. X. 1902 Experiments E. 25, 28 and 29 in Sept and Dac. 1903 off Terschalling are omitted from want of space. They confirm the general results of Experiments E. 1, 2. 3. (9 and 10 on the chart) in 1902. LL = = = = = = = © \9° \10° 60 Jo 0 60 200 720 600 Kilometer x 7 3000000 300 naut: rules “ » + = U be! ‘ h 3 - + J . ‘ su D ia + f 4 | { Pon ae Î I my! “ A 5 . à à “ L d'u dt CORP NT us sort nen 00€ Ove ORL 02 09 0 0£ 09 | 0000009 "I ojawmory 009 008 00% 00€ 00 001 0 001 — — - A EE ee Cae 0 Sa ET a SE — EE — —— — = ns = = = — : en me a — = = ar | ee | | : | | seale (001) eur jo uonısod au} SUIMOUS 28g YON au} Jo Weyd COX ee SHOT > | | ap" £ D = ron y Sa ‚nrukos) / SX In N \ L 1 LÀ doll ybnosoquen yy x \ auky uo SPIMAN += SPRUS & hs ) \ i young ySanoqı es BRRT 4 ll 5 \ Zero \ “37°F ENV'TI09S| ‘ LU 1 DE = i er id 14440 era] 4 \ „-- -- --- -—---7 u b: q - x ll - t == = = = =: Se = = - Lens = = = = = 1.0 I a H xıpuaddy F06I— 2061 :Hoday-jeseuaH D APPENDIX H’ THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE PLAICE ON THE DUTCH COAST PRELIMINARY NOTICE BY H. C. REDEKE WITH 4 FIGURES IN THE TEXT (TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN By À. M. KYLE) x ï * ‘ Dr a uA 14 SPORT Le D'AUTEUR: see Whe plaice, Pleuronectes platessa L., is never absent from the hauls made on the shallow sandy grounds of the North Sea extending eastwards from the 3° of longitude and south of the 54° of latitude into the German Bight. It is one of the commonest inhabitants of the West-Frisian “Wattenmeer” and of the estuarine region of the Dutch North Sea provinces. Differences occur, however, according to the region and time at which the plaice are taken. They are larger further from the coast and on the same grounds, larger plaice on the average are taken in spring than in summer. This depends upon the well- known fact, that the plaice is a migratory fish which always moves further from the coast as it grows older. This characteristic distribution was known to the fishermen of old and has also been commented on by the older Dutch authors (van den Ende, Venema, Schlegel). Later Holt, Cunningham, Mc. Intosh, Petersen, Hjort, etc. have made the same observation and studied the matter more in detail. For the Dutch region, Hoek was the first to give some considerable examples. The smallest plaice were taken quite close to the coast, whilst those taken about 60 Eng. miles off had the largest average size. During the last two years, our investigations, which were devoted principally to the study of the habits and habitat of the plaice, have already led to a preliminary, yet, I believe, a tolerably comprehensive insight into the peculiar and for the practical fishery highly important distribution of this fish on our coast. The material for these investig- ations was collected by the research-steamer “Wodan” on twelve different cruises in the North Sea and by smaller boats on numerous excursions in the neigbourhood of Helder and in the Zuydersee. It has been proved therewith, that the investigation of some fixed, well-chosen observation-stations formed an excellent method of studying the periodic fluctuations in the occurrence of the fishes. In accordance with the directions given in the Christiania program, the method of the investigations consisted in a complete as possible analysis of the entire catch of each haul, which generally lasted two hours, regard being taken for the number, size, weight, age and ripeness of the fish. Graphic representations, frequency-polygons, ee according to Petersen’s method, were then employed to demonstrate the results. The measurements required for the determination of the average length have been based on material consisting of more than twenty thousand plaice. This number is quite sufficient for some of the questions considered here. It has thus appe: as already observed by earlier naturalists at other places — that the characteristic distribution 1* Introduction Material and methods Eggs and larvæ First bottom-stages The plaice of the first year EN CR Re APPENDIX H’: REDEKE — 4 — of the plaice on our coast depends very closely on its mode of life and can only be understood by a detailed study of the phenomena accompanying its growth. The plaice of our region, of the North Sea south of the 54° of latitude, has many years ago been shown to be a distinct race by Holt, Cunningham, Kyle, Duncker and others. This race is distinguished in general from the plaice of the northern North Sea by its smaller dimensions. It was to be expected beforehand, therefore, that our plaice do not pass beyond the southern part of the North Sea but remain there during their whole life, in other words, that this part of the sea forms their “dwelling-place’, and that there must be a close connection between the habits of our plaice aid the special biological and physical conditions of this dwelling-place. So far as investigations extending over two years entitle one to form conclusions, this seems actually to be the case. As everywhere else, the plaice in our region spawns in winter. It is impossible, however, to state the exact limits of the spawning period as yet, especially as the principal spawning time falls in different months in the different years. Nevertheless, most of the plaice eggs were obtained in February and March of both years and chiefly in the southern part of the region under survey. We have never taken them in very great quantities, however, nor have we succeeded as yet in finding very large shoals of spawning plaice. It appears as if the fish do not seek out any true spawning-places, but spawn their eggs more or less in scattered fashion, preferring in this the most southerly part of the southern North Sea as far as the entrance to the English Channel. The eggs spawned here develop in the relatively warm (7°—8°) and saline (> 35 °/oo) water coming from the Channel into the North Sea and are carried slowly by the stream in a north north-westerly direction a considerable distance along the Dutch coast. As soon as they reach the bottom-stage, the larvæ must consequently fall to the bottom for the most part in relatively deep water (25 to 35 m.) some distance from the coast (30 to 60 miles). It is generally believed, that the small plaice reaching the bottom in such depths and so far from the coast must perish, because they are never found on such grounds, even during their first year, and because it is considered impossible for the quite small fish to be able to travel actively the wide distance which divides them from the littoral zone. It is certain, however, that this does not quite hold for the southern North Sea, at least, in its eastern portion. Firstly, because we have taken (September 1904 and again in November) small, first year's plaice, 70 to 80 mm., in water of 30 m. depth at 50 to 60 miles from the coast. These were doubtless born and had grown in this deep water. Secondly, the small plaice on our coast must certainly travel great distances, as they are found im quantities, for example, in the innermost parts of the Zuydersee where the plaice never spawn, and where no current exists which could carry them there. In the brackish water here, the little fish do not all seem to find favourable condi- tions for rapid growth, as they grow but slowly. Their average size in July amounts to about so mm. and only about 60mm. at the end of January. This small increase in growth may however be in part due to the fact, that the largest of these plaice in their first year, i.e. of the O-group, as it is usually called, find their way out of the Zuydersee towards the end of summer, and betake — $ — APPENDIX H': REDEKE themselves to the cooler water of the true “Wattenmeer”, i. e. the waters around and between the Frisian Islands. The chief resort of the smallest plaice of this year is in the “Wattenmeer” on the shallow sand-banks moderately warmed in summer. Thus, they are found in great abund- ance on the shallowest parts just below low-water mark along the whole Dutch coast. Finally, they have been found to occur in the Oosterschelde where similar conditions prevail as in the “Wattenmeer’. In April, the little fish of the Scheldt had a length of 14 to 30 mm., in June from 22 to 76mm. In July, 94 plaice of the O-group taken at Helder measured 35 to 69 mm. (M. = 50), the majority 47—53 mm.; at other places, they had a length of 50 to 85 mm. In September they had grown to 54 to 111 mm. (M. = 65) and in October to 55 to 114 mm. (M. — 76). In the following February, these small plaice had grown to 8—9 cm.; but they are now of the I-sroup and no longer of the O-group. ‘The plaice of this group, now in their second year, are found in the shallow water during summer and autumn together with those of the previous year, but more fre- quently on somewhat deeper grounds in the neighbourhood of the coast; in spring, they are as close to the coast as 10 to 15 m., in autumn and winter they are tolerably far out to sea, about the 20 m. line. They seem to grow but moderately in the spring: from January to June only about 2 cm, as their length in the latter month only reaches 10 to 11 cm. on an average. In June and July, as soon as the water of the Wattenmeer and shallow coastal zone of the North Sea begins to be greatly warmed, the I-group travels back into deeper water. The majority of these plaice, especially the largest, have now left the Wattenmeer and moved into the open sea, where they dwell in the coastal edge down to depths of about 20m. They grow better here, as their length, which is about 11cm. on an average in July, reaches to 15 cm. on an average in September. Again, it is very striking, that plaice of the same age taken in the Zuydersee at the same time show a length of only 11 cm. on the average, thus considerably less. A good haul of young plaice (240 specimens) was made in the Zuydersee on the 17 of September- It consisted of specimens of the O- and I-groups, as was proved by investigation of the otoliths and can be seen from the accompanying percentage frequency-polygon (p. 6 fig. 1.) The continuous line refers to this haul, the broken line to a haul with the otter- trawl covered by finer netting (647 specimens), which was made in the North Sea at the island of Vlieland on the 20% of September, thus 3 days later. The difference in size mentioned can be clearly seen from the curves without further explanation. The plaice of the I-group seem also to grow little in winter, as we found the average length at Vlieland to be always 15 to 16cm. from November to March, and at other places, at Egmont, 14cm. This was in March: they were thus no longer of the I-group but belonged to the Il-group, i.e. they were at the beginning of their third year. The plaice of the Il-group frequent the coast to about the 20m. line in spring; up to July, they grow about 2 to 3 cm. and have then an average length of 16 to 17cm. At this time, they occur though rarely on the true fishing-grounds in greater depths. In summer, however, they move in great shoals from the coast into the deeper water, and from this time onwards are found in numbers on the grounds just mentioned, their The plaice of the second year The plaice ot the third year The plaice of the fourth year APPENDIX H’: REDEKE BOG place in the shallower regions being taken up by the next generation as described above. From this it appears, that a great migration of plaice towards the deeper waters takes place each year in summer and autumn, sometimes earlier, sometimes later, and probably also not at the same time everywhere. The well-known fact, that the smallest plaice are taken on our fishing-grounds in summer and autumn, can thus be explained. The IL-group now mixes in the deeper waters with the III-group, which predominates — there in spring and is the objective of the energetic trawl-fishery carried on especially in the months of March to May. In September 1904, we found the II- and IIl-group mixed together almost everywhere in deeper water. Larger shoals of the Il-group are constantly arriving, however, until this group finally predo- minates everywhere in the central part of the region investigated during Novem- ber, and the November hauls on the true fishing-grounds consisted almost entirely of plaice of this group. The accompanying figure 2 (p. 7) which refers to hauls — made on the Brown Ridges, one in June and one in No- vember, is one example out of many which may illu- strate what has been said. In autumn, the average Percentage frequency-polygons of two hauls of plaice, September size of these plaice varies ee a hel oats eS | nove eee to a haul made in the North Sea at Vlieland (647 specimens) con- is different on the different sisting chiefly of the I-group. fishing-grounds, in such a way, that the largest speci- mens on the average are always taken on the most distant grounds (e. g. on the Brown Ridges), the smallest on the grounds nearest to the coast (e. g. at Terschelling lightship), thus exactly as is the case with the preceding generations. In autumn and winter, the plaice at the end of their third year thus form the chief component on our trawling grounds. As is well-known, the plaice are mature at this period. That is, for our region: some of the males and exceptionally also some females become ripe in the next spawning-season. These belong then, however, to the Ill-group, i e. are in the begin- ning of their fourth year. Most of the males of this group noticed to be mature had a length of about 20 cm. In January, however, we fairly frequently took males of 16 and 17 cm. with running milt. Fig. 1 — 7 — APPENDIX H’: REDEKE Ripe females of this group were only taken in a few instances. We caught some which had a length of 25 cm.; these were quite the smallest ripe females which have as yet fallen into our hands. The majority had a length of 30 to 32 cm. and were in the beginning of their fifth year. I may remark incidentally, that these results confirm Kyle’s observations, which likewise indicate, as is well-known, that the male plaice are in general mature a year earlier than the females. If we return to the Ill-group, we see that the fish of this group constitute the main pottion of the plaice on our most important fishing-grounds in spring, and that among these there is a relatively considerable number of mature males. At this age, it is extremely difficult to ascertain the average size of the plaice, quite apart from sexual differences which are very important from the third year on. In this group, the phenomenon al- ready often mentioned is % specially well-marked, na- 4 mely, that the individuals of the same age are larger the further they are taken from the coast. In-March 1904, for ex- © ample, plaiceofthe Ill-sroup 5 taken atVlieland were mostly 6 19 to 21 cm. long, those on , the Broad Fourteens 23 to 25 cm.; again, in June, those taken near the coast were fé EE CONE En EN EN PT Et EEE en 21 to 22 cm., those in the central part of the region 25 to 27cm. In September, Fig. 2 Percentage frequency-polygons of two hauls of plaice made on the Brown ‘ Ridges. — The continuous line refers to a haul made in spring (June ’04) this group has almost en- and consisting chiefly of the Ill-group, the broken line refers to a haul tirely disappeared from the made in autumn (Noy. 03) and consisting chiefly of the Il-group. coast; those taken in the open sea varied greatly in length, as the catches consisted chiefly of a mixture of the IL-group and small specimens of the I[I-group, obviously late migrants during the summer. In addition, larger specimens of the Il-group (up to 31 cm.) also occurred. In November, lastly, it is only in the hauls in the central part of the North Sea, that the III-group occurs somewhat abundantly. It is replaced everywhere, however, by the Il-group, which at this time is distributed over the whole region. The female plaice have now also reached the age when the majority are ripe for the first time. How large their number is and the proportion of males in this group, have not as yet been definitely determined and must remain uncertain for the time being. The plaice belong now to the IV-group, i.e. they are at the beginning of their fifth year. From this time on, when the size of the majority lies between 25 and 35cm, they suddenly become comparatively scarce. Plaice of the IV-, V-, VI- etc. groups belong in general to the rare occurrences in the hauls on our coast and are taken almost ex- The plaice of the fifth year. General remarks Uniformity of the distribution APPENDIX H’: REDEKE clusively on the distant trawling-grounds. This peculiar phenomenon, which has also been similarly observed with regard to other fishes, is explainable on the hypothesis that the fish die in great quantities at the spawning-time. How far this occurs also for our plaice can only be determined by further investigations. At present, we still lack the necessary material to be able to give certain data regarding the rate of growth and distri bution of these older plaice. The survey given here indicates only the main lines of the life-history of the plaice on our coast. It must be admitted, that the conditions are not quite so simple as might appear from the description above. Above all, it has only been incidently remarked, that the plaice may also develop far from the coast; these consequently do not take part in the general, periodic migrations or only slightly. So far as we can judge as yet, how- ever, this occurs but exceptionally. On the other hand, a relatively large number of individuals of one generation remain behind, when the others migrate. This has only been determined by a careful compari- son of the results of the hauls. It is always the smallest specimens of a group which are found together with the next younger, and the determination of the age from the otoliths has especially enabled us to draw limits where the ordinary graphic method is not sufficient to show the two different year-groups, just because the one years group is always but imperfectly represented in the hauls and is as it were fused with the other. This method of determining the age, whose worth, it appears, is not generally recognized, has shown itself to be quite indispensable and practically never a failure in investigations under such conditions as prevail on our coast. Nevertheless, the picture just sketched of the distribution of the plaice is complete and correct, so far as can be judged at present. If we leave the small exceptions out of regard and consider by themselves the dominant groups on the different grounds of our coast and their respective average lengths, a surprising uniformity appears in their distribution. This becomes very apparent if we draw lines on a chart connecting the places where plaice of the same average size were caught. h These lines, for which I would propose the name “isomegalins’, show a course which runs in general parallel to our coast. I have constructed such isomegalins for the condition as regards the plaice in spring and autumn in the region under our survey (about May—June and November— December). These give, as the accompanying figures show, a clear view over the differences between the distribution of the plaice in the seasons referred to (see figs. p. 9). The dotted curves are the isomegalins, the Roman numerals indicate the respective age-group, the Arabic the average length (rounded to 5 cm.) of the plaice living on the grounds concerned. The contours outlined show the boundaries of the fishing-grounds* in the region fished by the Dutch steam and sailing trawlers. These show how the I-group in spring keeps quite close to the coast and how the Il-group also frequents only a narrow zone. The population on this littoral region is t A= Broad Fourteens and Brown Ridges. B — Texel Ground (or Haaks Ground), C = Terschel- ling Flat. — 9 — APPENDIX H': REDEKE thus very dense’. The IIl-group, which on the inner edge has an average length of 20cm. and 25 cm. in the central part, is now distributed over the entire region from about the 20m. line outwards. (Compare the number on p. 7). In autumn, the position has quite changed. The I-group, which has now grown from 10 to 15 cm., has become distributed out to sea, and the Il-group of about 20 to 25 cm. now predominates in the central part of the North Sea. The distribution thus appears to be a function of the size and is so uniform, that one can almost say the plaice on our coast are so many centimeters long when the depth in ‘which they are taken is the same number of meters. Sn Fig. 4 Spring-isomegalins for the plaice Autumn-isomegalins for the plaice on the Dutch coast. on the Dutch coast. Concerning the causes of the migrations of our plaice, we know as yet very little. me In the first year, they probably depend chiefly on the food, to the extent that the majority and certainly the larger plaice go away from the regions where the food is poor; thus, the largest of all can travel the furthest and those left behind in consequence of their slight nourishment grow but little. The salinity of the water seems to have no influence at all (except on the develop- ment of the eggs), as the plaice (and other fishes also, as is well-known) can change with the greatest ease from water of ca. 17° through all intermediate stages to water ot double that salinity. They probably possess some regulating apparatus, by means of which they are able to suit themselves to the altered salinity, somewhat as the homæo- thermic animals can adapt themselves to temperature-changes. It is of more importance, however, that the conditions of salinity in the region display very slight annual variations, ı In March 1904, for example, we caught over 10,000 plaice belonging mostly to the II-group (mixed with I-group) in a one hour’s haul at Egmont. Appendix H’ 2 Concluding remarks APPENDIX H’: REDEKE a ee so that they can scarcely account for the great periodic changes in the distribution of the plaice. It is different with the temperature of the water. We certainly cannot detect the causal relation without experiments, but we can certainly recognize a parallelism between the annual changes of temperature and the periodic migrations of the plaice. As already mentioned above, the eggs develop in the central part of the North Sea, that is, the warmest and also distinctly the region of greatest salinity in winter and spring. As they travel northwards, the temperature of the water gradually rises, so that in April and May the coastal region and the central part of the North Sea have almost the same temperature. From this time onwards, the temperature of the coastal region and the Wattenmeer rises quickly under the influence of the warmth from the mamland, until in midsummer it may mount to over 20°, whilst the central part of the North Sea remains relatively cool and only gradually reaches its maximum-temperature of 16° in August and September. We thus see, that as soon as the temperature of the coastal water begins to rise over about 15°, the plaice in their second and third year travel seawards into the deeper and cooler water. It appears as if the warm coastal water did not suit them. The plaice is not the only fish which shows such a so to speak “dislike to heat’. The flounder does the same, as they are known to leave the warm littoral region in midsummer and migrate far out to sea. In autumn, the temperature in the neighbourhood of the coast and in the Watten- meer rapidly falls, whilst the deep sea still retains its relatively high temperature far into October. It is in January and February, that it first reaches its lowest temperature and this is the time when the larger plaice frequent, as is known, the deepest parts where the water is always some degrees warmer. That we have been able to reach the results described above, has only been possible, I believe, because we have fished as uniformly as possible on fixed stations, and have endeavoured constantly to compare the changes in the population of the bottom which appear in the course of the year. As we chose the stations so that the majority are in the centre of the principal fishing-grounds of our region, whilst others are near the coast where the fishery for prac- tical reasons is not carried on or only exceptionally, and as we have also taken the Wattenmeer into consideration, this small report may contain, even as it is, a not un- important material to assist in the preliminary orientation of the occurrence of the plaice in the southern North Sea and the fisheries questions regarding Holland which stand in connection therewith. Our results will only be able to attain real value, however, if and when they are shown to be in agreement with the observations of our neighbours who begin their work where we leave off. à AIR OFT TRUITE APPENDIX J STATISTICS OF THE NORTH SEA EN KEINE PARTI | THE FISHERIES OF THE VARIOUS COUNTRIES BY P. P. C. HOEK ano H. M. KYLE N.B. Great Sweden, with Tables I-II (by H. M. Kana) doncsov's soy HAE Saas eds ee CONTENTS il, 2. Norway, » D IV—IX (» = 3. Denmark, » » X—XVI (» = 4. Germany, » » XVII—XXXVIII (» P.P.C. Honk, translated from the German by | 5. Holland, » 2 RRXIK DIE NM PSE ON lela dM RER UOTE a 6. Belgium, » » LIV—LIX (, — RM RSS Deere ANTON ae 7. France, » » LX—LXII (> TD Sadoso naeh 5 8. eee A UPON Oh NES TELIA Gah a yee es cones Mobenoapané Mr 9. Scotland, + EXXII-LXXVIT( — PR cea Pa a Br assistance has been given by Hr. P. KoBBERNAGEL in preparing the s Rt I. Sweden The Swedish fisheries of the Baltic have already been dealt with by Trybom and W ollebek (see 4). In the following, only the west coast fisheries in the Kattegat, Skager Rak and North Sea will be considered. This includes the entire fisheries of the provinces of Bohus and Halland, and the Kattegat fisheries of Malmöhus. As the Swedish statistics are on a social rather than a commercial or scientific basis, the information to be gained from them is somewhat limited. The Swedish fisheries may conveniently be considered under three divisions: the «bank» Fisheries of the or deep-sea fishery, herring and mackerel fishery, and the flat-fish fishery. Each has its ans distinct mode and region of fishing and even type of boat. The deep-sea fishing is carried on usually from March to September by the boats of Bank Fishery Bohuslän. Some of them remain in the Kattegat and Skager Rak, fishing on the banks near the Skaw, others go further off to the Jutland Reef and the banks off Stavanger and Bergen in Norway, and others again to the north of Shetland and even to Iceland. The main products of this fishery are the cod and ling, and long-lines are the fishing-instru- ments used. Each boat has from 40—44 lines («backor»), each line being 360 fathoms long with 60 hooks. Within recent years, the old type of boat, the bank-sloop, of from 40 to 70 tons burden, has given way almost entirely to English fishing cutters. During this deep-sea fishing and also in the winter fishery in the Kattegat and Skager Rak, haddock and whiting are taken on the lines, but not in any great quantity. In the herring and mackerel fishery, nets are employed in four different ways, either Ne as seines («vadar») to enclose a narrow stretch of water, or as purse-seines («snörpevadar») ; He after the American fashion or as fixed gill-nets («sättgarn») i. e. driftnets moored to the bottom, or as «driftnets» («drifgarn»). So far as the herring is concerned, the second method Works of reference: 1. Tryzom, F.; Jakttagelser vid sillfiskerict i Bohuslän, 1880—81—82, from «Nordisk Tidsskrift for Fiskeri». 2 _ ; Fisket i Halland; (1883) 1885 et seq. 3. — ; Atgärder for Fiskerinäringen: Landtbruksstyrelsens berättelse für ar 1902. 4 — and Wozzesæx; Uebersicht über die Scefischerei Schwedens; Publications de Circonstance, 13 A, International Bureau. 5. Maum, A H.; Berättelse üfver Göteborgs och Bohus läns hafsfisken: 1886 et seq. 6. LunpserG, R.; Meddelanden rörande Sveriges Fiskerier, I-II, 1883—1888. 7. = ; Fishery and Fishery-Industries of Sweden: Catalogue, Bergen 1898 Exhibition. 8 — ; Svensk Fiskeri-Tidskrift 1892—1902, by E. Lénnzere, 1903 et. seq. 9 — ; Atgärder for Fiskerinäringen: Landtbruksstyrelsens berättelse for ar 1901. 1* APPENDIX J: SWEDEN SS is nowadays the most remunerative, and is employed chiefly during the great winter her- ring fishery on the coast of Bohuslän, from off Gothenburg to the Norwegian boundary. The fixed gill-net («sättgarn») is also employed during the winter fishery, but to a much less extent. For the autumn herring fishery in the east Kattegat and southern part of the Sound, drift-nets are mostly employed. The drift-net is also used in the mackerel fishery, which is carried on in the Skager Rak and northern Kattegat, from May to the middle of July. Seines are likewise employed for the mackerel at a few places in Bohuslän, during the summer. Later on, from July to September, whiffing for mackerel with »dörj» is carried on in the Kattegat by the small decked boats of the coast, and in the North Sea by the large deep-sea cutters. A great part of the mackerel taken in the North Sea is sold in Norway, chiefly in the south-western province of Mandal, at the towns of Christiansand and Arendal. Plat-fish Fishery The flat fish of most importance within the region considered, are the plaice, turbot, sole and halibut. Other species taken are brill, long-rough dab, common dab and lemon dab. The chief fishing grounds lie in the Kattegat on its shallow western flats, and the boats from Bohuslän and Skaane go to fish there along with the Danes. The boats mostly used now are of the so-called «kvasse»-type, that is, a cutter with 5 to 7 men and of some 5 to 20 tons, provided with a well in which the plaice are brought alive to market. These boats are now adopting the «snurrevaad» or so-called plaice-seine of the Danes. Formerly however, the chief method of fishing was the gill-net, and this along with hooks and lines, is still employed along the deep and rocky coasts of both Halland and Bohuslän. The halibut is obtained on the lines of the deep-sea fishing boats, in the deep water of the Skager Rak and northern Kattegat, but in relatively small quantities. In addition to those mentioned, several fisheries are or used to be of considerable importance. Until within recent years, green cod (G. virens) were taken by the Bohuslan fishermen during the summer, and a certain though never very great amount of hake (M. vulgaris), but these are now omitted from the statistics. Until 1899, the hake was taken at certain places west of Orskar, but in that year the fishery was a failure and the fishermen have apparently not since returned there. Of more importance are the salmon, lobster and sprat fisheries. (See Table 1.) Statistics The Swedish statistics for the region here considered, i. e. Kattegat, Skager Rak and North Sea, are found in the annual reports on the fisheries of the districts of Halland and Bohus. Each district has a small separate publication for itself, in the one case (Bohuslän) as a report to government (governor of the province), in the other (Halland) as a report to the provincial board of Agriculture of Halland. These reports are quite independent of one another and likewise from those of other provinces. Within the last two years, however, a general summary of the value of all the Swedish fisheries, so far as known, has appeared in the government inspector’s report which forms part of the annual report of the Board of Agriculture (3). Since 1890, this Board has had the administration of the fisheries in its hands, and the chief inspector of fisheries, Dr. Trybom, is one of its members. During 1904, the whole of Sweden was divided for the purposes of fisheries administration into 6 districts, each with its fisheries _ — 5 — APPENDIX J: SWEDEN intendant or inspeetor, and the west coast provinces of Halland and Bohus, which have hitherto been somewhat independent, are now taken together as one district. Information from the statistics Only in a few instances, is it possible to state the quantities of fish landed, in most cases only the values are given and several species are combined together. The total value of all the Swedish sea-fisheries in 1902 was at least 5,531,000 Kroner, es 0, and of this sum ca. 3,500,000 Kroner came from the fisheries in the Kattegat, Skager Rak coast fisheries and North Sea. Of the latter sum, ca. 1,300,000 Kroner came from the deep-sea and mackerel fisheries in the Skager Rak and North Sea, the remainder from the Kattegat and immediate neighbourhood of the Bohuslän coast. The following table will give a general notion of the value of the several fisheries. Table I. Value of the Fisheries on the west coast of Sweden! (Bohuslän and the province of Halland) mm 2020202001 Year Cod ete. | Herring | Mackerel a Lobster | Flat-fish | Sprat Salmon | Total Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr, Kr. Kr. Thee Sane 757,000 | 2,412,000 | 396,000 | 124,000 | 141,000 | 16,400 | 89,800 | 87,600 | 4,045,000 1892... 625,000 |1,273,000 | 307,000 | 76,000 | 117,000 | 29,300 | 57,100 | 85,600 | 2,608,000 1893..... 637,000 | 1,786,000 | 569,000 | 118,000 | 161,000 | 34,200 | 44,800 | 72,200 | 3,447,600 Ieee Ane 653,000 | 2,238,000 | 484,000 | 107,000 | 189,000 | 51,400 | 45,000 | 69,600 || 3,860,000 HSOBe ER 717,000 | 2,435,000; 223,000 | 135,000 | 196,000 | 69,900 | 34,300 | 87,800 | 3,925,000 HISSG see ae 709,000 | 1,328,000 | 216,000 | 158,000 | 184,000 | 86,300 | 39,300 | 91,300 | 2,831,000 Haute 738,000 | 1,684,000 | 361,000 | 144,000 | 283,000 | 109,400 | 114,400 | 96,000 || 3,558,000 S98 740,000 | 1,697,000 | 515,000 | 146,000 | 261,000 | 105,000 | 113,800 | 84,300 | 3,694,000 1899..... 855,000 | 381,000 | 756,000 | 137,000 | 281,000 | 127,000 | 93,400 | 87,900 || 2,759,000 1001... 846,000 | 1,104,000 | 609,000 | 143,000 | 374,000 | 156,000 | 107,500 | 99,000 | 3,464,000 190190. 853,000 666,000 | 749,000 | 149,000 | 339,000 | 192,000 | 33,800 | 100,900 || 3,119,000 1902..... 726,000 | 907,000 | 725,000 | 149,000 | 436,000 | 225,000 | 48,900 | 116,000 | 3,390,000 N.B. 18 kroner = ca. 20 shillings. The column with cod etc. means several different species. It includes the deep-sea Notes on the fishing of the Bohuslän cutters, a portion of the coast-fishery of the same province and a = portion of the fishery from the province of Halland. In these cases, it is impossible to se- parate the one species from the other in the statistics, so that they have all been combined. The deep-sea fishing brings in chiefly cod and ling, the latter mostly from Shetland. Haddock and halibut with other species are also obtained, but apparently in relatively small quantities. ‘These are also included under the one heading and the quantities are not stated. The coast-fishery from small boats has increased within recent years. The species taken are the cod, haddock, eel and flatfish. The cod and the haddock are here taken together, the remaining species are comparatively little in amount. ' The total value includes all fisheries of Bohuslän and Halland. The year for Bohuslän begins with April 1st; the year in which the nine months fall, is used in the above table. The Kattegat fishing from the province of Malmöhus is not included. Its value was 90,000 kroner in 1901 and 99,000 kroner in 1902. Plaice is the chief species taken. APPENDIX J: SWEDEN ENG — The statistics for Halland give the cod, haddock, whiting and flounder (P. flesus) combined; the flounder, however, is in insignificant proportion. The cod etc. is thus a heterogeneous collection. Further, the winter fishery carried on by the large Bohuslän cutters in the Kattegat and Skager Rak, might have been included under the same heading. The chief species taken are the ling, cod, haddock and halibut. The herring is chiefly the winter-herring of Bohuslän, which is taken by seines and fixed gill-nets. It is of interest to note that this fishery can be traced back some centuries, and like the herring fisheries elsewhere, has been subject to great fluctuations. From the beginning of last century to the decade between 1870—80, the herring seem to have been absent, at least, the fishery was of no importance. Then, within the course of a year or two, there sprung up a great fishery which, with considerable fluctuations has continued to the present day. The cause of these fluctuations has been closely investigated by Scan- dinavian scientists, who have come to the conclusion, that the presence or absence of coastal bank-water, coming from the North Sea, with certain characteristics of plankton and salinity, determines the presence or absence of the herring. When this bank-water penetrates to the shores of Bohuslän, there is a fishery there. It may be also, that the modes of fishing, restricted as they are to the immediate neighbourhood of the shores, have something to do with the fluctuations in the quantities of herring captured. The maximum period was from 1890 to 1895, and of recent years the fishery has fallen off considerably. On the other hand, the drift-net fishery during autumn, which is considered quite distinct from the other, has somewhat increased during recent years. Whether this is in part due to the extension. of the fishery into December, thus overlapping the great winter herring fishery, so that the drift-nets now share in the catch of the winter herring, cannot be determined from the statistics. The herring-fishery of Halland, which is included in the above table, is considerably less than that of Bohus, but of recent years its value has remained above the average of former years, being at present ca. 100,000 Kroner. ‘This fishery, like the drift-net fishery of Bohuslän, takes place in the autumn. As the quantities of herring captured are stated, it is possible to give the following table. It may be mentioned here, that the total value of the herring fishery in Sweden, je. including, in addition to the above, the fisheries in the Sound, southern Baltic and the «streamling» of the Baltic, so far as known, amounted in 1902 to 1,810,367 Kroner. This represents ca. 200 million herrings!. During the period 1890—95 however, the Bohuslän fishermen alone, must have annually taken as many herring several times. This quantity does not represent either the total for all Sweden, as only for 2 (out of 13) of the Baltic provinces are particulars forthcoming. The mackerel season begins early in May for the Kattegat and Skager Hak, and drift-nets are then used. Later on in the summer, the fishing with “dorj” takes place in the same regions, and the deep-sea fishing bvats also use this latter method off the west 1 The quantities are given in valar, kilogrammes, hectoliters and tons. Approximations, based partly on Dutch and English measurements, are: 1 kilo. = 8 herring 1 hectoliter = 650— 700 — = 80 kilo. 1 ton = 1000-1200 — = 100 kilo. 1 val = 80 — LOX he a APPENDIX J: SWEDEN Table II. Swedish Herring-Fishery of Bohuslän and the Kattegat. Year Quantity Value Total Value Kr. Kr. un | 2 au en ee ER nenn 1,786,467 Te OU 1509690 Hy 08 690 2,237,867 | | te | men 1806 ir ior 350 a 210190 1,328,382 ISO ETS ss N En 1,683,982 18 u A 189901... 0% ann Le 183/007 381,185 m | | tok Too. es Te a Eden 666,058 | HE | 5 | sv . and south coasts of Norway. Part of their catch is landed in Norway, and this quantity seems to be entered in the Swedish statistics as well as the Norwegian. It appears from the table, that the mackerel fishery is one of the most valuable of the fisheries on the west coast of Sweden. Within recent years, most of the fish have been taken by the large cutters in the North Sea. A somewhat smaller quantity is taken by the drift-nets in the Kattegat and Skager Rak during early summer. A small quantity of mackerel is also taken each year off the coast of Halland, so that this species penetrates into the Kattegat during the summer, though in very small quantities. The flat-fish, whose total value has greatly increased during the last ten years, include plaice, turbot, sole and halibut chiefly, with dab, long-rough dab, brill etc. to a less extent. The plaice is by far the most important, amounting in value to more than two thirds of the total. An estimate of the quantities of plaice taken, will be given later in dealing with the Kattegat plaice fishery. Some 50,000 Kroner worth of plaice is taken annually by the fishermen of Malmohus from the Kattegat, and more than 100,000 Kroner by the Bohuslän welled boats (Kvasar) on the deep grounds between the Skaw and Leso. The sprat fishery, which is carried on by means of seines along the coast of Bohus- län, is of interest in that the sprats, when taken, are converted into anchovies. ‘The quan- tities have somewhat diminished within the last year or two, but the fishery is very variable. 1 1 valar — four score. The returns of the winter (Bohuslin) fishery are given in heetoliters, those ot the autumn (Bohuslän and Halland) fishery in valar. Boats, average price etc. Herring APPENDIX J: SWEDEN eG r= The lobster fishery is greatest along the Bohuslän coast and is increasing in value. The average price of late years has been from 12 to 13 Kroner per score, and the best lobsters may obtain as high as 24 Kroner per score. The salmon fishery referred to here, is only the strand- or sea- fishery, the river and lake salmon-fisheries not being included. It is of greatest importance in the province of Halland. In addition to the above, the oyster fishery of Bohuslän is the only one separately distinguished in the statistics. It is of but small amount, from 3 to 10 thousand Kroner annually, and of recent years has been nearer the lower than the higher valne. In the account given by Lundberg of the Swedish fisheries (6, Il), data are found with regard to earlier years than those taken here, though only for the fisheries of Bohuslan. From this we find, that for the period 1859—1868, the average number of boats engaged in the bank or deep-sea fishery was 124 and their average annual earnings, 2835 Kroner from this fishery alone; during the period 1869—1878, these numbers had increased to 143 boats and 4682 Kroner; for 5 years of the next decade, the numbers were 182 boats gaining on an average 3932: Kroner. In 1891, the number of boats engaged in the deep-sea fisheries beyond the Skaw was 91, but it has increased steadily since then and ca. 130 boats are now engaged. Of these, more than 80 are of the English cutter pattern. These averaged in 1901 about 38 tons each, and carried on an average 10—11 men. The average yield of the fishing in that year was 126 Kroner per ton or 500 Kroner per man. There are also about a 100 boats of similar type, which fish mostly in the Kattegat and seldom go beyond the Skaw. In 1901, these numbered 124 with an average of ca. 12 tons. They only carry from 6 to 8 men, and the average take for that year was 122 Kroner per ton or 230 Kroner per man. This fishery, as stated, takes place in the beginning of summer. Later in the year, most, if not all, of the same boats take part in the winter fishery of the northern Kattegat and Gulf of Bohuslän. To ascertain what these boats actually earn in the year, it would be necessary to include the product of the mackerel fishery. This cannot be done however, as the information is not sufficient. The ling is the main product of the deep-sea fishery at Shetland and the average price for this fish, which is sold in the salted or dried condition, varies between 1 and 2 Kroner per fish. The average price of the cod from these deep-sea fishing grounds cannot be made out from the statistics. The average price of the cod obtained in the Kattegat has varied very little since 1891. In that year it was ca. 18 Gre per kg., in 1902 it was 20 Ore per kg. having varied between 12 Ore and 35 Ore in the intervening period (90 Ore = ca. 1 sh.) It may be mentioned here, that a Swedish company in Gothenburg started steam-trawling | in 1901 with one steamer, which is intended to fish in the North Sea. Further, some of the deep-sea cutters are now being fitted with motor and auxiliary screw. The first attempt at trawling made by Sweden, was in 1898, when a fishing boat, fitted with steam-motor and auxilliary screw, began trawling in the Kattegat and Skager Rak. So far as the herring fishery is concerned, the records are fairly complete. In the Bohuslän winter herring fishery, the number of boats engaged in the fishery with seines is not stated, but the total value of the apparatus and the number of men are given. We CE APPENDIX J: SWEDEN thus find that, for the eleven years 1891—1901, the average annual value of the apparatus used (seines, gill-nets and boats) amounted to ca. 1,292,000 Kroner and the number of men on the average, to 5041. The average catch was 1,231,100 Kroner, or ca. 95 %o of the value of the apparatus. The best years of this fishery were 1894, 1895 and 1897 when the gross income was over 160 % of the value of the apparatus. The worst year was 1899 when only 33 %/o was obtained. It will be noticed that, so far as the quantities taken per man or per 100 Kr. capital are. concerned, the fishery has been, comparatively speaking, a failure since 1896. The number of boats engaged in the drift-net herring fishery from Halland and Bohus, has increased within recent years, being now about 250 in all, and the number of men likewise to over 1300. The average catch per boat has also increased. The reason why the value of the catches, per 100 Kr. of capital, is much less here than for the seines, is that the season is much shorter, being about 2 months as against 4 months. Table Ill. Average gross earnings of the autumn and winter herring-fisherles of Bohuslän ——— 2 Drift-nets (autumn-fishery) Seines (winter-fishery) — Total Nees Bunter Re per 100 kroner er man per 100 kroner |pr.100kroner boats : j capital : capital capital | Nr EAU noel asa hl. Sa Kr. Kr. NS OD Peers pra 131 39,877 286 | 1,440 10 510 232 182 83 59 TEÉRIRENERES 122 46,000 |» 603 | 1,639 21 733 372 239 121 91 W894... 137 76,900 | 1,014 | 2,881 38 613 478 206 161 122 SOBRE ae a 146 68,871 973 | 2,700 38 726 487 244 164 127 HSE EE 176 34,659 819 | 1,425 34 107 334 45 129 93 SM... 189 15,660 457 658 19 204 457 81 181 118 EO Serer 176 32,343 713 | 1,388 31 95 383 30 122 97 LS: 172 30,865 722 | 1,343 31 29 89 11 33 32 1E LICE 168 78,038 | 1,924 | 3,312 84 61 217 24 85 85 SOUR Aya soe: 178 46,338 | 1,191 | 1,775 46 59 135 24 56 51 NGO ZF PEN. 182 61,830 | 1,187 | 2,437 47 34 214 13 81 67 The average price of the herring is excedingly variable. At Bohuslän, it has varied between 80 Ore per hectoliter for the winter herring (1 Kr. per 100 for the autumn variety) during the rich years of the fishery, and 6 Kr. pr. hl. (or 3 Kr. per 100 for the autumn sort) during recent years. As a hectoliter contains about 700 herring, it is evident that the winter herring do not obtain a great price. The mackerel fishing is pursued both in the Kattegat and Skager Rak, and in the North Sea by the large deep-sea cutters. Taking both together, the number of boats employed has not decreased since 1891, being 543 in that year, 516 in 1895, 582 in 1899 and 637 in 1901. It is possible, however, that some of the smaller boats are counted twice, as the fishery with drift-nets in the Kattegat is carried on at the same place as the line fishing, though the latter is later in the year. The average price of the mackerel has varied, since 1891, between 3 and 5 kr. per score. Appendix J 2 2. Norway The fisheries and fishery statistics of Norway form a striking contrast to those of the other countries considered here. There is, comparatively speaking, no deep-sea fishing and yet the fisheries are of great value. This is due to the open nature of the Norwegian coast, and the peculiar hydrographical and other physical conditions prevailing there. The statistics are likewise peculiar, as they are remarkably detailed and accurate for several kinds of fishing, but do not exist for others. Modes of fishing There are three chief modes of fishing in Norway: by nets, long-lines and hand-lines. The hand-lines, of course, date from time immemorial; the long-line, i. e. line with many hooks along the bottom, seems to have appeared in Norway in the first half of the 17th century; and the nets, i. e. gill-nets, about the second half of the same century. So far as the cod fisheries are concerned, far more boats and men employ the simplest forms, i. e. long-lines and hand-lines, than the nets, the proportion using the latter having decreased during the last 30 years. Official Publications: Beretninger om Norges Fiskerier, 1868—1875. (issued 1870—1877 by «Departementet for det Indre».) Statistik over Norges Fiskerier, 1876—1878. (issued 1879—1880 by «Det statistiske Centralbureau».) Tabeller vedkommende Norges Fiskerier, 1879 et seq. (issued 1881—1900 by «Det statistiske Centralbureau»; 1901 et seq. by «Norges Fiskeristyrelse».) Aarsberetning vedkommende Norges Fiskerier, 1894 et seq. (issued 1894 et seq. by «Norges Fiskeristyrelse».) Works of Reference: 1. Der Ertrag der norwegischen Fischereien und die Teilnahme . . . nebst der Ausfuhr . . . in Ueber- sichten dargestellt. Statistik over Norges Fiskerier i 1878. 2. Statistics of the Sea Fisheries of Norway during the year 1881 ete.; published by «The Central Statistical Office». Christiania 1883. 3. Report on Norwegian Marine Investigations 1895—97. 4. Report on Norwegian Fishery and Marine Investigations. vol. I, 1900. Joan Hyorr and Kyur Dann. 5. «Les Pêches» in «La Norvège, ouvrage officiel publié a l’occasion de l’exposition universelle de Paris 1900». Christiania 1900: 6. Fiskeri og Hvalfangst i det nordlige Norge; Joman Hyorr, Bergen 1902. 7. Die Seefischerei Norwegens. Bericht von W. Decker, À. Hence, H. Henkıng. Abhandl. d. deutschen Seefischerein-Vereins. VI, 1901. es APPENDIX J: NORWAY A further characteristic of this cod-fishery, and indeed of most of the Norwegian fisheries, is that the majority of the boats are quite open and of the old viking type. The broken nature of the coast, with its many fjords and sheltering islands, renders the use of such boats possible. The gill-net is from 25—30 m. long (80 to 100 ft.), with a mesh of 7 to 9 cm. (3 to 3'/2in.) on the side; 24 to 40 of these may be joined to form a long chain, and they are fixed either near the bottom or near the surface. In the cod-fishing of the north, however, (Finmark) the mesh is smaller. Similar nets are also employed for herring, but the usual mode of fishing for this species, as for the mackerel, especially in open waters, is with the drift-net. Another method of procedure is, to «barricade» the herring or mackerel into a corner, by means of a sweep-seine or series of nets placed across the opening of a small cove or part of a fjord. The most peculiar form of net is the «synkenot» or «notlag», a square piece of net some 80 m. by 80, which is let down flat to the bottom and connected at each corner to one of four boats. It is evidently of great use in the herring fishery, particularly of the fat or summer herring. Trawling of any kind is practically unknown to the Norwegians, though some steam trawlers have appeared within recent years under the Norwegian flag. As might be expected from the modes of fishing, the principal species of food-fishes for the Norwegians are the round-fish, e. g. cod, herring, salmon and mackerel. Other species of less importance are the haddock, ling, torsk, Norway-haddock (Sebastes), green cod, halibut. The cod however, is by far the most important, contributing from 40 to 60 %o or even more in some years, of the entire product of the fisheries. Inasmuch as the fishermen remain for the most part at fixed places along the coast, it is evident that the fisheries must be chiefly periodic according to the habits of the fish. Thus, the cod-fishery takes place almost entirely during the first half of the year, mostly March and April, when the cod appears near the coast to spawn (Lofoten) or to feed (Finmark). The herring-fishery is in early winter and spring, when the herring are spawning, and also in summer when they are said to be feeding. The mackerel fishery again is also in summer, and so on. Whilst the broken nature of the Norwegian coast, which extends ca. 1,800 miles measured along a line just outside the islands and fjords, offers opportunities for a local fishing of some sort everywhere (home-tishery), the principal coast fisheries are carried on at certain fixed places, and have for the most part remained the same for centuries. The principal cod-fisheries, for example, are over definite banks of a sandy or muddy nature, 30—100 fathoms in depth, which are separated from the rocky precipitous shores of the mainland by deep channels, and lie close to one or other of the many islands off the coast. The chief of these banks are in the Lofoten archipelago of Nordland (Norwegian Sea) between 68° and 69° N. L. and about 450 nautical miles north of Bergen. From these, the banks extend northward to Vesteraalen and the Malangsbank off Tromse. The fishing there is in depths under 50 fathoms. South of the Lofotens, at the same time of year, an important fishing for cod takes place on the Sondmore banks off the province of Romsdal, ca. 120 nautical miles north of Bergen. These fisheries are of full-grown spawn- ing cod («Skrel»). Another fishery for cod takes place a little later in the year, on the far north coast 2* Fishes of greatest importance Fishing-grounds APPENDIX J: NORWAY = Oe of Finmark (Arctic Sea). This is second in importance only to the Lofoten fisheries. The cod (Lodde-cod), however, are not of the same kind, being smaller and non-spawners. They are then feeding on the «capelan» (Mallotus villosus), a salmonoid which is supposed to come from Arctic waters in order to spawn near the coast. There do not seem to be definite fishing banks in this case, and the fishery is somewhat variable from year to year. The herring-fishery takes place all round the Norwegian coast, between the islands and in the fjords, but at different places at different times. In spring, it is mostly on the south-west coast (North Sea) along the provinces of Stavanger and Bergen, and more especially in connection with the towns of Stavanger and Haugesund. The winter-fishing for the large herring (Storsild), is carried on further to the north (Norwegian Sea) along the provinces of Romsdal, Nordland and Tromso, whilst the summer-fishing (fat-herring) takes place in the same regions, and in some years further to the south in Christiania Fjord. The mackerel fishing, and the salmon and trout fishing, are of much less value than the two previous. They are carried on for the most part along the North Sea and Skager Rak coasts, though there is also salmon-fishing in the north. The summer-fishing for ling, halibut, green cod etc. is chiefly carried on in the northern regions (Norwegian and Arctic Seas). In addition to the above fisheries (called the coast-fisheries), a certain amount of fishing goes on beyond the islands and banks, i. e. beyond the territorial waters (deep-sea fishing). Cod-fishing is carried on in the Skager Rak and beyond the territorial limits off Sondmere. A considerable fishing for ling and torsk also takes place in spring and summer on the deep slopes of the Norwegian Sea, north from Sendmere. Further, the fishermen of Finmark and Tromse go as far north, in the summer time, as Spitzbergen and Jan Mayen in their search for cod. Of greater importance to Norway than these latter are the walrus and whale etc. fisheries. These are carried on at the Færoes, Iceland and in the northern waters between Nova Zembla and Greenland, and engage a large fleet of boats (over 150), many of them being steamers. Statistics The Norwegian statistics, published in the «Norges Officielle Statistik», go back to 1870 (for the year 1868), though data also exist for much earlier years, and have been characterized from the beginning by the amount of detailed information they provide. As they are specially trade-statistics, the species represented in the tables and the modes of classification are such as are used for commercial purposes. Further, the quantities exported are given in detail, but the amount of the home-consumption in Norway itself is not stated. The difficulties connected with the collection of fishery statistics, on account of the extensive coast-line and many inlets, is perhaps greater for Norway than for any other country. The manner in which the statistics are collected is not mentioned in particular, but in addition to the officials charged with the supervision of the fisheries and who furnish reports to the government, there are regular governmental bailiffs with several assistants, at the more important places. By these means, the reports give not only the details with regard to quantities and values of the fish landed, and number of boats and men, but also a good account of the progress of the fishing, the conditions at the fishing-places and so on. oak TS u: APPENDIX J: NORWAY The report on the statistics is divided into two main divisions: the first part giving comparative tables for a number of years, the second part giving the details for the year. The form taken in the first part, is first of all, to compare the value on landing, of Bra cf tke the (coast) fisheries for the year with the corresponding values for the six previous years. en The value of the fisheries aceording to region is then given, the whole Norwegian coast being divided into four main regions, viz. Skager Rak (from the Swedish boundary to the Naze), North Sea (from the Naze to Cape Stat), Norwegian Sea (North Atlantic from Cape Stat to Ser Island in Finmark), Arctic Sea (from Sere to the Russian boundary). The numbers of fishermen engaged in the principal fisheries are then stated and com- pared with those for a period of years (to 1876). Then the values of the several fisheries are dealt with, the comparison being taken for six years. Whilst these deal with the fish landed and the market-values, another set of tables give the quantity and value of the fish exported. The various species are given according to the trade-divisions, e. g. herring as fresh, salted, smoked etc. A final table shows the average export-values of fish over a period of years. In the second part of the statistical tables, the details are given on which the above summarising tables are based, and given in the most thorough manner. In Table 1, the number of fishermen and the market-value of the different fisheries are stated: (1) accor- ding to governmental distrists (““Amter”); (2) according to parishes (“Fogderier”); (3) accor- ding to places (“Herreder”). In Table 2, corresponding details with regard to the cod-fisheries in particular, are given of the number of boats and fishermen in the different provinces etc. The various modes of fishing, net, long-line and hand-line are separately distinguished and likewise the amounts of the various products of the cod-fishery: liver, roe, heads. In Table 2b, the average prices in the different regions are given. In Table 2g (1902), the manner in which the cod is disposed of (as salted or dried fish etc.), is stated. Table 3 gives similar details: for the summer (fat-) herring fishery and Table 4 for the mackerel fishery. In Table 5, these details are given for the other kinds of herring, for sprat, salmon and sea-trout, and lobster. In the report for 1901, the data given in the tables over many years, are gathered together in graphic representations serving the same purpose as curves. | It may be mentioned finally, that the form of the Norwegian statistical tables has remained practically the same since the year 1876 (report published in 1879). General information from the statistics From what has been said above, it will be evident that the statistics of Norway, though not quite complete in one or two ways, furnish an important body of facts whose definite- ness and accuracy cannot be surpassed in any other country. What is specially commend- able in them, is their uniformity over a long period of years and the clear and precise manner in which the information is given. In the following tables for example, the total quantities and values of the most important species, and also their average price, can be Cod fishery APPENDIX J: NORWAY EMA = seen over a period of nearly 40 years, though the records previous to 1876 are admit- tedly imperfect. A little further explanation may be given on various points. The cod fishery is for the most part of full-grown large cod (“Skrei”). The Finmark fishery, however, which is the second in importance of the Norwegian cod-fisheries, consists chiefly of smaller non-spawning cod, as already mentioned. Hjort, in calculating the weight (kilograms) of cod from the numbers, uses 4-8 as the factor generally, and this has also been employed here. Table IV. Average Quantity and Market-value of the Norwegian Fisheries since 1866 Abel Herring Mackerel Sou Ge magrhua) (C. harengus)? (S. scomber) Namen Weight Value Quantity Value Ra Value Kilos! Kr.? hectolit. ? Kr. Kr. | SET) re 46,900,600 | 225,122,880 | 10,720,000 | 1,377,200 | 7,451,200 || 6,911,200 | 656,800 NSM) anges ene oc 48,647,200 | 233,506,560 | 14,721,000 || 1,250,400 | 6,445,200 || 7,146,000 | 792,600 USO 200 er 57,901,200 | 277,925,760 | 13,886,000 | 997,800 | 6,313,800 || 5,260,200 | 674,400 as RD | 49,625,400 | 238,201,920 | 12,027,800 || 644,800 | 5,024,000 || 5,561,200 | 745,400 1886 see eee 58,836,600 | 282,415,680 | 12,602,400 || 1,208,800 | 4,224,000 || 5,135,600 | 586,800 NMI. ne: 64,884,600 | 311,446,080 | 14,308,000 || 1,461,800 | 5,076,800 || 3,247,000 | 438,600 1896—1900.......... 1 46,431,000 | 222,868,800 | 12,077,800 || 1,308,000 | 6,410,400 | 2,372,400 | 354,000 I DIN a easy pee ral 40,216,000 | 193,036,800 | 12,602,000 | 1,090,000 | 7,241,000 || 6,178,000 | 938,000 IS Bags ae ciate oe 45,217,000 | 217,041,600 | 12,895,000 || 1,188,000 | 7,923,000 | 5,563,000 | 671,000 Orne d Total Market Salmon (S. salar) etc. RER Lobster (H. vulgaris) Value of all Species Fisheries Weight Value Value x Value i Number in 1,000 Kr. Kilos Kr. Kr. Kr. 1866—70............ » 231,200 1,082,400 >. 256,000 20,398 1871—75............ » 325,400 1,420,400 » 271,400 23,976 1876—80............ 368,600 397,400 1,717,200 1,111,800 341,600 23,330 ASSIS EP EME ENS 419,600 438,600 2,874,000 1,146,800 411,200 | 21,527, LESC OU FREE 556,400 595,400 | 2,465,000 860,000 401,000 20,883 SOLE O5 MERE ee 688,400 729,600 2,977,780 595,000 357,200 23,897 1896—1900.......... 798,800 944,200 3,966,000 610,400 483,400 24,252 OME yer. Seer. 786,000 1,029,000 5,273,000 668,000 524,000 27,593 OOD hei Samed * 754,000 962,000 6,320,000 749,000 589,000 29,364 The maximum take of cod recorded for one year, was ca. 71 millions in 1893 and the average since 1866, 52-7 millions. From 1892 to 1897, seems to have been the highwater mark of this fishery, and the years from 1898 onwards to 1902 have been amongst the 1 1 kilo — 2.205 Ib (Eng.); 1 cod = 48 kilo. 2 Sprat and small herring are included. ® 18 Kroner = 20 shillings approximately. 4 1 hectoliter = 80 kilograms approximately. Ra RES APPENDIX J: NORWAY lowest. Nevertheless, considering the enormous numbers involved, the fishery has remained remarkably constant. The great fluctuations undergone by the cod fishery are well shown in the following curve, representing the course of the Lofoten fishery since 1872. The fisheries at the different parts of the coast vary somewhat with respect to one another, but the Lofoten group of islands stands easily first with some 40—50 %%o of the total, Finmark second with about 25—30°/o and Romsdal (Sendmer) third with about 10—15 %o. Within recent years, an offshore fishing beyond the islands in Tromse pro- vince has also sprung up and seems to be of increasing importance. 5 6) 7 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 3637 38 39 40 1872 73 74 75 76 77 78 PSS I2S8888200000880589325A% a Table V. The Yield (number of cod in millions) of the Lofoten Fishery during the years 1872 to 1903 (for the years 1872—1898 from Hjort and Dahl, 4, p. 182; for the years 1899—1903 from the official statistics) The herring fishery embraces several different sorts of herring. The summer (fat-) Herring fishery herring and the spring (spawning) herring fisheries are of similar proportions and value, but the winter fishery of the large herring (Storsild) is relatively more valuable, though less in amount. The sprat and small herring fishery of the North and Norwegian Seas is of considerable amount and value, though less than the others. Fisheries in the different coastal regions Offshore Fishing APPENDIX J: NORWAY le — The salmon and sea-trout fisheries here taken account of, refer only to the coast-' fisheries, the river and fresh-water salmon fisheries not being included. estate “Other species” are chiefly the green cod, halibut, ling, torsk ete. They form the main species of the summer coast-fishery and have increased greatly in value (probably in, quantity also) within recent years. The quantities are not given. Comparing the total value of the Norwegian fisheries, as shown in the last column of the Table IV with the values for these species, we see that the increase in the total is in great part due to the increase in these species. h Though no record of it is kept, the plaice is probably included amongst these species, and a few words may be said concerning it here. The plaice-fishery has been carried on from time immemorial in the southern part of the country — in the north, only during the past fifteen years (4,p. 138). Although the Norwegian coast is not suited for plaice and the quantities taken, so far as known, are small in comparison with those taken elsewhere, yet the possibilities of an occasional plaice fishery seem to be considerable. Accor- ding to Hjort and Dahl, some 200,000 kg. (4,000 cwt.) passed through Trondhjem alone during 1897. These plaice are of the largest size (from 50 to 70 cm.), and as many as 50 fish weighing 1 tende (ca. 220 Eng. lbs.) can be taken in one haul. The spring is the season when they are most taken and is said to be the spawning-time (March, April). The fishing is prosecuted by means of spears and nets (gill-nets with mesh 31/4in. from knot to knot). The relative proportions of the fisheries in the different coastal regions, together with the chief fisheries in each, are approximately as follows: Table VI. Principal Norwegian Fisherles À : Proportion of R Chief fish ; ep1on ee: total fisheries Sn Bat sie Mackerel 30 °/; Salmon, 13 %%........... \ LU a RO), Lobster, 24 00; Herring, 12 %........... Spring and mixed Herring, 40—50 %o; Mackerel, 8—10% ............-.-.--- Summer (fat) Herring, 0-10 °%.......... North Sean... 2... 207 mon, 5—90/; Summer fishing of Green Cod\ete: 1009/0072 aa ee Cod (“Skrei”), 50—60 %...............- | \ J Sprat and small Herring, 12%%o..........|¢..... 15—20 fo | Cod (“Skrei”), 5—9 %o; Lobster, 4%; Sal- | } Summer (fat) Herring, 13—20 %o......... Winter (large) Herring, 10—13 °%o ....... Summer-fishing of Green Cod ete. 15 %o.. Norwegian Sea ........ | Kein Sea INR J Cod (“eapelan” or “Lodde”) 70—74 0/0. ... ....14—19 9, || Summer-fishing of Green Cod ete. 20—24 %o le The fishing beyond the fringe of fjords and islands is kept distinct in the statistics from the main fisheries. The following table shows, that these offshore fisheries are of considerable importance and value. rn Ze Table VII. Deep-sea Fisherles of Norway APPENDIX J: NORWAY 1900 1901 1902 Quantity | Value | Quantity} Value | Quantity | Value kg. Kı. kg. Kr. ke. Kr. “Dorj’tishing for Mackerel in the North Sea | 1,384,222 639,516 | 1,931,000 | 674,000) 930,000 457,000 Bank fishery (Ling, tusk, green cod, had- N | dock and halibut) from Romsdal ......... » 680,000 | » 910,000 » 1,525,000 Herring drift-net fishery in North Sea..... » » » » » 100,000 Fishery of Greenland Shark from Finmark (Laemargus microcephalus — Scymnus | | DITS SR ER Er Tee » 40,281 » 28,000 » 36,000 Various from the Polar Regions (Walrus, bears, reindeer ebc.).................... » 287,720 » 273,000 » 458,000 Whale fishery at Finmark ................ » | 498,000 » | 504,000 » 1,069,000 Whale fishery at Tromsô ................. » 70,000 » 70,000 » » Whale fishery at Iceland and the Feroes... 1,500 |?2,000,000 » » 1,614 | 3,050,000 Seal fishery at Jan Mayen and between Ice- (spec) | (pec:) land and Greenland .................... » 470,000 » 145,400 » 415,000 Fishery of beaked whale (Hyperoodon rostra- | CUS per cre ys ake ews S «Suave ove » 670,000 » 668,000 » 650,000 Total » 5,355,517 » | 3,272,000 » 7,760,000 In the following table, an account is given of the price paid for various species of Average price fish over a period of years. Table VIII. Average Market-value of the principal Norwegian fisherles since 1866 Cod Salmon a. = Herring! Mackerel Sea-trout Lobster per 100 per kilo. Kr. Kr. per heetolit. per 100 per kilo. per 100 186610." ahs «tonne 22°86 0:048 » 9:50 » » LOTO En 30:20 0:063 » 11:09 » » GIG SU EE Le 23:99 0:05 » 12:82 1:08 30°72 BEST BB nen 24:21 0:055 675 134 1:05 35:85 1886—90.............. 21:42 0:045 3:61 114 1:07 46:63 TROIE ee aan ne | 22:05 0:046 3:54 13:51 1:06 60:03 1896-100... una. 26:00 0:054 5:16 15:00 1:18 79:20 VON Re nee 31:34 0:065 7:32 15:18 1:31 78:38 TO Re 28:52 0:059 7:08 12:06 1:27 78:65 Maximum... 364 0:076 8:18 16:51 1:31 88:99 (1874) (1874) (1883) (1896) |(1899, 1901) (1899) Minimum... | 15:39 0:032 2:34. 8:90 89 | 0:99 23:46 | (1887) (1893) (1866) (1888) | (1879) (1868) 1 In calculating the average value, the sprat and small herring are omitted. Also, calculation begins with 1881. Appendix J 3 Boats etc. APPENDIX J: NORWAY Ba It is clear from this table, that the average price of fish in Norway, taken as a whole, has not increased within recent years. In the case of the cod, for example, the maximum price was reached in 1874. Within recent years, the price has certainly been above the average and this has been accompanied by a less amount of fish caught. At the same time also, the number of fishermen has decreased, and the question is whether the numbers of cod taken have decreased because there are fewer fishermen, or vice versa. In the report for 1902, the latter possibility is suggested, i. e. that the largest cod-fisheries at Lofoten, Vesteraalen and Finmark are now yelding a less number of fish. According to Hjort and Dahl (4), this phenomenon is in accordance with the many fluctuations which the fishery has undergone, ever since information regarding it has been forthcoming. The mackerel and herring display considerable fluctuations, probably according to the fishing. The remarkable point is the very low price for herrings: less than Kr. 5 (about 5 sh.) on the average, for ca. 700 herrings. The salmon and lobster, on the other hand, show a most distinct rise in price within recent years. In the case of the salmon, this increased price is associated with an increased total quantity, so that the increase in price is most probably due to an increased demand and competition. In the case of the lobster, however, the increase of price has been asso- ciated with a decrease in quantity caught. The latter might alone account for the former without any increase in the demand, but it is probable that the demand has also increased. It is only for the cod-fishery, that the number of boats is given in full; for the summer herring and mackerel fisheries, only those using drift or gill-nets are stated. Where the boats are almost all small and the fishing seasonal or periodic, it is obviously very difficult, especially on such a coast as the Norwegian, to obtain exact records of the boats actually fishing. On the other hand, the number of fishermen engaged in the chief fisheries has been kept for a long period of years, and is as follows (1902, p. 3*): Table IX. Number of Fishermen engaged In the chief Norwegian Fisheries Summer | Cod- & autumn Mackerel n Yen fisheries Herring- fisheries To fisheries | STORE 62,757 | 48,831 3,436 115,024 18807 rn: 80,441 35,130 3,119 119,290 SSD ares 76,504 | 33,008 4,147 113,659 WED. sccoccs 89,283 29,804 3,335 122,422 ee 86,087 47,658 2,738 136,483 1900 see 82,098 | 20,705 2,741 105,544 1901. 75,866 19,537 7,055 102,458 en 75,999 27,782 3,420 107,201 The maximum was reached in 1892, when 101,659 fishermen were engaged in the cod-fisheries alone. It is mentioned also, that the numbers are probably too high, as the boats move from one district to another and may be counted more than once. Of the numbers engaged in the other fisheries, no account is given. eo APPENDIX J: NORWAY If we contrast the number of fishermen with the total values of the fisheries, we find that the average take per man has varied for the years mentioned: for cod, from Kr. 145—175; for summer herring from Kr. 90—205; and for mackerel from Kr. 90—207. It has to be remembered, so far as the cod is concerned, that the numbers of fishermen and boats are probably a little too high, and for all three that the fisheries last only a few months in the year. From the above and the average quantities of the cod, we find that the average take of the fishermen is from 500 to 800 cod. Hjort (p. 370) gives the average annual take for the Lofoten fishery alone, to be from 900 to 1000 cod per man. The net daily earnings of the fishermen is on the average about Kr. 1:50, being greatest for the hand-lines and least for the long-lines. If we reckoned this to go on for a year of 300 earning-days, we see that the average annual income would be only about Kr. 450 (£ 25), but this low value, it should be noted, is entirely due to the low price of fish in Norway. 9* 3. Denmark The Danish fisheries of the Kattegat, Belts and the Baltic have already been dealt with in a recent work by Petersen and Otterstrom (3). In the present paper, attention will be directed mainly to the fisheries beyond the Skaw, that is in the Skager Rak and North Sea. The line of division between the Kattegat and Skager Rak runs from the Skaw to Vinga off Gothenburg, and is in many respects a natural one, but it appears from the recent Swedish experiments on the marking of plaice, that these fish at any rate do not recognise the boundary, and may migrate from the Swedish coast to the west of the Skaw. The fishermen of Fredrikshaven and other ports of the Kattegat, respect the boun- dary just as little as the plaice, and fish indiscriminately in the Kattegat, Skager Rak or North Sea. An endeavour to obtain an accurate measure of the quantities of fish caught in the Skager Rak and North Sea is thus frustrated, for these cutters bring a considerable portion of their catches back to the ports of the Kattegat. An estimate of the value of these catches is given each year, however, so that for all practical and present purposes, the information obtainable with regard to the Danish fisheries beyond the Skaw may be regarded as fairly complete. Division of For statistical purposes, the Danish waters are divided into three main regions: Ve I. West coast or outside the Skaw, i.e. Skager Rak and North Sea. II. Inside the Skaw, i.e. Kattegat, Belts and Baltic. III. Lim Fjord. The relative importance of these regions may be judged from Table X. It appears therefrom, that the fishery on the west coast, that is, outside the Skaw, has increased of recent years and now takes second place, above the fishery of the Lim Fjord. This becomes more evident, when we take account of the quantities caught outside the Skaw, but included under the region within the Skaw. We then have for the total value of the fishing outside the Skaw: | 1900: Kr. 1,109,000 1901: » 1,370,000 1902: » 2,013,000 Official Publications: Fiskeri-Beretning, 1889 (1888) et seq. Works of Reference: 1. Drecusez, C. F.: Oversigt over vore Saltvandsfiskerier. 1890. 2. Perersen, C. G. Jon.: The Biology of our Flat-fishes; Report from the Danish Biological Station, IV, 1895. 3. Perersen, C. G. Jou. and Orrerstrgm A.: Uebersicht über die Scefischerei in den dänischen Gewässern innerhalb Skagens; Publ. de Circonstance, Nr. 13 A. File APPENDIX J: DENMARK Table X. Value of the Danish Fisherles ! 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 Kr.2 Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. West-coast fishery ............. 552,721) 615,756 | 814,365 | 735,774 Lin Tel ge ae eae we 859,453 | 945,190 | 1,040,872 | 1,125,598 | 1,309,004 | 1,280,739 Within the Skaw.............. 3,600,894 | 3,728,110 | 3,795,349 | 3,918,368 | 3,532,163 | 3,898,121 | 3,929,208 5,511,961 | 5,273,517 | 6,021,490 | 5,945,721 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. West-coast fishery ............. 777,410 | 765,982| 638,925) 943,227 | 921,025 | 982,011 | 1,364,433 BmeRrard I. is, 1,110,896 | 1,029,372 | 1,032,660 | 1,186,805 | 1,245,489 | 1,270,647 | 1,243,286 Within the Skaw.............- 4,723,543 | 4,619,794 | 4,448,863 | 5,409,464 | 5,593,404 | 6,430,820 | 7,269,740 6,611,849 | 6,415,148 | 6,120,448 | 7,539,496 | 7,759,918 | 8,683,478 | 9,877,459 In these latter sums is reckoned, in addition to the above mentioned, the value of fish taken directly to Hamburg. 2 Regular detailed statistics for the west coast began to be taken in the year 1891, in Responsibility consequence of an order from the Minister of Marine. Previous to 1895, the reports for A ae all Denmark were published by the Home Department of the Government, since then by the Department of Agriculture. The coast-guard officers along the coast are responsible in the first instance for the statistical data. These are arranged and reported on by a captain of the Royal Danish Navy, and the final report over all the fisheries is made by Capt. Drechsel. If we restrict our attention now to the west coast fishery, we find that the Danish The fishery in statistics divide up this region very conveniently into three: en: A. Skager Rak coast fishery — from the Skaw to Hanstholm. B. North Sea, north from Horns Reef — Hanstholm to Blaavand. C. North Sea, south from Horns Reef — Graadyb (about Esbjerg). The nature, progress and value of the west coast fishery may be ascertained from the value of fishery following table, which shows the total averages over the years 1891—1902 and compares Re a the years 1895 and 1902. The chief species of fish are the cod, haddock and plaice. In earlier years, the haddock came first in importance with the cod second. In 1895, the cod and haddock accounted for 70°%o of the total fishing but in 1902 for only 25%, whilst the plaice mounted from 16 °/o to 60/0 in the same time. This change has occurred without any sensible decrease in the value of the fisheries north of the Reef to the Skaw, and has been due to two causes, the spread of the fishing 2 The oyster-fishery in the Limfjord and the freshwater fisheries are not included here. A considerable portion of the cutter fishing on the west coast, i. e. outside the Skaw, is included in the region: “Within the Skaw”, Cl ils) Kronen == 48 1 APPENDIX J: DENMARK gar by the Kattegat cutters, especially of Fredrikshavn, along the west coast of Jutland, and the rise of Esbjerg as a fishing port. Table XI. Danish Fisheries on the west and north-west coast of Jutland a. 1895 Herring Cod Haddock | Flat-fish? and Lobster Total Mackerel Kr. Kr. Kr. ; Kr. Im Kr. Kr. 2 29,00 2,00 Skager Rak coast fishery ...... { nn nn 50 À Le ae oem North Sea do.-north of Horns 89,000 272,000 7,000 24,000 11,000 409,000 Reef. ns nu ner 22 Io 66% 2% | 6% 3% 55.6 %0 North Sea do.-south of Horns { 5,000 53,000 77,000 | 136,000 Ree hic. A MER PAPE MASTER 4 0/0 39 0/0 56 9/0 | 18.4 0/6 g 0 27 4,000 Total coast fishery... { on a se an an a 0, 736,000 b. 1902? Herring Cod Haddock | Flat-fish and Lobster | Various || Total Mackerel OT M = | = Kr | Kr. Kr. à 4 70,00 000 | 2, Skager Rak coast fishery ...... { î en an Dun Sun > ah | a North Sea do.-north of Horns f| 58,000 | 182,000 15,000 | 50,000 9,000 | 12,000 |. 326,000 Reet careers acc ne \| 18% 56 9/0 5 0/0 15 0/0 2,5 0/0 3.5 Jo 24 0/0 North Sea do.-south of Horns { 3,000 30,000 | 747,000 2,000 | 782,000 Reef is is NES AMAR EN 1% 3% 95/6 1% 57 °/o | 40,000 | 216,000 | 832 : 2,000 00! i Total coast fishery... { 1 100 ip en a Don 10 Ha) is on 1,363,000 c. Average for the years 1891—1902 Herring i Cod Haddock | Flat-fish and Lobster | Various Total Mackerel c 1 EXT Kr. Kr. | Kr. Kr. Kr. Kr. à 50,000 29,00! i ) 214 Skager Rak coast fishery...... { 94 Oo 13 ca an ar Sur ; 14,100 North Sea do.-north of Horns f| 52,500 | 186,000 12,600 | 32,800 12,000 7,500 || 303,400 Reek nit. ol chee eee \ 17% 61 %o 40/0 11 %o 3 0/0 4% North Sea do.-south of Horns 7,000 | 55,200 | 245,000 900 || 308,100 Ags Rao ane Sono a oo eo oe Al 79 Jo bie 1° ñ N 109,500 | 270,20 294,100 | 45,8 825,600 Total coast fishery... 13 Jo 99 ae 5 oh à En ea : 1 Flat-fish means other species as well as plaice, e. g. turbot and brill, halibut and sole. Taken these together, however, their total value is less than 8 ° of the value of the plaice alone, and their total quantity less than 1% (1902). 2 These figures are taken from the reports, The slight differences from the figures in Table X seem to be due to “rounding”. — 23 — APPENDIX J: DENMARK Before going into the details of these occurences, a few words may be said regarding Modes of fishing the modes of fishing. As might be gathered from the species taken, the chief method is a form of trawling. The usual forms of trawling, that is with the beam or otter-trawl, are prohibited in Danish waters and though two steam-trawlers were employed but a few years ago for the deep sea fishing, they were withdrawn in 1901. The method commonly used, is that of the “snurrevaad” or so-called plaice-seine. This is practically the same as a ground or long-haul seine, and is used as such in North Jutland near the Skaw, but in the offshore fishing is worked from a cutter instead of the shore. The hauling-in ropes are of great length, each 600—1200 fathoms, and the net with wings ca. 80 fathoms long, is thus able to cover a considerable extent of ground. In shooting, the cutter is usually anchored and its small boat carries out the net, which finally is hauled in on the cutter. According to an old account, otter-boards used to be attached to the net and the cutter towed it when the weather was favourable, exactly like the otter-trawl of the present day. The size of mesh is about 2 inches from knot to knot in the wings and bag. From the size of mesh and the mode of working, it will be understood that this net is specially useful for the capture of flatfish, such as plaice. Of recent years, the efficiency of this mode of fishing has been enormously increased by the introduction of motor power, not only to the cutters but also to the small boats which shoot the net. Another form of net much used for plaice, is the fixed gill-net, i.e. a net similar to a drift-net but anchored on the bottom. The size of mesh varies; in the southers parts where the plaice are smaller it is about 21/2 inches from knot to knot, in the northern parts, 3 inches. The meaning of the net is, that the fish should become enmeshed, and quantities of plaice are taken in this way, especially in the Kattegat. Hooks and lines, and especially long lines, are used for the cod and haddock fishery along the coast from the Skaw to Esbjerg. Drift-nets are employed for the capture of herring and mackerel, but the value of these species landed on the west coast, shows that the fishery is of relatively small im- portance. Returning now to the course of the fishing on the west coast of Jutland, the following Progress of table of the quantities of the chief species landed, together with the previous table showing EN the values, shows how the fishing has altered during the last ten years. In 1895, the main products of the fishery were haddock and cod, and the main fishing was carried on in the Skager Rak and north of Horns Reef. Previous to that time, Esbjerg, which is situated in the south of Jutland on the North Sea and is the main fishing port outside the Skaw, was of little importance as a fishing centre, having only 18 boats, mostly small, in the beginning of 1894. The fishing also was mostly with hooks and lines. At the end of 1895, the boats numbered 30, of which 26 were welled and 19 had auxiliary motor. The “snurrevaad” was now practically the only method of fishing used. At the end of 1898, the Esbjerg fleet consisted of 46 large cutters, all provided with well and auxiliary motor. In the beginning of 1903, the number was 55. The average gross tonnage of the boats in 1894 was 12°7, in 1898, 31°6 and in 1903, 37-6. This table shows further that the fishermen have really concentrated their attention Specialization on the plaice fishery. ee The quantities of cod and haddock captured in 1902 and the years immediately ; preceding, are less than 30% of what they were in 1895, whilst the quantities of plaice Average price of fish APPENDIX J: DENMARK wo Table XII. Quantities of Cod, Haddock and Plaice landed on the West Coast of Jutland over a perlod of years! Skager Rak North of Horns Reef South of Horns Reef Total Cod es Plaice Cod Haddock] Plaice | Cod | Haddock| Plaice Cod Haddock! Plaice ® & & © & & & & & & 1 0e wa 1895.. || 1,617,000 1481,600 372,800) 2,445,000 |5,392,000|160,400 | 95,818 | 963,940) 1,235,846 || 4,157,818 |6,837,540) 1,769,046 1896.. || 1,140,200 |806,100|367,600] 1,669,000 |5,400,000| 2,760 121,280 |1,199,840) 2,645,000 || 2,930,480 |7,405,940) 3,015,360 1897.. || 1,056,000 |672,700)108,400}) 1,159,000 |4,162,000| 5,175 114,000 | 588,000) 1,883,000 || 2,329,000 |5,422,700) 1,996,575 1898. . 496,000 |544,000|316,300)| 868,800 |2,318,000| 8,900 110,700 | 500,000) 2,354,000 || 1,475,500 |3,362,000| 2,679,200 1899... 715,513 |831,900/128,500|| 1,154,000 |1,780,700| 6,900| 82,310 | 340,830) 4,313,000 || 1,951,823 |2,953,430) 4,448,400 1900. . 836,400 1154,0001101,500| 532,000 1,215,000) 8,600 | 65,800 | 234,000) 4,617,000 | 1,434,200 |1,603,000) 4,727,100 1901.. 877,300 | 12,800)121,000) 489,000 | 776,500 300 | 37,300 | 244,600} 5,131,000 | 1,403,600 |1,033,400) 5,252,300 1902.. || 1,088,000 | 51,100/451,200|. 584,000 |1,052,000 162,300 | 34,500 | 142,620) 8,684,175 | 1,706,500 |1,245,720) 9,297,675 have increased more than fivefold. The cause of this has been the universal adoption of the “snurrevaad”, and the reason probably, the greater certainty of the plaice fishing, together with the good price obtained and the comparative ease with which the plaice can be brought alive to market. It may be mentioned here, that the same tendency is also displayed in the Kattegat and other Danish waters. The plaice is, nowadays, by far the most important species in the Danish fish supply. The relative importance of the various species taken on the west coast of Jutland can be seen from the accompanying Table XIII. Table XII, The proportions of the species landed on the west coast of Denmark 1895 1896 1902 1903 °lo °/0 0/0 lo COL PR ee 23 14-9 10-2 85 Halo sepa cer ook? 467 46:5 15:6 233 Skates and Rays ............- 0:7 11 0-4 0:45 PIAGET PA 14:9 21:8 59:0 48:5 Solar N ee 0:2 — 0:8 27 Midoun Ball, :,,05505660 — — 0:3 0-4 Halibuts he er Lan 0-4 14 0:5 0:4 Mackerel 4s: ers: 2:8 13 11 2:2 ORNE robe co user: 0:9 0:9 3:0 37 Dostish RAM 01 0:3 0:8 0:9 Lobsters pees ce nee cee aera ert 10:1 11:5 — 8:8 GUN oi) ata ee eee — — 0:2 a DaB! Lis me Ar PA N ae N'ATIOuS Le PRE REC rar 0:2 03 O1 — species over a period of years. 1) The quantities are sometimes stated in ®, sometimes singly. (Danish &) by means of the values given. The course of the fishing on the west coast of Denmark and the difference in the fishing grounds, can also be illustrated by reference to the average prices of the principal They have all been reduced to ® (1 Da. 1b. = 1-1 1b. Eng. = 0°5 kilo.). — 25 — APPENDIX J: DENMARK Table XIV. Average price of Cod, Haddock and Plaice on the West Coast of Jutland. Cod Haddock Plaice per & singly per & singly per & singly Ore Gre Ore Ore Ore | Ore SOG Seen ae 4-1 49-0 5:0 70 5:6 (3) USOT eck): 47 58:3 55 8:0 10:1 124: Hee Be SOS race 5:0 64:8 6.0 11:0 9:0 SMILE NEO © 20000 5:5 65:4 8:0 12:0 7:8 IBS. 19925 28 NOOO RER 6:6 82:7 10:7 18:1 97 fée PH IUT EEE 8:0 67:9 14:8 23:7 9:8 Ils Bag Zu WO voc coc ee TT 176 17:9 234 87 site be In the Danish statistics, the fish are entered in pounds or singly. As the values for these divisions are also kept separate, it might be thought an easy matter to convert all the data into pounds, and this has been done in Table XII. The difficulty about this is, that the system of selling singly may take place at ports where the average price per pound might be much lower or much higher than at the ports where the fish is sold by pound. The difference is probably very small on the whole, and of recent years the tendency is to use the better system, of stating the quantities all in pounds. These considerations do not affect the figures given for the average price, unless we wish to calculate the average weight of the fish and then, some caution has to be exercised. The cod and haddock do not require any lengthy consideration. The average price has gone up greatly between 1896 and 1902, but, as already shown, the total quantities landed have greatly decreased. The decrease, in fact, is not counterbalanced by the increase in average price, since the total value is now considerably less. If we compare now the price per % and the price singly, we see that the average weight of cod lies between 81/2 and 13 %, and of haddock between 11/2 and 2 @&. The part of the coast where the fish are entered singly, is the district north of Horns Reef, and if we separate out the figures for that district from the others, — it is unnecessary to state them here — we find that the average prices and weigths fall within the averages here stated. We do not have the same difficulty in the case of the plaice, and as this species is of great importance, the average price of each specimen has been calculated for the three districts, so far as the statistics permitted it. First of all, it has to be noticed that, although the average price per % has fluctuated a good deal, there has been little if any rise in price on the whole. Again, the difference in price, given for the plaice in the three districts, is at first sight very remarkable. For the Skager Rak, the prices are always higher than for the other districts, where they are on the whole much the same. The difference is entirely due to a difference in size, which can be shown more clearly from other data given in the reports. For the years 1898, 1899 and 1900, the average weight of plaice taken in the Skager Rak is given as being 16-4—19-6 % per score or practically 1 (Engl.) lb. each. In the same years, the average weight north of Horns Reef varied between 10 to 16 % per score, but nearer the latter figure as a rule. South of the Horns Reef, the average weight did 3 South of Horns Reef. 4 1 In Skager Rak where the plaice are of large size. 2 North of Horns Reef. Appendix J ' Average price and weight of cod and haddock Average price and weight of plaice Average weight and price of plaice in the Kattegat Total quantity of plaice cap- tured on the west coast Lim Fjord APPENDIX J: DENMARK DONC not exceed 10 t and was often as low as 8 % per score. From all accounts, it appears that the plaice taken south of Horns Reef, are just on the borderland of the limit (9/4 Da. in. or 25:6 cm.) below which, the Danish law forbids the sale of plaice. For the sake of comparison, we may state the average weight of the plaice landed by the Danish fishermen from the Kattegat. During the three years mentioned, it varied between 12-2 and 13-8 %& per score, i. e. each plaice weighed a little more than 1/2 &. This average, however, varies a great deal according to the ground. In the deeper water and towards the Swedish coast, it is from 15 to 16 % per score. The average price again, is slightly higher on the eastern than on the western side of Denmark. Thus, as regards the plaice and cod, the average price per pound in 1902, for the fish landed at ports within the Skaw, was 14 Ore and 9 Ore respectively, whereas on the west coast the prices were 8:7 and 7-7 Ore. An approximate estimate can be made of the total quantities of plaice captured by the Danish fishermen in the North Sea and Skager Rak. We must add to the quantities already given, the amounts landed at the Kattegat ports and at Hamburg. With regard to these amounts, the reports give simply the total values of all species taken together, but practically all the fish are plaice. The tables containing the returns of the fishery in the Skager Rak and North Sea by a number of Kattegat cutters! show, that the value of the species landed other than plaice, is barely 2°/o of that of the plaice. Again, some quantities of plaice are included both in the Kattegat and west coast statistics (for Esbjerg). Deducting these amounts, we obtain the quantity and value of the plaice caught on the west coast but landed at Hamburg or the ports on the Kattegat. Kr. @ Danish TOUD ERP TE 132,000 1,375,000 IOI a ae are ee 324,000 3,304,000 ER 396,000 4,541,000 The quantities are calculated in round numbers from the average prices for the re- spective years. If we add these to the quantities given in Table XII, we have: @ Danish NINO er. 6,102,000 Oe hv ue 8,556,000 WOO DES nee 13,839,000 These amounts represent the least quantities of plaice taken in the North Sea and Skager Rak. As over 90 % of these plaice were taken south of Horns Reef, we should not be far astray in taking the average weight to be ca. 1/2 t% (Danish), so that the number taken in 1902, for example, would be in round numbers about 28 millions, and the average size not above 11 inches. A further addition might be made to the numbers of plaice taken annually on the west coast of Jutland. As is well known from Petersen’s researches, the plaice captured in the Lim Fjord, a series of salt water lakes or fjords in the northern part of Jutland, do not reproduce there, but migrate in when young from the North Sea. The total quantity of plaice taken annually amounts to over 2,000,000 & on the average. The average weight 1 vide Beretning for 1902—1903. pp. 146—147. HOT APPENDIX J: DENMARK of these, according to Petersen, is about 11 ft per score, so that the total quantity of plaice taken from the North Sea and Skager Rak by the Danes in 1902, was at least 15 million pounds or 30 to 35 million specimens. A summary of the boats belonging to the west coast of Jutland is given in Tab. XV. The numbers for the years 1889—1892, represent the deep-sea fleet of boats fishing in the North Sea from ports inside the Skaw as well as from the west coast. The steamers were apparently trawlers — one registered at Esbjerg, the other at Copenhagen. The figures for 1895 onwards, represent the boats registered on the west coast only. So far as the deep sea fishing for plaice is concerned, the fleet consists of the first two classes, cutters and decked boats. Table XV. Fishing boats on the west coast of Jutland Total Steamers Cutters Decked boats Smaller boats number of boats Number Value Number Value Number Value {| Number Value Kr. Kr. | Kr. Kr. ICED) cotes (460) 1 TELUS RES (487) 2 (1) TICE ae colon eae (521) 2 (1) GEE Bee (631) TIERS LOS VEN pres ICE ee ER EE 954 9 67,940 59 | 146,700 886 156,207 TRUE SA SÉPARER 1029 2 82,698 11 85,840 63 | 150,350 944 166,629 OT. 1031 3 117,698 12 92,280 72 | 223,160 944 164,699 IGG) een. 1026 3 82,698 11 35,645 87 | 282,497 925 160,997 SER) Fo erence 1126 3 82,698 22 | 175,700 88 | 274,725 1013 166,612 IB en... 1159 3 63,900 24 199,300 88 | 321,125 1044 169,181 ER... 1140 1! 15,000 23 195,800 95 | 343,260 1021 180,368 GOD ye eres 1143 1! 24 | 236,175 | 103 447,809 1015 214,409 OBERE RER 1132 31 373,575 112 | 660,145 989 250,487 The actual tonnage of the boats is not stated, but all the cutters and probably most, if not all, of the decked boats are large, over 15 tons (gross), with well and auxiliary screw, like the Esbjerg boats already mentioned. The number of regular fishermen engaged during 1902, was 1376 and of occasional fishermen 702, in all 2078. In addition to the above, from 70 to 120 boats from towns on the Kattegat and Lim Fjord also take part each year in the west coast fishery. A number of these boats give detailed returns of their catches during the year, the region where they fished etc. From such data with regard to the fishery from Fredrikshavn, the following table has been con- structed. (Beretning, 1902—03. p. 146). The average income for all 44 boats is ca. 9160 Kroner, and the average income per ton per month is ca. 50:8 Kroner. It is impossible to completely separate the North Sea from the Kattegat, as only in very few cases do the cutters keep to one region. So far as one can determine, however, the North Sea seems to give better results; 1260 Kroner 1 This is a small steamer (of 19 tons) fishing for plaice from Esbjerg. No mention is made of it in 1903. 4* Boats APPENDIX J: DENMARK S798 Table XVI. Data of the fishing of Frederikshavn Cutters during 1902 el T b Average Average Average No. of boats otal num ce tonnage of boats| gross annual ROSS AGREE of months fishing (net) indome per ton per month Kr. Kr. (6—15 tons) 8 80 (5 in North 111 6,166 55:5 Sea) (16—20 tons) 15 156 (591/: in North 171 10,153 57-1 Sea) (21—25 tons) 17 1441/2 (62%, in 21:94 9,434 50:7 North Sea) 7 (26—30 tons) 4 44 (18 in North 2875 10,265 32:4 Sea) 1902 (p. 62), value of all Frederikshayn cutters + apparatus = Kr. 1,763,000. 1902 (p. 144), gross income = Kr. 1,236,000 or 70°, of outlay. were taken per month in the North Sea as against 790 Kr. per month in the Kattegat. The average income (gross) per man on these cutters, seems to be ca. 1490 Kr. pr. annum (i. e. ca. £ 83). Fisheries of the In the report of the Danish fisheries for 1902—1903, a short account is given of the Feroe Isles fisheries at the Færoe Isles. It appears that the chief fishing is by hand-lines, long-lines being used to a less degree. Whilst a considerable amount of fishing goes on all round the coast, the most important fishing ground is on a bank to the south-west of Sudere. From the data to hand, 84 large sailing boats of 70 to 90 tons on the average, were engaged in the fishery during 1902. The number of fishermen was about 1100. Many, if not all, of these boats take part in the fishing at Iceland. The greater portion of the fish caught, is sold in the salted or dried condition, and the total value of the produce in the year mentioned, was over 700,000 Kroner. 4. Germany I. Short review of the sea-fisheries ! a, The principal fisheries The German fisheries in the North Sea and coastal waters, may be best divided as follows: 1. Great herring fishery 2. Deep-sea fishery of sailing boats and steamers 3. Coast fishery 1. The great herring fishery of Germany isa very ancient industry. An interesting description of its history has been given by Lindeman in his “Beiträge” (3); valuable notes are given by Dittmer (8) concerning the medieval markets of Skaane, the herring- 1 In the annual reports published by the Deutsche Seefischerei-Verein, from which the details for the following review have been chiefly taken, the sea and coast fisheries are always referred to separately. The fishery in the Baltie occupies a separate section in these reports, but is not considered here, nor is the fishery in the Arctic seas under which, Dittmer (8) includes whales, seals, walrus, polar bears, reindeer, water-fowl and other animals. Works of reference: A. Publications of the Deutsche Seefischerei-Verein: 1. Mitteilungen des Deutschen Seefischerei-Vereins (der Sektion für Kiisten- und Hochseefisherei des Deutschen Fischerei-Vereins 1885—1893). Jahrgang I-XX. Berlin 1885—1904. 2. Abhandlungen des Deutschen Seefischerei-Vereins. Bd. I—VII. 1897 1902. Bd. I. Fischerfahrzeuge mit Hilfsmaschinen u. s. w. 1897. Bd. V. Garneelenfischerei. 1900. 3. Linpeman, M, Beiträge zur Statistik der Deutschen Seefischerei. Berlin, 1888. also, in: Mitteil. der Sektion fiir Küsten- u. Hochseefischerei. IV. 1888. 4. Fischerei-Gründe der Deutschen Bucht der Nordsee. Ein Kommentar zur gleichlautenden Karte. Hamburg, 1904. 5. Doutscher Seefischerei-Almanach. Jahrgang 1898—1904. Hannover und Leipzig, 1898—1904. 6. Herwie, W., Die Grosse Heringsfischerei Deutschlands und die Mittel zu ihrer Hebung. Mitteil. d. D. Seefischerei-Vereins. XIII. 1897. 7. Henxrne, H., Die Befischung der Nordsee durch deutsche Fischdampfer. Mit Karte. In: Mitteil. d. D. Seefischerei-Vereins. XVII. 1901. - 8. Ditrmer, R., Die Deutsche Hochsee-, See- und Küstenfischerei im 19. Jahrhundert und bis zum Jahre 1902. Hannover und Leipzig, 1902. Herring fishery APPENDIX J: GERMANY 3 fishery closely connected therewith and also the commerce in salted fish, carried on at the southern extremity of the present-day Swedish province of Skaane; an impartial represen- tation of the great importance of this fishery for Germany is given by Herwig (6). Emden has always been and still is the chief port for the German deep-sea herring fishery. Passing over the earlier history of this fishery, we find that this industry was restarted from Emden in 1872, after having ceased for Some years. This revival was due to the transference of a Vlaardingen firm, in the possession of a German by birth, from Table XVII. Review of the German herring fishery, 1872—1903 Value Yoar Number Number 2 ne of boats ! tons landed (shillings) STi Sick ER ay: 6 3,785 147,777 WTA een eas iG 12 5,602 229,653 1880...... A ; 11 8,065 250,500 WBSE sete EYE TE 13 10,872 357,824 SSC APE Re 15 11,227 302,000 ESS dn niche, eles 18 12,146 341,900 TSS ee 23 14,682 371,900 SMS TE EN. 23 13,191 378,000 SOM eee ear ne 23 13,104 434,500 GSS Aa creo LIRE EUES 21 21,671 494,600 LOS NEE 23 24,557 539,900 SIE ID ae 25 32,509 739,200 SID Oar aN Be 52 52,414 1,410,400 en ea sodouee 74 65,141 1,441,200 SIT EN 81 53,930 1,723,900 JOB ACER EAN 90 (5)? 100,186 2,372,300 SOO Was MAR ee 110 (9) 59,718 1,849,100 1900 MARNE be 118 (8) 96,132 3,427,700 LD RENE 123 (9) 135,335 3,745,900 NOD es RER RE 130 (12) 170,513 5,189,000 TOO ME tare. 145 (13) 199,862 1 The number of boats given here, has been taken from the figures published in the annual reports, but those for 1896 onwards, are from data given by Director J. J. van der Laan of Elsfleth in the Mit- teilungen (1). The figures given by Dittmer (8) p. 13, are different. | 2 These are so-called “tons” from packing on land; the “tons” from packing at sea (so called “kantjes”) are, where necessary, reduced to tons of land-packing on the equivalent that 17 “kantjes” = 14 “tons”. 3 The numbers in brackets refer to the steamers; thus, 90(5) means 85 sailing vessels and 5 steamers. B. Various publications: 9. MarcArv, G., Darstellung der Preussischen Seefischerei und ihre jetzige Lage. Berlin, 1870. 10. Hensen, V., Ueber die Befischung der deutschen Küsten. Jahresbericht der Kommission zur wissen- schaftlichen Untersuchung der deutschen Meere in Kiel. II. und II. Jahrgang für die Jahre 1872, 1873. Berlin, 1875. 11. Ergebnisse der Beobachtungsstationen an den deutschen Küsten über die physikalischen Eigenschaften — der Ostsee und Nordsee, und die Fischerei. Jahrgang 1873—1893. Herausgegeben von der Ministerial- Kommission zur Untersuchung der Deutschen Meere in Kiel. 12. Benecke, B., Davımer, E, und Max von vem Borne, Handbuch der Fischzucht und Fischerei. Berlin, 1886. ee APPENDIX J: GERMANY that town to Emden with a fleet of six vessels (so-called luggers) of the newest construction. Since that time, the Emden herring fishery has not only maintained itself but even increa- sed; the six vessels of 1872 have become a fleet of 65 luggers and 2 steamers in 1903. These vessels belong at present to three firms settled at Emden. Four other companies founded in other towns also carry on the herring fishery, viz. one in Gliickstadt (1894) with at present 14 luggers, one in Bremen-Vegesack (1895) with 24 sailing vessels and one steamer, one in Elsfleth (1894) with 15 luggers, and one in Geestemiinde (1898) with 9 steamers. A summary of the number of vessels and the results of the fishery since 1872, may conclude this sketch (see Tab. XVII). 2. Deep-sea sail fishery and steam trawling. The most important division of the deep-sea fishery deep-sea sail fishery has always been that of the so-called “Ewer”, which has been in “ue DOM existence on the lower Elbe and on the Schleswig-Holstein coast since the 18th century, and is still carried on there. The principal fishing apparatus of these vessels, also, of the so-called “Kutterewer”, of the cutters and other deep-sea sailing boats, is the beam trawl (“Kurre”). Next comes the fixed gill-net. Those vessels belong also to this category which fish with hooks, and likewise finally, those which employ drift-nets during the herring season but the trawl during other months. The oldest notices of the ‘‘Ewer” fishery date, according to Lindeman (3), from 1787, and are concerned with the fishing village of Blankenese from which, at that time, the sea fishery was proseceuted by 140 “Ewer”. These Blankenese vessels fished, however, with trammel nets, not with the trawl. The trammels float vertically in the water, close to the bottom, and the fish entrammel themselves as in a pocket, and it was ascribed to this mode of fishing, that the Blankenese fishermen were able to compete successfully with the Dutch, and even to export their fish to Holland. “For the Dutch fish with a kind of pocket or purse net about 50 feet in length, and having a mouth 16 feet broad by 3 feet high. With this net, which is called a “kurr”, the fish are not seldom killed, damaged or made unfit for preservation.” This sea-fishery of Blankenese began in March; during the spring, the fishing was for the plaice, on grounds not far from the Dutch coasts of the islands of Terschelling, Ame- land etc. After Easter, the “Ewer” fished more in the open sea, in depths of from 20 to 25 fathoms, for soles, large plaice, turbot, as well as for haddock and lobsters. This sea-fishery was carried on until the autumn weather put an end to the operations. For how long the Blankenese fishermen persisted in this trammel-net fishery, does not seem well known. It is also not known, whether the Finkenwärder fishermen, who took up this sea fishery later, likewise used this net in the North Sea. According to Lindeman, the Finkenwärder fishermen began the sea fishery when the herring shoals appeared again at the Elbe, which has been the case since 1800. Further, we know, that there were 15 sea-fishermen in Finkenwärder in 1819, who fished for herring with the purse net, and that they employed the “kurre” for the capture of sea-fish, including without doubt flat-fish. There were also other villages along the banks of the Elbe, which took part in the fisheries at the beginning of last century — the Elbe fisheries with yawls, the sea fisheries with‘ Ewer”; but only Blankenese and Finkenwärder seem to have remained as important fishing places until the second half of the 19th century. For 1871, it is stated that there were: APPENDIX J: GERMANY — 39 =~ 1. in Finkenwärder, Hamburg portion, 74 ‘“‘Ewer” with 222 fishermen DENN: — Prussian — 5 — — 15 — 3. - Blankenese 60 — — about 200 — Altogether, there were 139 Ewer and about 437 fishermen. How these numbers have increased during the years 1880—1888, and later decreased, is shown in the following table: Table XVIII. Fishing boats of the Elbe and west coast of Schleswig-Holstein 1 Sept. | 1 Sept. 18801 1883 1 1885 ! 1886? 1887 ! 1888! 19012 19092 Finkenwärder (Ham- DURE) ER A EEE 165 161 (9)5 | 158(17) | 163(27) | 171(85) | 168 (42) |132(62) | 117(58) Finkenwärder (Prus- Sia) EN. eS ears 8 9 (3) 8 (1) 11 (3) 12 (3) 12 (3) 6 (2) 4 (2) Blankenese ........... ? 75 (10) | 75 (10) | 76(10) | 77 (20) | 75(16) | 8047) 43 (16) Other fishing villages on the Elbe and on the sea coast of western Schleswig-Holstein . . ? 7) 9 (1) 9 (2) 9 (2) 18 (3) 23 (21) 25 (21) Total... 2 | 252(23) | 250(29) | 25942) | 269 (60) | 27364) | 211 (100) | 189 (97) The Elbe and Schleswig-Holstein fishing vessels form only a portion, though an important one, of the German fleet of sailing boats fishing in the North Sea beyond the coastal waters. Information regarding the other fisheries does not exist for earlier times; Lindeman in his “Beiträge zur Statistik” begins his history of the fresh fish industry 4 in the North Sea with 1866, in so far that is, as it does not concern the fishery from the mouth of the Elbe. In that year, the “First German Sea Fisheries Company” was started in Bremen, and this was followed a few months later by the “North German Sea Fisheries Company” in Hamburg. A third company, the “Fisheries Company, Weser” appeared in the beginning of 1867. All these companies, however, were obliged to cease working within a few years: the first serious endeavours on the German coasts, to carry on a modern North Sea fresh-fish industry on a large scale (there were altogether some 30 cutters) thus ended almost quite fruitlessly. This was ascribed to various circumstances: the entire method of fishing was at that time something quite new to the German seamen, the captains of the boats had still much to learn, from their own experience, concerning the best fishing grounds of the North Sea in the various seasons of the year, there was as yet but little market for the fish, the methods of transport to the interior were imperfectly developed, the iced fresh fish was perfectly new to the German people, who had gradually to get accustomed to it and so on. From the ruins of these companies, however, arose the beginnings of several enterprises, which did well and gradually extended and developed. Interest in the sea fisheries was stimulated in ever widening circles of the interior (also by the foundation of 1 The numbers for 1880—1888 are from Lindemann, (3) p. 55—56. 2 The numbers for 1901—1902 are taken from the “Deutsche Fischerei Almanach” (5) for 1902 and 1903. 3 The numbers in brackets mean the numbers of the vessels not “Ewer”: thus, 161 (9) —152 “Hwer” and 9 cutters. 4 le. p. 36. se APPENDIX J: GERMANY the companies, although these had had no financial success), on the ground of the fishery being an object worthy of attainment and as a means of procuring food for the people, as well as a school for the navy. The concluding data in Lindeman’s book, concerning the further development of the German deep-sea fishing industry, are connected with the introduotion of steam power, with which the fish-auctions, instituted almost at the same time, stand in tolerably close relationship. For the sake of completeness, the following brief notice on the fishery with sailing vessels may be given first of all. The numbers are taken from the summaries, published in the “Mitteilungen des deutschen Seefischerei-Vereins”, of the vessels engaged in the deep-sea fishery of the North Sea. Table XIX. Salling vessels engaged in the North Sea fisheries beyond the coastal waters and which do not fish exclusively with drift nets Number of those fishing with Number of the rae 7 vessels Eee Lines | Trawl, sill nets Trawl and or drift nets Lines IST) dé oa u... 384 (269) 150 100 130 4 ISEB). ee 407 174 104 125 4 SB, RARES 403 173 102 120 8 SEE) IV LUE. 371 165 94 104 8 iS | une. 368 172 89 99 8 SIE en. 375 175 83 110 1 NOS rN ics RE 364 170 82 104 8 OOM ee ect 324 (211) 157 61 99 7 ICT VERRE PE 310 (189) 158 51 94 qe NOOB ANA 297 153 47 90 de TS, See een 288 154 38 90 6! The numbers in brackets, behind the figures for 1887, 1901 and 1902, refer to the vessels which have carried on the North Sea fishery from the Elbe and Schleswig-Holstein coast. For the German North Sea coast, west of the mouth of the Elbe, we have therefore the following : for 1887, 115 vessels - 1901, 113 — - 1902, 121 — According to the information published in the German “Seefischerei Almanach” for 1902 and 1903, the number of sailing boats registered on September Ist 1901, was 427, and on September 15 1902, 404. If we consider that the luggers, amongst these, fished exclusively with drift-nets, there remain for the other fishing methods — 310 in 1901 and 280 in 1902. Of these, 208 in 1901 and 189 in 1902 fished from the Elbe and the Schleswig Holstein coast, and according to this, there would remain 102 in 1901 and 94 in 1902, registered sailing vessels for the German North Sea coast west from the mouth of the Elbe. They would be distributed over the coast as follows: 1 One of these fishes with gill-nets and eel-traps. Appendix J 5 APPENDIX J: GERMANY ad 1. Sept. 1. Sept. 1901 1902 Mouth of the Weser (Blexen, Brake, Bremerhaven, Elsfleth, Geestemünde, GrossenSsielsa Son a USen) ep ee ee 23 22 Jade Bay (Westacumersiel, Wilhelmshafen) ..................... zu... 3 2 East Frisian Islands (Wangeroog, Spiekeroog, Baltrum, Norderney, Borkum). 34 30 East Frisian coast (Bensersiel, Neuharlingersiel, Norddeich, Greetsiel)..... 20 18 Es (eer) Perborg) ence eerie tse i EEE Eee 3 3 (Baltic ports: Dievenow, Greifswald) . . ............................... 16) 19 Total 102 94 No details are to hand concerning the fishery of these vessels, viz.: in 1901, 99 cutters, 20 “Ewer”, 56 sloops, 2 ‘‘Aak” and 2 yachts; in 1902, 22 cutters, 19 “Ewer”, 50 sloops, 1 ‘“Aak” and 2 yachts. The trawl (or the ‘“kurre”) is the chief fishing apparatus, lines and hooks coming second; the fish caught are chiefly landed at the fish markets at the mouth of.the Weser (Geestemünde and Bremerhaven). This branch of the German deep-sea fishery is gradually decreasing in importance, and this may doubtless be ascribed in the first place to the advance of the deep-sea fishery of the steamers, to the description of which we may now proceed. The first steamer began to work from Geestemünde in 1885 and sale by auction was started a little later (in Hamburg and Altona in 1887, in Geestemiinde in 1888, in Bremer- haven in 1892). At the same period, in 1885, namely, a separate section for the coast Table XX. Development of the German steam fishing fleet from 1885—1903 (N.B. The numbers in brackets refer to the steamers which do not fish with trawls: thus 59 (1) means 58 steamers fishing with the trawl). LE 1885, Ist of January ...... 0 Steamers | 1895, Ist of January ..... 72 (1) Steamers 1887, - - Re 2. = 1897, en re 103(1) — EHRE EN a ner WW — 1899, - - Re 126 (5) — WM SU = co PIN 1901, 426 cee 122(8) — RENE NS UN Nos 59 (1) — 1903,02) a eG Bos 135(11) — Table XXI. Development of the fish-auctions at the four principal markets: Hamburg, Altona, Geesiemünde and Bremerhaven (N.B. For the years 1887—92, the numbers are taken from the annual report for 1893—94, (1), 1895; p.110, for the later years from the regular Annual Reports). Hamburg Altona Geestemiinde | Bremerhaven marks marks marks marks TEST ee Re 443,800 72,100 NESS ise Ate ee 565,500 319,600 103,800 - iste ee 574,500 784,200 397,400 TEE Are 805,600 965,900 904,000 ILS PER es ale 1,002,900 1,329,200 1,789,200 209,700 BE. en 1,313,400 1,523,500 2,564,900 544,000 EIS 2,052,400 1,993,600 3,459,900 729,900 I 4,185,900 2,415,300 5,125,300 875,200 . DENT ee APPENDIX J: GERMANY and deep-sea fisheries was established in the council of the German “Fisherei-Verein”, and this has also been of extraordinary importance for the development of the German deep- sea fisheries. Whilst in the years from 1870—1885, for which no annual reports or statistical summaries exist, the German sea fisheries remained in the condition of a small industry, the year 1885 saw the beginning of the deep-sea fishery as a great enterprise. This is seen, both in the rapid increase in the number of steamers and in the business done at the auction-markets. The Tables XX and XXI will show this more clearly. By far the most important part of the fish sold by auction comes from the steamers fishing with the trawl. As mentioned above, however, fish are landed at the same markets by a small fleet of trawl sailing boats, as well as by some liners, both sailing boats and steamers. During the last few years also, trawl fishing has been carried on outside the North Sea (at Iceland ete.) and a portion of the fish landed for those years comes from there consequently, and not from the North Sea. This will be mentioned further p. 48. To conclude this section, a short notice on the line fishery may be given. As in the neighbouring Holland, a fishery has been carried on from ancient times on the East Frisian coast, and especially from the island of Norderney, with the so-called “Beug” (haddock fishery by means of hooks and lines). According to Lindeman (3), it was originally a coast fishery in the full sense of the word for Norderney; it is simply mentioned here with the deep- sea fisheries, because it must in any case be reckoned with the products of those fisheries. Apart from Norderney, the haddock and cod fishery was also carried on from some other of the Hast Frisian islands, Borkum, Spiekeroog etc. and from other ports (Neu-Hailinger- siel, Carolinensiel etc.). The fishermen from Heligoland also took part in this fishery some time ago, and likewise finally, some from the west coast of Jutland. The fishery was always carried on in 8—15 at most 20 fathoms depth and during the period, from autumn to spring, when the haddock approached the coast. Although 38 vessels are still mentioned as taking part in the lining industry, in the official list for the Ist of January 1904 of the German fishing vessels which fish in the North Sea, this fishery seems to have so far declined, that it has at present little more than historical interest. It is stated in the last published report on the German sea fisheries, that the line fishery had been so little remunerative, that the majority of the fishermen had abstained from the fishery. The importance this fishery has had, and its gradual decline is seen from Table XXII, giving a list of the vessels taking part in it. The results of this fishery may be judged from the figures given in Table XXIII, which refer exclusively to the haddock and cod taken (probably some other species, e.g. rays, were also caught). The backward movement which the fishery has displayed for a number of years, is also clearly seen in this review. Within recent years, long-line fishery in the deep sea has also developed in Germany. It is carried on, both by some of the trawlers as well as by some of the drift-net fisher- men, in addition to their ordinary methods. According to the state of things on the 1st of January 1903, the number of German North Sea vessels which carried on both trawling and lining was 11, and of these 5 were steamers; one drift-net vessel, likewise a steamer, also employed lines. In 1895 three “loggers” (from Emden) were used, during the autumn, for the line fishery after cod in the North Sea. 5* Line-fishery APPENDIX J: GERMANY Za) aya see Table XXII. Number of boats engaged in the line-fishery 1 7 7 Tate | ep ' x re a € | | AE ao ae ie Pete) |e |, SO , - | | A = = = - | mA Yearly u au Sn) MEMBRES ies seen RER A aq A RZ} “2 mo} 3 0 ma | | © En © = rare ES ee eS < JS62 34 ho 3 70 USBsc 03005 67 1 1 3 7 S82 DEEE T 62 | Hs 20000 60 8 il 1 8 7 9 2 il 3 1 ESS 58 7 2 7 9 10 TSGSm he 0) |) it 1 Koi ope B SOR MAE ey 33 8 1 ?10 LODO PEAR 10 2 RAT 210 IG Oey ee 2 eo | 7 LION ee | Table XXII. Results of the line-fishery: 1886—1902 Norderney Norddeich Ren Carolinensiel Spiekeroog Heligoland sie Year . Had- Ê Had- | « Had- x Had- Had- Had- Cod Cod Cod d dock 4 dock i dock ” dock os dock ae dock od 1886. . || 1,143,600) 5,450|| 56,300 | 300 | 98,000 1888.. | 1,098,500 | 7,350] 94,100 | 1,130 1892.. | 378,000 (21,200! 87,000 | 4,200 | 37,000 | 2,900 | 20,500 | 1,700 | 6,000 | 950 1893.. | 352,000 (23,900 | 70,000 | 4,300 | 21,000 | 860 | 7,500 | 300 | 700 1894.. | 500,000 (23,000 | 115,000 | 7,000 | 48,000 | 2,500 | 13,000 | 5,250 | 5,200 | 200 |230,000 1895.. | 844,100 [18,490 | 182,000 | 5,560 | 68,200 | 1,600 | 12,600 | 350 172,000 1896.. | 697,100 [12,400 | 164,600 | 7,000 | 20,000 | 600 | 5,600 | 170 | 50,000 | 3,000 1897.. | 400,000 [13,000 |: 99,000 | 3,510 | 25,000 | 550 | . 500 | 20 | 20,000 | 1,000 1898.. | 181,000 | 3,900| 56,000 | 1,170 20,000 | 800 1899.. | 79,500 | 1,900) 19,000} 490 | 700 6,500 | 270 1900.. | 20,200 | 3,6001 4,300 | 820 50 1,600 | 720 1901... 4,000| 180 1902... 1,147 3. Coast Fishery. As mentioned above, Lindeman includes the so-called East Frisian line-fishery with the coast fishery of Germany, and he speaks later (p. 78) of the other fisheries of theEast Frisian “Wattküste” to which the Dollart fishery also belongs. Then he describes the fisheries on the Oldenburg sea coast, the fishery on the lower Weser, and in the mouth of the Weser, the fisheries on the west coast of Schleswig-Holstein, in the lower Elbe and mouth of the Elbe; lastly, the oyster fishery on the Schleswig-Holstein west coast is also included with the coast fishery. On account of their great variety and of the imperfect statistical data, it is very N ae APPENDIX J: GERMANY difficult to give a summary of these fisheries. A sharp division of the river fishery on the one hand, and of the fisheries in the lower parts as well as in the mouth of the river on the other, is hardly possible; according to the Prussian law of 30th May 18741, the following belong to the coastal fisheries: a. the fishery in the North Sea within the three mile limit, measured from low water mark along the entire stretch of the coast of the land and neighbouring islands and banks; b. the fishery in the bays; and ; ¢. the fishery in the mouths of the rivers and lower parts of the rivers; the upper limit of this part is determined for each province by special ordinance. The species of fish which fall within the coast fisheries, are very numerous: they belong in part to the real North Sea fishes, in part to the migratory and only in part to the brackish and freshwater fishes. The chief methods employed in the different regions are, according to Lindeman (cf. “Beiträge” of 1888), as follows: a. Hast Frisian Flats, Dollart and Mouth of theEms. Limit of the coast fishery on the Ems is the line which runs transversely across the river at the junction of the Leda. Trap-nets (“Kül”) fishery: for herring and smelt, anchovy, garfish, salmon, flounder, plaice, shrimps, eels and lampreys. Stake-nets (“Argen”) fishery: for eels, flat-fish, herring. Shove-net fishery: shrimps. Fishery with eel-traps (“‘Schiitten and Fuken”): for eels. Seine fishery (lower Ems): for salmon. Sturgeon-net fishery (lower Ems): for sturgeon. b. Oldenburg sea coast. To this must be reckoned, in addition to the sloop fishery (with lines) from Carolinensiel and Wangeroog, the shrimp (“Granat”) fishery in, the surroundings of Jade Bay. These are carried on either with pots, fixed nets (hemp traps) or with shove nets. ec. Lower Weser and Mouth of the Weser. Limit of the coast fishery is the mouth of the river Ochtum, lying 56 km. above Bremerhaven. The apparatus is the same as that mentioned below for the lower Elbe and mouth of the Elbe, with exception of the shad nets (pots) which are peculiar to the Weser. The most important fisheries are for the eel, lamprey, smelt and shad. Stop-nets are specially used for the smelt, lamprey and flat-fish. Herring are fished with purse-nets, used as trawls, from Weser down to the mouth. In the summer months, drift-nets and set-nets are employed for flat-fish and trap-nets for eels. d. West Coast of Schleswig-Holstein, Lower Elbe and Mouth of the Elbe. The coast fishery begins at the mouth of the Ilmenau (130 km. above Cuxhaven). Drift-net fishery (“Pümpel”-nets): for sturgeon. Drift-nets, trap-nets and tuck-nets: for smelts. Basket-nets (of willows), pots with net-work, trap-nets and hooks: for eels. + Under coast fisheries, in the sense of this law, are to be understood, those which are being carried on in the parts of the North Sea and Baltic under the control of our Majesty, in the open bays of the sea, the gulfs and in the large rivers at their entrance to the sea. The inland fishery, in the sense of this law, is those fisheries which are carried on in the remaining waters, in the rivers as far as the point where the coast fishery begins. The limits of the coast and inland fisheries are determined for each of the participating provinces by special ordinance, after consideration by the provincial council. APPENDIX J: GERMANY ao Drift-nets (:Buttgarne”), fixed nets and trawl: for flat-fish. Stop-nets: for lampreys, sprats and herring. Shove-nets: for crustacea (shrimps). Traps and dams: for plaice, herring and garfish. In the annual reports published by the ‘Deutsche Seefischerei-Verein”, the products of the coast fishery are also dealt with. The first notices are for the year 1885 and are restricted, like those for 1886 and 1887 — so far as the North Sea coast fisheries are concerned — to the fisheries on the lower Elbe. From 1888 onwards, the entire North Sea coast fisheries are taken account of in these reports. In these annual reports, the data are given according to the principal species considered; the same procedure will be adopted in this summary and the quantities of the principal taken, will be briefly indicated. Sturgeon fAcipenser sturio). In 1885, 6500 specimens were taken on the lower Elbe, in 1887, 9900 specimens; in 1901, 1418, in 1902, only 1278. On the Weser, the highest numher was 38 in 1892, in 1901, 11 were taken there, in 1901, 4 and in 1902 none at all; on the Ems, the numbers decreased fairly evenly from 250 in 1888 to 59 in 1902. In the years 1890—96 the steamers fished in the North Sea from 400 to 1000 specimens each year; they seem to have been mostly small sturgeons: the 600 landed in Geestemünde in 1895 weighed barely 20 kg. each. In 1900, 38, in 1901, 91 and in 1902, 173 sturgeon were caught by the steamers. Salmon (Salmo salar). Salmon are caught on the lower Elbe, the lower Weser and lower Ems. The quantities seem to have remained fairly constant in recent years; in 1902, 2261 were taken on the lower Elbe, 717 on the lower Weser, 278 on the lower Ems. Shad (Clupea finta). The so-called “Maifisch” of the Elbe, Weser and Ems has turned out to be the twaite shad. The number taken has rather increased than decreased since 1885. In 1902, 180,800 were taken on the Elbe, 330,000 on the Weser, 24,000 on the Ems. Smelt (Osmerus eperlanus). The numbers of the smelt taken on the Elbe have very greatly decreased (to judge from the figures in the annual reports). In 1886 and 1887, 4,572,000 and 2,700,000 kg. respectively, were taken on the lower Elbe; in 1901 and 1902, 450,000 and 480,000 kg. respectively. For the lower Weser and lower Ems, there are statistics since 1891. During this period the shad fishery has remained practically constant. Lamprey (Petromyzon fluviatilis). The numbers of the lamprey taken on the lower Elbe (since 1886), and on the lower Weser and lower Ems (since 1891), have remained practically con- stant; it is only on the lower Weser and lower Ems that one can detect a decrease since 1899. Eel (Anguilla vulgaris). Statistics exist for the lower Elbe since 1886, and for the lower Weser and lower Ems, since 1888. The figures show great fluctuations but do not seem to have greatly decreased. ; Flounder (Pleuronectes flesus). Statistics exist for the lower Elbe since 1885, and for the lower Weser and lower Ems since 1888. The figures show no backward tendency. Plaice (Pleuronectes platessa). Some figures have been published for the coastal waters of East Friesland since 1890, concerning the production of the plaice fishery. The numbers are too scarce to draw conclusions from. One may say. however, that great fluctuations occur and no distinct decrease is evident. Sprat and small Herring are taken at the mouth of the Elbe and included together in the statistics. The reports give the quantities caught in the Elbe since 1888, at the mouth of the Weser (Geestemünde) since 1891, and for the Ems and Dollart since 1898. The numbers show great variations, but the product of the fishery in general has not decreased. This is the case also with the herring fishery on the Hast Frisian coast, on the lower Ems etc. The annual reports give the total quantities caught since 1891. aq APPENDIX J: GERMANY Anchovy (Engraulis encrasicholus). The anchovy fishery has but little importance for the coastal fisheries of Germany. In 1884, some shoals seem to have wandered into the Dollart, and in 1890 (when the Dutch obtained 200,000 kegs, so-called “Anker”, of this species in the Zuidersee), 350 ‘Anker’ were taken in the Dollart. Such a large catch has not been taken since. Coregonus (Coregonus oxyrhynchus). These are taken in the lower parts of the Elbe, Weser and Ems. According to the figures in the ‘annual reports, this fishery has greatly decreased; in 1891 and 92, 60,000 and 80,000 specimens were taken on the lower Elbe, in 1901 and 1902 only 4000 and 2600. Mackerel (Scomber scomber). It is only in later years, that this fish has been mentioned in the annual reports. For 1895, it is stated that the results of the fishery were only moderate, for 1897, that 2000 were taken at Heligoland, for 1898 that 2800 were taken there. For 1899, the catch at Heligoland was small, but the steamers caught about 8000. For 1902 it is stated, that 400,000 specimens were taken at Heligoland and that the catch on the Hast Frisian coast was also very successful. Rays (Raja clavata). It is only during the latest years, that attention has been paid to the rays in the coast fisheries. Statistics of this fish only exist for quite recent years; in 1897, 4000 specimens were caught; in 1899, 10,000 at Heligoland; in 1901, 4700 at Heligoland, 3000 at sea and in the coastal waters and 7000 in the Dollart and East Frisian coastal waters. For 1902, it is stated that 12,000 specimens were taken in the last-named waters. Garfish (Belone vulgaris). The annual reports give few data concerning this fish. In 1890, there was an unusually large catch of garfish on the East Frisian coast; in 1897, 4000 specimens were taken there, in most years however, the catch was unimportant or the fish has been quite absent. On the Schleswig-Holstein west coast also, very renumerative catches of this fish were made in some years, in others it was unimportant, or only some specified catches were made: in 1898, 5000 specimens at Sylt, in 1900, 2000 specimens ete. Shrimps (Crangon vulgaris). The shrimp (‘“Granat”) fishery is greatest on the East Frisian and Oldenburg coast, and also on the Schleswig-Holstein west coast. In 1887, the annual take of “Granat” on the flats in front of Dangast and Varelerhafen (Jade Bay), was reckoned by Heincke to be 5—-600,000 kg., whilst the amount of the Ems and Dollart fisheries (1899) was reckoned by Ehrenbaum at 300,000 edible shrimps. The product of the shrimp fishery varies considerably from one year to another; yet, these fisheries do not seem in general to have decreased during recent years. Thus in 1900, the total catch of shrimps on the German North Sea coast was estimated at 4 million liters. Lobster (Homarus vulgaris). It is only the lobster fishery of Heligoland, which has any importance. The yearly production of this fishery is very variable. For 1894, the total catch was estimated at 40—50,000 specimens, in 1896 is was only 8500; in 1900 it was $0,000, in 1901, 12,000 and in 1902, 40,000. Mussels (Mytilus edulis). Attention began to be paid during recent years to the mussel fishery on the Hast Frisian coast. In 1898—1900, the yearly product was from 30 to 35,000 kg., in 1901 60,000, in 1902 80,000 kg. Some brackish- and fresh-water fishes, caught within the region of the coast fisheries of Germany and mentioned in the annual reports, still remain. They are as follows: Ide (Leuciscus idus), Bream and “Zärthe” (Abramis brama and vimba), Ruff (Acerina cernua), Burbot (Lota vulgaris), “Ra pfen” (Aspius rapax), and Pike-Perch (Lucioperca sandra). Of these fishes and the quantities taken, however, no description need be given here. Lastly, the oyster fishery on the Schleswig-Holstein west coast is also reckoned by Lindeman with the coast fishery. In 1888, there were 53 Schleswig oyster banks, 26 in the neighbourhood of Fane, Röm, and Sylt, further at Föhr, Amrum and the “Hallige” (25). APPENDIX J: GERMANY eA ye ea The positions of the oyster beds alter as a result of the changes the streams cause; in general, they lie on the outskirts of the deeper channels of the “Wattenmeer” (shallows). The banks are crown property and are leased from time to time to various tenants. In 1865, the leases brought in 90,000 marks and about 60 families on Amrum lived on the catch. In the year 1881—82, 53/4 marks were paid as rent for a ton of oysters, but in general, only 534 tons of 700 oysters each were fished by the tenants. In the working period, from autumn to spring, the fishery (1881—82) was carried on by 14 vessels, each carrying 2 men. ‘Since the spring of 1882”, says Lindeman (1888) “the old beds have not been fished.” It was the general opinion, that the banks were overfished in the years preceding 1879; according to the tenancy-contract concluded in 1879, the government took full control over the supervision of the banks and this was employed (in 1882) to stop the fishery for 10 years: the government banks “rested” until 1891 and were again opened only in the autumn of that year. Their condition and value on reopening was, however, not satisfactory (winter 1891—92). Winter 1892—93. The government banks gave but a small yield. Winter 1893—94. The oysters come almost exclusively from the wild beds, as the govern- ment banks are little productive. : Winter 1894—95. No information concerning the government banks on the Schleswig west coast. Winter 1895—96. The government banks on the Schleswig west coast have not revived in spite of the long rest; a small quantity was fished, showing very good condition. Winter 1896—97. On the government oyster banks on the Schleswig west coast, only 24,000 oysters fished. Winter 1897—98. On the government oyster banks on the Schleswig west coast, only 300 tons were fished in the spring. Winter 1898—99. 100,000 oysters brought to Sylt were laid down on the government banks. Take at Hallig beds was rich. 1899. On the government banks on the Schleswig west coast, about 350,000 oysters were broken. 1900. The government oyster banks on the Schleswig-Holstein west coast are again, according to report, almost exhausted; it is expected, however, that the warm summer of 1901 will cause a good fall of oyster spat. Some notes may be briefly given here on the wild banks, in addition to the information concerning the government banks. In the annual report for 1891—92 it is stated; «It is remarkable, how the oyster fishery has increased in extent on the wild North Sea banks, which lie northwards from the East Frisian islands.» For 1891—92, the total catch amounted to more than 1 million oysters at 3—4 marks per 100. In the winter of 1892—93, a number of the larger cutters were again busy on these banks, and the total product was estimated at 1 million oysters. In the following years, the production was sometimes smaller, sometimes more successful. In the winter of 1899—1900, there were 30 of the largest cutters on the Elbe at this fishery, and about 2,260,000 oysters were taken and landed. These made about 2-2 to 2-5 pfennig per oyster at auction. The same number of cutters, in the winter of 1900—1901, brought in 1,910,000 oysters, which sold for 2:50 to 4:50 mark per hundred. In the winter of 1901—1902, the take of oysters decreased owing to the stormy weather of the spring: altogether, only about 1,573,400 oysters were landed. FAN APPENDIX J: GERMANY b. The principal Fishes l. Great herring fishery: Herring (Olupea harengus). 2. Deep-sea fishery of sailing vessels and steamers: (N.B. The percentages are reckoned from the figures for the Geestemünde and Altona markets for the year 1903). Haddock (Gadus aeglefinus) ................ BR ON EA RIES, : 33—45 % Cd (CASE ADM) Ee, CAVA Hiden dey. nee MS oN ESP A ce Sila kee 14—19 - Blncen@Rleumonectesi plates) mn 1.2. REA en. un. GIRL > Lemon sole (Plewronectes microcephalus)...................... 9—10:3 - Sale SaleaMeialgaPisy Ae IT NIE 4—11:8 - Turbot and Brill (Rhombus maximus and laevis) .............. 6— 84 - CUalBEshdGadusmnzens)1.: nn. EE SOE A 3 - Halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris). 9-0. 00 02. tee eee 0:5- 2 Gurnards (Trigla gurnardus and hirundo).................... 1— 14- Hake (Merluccius vulgaris). EN EE en TER NE 0— 1 - Dis dMolvaroulgamıs) ae tel leet. Mls ale wid ey RER 0— 1 Dog fish (Acanthias vulgaris and other species) and cat fish WAnmenchichose pur ns, 0— 1 Various Fishes (Weevers /Trachinus draco], Angler /Lophius EISEN TS TRETEN) a en: Sean. 0— 2 - 3. Coast fishery. The fishes of this division, already briefly dealt with (p.42), may again be enumerated: a. Sea fish: Mackerel (Scomber scomber), Garfish (Belone vulgaris), Herring (Clupea harengus), Sprat (Clupea sprattus), Anchovy (Engraulis encrasicholus), Rays (Raja clavata etc.), Flounder (Pleuronectes flesus), Plaice (Pleuronectes platessa) and Smelt (Osmerus eperlanus). b. Anadromous migratory fishes: Salmon (Salmo salar), Salmon trout (Salmo trutta), Coregonus (Coregonus oxyrhynchus), Shad (Clupea finta), Sturgeon (Acipenser sturio), and Lamprey (Petromyzon fluviatilis). . Katadromous migratory fishes: Eel (Anguilla vulgaris). d. Freshwater fishes: Perch (Perca fluviatilis), Perch-pike (Lucioperca sandra), Carp (Cyprinus carpio), Tench (Tinca vulgaris), Bream (Abramis brama), Ide (Leuciscus idus), Bream (Abramis vimba), Ruff (Acerina cernua), Burbot (Lota vulgaris), «Rapfen» (Aspius rapaa) and Pike (Esox lusius). e. Shellfish: Lobster (Homarus vulgaris), Shrimps (Crangon vulgaris), Crabs (Cancer pagurus, Carcinus maenas ete.), Oysters (Ostrea edulis), Mussels (My- telus edulis). Q c. The principal Fishing-Grounds 1. The German herring fishery is carried on at the same places in the North Sea as the Dutch, so that reference may be made to the section on Holland regarding them. 2. The German deep-sea fishery of sailing vessels and steamers. Appendix J 6 APPENDIX J: GERMANY eas UD es The few German liners and the sailing vessels fishing with the trawl keep more in the neighhourhood of the coast; their fishing grounds scarcely extend so far as those ot the steamers. According to Henking (7), who describes the grounds frequented by the Ger- man steamers in a preliminary paper, these places lie, for the most part, in the neighbour- hood of the German and Jutland coasts, and the grounds lying to the west of the Great Fisher Bank are relatively little visited by the German fishermen. The large grounds near the English and Scottish coasts are not at all fished by the German trawlers. The parallel of 58° N. L. forms the northern limit of the territory most frequented by these fishermen: to the east, the territory extends into the Skager Rak and Kattegat, between Fr ederikshavn and Gothenburg. North of 58° N.L., there are only the fishing grounds in the Murray Firth, those in the centre of the North Sea at + 58°20', 59°15’ and 61°10’ N. L. and those at Iceland. A chart is given with Henking’s preliminary paper, which shows these fishing- grounds. To the south, the fishing-grounds extend almost to the 54th. parallel and pass beyond this only so far as the series of islands Terschelling to Wangeroog extend. 3. The coast fisheries are carried on, not only in the true coastal waters within 3 nautical miles from low water along the mainland and islands, but also in the German portion of the Dollart, between the islands and the mainland of Hast Friesland, in the Jade Bay, and in the lower parts of the Ems, Weser and Elbe. For the upper limits of the coast fisheries region in these rivers, see above p. 37. II. Statistics a. The period for which they exist The first comprehensive survey of the German statistics was that made by Hensen (10). The material refers to the year 1872 and shows the number of fishing vessels and fishermen engaged in the German sea and coast fisheries. «The Results of the observation-stations on the German coasts» published by the «Kommission zur Untersuchung der Deutschen Meere» continue the data given by Hensen. They are concerned mostly with the Baltic; as regards the North Sea fisheries, they contain information concerning the plaice-fishery of Ellenbogen and concerning the haddock, cod and oyster fisheries of Heligoland up to 1884. According to Dittmer (8), «further» information was published regarding Prussia under the title: «Beitrage zur landwirtschaftlichen Statistik von Preussen fiir das Jahr 1883.» In 1887, by order of the «D. Seefischerei-Verein» (then still the ‘Section for coast and Deep-sea Fisheries’ of the «D. Fischerei-Verein»), Lindeman worked out the available statistical material of the German sea fisheries, and his work was published in 1888. Of the tables accompanying the publication, the following refer specially to the North Sea fisheries : Table 1. Number of the fishermen in 1872. — 2. Summary of the fishermen employed in the fishery according to their occu- pation, for 1882. — 3. Statistics of the Elbe fishery, so far as this belongs to the coast fishery, and of the west coast fishery of Schleswig-Holstein for 1883—84. — 4. Coast fishery in the magistrate’s district of Stade for 1883—84. — bb. = = — — — Aurich for 1883—84. — 6. Deep-sea fishery of the west coast of Schleswig-Holstein for 1883—84. da APPENDIX J: GERMANY Table 7. Fishing vessels, which fished in the North Sea beyond the coastal waters on the 1st of January 1886 and 1887. Product of the Emden herring fishery for 1872—1886. Summary of the results of the sea fishery carried on from the Elbe and Schleswig-Holstein west coast, from the returns of 28 vessels, for 1886. The remaining tables are concerned with the German import and export of fish, the sale of fish and so on, but these fishery products do not exclusively refer to the German fisheries. Only the Tables 21 and 22 are exceptions: Table 21. Statistics for the year 1887 of the returns of fresh-fish etc. as shown by altogether 1579 landings from Finkenwarder vessels. — 22. Summary of the monthly returns of the most important fresh-fish and shell-fish for the St. Pauli market at Hamburg 1887. For the later publications regarding the German sea fisheries, we are indebted almost entirely to the «D. Seefischerei-Verein.» The following list contains the most important of these publications. 1. The annual reports published since 1888 in the «Mitteilungen» (1). For the years 1886, 1887 to the end of March 1888 and from the 1‘ of April 1888 to the end of March 1889, the annual reports deal with the fishery on the German coast and in the coastal waters. The report for April 1889—90, as well as the later, deal with the German sea- and coast-fisheries. From 1886—1898, the reports were worked out by G. Havemann, from 1899—1900 by Dr. M. Lindeman, and from 1901—1903 by A. Schaller. As already shown in the first portion of this work, the annual reports give information on many points of the German sea fisheries; naturally, the figures given are for the whole year. 9. The summaries, published likewise in the “Mitteilungen”, of the German vessels which fish in the North Sea beyond the coastal waters. According to Dittmer (8), the Home Office is responsible for the publication of these annual lists. These summaries continue the data given in Table VII of Lindeman’s “Beitrage” and begin with the “condition on the 1° of January 1901”. They contain the number of vessels, their gross tonnage, crews and the kind of fishing engaged in by each. The number of steamers, engaged in the several fisheries, is also given each time. 3. The figures, published in similar manner in the “Mitteilungen”, of the catches made by the fishermen who are assisted by loans and means from the government and states funds. These figures refer to the years 1892—1902 and are especially of value for the results of the herring fishery. 4. The “Seefischerei-Almanach” for 1898 and following years, published by the “Deutscher Seefischerei-Verein”, in which, amongst other things, a list is given of the German sea and coast fishing vessels. 5. The yearly statistics drawn up by the auctioneers of the fish sold by auction. These are printed and distributed amongst the people interested. They exist: for Altona, since 1887, - Bremerhaven, since 1897, and - Geestemiinde, since 1889. So far as Hamburg is concerned, the statistics likewise began in June 1887, for the fish- market at St. Pauli. These were not regularly printed, however. Copies of the statistical 6* — 8 9. APPENDIX J: GERMANY N returns of Auctioneer Platzmann could be utilised for the years 1894 to 1903, and those of Auctioneer Késer for the years 1896 to 1903. 6. The business-reports given by the fishery companies. Of such reports, only those of the Emden herring fishery company for the years 1886—87 and 1900—1901, have been at the disposal of the author of this present summary. b. The manner in which the statistics are collected Mention has already been made of the work of Hensen and of the ‘Ministerial Kommission zur Untersuchung der deutschen Meere”; since that time, the “Deutscher See- fischerei-Verein” has always considered it as one of its duties, to collect and publish the statistics of the sea fisheries, so that one is for the most part indebted to this Verein for the statistics at present available. The statistics, however, are not collected for their own sake, but only in so far as they are found necessary for the solution of the scientific and other problems connected with the sea fisheries. The statistical summaries published by the “D. Seefisherei- Verein” in the “Mitteilungen”, are almost exclusively statistics for the year: by order of the Verein, they are collated by a specialist at the end of a year and published yearly. Monthly summaries are given in the annual reports of the fish-auctions at Geestemünde (1889—1903), Altona (1887—99) and Bremerhaven (1897—1903). These are prepared by the auctioneers. The summaries of the number of vessels, which fish in the North Sea beyond the coastal waters and which are published in the “Mitteilungen” of the «D. Seefischerei- Verein”, are “taken from official statistics”. The lists of the registered German fishing vessels (sail and steam) which appear in the Seefischerei-Almanach, are prepared by the managers of the German Lloyd. Along with these, the Almanach also contains lists of the non- registered vessels of the sea and coastal fisheries. These are arranged in the order, from east to west along the coast. c. Forms of publication So far as the form, in which the statistics of the German sea-fisheries are published, is concerned, it can be said in general, that the most important figures are given by the D. Seefischerei Verein in their annual reports. For the vessels and fishermen, reference may be made to the summaries and lists mentioned on p.52, 53. For the fish landed, the data in the annual reports show the results of the herring fishery, and the annual auction- statistics are specially important for the fresh-fish. By far the best and most detailed tables are given by the auctioneers of Geestemünde (D. E. Müller and L. P. Schultz). Some 50 different species (and shellfish) are distinguished in the tables; of these, various divisions are (at present) made according to size, 5 for the haddock, 3 for the cod, and 2 for each of the following: plaice, soles, turbot and brill. The tables give the total weight and the selling price of each species for each month, and also an annual summary of the weight and value, as well as the average price for each fish per pound, i.e. per 4/2 kg. | The annual statistics prepared by the Bremerhaven auctioneer (W. Syassen) since 1897 are similar to those for Geestemünde, but the number of species separately distinguished is much smaller in the Bremerhaven tables. A == APPENDIX J: GERMANY With regard to the Altona market, Auctioneer J. Cohrs has prepared tables giving the monthly returns up to 1899. Since 1900, the annual statistics still contain only the year’s returns for the Altona steamers, for the Altona sea- and Elbe-fisheries, and for the fish brought from the interior as well as imported, according to the quantity and total value; along with these data, the average price per pound i.e. per {y kg., is also given. The tables of the Hamburg auction are not published. There are two auctioneers; the one (Hr. Platzmann) sells the catches of the Finkenwärder sailing vessels and also (up to 1899) those of some steamers; the other (Hr. Köser) sells the catches of most of the steamers bringing their fish to Hamburg (since 1900). Through the friendly aid of Hr. Lübbert, the fisheries inspector at Hamburg, the Bureau has been able to see copies of the auction-books, for the years 1894—1903 for the sales of Hr. Platzmann and for the years 1896—1902 for those of Hr. Köser. Both auctioneers, however, sell large quantities of fish which are not brought direct from the sea but from other towns (from German fishing ports and also from foreign). Regard has been taken, in preparing the following summary of the German statistics, only for the fish brought direct from the sea to Hamburg. III. General information from the statistics a. The quantities taken during the period 1892—1903 1. The great herring fishery. The available statistics give excellent data concerning the quantities of herring landed in ‘tons. Where the quantities are given in so-called “Kantjes” (‘tons’ packed at sea), they have been changed to tons of land-packing on the proportion of 17 “Kantjes” —14 ‘tons’. As for Holland, the quantities are calculated in kilograms from the numbers of herring: 8 fresh herring being taken to weigh one kilo- gram. The number of herring in a ‘ton’ (land-packing) is taken at 865, so that the total number of herring is ascertained from the total number of‘tons’. The first column of Table XXIV gives the product of the so-called great herring fishery, calculated on this method; for the years 1895—99, some small items amongst the ‘tons’ sold at Altona are salt-herring landed by Altona fishing vessels, and these are included here. 2. Deep-sea fishery of sailing vessels and steamers. The available statistics are those of the fresh fish sold at the auctions in Altona, Bremerhaven, Geestemünde and Hamburg. The quantities of each species are given yearly in pounds = # ke. Geestemünde brings all the fish together on one list; the total quantities of each species are given in pounds, except oysters and crabs, which are given in numbers. These latter are, in this summary, changed to ke. on the proportion that 10 oysters or 20 crabs weigh one kg. In the tables for the year 1901, it is stated that an important quantity of fish (4,406,238 ke.) was brought from Iceland. This has been divided between the haddock and cod, on the proportions given for 1902 and 1903. For the years 1902 and 1903, the class IV of haddock is placed here with the whiting. Sturgeon, salmon, sea-trout, shad and smelt are taken together. Herring, sprat etc. are taken with “various fishes”. In the year 1902, the fish brought from the Atlantic Ocean are also included under “various”. For Geestemünde, the available statistics are for the years (1889) 1892—1903. Altona gave a special list of the fish landed there from Altona fishing vessels, for APPENDIX J: GERMANY ae eae the years (1887) 1892—1899. From 1900 onwards, these lists are divided into 3: fish from Altona steamers, fish from Altona sea-fishing vesssels, fish from Altona Elbe fishing boats. Lists are also given for all the years, of the fish received from inland and from foreign countries (for the years (1887) 1892—96, this fish was designated “fish sent from Scan- dinavia”). The last mentioned, and the fish landed from the Elbe are not taken account of here. The total quantities of each species are given in pounds; but, for shellfish in numbers. The latter are changed to kg. by means of the proportions, 10 oysters or 5 lobsters or 20 crabs weigh one kg. In the tables for 1892—99, the brill and lemon-sole are taken together; these are divided up on the proportion that 1/srd of the weight is brill and */srds lemon-sole. In the same tables, the dab is taken with the plaice, but no attempt has been made here to separate them. Further, cod and hake, rays and dogfish are taken together. The first are counted here as cod, the latter as rays. The Altona statistics available, are for the years 1892—1903. Hamburg. In the annual reports on the most important fishes (plaice, soles, turbot, haddock and cod), published by the D. Seefischerei-Verein, figures are given of the value of the fish sold by auction in Hamburg, for the years 1892, 1893 and 1894. The quantities have been calculated from the values, on the assumption that the average prices of fish at Hamburg agree in general with those at the other ports. The statistics received by the Bureau (see p. 45), distinguish the following: soles, turbot, brill, plaice, haddock and cod; then lobster and other shellfish; the remaining Table XXIV. Quantities of the various species landed in Germany, in kg. 1892—1895 | 1896—1900 1901 1902 1903 Salt-herrin gece ers ae ee en 3,568,800 8,372,400 | 14,616,200 | 18,415,400 | 21,585,100 PIRI CORY Mee RT RN en AA 3,442,200 2,984,100 3,002,600 3,760,400 2,770,300 Dole bene Ss Works evecare RE 274,900 340,500 284,400 264,500 275,800 IDE eRe ome ntas CA ane NE ESA 13,600 36,800 134,100 192,600 198,500 Witch and Lemon-sole .............. 106,200 741,200 1,189,300 1,303,900 1,424,700 TRADE 6 Gabe seco 20 ars A aris eh es ae oe 285,300 388,800 318,200 335,400 396,200 BAPE LEE yee cca or ere PR RE ARR 69,600 128,700 163,600 198,000 197,600 bai tees EY ETES AIS 21,400 69,400 | 105,500 79,400 103,400 Haddock ....... MR a AiG bE 11,582,900 | 12,089,200 8,575,700 | 10,565,900 | 12,394,900 Wibitinp en PSS hore peepee 90,800 877,300 | 2,735,800 4,587,900 6,931,600 Gods OA Eee 2,912,600 4,131,500 6,117,900 7,408,800 8,887,500 Saithe MEDIA CRE EEE EE EEE ine 105,600 1,554,900 1,346,100 1,799,900 1,491,600 lak es ius fare ova ena tee RE ee 307,600 418,100 420,900 419,100 234,900 NE eee UE a ARTNET 126,900 237,700 "327,600 335,500 365,800 Gurnards & Weevers.......... LAT, 299,900 522,500 738,500 663,800 532,700 Bayay en. ale ee BEE 323,000 655,000 788,800 850,500 1,015,000 Dog-fish and Cat-fish......... See ahs 79,600 249,100 269,600 202,100 220,500 Warloust.(..0 smu: cera oe ET eee 588,500 1,677,800 1,370,400 2,593,600 4,394,900 Lobster, Oysters, Shrimps ........... 53,000 96,100 71,900 83,500 84,700 Total... | 24,252,400 | 35,571,100 | 42,577,100 | 54,060,200 | 63,505,700 ATi APPENDIX J: GERMANY Species are grouped under ‘all other’. An estimate of the values and quantities of all the species brought direct to Hamburg has been made (with the assistance, where neces- sary, of the known figures for Geestemünde and Altona), so far as it was possible. Bremerhaven. For the auction at Bremerhaven, the annual reports for 1893—95 and also for 1897 and 1898, give information concerning the total value of the most im- portant fish landed there. As the price of these species per pound was also given, it was a simple matter to calculate the quantities for these years. For the years 1899—1903, the published annual reports are available, and give both the total quantities as well as total values of the various species. For 1892 and 1896, the quantities have had to be calculated: the total value was known; this was distributed over the various species by help of other years, and thus — by comparison with Geestemünde and Altona — the probable quantities were calculated. The quantities shown in Table XXIV result from the summation of the separate quan- tities for the four auctions. So far as the haddock and cod are concerned, the quantities - obtained by the line fishery of East Friesland are included. Of the coast fishery, only the quantities are included which were brought to auction. b. The value of the (North Sea) fish landed during the period 1892—1903 Table XXV (p. 48) endeavours to give a summary of the value of the principal species of the German sea-fisheries in the years 1892—1903. The following may be useful for a comprehension of the Table: The value of the herring fishery published in the annual reports, contains (as in Holland) the value of the barrels, as well as that of the salt used in curing. The number of the barrels, however, is known for each year; from the total value of the cured herring, the total value of the herring caught has been estimated on the basis, that the barrel plus the salt is equal to 4 marks; the total values given have been reduced by this amount. . The total value of the line fishery on the East Friesland coast and at Heligoland, has been calculated with the aid of the figures given at various places of the annual reports. For the latest years 1901—1903, the data are wanting for the East Friesland coast, and only the quantities of the haddock, rays and cod taken by the Heligoland sloops (perhaps exclusively with lines?) are known. With regard to the value of the trawl fishery of the sailing vessels and steamers, the figures are available for the fish landed and sold at Altona, Hamburg, Geestemiinde and Bremerhaven. In Table XXV, the figures are for the most part taken from the auction returns for the places named. As very important items are included in these returns, which are not concerned with fish coming direct from the German sea-fisheries, the total returns are not taken here, but only those which give the value of the fish brought from the sea. Altona. One-third to one-fourth of the total value is for the fish brought to market by the Elbe fishermen, from inland, from foreign countries and by Altona dealers. The values given for 1895—1899, with regard to the salt-herring brought to Altona, are added to those of the other salt-herring. : . Hamburg. In 1892, about 80°/, (probably) of the value of the fish sold at the Ham- burg auction came from the sea fishery and 20°/, from elsewhere. In 1896, the proportion APPENDIX J: GERMANY ee Re Table XXV. Total value of the German sea-fisherles (North Sea), in marks (= shillings) À Fast Fish landed by the sea-fishermen Year Herring- Friesland Total ey line fishery || Altona Bremer" | Guxhaven | Seeste- Hamburg , haven münde 1892 | 407,900 | 273,300 | 885,700 | 309,700 | — 1,798,200 | ? 730,000 | 4,404,800 1893 441,700 253,800 | 1,065,700 703,800 | — 2,076,200 | ? 710,000 5,251,200 1894 609,200 416,400 1,226,800 544,000 = 2,554,100 | ? 837,500 6,188,000 1895 | 1,223,800 | 435,600 || 1,219,000 | 734,500 | ? 50,000 | 2,705,700 | ? 756,400 || 7,124,200 1896 | 1,166,300 | 421,300 || 1,397,400 | 1,067,500 | ? 50,000 | 2,733,600 | 759,700 | 7,595,800 1897 | 1,593,600 | 254,500 | 1,344,900 | 1,070,800 | ? 50,000 | 2,884,100 | 644,300 | 7,842,200 1898 | 2,042,800 | 160,600 || 1,535,100 | 729,900 | ? 50,000 | 3,450,200 | 621,600 | 8,590,200 1899 || 1,676,200 69,900 || 1,871,900 | 750,200 | 50,000 | 4,046,000 | 716,600 | 9,181,100 1900 || 3,043,200 32,900 | 1,654,900 | 704,200 | 111,900 | 4,356,100 | 768,300 || 10,671,500 1901 || 3,204,600 2,600 | 1,755,100 | 763,300 | 73,900 | 4,602,200 | 705,700 | 11,107,400 1902 || 4,506,900 | 4,700 || 1,835,400 | 875,200 | 77,900 | 5,076,200 | 603,300 | 12,979,600 1903 | 24,000,000 = 2,154,400 | 767,900 | 66,800.| 5,042,500 | ? 647,600 | 12,679,200 was 47-5 °/, from the fishery and 52-5 0/, from elsewhere; in 1900, 32 %/, and 68 °/, respec- tively; in 1902 not quite 15%, from the fishery and 85 %, from elsewhere. 1 Geestemünde. For the years 1892—94, it is stated, that the fish came in part from sailing-vessels and in part from other than Geestemiinde fishermen. The number of the imports’ not the value is given: this is included, however, in the total amount. In the year’s report for 1901, fish brought from Iceland is mentioned for the first time; in the report for 1899 however, it is mentioned that the Geestemünde steamers were often fishing at Iceland and the Færoes, and that not merely in the good season of the year. For the years 1902 and 1903, the values and quantities of the haddock and cod brought from Iceland are separately distinguished in the Geestemiinde statistics; these are included in the tables. In the Geestemiinde tables, further, there are small items repre- senting freshwater fish; these have been deducted from the total value. Bremerhaven. From 1899 onward, the total value contains also the value of fish from Iceland. From 1901 onwards, the value of “diverse fish from Iceland” is given separately. Cuxhaven. Since 1895, herring and sprat have been sold by auction at Cuxhaven. The figures given for Cuxhaven come from these sales; the data for the years 1895—98 are not published, those for 1899—1903 have been taken from a work by Guido Moring.? Concluding remark. The figures given in Table XXV represent only that part of the total value of the German sea-fisheries, for which reports occur. As a matter of fact, the total value is considerably larger: the value of the fish landed by German vessels in foreign ports, for one thing, is of some account in most years. As an example, it may be mentioned here, that the company “Nordsee” of Nordenham made 2,118,600 marks in 1902 with 29 steamers, and of this sum 1,331,200 marks were obtained from sales in foreign countries (Jahresbericht 1902—1903, p. 169). 1 “Einsendungen” — imports to Hamburg from other parts of Germany as well as from other countries * Moving, G.: Cuxhaven als Fischereihafen und Fischmarkt. Hamburg, 1904. © APPENDIX J: Table XXVI. Value of the varlous species landed In Germany, in marks (= shillings) GERMANY 1892—1895 | 1896—1900 1901 1902 1903 SATA NI OPA enr Eee re 670,500 1,904,400 3,204,600 4,506,900 | ? 4,000,000 Aalen: Kol AO TR NOR PES __ 677,100 764,700 742,200 830,300 724,700 SOND». à à du te OO sO SIRE eee eR 506,400 703,400 702,300 585,100 622,800 Dale 6 ae ES 1,500 4,600 | 16,700 24,600 27,800 Witch & Lemon-sole...... ......... 64,500 303,100 513,800 554,600 677,900 nie 6 CNE de ner er 386,600 522,300 514,000 455,400 494,900 Brill. 3,00 rar N ee 46,300 86,300 128,800 143,200 152,100 AO so RE METRE 13,800 53,100 | 94,300 70,400 92,600 HEURE Mr rae cana sts scenery ctevente ae 8 2,303,900 2,662,300 2,612,000 2,754,100 2,616,400 VOIRE "Bie ieee oer ts ea eae era 8,600 141,000 432,200 602,300 751,200 Cl 42. 5 a HR RARES EEE 528,800 779,100 1,146,300 1,308,000 1,474,800 SAN an Pollack PEN cade 24,100 100,800 221,300 298,500 225,200 BARS oo ep Niemen et aoa a 68,800 89,700 108,400 112,700 69,200 lié Le SERA eee een nen aR 23,900 38,300 58,900 55,400 50,900 Gurnards & Weevers................ 36,600 68,800 99,500 94,600 72,400 IRE us are a Heer aR ee 55,800 100,100 121,000 130,200 144,800 Dog-fish & Cat-fish ................. 11,000 38,900 48,900 40,500 42,200 VERIDEN 4668 COR ee ECO 286,300 369,900 307,400 | 380,200 403,300 Lobsters, Oysters, Shrimps........... 27,600 45,400 | 34,800 32,600 36,000 Total. 5,742,100 8,776,200 | 11,107,400 | 12,979,600 | 12,679,200 Table XXVI gives a summary of the values of the various species landed in the years 1892—1903. With regard to salt-herring, the figures correspond with those of Table XXV, except for the years 1895—99. For the remaining species, what has been said regarding the quantities, holds in the main for the values. The value of the so-called coast-herring, small herring and sprat, is included in the list under “various” (also, those of the Cuxhaven market). c. Number of fishing-vessels The German fishing vessels are divided as follows: registered sailing boats — sailing vessels (trading) — sailing vessels for special purposes. — steamers. — steamers (trading) unregistered sea and coast fishing vessels. On the 1* of September 1903, the nature and composition of the German North Sea fishing fleet was as shown in Table XXVII?. The registered vessels are those which, in accordance with the law of June 2214 1899, are entered on a ships’ register. ‘They come under the conditions of the international agree- 1 From the lists of the D. Seefisherei-Almanach for 1904. Appendix J APPENDIX J: GERMANY = AN ment of May 6% 1892, concerning the police regulation of the fishery in the North Sea beyond the coastal waters. The registered vessels may all be regarded as pertaining to the North Sea fisheries. Table XXVII. Composition of the German fishing fleet on September Ist 1903 Perel ES Cubie Capacity AE Denomination A a = 2 Brutto; Netto, Remarks ==3|8=| Netto: | registered a Sila cbm. tons 1. | Registered sailing vessels........... 417 | 2797 { 100 à à 149534 | With both the regi- ) ; tered ili ] 2. — sail trading vessels ...... 172 || 360 N 1002: } 862.7 PE ton one Q 1 3. = sailing vessels for special ; 3950.9 | ded the herring-loggers PUTPOSCS EPP EC EE EC 26 \ 29832 f 10582 | with auxiliary engine. ; ‘ 600761 \| 5763 They are thus given : = beamers ee ler. el. 159 6 ; ee Et { 163161 f twice in this summary. 6. — steam trading vessels .... il 8 { ee \ 41 6. _ steam whaling vessels.... 2 30 147.6 52.16 il — steamers for special pur- “il Dose Ne 1 5 ( D) 0.25 8. || Unregistered sailing vessels ........ 594 | 1204 ). — open boats and skiffs .. | 1443 | 1923 10. = steamers and motor boats 12 26 The unregistered German fishing vessels belong in part to the North Sea, in part to the Baltic. The North Sea fleet of unregistered fishing vessels on the 1‘ of September 1903, was as follows: d Table XX VII List of the unregistered German fishing vessels un Decked un: Open || 6 N a sailing sailing boats & || = 3 3 boats De boats SET 2 = 3 5 Nr. State, province etc. re ad Remarks 2 = 5 2 8 2 8 Eile 2 ES B/ele\e)e|e lelere |e =\S ls | 2 |) ja ® Province Schleswig-Holstein: 1 North Sea coast........ 2 | 4 || 110 | 213 | 77 | 181 |475 731) 664 | 1129 Province Hanover: 2 a. Lüneburg ........... 1 | 2] 62 | 124 | 41 | 82 262216) 365 | 422 1 including 2 3 b. Stade meer 4 6 | 20 | 34 I 17 | 30 210298) 251 368 | steamers with 4 CHAUTICOE ERA EL 31 | 74 155|168| 192 | 242 | + men 5 | Free Hansa-town Hamburg. 41 | 82 | 154 | 308 |105 | 210 | 300 598 2 including 3 6 | — — Bremen... 67/110) 67 110 | steamers with 7 | Grand Duchy Oldenburg... | 5 | 14 | 35 | 76 169 1190 |. 209 || 289 | 9 men era) ae APPENDIX J: GERMANY The division of the German fishing vessels into registered and unregistered took place after the introduction of the law of June 221 1899. It agreed, in the main, with the divi- sion which had existed previously: A. Vessels for the fishery in the North Sea beyond the coastal We, B. Vessels for the fishery in the coastal waters. Whilst the available data scarcely suffice to trace the development of the coastal fishing vessels during the period 1892—1903 (for 1883—84 a survey of the Elbe fishery, of the fishery on the west coast and islands of the west coast in the province of Schleswig-Hol- stein, of the fisheries in the magistrates’ districts of Stade and Aurich, with details of the numbers of vessels, is given in Lindeman’s work), this can be made out clearly for the fishery in the North Sea beyond the coastal waters, by help of the statistics published by the D. Seefischerei- Verein. Table XXIX gives a summary, from which the increase in numbers of the steamers as well as the increase in size of the sailing vessels can be seen. Table XXX gives a good picture of the development of the herring fishing fleet. The tables are sufficiently clear to require no further explanation. Between the figures given in these tables, which are “based on the official statistics”, and those to be found in the Fischerei-Almanach there are small differences, which probably arise from the fact that the first represent the condition on the 1" of January, the second, those of the Almanach, the condition on the 1° of September of each year. d. Type of boat 1. Great herring fishery. For this, sailing vessels and also (since 1899) steamers are employed. The sailing vessels are almost exclusively the so-called “loggers”, and are constructed and rigged out quite after the Dutch pattern. The size varies between 200 and 250 m? brutto, 158 and 200 m® netto, or (in registered tons) between 57 and 70. There are some, however, which are smaller than 200 m® and larger than 250 m® brutto. For a logger of 200 m® brutto the length is 21:5 m., the breadth 5-9 m., the depth 3 m.; those of 250 m® are 23.5 m. long, but have almost the same breadth and depth as the do Most luggers are provided with steam winches, some with auxiliary engines. The steamers of the great herring fishery belong to the Geestemünde and Deep-Sea Fisheries Company and are so-called steam-loggers. The size of these vessels varies between 513 and 588 m® brutto (189—215 m5, 67—76 net registered tons). The length of these steamers is from 37—39m., the breadth from 6—6-6m., the depth from 3‘24—3:39 m. 2. Deep-sea fishery with steamers and sailing-vessels. The steamers are mainly built on the English pattern of steam-trawler. The size varies between 374 and 630 m® brutto. The largest steamers are 10 in number, belonging to the German Steam-Fisheries Company “Nordsee” of Bremen (Nordenham) and are from 620—630 m? brutto, 207—219 m* netto (73—77 net registered tons). These steamers have a length of 37:2 m., breadth 7 m. and depth 3:6 m. The average size of all the steamers is, at present, about 460 m® brutto (= 125 m? netto or 44-3 registered tons), in length —- 33-5 m., in breadth 6-3 m. and in depth 2:5 m. The sailing-vessels are of very different types, of which the “Ewer”, cutters and er are the most important. t 7* ESO GERMANY APPENDIX J Table XXIX. Number of German vessels engaged in the fisheries of the North Sea beyond the coastal waters Steamers \ Sailing vessels Total rn = : 3 Be) Ss A ' Ge ols 5 EL fe |e cae fellas © 5 lau > 5 2 ay al = Yon a 2 ee nee RS ele cz iss [os] Sa wie see. ee || 6] 812 a) ea il | ee ae Fo (Oo eo EN ester sir | = | Se leo a SES SERRE ile leas ne = = pale 8.8 RASE ES lag lea 2 IPSS Pele ele | ee lee Ss | 8 à ASS es Sn les En | ol = = = a le Sle ele Sle to) S| =e = 8 So $\ 25/85] 2 BSSase sn sa sea 3 5; 85 © Sassiiss se 5 |8 | Bs 55 Sela") 2 eS eS ese jas 4°) 2 je eRe) ea) Ss fe | 8° fe 4. Jan. 1 419/419] 14) 14 1 376 30,256 | 80 |1,313 [3:5 | 16 140 | 92129377 | 30,675 1,327 | ....1886 2) 670/335) 23) 12 1 1 400 32,183 | 801,406 [3:5 | 16 150 |100 | 134402 | 32,858 11,429 .... .1887 6| 1,9121319) 67 11 | 3 met 419 33,828 | 81 |1,472|3:5 | 18 163 |105 | 138425 | 35,740 11,539 | ... 1888 10) 2,927/293 | 109] 11 | 7 | 430 |35,202| 82|1,532|36 | 23 144 104 | 159 |440 | 38,129 11,641 | ... .1889 18| 6,045] 336 | 191) 12 | 15 3 i i 497 |35,087 | 82 1,525/3:6 | 23 176 |102 | 126 || 445 | 41,132 |1,716] ....1890 22) 7,168] 353| 231) 11 | 19 | 496 35,342 | 831,532 |3:6 | 23 173 1102| 124 | 448 | 43,110 11,763 | ....1891 38|14,469| 381 | 399) 11 | 35 2 | 1 408 |33,722| 83 1,469 |3:6 | 23 169 | 95 | 121 | 446 | 48,191 11,868 | ....1892 1893.... || 59/22,365| 379| 609} 10 | 57 1 1 396 132,844 | 831,453 |3°7 | 25 165 | 94 112455 | 55,209 12,062 | ....1895 1894.... | 64/24,463/ 382 | 660) 10 | 62 we 392 132,227 | 82|1,444/3-7 | 27| 2 |165| 93 | 105456 | 56,690 2,104| ....1894 1895.... || 7229,010 403 | 733| 10 | 7 es 401 34,371 | 861,531 |3:8 | 33| 3 |172| 89| 104/473) 63,381 2,264 | ....1895 :1896.... || 88/35,558| 404 | 894| 10 | 86 1 1 427. 39,754| 98 |1,917 4:5 | 55| 9176| 8610111515 | 75,312 2,811 1506 1897.... || 103/41,675] 405 11,044! 10 | 101 we 443 44,851 \101 2,227 |5 | 68| 18 |175| 83| 99)546.| 86,526 13,271 || .....1897 1898.... || 117/48,027| 410 11,185] 10 | 115 il | al 446 [46,861 | 105 | 2,318 | 5:2 | 74| 20 | 179) 82} 91) 563 | 94,888 |3,503 21898 1899.... || 126152,491| 417 1,322) 10 |114| 4| 1 | 7 441 (47,080 | 107 | 2,337 |5:3 | 77 | 20 |170| 82| 92567 | 99,571 18,659 ....1899 1900.... || 130[55,073| 424 1,4091 11 |113/ 9 | 1 | 7 498 |47,780 | 112 | 2,420 |5:7 | 83| 27 |162| 72| 84| 558 |102,853 13,829 | .. . 1900 1901.... |122/52,557| 431 11,330 11 |108| 8 6 419 [49,287 1117 2,517/6 | 95| 29 |157| 61 | 77) 541 101,844 13,847 | ....1901 1902.... |116/50,017| 431 |1,279| 11 |101| 9 5 1 |405 [49,046 | 121 | 2,516 16:2 | 95 33 |158| 51 | 68) 521 | 99,063 13,795 | ... .1902 1903... |135/60,638| 449 |1,484) 11 | 119) 10 5 1 | 394 49,230 | 125 | 2,535 |6:4 | 97| 32 |153 | 47| 65.1529 109,868 14,019 | ....1903 1904... |135/61,976| 459 |1,497| 11 |118| 8 5 | 3 | 1 11395 151,778 |131 12,647 | 6-7 |107| 35 |154 | 38| 61530 113,754 [4,144]... 1904 1 This is brutto-capacity, so-called gross tonnage. For a steamer, it is stated that 450 m° brutto capacity is equivalent to 125 m netto or 4°5 net registered tons. = 53 APPENDIX J: GERMANY Table XXX. Number of German boats engaged in the drift-net fishery Sailing vessels Steamers Total IT 4 a le 8 à = 25 # Year eva Sealey ld SOI EN Ney ten eher rele Et ele RS =) à 3 s feo [eee els (8 |“ = ES | els I EE N elle ee Se Na ea nes RME ECS ss ide | sale Saal all Ss. (As a| a8 lea 8 areas Salsa) tecigciesl à 4 sa 6) Se Pal > segar=s|S Ss SES EE) 5 | £a | es eet Nf i deceit ey py ales ley Se ph ia ey i tes ates) re ie feat! | ie 1.Jan.1886.. | 15} 2,900/193| 213) 14 | 15 15 | 2,900) 213 — 1887..] 16) 3,1251195| 228) 14 | 16 | 16 | 3,125) 228 — 1888.. || 18 3,3931189| 245) 14 | 18 | 18 | 3,393] 245 — 1889.. || 23| 4,092|178| 296] 13 | 23 | | | 23: 4,092) 296 — 1890..| 23| 40921178] 296) 13 | 23 | | | 23} 4,092) 296 — 1891..| 23) 4092|178| 296] 13 | 23 | | | 23| 4,092) 296 — 1892..| 23| 40921178] 296| 13 | 23 | | 23 | 4,092) 296 — 1893..| 25| 4,558)182) 326] 13 | 25 25| 4,558| 326 — 1894..| 29| 4,8111166| 344) 12 | 27| 2 29 | 4,811) 344 — 1895..| 36| 5,9601166| 422| 12 | 33) 3 36 | 5,960) 422 — 1896..| 64| 11,386|178| 823| 13 | 55| 9 64 |11,386| 823 — 1897. | 86} 16,567 | 193 | 1,150 | 13 | 68| 18 86 | 16,567 1,150 — 1898..|| 94| 18,367 195 | 1,252 | 13 | 74] 20 | | 94 | 18,367] 1,252 — 1899..|| 97) 19,274| 199] 1,293| 13 | 77| 20 | 4/ 2,035] 509; ss 22 | 4 101 | 21,309] 1,381 — 1900..|110 | 22,011] 200] 1,462 | 13 | 83) 27 | 9|4,680/520)183| 20 | 9 119 | 26,691] 1,645 — 1901..|124 | 24,986 | 201 | 1,633 | 13 | 95} 29 | 8|4,187|523/161| 20 | 8 1132 | 29,173) 1,794 — 1902.. | 128) 25,957 | 202 | 1,689] 13 | 95] 33 | 10} 5,076! 508 |196 | 20 | 9 | 1 | 138 | 31,033) 1,885 — 1903. .||129| 26,995 | 209| 1,748 | 14 | 97| 32 | 11 |5,518| 502|206| 19 | 10 | 1 | 140 | 32,513) 1,954 — 1904.. |142| 30,204|213| 1,907 | 13 |107| 35 | 12 | 5,614) 510 | 219| 18 | 8 | 4 | 154 | 35,818] 2,126 The “Ewer” have a fish-well and have a gross capacity of 75—105 m? (netto 62—90 m* or 25—32 registered tons). Some are larger (to 131 m gross capacity), some smaller (30—40 m? gross capacity). The cutters are of very different sizes: some are large (from 150—160 m® gross capa- city) and some quite small from 20 to 30m. Most of them are about 100 m®. A cutter of 20 m® brutto is of 13:5 m? netto capacity, equal to 4:8 net registered tons. — - 406m? — — 36:2 m? — — 12:8 = — -1073m? — — 99 m? — — 349 — — - 143 m® — — 989 m? — — 34 = — - 1673 mÿ — — 1384 m? — — 48:9 — Many cutters have fish-wells with openings for the water; some are furnished with petroleum motor winch. 1 These figures are taken from the summaries published in the Mitteilungen, and mentioned above p. 48, sub, 2. The numbers do not agree with those of the herring vessels given on p. 30. 2 This is brutto capacity, so-called gross tonnage. A vessel of 200 m? brutto capacity has (about) 178 m? netto and 63 net registered tons. APPENDIX J: GERMANY BR The sloops are small sailing boats: most are of 20—30 m° gross capacity; very few are smaller than 20 m®, about a dozen are larger than 30 m°: 4 had (in 1902) a capacity of 46 to 50 and one even 56:4 m5. A sloop of 21-8 m® brutto is of 14-9 m® netto capacity, equal to 5:3 net registered tons — - 318m — — — — 11:3 — — - 564 mÿ — — 53:6 md — — 18:9 — 3. The unregistered vessels of the German sea and coast fisheries are in part decked, in part half-decked and in part open boats and skiffs; the sailing boats are “wer”, sloops, cutters etc., the boats are all small. A list of these vessels is given in the German “See- fischerei-Almanach”, but details are wanting as to their size. e. Average catch per boat, according to quantity and value 1. Great herring fishery. Up to 1897, this was carried on by sailing vessels only. from 1898 onwards, also by steamers. The following figures show the catches of the sailing vessels and steamers, so far as they can be made out from the available material. Table XXXI. Herring fishery of sailing vessels Total catch for all vessels Catch per vessel Number & Price Year of Value : per vessels | Tons Kilograms in of 2 an iD kilogram as tons | kilograms} marks BOD chore Cee ARE 21 21,671 2,340,500 407,900 1030 | 111,500 | 19,400 0:17 BOS re emer hare 23 24,557 2,652,200 441,700 1070 | 115,300 | 19,200 0:17. USD 25 32,509 3,511,000 609,200 1300 | 140,400 | 24,370 0:17 LOTO aetna) ER 52 52,414 5,660,700 | 1,200,700 1010 | 108,900 | 23,090 0:21 BOG SEE eect NE I 74 65,141 7,035,200 | 1,100,600 880 95,100 | 14,870 0:16 LOT AE TR 81 53,930 5,824,400 | 1,508,200 670 71,900 | 18,620 0:26 SOSE RICE Ge cy 85 93,904 | 10,141,600 | 1,852,500 1100 | 119,300 | 21,790 0:18 TESS Seer losin oa SOS Bae 101 47,895 5,172,900 | 1,672,950 470 51,200 | 16;560 0:32 LION VER AR 110 79,205 8,554,100 | 2,522,337 720 77,800 | 22,930 0:29 TOO ee 114 | 111,976 | 12,093,400 | 2,649,820 980 | 106,100 | 23,240 0.22 OO Di andes oe ete EN 118 | 141,361 | 15,267,000 | 3,741,660 200 | 129,400 | 31,710 0:25 QOS EAC een Ne ARE) 132 | 169,094 | 18,262,200 ? 1280 | 138,400 ? Table XXXII. Herring fishery of steamers and motor boats Total catch for all vessels Catch per steamer Number! Price Year of Value Value per vessels | Tons Kilograms in Tons |Kilograms in kilogram marks marks BIS tetera, RR 5 6,282 678,500 130,900 1260 | 135,700 | 26,180 0:19 DDR PAR CAR ER 9 11,821 1,276,700 443,300 1310 | 141,900 | 49,250 0:35 NOOO RRR ue tats cosy 8 16,927 1,828,100 520,868 2120 | 228,500 | 65,110 0:28 AIO IEEE EE Re 10 23,359 2,522,800 554,780 2340 | 252300 | 55,480 0:22 EN A MR PAS 12 29,152 3,148,400 765,240 2430 | 262,400 | 63,770 0:24 1903. aye Me 13 | 30,768 | 3,322,900 ? 2370 | 255,600 ? Du APPENDIX J: GERMANY 2. Trawlfishery. The annual statistics for Geestemünde and Bremerhaven do not distinguish the fish landed by sailing vessels and that landed by steamers; nor is the total number of boats mentioned, nor the number of the voyages. These statistics cannot be used, therefore, to ascertain the quantity and value of the fish landed per boat. For Geestemünde, Henking was able to utilize the material collected and partially worked out by Harbourmaster Duge concerning this point, for his work on “Die Befischung der Nordsee durch deutsche Fischdampfer” (7); he calculated for a series of years (1893—97) and for each month, the quantities taken per day of the most important species. The data used for these calculations are not yet published and are therefore not available for the present summary. The following list is taken from Henking’s work and shows the average catch per day (of voyages) for the Geestemiinde steamers, for the above-mentioned years 1893—97: Number of voyages Average catch per day forming the basis of of the voyages in Year the caleulation kilograms SIDE TI SHELL AR, 1093 989 SAN SR TERN 1345 1126 SI SERRE 1362 1113 SO A ra 1504 907 VEN PTE ev as thal 1251 821 Henking also gives a table showing the average catch per day of the most impor- tant species landed by the German steamers at the Geestemiinde fishmarket during 1893—97, arranged according to fishing-grounds and for summer and winter. In this table, the figures for the years 1893—97 are taken together; it shows the differences beween the different fishing banks chosen by Henking, as well as the difference between the catches in summer and winter, but does not show the actual differences between the catches for different years. The earlier statistics of the Altona auctions give, indeed, the number of the vessels landing fish, and distinguish for each month, the number of sailing vessels (“Ewer”) from the number of steamers, which have landed their fish in Altona; as however, the quantities are all taken together, it cannot be ascertained exactly what quantities should be ascribed to the steamers and what to the sailing-vessels. Since 1900 however, Altona has published a special table, showing the quantities brought by the sailing vessels and another showing those landed by the steamers. The number of vessels, over which the total quantities might be destributed, is not stated however, but only the number of the voyages made by these vessels. With the aid of these figures, the following Tables XXXIII and XXXIV have been constructed. Table XXXII. Fish landed in Altona from sailing vessels, during 1900—1903 Number | Total Total |Quantity| Value | Plaice Sole | Turbot |Haddock| Cod : er per per per per per per Year ci eu! é gung voyage | voyage | voyage | voyage | voyage | voyage | voyage voyages | in kg. | in marks | jp kg. |inmarks| in kg. | in kg. | in kg. | in kg. | in kg. SOU ae 1445 | 420,920 | 189,175 291 131 214 28:5 10 3:5 2 OO ee 1694 | 410,271 | 212,632 242 126 172 28 16 2 15 Oz 1530 | 532,174 | 204,408 348 134 257 32 19 2 3 een 1922 521,237 | 222,948 271 116 184 28 18:5 3:5 25. APPENDIX J: GERMANY eG) Table XXXIV. Fish landed in Altona from steamers, during 1900—1903 Number | Total Total | Quantity) Value | Plaice| Sole |Turbot|Lemon-|Haddock Cod à : per per per | per | per |Soleper| per per wear oi A s jane voyage | voyage |voyage|voyage voyage| voyage | voyage |voyage voyages} in kg. |in marks| jp kg. jin marks) in kg. | in kg.| in kg.| in kg. | in kg. | in ke en. 728 |4,265,632|1,409,616| 5832 | 1936 | 51 | 75 |100 | 170 | 2437 | 1270 Tor 733 \4,662,166|1,509,589| 6360 | 2059 | 970 | 935 | 92 | 335 | 92248 | 1319 1902) epee 766 | 5,653,680/ 1,585,243] 7381 | 2069 | 1172 | 725 | 945| 411 | 2694 | 1689 ner 884 | 7,630,985 1,848,808] 8632 | 2091 | 727 | 57 | 1285| 480 | 4394 | 1729 The fish sold at Hamburg by the auctioneer G. Platzmann were landed, during the years 1894—98, partly by steamers and partly by (Finkenwärder) sailing vessels; they were, however, all placed in the same list, so that the catch per boat cannot be determined from these figures. Since 1900, only the fish brought by the sailing vessels have been sold by this auctioneer. For these years therefore, it is possible to calculate the average quantity and value of the fish brought by the sailing vessels per voyage, and also the proportions in which the various species enter into the total quantity. Table XXXV. Fish landed at Hamburg by the Finkenwarder sailing vessels, from 1900—1903 Number | Total Total | Quantity} Value | Plaice Sole |Turbot| Brill | Haddock| Cod : ; per per per | per | per | per per per Neun e any | rame voyage | voyage |voyage|voyage|voyage|voyage| voyage |voyage voyages | in kg. | in marks | jn kg, lin marks| in kg. |in ke. |inke. |inkg.| in ke. | in ke. HOD 5 c00. 1349 621,328 | 281,646 461 209 352 | 39 145 T:5 | 21:5 1 10. 1152 541,736 | 270,138 | 470 235 337 | 455 | 27 10:5 0:9 1 BOP oo gone 1064 592,677 | 274,443 557 233 411 | 48 28°5 | 13:5 3 1 LOS cen oe 1074 568,971 | 255,442 | 530 238 343 | 51:5 | 345 | 14 5 2 With regard to the fish sold by Köser in Hamburg, only the total annual value is known, not the values for the separate species; also, not the number of the steamers but that of the voyages is given. It is only possible, therefore, to calculate the returns per voyage and for the years 1896—1901, as shown in the following table: Table XXXVI. Product of the voyages of the Hamburg steamers, during 1896—1901 £ Van Total value | Number of Be in marks | the voyages | jn marks AR) dee AE CEE 325,720 226 1441 ST Acne ern 228,890 177 1293 1898 ee 299,990 169 1776 1399) N: 327,610 183 1791 1300) siete Coren 436,620 233 1874 10, teak ere 417,740 226 1848 From the statistics of Köser, it is possible also, to calculate the quantities of the principal species per voyage of the steamers, for the years 1896—1902. In the following Table XXXVII, these quantities are calculated for the six principal species landed by trawlers. ees APPENDIX J: GERMANY Table XXXVI. Quantity In kilograms, per year and per voyage for Hamburg steamers Number Plaice Soles Turbot Brill Haddock Cod Year of Total |Quan-| Total |Quan-| Total |Quan-| Total |Quan-| Total |Quan-| Total | Quan- voyages}! quantity |tity per] quantity |tity perl] quantity |tity per| quantity |tityper| quantity tity per} quantity jtity per in kg. |voyagel in kg. |voyagel in kg. |voyagel| in kg. voyage| in kg. |voyage| in kg. |voyage USI Go oo en 226 | 186,369) 825 | 16,263 72 || 30,669 | 136 6,650 29 |1,059,775| 4689 | 171,089 | 757 HERI on 177 | 153,826 | 869 7,291 41 | 25,616 | 145 4,693 | 27 807,924| 4565 | 145,351| 821 NSS. 169 || 123,680 | 732 || 16,115 96 || 20,399 | 121 9,682 | 57 623,165} 3687 | 147,414 | 872 IED) cosas 183 || 245,034 | 1339 | 26,376 | 144 | 22,319 | 122 | 14,704 80 373,551) 2041 | 178,639| 976 OF. 233 | 148,375 637 | 16,838 72 || 23,672 | 102 | 19,017 82 609,505} 2616 | 234,056 | 1005 115,0) SRE 226 | 228,853 | 1013 | 12,846 57 | 18,128 80 | 13,412 59 560,658| 2481 | 238,748 | 1056 102... ? 239,56£|. ? 19,846 ? 19,061 ? 22,546 ? 720,401; ? 315,202) ? Finally, some information may be given here concerning the selling price of the fish sold by auction at Altona and Geestemiinde during the years 1892—1903. Table XXXVIII. Price pr. kg. in pfennig, of the principal species sold at Altona and Geestemünde for the period 1892—1903 (100 Pfen. — 1 shill.) Plaice Soles Turbot Brill Dab qemu Haddock Cod Altona Er A. | G | A 6. | A Glee TERN AQU CCE RES Ales ANG 1892... || 20 | 19 | 165 | 224 | 101 | 142 | 72 | 82 | 20 | 11 | 72 | 64 | 21 | 19 | 17 | 18 1888... | 18 | 16 | 182 | 198 | 126 | 132) 74 | 80 | 18 | 8 | 74 | 50 | 20 | 21 | 16 | 16 1894... | 20 | 18 || 168 | 174 | 142 | 140 | 72 | 72 || 20 | 12 | 72 | 56 | 20 | 18 | 18 | 14 1895... | 27 | 24 | 201 | 208 | 143 | 146 | 81 | 74 | 27 | 11 | 81 | 46 | 21 | 15 | 20 | 16 1896... || 25 | 22 | 187 | 194 | 105 | 116] 60 | 64 | 25 | 8 | Go | 32 | 17 | 16 | 14 | 16 1897... | 26 | 97 | 193 | 190 | 120 | 132 | 61 | 74 | 26 | 10 | 61 | 32 | 19 | 17 | 18 | 16 1898... | 27 | 30 | 198 | 190 | 135 | 138 | 59 | 82 | 27 | 8 | 59 | 40 | 23 | 19 | 19 | 19 1899... | 25 | 97 | 993 | 902 | 141 | 158 || 64 | 66 | 25 | 14 | 64 | 42 | 99 | 25 | 20 | 19 1900... | 25 | 29 | 937 | 246 | 137 | 172) 77 | 80 | — | 14 | 52 | 40 | 30 | 29 | 19 | 18 1901... | 23 | 20 | 242 | 952 | 137 | 180 | 77 | 84 | — | 12 | 51 | 40 | 33 | 32 | 22 | 17 1902... | 20 | 23 | 294 | 930 | 120 | 148 | 72 | 78 | — | 13 | 47 | 42 | 30 | 29 | 18 | 23 1903... | 24 | 28 || 227 | 232 | 102 | 144 | 71 | 86 | — | 14 | 49 | 48 | 24 | 17 | 20 | > Appendix J 8 5. Holland I. Short review of Sea-fishing ! a. Principal modes of Fishing The three main branches of the Dutch North Sea fisheries industry are: 1. The herring fishery with driftnets 2. The cod- and haddock fishery with long lines 3. The trawl fishery. 1. The Dutch herring-fishing with driftnets is a very old industry. Beaujon (2) says (p. 8) “fishermen von Kampen and Harderwijk, being two small seaports on the Zuidersee, used to fish for herring ‘off Sconen” i. e. on the shores of the Baltic, before the end of the twelfth century, and the trade must have been carried on for a considerable time before so far developing itself as to be exercised at such a distance from home.” The same author ? values (p. 64) the number of Dutch salt-herring “busses” above 2000, at the time of the fishery’s greatest expansion, i. e. in the first half of the 17% century. It is not certain how long this golden period of the Grand Fishery lasted, but it is well known that the disastrous wars of the second half of that century greatly affected the herring fishery. When, after the peace of Utrecht (April1713), an era of peace again dawned upon the Dutch Republic, her herring fishery was broken down, it presented at the time but a shadow of its former greatness! In 1736, only 219 herringships and 31 seal-hunters sailed from the Dutch ports: this being the first instance of herring statistics during the trade’s decline. For the period 1750—1794, the number of busses which sailed from Dutch ports for the grand or cured-herring industry is known: it went down during those years from 1 North Sea (and North Atlantic) -fishing, no Zuidersee-, Rhinemouth-, Scheldt-fishing. 2 A good deal of the historical information contained in this chapter has been taken, here and there verbally, from Beaujon’s precious book. Literature: 1. Verslag van den Staat der Nederlandsche Zeevisschijeren, 1857—1863 in 8°, 1864—1903 in 4°, (Annually a “Verslag” or Report.) 2. Beauson, A., The History of Dutch Sea Fisheries. London, 1883. 3. Hoogenpyx, Jz., A., De Grootvisscherij op de Noordzee. Haarlem, 1893. : 4. Wetgeving betreffende de zee- en zalmvisscherijen, verzamelt en bewerkt door Mr. H. van DER Hoeven. Leiden, 1897. ? 5. Mededeelingen over Visscherij. Maandblad. Helder, 1894—1904. no APPENDIX J: HOLLAND 249 (in 1752) to 120 (in 1783), and was 196 again at the end of that period. In the period 1794—1813, when Holland was Batavian Republic first and actually annexed to France afterwards, “there was virtually an end of the Dutch sea-fishery for some years”; in the years after 1813, it soon reached again something approaching its status of the latter part of the former century. Under the ancient system of fishing regulation and protection that was restored and which lasted till 1857, the herring-fishery of Holland did not reach how- ever, anything of its former flourishing condition: 98 “busses” sailed in 1814 for the “orand” cured-herring fishery and 92 in 1853, from Dutch seaports, the highest numbers on the list for the long series of years being 169 in 1819 and 173 in 1830. The vessels from the coast villages of Scheveningen, Katwijk and Noordwijk, do not form part of these numbers. They were engaged in the fishery of salt herring for smoking (Steurharing), and the number of these vessels shows a nearly regular increase from 35 in 1823 to 118 in 1853. A true revival of the Dutch herring-fishery only took place after the new law of 1857—59 had substituted fishing liberty for fishery regulation. Since the introduction of that law, the Dutch fisherman has been free to fish when, how and where he finds conven- ient; since that time, foreign sea-fish can be imported in Holland duty free; since then, the assays of herring are facultative, no more obligatory as before. In no branch of Dutch fisheries, has the said revival been so apparent as in the herring fisheries. To show this, an abbreviated survey of the Dutch North Sea Herring Fisheries, from 1853 to 1903 may be inserted here. Table XXXIX. Development of the Dutch herring fisheries since 1853 Quantity of herring landed Number of vessels i one Vents Barrels of cure-herring Todd : «steurharing ! Keeled an Bumboats ab is pended hs in ee SDS AE 93 118 31,976 23,433,000 este AE 95 175 15,940 439 24,969,000 ISSR) EN eee 86 170 34,776 102 38,612,000 ans 91 202 38,514 3,674 74,043,000 LOTO st: 102 205 77,406 31,971 56,005,000 TESTER 127 265 70,357 32,942 33,093,000 TSE 6 es wed 154 255 138,334 75,601 47,677,520 UGE sc wie se 194. 261 200,188 117,832 36,664,300 SI 224 312 292,752 218,231 46,704,250 UE En oe 295 320 313,670 194,505 20,631,800 OS 513 271 643,611 175,329 30,730,000 Most of the keeled vessels used for the herring fisheries are so-called “loggers”. Of late steam-vessels eame in use also. In 1897, a steamer was used for the first time. in 1901 7 steamships were used and 1 motor-boat - 1902 25 = — — - 1 _ - 1903 44 — — — - 1 — 1 «Steurharinge is the name given to the herring which are caught towards the end. of the voyage, and which is not cured and packed in the ordinary way, but only salted and thrown on a heap to be packed or smoked afterwards, 8* APPENDIX J: HOLLAND ne The total number of Dutch ships that practised the herring-fishery in 1903, amounted to 784. 2. The cod-, haddock- etc. fishery with long-lines, belongs also to the oldest branches of the Dutch fisheries-industry. One part of the business was the cod-fishery off Iceland, another that in the North Sea and on the Doggerbank especially. The latter is still carried on, the former has historical importance only. : Vlaardingen and Maassluis were prominent in the Iceland business, long before they became “herring towns” of importance. Iceland fishery always was a separate business; it could not be combined with herring fishery, as the seasons for both were the same. There exists hardly any literature on this branch of Dutch fisheries; we only know that it was flourishing at the end of the 16% and that it was continued during the 17 and 18% centuries. We dispose of some statistics for the period 1781—1790 only. A few figures suffice to show its extent at that time. Table XL. Iceland Cod Fishery of Holland in the 18th century + Y Number Average catch of each ears | of vessels vessel LISD eoe 73 12 lasts of 14 ton ATEN EP EN 95 23 or 4 - - — IN 6 123 20 = = = ITBOe ste 155 10 - - — BUT ee 145 6 - - = ITR 36 are = dsl... (stopped by war) TES 0 se 58 unfavourable AIR ER a: None Since the latter part of the eighteenth century, the Dutch cod-fishery off Iceland never flourished again. “The decay of the Iceland cod-fishery of Holland appears to have taken its origin from protective duties in the Austrian Netherlands and France” (Beaujon, lc: p.141). In the period 184453, from two to six ships, each making one voyage yearly, went to Iceland to practice the cod-fishery with long-lines there; but since the second half of the 19% century up to the present time, this branch of Dutch sea-fishery has nearly been quite extinct. Of late, a few experiments have been made to restart this business: in 1894 and 1895, with a larger ship {a shooner) from Vlaardingen, in 1901 with a sloop —— from Zwartewaal, in 1902 with two fishing steamers from Vlaardingen and with two big sloops from Middelharnis. In 1902, only one ship from Holland went to the Iceland waters, there to fish with hooks; it landed its fish in Ymuiden. : The cod-fishery in the North Sea and on the Doggerbank has always been a minor branch of the Dutch trade and more or less an appendage of the herring-fisheries, inas- much as most of the vessels used in the latter after St. Johns Day, were in winter and spring sent to the Doggerbank for cod and haddock. The keelless boats from the North Sea coast villages (Katwijk, Nordwijk, Egmont a. 0.) combined cod-fishery on the Dogger- bank with “the trade of the fresh” and so they did, at the end of the 16 century already. — But the information to be found in literature on this peculiar branch of Dutch sea-fishery is extremely poor. As early as 1589, the Dutch Republic sent men-of-war “ter Dogge” i. e. pe eus APPENDIX J: HOLLAND to the Doggerbank, for the cod-fishermens convoy; in spite however, of Government pro- tection, this fishery was subject to severe losses by war, so a contract for their mutual insurance against damage by sea or foemen was passed in 1622, between the shipowners of the towns of the Maas concerned in the business. It is quite impossible to establish a notion as to the importance of the Dutch cod-fishery in the 17 century. We only know that the salt or dried produce of this fishery was constantly exported on a considerable scale. The ships used for this trade were called hookers, and though, for the first time in 1777 only, mention is made of hookers with a well, such well-boats (hoeker met bunnen) must have been in use from early times downward; for without them, it would scarcely have been feasible to carry fish caught on the Doggerbank to the Friday-markets of the Catholic provinces unsalted. There seems not to exist any statistic of this trade during the 18% century either, it has been of some importance during that period, but we do not know what political difficulties (the “embargo”, a general sailing prohibition, laid upon all Dutch shipping by the Government) brought the cod-fishery to a full stop in January 1781. Though taken up again in the following years, these experiments were not attended with success: before the final overthrow of the Dutch Republic (1794) the cod-fishery had virtually come to a close. In the period 1794—1813, cod-fishery like the other branches of the Dutch seafisheries, can hardly be said to have been practised at all. In the first years after the restoration of independence, no efforts were spared to promote a speedy rising of the national fisheries and the North Sea cod-fishery also reached soon something of its former importance. A premium of 250 was held out (in 1825) to every boat from the province of Holland which should fish in the North Sea with hooks and lines (“beug- of hoekwant”) between November 15. and February 15. of any subsequent year, and this system of premiums was maintained till 1853, a few years only before the fishery-law of 1857 abolished all protec- tive measures. But the statistical information regarding this branch of fisheries (which might enable us to judge of its importance) is nearly totally wanting. We only know that, from 1844—1853, from 26 (in 1851) to 41 (in 1844) ships practised the North Sea hook-fisheries in winter. The annual reports published by the Board of Sea-fisheries since 1857, enable to judge of its extent in the second half of the 19% century. What remains of the once important “beugvaart” is exercised by vessels of different types: some herring ships (mostly luggers) continue hook-fishery between herring seasons; a steadily increasing number of steamers fish also with the long-line in winter and with the herring nets in summer and autumn. From a few Dutch fishing-harbours (Middelharnis, Pernis) only this branch of sea-fisheries is exercised, but it cannot be said to have shared the increase of the other branches. The maintenance of prohibitive tariffs on foreign salt-cod in France, the difficulty of finding always sufficient and cheap bait for the cod-hooks and the greater profits arrived at in the other branches, have checked the progress of the long-line-fishery (and that of the salt-cod industry especially) in the Netherlands. At present, there are about 20 Dutch ships which practise long-line-fishery exclusively. In winter, they land mostly fresh-fish, in summer and autumn salted fish. About 40 Dutch vessels, belonging to the herring-fleet, fish with long-lines (or hand-lines) in winter and spring and bring their fish to the market, partly in fresh and partly in salted condition. They are, as a rule, furnished with a well and they are to a large extent steamers. In 1903, not less than 28 so-called “steam-beugers”, steamships from Vlaardingen, Maassluis APPENDIX J: HOLLAND ae and Ymuiden, exercised the long-line-fishery in the winter- and spring months. As a rule, they brought their fish in fresh condition to the Ymuiden market. 3. The trawl-fishery is a very old Dutch industry also. The name used for this net in the oldest placard (1653) in which mention is made of this fishery is “corde”. It is described there as a net kept open by a beam and burdened with stones or lead, which is dragged along the bottom of the water behind a fishing vessel. The name “corde” is an equivalent for the now common word “Schrobnet”, which is used for the first time in a placard of 1676. In that year, all such proceedings as were reputed obnoxious to the pre- servation of certain fishes, were prohibited (plaice nets (driftnets) were made upon a chip of the size of a full eight and twenty: nets composed of narrower meshes and trawl- nets (“schrobnetten”)were both prohibited by the said placard). An exception to this law was made next year, in favour of those who fished for shrimps within the sand-bars with a so-called “ligte sayingh” or “corde”, a net probably of about the same pattern as the shrimp-trawl of present days. The placard against the trawl has been of no great use to all probability; the pro- hibition was very ill observed. In 1689, it was given up again, chiefly because of the impossibility of enforcing it. Since that time, no new law against trawling in Dutch waters has been in use before 1820, when a statute of this nature was once more set up; this time also, without being of great use. From what has been told on the lack of statistics, with regard to the more important branches of Dutch fishery, it will be easily understood that, of the fresh fishery with trawls no statistical accounts at all have been kept. Much more than the other branches, the trawl-fishery in Holland always has been a small industry in which no capital was invested, of which no book-keeping took place, about which no statistics were collected. It has been of some importance in the 17 and 18 century, but it suffered even more than the other branches from the wars and the political difficulties occasioned by them. The catholic provinces of the Austrian Netherlands were one of the principal markets for fresh fish and when this market was virtually closed by the protective duties of 1725, the Dutch fresh-fish industry was the principal sufferer. In the course of the 18 century, this trade went down more and more. That it was quite insignificiant towards the end of the Repub- lic, may also be deduced from the fact, that of all the several branches of North Sea fishery, it is the only one which never was encouraged by a bounty! There is hardly any talk on the Dutch trawling-industry in the Dutch fishery-litera- ture. It always has been an industry not cared for by the government and despised by the ship-owners and fishermen of the other branches. Till of late, the patrons of the ves- sels exercising this branch of the trade were, to a large extent at least, owners of their vessels. These vessels were mostly small boats of 20—30 tons, with the exception of the herring-boats from the coast villages (Scheveningen, Katwijk a. 0.) part of which practised the trawl-fishery during winter and early spring. The small vessels. exercising this fishery, were mostly from Helder, Enkhuisen, Urk, Volendam and some others ports of the Zuider- see; they were not built originally for the North Seafishery and they were too small to go far from the coast. They were (and are still) all well-boats, and the fish they land is not only fresh but to a large extent living fish. In some ports, in Helder especially, in the second half of the 19% century, little com- panies of ship-owners tried their luck with the trawling-business. They used the same S63) —= APPENDIX J: HOLLAND small vessels from the Zuidersee-ports, experimenting occasionally also with a little cutter built for the purpose, with smacks bought in England etc. For several reasons, mostly in consequence of the particular condition of the commerce in fresh fish in Holland, these enterprises till of late never have been successful. A revival of the trawl-fishery of Holland is of very recent date only: with the opening of the new fishing-harbour of Ymuiden, a new area began for this branch of the Dutch fisheries. Larger ships, part of them steam- ships, are now used for this trade. The Dutch fishing-industry has been extremely slow in adopting steam as propelling force. In 1884, for the first time a steamtrawler was used by a Dutch firm; it was a ship built in Germany, bought by a firm from Schiedam. The enterprise was no success: the steamer was rented to a herring-firm of Maassluis a few years later and was resold to Germany afterwards. A new experiment was started with a steamtrawler built in Rotterdam about 1894. This steamer sailed from Helder and remained for several years the only Dutch one. Since 1898, only a regular increase of the fleet of steamtrawlers, sailing from Ymuiden, has taken place; their number was 20 in 1899 and 32 at the end of 1903. The whole number of ships, at the end of 1903, exercising the trawl-fishery from Dutch ports, may be estimated as follows: Steamtrawlers, fishing with the trawl the whole year .......................... 32 Steamers, fishing with the trawl in winter and spring only .................... 12 Keeled vessels (luggers etc.), fishing with the trawl in winter and spring only .... 118 Bumboats (from Scheveningen, Katwijk and Nordwijk) fishing with the trawl in minier and) NON AU ARTE CEE USE Ae a ae rd aR 127 Keeled vessels (cutters) from Ymuiden and Terneusen fishing with the trawl the FLO TER. Han seo. ee CREECH RIN NTR SR 17 Small coast-fishing boats (partly keeled vessels) fishing with the trawl the whole year + 515 Very small coast-fishing vessels (Shrimp-trawlers) .. .......................... aL 2B b. Fishes of greatest importance 1) Herringfishery : Herring (Clupea harengus) 2) Longlinefishery: Cod (Gadus morrhua) : salted and fresh (living and dead) Ling (Molva vulgaris): — - —(— - —) Haddock (Gadus aeglefinus):: — MES a =) Halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris): — - — (— - —) Coalfish (Gadus virens) : = py ES Hake (Merluccius vulgaris): dried Whiting (Gadus merlangus): fresh Rays (Raja clavata and other species): fresh Skate (Raja batis): 3) Trawlfishery: According to the statistics of the Ymuiden market, the fish caught by trawl and landed in Ymuiden belong to the following species. The percentage is that of the value of the different fishes, sold in 1902 and 1903: — - =) APPENDIX J: HOLLAND PON ae 1902 1903 middle Plaice /Pleuronectes platessa)............... 28:9, 253%, 26:60 Haddock (Gadus aeglefinus)................. 22-1 - 24-4 - 23-4 - Sole Sole vulgars) EEE on Se: 17 - 162 - 166 - Turbot (Rhombus maximus) ............... 89- 89- 89 - Cod (Gadus morrhua) ..................... U 7S) Aa Dab (Pleuronectes limanda) ................ 5 - 42- 51 - Red gurnard (Trigla hirundo) ............-- Stl 05:3) = ae - Rays (Raja clavata and other species)........ DE 2-4 - 3:2 - Brill > (fehombusı Taevis)a nn. th ELA ENT JON Ne ON-MOMRNNE Whiting (Gadus merlangus) ............... 16 - 14- 15 - Weever (Trachinus) and Grey gurnard (Trigla GUL NOVAS) MAGES M ue Nas tak 1-1 - 13 - 1:2 - Flounder (Pleuronectes flesus) .............. O4- O8- O06 - Smear-dab (Pleuronectes microcephalus) ..... Ling (Motua wulgamis) 02-3. LR CPE EEE Skatem(@vaj INES) su SEEN Lilet ine Halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris)..........--. Red mullets (Mullus surmuletus) ........... Cons (Goa smyicis) 2... 20. CEE CEE MNT ee NOT - Sturgeon (Acipenser sturio) ................ Mackerel (Scomber scomber) ................ Horse Mackerel (Caranx trachurus) ......... | Lobster (Homarus vulgaris) ................ Seino Qin Sp) 23.2. 1.0200: Se Together... 100% 100%, 100%, c. Fishing-grounds at present time 1) Herring-fishery. The Dutch herring-fishery in the North Sea is exercised from the 61° Lat. N. to the 52° Lat. N. In the months June—September, the main fishery takes place in the western part of that region: between the Shetland- and Orkney-islands and the east coast of Scotland and North England and 1° Long. E. From the second half of September till the end of the trade (November), the herring-fleet is fishing south of the 56° Lat. N.and more in the central part of the North Sea: Dogger Bank, Great Silver Deep, Brown Bank Grounds, Middle Grounds etc. In some years, towards the end of the trade, the herring-swarms are followed by some of the Dutch vessels as far south as the English Channel; in other years, especially when sufficient catches can be done north of the 52° Lat. N., the Channel fishery is of no importance. Special cases (herrings caught off the West Coast of Scotland etc.) for this summary are of no consequence. 2) Longline-fishery. As we saw, this branch of the Dutch North Sea fisheries is partly winter and partly summer fishery: In the winter fishery, a part of the herring-fleet takes part; the summer-fishery is practised by the sloops etc. of Middelharnis, Pernis etc. only. The favourite grounds for the winter longline-fishery are to the south of the Dogger Bank (in November and January) and on that bank (in December and January): The so- Hr APPENDIX J: HOLLAND called Haddock-grounds from the western part of the Doggerbank; here the fishery takes place in early winter (November and December) especially. In February and March, the fish grounds to the north and north-west of Doggerbank are preferable. Towards the end of March and in the course of April, the Great and the Little Fisher Bank are visited. The latter Fisher Banks and the sea to the north of the Little Fisher Bank, till about 58° Lat. N., form at the same time the principal fishgrounds for the summer longline- fishery of the ships of Middelharnis, Pernis and Zwartewaal. In old time, these ships exercised the longline-fishery in summer much more to the north and even went as far north as Iceland. The hook-fishery off Iceland was quite given up, only of late a few experiments Were made to reestablish it. Not so very many years ago, in Holland, longline fishery took place as coast-fishery with very small ships from coast-places like Helder. This fishery in later years has been given up, in consequence of the bad results that were obtained with it. 3) Trawl-fishery. The Dutch trawl-fishery is partly coast-fishery and partly high- sea-fishery. As coast-fishery it is practised: a. by Bumboats (from Scheveningen, Katwijk and Noordwijk), b. by the small vessels from Helder etc. and c. by the shrimpers from Flushing etc. As high-sea fishery it is exercised: d. by the steam-trawlers, e. by those steamers which fish with the herringnets in summer and with the trawl in winter and spring and f. by sailing-ships (cutters etc.) from Ymuiden and ter Neuzen, as also by luggers from Scheveningen and Katwijk. a. Some of the bumboats from Scheveningen, Katwijk and Noordwijk fish with the trawl in the North Sea from the end of January till about Easter. As a rule, they remain in the neighbourhood of the coast, the principal region for their trade being from the Dutch coast till upon and slightly beyond the Broad Fourteens. In former times, they went to the Doggerbank in early spring, there to catch large plaice and haddocks; of late this has been given up, as the profit does no more pay the trouble. b. The fleet of “botters”, “schokkers”, “blazers” etc. fishing in the North Sea from the mouth of the Maas, from the harbours of Ymuiden and Helder, but also from Ter- schelling and from some coast-places in Friesland, fishes on the banks along the Dutch coast: the Texel ground, the Terschelling and Ameland grounds etc. Only in summer, the larger ones go from the coast slightly further: beyond the Broad Fourteens, outside the Terschelling Lightship etc. c. The shrimpers from (Arnemuiden) Flushing, from Goedereede and from some other coast places, fish to a large extent in the estuaries and also (those of Scheveningen, Kat- wijk etc.) in the immediate neighbourhood of the coast. d, e and f. The larger Dutch ships fishing with the trawl in the North Sea, spread more or less over all the favorable trawling grounds of that sea, varying their fishing ground according to season and the special aim of their fishery. Only exceptionally, they go to fishing grounds outside that area: to the fishing ground near the Faeroe islands, near Iceland ete. In 1903, from March till September, 5—10 Dutch steam-trawlers in varying number have been fishing off Iceland. Appendix J 9 APPENDIX J: HOLLAND en II. Statistics General Observation. The statistics of the Dutch Northsea-fisheries are, for the different branches of that fishery, of unequal exactness, completeness and value. The herring- fishery has always been considered as the “great” fishery, the most ‘important not only of all, but also as the one really worth to care for. Only very recently, this state of affairs has changed and the opening of the harbour of Ymuiden has had a good influence in this regard also. There exist excellent statistics for the Dutch herring-fishery, rather good ones for ‘the salted products of the longline-fisheries and less complete ones for the other branches of Dutch sea-fisheries, for the trawl-fishery especially. The Dutch statistics in general are not fishery-statistics in the true sense of the word, but rather commerce or market- statistics. 1) Period for which the statistics have existed. a. Statistics of the Dutch herring-fishery exist since many years. In 1892, the Board | of Fisheries for Holland published a statistical table of the herring-fishery centennial period | 1792 —1892!. The numbers of ships sent out by each port and the total catch per annum are given in that table. Moreover, in the annual reports published by the said board since | 1857, full accounts over the herring-fishery and the herring-trade of the Netherlands have | been published every year. b. Statisties of the Dutch long-line fishery are not quite so complete. Since many years the Board of Fisheries publishes annually (1) an account of the product of this fishery | landed in salted condition in Vlaardingen and Maassluis?, as also of the quantities of fresh fish landed in these ports, But as a more important portion of the fresh fish caught by hooks was landed in other ports (in Helder partly till about 1894, in Ymuiden after- wards) and as that part in the market statistics was mixed up with the product of the other fisheries, it is impossible to calculate the exact product of this branch of Dutch fishery. Since 1899 only, we know the quantities of fish caught by long- lines and brought to the Ymuiden market in fresh condition. eas c. For the Dutch trawl-fishery, the statistics are more incomplete still. The product of the Dutch North Sea trawl-fishery is brought to different Dutch markets, of which the principal are: | 1. The market of Helder. Statistics of this market exist since 1865. 2. — - Ymuiden. — -_ = — — 1896. . 3. — - Scheveningen, Katwijk and Noodle for trawl fish caught in the months January—April. These markets existed already in 1870. A fourth — one of the same kind was that of Zandvoort, a fifth that of ‘Egmond, but these have, lost all their importance since many years already. 4. The market of Rotterdam. Statistics exist since 1878. This market sells fresh fish landed there for the first time by Dutch fishermen, but also fish bought on other markets (even foreign markets) and sent to Rotterdam to be resold. Whence iti is (| ort} ,» 3 Hor the) period 1750—1794, Beaujon (2) gives an account. of the number of ships. that shilegl from, . Dutch harbours for the Grand or. Cured Herring Fishery. He does not give the number of lasts or tons, ù of herring caught in these years, however. 1 2 Since 1881 in Vlaardingen only. : ae ‘'3'More' ‘exactly, since 1903. Inthe years 1899-1902, a part’ of! that | peat was sold in a à private auction, of which no statistics are available. ff AR Er a APPENDIX J: HOLLAND not 'well possible to compare the statistics of the Rotterdam market with those of other markets which work with fish landed for the first time only. (For the products of the shrimp fishing, there exist no regular markets. Wither the shrimps are sold privately, or they are sent by the fishermen on their own risk to foreign markets). 2) Manner in which the statistics are collected. a. For the product of the fishery and its value. Nearly all the statistics on the products of the Dutch sea-fisheries are market statis- ties, and as a rule they are collected by market officials. In Holland, no fishery-statistics are collected for the sake of statistics only: though there exists an. official “Bureau of Statistics”, no special care is taken for the fishery-statistics. The figures and tables to be found in the publications of the Bureau of Statistics are mostly reprints from the annual reports of the Board of Sea Fisheries. The principal and most reliable fishery-statistics of the Netherlands, as far as the North Sea fishery is concerned, which are annually published by the Board of Sea Fisheries, are: 1. Statistics of the herring-fishery. 2. — - - long-line fishery for so far as the product is landed in salted con- dition in Vlaardingen. 3. — - - fish landed in Ymuiden. The statistics of 1. and 2. are provided for, since many years, by a firm of shipowners well-acquainted with the march of the fishery as also with the commercial aspects of the article. To forward these statistics to the Dutch Board of Fisheries is considered by the said firm as an honorary task. The statistics of 3. (the fish landed in Ymuiden) are collected through the care and under the control of the Director of the Fishery Harbour. He is a government official and the collecting of statistics belongs to his duties. As all the fish landed in Ymuiden practically passes through the auctioneeriug, the statistics of the market represent statistics of the catches at the same time. The director sends in annually an official report giving the statistics in full, and this Report is printed as an appendix to the annual report of the Sea Fishery Board for the Netherlands (1). Since about ten years, the quantities of fish landed daily in the harbours of Helder, Ymuiden, Vlaardingen and Maassluis have been published in the form of monthly tables in the “Mededeelingen over Visscherij”. The statistics used for these tables have been collected for the most part by persons at the fish-markets of these places (as market- masters or auctioneers) and an honorary is paid them for that extra trouble. b. For the number and size of the fishing vessels. The sea-fisheries bill of 1881 prescribes that, by the care of the “Burgemeester” of the commune where fishing vessels are at home, a register shall be kept of these vessels each with its number, mentioning at the same time the name of the vessel and that of its owner. These registers enable the said ‘‘Burgermeesters” to report annually to the Board of Fisheries on the number of the ships sailing from their harbours for fishery purposes. With the aid of these reports, the Board publishes annually a list of the fishing-vessels of the Nether- lands as an appendix to the Board’s report. The fishing-vessels for the North Sea form a special division of that list. According g* APPENDIX J: HOLLAND u to it, the fleet fishing in the North Sea on the 1. of March 1903 was composed of 1538 vessels of an aggregate tonnage of 158,928 m’, measuring each on an average 103m® and manned by 12,152 fishermen. As in several communes where fishing vessels are at home, the ambition to register new boats is greater than that to blot out the ships that are lost for the fishing-industry, it is easily understood that the number of ships of the official list is slightly higher than it is in reality. 3) Forms of publication. The statistics on Dutch Sea-Fisheries are not published as such, but only to illustrate the annual reports. They can hardly be said to have been put in a distinct form, giving summaries only of monthly or yearly landings in a special harbour or at a special market. III. General information which may be deduced from the statistics! 1. Value of fish over a period of years General remark. As the statistics for the value of the fish landed in Dutch har- bours are more complete and perhaps more reliable than those for the quantities, and as the only way to give figures for the quantities in several cases, has been to calculate them from the figures for the value, the tables for the value and a short discussion of the way in which they have been arrived at are given first. The division of Dutch fisheries in Herring-, Longline- and Trawlfishery has been maintained in this part of the review. a. Herringfishery. The value of the herringfishery in each year is to be found in the «Verslag». This value represents that of the cure-herring, together with that of the salt-herring landed by Dutch ships. That of the cure-herring includes the value of the barrels and the salt, which together have a value of f. 2-25 (on an average) for each barrel of cure-herring. The total value for each year as given in the “Verslag” has been diminished with the amount of n> f. 2:25, n representing the number of barrels of cure-herring landed in each year. Of this amount, f. 1:85 comes for the barrel and f. 0-40 for the salt. The so-called “steurharing” (salt-herring) is prepared with salt but not packed in bar- rels. Its value has been diminished with that of the salt only and this represents a value of f. 0:50 for each 1000 herrings. b. Longlinefishery. The fish caught with hooks is landed partly in salted, partly in fresh condition. The salted fish is landed in Vlaardingen (the main part), in Maassluis and some other places. The “Verslag” gives annually the total quantities for the different species of fish and the prices which have been paid for it pro “ton”. A barrel of salted fish (cod) contains about 35 fish, delicate parts of which (so-called ‘kibbelen”, ‘“keelen” and “lippen”) are removed and put in special barrels: 40 tons cod (1400 fishes) yield moreover 4 tons “kibbelen” and 1 ton ‘“keelen” and “lippen”. A barrel of salted haddock contains about 180 fishes (without heads). The value of a barrel of salted cod or ling or haddock comprises, as in the case of the herring, the cost of the barrel and that of the salt. The cost of the barrel is again f. 1:85 (on an average), for the salt, f. 0:50 is to be reckoned pro ton; so the value of each barrel of salted fish (cod, ling, haddock etc.) has been diminished with f. 2.35 to find the value of the fish in unprepared condition. 3 ] think it is only fair to state here that I received, in working out this summary, valuable assistance from different sides and especially so from Mr. Hubr. Kikkert, Vlaardingen and Mr, J. M. Bottemanne, Ymuiden. SEO a APPENDIX J: HOLLAND The fresh fish caught by long line is mainly landed in Ymuiden: till 1894, a part of it was landed in Helder; smaller quantities are occasionally landed in other places: Rotterdam, Vlaardingen, Maassluis etc. For Helder, we have no figures of the value of the fresh fish caught by hooks and landed there. The fish was not sold by auction, but “uit de hand” 1. e. directly to fish- merchants and no figures about that transaction were published. We only know that the number of line-fishing boats landing their fish in Helder was important, till about the year 1890, that it was still of some importance in the years 1892—94 and that after that year, all the ships brought their fish to Ymuiden. The amount given for the value of the longline fish landed in Helder in the years 1892—94, is an estimation. For Ymuiden, reliable figures are at hand to begin with the second half of 1896. Till the end of 1898, the tables published in the “Verslag” represent the totality of the fish landed in that place. In these tables, the fish caught by longlines and that caught by trawl have been combined; as, however, the cod and haddock caught by trawl are placed in separate columns and as the other fishes for the main leave no doubt as to the way in which they were caught, it has been possible to separate each table into two: one for the long-line and one for the trawl fish. The following fishes, in consequence, are consi- dered as long-line fishes; Cod and Haddock (for so far as not stated that they are caught by trawl), Ling, Coalfish, Halibut and Skate; moreover !/ı of the Ray landed (an estination based on comparison writh other years). For the years 1900—1903, the “Verslag” gives separate figures for the long-line and for the trawl fish. To begin with 1899, the tables given in the “Verslag” represent a part only of the fish landed in Ymuiden: the part which was sold at the Government auction. As the total value of all the fish landed in Ymuiden in those years is known, the items for the ‘different fishes could be calculated on the supposition that the official auction has received an equal proportion of all the kinds of fish. From the second half of 1902, all the fish landed in Ymuiden, practically, is sold again at the government market. A small part of the fish caught by long-line and landed in fresh condition, is sold at other places: Vlaardingen, Maassluis, Rotterdam etc. It is estimated to amount to 5 ve of the quantities landed in Vlaardingen, Ymuiden and Helder which is not too high probably. It might have been quite left out and it must be considered as a “pro memoria” item only. This amount, like that for Helder in the years 1892—94 and for Ymuiden (partly!) in the years before 1896, has been divided over the different fishes in the same proportion as the mean for the three years 1896—97—98. ec. Trawlfishery. The yearly “Verslag” gives the figures for the total amount of fish caught by trawl and sold at Helder, Ymuiden, Scheveningen, Katwijk, Noordwijk, Zandvoort and Egmond. In the two latter places, no, or practically no, trawlfish was landed after 1898. The amount given for Helder includes (for the years after 1895) the amount of some fish (anchovies, herrings etc.) not caught by trawl but sold along with the trawl fish, at the municipal auction. For Ymuiden, the total amount of the fish landed was to be divided in two parts: one for the long-line, one for the trawl-fish. For the years after 1896, this has been done ! The “Verslag” gives the quantities of several fishes as landed in Ymuidon in the years 1892—94. The long-line fishos are represented in these lists by the Cod, Haddock, Ling and Halibut, the trawl-fishes by the Plaice, Sole and Dab. : LED ER APPENDIX J: HOLLAND Table XLT. Value of the three main branches of the North Sea fisheries in Dutch guilders. N.B. I Dutch guilder = 1 sh. 8d. ee ee m Le nn Value of Longline-Fishery Value: of Trawl-Fishery Value of q a = alo Years | Herring- || = 4 BE ® 5 = = ae 3 nn Fishery | = = 5 | eS Total E a £ = = 8 Es E 2 Total alue 3 | 38 a jae vale | ace ae as LES bas lASS) ASS ER | Vu 5 | am | En | Stl ÉD | Se |A SE tee Sselees nl 1892. .|| 4,285,100 | 369,200|?300,000 |?2300,000.|48,500 | 1,017,700 | 405,000} 475,300! 207,000| 57;000| 9,000 |46,000 | 141,000) 26,800) 1,367,100 | 6,669,900 1893. .|| 3,875,300 | 419,100|?300,000 |?300,000 [51,000 || 1,070,100 | 413,000) 530,000} 233,000) 75,000/10,000 |45,000 | 142,000} 29,900) 1,477,000) 6,422,400 1894. .|| 4,421,500 || 405,400|?300,000 |?300,000 |50,300 || 1,055,700 || 415,000] 575,500) 224,000 .77,000/11,000!|36,600 | 152,200| 29,800] 1,520,000.) 6,997,700 1895. .|5,109,800 406,300, — 2600,000:150,300 || 1,056,600 || 419,200] 595,000! 178,000) 61,000! 8,000 |22,000 | 148,200) 28,600I1,460,000 || 7,626,400 1896. . | 3,816,600 | 443,400; — 616,000 |53,000 || 1,112,400 | 447,000] 604,000! 168,000] 58,000) 9,000 |10,000 | 164,800} 29,200) 1,490,000) 6,419,000 1897. .|| 4,823,100 || 413,200) — 564,400 |48,900 || 1,026,500 | 383,000) 658,600} 168,000] 58,000} 9,000 | 7,000 | 155,500} 28,800} 1,467,900) 7,317,100 1898. .|15,216,8001| 370,300) — 523,100 (44,700 | 938,100 | 375,000} 808,500] 149,000} 51,000} 8,000 | 5,000 | 168,200) 31,100} 1,585,800) 7,740,700 1899. .|5,005,400 | 366,600 °%— 618,400 (49,300 | 1,034,300 || 382,200/1,030,600| 153,000] 47,000! 8,000| — |162,500| 35,700} 1,819,000 | 7,858,700 1900. .|| 6,398,600)|:324,600) °%— 504,000 [41,400 | 870,000 | 378,700|1,356,400| 145,000| 55,000}10,000} — | 170,900} 42,300) 2,158,300 | 9,426,900 1901. .|| 6,199,000 || 192,600; = — 549,100 |37,100|| 778,800 || 858,000)1,632,300} 155,100) 61,800] 8,200 | — | 175,800) 47,800} 2,439,000| 9,416,800 1902. .|9,653,100| 231,800) — 580,800:/40,600 |} 853,200 || 312,300|2,230,700) 160,300) 56,400) 4,200} — | 201,400) 59,300} 3,024,600)! 3,530,900 1903. .116,740,300 184,400) — 645,200 141,500 |. 871,100 | 289,30012,037,600| 116,500) 39,100} 2,500} — | 204,800) 53,800} 2,743,600 || 10,355,000 — CN a CS gh APPENDIX J: HOLLAND Table XLII Value of the different fishes in Dutch guilders N.B. 1 Dutch guilder.= 1 sh.8 d. Species of Fish 1892—1895 | 1896—1900 1901 1902 | 1903 VE KEINE N by, BEE BROT FETS ee 4,422,900 5,052,100 6,199,000 9,653,100 6,740,300 AUTO RER Re eee ee Pa Mon ne ee 529,900 529,800 682,900 1,038,900 1,137,000 (Uni. 05 & Saar A dune nee à 507,800 474,200 264,900 285,500 239,900 Mee es aoe vas os < 35 fishes (cod) filling 45 barrels, each barrel contains about 31 fishes. This would represent a weight of 150 kg. fresh fish for each barrel, the fish being estimated to weigh slightly less than 5 kg. (4-8 kg. more exactly) on an average. For the barrel of salted haddock may be reckoned, 180 fishes as an average. Calculating the average weight pro fish to be 1-1 kg., the weight of the fish when living filling a barrel would be + 200 ke. For the fish caught by long line and landed in fresh condition, to calculate the weight, the following estimations have been used: Cod. The average weight for the big ones is 5°5 kg., for the small ones 2 kg. The latter weight, however, is not used, as the small cods have been landed and sold in baskets of 25 kg., or (in 1903) in boxes of 30 kg. Haddock. Big haddocks weigh 1°5 kg., small ones 0°5 kg. (Sometimes three sizes are distinguished, big ones 1:5 kg. middle-sized ones 0:66 kg., small ones 0.33 kg.) A basket of haddock contains 25 kg. Ling weighs on an average 6 kg. Coalfish, weighs on an average 4 kg. Whiting is sold in baskets of 25 kg., in boxes of 30 kg. (in 1903). Halibut weighs on an average 9 kg. Skate weighs on an average 13°6 kg. Ray is sold in baskets of 25 kg., in boxes of 30 kg. (in 1903). C. Trawl fishery. The weight of the different trawl-fishes has been calculated as follows: Plaice. A Weight (‘‘wichtje”) of plaice (Helder) is equal to 50 kg., a basket (Ymuiden) to 25 kg.; a box (Ymuiden 1905) to 30 kg. Sole. 100 soles of different sizes weigh 21 kg. On an average, 100 soles are composed of Ue Loe OWES ani OPE INS ocoout a. 8:5 ke. 23 middle-sized ones at 0°28 kg. ...... 65 - 60 smalll'ones at 0-L ke. ............ 60 - together... 100 fishes 21 ke. Dab, Lemon-dab, flounder. Like Plaice. Turbot (in Helder) weighs 5 kg.; (in Ymuiden) a basket contains 25 kg., a box 30 kg. Brill (in Ymuiden) a basket contains 25 kg., a box 30 kg. Halibut weighs 9 kg. on an average. Ray weighs 2 kg.; a basket contains 25, a box 30 kg. Skate weighs 14 ke. Haddock caught by trawl weighs 1 kg. on an average (Helder). Those landed in Ymuiden are sold in baskets containing 25 kg., or in boxes (1903) containing 50 kg. Appendix J 10 APPENDIX J: HOLLAND oll hil) ThA Cod caught by trawl weighs 3 kg. on an average. The smaller ones are sold in baskets containing 25 kg., or in boxes (1903) containing 30 ke. Coalfish and Ling, like Cod. Whiting is sold in baskets containing 25 kg.; or in boxes (1903) containing 30 ke. Gurnards, Weevers and Mackerel weigh on an average 0°15 kg.; they are also sold in baskets containing 25 kg., or in boxes (1903) containing 30 ke. Herrings, Sprats and Anchovies. Of the herrings landed in Helder 8, and of the anchovies, 36, are supposed to weigh a kg. A basket of sprat contains 25 ke. Different fishes. Of these the value only is known; it is converted into kg. by supposing that f. 1 represents the value of 5 kg. fish. With the aid of these estimations, the following summary of the quantities of the fish landed by Dutch fishermen has been calculated. There need hardly be repeated that the absolute value of this summary is a very doubtful one; it is — as the same weights were used for all the years — a relative one, for the main. Table XLIV. Product of the Dutch sea-fisherles in kilograms, for the period 1892—1903 . Species of fish 1892—95 | 1896—1900 1901 1902 1903 Herring! else EM EN ANNEE 57,017,270 | 44,595,210 | 58,189,440 81,482,600 | 91,317,570 ado. en re 3,129,500 2,637,460 2,379,810 4,780,160 5,791,200 Codie EN RM, See EUR PEE 2,448,110 2,365,920 1,113,580 | 1,243,190 984,650 TAM aa te NN A Im an TR 239,640 229,410 231,820 289,590 141,610 Coalfish’ Pi Re Lee 102,660 103,840 84,070 108,430 51,730 Whiting), Ense Seen PEER — — = 132,300 70,880 Cod, Ling, Coalfish, Whiting (Trawl). 163,110 224,970 1,209,150” 1,821,950 1,672,840 Plaice is: Hae Ne 6,283,650 5,423,380 7,224,840 9,256,210 6,445,880 Sole! sce a m RE re Ae RE 628,680 370,940 271,840 359,430 411,870 Dab, Lemon-Dab, Flounder ......... 4,167,270 1,627,600 2,842,680 2,916,780 2,951,140 Turbot, Brill, Halibut (Trawl)....... 135,550 150,820 209,570 339,710 321,580 Halibut (Longline)................. 77,060 72,350 89,880 73,900 68,240 INE? (WOW). codo55c050406c000> 39,880 28,930 — 50,900 83,130 Skate (Iionr]ine) Bees PERRET 71,310 75,850 197,780 162,680 119,310 Ray and Skate (Trawl)............. 319,830 203,210 209,750 179,790 406,360 Gurnard, Weever, Mackerel ......... 397,730 450,910 570,130 1,173,190 1,131,880 Herring, Sprat, Anchovies.......... 158,300 836,720 1,293,890 | 1,343,900 1,144,190 Different fishes) en 118,750 198,400 152,500 98,500 82,600 Total Weight.... || 75,498,300 | 59,595,920 | 76,270,730 | 105,813,210 | 113,196,660 3. Number of boats With the statistics of the number of boats used in the Dutch North Sea Fisheries, the same is the case as with the other statistics: only those for the herring-fishery are really reliable. For the ships used for the longline-fishery, the number of those used for that industry only, is well-known; this method of fishing, however, is also exercised in winter and early spring by a part of the vessels (steamers, luggers, bumboats) which in summer and autumn fish with drift-nets for herrings. Of the latter, some are used for the longline-fishery during 3 or 4 months, others during two or one month only. Some of them execute one ‘“beugreis” longline-voyage only; when their catch is not very rich they change their method at once and begin their herring campaign during the same voyage. KEN NES APPENDIX J: HOLLAND Another part of the boats, fishing herring in summer and autumn, practice the trawl- fishery in winter and early spring. They are bumboats from Scheveningen, Katwijk and Nordwijk, and luggers from Scheveningen, Katwijk and Ymuiden. Of those fishing with the trawl the whole year round, the number of the steamers is well-known of course; then there is a small number of larger sailing boats (kutters) and a rather great number of smaller sailers (botters, schokkers, blazers) which make short voyages only and in consequence, when fishing as a rule do not lose sight of the coast. As this fleet of small sailers is composed of ships which are to a certain extent used on the Zuidersee also, and as part of them change their “field of operation” according to circumstances, it is impossible to give exact figures for their number in the different years. Finally, there is a number of very small boats fishing for shrimps in the mouth of the Scheldt and Maas (Rhine) rivers, outside the estuary in the immediate neighbourhood of the coast, on Texelstroom ete. In Table XLV, the number of boats is given, divided according to the main branches of the Dutch North Sea Fisheries for the years 1892—1903; in Table XLVI, the numbers of the boats are given regardless of the use, but with the size. Table XLV. Number of boats used in the main branches of the Dutch North Sea Fisheries EE | 1898 | 1899 | 1900 | 1901 | 1902 | 1903 A. Herring fishery: ES LEATNETEMEANE RR RER ESA och MORE — 1 1 2 3 81) 261) 463 DM Keelodı vesgels Er. ernennen nel Le 234 | 262 | 294 | 311 | 3207) 3462| 371°| 4684 9 Bones CRM ENG en 311 | 323 | 320 | 307 | 296 | 389 | 280 | 264 B. Longline fishery: 4. Steamers of the herringfleet fishing with hooks in Wikio? gal Gone en ee ICE HONTE ON Re One — — il 1 3 5 | 12 | 28 5. Keeled vessels fishing with hooks the whole year. . 48 47 | 42) 38 | 33) 30 | 34] 21 6. Keeled vessels of the herring fleet fishing with hooks Innern DEI og ese RE AT DT snes ne 73 59 58 | 65 | 65 | 60 | 36 | 25 C. Trawl fishery: 7. Steamers, trawling the whole year............... 1 2 102123210 PEE 77295 22877732 8. Steamers of the herring fleet trawling in winter re) PINOy pee her tte ie le wore ais — — _ 1 2 | 105) 145 13 9. Keeled vessels of the herring fleet trawling in GH ENG) FAME 100 duo eae ae GeO OOM OE 2 34 54 | TO | 76) 89 | 93 | 99 | 118 10. Bumboats of the herring fleet trawling in winter N RS DIL Sein PR D RUE MAUR RAS LI pr te 240 | 234 | 199 | 193 | 196 | 158 | 153 | 127 11. Keeled vessels, trawling the whole year .......... 11 17a 1126910355 1445 72427 2242 17 12. Small coast-fishing vessels (botters ete.) trawling the L' PUNO EURER Ele Pe RE RER NE Tree 595*| 580° | 570° 5655| 545°) 5255| 520°) 5155 13. Very small coast-fishing vessels (shrimpers) ....... 1577 | 1757) 1857) 1907| 2007| 2057) 215%) 2227 1 One of these is a motor-sloop. 2 One of these is a so-called “loggerbom”. 3 Two of these. 4 Five of these are so-called “loggerbommen”, bumboats with a kind of keel. 5 These numbers are not quite sure. 6 These numbers are not quite sure; they have been estimated with the assistance of the Director of the Fishery Harbour of Ymuiden. | 7 The same as with the numbers of the “small keeled vessels”. ee APPENDIX J: HOLLAND Be WIG Table XLVI. Number of boats of Dutch North Sea fisheries, regardless of the use, with the size (gross tonnage) Keeled vessels | Small vessels | Very small vessels Steamers 115-287 m° Bumboats | (coast fishery) (shrimpers) Years 249-730 m3 average 231 m3 116-166m3 | 18-35 m3 12-30 m3 average 544m? | (Luggers, Sloops | average 144m? | average 27 m3 average 20m? and Cutters) | (Botters etc.) | (Hoogaarzen ete.) OOO adr eas 1 276 300 6001 1502. SOSE 1 286 312 595 155 EIER. 1 239 322 590 165 ict Ro 1 299 319 585 170 USE 546 gone 1 337 324 580 175 LETTRE 2 349 325 575 180 HEISE RN 13 362 320 570 185 DSTI Er 23 384 307 565 1% 1900 PRET 27 396 297 545 200 TOUT UNE 37 417 290 | 525 205 TODE LE 54 437 282 | 520 215 LOS PERF EEE 77 506 264 515 222 4. Type of Boats A. Steamers. The steamships used by the Dutch fishermen are: a. Steamtrawlers of the ordinary pattern and Steamluggers, of a brutto tonnage of 249—730 (average 521) m5. The crew consists of 12 when trawling, of 16 to 17 men when the ship is used for the herring-fishery. ‘ b. Steam-longline-vessels and luggers, being characterised by a well or “bun” which is in open communication with the sea and which serves for landing the fish in living condition. The tonnage of these ships is from 297—586 (average 489) m}. The crew is 14 when trawling or fishing with the longline (in winter) and 16 when the ship is used for the herring fishery (in summer and autumn). B. Motorboats: sloop-pattern with a petroleum-motor. When used for the herring fishery it has a crew of 16 men, when used for the longline fishery of 14 men. C. Sailers: a. Sloops of 281—296 m? (average 262 mé). b. Luggers of 200—287 m? (average 240 m}?). c. Luggers of 116—233 m? (average 174 mi). d. Bumboats (with flat bottom) of 116—166 m® (average 144 më). e. So-called “cutters”, “schokkers” and “blazers”, small ships, rarely with a well, of 18—35 m°, average 27 m? (Ships used on the Zuidersee also) f. So-called “hoogaarzen”, “blazers”, shrimpers: small ships, rarely with a well, of 12—30 m3, average 20 m°. Ships used for the catch of shrimps with the shrimp-trawl (N.B. hoogaarzen are used also for the catch of oysters and mussels on the Scheldt). 1 For the figures of this column, compare note on foregoing page. 2 Idem. 1. Herring fishery. ee APPENDIX J: HOLLAND 5. Average catch and income per boat The following table gives the necessary information for the different types of boats (bumboats, loggers, motorboats and steamships) that are used for this fishery, for the period 1892—1903. Table XLVI. Herring-fishery 1892 —1903, average income per boat, in guilders NB. 1 Dutch guilder = 1 sh. 8 d. Steamers Motorboats Keelships Bumboats Years Catch in | Income | Catch in | Income | Catch in | Income | Catch in | Income kg. pro | pro boat | kg. pro | pro boat | kg. pro | pro boat | kg. pro | pro Boat boat | in guil. | boat in guil. boat in guil. Boat in guil. SEI EN — — = = 158,201 10,002 118,278 6,915 ISOS ARS... — — = — 158,462 8,954 100,677 5,992 SOS PO whe. — = — _ 156,528 10,584 91,850 6,237 ISA STEP — — — — 131,774 | 11,761 84,308 7,428 TS 0 — — = — 127,978 7,576 91,633 5,489 LETTRE ee 197,503 | 22,663 — — 86,623 | 10,194 50,807 5,925 SION en. 243,611 18,086 — — 129,022 9,576 77,076 7,448 SIO RA fis: 149,504 | 21,702 — — 71,989 | 10,720 37,369 5,444 SOON ER. 286,230 | 33,684 = — 106,043 | 13,331 62,185 6,983 TOO RE 270,467 | 25,178 | 199,140 | 18,479 128,859 | 12,039 70,593 6,547 TI... 303,696 | 31,506 246,889 | 26,778 158,527 | 16,449 92,996 9,610 OOS Recs 263,625 | 17,316 210,588 | 13,823 148,258 9,836 87,158 5,157 NB. The number of herring nets used pro ship may be judged from the following: The Dutch “logger”, since it has a steam-winch (and they all have by this time), uses 90 to 100 nets, say 95 on an average. “bom” furnished with a “donkey”, fishes with 90 to 95 nets, say 92 on an average. “bom” which has no donkey uses 65 to 70 nets, say 68 on an average. NB. The number of bumboats with and without donkeys is not exactly known — it changes continually. steam-logger fished with 150 nets, immediately after the introduction of the steamships. Most of them by this time have given up to use so large fleets. As a rule that number is 125 by this time, though some of them use 130 nets still. 2. Longline fishery. The best figures we dispose of for this fishery are those for Middel- harnis. The ships from this harbour practice the longline fishery in winter for fresh fish and in summer and autumn for salted fish; for the fresh fish, the statistics give the total income; the number of the ships being known for each year, the income pro ship could be calculated. The quantities of the catch, however, are not known: a part of this fish has been sold (1892—94) in Helder, another part (1892—94) in Ymuiden; to begin with 1895, nearly all the fresh fish caught by sloops from Middelharnis was sold in Ymuiden; as it was mixed up with the other fish (from 1895—99) and with the longline fish from. other places (from 1900—03), it is impossible to calculate the catch for a single place. APPENDIX J: HOLLAND = Bie For the salted fish caught by Middelharnis! sloops, we know the total income as wel as the total catch for each year: so both could be calculated for each ship that in any year took part in this fishery. The following table contains the figures for Middelharnis for the period 1891/92—1902/03; they could not be given for calender-years, as the so- called winter fishery covers the months from November or December till April and the summer fishery those from May till October: Table XLVIN. Longline-Fishery Middelharnis, average catch pro boat 1 Dutch guilder = 1 sh. 8 d. Winterfishery for fresh fish Summerfishery for salted fish Yoars Total | Number} Income | Number Total Income 1 h | Catch income of pro Ship of income | pro Ship Joie sie ce > in guil. | Ships in guil. Ships | in guil. in guil. jo fe Shipunies 1891—92..... 186,000 21 8,857 21 91,000 4333 422,362 20,112 1892—93..... 175,680 21 8,375 21 83,140 3959 429,337 20,445 1893—94..... 141,800 21 6,752 18 90,400 5022 469,687 26,094 1894—95..... 170,370 21 8,113 21 | 90,690 4319 636,080 30,289 1895—96..... 158,410 20 7,921 18 | 76,465 4248 519,450 28,858 1896—97..... 169,100 19 8,900 18 73,000 | 4056 448,650 24,925 1897—98..... 155,080 19 | 8162 | 18 73,470 4082 422,335 23,463 1898—99..... 136,700 19 SIN Te 68,350 4272 507,375 31,711 1899—1900... | 132,350 16 8,272 | 15 48,275 3218 229,294. 15,286 1900 —01..... 198,270 15 | 13,218 14 30,450 2175 151,350 10,811 1901—02..... 128,675 14 9,191 132 40,040 3080 _ 246,800 18,985 1902—03..... 131,765 13 10,136 | 10 37,125 3713 195,263 19,526 Table XLVIIN. Longline-Fishery: Vlaardingen, Average income and catch per boat, in guilders — urpzpepp see 1 | Winter fishery for fresh fish Winter & Spring Steamers Sailers Motorsloops Fishery for ANSE See i A N > |Re = à al a. a 2 = or o + osm or ea 2:5 D | vo konn 4 © 2 Bet; g85 la2| 825 | ss ES) 52 | 35 89.04 sas lee Gas jas) 288 (S22 Le) 65/64 Feel Ss las) Sas 1891—92..... = — — 2 ? ? =) >| = 931,485 |51 | 18,264 1892—93..... = = — ? ? ? = =) = 896,585 | 52 | 17,242 1893—94..... = — — ? 14 ? = |= | = 815,472 | 46 | 17,728 1894—95..... — — = 91,840 | 16 | 5740 | — | — | — 620,425 | 41 | 15,132 1895—96..... — — = 132,458 | 23 | 5759 | — | — | — || 1,099,950 |41 | 26,828 1896—97..... — — | —. | 151,526) 27 | 5612| — | = | — | 1,011,855 | 44 | 22,997 1897—98..... +14,000 | 1 | +14,000 | 121,611 | 29 | 4193 | — | — | — 541,855 | 43 | 12,601 1898—99. . . +14,000 | 1 | #14,000 || 113,908 | 25 | 45666 | — | — | — 571,570 |38 | 15,041 1899—1900... 40,079 | 3 13,360 | 111,049 | 21 | 5288 | = -| — 629,475 | 44 | 14,306 1900—01..... 70,954 | 3 23,651 || 138,920 | 20 | 6946 | — | — | — 437,480 | 45 9,722 1901—02..... 142,590 | 11 12,965 | 91,713 | 20 | 4585 || 6650 | — | 6650 478,896 | 43 | 11,137 1902—03..... 261,680 | 20 13,084 | 21,637] 6 | 8606 | 5935 | — | 5935 409,525 | 395 | 10,501 1 Middelharnis is engaged in the seafisheries for many centuries. A fish-market was established there in 1597. Comp. the book of U. J. Mijs, De Vischafslag van Middelharnis, 1597—1856. Sommelsdyk, (1897). 2 Two of these fished near Iceland. 3 20 steamers, 1 motorboat, 18 sailers. — 79 — APPENDIX J: HOLLAND For Vlaardingen, some figures could also be compiled into a table. For the same reason as given for Middelharnis, the quantities of fresh fish caught during the winter- fishery cannot be given: for that fishery the income pro steamer, motorboat or lugger could be calculated, for the luggers since 1894-95, for the steamers and motorboats from the beginning of their being used. For the salted fish caught by Vlaardingen ships the total catch in ke. could be calculated and the number of boats being known, the average catch pro boat also. Here follows the table for Vlaardingen, for so far as the figures are available. Regarding the other places (Maassluis, Pernis, Zwartewaal etc.), from which longline fishery is practised, the information is too scanty, to use it for the purpose of calculating the average catch and income pro boat. À 3. Trawlfishery. The information to be deduced from the statistics, with regard to the average catch and income pro boat, for the trawl-fishery is not very important. It must be given separately for Helder, for Scheveningen, Katwijk and Noordwijk, and for Ymuiden. For Helder, we possess figures of the fish landed, and of its value since the begin- ning of the period 1892—1903. We know the total value and we know the total quanti- ties of the different fishes; the number of voyages made annually by the whole fleet is given, but not the number of boats over which the whole catch might be divided. It has been possible, therefore, to calculate the income per voyage, as also the quantities of the principal fishes: Haddock, Plaice, Sole and Dab, caught per voyage. The boats landing their fish in Helder are small ones; they are not from that place exclusively or for the mainpart, but from different harbours. The same ships practice, to a certain extent, the Zuidersee-fishery also and do not always bring their fish to Helder, but to Ymuiden and Rotterdam also. Table L. Trawl fishery Helder, Average income and catch per voyage, in guilders 1 Dutch guilder = 1 sh. 8 d. Number Total Incom | | Yours of Hi pro ru Kg. Haddock| Kg. Plaice Kg. Sole Kg. Dab voyages in guil. in guil. pro voyage | pro voyage | pro voyage | pro voyage UT RE 13,260 405,000 30:5 65 714 8:6 11:5 IB 14,100 412,600 29:3 5 70 eo ao 12:8 ROME AS 6,900 ? ? 32 39-1 173 217 1805 ME 12,820 |: 419,200 32-7 127 58:6 9:3 16-2 SISK: plans 12,400 446,800 36 17:7 621 7:9 224 TICE EEE 10,780 382,700 35:5 52 64:3 11:7 24 1898... 12,100 375,200 31 2-4 58:2 87 23:2 SOOM Cust a: 12,725 | 381,500 30 | 0:5 62:9 8:6 22:7 SOO ees shea 10,720 379,400 35-4. 0-4 . 889 64 37 TOO AA à * 9,500 358,000 37:7 0:04 96:0 55 394 Or 9,650 312,300 32-4 0:05 81 78 40 GOB, cape hu 10,150 | 289,300 28:5 0-15 57-7 131 36:8 For Scheveningen, Katwijk and Noordwijk, the number of the bumboats which fished with the trawl annually, as also the total income of all the boats for each place, is known. With these figures, the table as given underneath has been compiled. APPENDIX J: HOLLAND u re For Ymuiden, calculations of the income and catch of the trawlfishing boats are possible for the years 1900—1903 only. The items for the years 1892—1894, are of no use: they are rough, too rough estimations. For the year 1895, no figures have been published. For the years 1896—1899, figures are at hand; they inform us about the total of the fish landed. But as this total is partly composed of trawl and partly of longline fish and as the ships which landed the fish are partly longline fisherboats and partly trawlers, but as no division is given, a calculation of the catch and the income pro boat has been impossible for the said years. Table LI. Trawling in winter and early spring with bumboats (Scheveningen, Katwijk and Nordwijk) re N.B. 1 Dutch guilder = 1 sh. 8 4. Scheveningen Katwijk Nordwijk Years Total | Number | Income Total | Number | Income Total | Number | Income income of per boat | income of per boat || income of per boat in guil. | boats in guil. in guil. | boats in guil. in guil. boats in guil. | ae 155,240 159 976.34 56,714 57 995 9,400 14 671-43 Bose 187,616 155 | 1,210:44 75,346 62 1,215:26 | 10,500 15 700 ee 159,738 177 902-47 76,931 69 1,11494 | 11,500 13 884 USB) yo co . | 133,336 161 828:35 60,951 70 870:73 7,800 12 650 soo 114,495 153 748:33 57,618 68 847-32 9,163 14 654-50 SO ere 116,467 152 76623 49,209 61 806:70 7,200 10 720 SOS 5 8 5 00 95,621 130 735:54 50,695 59 859:23 8,200 10 820 899 333088 93,621 125 74635 46,670 57 818:77 8, 0Zo LL 775 1900. HER 82,077 105 781.69 54,800 58 944-83 | 10,530 ite 810 NOD eestor 84,173 88 956:51 61,832 59 1,048 8,200 11 745:50 OS 86,576 94 921-01 56,380 52 | 1,084:20 4,200 7 600 IGOR. 50 00e 43,448 71 611-94 39,110 51 766:86 2,500 5 500 For the years 1900—1903, the Ymuiden statistics inform us about the value and quantities of longline and trawl fish separately; for these years, it is also known what the income was for all the bumboats, all the coast-fishing boats, all the steamtrawlers etc. which fished with the trawl and landed their fish in Ymuiden. As, moreover, the number of voyages (not the number of boats of each category) is known, it has been possible to calculate for these years, for each type of boat, the income per voyage, as also the quan- tity of some of the main fishes (haddock, plaice, sole and dab). These figures are given in the two following tables, as far as those of Table LIII are concerned, without believing that a really satisfying! result has been obtained. 1 The main error arises from the fact that it was necessary for this calculation to suppose, that the catches of the different vessels are composed in the same way on an average. It is clear, however, that this is by no means the case! As for an example the haddock occurs in the catches of the steamtrawlers only, the smaller boats have more sole on an average etc. APPENDIX J: HOLLAND Pe ce 1er | La | r9r | 688 | go FL |F-9L | 878 | 9-6PT| S-9T | SILE | G:ILG || 6ST) 6:LT | 9968| S-88S | 9-8Z01\S-911 | 992 |9:-798T| | | S06T rer | La | 369 | 1.98 | 2.08 | 6S |2-78T | L-SL |6-FGI| GT | PSF | L-O8T ||8-901) Fol G88E) FST ||8-6POT|8-IGL |P-9I8E \8-ETST | GO6T GEG | GS | 9-69 6 | G-0L) 9-9 | 8-L8T La ||G-691|8-ST | 2.097 | 99 |T-8FI| 6.6T| F-F6E) 29 19-2091 EPL) 6907| 989 | ~~ TO6T 6:96 € | 899 | 2.9 | 919] 9 |9ETL | FEL | F-21Z| 9-76 |8-99F | 99 || 7-891) 9:61 | 6-698) 9-67 9651| OST| 0785| SEE "0061 = a as) = un uv = n ae) an rg n 5 | & 8 | § Spee 8 | = ne 5 = = & = syeoq SuLysyIse0N) Jeoqung 1979n9) 103007 AOMEIRBIIS ee OS oo syeoq Jo sadky quosapip ayy 20) “ueadogy uy “qep pue) ojos ‘aoyed ‘yooppeq JO H9)E9 "EOGI—OOGT :Uepınug wy papuel qsgfaeag “WIT 19d 8:08 | oze'zet | etz’6 | aor | PIO‘OL |) LPL | 42er | Syria) | 09F L691 | egée‘rar | 6&2 | SOTTT|9Lc0PL‘T| 6go'T ||: e061 ze | cel'esr | 0002 | 9:29 | 9FF'8 Gel | SIET | IFLPLI | LILI | 9-620 | LGr‘68 069 | F-FLCI | 876 9FLT| 006 |: “ZO6T 6.02 | me | ert’, | 1-29 | 8289 ott | 9:09T | zoz'ger | gec'r || 8087 | 6po‘e6 | 912 || SPSET| Greys | 982 | ~~ TO6I 106 | 6LE'FST | 9FF'L Gp | sr FF 8-891 | SOP'ZIT | 999 zrer | 98689 | pig || 9F£0T|00£88T | ZT | ~~ O06 Si omuoour |s9.32404 de owoour |s958401 oe amoaur |s058404 2 emoaur |sedesoa ou emoour |so5v {04 Tod 10 û | 10 | æ F anwar yeqoy, |zequanyy sms 18301 |tequinyy aa [8307 |equnN ana [290] |zequinyy en [2905 qua syeoq SurgsugseoNn speoqung §.10990/) siossuT S1OTMEIQ TROIS ee — ee oo “aaa PS UST = wpims MT AN syeoq Jo sad£y yuasagip oq) 107 292 É04 sad omtoony "gOGI—OOGT :uapnıng uy popUe| gsyjaesp IT IAE Appendix J 6. Belgium I. Short review of fishing a. The principal modes of fishing The sea fisheries of Belgium can be divided as follows: 1. Herringfishery with driftnets, 2. Codfishery with handlines. 3. Trawlfishery with sailing boats and steamers, and 4. Coastfishery (or shrimpfishery). 1. The herringfishery with driftnets is no doubt a very old Belgian industry. Like their neighbours from the low countries, the Flemish fishermen from Nieuport and other ports visited the coasts of England, Scotland, Denmark and Norway already in the 12" and 13% century, there to catch the herring with their driftnets. Flemish herring was renowned in those days; the barrels with the mark of the port of Damme were considered to be the best of all. In Gravelines and Dunkerque (France), in Nieuport, Damme and Ostende a large part of the population lived on the salting of herrings and even grew rich on it, especially when Edward III, King of England, authorised the Flemish to sell their fish in his kingdom and to export the money they received for it. In that time, the herrings often visited the Belgian coast in enormous quantities and when they did not come, the Flemish fishermen, like their colleagues from Zealand, searched them in the whole North Sea, going as far as Norway and even as Iceland, if necessary. The Flemish practised the salting of the herring on board their ships as early as the Dutch. In the 16" century, Flemish marchands sold for 500,000 guilders herring a year. At present, there is only one fishing-harbour in Belgium, from which herring-fishing is still in a somewhat larger style exercised. This must be considered as a coast-fishery and, in the official publication on statistics, is indicated as the “petite péche du hareng”. It is La Panne, a small village, now developing into an important sea resort, which owned 2 or 3 cutters (chaloupes) in 1830, 16 in 1872, 24 in 1883, 74 in 1898 and 78 in 1902. Literature: 1. Rapport de la commission chargé de faire une enquête sur la situation de la péche maritime on Belgique (chambre des représentants). Bruxelles, 1866. 2. Bulletin mensuel de l'association maritime, industrielle et agricole d'Ostende. Ostende, 1891—1903. 3. Forêts, chasse et pêche, Exposition internationale Bruxelles-Fervueren, 1897. Catalogue détaillé et illustré. Bruxelles, 1897. (Quatrième partie: Pêche maritime, p. 635—694). Eugen opin APPENDIX J: BELGIUM In that year, 71 sloops from La Panne and 6 from Coxyde have been engaged in the herring fishing. These boats fish with driftnets, but their fishing is not to be compared with the cured herring industry of the other nations. In 1902, the 71 Belgian boats landed together for a value of 123:975 fr. of herrings: for each boat also about 70 £ of English money. The same sloops fish with trawls in the other months of the year. Nearly related to the herring fishery is the sprat fishery, which is also a notable part of the Belgian seafishery. It is exercised chiefly by the small boats of La Panne, but also by the open boats of the whole coast. The sprats are often preserved in oil, like sardines, (Ostende) as they are sent in large quantities to Germany, especially to Kiel. 2. Cod-fishery with handlines. The cod and haddock fishing with line and hooks has once been an important branch of the Belgian sea-fisheries. It was practised at a greater distance from the coast (Doggerbank) etc., but in winter near the coast as well. The fishermen from Ostende, Anvers, and Nieuport practised the hook-fishery for salted cod in summer, those from Nieuport went to sea also in winter and landed the fish in fresh condition. Whereas, in the neighbouring Holland, the fishermen always used the long line (beug) and the handline (kol) as well, the fishermen from Ostende and other Belgian places fished with handlines only. Even in 1872, a number of 162 sloops and cutters went to the North Sea, there to fish with hooks: 9 went from Anvers, 141 from Ostende and 12 from Nieuport. In 1880, these numbers were 7, 120 and 15, in 1890 3 from Anvers and 46 from Ostende, in 1900 Ostende sent out 21 sloops still to fish with hooks but in 1902, only 6 of these practised this branch of fisheries. They caught not quite 4000 kg. of fish each, the greatest catch recorded being that for the year 1873, viz. nearly 13,000 kg. per boat on an average. These boats from Ostende go to the Doggerbank, there to fish with lines about the month of May. The fish is landed in salted condition. 3. Trawlfishery with sailing boats and steamers. This is by far the principal branch of the Belgian fishery-industry. It seems not to be well known, at what time the trawl was first used by the Belgian fishermen. They say it has been of English origin and it was introduced to take the place of the so-called “seine”, the net used at the Dutch coast also in former times. The Belgian sailing boats (sloops and cutters) use a beam-trawl of about 40 feet beam. the steam-trawlers at present use so-called otter-trawls, the open shrimp-boats use shrimp- trawls with a beam of about 12 feet. The trawling-business is exercised from all fishing- places (towns and villages) of the Belgian coast: Ostende, Nieuport, Oostduinkerke, Coxyde, Blankenberghe, Heyst and La Panne (Adinkerke). At the end of 1903, there were in all 433 Belgian boats fishing with this gear (moreover 184 open boats, fishing in coastal water only). These ships were divided over the coast in the following way: CNRS 2... 21 steamtrawlers, 127 sloops, 29 small sloops.... 177 Blankenberghe ..... = HOME bl) Rey lé sea 250 HabPanne neue " = 88 — Bh idee. SS Heyst ING » — 63 — » — = LLC Oostduinkerke ..... » = DRE I RE RE 27 Coxyde CEE) OD » = 16 — » — — issu NG Nieuport.......... » — 12 — ni iat te ET NN eee ‘Together .... 21 steamtrawlers, 383 sloops, 29 small sloops.... 433 11* APPENDIX J.: BELGIUM as Ostende is by far the most important fishery-harbour of the Belgian coast; it has good accomodation for the repairing of the fishing boats (dry dock etc.), and one of the larger markets for the sale of fresh fish on the continental North Sea coast. The value of the fresh fish sold in Ostende in 1903, amounted to 4,823,050 fr. or about 192,922 £ st. Seven eighths of that value was landed by Belgian boats, one eight by foreign (most of them French and English boats). Blankenberghe has a harbour also; it has no steamtrawlers and its sailing boats are smaller than those of Ostende. Whereas those from Ostende are called sloops (chaloupes), are furnished with deck all over and measure from 36—41 tons, those from’ Blankenberghe are called dandy-cutters, old fashioned boats measuring from 11—25 tons and half-decked only. The boats of Blankenberghe land their fish to some extent in Ostende, there being a fish market in their own town also. La Panne has no harbour; the sloops use the harbours of Ostende or Nieuport, and are obliged when visiting their own village to fland on the sand. The ships from La Panne are small, from 5—15 tons only. Heyst has no harbour either; in case the fishermen want one they can use that of Blankenberghe, which is very close by. The size of the sloops varies in Heyst between 8 and 24 tons. The new sea-port in construction at Zeebrugge includes a good fishery- harbour, which is likely to absorb the whole fishery industry of Heyst and partly that of Blankenberghe. N Oostduinkerke and Coxyde are very small villages without harbours. Like those from La Panne their fishermen are obliged to use the harbour of Nieuport, when they want shelter. The sloops of these villages are small: from 3—12 tons each. Nieuport has a “port de refuge”, but it has no great importance from the fishery point of view. It has only a dozen sloops and these are small ones from 3 to 12 tons. (Anvers has once been a very important fishing place, but the long distance from the sea has obliged it to give up all competition with the harbours at the coast. Its last sloop “La Maria” was sold in 1897). 4. The coastfishery of Belgium is often called shrimpfishery, the shrimp being the most valuable object of the catch (“pêche aux crevettes”). It is practised in the territorial waters and as a rule with small open boats. There is also some handfishing still going on along the strand (kruiwers). The shrimp-fishery takes place nearly along the whole Bel- gian coast and has a rather great importance. Shrimps from Ostende are in great demand at Paris. | In 1903, Ostende made use of 168 and Blankenberghe of 16 open boats, the main industry of these boats being the shrimp fishing. b. Fishes of greatest importance These are the same as for the Dutch fisheries: for the herring fishery: the herring (Olupea harengus) and the sprat (Cl. sprattus). - - hand line fishery: the cod (G. morrhua), the ling (Molva vulgaris), the coal- fish (G. virens) and a few other Gadidae. ; - - trawlfishery: the plaice (Plewronectes platessa), the dab (Pl. limanda), the sole (Solew vulgaris), the turbot (Rhombus maximus), the brill (R. laevis), the halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris), the cod, the haddock, the ling, the coal- SBR eo APPENDIX J: BELGIUM fish, the whiting (Gadus merlangus), the red and grey gurnard (Trigla gur- nardus & hirundo), different rays (Raja), the Skate (Raja batis) and a few other fishes of less importance. for the shrimpfishery: the shrimp (Crangon vulgaris) c. Fishing-grounds at present time The steam trawlers visit the grounds along the Dutch coast: Schouwenbank, Texel- grounds, Terschellingbank; they fish on the Silverpits, the Doggerbank and Fisherbanks, some of them go as far as the Feroes and Iceland. Some of the steam trawlers, at pre- sent, visit the Bay of Biscay and the coast of Portugal, regularly. The greater sloops fish in the southern part of the North Sea: from the North- and Westhinder along the Dutch coast to the east, and the English coast, the Falls, the Cab- bard, Yarmouth, Cromer and Flamborough Head to the west. The smaller sloops and cutters as a rule remain in the neighbourhood of the Belgian coast and do not go farther north than Westkapelle on the Dutch coast. The very small cutters and the open boats remain in or near the territorial sea. As was told already p. 83, the principal fishing ground for the cod-fishing in spring is always still the Doggerbank — but the number of boats going there on that purpose has greatly diminished. The herring fishing of the fishermen of La Panne and Coxyde is a coast fishery. The sloops go out for a single tide as a rule. II. Statistics a. Period for which they have existed As far as could be made out, no statistics on the Belgian sea-fisheries have been published going father back than 1872. Through the courtesy of the Minister “de l'Industrie et du Travail” in Bruxelles, the Bureau on its demand received the pages 472—474 of an official publication containing _ statistical information regarding the seafishery (pêche maritimes) for the period 1872—1902. These pages contain two tables (tableaux) on the Belgian fisheries, both for the said period. The first table gives for the three main branches of the fishery: Cod-fishery (péche de la morue) Coast-herring fishery (petite péche du hareng) and Fresh-fish fishery (péche de marée), the number of the boats and the harbours from which they sailed as well as the total catches they made. For the cod-fishery, the catch is given in kg., for the other two fisheries its value is given in francs. The second table gives the number of boats sailing from each harbour, the size (tonnage) of these boats (for each harbour, one figure for all the boats together) and the number of the men engaged in the fishery (also one figure for each harbour). Moreover, the number of the sloops lost at sea during each year is given. Since 1882, “l'association commerciale maritime industrielle et agricole de l’arrondisse- ment d’Ostende” (Chamber of Commerce) publishes a monthly bulletin, one page of which every month gives a table of the sale of fresh fish sold at the Ostende market during the APPENDIX J: BELGIUM == 86) foregoing month. For each month, the total value of the fish landed by the Belgian steamers is given, that of the sailing vessels as well. The number of the steamers and sailing boats which landed the fish is not mentioned, however; the number of fishings (péches) for the steamers and the sailing boats together, is given. The total value of the fish landed by foreign fishing boats is published at the same time: one item for the Eng- lish, one for the French, one for the Dutch and one for the German ships. The quantities of fish landed are not given, neither totals, nor for the different species which compose the catches. With regard to prices as paid at the fish markets of Bruxelles and Ostende, lists of these prices for different fishes in kg. have been published since many years in local papers, and also on the cover of the Belgian monthly ‘Pêche et Pisciculture”. b. Manner in which the statistics are collected With regard to the official statistics published by the government, the tables on the seafisheries, mentioned in the foregoing chapter, have been composed out of data furnished by ‘M. M. les commissaires maritimes à Anvers, Blankenberghe, Nieuport et Ostende”. The figures published by the Ostende Chamber of commerce are sent in monthly by the Director of the Fish-Market. In the smaller harbours of the Belgian coast, the quantities of fish landed seem not to be registered, or at least, published in a regular way.’ c. Forms of publication The only statistics which have been published in a distinct form are those mentioned p.85. About the form in which they are published nothing need be added here. III. General information which may be deduced from the statistics a. Regarding the quantity of fish caught by Belgian fishermen over a period of years About the quantities of fish caught and landed by Belgian fishermen, the available statistics give no information, the only exception being the cod fishery. For that fishery the table published by the government gives the quantities in kg. caught in each year, since 1872 (see Table LIV). b. Regarding the value of the fish landed by Belgian fishermen over a period of years The official statistics give figures regarding the value of the fish caught by Belgian fishermen in separate tables, for the so-called small herring fishery (petite péche du hareng) and for the fresh-fish that is caught (péche de marée). For the fresh fish (marée), the table gives for the years 1882—1902 for each of the fishery-harbours Anvers (until 1895), Ostende, Nieuport, Coxyde, Blankenberghe, Heyst and La Panne (Adinkerke), the number of fishing boats and the total value of the fish caught by the fishermen from each place. As the difference in size between the boats from the 1 Through the efforts of the Director of the Belgian section of the international exploration of the sea, the statistical work has been greatly improved. In future, the number of baskets of each kind of fish and of the different sizes will be recorded and a private service of information, concerning the origin of the catches, is already acting. ore APPENDIX J: BELGIUM Table LIV. Quantities of cod landed by Belgian fishing boats Total Number | Quantity Years quantity of landed General Remark in Kilogr. Boats pro boat NSO ARE 1,676,500 162 10,349 The fish is landed in salted con- See. es 1,632,500 149 10,956 dition: the total weight, as given in III SE SEO 813,450 124 6,560 the offieial statisties, ineludes the SSR ee. 292,350 68 4,299 weight of the ton and of the salt. TPE er Bee 94,050 22 4,275 From the “brutto” weight the weight ISIS 157,950 30 5,265 of the fish has been caleulated, on CHR NER 192,150 32 6,005 the estimation: 160 kg. fish + barrel SID een: 304,050 46 6,610 and salt — 150 kg. fish only. CEO Fe 249,300 42 5,936 IO; JOB EP CR 181,200 46 3,939 SOS Fe ue 108,750 40 2,719 SS ae 76,050 22 3,457 1800); Se RL 53,700 21 2,557 TNS OLS We wees ie 31,650 9 3,517 QOD arent A 22,200 6 3,367 Table LV. Value of the herrings caught by Belgian fishermen (N.B. 25 franc = 20 sh.) Number Value Years Nail rats of pro boat General Remark in franc boats in franc STAR ee 82,000 22 3730 The herring fishery begins in SIC oats ACER 163,328 40 4080 autumn as soon as the herrings Ie Sia Dee 100,432 31 3240 arrive near the Flemish coast and, RE ne. 60,730 33 1840 generally, goes on until the end of EI. 70,800 45 1570 the spring. NE, 506 00e 39,000 78 500 The same boats fish with the LS Em 56,050 81 690 trawl in the other months of the IE. na sede ose 46,025 76 610 year. SIEHE U 60,025 86 700 ea: 48,230 81 600 GEE. Love 275,700 90 3060 SOON 170,850 85 2010 ISCO oan sae Home 86,700 85 1020 NGO Tres er 86,497 67 1290 IRIS eee 123,975 71 1760 different places is important, it has been thought useful to calculate the annual value pro boat for each place; for Ostende, moreover, has been calculated separately, the value pro steam-trawler and that pro sailing boat. The total value for Ostende could be divided into the two items, as the number of steamers and the value of the fish landed by the Belgian steamers was also known. Whether these figures are really reliable is difficult to say. Only one thing is certain. and it is, that if the figures are correct, the fluctuations in the value of the fresh fish APPENDIX J: BELGIUM eR Table LVIa. Value of the fresh fish caught by fishermen from Anvers, Ostende, Nieuport and Oostduinkerke (N.B. One frane = 10 d.) Anvers Ostende Nieuport Oostduinkerke : Steamtrawlers | Sailingboats £ = 3 E = = = H 2 Years o|® za ® a ees © SI. o| > = ons = 2|=2_|8 Slee os) 8258188) le |®& MER „slee2s,.|_.sl2°|s masses | sel sl sense | a |ee | Ss, Seles aäsı85 El 5e2|85|82 52,858 38 | 53,25 | Es 5= eM Ass ee |22 |e |e" sé ES is sé (24 |e HIM heey ss 801 | 11 | 73 = — | — | 6300 | 150) 42 | 319; 6 | 53 | — | — | — TTC 769 | 10 7 — — | — | 6020 | 146 41 | 327 | 14 | 23 | — | — | — HSSDR aeons 862 | 10 | 86 | — — | — | 7200 | 175 | 41 | 102 | 7 | 15 | — | — | — SS... 944 | 11 | 86 _ 4 | — | — | 207) — 98); 7} 14) — | — | — HSDPA" 447 5 | the) — T | — — |189| — | 36 | 6 6 | — | — | — MESSER. 181 2 90 | — 9 | — — |184| — 47 | 8 61 — | — | — HS Oa ike eds. 97 | 1) 97 || — 10 | — — |171| — 59 | 10 6 | — | — | — Des Se | 12 | — — |168| — | 86 | 13 T|l— | — | — STE s5,. = le al tee — 13 | — — |167| — | 66| 9 71870 MSIE) ISOC so — | — | — — 14 | — — |156| — | 63| 9 7 | 191 | 35 | 5 Tee oe — | — | — — | 18 | — — |150 | — | 57| 8 A {| 188) 0365 REG ee MINE = 21 | — — | 138; — | 64| 8 8 | 143 | 21 | 7 Ed er — | — | — — 23 | — — |145 | — 87 8 | 11 | 146 | 20 | 7 TOUL renames — | — | — = 26 | — — | 151 | — | 115 | 11 | 11 | 151 | 22 | 7 IF ECO — | — | — — 23 | — — | 158 | — | 147 | 12 | 12 | 135 | 21 6 LD 0 — | — | — — 21 — | — Coxyde Blankenberghe Heyst La Panne (Adinkerke) Years an ETS A MENU DORE ETES Et NET RE LE £a | Ret Se PRN Tn eee ese ee EE NOMME ENNEMI ee ae | EN 853 | Ba (es Se tee Pee tee eee ea ie Ween lita ee PRT NE — — — 920 46 20 552 28 20 220 22 10 on na nee — = — 1065 52 20 625 30 21 204. 26 8 SSL — — — 973 48 20 720 36 20 190 24 8 ST: -- _ — 1150 50 23 891 39 23 196 26 8 VERA ae ah — = _ 1079 48 22 926 42 22 228 39 6 SOS RI RU _ _ = 1123 50 22 696 39 18 525 72 7 TS SEAL — _ _ 1085 52 21 778 49 16 584 80 7 Song _ _ = 856 50 17 670 46 15 621 76 8 CBB oo RCE 152 26 6 981 51 19 728 45 16 666 76 9 LEONE CE 146 25 6 989 53 19 792 46 17 612 66 9 SOS Danone 146 25 6 922) | 52 18 651 43 15 589 66 9 S99 eee 119 18 7 914 49 19 761 53 14 495 73 U SOO Keer: 116 16 a 700 45 16 722 46 16 657 75 9 ODA EU 98 14 7 679 45 15 Tie |) il 14 632 74 9 IG Ope ace 106 14 8 655 44 15 742 53 14 636 78 8 COR Er AN — = — — _ _ = — — — — 12* 7. France The Fisheries of France are very important. For the year 1900, the following figures are published in the official Report “Statistique des Péches maritimes”, Paris, Imprimerie nationale, 1902: The fleet of fishing vessels numbered 24,677 ships the total tonnage of which was..... 171,341 tons | France the total number of fishermen...... 91,336 MONCOVOI eects fone se 1,244 ships OA Pen nena 4,194 tons | Algiers number of fishermen.......... 5,077 Fishery afoot was practised by ..... 61,979 persons of which in Algiers... 18 — The total value of all the products (with vessels and afoot) of the fisheries of France and Algiers combined, amounted to 106,200,300 francs. The value of the products of the fisheries afoot alone amounted to 6,274,000 franes: Moreover, fish, molluscs and crustacea were cultivated in ponds or parks near the French coast; the value of the products raised and sold amounted in that year to 20,755,000 francs: So, the sale of the products of the sea, either caught or cultivated in 1900, has given to the French fishermen and owners of coast-establishments a total amount of 126,955,300 franes. The above named official Report over the year 1900, which was published by the Marine Department in the year 1902, has been the last but one which was published as a special report. For the years 1902 and the following, trimestrial papers only have been published in the “Revue maritime”, as also in the “Bulletin de la marine Marchande”, both journals published by the Marine Department. For the fisheries in the North Sea (Cod- and Herring-fisheries), the year 1901 has been the last one for which figures of the quantities has been published: to begin with 1902, the tables give figures for the value only. Reference Literature: 1. Statistique des pêches maritimes (et de l'ostréiculture), publiée par le ministère de la marine (et des colonies), pour l’année 1875—1900. Paris, 1877—1902. 2. Rendement de la pêche et de l’ostréiculture en France et en Algérie, pendant l'année 1901; Idem pen- dant l'année 1902. (Par trimestres). La Revue maritime et coloniale. Année 1903. Idem Année 1904: Published also in: Bulletin de la Marine Marchande. (The last report published is that for the second trimestre of the year 1903.) 3. J. Lécar, Documents sur les péchos cotières. 1869. 4, G. Rocak, La culture des mers en Europe, 1898. 299 APPENDIX J: FRANCE Only a small part of the total amount of the French fisheries must be considered as the product of French North Sea fisheries — though, with regard to some branches of the open sea fisheries, some doubt remains as to the localities where the fish landed has been caught. In most reports, figures are given for the quantities of fish landed, their value, the number of boats, of the fishermen etc. pro district (quartier) and pro harbour (port) without any indication of the places where the fish has been caught. A second set of tables divides the quantities, the value etc. for the years 1892—1894 over the Great Fishery (Grande péche), the Coast-Fishery (Péche cétiére), the Oyster-culture, Mussel-culture and the Ponds (Réservoirs); for the years 1895-1900 over: I. Great Fishery (Cod) V. Fishery afoot (Peche à pied) I]. Open Sea Fishery (Pêche hauturiére) VI. Oyster-culture Ill. Coast Fishery (Pêche côtière, pêche VII. Mussel-culture en mer) VIII. Other Molluscs etc. IV. Of these, the only ones that are at least partly of importance for the North Sea fisheries are the Great fishery or Codfishery and the Open Sea Fishery. ! With regard to these two branches, the following information has been taken from the official statistics. Pond Fishery (Péche en étang) A. Great Fishery or Cod-fishery For the years 1892—1894, the products of the fishery near Iceland and of that in the North Sea are given combined in one table only. For the sake of comparison the same combination is applied to the other years in the following table. Table LX. French Cod-fishery near Iceland and in the North Sea (combined) (N.B. 10 francs = 8 shillings) Ya | \ | Mant. Yo ae Total value Number Me Tonnage Rs of Fishermen in kg. in francs | of boats | na poatg | Pro boat | fishermen pro boat Ian: 12,371,000 | 5,718,200 172 18,714 109 3211 | 19 SOS een EE 15,584,700 6,677,600 180 17,456 97 3305 18 LATE Er. 13,658,100 7,017,600 218 20,533 94 4087 19 NÉE een 14,142,500 6,967,200 330 24,305 73 5448 16 TEE 12,609,200 6,074,700 321 22,545 70 5312 17 TOUS RNA 10,970,900 5,895,500 328 21,900 67 5223 16 SOS ere 9,394,200 5,418,700 312 21,173 68 4886 16 lee RER EE" 10,819,2 6,132,000 279 19,444 70 4459 16 1900,22. 11,117,000 6,264,200 345 25,154 73 5781 17 Or 10,145,900 6,435,200 249 28,084 113 4094 16 (BO cs geen ? 2,713,800 ? 1,575,800 — _ = — zo For the years 1895—1901, the figures are given in the official publication for the fishery near Iceland and for that at Doggerbank and in the North Sea, in separate tables. The following table gives a summary of these figures: 1 For the ealeulation of the Nettoweight and the Nettovalue of the salted cod and herring compare Holland and Belgium. APPENDIX J: FRANCE LS gee Table LXI. French Cod-fishery near Iceland and in the North-Sea (separately) (N.B. 10 francs — 8 shillings) Cod-fishery near Iceland Cod-fishery in the North Sea, of Doggerbank Years || Num- | Total \ Total Num- | Total x Total ber of | quantity GR value ate ber of | quantity Quantity value Nebr boats | in kg. | PT° oat | in franes | PTO ae boats | in kg. progbuat in franes | PPO boat 1895.. | 238 |12,462,500| 52,363 | 6,196,900! 26,037 | 97 |1,680,000| 17,320 | 770,300| 7941 1896.. | 207 |11,112000 53,681 | 5,108,800| 21,680 | 114 |1,497,200| 13,133 | 965,900| 8473 1897.. | 190 |9,883,400| 52,018 | 4,857,100| 25,564 | 138 |1,087,500| 7,873: | 1,037,400] 7571 1898.. | 186 | 8,662,000) 46,570 | 4,713,700| 25,342 | 126 | 732,200 5,811 | 705,000) 5595 1899.. | 158 | 9,835,800] 62,252 | 5,479,000| 34,677 | 121 | 983,400| 8,127 | 653,000 | 5397 1900.. | 158 |10,420,400| 65,952 | 5,807,300! 36,765 | 187 | 696,600| 3,725 | 456,900| 2443 1901.. | 149 | 9,633,700| 64,656 | 6,092,1001 40,886 | 100 | 512,200| 5,122 | 343,100| 3431 1902. . 22,185,100 21,223,600 ?533,700 2352,200 B. Open Sea Fishery (Péche hauturiere) The so-called “péche hauturiere” comprises the’ herring-fishery, the mackerel-fishery and the catch of fresh fish. Of these, the herring-fishery is the only one that at least is partly practised in the North Sea. From Dunkerque to Cherbourg, herring-fishery is exercised as coast-fishery in the English Channel by the fishermen of that whole region. The herring caught here is landed in fresh condition and forms part of the product of the French coast-fishery. The true North Sea herring-fishery of the French corresponds exactly with that industry as exercised by Dutch and German fishermen. The fishing grounds (from the Shetlands down to in the entrance of the English Channel) are the same, the same driftnets are used and the fish is salted and packed on board the fishing vessels in about the same way. The places on the French coast from which these herring-fishing boats sail are Boulogne, Etaples and Fécamp. A few years ago, there were also herring- fishing boats sailing from the harbours of Dieppe and Saint-Valery-en-Caux, since 1900 the latter places seem no more to have taken part in this branch of fishery. The following table gives the figures of the French North Sea herring-fishery for the years 1892 and following. Table LXI. North Sea Herring fishery of France (N.B. 10 francs = 8 shilling)’ Years Number of Total quantity | Quantity Total value Value Heads boats in kg. pro boat in francs pro boat DOME ire 21,139,000 3,451,500 REIS eng au 23,701,000 3,869,900 1894, aa 18,825,400 3,881,700 JADE Arr 120 19,194,000 159,950 3,088,300 25,140 2486 SIE | 153 24,660,800 161,180 3,259,700 21,305 3231 TCE (ues cose ake 181 22,627,400 125,010 5,492,400 30,340 : 3860 nen: 136 22,166,100 162,990 4,814,000 . 35,400 3055 nS eee ha 141 19,559,300 138,720 4,281,200 30,360 2749 NEO) MERE 141 20,637,600 146,370 4,674,200 33,150 2725 TOTER 140 22,224,000 158,740 5,020,300 35,860 2708 Ze ? 23,544,500 5,140,500 Ran APPENDIX J: FRANCE The French mackerel fishery is partly open sea-fishery, partly coast-fishery. The same boats, which are used for the herring fishery from June—December, fish for mackerel in March and April. This fishery, however, is not exercised in the North Sea, but in the sea to the south of Wales and to the south and west of Ireland. As coast-fishery, the catch of mackerel in France is practised, moreover, along the Channel and Atlantic coast as well as on that of the Mediteranean. To the North Sea fisheries, neither the mackerel nor the coast-fishery of France can be reckoned: they are passed over in silence here. The following table combines the quantities and the value of the two branches of French sea-fisheries which are exercised in the North Sea. In this Table, the Cod taken at or near Iceland is included in the amount for the North Sea: Table LXIM. French North Sea Fisheries (N.B. 10 francs = 8 shilling Quantities in kg. Value in franes Years Gad Herring Cod & Herring Cod Fate Cod & Herring combined combined Samen... 12,371,000 21,139,000 33,510,000 5,718,200 3,451,500 9,169,700 SOS erence se 15,584,700 23,701,000 39,285,700 6,677,600 3,869,900 10,547,500 SL 2 13,658,100 18,825,400 32,483,500 7,017,600 3,881,700 10,899,300 NOG eh 14,142,500 19,194,000 33,336,500 6,967,200 3,088,300 10,055,500 HSE. 12,609,200 24,660,800 37,270,000 6,074,700 3,259,700 9,334,400 DST 10,970,900 22,627,400 33,598,300 5,895,500 5,492,400 11,387,900 OR 5a 9,394,200 22,166,100 31,560,300 5,418,700 4,814,000 10,232,700 TERY) oo Here 10,819,200 19,559,300 30,378,500 6,132,000 4,281,200 10,413,200 NE reste, 11,117,000 20,637,600 31,754,600 6,264,200 4,674,200 10,938,400 WOON Rr 10,145,900 22,224,000 32,369,900 6,435,200 5,020,300 11,455,500 NGO wens oe ? 2,718,800 | ? 23,544,500 | ? 26,263,300 ? 1,575,800 ? 5,140,500 26,716,300 | Modes of Fishing Trawl Fishing 8. England Information with regard to the fisheries of England is contained, not only in the official publications showing the statistical data, but also in various reports of parliamentary subcommittees and commissions. The statistical data, indeed, have many shortcomings, up to 1902 at least, so that conclusions regarding them have to be tempered by the contents of these various reports. Further, these official publications deal only with certain aspects of the fisheries, so that to be conversant with the whole, one has further to consult special works. This want of coordination, which is probably due to the lack of a definite depart- ment of fisheries in England previous to 1903, makes it difficult to gain a connected account of the English fisheries at the present time. The English modes of fishing are described by Holdsworth in the report of 1866 and in the work cited, of 1874. Except in one important regard, the methods are essentially the same now as in those days. They may be arranged as follows: I. Trawl nets IV. Sean or seine nets II. Lines V. Trammel and set nets III. Drift nets VI. Bag nets As the last three, the seine, trammel and bag nets, belong to the coastal or estuarine fishing and are of comparatively very small importance, they need only be mentioned here. Separate statistics of the quantities taken by them, of the species with which we are here chiefly concerned, viz. the plaice, sole etc. do not exist, at least, have not been published. The most important method of fishing, when Holdsworth prepared his account of the fisheries of Great Britain, was the trawling — just as it is now. At that time, however, the beam-trawl — which was employed in England in the 14 century — was the only Official Publications: Report of the Commissioners. 1866. Report from the Select Committee on Sea Fisheries. 1893. Report on the Sea Fisheries Bill. 1900. Report on the System of collecting Fishery Statistics. 1902. Annual Report of Inspectors. Vol. I, 1886 et seq. Statistical Tables and Memorandum relating to the Sea Fisheries of the United Kingdom. 1886 (1887) et seq. Report, Sea Fisheries Bill (H.L.). 1904. Works of Reference: Hozpsworra, E. W.H.: Deep-Sea Fishing and Fishing Boats. 1874. Hout, E.W.L.H.: Examination of the Grimsby Trawl Fishery. Jour. M.B. A. III. 1895. CunnineHam, J.T.: Marketable Marine Fishes. 1896. AN = APPENDIX J: ENGLAND one in use amongst professional fishermen, the otter-trawl being used by amateurs. The shape of the opening in these two nets is very different, but the size of mesh and the structure of the net are essentially the same in both. Near the opening, the size of mesh is 3 inches (7-6 em.) from knot to knot, or 9 square inches (58 sq. cm.) in area. At the closed end or cod, it is 11/2 inches from knot to knot or 21/4 square inches (145 sq. cm.) in area. The smaller beam-trawls have a slightly smaller mesh. Deep-sea fishing with the beam-trawl as now used, seems to have begun in England during the 18 century, but it was not until the beginning of last century, that the great fishing-grounds of the North Sea began to be exploited, and that by the trawlers from Brixham on the south coast of England. The development of trawling on the east coast may be divided into three periods. During the first period, embracing the first to the third quarter of last century, the fishing was carried on entirely by sailing smacks and the principal advances were then made. The fishing ports of Lowestoft, Yarmouth, Grimsby and Hull became great trawling centres at that time, in the case of Grimsby from practically nothing. Although used by the liners for some years previously, Grimsby became a regular port for trawlers in 1858 only. In 1872, there were 248 trawlers fishing from it, all of the largest type; and in that year, about a 1000 sailing trawlers in all were regularly fishing in the North Sea from the east coast ports. The second period saw the introduction of steam as propelling power. The exact date at which it was first employed for trawlers, seems uncertain. It was used for many years previously on the liners (about 1860), but in 1874, according to Holdsworth, its value for trawling had still to be proved. The expense of working steamers was the chief draw- back, and but few steam-trawlers were at work previous to 1880. In 1883, there were only 181 steam fishing vessels in all England, and many, if not the most of these, were liners. Previous to 1890, the average annual number of steam fishing vessels, trawlers and liners together, was less than 400, whilst the number of sailing smacks, mostly trawlers, exceeded 3000. From 1890 to 1895, however, the annual increase in the number of steam trawlers was about 50, so that they had become fairly established by that time. The sailing trawlers, on the other hand, were decreasing during this period even more rapidly than the steam trawlers increased. The third period in the history of the North Sea trawling began in 1895, when the otter-trawl was first seriously employed in deep-sea fishing. This proved a great success on the steam trawlers within the space of a year, and their numbers now increased annu- ally not by 50 but by a 100 until 1900. The greater efficiency of the otter-trawl in the capture of round fish such as haddock, and for fishing in deeper waters, added to the -other advantages of steam over sail, proved too much for the sailing trawler. In 1893, the number of the first class sailing trawlers was over 2000, in 1902, it was but little more than 800, whilst the steam trawlers increased from 495 to 1,106 in the same period. Line-fishing in England as elsewhere, is one of the oldest forms of fishing, but it does not now play such an important part in supplying the fish of the country as formerly. The North Sea was exploited by the large liners at least a century before the trawlers appeared, Harwich being then the head quarters of the fishing. Welled-smacks, for keeping the fish alive, were first introduced there early in the 18 century. Appendix J 13 Line-Fishing APPENDIX J: ENGLAND Loge Steam was first introduced by the liners about 1860, but the number of steam-liners has never been very great. In 1893 there were 56, in 1902, 67. In addition to the steam-liners, there is a considerable number of sailing smacks engaged in lining, either with hand-lines or long-lines. Unfortunately, the English statistics do not separate liners from trawlers, so that one has no accurate data concerning their relative importance in supplying the fish of the country, but, judging from the relative numbers fishing, the quantities landed by the liners now form less than 10 °%0 of those landed by the trawlers. Whether the line fishing is decreasing or not, cannot be learnt from these statistics. DEES EVES The drift-net fishing is second in importance only to the trawling, and during recent years, has increased enormously owing to the great development of the autumn herring j fishery on the east coast. In former times, there was also a considerable spring and mid- summer fishing in the southern parts of the North Sea and, though of very little impor- tance, it is still carried on. | Other drift-net fisheries of importance are carried on in the English Channel, chiefly ‘4 at its western end on the coast of Cornwall. The mackerel is the chief species there, but herring are also taken during the winter, and pilchards in late summer and autumn. The progress of the drift-net fishing within recent times may be judged from the increase in the number of steam-drifters, i.e. steamers specially engaged in drift-net fishing. For 1894, no mention is made of these in the Inspectors Annual Report, in 1902, there were over 150 engaged on the east coast alone. Food-Fishes The principal species in point of value are the haddock, herring and plaice. ‘These three species together constitute over 50% of the quantity and value of all the fish landed by the English fishing boats. Next in order come the cod, sole, mackerel, halibut, hake, turbot, skates and rays, whiting, lemon soles, ling etc. (See Table LXIV). Fishing Grounds The separate grounds, which have received names from the fishermen of England, are almost as numerous as the ports from which they sail. The North Sea and English Channel have been explored from one end to the other and very little trawlable ground in these waters, is now left untouched throughout the year. In the earlier days of trawling, it was possible to signal out the Terschelling and Borkum Flats, the Leman Shoal, the Pits and south-west corner of the Dogger etc. as special grounds to be visited at certain seasons, but the constant fishing of later years has had the effect of depressing great reputations and of making a more common level everywhere. Fish tend to congregate together, at seasons and on particular grounds, just as they use to do, but nowadays they are more sought for before they get to those grounds. Since the otter-trawl was introduced, trawling has been regularly carried on to the northward right to the 100 fathom line, and in more recent years, southward in the Bay of Biscay and even on the coast of Portugal. In the west, the Irish coasts have been more or less explored, and likewise the slopes of the Atlantic further to the north as far. as Rockall. The Feroes and Iceland were known to the line-fishermen long before the trawlers and a considerable amount of fishing is still carried on at. both places. Unfortunately, the statistics up to 1902, make no distinction between the different fishing-grounds inside or outside the North Sea, so that no information is as yet to hand concerning their relative importance. SS tani ee APPENDIX J: ENGLAND Statistics The statistics of the fisheries in England and Wales, began to be collected systematic- ally for the first time in 1885. The statistics have appeared in the “Statistical Tables and Memorandum etc.” sent out by the Board of Trade, the first of these annual reports appearing in 1887. In this report of 1887, it is stated, that the statistics then published are “believed to be the first tolerably complete statement as to the value of English Fisheries”. This statment shows: firstly, the total quantity and value of the fish returned as landed on the English and Welsh coasts; secondly, the total quantity and value returned for the east, south and west coasts respectively; thirdly, the quantities and values from these coasts during each month of the year; and fourthly, the total quantities landed at each port or district in England and Wales. In the reports for 1887 and 1888, the following species are distinguished: Turbot Haddock Soles Mackerel Prime Fish, not separately distinguished Herrings Salmon Pilchards Cod Sprat Ling All other, except shell fish. In a note appended to the 1887 Tables (p. 12), it is stated, that “Prime Fish, not separately distinguished, includes turbot, sole, plaice, whiting and haddock.” In the Tables for 1888, plaice are distinguished for the first time. In the Tables for 1890, brill is added to the prime fish, and halibut to the others. In those for 1891, the salmon is omitted and the hake added. From that time on to the report for 1901, these tables remained the same. In the Tables for 1902, the number of species was increased from 13 to 19, conger eels, dabs, gurnards, lemon soles, skates and rays, and whiting, being added. Further changes have been introduced in the Tables for 1903, but these will be discussed later. The method of collecting the fishery statistics in England and Wales, is stated in the Report of the “Committee on Fishery Statistics’ 1902 (p. VI). Coastguard Officers were employed mostly, also officers of the Board of Trade, officers of Customs and in some cases private individuals. From the statements made before this Committee it appears, that the record of fish landed could only be regarded as approximate, and this more parti- cularly at the important ports of Hull and Grimsby. In 1902, however, additional collec- tors were appointed to these ports, and improvements made at the other chief centres on the east coast. The results of these changes will be discussed later. The responsibility for the fisheries data rests, therefore, on the officials mentioned, who have now to send in their returns each month to the Board of Agriculture and Fisheries. In addition to the data with regard to the quantities and value of fish landed, the “Statistical Tables”, as the years went on, began to publish information on the number of boats and men employed in England and Wales. This information, however, made no distinction between steamers and sailing boats, or between the different modes of fishing. For that, we must turn to the Annual Reports of the Inspectors. Since 1899, each of the latter has contained a summary of the boats fishing, with their tonnage, and distinguishing between steamers and sailing boats, trawlers and other boats. It is thus possible to follow Lo Prime Fish APPENDIX J: ENGLAND 220400 == the increase of steam-trawling, but as the quantities landed by trawlers, drifters and liners have not been distinguished in the Statistical Tables previous to 1903, the utility of this information is limited. These same Reports, during recent years, have contained valuable discussions on fisheries, data relative to the question of overfishing etc. Reference will be made later to the position taken up in them, but attention may be drawn here to the tables and diagram in the XV Annual Report for 1900. These show the annual quantities of fish landed at: (1) Hull, Grimsby and Boston, (2) North Shields, Sunderland, Hartlepool, Scarborough, Yarmouth, Lowestoft and Ramsgate. sa If is stated, that (1) are the ports at which practically all the fish from places out of the North Sea are landed, and that (2) are the ports supplied from the North Sea; London is omitted in both cases. The nine most important species, as shown in the following table, are considered, and the period chosen extends from 1891 to 1900. It is clearly shown, that the quantities landed at (1) have increased for almost all the species, whilst those landed at (2) have on the whole decreased or remained stationary. This is the nearest approach, yet attained, to accurate data concerning whether there has or has not been a decrease of the fish supply in the North Sea. It is unsatisfactory, however, apart from minor difficulties, in that the quantities landed at (1) include the quantities landed from the North Sea as well as those from other grounds. The majority of the Hull and Grimsby trawlers still fish in the North Sea, and the increase in the quantities landed there, may be due in part to the increased centralisation of the fishing to these ports. General information from the statistics The information to be gained from the English statistics might be of the greatest value, scientifically as well as practically, owing to the enormous quantities of all species which are landed month by month and year by year. It is not too much to say, that the English statistics practically dominate all conclusions which may be formed with regard to the fisheries of the North Sea, though errors might arise if the statistics of other countries were omitted. In the following tables, the quantites landed on the east coast are given separately, then the totals for all England. The years considered are divided into quinquennial periods and only the averages for those periods, up to 1900, are stated. This is inconvenient for some things, but has the advantage that one is not tempted to lay more stress on the figures than they will bear. The period 1886—1890 is the one for which the statistics are most unreliable and should indeed, except for one or two species, as herring and mackerel, be omitted. ‘The species recorded were few in number, and the brill, halibut and plaice were not given for all the years, Consequently, the species grouped under “fish not separately distinguished” were somewhat numerous as well as mixed in character. Thus, “prime fish not separately distinguished” contained brill, sole, turbot, cod, had- dock ete., i.e. considerable quantities of the most valuable fish remained undistinguished. Improvement was made during this period, and from 1890 — when the brill was first separately distinguished — on to 1901, the uniformity of the figures for brill, soles and — 101 — APPENDIX J: ENGLAND Table LXIV. Quautities of Fish landed in England, in cwts, (1 ewt. = 112 Ibs. = 50'8 kg.) East Coast 1886—90 1891—95 | 1896—1900 1901 1902 Brill (Rhombus laevis) ............. 11,746! 14,479 12,754 10,741 16,541 Soles (Solea vulgaris) .............. 59,327 59,559 52,499 42,568 35,332 Turbot (Rhombus maximus) ........ 49,376 59,607 53,806 38,461 42,935 Prime Fish not separately distinguished 127,855 28,999 35,454 : 19,379 9,287 Cod (Gadus morrhua).............. 251,027 355,946 470,506 533,413 1,048,324 Haddock (Gadus aeglefinus)......... 1,492,698 2,012,876 2,499,544 2,318,161 1,990,461 Hake (Merluccius vulgaris) ......... 12,765 11,276 15,375 44,239 Halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris) ..... 95,247} 94,122 117,093 101,999 124,502 Herrings (Clupea harengus)......... 1,556,603 1,253,126 1,793,091 2,262,287 3,332,104 Ling (Molva vulgaris).............. 59,278 80,142 64,748 63,800 89,206 Mackerel (Scomber scomber)......... 27,414 47,913 71,226 33,701 28,317 Plaice (Plewronectes platessa) ....... 565,377! 694,357 663,789 791,428 1,212,597 Sprats (Clupea sprattus)............ 87,257 52,055 39,152 23,515 27,005 Fish not separately distinguished,jexcept PS HG MI DEINER RER 1,056,313 599,252 667,349 769,609 800,454 Total 5,439,518 5,365,198 6,522,287 7,024,497 8,801,904 All Coasts TEL re PRE 15,403! 18,098 19,766 17,583 23,624 SOEBEN SEEN 80,438 80,219 80,039 76,385 72,562 AIG ze RE Rene 56,702 69,502 69,156 52,801 57,348 Prime Fish not separately distinguished 136,406 35,954 36,416 19,379 9,287 COL LES EL SN AS Yee ating aie 6 282,926 414,503 545,585 572,414 1,083,318 TREX WG eo dole a ee See 1,497,929 2,042,038 2,569,594 2,353,468 2,034,169 EN RE AS 151,963 221,277 268,134 314,864 BENANNTE 95,305! 94,755 118,957 102,977 126,079 HIGHER. 3 a Stele ete oe Renee ae eee 1,712,515 1,420,283 1,967,745 2,452,848 3,482,736 ILE n\n 0 0 88 SELS AN SERRE 78,129 104,070 104,031 98,192 128,589 MA CROIENT EAN RAS, ne 345,413 372,950 414,161 367,659 386,516 Pilchards (Clupea pilchardus) ....... 148,649 91,212 102,175 91,025 112,424 BICOL meres ER AR NT aa: 638,342} 779,598 737,535 848,188 1,276,637 CNE a de ee NO NE eee 103,255 66,312 66,322 41,186 41,068 Fish not separately distinguished, except STORES Goals des me ne CA. 1,413,710 922,137 1,105,198 1,285,566 1,330,188 Total 6,605,122 6,663,594 8,157,957 8,647,805 | 10,479,409 1 The averages for these species are not for the whole period 1886—1890. Thus, brill and halibut are for one year only, 1890; plaice for the three years, 1888, 89 and 90. - APPENDIX J: ENGLAND ae a Table LXV. Vaule of Fish landed in England, in pounds sterling (£1 = 20 shillings = 20 marks) . East Coast | i 1886 —90 1891—95 | 1896—1900 1901 1902 | Br RUE site ANA A TES 28,777! 36,877 34,730 33,499 42,202 SOlBSEER. N. Le eue PEL TENUE 303,863 405,973 389,785 338,111 252,631 _ Turbot TN AL ER a ee eee 155,186 221,985 207,196 173,432 169,105 Other Prime Bisher... 229,188 66,117 103,981 61,532 20,033 OO N EE nee 170,855 232,544 327,534 407,389 602,436 Haddoclke:¥'s. ch A cas NEON 597,992 1,023,039 1,461,548 1,674,501 1,234,357 Hakensssc LEONE N NN 9,690 11,939 18,040 35,347 Halibute se ee = cies ee 143,003! 176,855 203,529 190,982 248,897 Herring: (71. ce nthe re TRUE 415,431 380,984 561,449 814,805 1,037,057 B BT aoc Som ey ee EEE 40,510 53,699 43,397 46,066 51,611 Mackorel 52h: afk asthe. ees ene 18,763 35,192 53,387 32,238 28,307 — Place Ase lye a eee 524,935. 696,040 787,350 861,400 955,551 Sprate tetraacetate Me AR nea EEE 8,600 6,021 71,683 5,581 6,374 Other: HISN LC rer ENT 792,632 433,120 485,111 580,133 474,572 Shell! Wish chy a ERREUR 224,088 215,561 238,861 209,003 199,952 Total... 3,651,823 3,993,697 4,917,480 5,446,712 5,358,432 : All Coasts Billie ee RA ee ne | 36,928! 45,945 53,369 51,219 60,491 SOEBEN; iS Ne NR ee ay eG 417,170 532,362 566,328 560,859 496,294 Turbot. ek sae eee ee ae 182,006 259,075 264,284 228,995 221,485 Other Prime Fish .................. 266,498 97,656 107,517 61,532 20,033 Cod RAR SR GES 196,037 273,632 378,261 437,940 631,871 Haddock nie re 599,770 1,039,236 1,499,891 1,699,723 1,263,768 Hake:..... 200. a eae 102,270 161,881 195,979 233,972 Halibut? 4, = era. ete oar eee 143,075! 178,151 207,524 193,494 — 252,722, Horrings oo LRU Sane sek eee 468,437 437,928 615,237 892,637 |- 1,094,963 Lin gee acne EEE. de 54,101 68,574 63,535 64,322 72,421 Mackerel. 4, .los un Ken So 243,310 330,177 285,793 263,008 286,958 | : PICHATAE nu. UE SERRES 30,965 23,150 22,221 24,304 33,429 N PAGE: ne N RENNES 583,803! 772,302 870,774 934,474 1,034,482 É Sprats PARTS re ae AMEN 12,308 10,376 14,211 11,472 10,889 © Other Wish): sa.4 cee eee 1,014,416 640,780 779,105 903,565 783,108 — Shell: Fish. Keen. ER ee ee 307,308 339,255 360,692 324,669 319,489 Total... || 4,556,632 5,150,869 6,250,623 6,848,192 6,816,375 1 The averages for these species are not for the whole period 1886—1890. Thus, brill and turbot are or one year only, 1890; plaice for the three years, 1888, 89 and 90. ie we APPENDIX J: ENGLAND turbot seems a sign of their general accuracy. The great fall, in 1901 and 1902, of the quantities for the east coast under “prime fish not separately distinguished” would imply, however, some uncertainty with regard to the returns of prime fish for previous years. It is possible, that is to say, that the quantities of prime fish were really greater in those years than recorded, and in any case, it does not seem probable than they were any less. With regard to the species other than “prime” i. e. the “offal”, it has first to be re- marked, that the separate enumeration of the plaice began in 1888 and of the halibut in 1890. Consequently, the quantities given under “other fish” are very large during the period 1886—1890. Even when these two species and the hake were separately distinguished, the quantities of “other fish” still remained considerable and greatly increased up to 1901. During 1902, further species were separated out from this group, viz. conger-eels, dabs, gurnards, lemon soles, skates and rays, and whiting. For the sake of comparison, the quantities and values of these species, for 1902, have been still retained with “not disting- uished fish” in Tables LXIV and LXV, but separated out, they are as follows: Table LXVI. Quantities (in cwts.) and values (in £) of the named species, landed in England during 1902 East coast All coasts | Quantity Value Quantity . Value Conger Hels. 2 4 Re... 1,685 1,972 48,871 38,204 DDR ne ren ese dite 71,867 33,158 86,557 41,864 CRTATASR Er cote 42,356 14,181 91,012 31,366 Lemon soles .................. 36,498 . 86,792 41,575 94,112 Skates and Rays .............. 135,818 66,711 286,652 140,220 ae 160,711 60,800 231,187 97,979 Total... 448,935 263,614 785,854 443,745 Fish not separately distinguished 351,519 210,958 544,334 339,363 The species not yet distinguished, form still a very important portion of the returns, their value in 1902 coming sixth in the list between the sole and mackerel. The names of these species are not given, but the most important are probably the witches and megrims. These are deep-sea species, and, as Fulton has pointed out with regard to the Scottish trawlers (see page 115), trawling has spread out so much into the deeper waters within the last few years, that the quantities of these species now landed have an appreciable effect on the returns. This would apply more especially to the east coast. The returns for the species distinguished also show signs of the greater area over which trawling has gradually spread. | The quantities landed of the cod and plaice, have increased enormously and this increase may be ascribed chiefly to the fishing at the Færoes and Iceland, but in great part also to the increased amount of fishing in the nothern parts of the North Sea. The in- crease in the take of halibut may be due in part to the same cause, but the liners more than the trawlers are responsible for this species. On the other hand, the increase in the quantities of hake within the later years, and of the cod in part, is due to the spread of fishing southwards to the Bay of Biscay and to the west coast generally. “Offal” Value Average price of fish APPENDIX J: ENGLAND 1 — The decrease in the quantities of haddock landed in 1901 and 1902 is noteworthy. The most marked increase is that displayed by the herring, and this increase has been entirely on the east coast. It may be mentioned here, that the greater portion of the increased landings of herrings within recent years, has been due to the fishing of the Scot- tish boats in English waters (see p. 120). The other species captured by drift-nets, viz mackerel and pilchards, are not taken in any quantity on the east coast. They are mostly taken on the south coast at the mouth of the English Channel. The values of the fish landed show the same tendencies as the quantities. On the east coast, the prime fish, sole and turbot, but not the brill, show a decrease in value. Taking all coasts the decrease is not apparent, for the reason that the values of all three species, like the quantities, have greatly increased on the south and west coasts. With regard to the remaining species, the tables show a general increase and for almost all the species. For 1902, the value of some of the species, and more particularly of the haddock, is somewhat less than for previous years, but if we take 190i and 1902 together, the increase is maintained. Of the separate species, the cod, herring and plaice show the greatest increase. The shell fish, whose total value is given in the table, are crabs ca. 20 °/,, lobsters ca. 9 °/,, oysters ca. 40 %,, other shell fish, including shrimps, cockles, mussels, periwinkles, escallops etc. ca. 30°/, of the total amount. The crabs (Cancer pagurus) and oysters are mostly taken on the east coast, the lobsters (Palinurus und Homarus), mostly on the south and west coast. The value of fish depends, of course, on the average price, and some interesting points are displayed by an examination of the average prices paid in England since the statistics began. ‘The data for the earlier period, from 1886—1900, are uncertain in some details, as already shown, but the probability is that the average for all the fish together is fairly accurate. It thus appears, that the average price for all fish increased slightly during the period 1886—1895, but has remained practically constant since that time. There has been a decrease in 1902. This constancy of the average price has accompanied a very great increase (over 50 °/,) in the total quantities landed in the country. It would therefore appear, that the supply of fish has, on the whole, just kept pace with an increasing demand. When we remember, that the quantities of the more valuable “prime” fish have not increased, we should almost expect that their average price had increased. As a matter of fact, this expectation is only partially realised. The average price of all three species has increased gradually up to a certain point, thereafter it has become more constant. The following figures will show this more closely. Table LXVII. Average price (in pence pr. 1b.) of brill, sole & turbot in England, since 1898 1898 | 1899 | 1900 | 1901 | 1902 u Brill: Year Horn. 6597| 595 | 5:82 | 624 | 549 Soles el A 15:28 | 15:44 | 1615 | 1573 | 14:66 Türbot er eee ames 8.27 | 8:51 | 892 | 9:29 | 8:28 Other prime fish ........... 574 | 597 | 7:46 | 6:80 4:62 — 105 — APPENDIX J: ENGLAND Table LXVII Average Price of Fish landed in England, In pence per pound (Lb.) 1886—90 | 1891—95 /1896—1900) 1901 1902 All Fish together, excluding | BREIIENNE a ee 1:32 1:55 1:55 1:62 1:33 JT ETES E NET MESA 5 5:13 543 5:78 6:24 5:49 SD CES net. 11-11 14:22 15:16 15:73 14-66 RU D OUR sates ee 6:88 7:99 8:18 9:29 8:28 Other Prime Fish .......... 4:19 5:82 6:33 6:80 4:62 (Ve EHRE 1:49 1:42 1:49 1:64 1:26 add OCR ar woman ee 0:86 1:09 1:25 1:55 1:33 aka pesos atelier iadiasaees ke 1:45 1:57 1:57 1:59 AN OU ER part essen: 3:22 4:03 374 4:03 4:29 Here ee: 0:59 0:66 0:67 0:78 0:67 IRS A Os ne eee eee 1:49 1-41 1:31 1:40 1:21 Mackerel ren: Bit | SO) 1:48 1:53 1:59 IBICHAT ASE sa erde 0:45 054 | 0:37 0:57 0:64 JA ee N RS 1:96 2:02 2:53 2:36 1:74 Other IN ak a 1:54 149 | 1-61 1:50 1:02 ÉD ER ER EN RES 0:26 0:34. 0:46 0:60 0:67 It would seem, therefore, as if the demand in England for this class of fish at such prices, had reached its maximum. That the supply of fish on the market has only in part to do with the prices, is seen from a comparison of the prices paid for the sole and other prime fish in 1901 and 1902. As the quantities landed were considerably less in 1902, we should have expected the average price to be greater, instead of which it is distinctly less. It may be mentioned also, that a cessation in the increase of steam traw- lers occurred at the same time as the cessation of the upward tendency in the average prices. With regard to the commoner fish, there has been a general upward tendency in the prices until the year 190%, when a great fall occurred for all the principal species, namely, cod, haddock, herring and plaice. The greatly increased landings would account for the fall in the case of the first and last, but as the quantities of haddock had considerably decreased in 1902, the decline in the average price here must be due to other causes — perhaps the increased quantities of other species on the market, perhaps to poorer quality. The increase in the average prices previous to 1901, would seem to be due to a greatly increased demand. This is fairly clear in the case of almost all species, but more especially for the cod, haddock, herring and plaice. The increase in the quantities landed has been accompanied by an increase in the average price. It is remarkable, however, that the price of plaice in 1902 was lower than in any year since statistics began to be collected with regard to it, simply because the quantities landed in that year were greater than in any previous year. The English statistics furnish data also, with regard to the quantities taken during each month of the year. In the Memorandum published as introduction to the Statistical Tables for 1902, p. 12, a table is given showing the average value, over a period of years, of the quantities landed on the east coast of England during each month of the year. The Appendix J 14 Monthly Statistics Boats APPENDIX J: ENGLAND 27 irregularities. already referred to, prevent the subjoined table of the average monthly quan- tities over the period from 1890-1902 being of the great scientific value it might be, but, even as it stands, it is a good example of the form in which statistics might be published. The statistics for most of the species are confused, because other areas, e. g. Iceland, Feroes and the Bay of Biscay, are also represented to a great extent, but in the case of the herring and mackerel, such a table shows unmistakeably when these species are most abundant on the east coast of England. Table LXIX. Average monthly quantities of fish landed on the east coast of England during the years 1890—1902 (in ewts.) a H a |e 3 | 2 | aa & 5 a = 2 5 2 4 A a los (ie & | Aa = es = q | = = = 4 2 =) Z a | Br 1,127| 1,060) 1,0111 1,009| 1,088) 1,210) 1,2101 1,179| 1,098) 1,198] 1,242] 1,088 Soles....... 5,3391 4,347, 3,716) 3,327| 4,555) 4,905} 4,599) 4,537) 4,342) 4,375) 4,454| 4,380 Turbot ..... 3,952| 3,529| 3,560! 3,8531 4,803] 5,237| 4,808] 4,886] 4,598 4,707! 4,704) 4,371 Co 30,464| 36,325| 51,900| 51,394| 41,845| 35,443| 33,630| 32,048| 33,494) 37,133| 39,578| 38,104 Haddock.... || 187,171/173,917/177,517|161,938|176,491|269,471 168,145 189,043 199,868|200,6581195,866[188,37& Hake....... 532| 470) 5451 5071 1,022) 1,597) 2,477] 2,409| 1,669) 1,454) 1,3751 956 Halibut..... 1,634 2,965) 6,277| 10,154| 12,996] 14,788| 17,734| 14,707 10,728| 6,696| 5048| 2,269 Herrings ... 574| 1,597) 8,033| 12,961, 11,108) 33,321] 70,327|236,004 261,8831464,3221505,222| 89,561 ee 4,545! 5,736) 7,373! 7,869} 6,639! 6,499) 6,266) 5,990) 6,068! 6,055) 5,313! 4,792 Mackerel... | — ZA = 32) 2,133| 3,895] 2109 199 13,339] 24,113| 4,773) 72 Plaice...... 44,783] 45,246 49,641! 63,249) 72,300) 70,747) 64,072} 64,822 62,185} 69,14] | 64,369) 48,161 — Sprats gr 14,509| 5,674; 2,655 80) — — — _ = 332| 6,712) 15,336 Total... 351,196 336,394 374,803|374,781/399,029|402,976/430,713|613,340|660,679|377,089)896,688|449,409 Information with regard to the English fishing boats is somewhat imperfect. The principal data are published in the “Annual Statement of the Navigation and Shipping of the United Kingdom”, but only the number of registered boats is given there, and up to 1902, a very large number of small boats did not require to be registered. In comparing the number of boats over a period of years, as in the annexed table, only the first and second class are therefore considered. The details with regard to tonnage and the number of boats have been obtained from the XVII Annual Report of Inspectors, and it appears that information is not readily available for other years than those mentioned. If we compare the columns showing the number of sailing-vessels and the number of steamers, we see that the steamers have steadily and rapidly increased with the decrease in the sailing vessels. The decrease is due, mostly, to the decline of the first-class sailing trawlers; in 1893, there were over 2000 of these, of 116,971 tons, in 1902, there were about 800 of 32,286 tons. This decrease in tonnage is not counterbalanced by the inerease of steamers, as the tonnage of these has only gone from 19,030 to 61,631. In 1902, the number of steam trawlers was 1096, in 1893, 480. The steamers include liners and drifters etc. besides trawlers, and the increase in the total number since 1900 has been entirely due to the former. ME yee APPENDIX J: ENGLAND It may be remarked, that “other nets” probably mean drifters or herring boats. “Various” refers to the boats engaged in dredging or in a variety of employments, as trawling, lines etc. It is worthy of remark, that the second-class boats have varied but little in the years mentioned. The average net tonnage of the steam-trawlers has increased since 1893 from 39:6 to 56-3, but that of the sailing trawlers has decreased from 57:4 to 40:0. As no distinction is made in the English statistics of fish caught by trawl, line and drift net, it is impossible to estimate the earnings of the various classes of boats. Table LXX. Table showing the number and nature of employment of the first class (i.e. 15 tons and upwards) and second class (less than 15 tons, navigated otherwise than by oars only) fishing-boats in England, in 1893, 1899, 1900, 1901 and 1902 a Steam Vessels 1893 1899 1900 1901 1902 1st class |2nd elass|| 1st class |2nd class|| 1st class |2nd class || 1st class |2nd class | Ist class | 2nd class Trawling. ... 480 il 1009 1 1104 1096 1096 Other nets .. 4 1 16 47 105 177 Whines’. ...- =: 56 67 6 63 1 70 1 67 Various..... 21 24 1 WA 6 24 7 26 8 Not employed 3 5 3 10 3 5 1 7 3 Total. . : 564 2 1121 11 1241 10 1300 9 1373 11 b. Sailing Vessels 1893 1899 1900 1901 1902 Ist class |2nd elass | 1st class |2nd elass|| Ist class |2nd elass|| 1st class |2nd class| 1st class | 2nd class Trawling... 2037 789 1134 503 925 452 820 368 807 520 Other nets .. 667 744 659 520 613 405 588 422 572 479 lines rene 185 967 62% 826 47 782 59 726 44 755 Various..... 280 1459 264 2023 274 2135 264 2220 260 2195 Not employed 101 140 76 117 76 175 62 126 68 187 Total... 3270 4099 2195 3989 1935 3949 1793 3862 1751 4136 Table LXXI. Tonnage of the first-class boats engaged In trawling (net-tonnage) Steam Sailing Total Yoar Average Average ions Tonnage Tons Tonnage Tons UGE. Sao 59 19,030 39:6 116,971 57-4 136,001 ISEB) oo nase 54,063 53:5 50,814 44:8 104,877 LOOO PEN 60,706 54-9 38,033 41-1 98,739 A NOL ep 60,742, 65:4 33,257 40:5 93,999 NEN once 61,731 56°3 32,236 40:0 94,017 ‘ 14* 9. Scotland The modern period of the Scottish fishery statistics, and therewith, of the Scottish fisheries, may be said to have begun in the year 1882, when the new Fishery Board was constituted and empowered to take cognisance amongst other things of “the Coast and Deep Sea Fisheries of Scotland”. Previous to that year, there had been a similar Board, with a similar constitution that is, which had had its origion as far back as 1809, but its duties, so far as statistics were concerned, were restricted to one branch of the fisheries, namely, of the “cured” fish. The species taken account of were: herring, cod, ling and hake, and of these only the quantities cured; statistics of the fresh fish or of the quantities landed had not been undertaken. It was only after some years also (1885), that the new Board was able to begin the publication of statistics dealing with the quantities of fish actually landed, and it was not until 1889, that the herring, cod etc. i.e. the cured fish, were brought under the same system. With regard to the fisheries, this same period. between 1880 and 1890, marked the beginning of a long struggle between liners and trawlers. Previous to 1882, beam-traw- ling had been carried on for several years in the Moray Firth by a few sailing smacks, and for a still longer period in the Clyde, but steam trawlers from England had but recently begun operations. The great majority of the boats were then small, under 30 feet, many of them undecked, and the common methods of fishing were long-lines or hand- lines for the cod, ling, plaice etc. and drift-nets for herring. The fishing was carried on, consequently, near the land for the most part, though some of the larger boats went regu- larly as far as Iceland in the north and occasionally to Rockall in the west. With the appearance of the steam-trawler — the sailing trawler does not seem. to have been a success in Scottish waters — the Scottish fisheries began the modern period, and the twenty years which followed 1882, saw a constant increase in the numbers of steam trawlers and in the quantity and value of the fish landed by them, whilst the same years saw, on the other hand, the gradual decline of the line-fishing. It was not until 1899 and 1900, however, that trawling finally showed itself to be the principal Official Publications: Annual Reports of the Fishery Board for Scotland, 1882 (1883) et seq. Work of Reference: Me. Inrosu, W.C., “The Resources of the Sea”, 1899. Fuuron, T. W.: “North Sea Investigations” ete. Scot. Fish. Board Reports, XX, XXI & XXII for the years 1901, 1902 & 1903. > ~~ 2 Es ee ee. ee A re à. eee eee en me — 109 — APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND method of fishing on which Scotland could rely for fresh fish. It may be said also, that the struggle for supremacy was practically given up by the liners themselves, who found it more profitable to pursue the herring fishery more vigorously than in previous years, and thus reduced the attention the line-fishing had formerly received. The herring fishery has always been, and still is, the most valuable of all the Scottish fisheries, and it is of significance, that the expansion of the trawling and the herring fishery have gone on hand in hand, at the expense in many cases of the line-fishery. The number of boats has certainly decreased, but the total tonnage and consequently the average tonnage has increased. This means that the boats are much larger and, judging from the greatly increased capital, much better equipped. Where formerly the coastal fisheries were almost the only fisheries, nowadays the principal fishing, whether by drift- net or trawl, is in the open waters of the deep sea. The chief modes of fishing are thus: drift-nets, trawl and lines. Of the two forms of trawl, the otter-trawl, which was introduced in 1895—96, and is of the same form and size of mesh as that used in England, is practically the only one employed at the present time. In the Solway Firth on the west coast, a number of sailing boats employ the beam- trawl, but both the boats and the trawls (mostly, if not all shrimp-trawls) are of a small type, and the quantities they bring in are insignificant in comparison with those landed by the steam-trawlers using the otter-trawl. The advance in the trawling industry, has taken place almost entirely on the east coast and is associated with Aberdeen, which, being nearer the northern fishing grounds, has a great advantage over the southern ports. With regard to the line-fishing, hand-lines are still employed to a considerable extent, especially for the flat-fish (halibut), but the long-lines, i. e. lines with many hooks laid along the bottom, are of much greater importance. In former days, this was the chief method of obtaining the fresh fish for the country, and according to the Reports of the Scottish Fishery Board, which follow closely from year to year the course of the fisheries and endeavour to ascertain the causes of their fluctuations, there seems little doubt, but that the line-fishing would be of greater dimensions had the line-fishermen not found the herring-fishery more profitable. On the other hand, the number of steam-liners, 1. e. steamers using lines. has considerably increased of recent years, but this seems to be due to their being employed in the herring fishing with drift-nets as well as in the line- fishing. In addition to the drift-net fishery for herrings, which as stated above, is the most valuable of the Scottish fisheries, various other forms of nets e. g. the seine for the salmon, sprat and (formerly) herring, stake-nets for salmon, stop-nets for sparling, are also em- ployed, but they are of little importance in comparison with the methods mentioned. Of some scientific interest is the recent revival of the gill-net on the east coast. The most important species of food-fishes according to value are, in order: herring, haddock, cod, ling, whiting, plaice, halibut etc. ‘Their relative importance will be ascer- tained from a perusal of the tables appended. As already indicated, the fishing-grounds have completely altered during the past twenty years, and it is only in a very wide sense, that one can say there are definite grounds nowadays. Formerly, the fishing was carried on everywhere round the coast, though mofe especially on the eastern side, and only a few grounds here and there, such as Smith's Bank in the Moray Firth or Ballantrae Bank in the Firth of Clyde, could be Modes of Fishing Food fishes Fishing-grounds APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND — 110 — signalled out as being in their season of special richness. With the advent of the steam- trawler, the grounds regularly fished on were extended out to the 50 fathom line and later, on the appearance of the otter-trawl, to the 100 fathom line. It can only be said, therefore, that the fishing grounds ‘of the Scottish boats lie anywhere within the 100 fathom line round Scotland, the banks round Iceland and the Færoes in the north, and on the west coast, as far as St. Kilda and Rockall. The herring boats pursue the herring in the southern parts of the North Sea, as well as in the waters all round Scotland. Some- times, they take part in the fishery on the Cornish coast in the English Channel, and many boats go each year to Ireland for the herring fishery in the Irish Channel. Statistics The present system of Scottish statistics has been the product of many years’ growth, slowly developing according to the condition of the fisheries and the need of the times. In earlier years, before the new Board was formed, it was considered sufficient to obtain information with regard only to the more important fisheries such as herring, cod ete. of those, namely, which formed the basis of the curing industry and the export trade. These comparatively simple statistics date back nearly a hundred years. For some years before the formation of the new Board, however, the fresh fish trade of Scotland had become of great importance, and the struggle between liners and trawlers had already begun. Definite information with regard to the points in dispute was quite lacking, and it became one of the first duties of the Board, to arrange for the collection of all data relating to the actual quantities of fish landed and the fisheries generally. Statistics of the fresh fish landed in Scotland were first published in the year 1884 for the year 1883. For the first few years, the older and the new systems were published side by side i. e. the statistics with regard to the fish cured were kept distinct from those dealing with the fresh fish. In 1889, however, the division was done away with, and the statistics of all fish caught and landed were included in the same tables. One legacy of the greatest importance for the collection of statistics, left by the previous Fishery Board, was the organisation of selected fisheries officers round the coasts of Scotland, each having a definite district under his supervision. These districts have been maintained as before and number 26, embracing the east and west coast with Shet- land and Orkney. The 26 districts are now grouped together into the three divisions, namely, east coast, west coast and Shetland and Orkney together. By means of these fishery officers and the powers granted it for the control of the fisheries, the Scottish Fishery Board has been able. to bring its statistics to a high standard of scientific value. Changes have been introduced as the years went on, but disregarding these, a brief sketch may be given of the information contained in the tables of the 1902 Report. The various tables are published as Appendixes to Part I of the Report. In Appendix A, the boats, their tonnage, the kind and extent of apparatus used and the values of each and all are given for each district. Thus, the steam-trawlers are distinguished from steam-liners and both from fishing boats employing sails; sailing trawlers are distinguished from steam-trawlers, and boats from England or elsewhere, landing their catches in Scot- land, are also mentioned separately. In a further table, the course of the fishing for the year, number of boats and men etc. are given for each fishing place or creek round Scot- land, the trawling vessels, however, being omitted. SL codes APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND In Appendix B are given the details with regard to the quantity and value of the several species of fish landed in Scotland, the different regions and the different modes of fishing being distinguished, each species and the various methods of cure being mentioned. Details with regard to the herring-trade, its progress during the last century, the amount of quantities exported, and the number of men engaged in the various branches etc. are given in further tables. In addition to the fishery officers, who are responsible for the statistics mentioned, and each of whom furnishes annually a separate report on the fisheries within his district, there are two inspectors, who supervise generally the work of the fishery officers and give general reports annually on the condition of the Scottish fisheries. General information from the statistics The quantities and values of the Scottish fisheries are shown in the following tables. As with the corresponding tables for England, five-yearly periods are considered, though the greater accuracy of the Scottish statistics give the figures for the year a higher value, and make them more worthy of record. The five-yearly periods, however, serve the present purpose. The yearly data for the most important species will be considered in the second portion of this work. A few notes may be made on the various species mentioned in the tables. Statistics of the herrings sold “fresh” began only in 1883. Previous to that time, there were only records of the herring cured. These go back nearly a hundred years, to 1809. From the report for 1902, we find that the number of barrels of herrings, cured annually in Scotland, has increased gradually and regularly from 90,000 during 1810 to over 1,800,000 barrels in 1902 Comparison of the total quantities is difficult, until we come to 1889, when the quan- tities were all given under the same measures, crans or hundred-weights. From that time onwards, it appears from the table, that the total quantities have steadily increased except during the period 1896—1900. With regard to the proportions of herring cured and those used in a fresh condition, it is evident, that this depends from year to year upon many variable factors, such as the condition of the fish, the demand etc. In general, however, only about one-fifth of the quantity landed is used in the fresh state, about 80 per cent. being cured, chiefly for exportation. Within the last few years, the proportion of herring sold fresh has increased. Since 1896, the different periods of the herring fishery have been separately disting- uished in the statistics, into: winter fishery from 1°t Jan. to 31° March; early summer fishery from 15 April to 30% June; and great summer and autumn fishery from 1‘ July to 315t December. Of these, the latter is the most important, having from 60 to 75 % of the total qnantity and value of the entire fishery. The early summer fishery amounts to 15 to 20% and the winter fishery to 5 to 10 %0 of the entire fishery. The winter fishery is pursued on the east and west coasts and is entirely estuarine. ‘The greater part of the early summer fishery is carried on at the Orkney and Shetland Islands and on the west coast. During the third period, from 1“ July to the end of the year, the fishery gradually extends to the south and is prosecuted along the whole east coast from Shetland to the Thames. “Nets’’-fishery Herring — 112 — : SCOTLAND APPENDIX J Table LXXII Quantities of fish landed in Scotland, in cwts. (1 cwt. = 112 lbs. Eng. = 50°8 kilograms) __———eeaeaGQQVQQQuuQCQC0370Qeeeeeeeeee iJ East coast with Orkneys and Shetlands All Coasts Species of fish - 1886-90 | 1891-95 1896-1900) 1901 1902 1903 | 1886—90 | 189195 |1896-1900) 1901 1902 1903 Herring (C. harengus) . 3,015,026 3,123,822 | 2,898,617 |3,628,195 |3,940,009 13,566,797 3,849,537 |4,006,145 | 3,671,436 |4,338,635 |4,753,944 | 4,279,485 Mackerel (S. scomber) ..... 223 212 1,654 3,119 785 784 801 2,453 5,347 6,378 6,167 9,681 Sprat (C. sprattus)....... 9,146} 19,460 16,061 | 14,904| 22,064) 60,438 9,223| 19,466 16,181) 14,904) 29,064| 60,438 Sparling (Smelt) (Osmerus eperlanus)........... D 294 335 330 313 182 " 322 393 386 273 231 Cod (G. morrhua). SER -... || 419,827 | 415,871 | 482,787 | 410,984 | 463,098) 503,991) 476,252 462,838| 534,161 | 445,681 | 486,395 | 525,060 Ling (Molva vulgaris)... 88,280) 91,879 92,692 | 122,452) 99,647) 79,171 152,064) 172,099) 140,127) 157,164 | 118,414) 92,670 Tusk (Brosmius brosme) ... 8,861 7,643 8,204) 12,882) 10,531 9,253 10,032 8,868 9,655 |. 14,619) 11,359 9,876 Saithe (Coalfish) (G. vison) 71,283 65,503 67,416 | 60,081) 60,052} 66,338]| 103,217] 90,438) 105,451] 78,501] 77,581 83,651 Haddock (G. aeglefinus). . 735,397 | 759,673 | 808,634) 822,319] 890,161| 985,745 757,572| 789,522) 830,272) 831,071] 900,009 | 1,004,142 Whiting (G. merlangus) ... 66,827| 37,895) 42,361) 115,477 | 138,570} 118,852] 75,133] 47,813) 50,096) 123,339) 149,130] 129,375 Conger Hel (Conger vulgaris) 2,438 2,336 3,975 2,920 2,322 2,113 8,241) 13,337 15,369 |. 16,157) 11,987 9,549 Turbot (R. maximus) ..... 4,424 8,551 5,220 5,144 5,423 8,715 5,296 4,091 5,825 5,523 5,660 8,995 Halibut (H. vulgaris)...... 18,671 | 24,219} 24935) 33,431) 27,152) 28,043] 22,069] 27,226) 27,252] 36,129| 28,7838] 28,892 Lemon Sole(P.microcephalus) 11,956) 18,982| 18,523) 22,425) 25,155) 26,524 12,604) 19,118 18,644 | 22,461) 25,271 26,611 Flounder, Plaice, Brill (P. flesus, P. Du u R.levis) 71,176 | 63,274| 71,340) 112,267) 96,834| 102,022] 84,056| 77,211 84,674 | 122,199 | 105,652| 111,657 Skate (Raja batis). . = 38,659| 38,335) 51,815] 62,186) 64,621] 62,882 52,201) 53,471 71,473 | 81,832] 78,234] 70,989 Others Kindeleesee eae : 87,143 | 71,866) 51,727 | 85,476) 74,852) 68,814 95,653) 80,371 57,749) 90,191 78,105) 67,506 Total... |4,649,337 4,742,815 | 4,646,296 |5,514,592 |5,928,489 |5,685,664 |5,713,951 |5,874,839 | 5,644,105 |6,385,170 |6,866,028 | 6,518,808 Table LXXIM. Value of fish landed in Scotland from 1886—1903, in £sterling (£ 1 = 20 shillings = 20 marks) Herring. Er. ee ... || 543,736) 631,187) 735,702} 829,511 |1,090,129) 992,650 || 771,758| 835,128) 944,069 |1,061,034 |1,360,492 | 1,244,656 Mackerel. . aan 143 153 1,289 2,466 600 454 452 1,548 3,138 4,417 3,127 3,919 Sprat . ee 664 1,894 1,992 4,488 4,935 6,079 666 1,894 2,005 4,488 4,935 6,079 Sparling ‘(Smelt). 32 ‘ " 1,147 1,224 1,163 766 557 u 1,280 1,469 1,452 1,026 746 Coder Dee = ... || 145,088) 151,567 | 190,738 | 199,654) 211,437 | 222,800)! 164,043 | 168,968] 207,772] 212,891) 222,505 | 233,132 NOR eee eee eer : 29,251 | 28,082| 28,666 | 37,216 | 33,609) 27,548 48,507 | 51,999) 42,961) 48.539) 40,657 | 32,567 Te 1,281 1,181 1,406 2,432 2,437 2,105 1,529 1,427 1,746 2,916 2,667 2,257 Saithe (Coalfish).......... : 8,423 7,668 7,029 7,536 9,160} 11,074] 13,437) 11,620] 11,742} 10,640) 12,666 15,006 Haddock ...... RÉ AD 330,353 | 374,266 | 442,361 | 521,958 | 509,568 || 484,557 | 339,071 | 387,812 452,748 527,671 | 515,970)| 493,998 MATINS ee: > 21,810) 15,201 19,527) 38,869| 41,578| 37,779| 27,191) 22,910| 25,061] 44,931) 50,055| 45,912 CONTE EE us. nance 1,433 1,649) , 2,303 1,697 1,542 1,252 4,399 7,077 8,030 6,629 5,929 5,216 Turbot ..... 14,892 | 12,748 16,128 | 19,521| 19,451) 31,693] 15,888| 13,415 16,762 | 20,106| 19,840| 32,081 Halibut 17,257| 25,392| 35,607) 55,896| 45,447) 48.468] 19,095) 27,197 37,032 | 58,295) 47,389) 49,186 Lemon Sole 16,685| 32,641 38,857 | 47,986| 49,261| 53,478]. 17,716| 32,890 |. 39,038) 48,131) 49,704) 53,741 Flounder, Plaice, Brill ... 49,430} 58,220) 80,438) 125,291 | 111,530) 134,601 |! 57,448; 67,299] 90,224) 134,234) 119,060; 142,430 Skatek ences... 5 38 8,861 9,848 15,271) 17,498| 17,463| 17,054| 10,942| 12,089 18,980) 20,910) 20,634 19,206 Other Kinds ...... ee 18,412| 16,382 14,947 | 30,0386] 25,222) 20,211) 21,290] 17,998 16,299| 31,026| 26,012| 21,155 Shell Fish..... Sanne 41,308 | 41,538 |. 40,355) 37,002 36,396 | 36,600!| 68,829| 73,666) 78,729] 81,089 77,951 73,598 Total... {1,249,027 |1,410,566 | 1,673,840 |1,980,220 |2,210,531 |2,128,962 1,582,261 |1,736,217 | 1,997,805 |2,319,399 |2,580,629 | 2,474,885 ‘ 1 J ’ gig oe APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND The west coast fishery during this period is also greater in the southern than in the northern waters, the main fishing taking place in the Firth of Clyde and Loch Fyne. Within recent years, an increasing number of Scottish boats have proceeded to the herring fisheries off the east coast of England, after the close of the Scottish season in the autumn, and to those off the Irish coasts in the spring. It may be said, that at some place or another the Scottish boats are engaged in the herring fishing all the year round. The sprat and sparling fisheries are entirely estuarine and are pursued chiefly on the east coast, only a small proportion, of the sparling, being taken on the west coast. The mackerel, on the other hand, is of greater importance, as a rule, on the west coast than on the east. There is little or no regular fishing for this species, the fish being mostly taken in herring nets. With regard to the remaining species, i.e. the so-called round fish and flat fish, taken as a whole, it is of interest that the Scottish statistics are so arranged, that the different modes of fishing, by lines and trawl, are distinguished. In the introductions to the Reports for 1901 and 1902, a general comparison is made between these different forms of fishing. It is shown, that in general the trawl fishery has greatly increased, whilst the line fishery has decreased. In 1891, the trawl brought in less than one fifth of the catch of the lines, but in 1901 the position was almost reversed, the trawl catching more than double the fines. As the value of the trawled fish, on the whole, has always been much higher than that given for the fish caught by lines, the change of place has been even more conspicuous with regard to values. The decline of the line fishing, however, is not universal. It is most marked in the case of the round fish and most of all for the haddock. The quantities of cod, saithe, - ling and whiting taken by lines have also been decreasing rapidly, but the quantities of tusk and conger eel, which are almost entirely taken by lines, have rather increased. This would indicate that the line-fishing for those species which show a decrease, has not been so much pursued of recent years, and it is stated in the Report that the successful herring-fishery is accountable for this, in great part at any rate. The fishermen who formerly engaged in the line-fishing for cod, haddock etc. now do so to a much less degree. With regard to flat fish, however, it cannot be said that the decrease in the returns of the line-fishing is so apparent. ‘aking all the species together, the quantities landed have “remained very constant since 1891. On the other hand, the quantities of these species landed by the trawlers have almost doubled in the same time. The halibut and skate are mostly taken by the liners, whilst the turbot and the lemon-sole are almost entirely taken by the trawlers. Apart from the herring, the haddock is the most important species for Scotland, con- tributing from 40 to 45 °/o of the total quantity and value of all fish taken by line and trawl. As shown in the table, the quantities taken have greatly increased since 1886, and this increase has been going on since the present system of taking statistics was begun (1883). Of the total quantity of haddock, about 60 %/o is annually consumed in the cured (smoked) state. The codfishery, which comes second to the haddock-fishery, reached a maximum in the years 1896—97, and the lowest minimum for a long period of years in 1900. About Appendix J 15 Sprat, Sparling and Mackerel Trawl and Line Fishery Round Fish Flat Fish Quantities of plaice landed on the east coast of Scotland APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND tar 25 to 30 °/o of the cod landed are cured, i. e., smoked or pickled. A considerable propor- tion of the ling, tusk and saithe are also cured. The species included under “other fish” or ‘unclassified fish” are hake, gurnards, bream, cat-fish, sillocks ‘etc. The hake is the most valuable of these species and is caught in considerable quantities during some years. It is included with the cod and ling under “cured fish”, but is unfortunately not separately distinguished. The quantity of turbot landed in Scotland is not great, comparatively speaking, but its high value makes it of considerable importance. The largest quantities are brought in by the trawlers on the east coast; on the other hand, the small amount of turbot landed on the west coast is brought in by liners. The average quantity of this fish landed has been somewhat greater in recent than in earlier years, more particularly on the east coast. The same may be said of the halibut and lemon-sole, which come close together, both in quantity and value. The increase in the catches of these fish is a sign of the extension of the fishing into deeper waters, as will be mentioned more particularly in dealing with the following species. Whilst the lemon-sole landed is brought in entirely by the trawlers of the east cost, the halibut is chiefly the property of the liners and a considerable amount is landed in the western isles. It is probable, indeed, that much of the turbot and halibut recorded for the east is really obtained on the west coast. The mode of recording the remaining flat-fish (excluding skate) forms the “Achilles” heel of the Scottish statistics. Within one column are included flounder, plaice, brill, witches, megrims, dabs and probably long-rough dabs. In earlier years, this did not matter much, as megrims and witches were then of little account on the markets, and the other species negligible in comparison with the plaice. During the years following 1896, how- ever, the otter-trawl revolutionised the trawling industry and the fishing-grounds became rapidly enlarged from within 50 fathoms to the 100 fathom line. The changes produced thereby and the consequent fluctuations in the statistics for the past 6 years, have been described in detail by Wemyss Fulton in the XX* Report (Part III, p. 80 et seq.). Without entering too deeply into these details, the matter may be illustrated by showing the difficulty of obtaining an account of the quantities of plaice landed in Scotland. The species mentioned as included with the plaice in the statistics, are taken both on the west and east coasts of Scotland. So far as the west coast and Orkney and Shetland are concerned there is but little difficulty. The quantities are relatively small and the greater proportion is obtained by lines. It is probable, therefore, that only the dab, in addition to the plaice, is taken in any appreciable quantity, and judging from the proportion of dabs landed at Aberdeen on the east coast — to be presently mentioned — 90% of the total quantity landed would be plaice. A similar proportion would apply also to the fish landed by the liners on the east coast. There would be no great error in these approximate results. The greater quantity of plaice etc. is landed, however, by the trawlers of the east coast. Previous to 1896, this amounted to ca.60%o of the total quantities of these species landed in all Scotland, since that year, it has mounted to between 75 and 80°%o, and this relative increase has been due to an increase landed by trawlers, not decrease by the liners. 1 “Sillocks” is given by Day (British Fishes p.294) as a local name for the saithe, G. virens. As the returns for this fish are presumably given separately under saithe, perhaps “‘sillocks’ refer to the pollack, G. pollachius. a APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND The probability is, that this increase has been made up entirely of the deep-sea species, witches and megrims, and that the quantities of plaice actually landed by the trawlers and therefore in all Scotland, have remained constant or slightly decreased. This can be shown from the data given by Fulton for Aberdeen (1. c. p. 85). Table LXXIV. The quantities of plaice etc. landed in Aberdeen Plaice Dab Witch a. Megrim ewt. ewt. SION 27,964 5,620 TOM et 31,359 4,158 LEID et: 26,297 3,647 TO er 32,089 4,633 1894: re: 35,006 4,118 ISIN: 35,304 3,174 EI 38,001 5,186 SON rt: 25,858 1,182 6,436 VIE re 23,484 1,383 9,593 TS SE 22,741 2,171 21,746 SOO! SS cr eer 20,964 2,678 36,383 BIO 21,522 1,996 52,741 LOOD ES RUE AE 26,243 2,035 36,369 The quantities for 1902 have been added from the XXI‘: Report, p. XLIV. The quan- tities of dab are clearly of little account, being on the whole, less than 10 °/o of the plaice. The brill has been disregarded altogether, as the landings of this species amount to barely 2°) of those of the plaice alone. It thus appears, that the quantities of plaice increased from 1890 to 1896 and then Change of decreased until 1902, when they suddenly increased. During this period, the quantities of nnd megrims and witches remained practically constant, forming less than 20 °/o of the plaice landed, until 1896 when they began to increase pari passu with the decrease of plaice, and rapidly exceeded the quantities of the latter. As pointed out by Fulton, the increase in the witches and megrims occurred with. the introduction of the otter-trawl and the extension of the fishing grounds beyond the 50 fathom line. The increase of plaice in 1902 was due, again, to the partial return of the trawlers to the older fishing grounds under the 50 fathom line. The other ports on the east coast, from which trawling is carried on to any extent, are Leith, Montrose (Dundee), Peterhead and Fraserburgh. The total quantities of plaice etc. landed at these ports taken together, amount to ca. 20 °/o (in recent years) of all the trawled plaice etc. landed on the east coast. If we could assume, that the course of the trawling from these ports had been the same as from Aberdeen, we might deduct from their returns proportionate amounts for the witches and megrims landed, but it does not seem possible to make this assumption. Again, the quantities of plaice brought from Iceland and the Feroes are included in these returns and the witch etc. are also obtained there, but from information given in the XXII Report, it appears, that these quantities are almost negligible. The Aberdeen 15* Shell Fish APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND lb trawlers bring only small quantities of flat fish to market from these regions, preferring the round fish. If, for the moment, we deduct the quantities known certainly to be other than plaice, i. e. the witches etc. landed in Aberdeen, we have for the quantities of plaice landed on the east coast of Scotland, liners and trawlers included: MOM ene a tre a N 48,146 cwts. SOBRE ae Ten ete ET 48,300 — PRUDENT TENTE De — 19008. AMENER 52,995 — LOOT Eee cere DE — VIOLETT 58.147 = This is the nearest approximate we can obtain from existing data, but from what has been said, the quantities are certainly too high, and whether we should take more from the first years or from the last cannot be determined. Further, if we wished to ascertain the quantity of plaice landed from the North Sea only, we should have to be content with the same figures. Errors in this case would also arise from the small quantities brought from the Feroes and Iceland, as already mentioned, and the quantities from the north and west coasts of Scotland which are landed at Aberdeen or elsewhere on the east coast. The shellfish, whose total value is stated in the table, include oysters, mussels, clams, lobsters, crabs and other unclassified shell fish. Of these, the most valuable at the present time are crabs, (C. pagurus) and lobsters, forming over 70% of the total value. The lobsters are taken most abundantly on the west coast, the crabs on the east coast. Oysters, mussels and clams were formerly more abundant and of much more value than they are Table LXXV. Average price of fish landed in Scotland in pence per pound (Ib.) 1886—90 | 1891—95 |1896—1900| 1901 1902 1903 Hévines A ea RN NIEREN 0:43 0:45 0:55 0:52 0.61 0:62 Mackerel) hal Zucker Aa 1:21 1:35 1:35 1:09 1.50 0:87 Sat a ee 0-15 0:21 0:26 0:65 0.36 0:21 ° Sparling (Smelt)..............-... = 8-52 8:01 8:10 8:10 6:92 Cod eee EEE aera 0:74 0:78 0:83 1:02 0:98 0:91 Taine N RAR ION DAN 0:68 0:65 0:66 0:66 0:74 0:75 Tune a SEN a 0:33 0:35 0:39 0:43 0:50 049 ° Saithel(@oalash)p aa 0:28 0:28 0:24 0:29 0:35 0:38 Haddoek Aa a TER ie 0:96 1:05 117 1:36 1:23 1:06 VUN RER EE 0:78 1:03 1:07 0:78 0:72 0:76 @ongertHielie os clones Reo Mer 114 1-14 1:12 0:88 1:06 ie UBT iy EN SE A ees Mie dats) URC aN ce 6:43 7:02 6:18 7:80 7-51 7:64 EER but IT RER LTE RN 1:85 2-14 2:91 3:46 3:53 3:65 TemonwSole it. Inn 3:01 3:68 4-49 4:60 4-21 4:33 Flounder, Plaice, Brill ete... ....... 1:46 1:87 2:28 2:35 2:41 2:73 Skate rae pee a aE 0:45 0:48 0.57 0:55 0:56 0:58 Other kinder. Moe A 0-48 0:48 0:60 074 | O71 0:67 All fish together... 0:57 0:61 0:72 0:75 0:78 0:79 ae Ce APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND at present, and it is almost entirely due to these forms that the value of shell fish on the east coast has decreased. Regarding the fisheries as a whole, it appears, that the total quantities and values value and have steadily increased during the period considered, except as regards quantities during es 1896—1900. The decrease noted here is entirely due to the diminution in the average quantities of herring landed during 1896—1900. It is noticeable also, that the increase is entirely due to the expansion of the fisheries on the east coast. The decrease in the average quantity during 1896—1900 was not accompanied by a decrease in the value, on the contrary, the total value had increased more during that quinquennial period than during the previous one. The average price of fish had therefore increased, and this is shown very clearly in the accompanying table. The average price of practically all species has gone up considerably since 1886, and the increase is specially marked in the case of the more important species, e. g. herring, haddock, cod and the flat-fishes. Since the total quantities have greatly increased, the higher value must be due to greatly increased demand. The progress of the fisheries is displayed, not merely by the quantities and values of Boats and Gear fish landed, but also by the fishing-vessels. The general trend of the fisheries may, indeed, be better illustrated by the character and size of the boats than by the fish landed. This is especially the case with Scotland, where the fisheries have greatly changed during the last 20 years. In agreement with the fact, already stated, that the quantities of fish landed by the trawlers had gradually overtaken and surpassed those landed by the liners, we find that the number of trawlers has increased greatly whilst the sailing-boats have decreased. The tendency to utilise steam for propulsion is further displayed in the increasing number of steam-liners and steam-drifters. In the Report for 1903, Appendix P, p. 256, it is shown, that the number of sailing boats engaged in line-fishing has decreased from 5,715 in 1898 to 4,884 in 1903, whilst the number of steam-liners has increased from 39 to 91 in the same period. Many of the steam-liners also engage as drifters in the herring fishery, and it is practically impossible to separate them. The two classes are therefore combined in the accompanying table. The number of all sailing-boats has decreased by one third since 1886—90, but the tonnage has increased, so that the average is now nearly 12 tons, where formerly it was but little over 8. Most of these sailing-boats are engaged, like the steam-drifters, in the herring fishery. As the value of the boats and gear has also greatly increased, it is evident that the tendency of the Scottish fisheries is towards larger and more expensive . boats and equipment, and corresponding to this, the fishing is pursued further to sea and for longer periods. It is worthy of remark, that the period 1896—1900 seems to have been the turning- point when the tonnage and number of men employed were at their lowest. This corre- sponded with a period of depression in the quantities of herring landed. As the value of fish greatly increased, however, during the same period, the fishermen were enabled to replace the older and smaller boats by newer and larger. From the data given in the Scottish statistics, it is possible to obtain an approximate average Gross average over a number of years, of the amounts earned by the fishing boats. It has to be ‘*""# remembered, that the quantities obtained depend on the weather conditions and the amount Steam-trawlers APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND nié = Table LXXVI. Total number, type and value of the boats engaged In the Scottish fisherles Steam Trawlers ® Liners & Drifters Years aes M Value of Value of Number | Tonnage® en vessels | Number | Tonnage® Men vessels End & Gear engaged | & Gear £ £ 1886—18901 ...... 42 1,623 313 131,720 1891—1895? .. .. 103 3,451 792 322,441 43 1017 298 62,097 1896—1900 ....... 163 5,889 1353 601,678 53 1278 435 118,079 LADA eee Saar a RER 256 10,517 2229 1,092,295 97 2684 814 227,226 le A ne 275 11,742 2388 1,220,660 100 2900 829 234,610 LOS Er 280 12,380 2472 1,254,593 156 . 4025 1296 401,004 Sails & Oars 2 Ss |£ Trawlers‘, Liners, Drifters puis = 3 Vas Seiners ete. & = 5 Men | Value of Men | Value of = 38 Number| Tonnage5| en- vessels |Number| Tonnage’) en- vessels = TE gaged| & Gear gaged| & Gear | à | Ze £ £ = 1886—18901 ...... 14,490 | 116,329 | 47,233 | 1,465,251 14,890| 125,330 | 48,370 | 1,668,946 || 8:42 1112-09 1891—18952....... 13,472 | 115,170 | 44,678 | 1,410,950 || 13,618| 119,638 | 45,763 | 1,795,488 | 8:79 113170 1896—1900 ....... | 11,340 | 107,382 | 38,225 | 1,464,558 11,556) 114,549 | 40,013 | 2,184,315 | 9:09 189-02 SOM rte teak er eats 10,848 | 111,438 | 37,525 | 1,681,780} 11,201 | 124,639 | 40,568 | 3,001,301 | 11-13 1267-95 OO Reece ens eRe 10,722 117,050 | 37,583 | 1,757,185 | 11,097 | 131,692 | 40,800 | 3,212,456 || 11:87 |289:49 GOB EMEA LAN 10,572| 124,126 | 37,081 |1,792,571| 11,008 | 140,531 | 40,849 | 3,448,168 || 12°77 |313:24 of fishing. Great variations occur in the herring fishing, for example, on this account. Further, the values depend on the market demand, and this is independent of all consider- ations directly affecting the fishing. By taking the averages over a number of years, the fluctuations due to these causes may be discounted to a great extent. In estimating the average gross earnings of the trawlers, only the east coast with the Orkney and Shetland are considered. These numbers refer, not only to the trawlers registered as Scottish, but to a number from England fishing regularly from some Scottish 1 It is only for 1889 aud 1890, that the steam-trawlers and sailing boats are given separately. The number of sailing boats and the totals refer to the years 1886—1890. 2 Steam-liners were separately distinguished for the first time in 1892. The average given is for the four years 1892—95. The increase in the number of steam liners and drifters since 1899, is due mostly to the steamers engaged in the herring fishing (see previous page). 3 English trawlers fishing regularly from Scottish ports are also included here. , 4 The trawlers included here are small shrimp trawlers of the west coast. Their number has always been less than 100. 5 Net tonnage. ~~ nor APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND port. Some foreign trawlers also occasionally land their catches in Scotland, but their quantities are relatively small (to the value of £ 6,813 in 1903), and probably do not counterbalance the amounts landed on the west coast of Scotland by the east coast trawlers and not included here. The otter-trawl was introduced on to the Scottish boats in 1895—96, and its effect is displayed in the increase of the average catch from 1896 onwards. From what has been said on a previous page, however, part of this increase in the average catch is due to fishing on different grounds and more especially in deeper waters. This has to be taken into consideration in comparing the fishing capacities of the beam and otter-trawl from statistics. An exact estimation of the average catch and earnings of the boats engaged in lining and drift net fishing is very difficult, owing to the fact, that many boats engage in both pursuits at different times of the year. The Scottish statistics give two separate accounts of the number of boats engaged in the herring fishing. In one, which is joined with the quantities and value of the fishing, the average number of boats fishing from the various ports is given for each of the three main seasons during which the herring fishery is carried on. It is possible, that the boats engaged in the great summer fishery represent the total number of boats throughout the year, but this is by no means certain. The second account gives the largest number of boats engaged in the fishery from the different ports at one time. A comparison with the other table would indicate, that this means the maximum number at any time throughout the year. In the first account, the number seems to be too low, in the second too high. In 1903, for example, the boats engaged in the great summer fishing on the east coast, including Orkney and Shetland, were 3996, but the maximum number for the same region was 4897. It is possible of, course, to consider only the great summer and autumn fishery by itself, but this would not give the total value of the herring fishery to the east coast fishermen. The whole fishery has therefore been taken into account, and the average earn- Table LXXVII. Progress of the line and drift-net fisheries on the east coast of Scotland Length of lines in miles Length of drift-nets! in miles Sailing boats | Steam vessels Total Sailing boats | Steam vessels Total NEID... 35,040 505 35,545 5417 5417 SOSE... 34,915 528 35,443 4898 4898 DS ae. 34,412 610 35,022 4873 4873 TJ poco eee 35,360 723 36,083 4969 4969 HG E Te 33,212 1046 34,258 5251 5251 LATE AAA 33,467 1058 34,525 5211 5211 SO Sear 33,174 842 34,016 5172 5172 TOPE) Gain olen. 31,327 832 32,159 5099 44 5143 DIODES N 29,075 1177 30,252 5410 123 5533 GOL Ste 27,381 1825 29,206 5642 180 5822 I SEA 25,422 1785 27,208 5710 193 5903 L903 Rive cr = he 23,180 2013 25,193 5599 318 5917 1 The drift-Net is taken to be 16 yards (8 fathoms) in depth on the average. Liners and drifters APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND = 1190 = ings calculated from the maximum numbers. The average catch per boat is therefore too low probably, but every year suffers similarly, so that the comparison over the years given here should be a fair one. It has been mentioned on a previous page, that a large number of Scottish boats pursue the herring fishery in English and Irish waters. The quantities taken there, espec- ially during the past few years, have been very considerable. With the exception of 1894, when only the values were given, the quantities of herring taken outwith Scottish waters by the Scottish boats have always been given in the introduction to the Annual Reports. They are included here in estimating the average catches. A more scientific method of comparing the average catch of fish over a period of years might be, to estimate the average catch per mile of net, seeing that the square area of the nets employed is given in the Reports. It has to be remarked, however, that the average catch per mile of net depends also on the depth of the net. This is taken here to be 16 yards in depth on the average, but it may be a little less, in which case, the length would be greater and consequently the average per mile less. For the larger boats, the depth of the net is 16 yards, according to the data given in the 1903 Report (p. LXV), and this is the same as the Dutch herring nets, but in the older nets, the depth was from 9 to 10 yards (see Holdsworth 1. c.) It is of greater consequence, that the fishing boats always have one or more spare nets, and though not stated, the probability is, that the area of the nets given in the Re- ports includes also these spare nets. The net-area actually fishing throughout the year is therefore unknown, but probably less than one half of that employed to calculate the averages given. Table LXXVIII. Average gross amount (quantity aud value) taken annually by the fishermen on the east coast of Scotland (including Orkney and Shetland). _ Trawlers Drifters? RENE Total £ per ile of r £ 1 er £ 100 er Hart cwts. | £ 100 par bez Dan an à capital — | per ton of cwts. £ capital cwts. £ ewts. £ ewts. a ewts. £2 1892... | 320549 | 2111 90:20 74 804 | 153 | 603 114 1893... || 3796-49 | 2476 | 117:58 80 987 | 172 | 814 142 | 407 92 347 92 1894... || 3846 2274 | 117 74 964. | 159 | 835 138 | 421 89 355 | 88 1895... | 4699 2559 | 141 78 926 | 199 | 773 168 404 | 103 344 | 99 1896... || 5272 2920 | 155:68 93 946 | 147 | 738 115 | 387 82 344 | 86 1897... | 5251:48 | 3029 | 155 94 693 | 159 | 563 130 || 298 85 270 | 89 1898... || 5407-85 | 3120 | 162-30 90 | 994 | 181 869 158 | 396 91 330 | 92 1899... | 4736 2887 | 132 74 724 | 250 | 640 221 285 | 107 226 | 97 1900... | 4666 3041 | 118 73 851 | 282 | 680 | 226 | 278 | 100 210 SAT 1901... | 5216 3231 | 127 16 916 | 211 778 179 || 296 77 229 | 18 1902... | 5446 3019 | 128 68 1131 | 305 | 918 246 | 329 96 247 | 86 1903... | 5714 3027 | 121 67 1081 | 251 894 | 206 292 78 230 | 78 1 The value of the fishing in Irish and English waters is also included here. 2 Value of shell-fish included. — 121 — APPENDIX J: SCOTLAND The averages calculated from the statistics as they now stand, are consequently indef- inite both as regards the earnings of the boats and the take of the nets.! Supplementary information on these points is given in the 1903 Report with regard especially to the steam-drifters. The gross earnings of a number of these boats amounted to over £ 2000, but these cannot be taken as even indicating what the earnings of the sailing vessels might be. Similar difficulties are met with, in estimating the earnings of the liners. Many of the liners take to the herring fishing during a great part of the year, consequently the length of lines given in Table LXXVIII was probably not once in operation throughout the year, and even though the total number of boats engaged in line-fishing is given in a special table of the Reports, it is certain that many, if not most of them, have been at line-fishing only a small part of the year. For example, if we calculate the average catch for the east coast per mile of line, we find that it was 20 cwts (£ 11) in 1903, 18 cwts (£ 10) in 1902, 18 cwts (£ 10) in 1901 and so on, not once exceeding 40 cwts. (£ 14) since 1893, when separate statistics are first available. These averages are obviously of little value. In the 1903 Report, it is stated, that the gross earnings of the steamers engaged exclusively in line-fishing varied between £ 2000 and £ 3300. To gain an approximate notion of the earnings of these Scottish boats, it is necessary to combine the liners and drifters and estimate the earnings in terms of some factor common to both. Since the number of men, the number and tonnage of the boats, and amount of gear are excluded, we have left only the capital, and an estimate is therefore given of the average gross earnings per £ 100 of capital. It is probable, that this would be the simplest and most accurate method of comparing the catches of boats of different kinds and different countries. It is of interest,.for example, to notice, that the line and drift-net fishing is much more successful than that of trawling. In estimating the gross earnings for all boats and fisheries, the value of the shell-fish taken on the east coast is also included. As the quantities of various kinds of shell-fish are given in numbers, however, and it is difficult to convert these into weights, the shell- fish have been omitted in estimating the number of hundredweights per £ 100 of capital. 1 In addition to the causes of error stated, the east coast drifters and liners also land a portion of their fish on the west coast of Scotland. For the drifters, the quantities are probably of no importance, not so for the liners however. Appendix J 16 SUPPLEMENT THE FISHERIES ON THE MURMAN COAST (NORTH RUSSIA) By L. BREITFUSS importance ot The rude climatic conditions in the northern parts of the province of Archangel permit the culture of the land to but a very small extent. The people of those parts — especially of the town of Kola and the so-called ‘‘Pomoren” living on the coasts of the White Sea — are thus driven to the Murman coast, where the southern parts of the Barents Sea are always free of ice. From this coast, they carry on a fishery under great difficulties in the inhospitable Arctic Ocean. At the present day, the Murman fishery plays a very important role in the life of northern Russia, as a large portion of the inhabitants of the districts Onega, Kem and Alexandrowsk in the province of Archangel are engaged in the actual fishery, and a second portion in transporting the fish to Archangel and St. Petersburg in their small schooners. About 2/srds of the annual catch, which amounts to between 500—600 thou- sands puds! is brought to St. Petersburg and Baltic parts, and only about Y/srd of the total goes to Archangel and ports on the White Sea. This means that only an insignif- icantly small portion of the entire consumption in the north is supplied; the main supply for the northern provinces, of Archangelsk, Wologda and Wjatka, comes from Norway, and amounts to 1—11/2 million puds. The import of Norwegian fish is aided to the extent, that it can be landed in Arch- angel free of duty if brought in Russian ships; this is not permitted, however, in the Russian ports on the Baltic. The reasons for this are, on the one hand to encourage the shipping in the north, and on the other hand to protect the relatively feeble Murman fishery from competition. Len isheny The Murman fishery is of very ancient date. The old chronicles of the IXth century tell of the voyages of the Russians in the northern Arctic Ocean. In the XVth and XVIth centuries, the Russians not only engaged in the cod-fishery on the Murman coast, that is, the northern coast of the Kola peninsula, but also carried on a not inconsiderable fishery on the coasts of Finmark, In a report dating from 1774, the number of Russian fishermen was estimated to be 1300 at that time, whereas the number of fishermen’s families settled in Finmark was only 300. In the report of the district-officer for 1775, we read: “the Russians have without doubt fished more than the subjects of his Majesty the King of ? 1 pud = 16 kilograms = 35°3 Eng. lbs. — 123 — APPENDIX J: SUPPLEMENT Denmark”; and in 1770, a trader in Vardö wrote to his principal in Bergen: “it is not only that the Russians are supplanting the inhabitants at the fisheries, but they even go round the fish-markets to buy up and barter for the fish; this they can do much more easily than we can, as they pay double the price permitted us by law” (Norsk Fiskeri- tidende, 1900. 4. Hefte, p. 510). At that time, the Pomoren were accustomed to undertake venturesome voyages, even to Spitsbergen and Nova Zembla, in their archaic “Schnjake” in search of seals and the white whale. In the second half of the XVIIIth century, however, a great change took place in the economic conditions of the northern provinces of both kingdoms, due to a rapid devel- opment of the northern parts of Norway, and a decline in the trade and industry of Archangel, all to the advantage of Norway. The fishery on the Murman coast is carried on in the period from June to October. The most important species is the cod (Gadus callarias L.), which contributes far more than the half of all the fish taken on the coast and is of double the value (1 to 1:20 roubles' per pud of the haddock (Gadus aeglefinus L.). The latter comes second in importance, then the saithe (Gadus virens L.), and in smaller quantities the halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris Flem.), cat-fishes (Anarrhicas lupus L., A. minor Miill. and A. latifrons Steenstr.), Norway haddock (Sebastes norvegicus Asc.), plaice (Plewronectes platessa L.), flounder (Plewronectes flesus L.) and others. The fresh-fish industry is not carried on here at all, from lack of good communi- cations with other parts. Apart from the quantities used for home consumption by the fishermen, the entire catch is salted. According to the official statistics, which are somewhat defective, unfortunately, the number of fishermen and the dimensions of the fishery during the period from 1880—1902, results of the were as follows: Year 1880—1883..... 1884—1887..... 1888—1891..... haies siotele ss... ss... ss... Fishermen 2987 Quantity (puds) 749,875 486,883 504,320 777,520 639,847 779,886 839,165 548,845 650,027 501,094 474,263 499,541 610,382 402,331 In these figures, only the sea-fishes, practically only the cod and haddock are included. The salmon fishery, which is also somewhat important, is not taken account of here, 1 10 rubles (gold) = £ 1—11—8. 16* The principal species of fishes Number of fishermen and shery APPENDIX J: SUPPLEMENT Morte Namberlafnaats According to the official statistics, the number of fishing boats during the period 1893 —1902 was as follows: BOSE der ere tate ae 769 boats | 1898............... 1062 boats SOA AT RT ree DOTE fil SHOP yan et 9081 — BOD RE culos 963.7 MODO EEE 964 — 1806 ne PANNES 948 QO snare enero Gl 967 — 1 BOM SANTE Er 945 All ecrans separ 922 — Type of boat The boats on the Murman coast are all open and of four different types: 1) Schnjaken with ca. 240 pud capacity 2) Troiniks - - 130 - - 3) Nordland-boats - - 100 - 4) Karbass ee D EME - In a very few cases, decked cutters are also used in addition to these. Hach boat carries 2—4 men. Long-lines are the chief methods of fishing, hand-lines to a less degree. The 988 boats of 1899 were distributed amongst the various types of boat as follows: SCRNJAKEN an. nen meena 453 or 459% POS ee hee he eee a 154 - 156 - Nordland-boats................... 190 - 19:2 - Kearbass AE ES Ne ee an: 118 - 11:9 - Larger decked and undecked boats.. 73 - TA - 988 Published The following publications have appeared in the Russian language: 1. Annual Reports of the Statistical Committee of the Province of Archangel. 1864 et seq. 2. Statistical Investigations on the Murman Coast in the vears, 1900, 1901 and 1902 (no fishery statistics), Vol. I—IV published by the Committee for the support of the Pomoren of North Russia. St. Petersburg, 1902—1904. 1 988 boats, according to the statistics of the Committee for the support of the Pomoren of North Russia. I. IT. Iii. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. IX. X. XI. XII. XIII. XIV. XV. XIV. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XX VI. XX VII. XX VIII. XXIX. XXX. XXXI. XXXII. XXXIII. XXXIV. XXX V. XXX VI. XXX VII. XXX VIII. Sweden: Norway: Denmark: Germany: LIST OF THE TABLES Page Value of the fisheries on the west coast of Sweden........................ 5 Swedish Herring-fishery of Bohuslän and the Kattegat..................... 7 Average gross earnings of the autumn and winter herring-fisheries of Bohuslin 9 Average annual quantity and market-value of the Norwegian fisheries since 1866 14 The Yield of the Lofoten fishery during the years 1872—1903.............. 15 PrincipalaNorwesiany fisheries ee: 16 Deep=seaytisherlesy of Norway „Eat EE aletainte.euciniad cae eat ee 17 Average market-value of the principal Norwegian fisheries since 1866 ....... 17 Number of fishermen engaged in the chief Norwegian fisheries.............. 18 Waluenoi them Danishs fisheries eye RC ER enr 21 Fisheries on the west coast and north-west coast of Jutland................ 22 Quantities of Cod, Haddock and Plaice, landed on the west coast of Jutland over Map OLiOGmOliy CATA Weert shen) eu RUINS Ne rai eer er een esa ous ap Ss 24 The proportions of the species landed on the west coast of Denmark......... 24 Average price of Cod, Haddock and Plaice on the west coast of Jutland ..... 25 Fishing-boats on the west coast of Jutland................................ 27 Data of the fishing of Frederikshavn cutters during 1902—03 .............. 28 Review of the German Herring fishery 1872—1903 ........................ 30 Fishing boats of the Elbe and west coast of Schleswig-Holstein ............. 32 Sailing vessels engaged in the North Sea fisheries beyond the coastal waters and which do not fish exclusively with drift-nets............................... 33 Development of the German steam fishing fleet from 1885—1903 ............ 34 Development of the fish-auetions at the four prineipal markets .............. 34 Number of boats engaged in the line fishery .............................. 36 Results of the line fishery, 1886—1902 ....................,............... 36 Total quantity of the German seafisheries (North Sea) ...................... 46 Total value of the German seafisheries (North Sea) ......................... 48 Value of the various species landed in Germany ............................ 49 Composition of the German fishing fleet September lst 1903................. 50 List of the unregistered German fishing vessels ............................ 50 Number of German vessels engaged in the fisheries of the North Sea beyond the CORSA A ETS RE RTE Wer RP nl mire iranien ee er sp à 52 Number of German boats engaged in the drift-net fishery................... 53 Herring fishoryy oh saalinglvesseleen.. ana ee deensemiente seu een als sts 54 Herring fishery of steamers and motor boats ............................... 54 Fish landed in Altona from sailing vossels during 1900—08................. 55 Fish landed in Altona from trawlers during 1900—08....................... 56 Fish landed at Hamburg by the Finkenwärder sailing vessels, from 1900—03.. 56 Product of the voyages of the Hamburg steamers during 1896—1901......... 56 Quantity per year and per voyage of Hamburg steamers..................... 57 Price of the principal species sold at Altona and Geestemiinde for the period . HERES PTS Sa. wp. cd 80 OR Cr OR ee Screen ai aaa 57 APPENDIX J XXXIX. XL. XLVIIIT. L. LI. LIT. LI. LIV. LY. LVI. LVII. LVINI. LIX. LX. LXT. LXII. LXIII. LXIV. LXY. LXVI. LX VIT. LXVIIT. LXTX. LXX. LXXI. LXXIT. LXXIII. LXXIV. LXXV. LXXVI. LXX VII. LXXVIIL. Holland : Belgium: France: England: Scotland: — 126 — Page Development of the Dutch herring fisheries since 1853 .............. 59 Iceland Cod fishery of Holland in the 18t century...............-..-.----. . 60 Value of the three main branches of the North Sea fisheries................ 70 Value of the different) fishes) "2 eee en = Eee rer 71 Value per ton or kilogram of different fishes ........................ 72 Product of the Dutch seafisheries for the period 1892—1903 -. .:. 74 Number of boats used in the main branches of Dutch North Sea fisheries.... 75 Number of boats of Dutch North Sea fisheries, regardless of the use, with the size 76 Herring-fishery 1892—1903, average income per boat ................ 77 Longline-fishery: Middelharnis, average catch per boat... ......... 18 Longline-fishery: Vlaardingen, average income and catch per boat ........... 78 Trawlfishery Helder, average income and catch per voyage ...............--. 79 Trawling in winter and early spring with bumboats (Scheveningen, Katwijk and Nordwigk)l es ce eine cis ee ce hits EEE EEE EIER 80 Trawlfish landed in Ymuiden: 1900-03. Income per voyage for the different types of boaters. sce eee eon eee ei nee ent i ee Lee 81 Trawlfish landed in Ymuiden: 1900—03. Catch of Haddock, Plaice, Sole and Dab, for the different types of boats ...............................-..-... 81 Quantities of Cod landed by Belgian fisherboats ......................-. 87 Value of the Herrings caught by Belgian fishermen ............-.-..---+--- 87 Value of the fresh fish caught by Belgian fishermen ....................... 88 Total value of the Belgian seafisheries ................................. 89 Value of the fish sold at the Ostende Market ........................-..-. 90 Fishing boats of the different Belgian harbours.......................-.-..: 91 Codfishery near Iceland and in the North Sea (combined) ..................: 93 Tdému(separately) eee PP EN ANSE een. ern Le LEE ces CEE 94 North Sea herring-fishery ........:...... "2 94 North? Sea fisheries). 4 "OR RE ER seele NEC cists ECC cele lel oe aa 95 Quantities of fish landed ...................................... ano. ou 101 Value of fish landed ................................: op douce 102 Quantities and values of the named species, landed during 1902 ............. 103 Average price of brill, sole and turbot in England since 1898................ 104 Average price of fish landed in England..............................-.-.. 105 Average monthly quantities of fish landed on the east coast of England during the years 1890—1902............................................. Sereno 106 Number and nature of employment of fishing-boats in England ............ elon Tonnage of the first-class boats engaged in trawling............-....-..--+= 107 Quantities of fish landed .................................m" 112 Value of fish landed from 1886—1903............................ See 112 Quantities of Plaice etc. landed in Aberdeen. ........................... ent Average price of fish landed in Scotland ...........................-.--... 116 Total number, type and value of the boats engaged in the Scottish fisheries .. 118 Progress of the line and drift-net fisheries on the east coast of Seotland...... 119 Average gross amount (quantity and value) taken annually by the fishermen on ~ the east coast of Scotland (including Orkney and Shetland).............. Yous el) APPENDIX K SPATISTICS OF THE NORTH SEA FISHERIES PART II SUMMARY OF THE AVAILABLE FISHERIES STATISTICS AND THEIR VALUE FOR THE SOLUTION OF THE PROBLEMS OF OVERFISHING BY H. M. KYLE WITH 1 CHART AND TWO FIGURES IN THE TEXT CONTENTS page Introduction... 0 ent en re oe ee Re ne a Clee 3 A. Plaice-fishery in Norway... 4.2 ne AR ERA ENERRERS 5 By Phe; plaice) fisheries of the Kattesat enr ER airs eel eee 7 I. The Danish plaice fishery of the Kattegat........... Vit ciel J 8 2, the SwedishsplaicerftisheryiofithenRattesat PEER PEN RER RENE EPP RER 15 3. Ihe Danish and Swedish plaice fisheries of the Kattegat ..................... sess 17 4. Summary and conclusions with regard to the Kattegat plaice fishery............ ...... 20 €. The: fisheries of: the North Seay: nn ne MN SRS eRe ole ee 23 1. The physical conditions of the North Sea in relation to the present problems ..... 24 2 Statistics (of the plaice fishery, in! they NorthiSea ee NN ae ee eee 26 % — — isole fishery, iniithe North Sea. pn sence ET EN ee oe ELEC PTE CRUE NAT 4. — — turbot and brill fisheries in the North Sea ...................,..... 34 5. _ — haddock fishery in the North Sea... 36 6. — = Cod fisheries’ 2er. Eur. ARTE ME ome eae En ae eee 39 7 = — ~ hemineHisheries inthe North Seaman.) nee CCC EE TEE 8. — — total quantities of fish landed for the most part at North Sea ports..... 43 9. — — total value of all fish landed for the most part at North Sea ports...... 48 IO. — regarding the average price of the principal species of food-fishes ............. 48 Tite number of boats engaged in trawling from North Sea ports..... 52 D. General summary and conclusions................ Peon en ina PA TE ie DE 5150 doo 0 56 N.B. Great assistance has been rendered in the preparation of the statistical tables by Hr. Knud Andersen. INTRODUCTION The first portion of this work has given an account of the present-day condition of the fisheries in the countries bordering on the North Sea. At the same time, the sources of information general as well as statistical have been displayed, and the actual information which the statistics of each country yield has been subjected to a preliminary critical review. Some notion has been given thereby of the value of existing statistics, and the way has been cleared for the general summary which has to bring the principal data together. The importance of this general summary must be evident to all who have had occasion to search for statistical data with regard to fisheries. What is, however, of equal importance in the present instance, is the manner in which such a summary is made. On the one hand, there is an enormous mass of statistical data in widely varying degrees of accuracy, and on the other, there is a number of theories and ideas just as difficult to coordinate as the data. The data may be summarised in almost any order; of far more vital importance is the rank or value given to the various factors, which have at one time or another been taken to indicate overfishing and decrease of fish. It has been maintained, for example, that statistics of the average catch per boat were alone sufficient to prove the existence of overfishing and coming exhaustion of the fisheriest. The point was overlooked here, that the average catch, whether per day or per annum, is but a minor factor, depending entirely for its worth on the total catch and total amount of fishing. Again, the practical problem of overfishing has been unnecessarily connected with the problem of decrease of fish. In a recent paper?, Dr. Petersen of Denmark has based his discussion of overfishing on the assumption, that a decrease of fish has been shown to have taken place. Further on in the same essay, however, he indicates that overfishing can be conceived as occurring, even when the numbers of fish are increasing (1. c., p. 590, note). In an earlier paper also, he had shown the converse truth, namely, that a decrease of fish was not necessarily overfishing. In later pages it will be shown, that overfishing may occur even when the quantities of fish remain practically stationary. 1 Garstang, W., «The Impoverishment of the Sea»; Jour. Mar. Biol. Ass. vol. VI. 1900. The author has now withdrawn from the position he took up in that work (see Evidence on the Sea Fisheries Bill (H. L.), 1904. p. 115). 2 Petersen, C. G. Joh.: «What is Overfishing»; Jour. Mar. Ass., vol. VI. 1903. 3 Beretning fra den danske biologiske Station I. 1890—(91). . Ir APPENDIX K: KYLE = N — These two instances will perhaps suffice, to show the necessity of a critical res ate- ment of the general ideas involved in the problem of overfishing, more especially as, except for a few special purposes, the interpretation of the statistics, available at the present time, depends more upon individual experience and breadth of view than upon their own intrinsic worth. The aim of the present portion of this work is therefore twofold; firstly, to criticise and arrange in their relative order of importance, the general ideas connected with the problems of overfishing and decrease of fish; and secondly, to examine the existing statistical data with regard to the principal species of foodfishes caught in the North Sea. In order to carry out this aim, it is advisable in the first place to go away from the North Sea, and consider two less complicated regions, where the course of the fishing throws considerable light on the problems concerned. The first example is taken from the Norwegian fisheries, where the physical and biological conditions are so different from those found elsewhere, that the effects of severe fishing stand out in marked contrast to what has been observed in the North Sea. The second example chosen is that of the Kattegat, where the conditions are more akin to those of the North Sea. In both cases we have to deal with the plaice. A discussion of these will show the advisability of regarding Over (for the time being), as a practical and economical problem, which has to be measured not in terms of quantity but in terms of value, i. e. of the capital employed and the income earned. Theoretically, it seems possible to measure overfishing by means of the quantities, and if all the factors were known — the amount of the fishing power, the reproductive fertility, rate of growth and mortality of the species concerned and the total quantities taken for man’s use per annum — a good mathematician might be able to calculate the precise point where overfishing begins. Practically, his calculation would be waste labour, if the average price of fish rose or fell, in the meantime, by but a fraction of a penny. On the other hand, the decrease or increase of fish, either in numbers, quantity or quality, is a special scientific problem which can be solved if certain factors are known. If the physical and biological conditions, surrounding a species on a given region, remain practically the same over a period of years, and the amount of fishing to which it is subjected is maintained practically at a maximum throughout, then for a species which spawns once a year, the principal factor is the total quantity (by weight) taken per annum. For practical and economic purposes, however, it is not sufficient to know that a species is maintaining itself on an area so far as total weight is concerned. It is of more impor- tance economically that the large fish, or rather, the fish which have the best market- value, should not decrease. Even if the total weight has remained practically constant over a period of years, the question has still to be considered, whether the size and quality of the fish taken have likewise remained constant. For economic purposes, therefore, the average size or weight of the fish taken has also to be considered. The available statistics of the plaice fisheries in Norway and the Kattegat will enable these positions to be exemplified. The statistical data for the fisheries of the North Sea are unfortunately more imperfect and complicated, so that the conclusions are more of the nature of probabilities than certainties. The difficulties in the way will be pointed out later. Meantime, it is of importance to mention the assumptions which are made, in using statistical data for the solution of the question of decrease or increase of fish. It = APPENDIX K: KYLE is assumed therewith, that the quantities taken by the fishermen can be considered as representing the fish-population of an area. This means in general, that, if the annual quantities landed remain constant or decrease over a sufficiently long period of years, then it can be concluded, that the actual fish-population has remained constant or decreased. The extent of this assumption cannot be determined until further information is forthcoming, with regard, especially, to the fishing capacity of the apparatus now employed. There is no doubt, for example, that the fishing apparatus is differential in its action, so that the quantities taken of certain species e. g. the whiting, dab and sole, are not so represen- tative as those taken of others, as the haddock and plaice. If it can be shown, that a decrease of fish has occurred along the lines indicated above, namely, decrease of total quantities or decrease of the average size, the practical considerations arise, whether it is advisable and if so, what are the methods to help maintain the supply. These are not considered here. The main point placed in the fore front of the present investigation has been, to ascertain whether the statistical data could and did show a decrease of fish, and wherein exactly the decrease lay. A. PLAICE FISHERY IN NORWAY From a general description of the fisheries in Norway by Hjort and Dahl, it appears, that the plaice fishery has been carried on for a long time in the southern part of Norway and only for about 15 years in the northern parts. The condition of things in Norway, the modes of fishing and the fisheries themselves are markedly different from those ob- taining elsewhere; further, scientific information is scarce, so that one cannot make any close comparison between the Norwegian plaice fisheries and those of the Kattegat and North Sea. By way of contrast, however, the observations of Hjort and Dahl are of interest and importance. With regard to complaints concerning overfishing or decrease of fish, the authors state: “in those parts where the fishery has been carried on from time immemorial, the fishermen, as a rule, have not known the fish to be more numerous than at present. _The younger the fishery is, the more frequent are the reports that a greater quantity of fish was found there in earlier times (with exception, naturally, of the places where the fishery is flourishing).” The younger fisheries are, as mentioned, in the northern provinces of Norway, and two instances are given of fisheries springing up and then dying out within the space of a few years. The statistics of the actual catches do not exist, but the quantities sent to a fish-merchant at Trondhjem are considered to be good representations of the course of the fishing. They are shown by the following curves (p. 6). The explanation given of these phenomena is simple. It is considered, that there was but a comparatively small “accumulated stock” of plaice of the largest size (50 to 70 cm.) on the grounds originally, and that this was very soon fished up. The number of the medium-sized plaice left was not sufficient to make a regular fishing profitable. APPENDIX K: KYLE : oe The fishing up of the larger plaice is a phenomenon well-known for other fishing grounds, in the Kattegat, North Sea or elsewhere, and the phrase “accumulated stock” is very descriptive of the condition of things on a new and comparatively untouched fishing ground. The reasons why the fishing ceased, so far as commercial purposes were con- cerned, when the accumulated stock was fished up, are directly traceable, according to Hjort and Dahl, to the physical conditions which are found along the Norwegian coast. The areas suited to the plaice are small in extent and, like oases, surrounded by great depths of water in which neither the adults nor the young live. Further, the strong cur- rents which prevail there, scatter the eggs and pelagic young far and wide, and it is only a small chance that, when the pelagic stage is safely passed, the young should find Tonde 93 94 95 _ a Le>] >} = Qi a) + le] CM CONTENT ON MED 1890 1890 Fig. 1. Plaice-fishery in Norway. themselves on any shallow sandy ground suited to their growth. Whether the stock on one of these isolated grounds be large or small, there is but the remotest chance of any of the young returning there. Consequently, if a ground is rapidly deprived of its “accu- mulated stock” it will take many years before it can recover. Meantime, the stock of medium-sized plaice is not sufficient to maintain the fishery. The differences between these examples of the Norwegian plaice fishery and the plaice fisheries of the North Sea and Kattegat, lie on the one hand in the physical con- ditions, and on the other in the quantities of medium-sized plaice available for maintaining .a fishery. The whole of the coastal areas round the North Sea and Kattegat are suited to the young plaice, and the chances are strongly against the currents carrying the eggs and pelagic young into depths where they cannot live and grow. As a consequence of this, the younger stages of the plaice, the undersized fish, are present in great multitudes 1 In place of Iröien, read Fröien. ——— ss Te ) — APPENDIX K: KYLE on the shallow flats of both seas. And it is the medium-sized plaice, which constitute the staple support of the plaice fisheries in both the North Sea and the Kattegat. In contradistinction to the “accumulated stock”, which consists of large fish, it is convenient to call the medium-sized fish the “current stock”, whilst those under the general marketable size may be called simply “undersized fish”. The problem for the North Sea and Kattegat, so far as it concerns the plaice, is centered round the current stock; further explanation of this term may be postponed until the present condition of the plaice fishery in the Kattegat has been described. BRAS EAICEARISAERIE SN OF TEE KATE GAT The plaice fishery, which is by far the most important fishery in the Kattegat, is carried on (1) by steam trawlers of English and German nationality, (2) by the Danes, (3) by the Swedes. Information concerning the quantities taken by the first is absolutely wanting, but we can safely say that they have fished in the Kattegat more since 1890 than in the years preceding. With regard to the Danish and Swedish plaice fishery, very cie information is to be found in the various reports already named in the first part of this work, and a valuable picture can therewith be obtained of a fishery, which has been entirely dependent on the “current stock” for a period of at least twelve years, and shows as yet no signs of exhaustion. As the Danish fishery is of greater importance than any other we shall begin with it, but first of all, it is necessary to say a few words concerning the physical and geographical conditions in the Kattegat. As is well-known, the Kattegat is the meeting place of two large expanses of water of very different character. On the one side, is the Baltic with its low salinity or com- paratively speaking fresh water, on the other, is the Skager Rak and North Sea with a relatively high salinity. The nature of the Kattegat water depends upon these two influ- ences, but as it lies more open to the Skager Rak, it has on the whole more of the characteristics of the latter. The Baltic stream and the currents from the Skager Rak are, however, in constant conflict and the range or area, over which the conflict is waged, varies greatly in different seasons and different years. In short, the physical character- istics of the Kattegat, the direction and strength of its many currents, both on and below the surface, and so on, are very variable. Without entering into details, it may be said that these variable physical conditions must have a profound influence on the distribution of the young of fishes, such as the plaice. In some years, the pelagic young may be carried into the Baltic or on the other hand into the Skager Rak, more than in other years. It is probable, therefore, that the abundance of the adult plaice is affected in this way over the whole Kattegat, and the fluctuations in the abundance might even show themselves in the statistics of the annual quantities taken by the fishermen. The boundaries of the Kattegat employed here, are the same as those used by APPENDIX K: KYLE A Petersen and Otterstrom in their work on the Danish fisheries. They are: a line drawn from the Skaw to Vinga off Gothenburg, dividing the Kattegat from the Skager Rak; lines drawn from Hasenere in Jutland to Gniben in North Sealand and from Copen- hagen to Malmö in Sweden, dividing the Kattegat from the Belts and Baltic”. The plaice fishing within these boundaries is carried on for the most part in less than 30 fathoms. If we take 44 fathoms (80 meters) as the extreme limit of the fishing, we can readily ascertain the total area fished over. This amounts to ca. 5430 sq. nautical miles or ca. 18,600 sq. kilometers?. The greater part of this area is of a sandy nature and lies in less than 20 fathoms, from the Jutland coast out to Læsô and Anholt in the centre and across the southern half of the Kattegat. Beyond the 20 fathoms, the bottom has a muddy character. The Kattegat is thus well-adapted to the plaice and to the plaice fishery. There are no rocks on the Danish side, only a few patches of stones which do not disturb the Danish snurrevaad so much as they would the trawl. On the Swedish side, the bottom is more rocky and a different mode of fishing for the plaice, i. e. with gill-nets, is employed. ı. Danish plaice fishery in the Kattegat The condition of the plaice fishery in the Kattegat was investigated by Petersen some years ago and his report, published in 1894, has been generally considered, and rightly too, one of the most valuable contributions to the problem of overfishing. The conclusions he arrived at, though dealing only with the Kattegat, are of general and wide importance, and the description he has given of the progress of the Kattegat plaice fishery, its rise to a maximum of output or production and then its apparent decline, agrees in essentials with many descriptions of the plaice fisheries in the North Sea and elsewhere. What is of greatest value in the report of Petersen is, that he was able to observe the fishery exactly at the time when it had reached its apparent maximum or as Petersen calls it “culmination”, and with ten more years gone by, it is fortunate that we have this report as a basis for comparison. It appears from Petersen’s report, that the plaice fishery of the Kattegat was practically in its infancy previous to 1876. The chief fishing grounds were close to the coast and the fishing was carried on by gill-nets. Deep-sea fishing was then but little practised, and there were consequently few fishing cutters. During the decade from 1880 to 1890, the importance of the plaice fishery increased by leaps and bounds. The large boats increased in number and size, and the fishing grounds were extended to the whole of the Kattegat and even already to the Skager Rak and North Sea. It was at the beginning of this decade also, that the famous “snurrevaad” or so-called plaice-seine was introduced, and its introduction necessitated larger boats and improved gear. The alterations which occurred in the fishing, up to the time when Petersen wrote his report, may be summarised under the following headings. (1) “the fishing grounds have become several times larger, than 15 years previously.” (2) “the fishing power is certainly 20—40 times larger’, and the number of hauls per day more numerous. . ı Two small villages lying within this line on the Jutland coast, have also been included. 2 This has been calculated with the friendly assistance of Mr. Martin Knudsen of Copenhagen. ee ee — 9 — APPENDIX K: KYLE (3) the culminating point, or the year when the greatest success was apparently reached, was 1890. Thereafter, the signs of a crisis or turning point became unmistakeable. (4), in spite of the great improvements in vessels and gear, and extension of fishing- grounds, “the market was not so well supplied as formerly’. (5) there was “a diminution in the number of saleable plaice, which a cutter can fish in one day on formerly good grounds”. (6) “large plaice (grown up) have become rare in the Katies and “the average size is smaller”. The general conclusion arrived at from a consideration of these phenomena was, that the plaice fishery had decreased, “and this was considered due, not merely to over- capitalisation of the industry, but also to decrease in the stock of plaice in the Kattegat”. The decrease further was not general, but only in the quantities of large plaice; the smaller plaice were present “in multitudes, perhaps even in greater numbers than in former years, when there were more large ones to take up the room”. The position thus outlined was reached by Petersen not so much from statistics, as from personal experience of the fisheries. Statistical data was quite lacking to show, for example, the truth of the statements contained in (4), (5) or (6). Since 1894, a great mass of information has been collected in the Danish Reports bearing on the various points mentioned, and it is of the greatest importance, for the problem of overfishing in general, to review this evidence and to ascertain how far, if at all, the plaice fishery in the Kattegat has further decreased. It may be said here, that the statistics have to be used with caution and that a few gaps occur in details. Never- theless, the main facts can be made out quite clearly, when we make the same broad survey of the matter which Petersen made in 1894. It will simplify the comprehension of the data, if we follow the same order as is indicated above. I, Fishing grounds and fishing apparatus In 1890, the whole Kattegat, so far as it was suitable, was already exploited by the Danish fishermen, so that we cannot expect any change to have occurred in this respect since that time. Then as now, also, the large cutters of the Kattegat were accustomed to fish during the summer months in the Skager Rak and North Sea, and it does not appear from the statistics, that the number of Kattegat cutters fishing outside the Kattegat has increased since that time". ’ It is certain also, that the intensity of the fishing in the Kattegat itself has not dimin- ished. So far as one can determine, the number of boats fishing there has increased, and likewise the fishing power. The published statistics, unfortunately, help us very little towards an exact estimation of the number of boats. Those of the largest type, i. e. over 15 tons (brutto), are employed in the plaice fishery almost exclusively, and their number, for the whole of Denmark, has increased from 195 in 1889 to 392 in 1904. Of this increase, ca. 80 boats must be ascribed to Esbjerg and one or two smaller towns on t According to the reports of the inspectors for the west coast, the number of Kattegat boats fishing. in the North Sea, has been as follows; 1889: c. 93; 1890: c. 102; 1891: c. 120; 1892: C. 125; 1895: c. 129; 1896: c. 76; 1897: c. 100; 1899: c. 103; 1900: c. 74. The fishing boats of Skagen are not included in these lists. (From information received later, it appears that the figures given for 1889 to 1892 are not reliable, being certainly greater than they should be.) Appendix K 2 APPENDIX K: KYLE N the North Sea. The remainder of the increase, about 120, has occurred inside the Skaw and chiefly in the Kattegat itself. If, however, we ascribed the whole of this increase to the fisheries outside the Kattegat, i. e. that these 120 boats all fish in the Skager Rak, North Sea, Belts etc., there would remain for the Kattegat the same number of boats as in 1889. But in 1889, a considerable number of Kattegat cutters were already fishing in the North Sea; consequently, the amount of fishing in the Kattegat must have increased. If we allowed for this dubiety, however, and simply considered, that the number of Danish boats actually fishing in the Kattegat has remained constant, i. e. neither increased nor decreased, we can still conclude that the fishing power and amount of fishing have increased. Motor-power has been introduced, not only to the large cutters, but also to the small boats which help in shooting the net (see Part I, p. 24). The rapidity of making the hauls has thus become greater, and more hauls can be made. The lines of the net (“snurrevaad’”) have also been lengthened, and may be over 1000 fathoms long. The increase in the fishing power, from 1890, has probably not been so great as the advance made in changing from the gill-net to the snurrevaad (about 1880), yet, any improvement in the boats or methods of working the nets, must clearly have led to an increase in the fishing power. The interesting questions now arise; if the year 1800 marked the culmination of the plaice-fishery in the Kattegat, and a decrease in the stock of plaice was noted in 1894, how can the continued increase or even the persistence of the fishery be explained? Why has the condition, described above for the Norwegian plaice fisheries of Smolen and Fröien, not been reached? Is the 10 to 15 years period, after the culminating point has been attained, not sufficient to reduce the fishery (or stock of plaice) to the stage at which the working of these fishing grounds no longer yields a profit? The answer to these questions must depend on the quantities of fish which are taken annually and on the value of the fish. It is of importance, therefore, to ascertain what information the statistical data can give on these points. Il. Quantity and value of the Danish plaice fishery in the Kattegat Since 1890. The estimation of the exact quantities of plaice landed by the Danish fishermen from the Kattegat is not an easy matter. The statistics enable one to separate the Kattegat from the other waters without much difficulty, but the quantities taken by- the Kattegat cutters in the Skager Rak and North Sea are included in the statistics for the Kattegat. For the years previous to 1895, the official reports offer no means of separating these quantities. From 1895 onwards, an estimate is always given of the value of the fish taken annually in the Skager Rak and North Sea, but landed in the Kattegat. These values represent plaice, almost exclusively. An examination of the returns made by a number of the cutters shows, that ca. 2°/, of the totals represent fish other than plaice. By deducting this 2°/,, and then deducting the remainder from the value of the Kattegat plaice fishery as given in the reports, we get a very near approximation to the actual value of the Danish plaice fishery in the Kattegat alone. The value of the fish taken annually, since 1895, by the Kattegat cutters outside the Kattegat, but included in the Kattegat returns, are as follows: eM APPENDIX K: KYLE 1805 EE 475,000 Kroner ADO oo 0 ce 362,000 — ISO PETER 314,435 — 1898. ..... 180,000 (?) — SCORE 367,000 — 1900 EE 209,000 — 1OOD RCE 600,000 — = ICO 2: CO — A similar deduction should be made for the plaice which are caught in the Belts, but included in the returns for the Kattegat. As the value of the quantities is small, about 20,000 Kroner annually, and has probably remained practically the same over all the years considered, it has not been considered. Further, the value of the plaice fishing in the Kattegat by a few cutters from the Lim Fjord, has not been included for 1898—1900, as it is not given in the statistics. This amount is also small, comparatively speaking, and like the first, has no effect on the main conclusion to be drawn from the values shown in the table. Table I. Plaice fishery of the Kattegat: Danish fishery Value BYCLARS Quantity Davee DASS scores to kr. per score kg. kg. LES ey een 983,754 14 5,093,500 75 HO Merde Ka 1,004,853 14 5,402,800 75 TON NE eee TE 954,786 1'6 4,315,500 725 TOC 2 N 1,060,426 1:5 5,153,400 725 VÉLO eek SE RER 955,923 1:5 4,451,300 70 PDA PO ee steals 1,119,162 1'4 5,430,600 70 TOO Deer ne me ne 732,000 1:35 3,659,900 675 NEO ee En 969,300 1:6 4,038,600 6°75 RAD Ce Mammo D EURO 992,400 17 3,816,800 6:5 Liste fs rats ee EEE 1,431,500 17 5,505,000 65 TO neh 1,162,700 17, 4,471,810 6°5 TE QOOM er acon rhe OMR den nas 1,156,400 2°3 3,317,400 6:5 TQ OIG TM RE CRE ARTS, » » 4,447,500 6:5 HORDE PEU LME RE Le ne 1,162,200 1°75 4,150,600 6:25 MGOSy ae 1,164,600 r'9 3,882,800 6°25 It is evident from the table, that the value of the Danish plaice fishery in the Kattegat has greatly increased. The figures for the years 1889 to 1894 include the value of the fishing beyond the Skaw, as already mentioned. For the sake of comparison, we may deduct at least 300,000 Kroner annually from each of those years, for the fishing outside the Kattegat?. We then see that the increase in total value has been on the whole over 60°/o. «In the years 1889—94, are included the quantities and values of the plaice landed at the Kattegat ports from the Skager Rak and North Sea. 2 This estimate of the value to be deducted is based on a comparison of the number of cutters fishing in the North Sea (see footnote, p.9) and the values earned there for 1895, 1896 and 1897 (see above). 2” APPENDIX K: KYLE Le mo This is obviously a sufficient reason for the persistence and even increase of the Danish plaice fishery in the Kattegat. It is possible, however, that this increase in total value is entirely due to a great increase in the average price, and it is therefore necessary, to enquire if such has been the case. The third column of the table gives he average price of plaice per score, as cal- culated from the statistical data for the Kattegat. It should be noted, however, that the inclusion of the values of the large quantities of plaice not caught in the Kattegat has probably some influence on the average price of plaice taken in the Kattegat. This has not been allowed for here, as there seems a wide enough margin for any effect these quantities may make?. From the figures given, the increase in the average price has, on the whole, been less than 60 °/,. If we now compare this with the result obtained above for the total values, we see, that the increase in the average price can account for the increased value of the fishery, only if the quantities taken have, on the whole, remained constant. This conclusion will be understood more clearly from the quantities. These have been estimated from the total values and the average pices stated, and the results are shown in the fourth column of the table. It will be remarked, that the quantities here are stated in kg., not in scores, as is usually the case in the Danish statistics. The reason for this procedure is, that, accor- ding to the statement of Petersen already quoted, the average weight per score may have decreased during the period considered. Further, what we most wish to ascertain is whether the total mass or weight, not the numbers, of the plaice has decreased or not. Fortunately, a considerable amount of data exists for the conversion of scores into kilograms. The Danish Reports for 1897 to 1900 give in tabular form a series of obser- vations showing the average weight of the plaice in the Kattegat. These are as follows: 1 The exact influence, which the inclusion of the quantities taken outside the Kattegat, makes on the average price and total quantities, has been worked out by Dr. A. C Johansen for his forth- coming work on the investigations carried out by the S. S. “Thor” in the Kattegat and North Sea. He has kindly permitted me to give the results he arrives at. The annual total values naturally, are practically the same, but the total quantities are different. Quantity in kg. Remarks 1805 à Se MEL EHRE ote ca. 4,400,000 Flounder and TER eee eat aaa €a. 4,900,000 dabs included 1807 Kavita CRI ER 4,000,000 TSQBS oe. nce rene ARE 5,900,000 T89D;: le Noor ER eye 3;900,000 LOGO NU NER 3,100,000 TOO Nay AEE EURE EI 4,400,000 1002, Lee PME aoa. FE 4,400,000 | 1002! Ani alt 3,400,000 Plaice only TOO cots, ane cera waa ero: 3,400,000 The figures exhibit greater fluctuations than those shown in Table I, but the general conclusions to be drawn, are the same as given above. — 13 — APPENDIX K: KYLE of 154,404 scores, the average weight was 12:2 Danish lbs. in 1897 - 126,152 — - — = - 138 — - - 1898 =, 120,230 oF = ir BO, nr 1271809 = 115008, MEME IIS GE aes als, 1900 =) Aya - _ — = 1908} = 1125 =) ICO - 82,321 _- - = = M2 One 8 hy =a) 121902 The average weight per score was higher (12 to 16°7 lbs.) for the northern Kattegat and round Anholt, lower (10 to 14 lbs.) for the southern Kattegatt. Starting from these values as basis, and allowing for a gradual decrease since 1889, we may employ the scale shown in the fifth column of the table. It should be noted, however, that we have absolutely no statistical evidence regarding this decrease. Petersen admits this lack of evidence in his report, and we are simply relying upon his experienced ~ judgment in accepting it as a fact. As is shown in the table, a decrease of 1'/, kg. or 21/, Danish pounds is allowed for in the average weight per score over the period 1889 to 1903. This gives an advantage of ca. 800,000 kilograms to the first years. An examination of the table shows, having thus made all allowances, that we cannot say there has been any decrease in the total quantities of plaice landed in Denmark from the Kattegat during the period 1889 to 1902. There have been fluctuations up and down, but for the years showing the Kattegat alone, viz. 1895—1903, the mean or average has been but little below 4 million kilograms. It is evident also, that the quantities for 1889 to 1894 have rarely, if ever, exceeded this amount. We come therefore to the conclusion, that the Danish plaice fishery of the Kattegat has remained practically constant, since it attained what Peters n regarded as its culmin- ating point in 1890, and this, in spite of the fact, that the amount of fishing and the intensity of the fishery have become several times greater at the end of the period than at the beginning. We are plainly in view of a new phase in the problem of overfishing. Already in 1894 it had been pointed out, that the plaice fishery of the Kattegat was over- capitalised and more keenly pursued than the stock of plaice would stand. It was pointed out also, that the stock had deteriorated, probably decreased, and that certainly the maximum productivity and value of the fishery had been overpassed. Ten years later, we find, that the capital invested has increased, that the fishing is pursued more keenly than before and yet, that nature has somehow struck a balance and the quantities taken annually remain practically as they were. We shall consider the possible explanation of this phenomenon, when the Swedish plaice fisheries of the Kattegat have also been reviewed; meantime, several interesting con- ceptions, expressed by Petersen in the report mentioned, may be dealt with here, as they are of importance for the general problem of overfishing. 1) From the scale of weights given by Archer (Report on Sea Fisheries Bill [H. L.] 1904, p. 180) for the North Sea, the average size of these Kattegat plaice would lie between 12 and 13°5 Eng. inches (30°5 and 34:3 cm.), therefore, somewhat larger than that of the plaice taken by the Danish fishermen in the North Sea (see Part I, p. 26). The data for 1901 and 1902 have been provided by Dr. A. C Johansen. APPENDIX K: KYLE — 14 — Ill. Average catch per fishing day. This conception, under various guises, as, catch per hour or 100 hours, average catch per boat etc. has been employed in different countries to illustrate the problem of overfishing and decrease of fish. Although but little reflection is required, to show it is practically worthless to prove either, we may examine its merits here by the light of the material contained in the Danish Reports. The data is shown in the following table. Aalborg Bay is a wide expanse of the western Kattegat in the province of Jutland. It is one of the oldest plaice fishing grounds on the Danish coast, and the plaice there are relatively of small size, about 11 Danish Ibs to the score. Læss is an island in the northern part of the Kattegat, off Aalborg Bay. The plaice here are of larger size and the fishing takes place in deeper water than in Aalborg Bay. North Sea probably means the Skager Rak and north of Horns Reef Table II. Plaice fishery in the Kattegat and North Sea from 1880—1896 Scores per Scores per < N ores per Aalborg Bay fishing de North from Lzeso fishing Hey North Sea ee a fishing days scores fishing days scores 1880 103 6296 611 46 2726 59°3 1881 88 5532 62°9 46 1958 43:0 1882 Ioo 7901 790 47 2215 470 1883 68 5142 756 50 2435 48°7 1884 82 7044 85'9 64 3602 56:3 fishing days scores 1885 146 9083 | 62:2 324 17266 53:3 80 5786 258 1886 144 7486 | 52°0 AI4 16297 39'4 113 10103 89°4 1887 152 5301 348 267 13130 491 165 8540 517 1888 109 4789 43°9 348 16162 46°4 152 3182 20:9 1889 108 3479 | BOD 98 2797 2855 131 4108 314 1890 237 8334 35'2 1891 173 5747 33'2 1892 174 7389 45°9 1893 62 1864 300 1894 42 1622 38°6 18953" 257 22908 89:1 1895» 116 7217 62°2 1896 MONTE | 7 The evidence contained in this table is clearly of little value, when we consider the importance of the questions of overfishing and decrease of fish. To throw light upon these, the evidence must first of all be representative, and if we think over the number of things required to make it so, e. g. information regarding other fishing grounds, regarding the total number of boats fishing and so on, it can be realised how little is the assistance such evidence gives. To be truly representative, we should require the total catch and the total number of days fishing, over each and all of the areas into which the Kattegat or North Sea might be divided. As it is improbable that we should ever have such a wealth of detailed information at command, we must be content with the nearest approximations thereto, namely, the total catch and the total number of boats fishing per annum. Similar views have long ago been expressed by Petersen in his 1 95> gives the records of two boats not included in 954. — 15 — APPENDIX K: KYLE work on the Danish eel fisheries’. “It is not sufficient proof’ he says “that a fishery is suffering from overfishing, because its condition throughout the year is not so rich, nor the fish so large, as they were at periods when, on the whole, there was little fishing; but if the total quantity of each and all of the fishings decreases steadily over a series of years, then overfishing is taking place — unless the phenomenon is due to other reasons”. Further, if we take into consideration what has just been shown with regard to the quantities of plaice annually landed from the Kattegat, namely, that they have remained practically constant over a long period of years, we can look at the evidence given by the average catch of a number of boats in a new light. The constancy of the plaice population of the Kattegat leads to the conclusion, that the most strenuous fishing under present conditions does not permanently affect it. An increase in the number of boats or fishing days would simply mean, that, in general, each boat and each day would have less to show for its work than formerly. Overfishing would then arise when the average catch had so diminished all round, that it no longer paid the fishermen to work in the Kattegat. The question is, therefore, as stated in the introduction, more of values than of quantities, of the most economical boat, gear and mode of working, as well as of the demand for fish in the country. Following the same line of thought, we see that a form of overfishing may occur, though the total quantities landed each year were increasing. These considerations will again be taken up later; they are merely mentioned here, to show how small is the importance that can be attached to the average catch per boat or per fishing day, when taken by themselves. 2. Swedish plaice fishery in the Kattegat When we turn to the Swedish side, we find the remarkable phenomenon of a fishery which, though relatively small in extent, has sprung up and increased, after the Kattegat had been said to be already overfished and its stock of plaice decreasing. Previous to 1893, the Swedish plaice-fishery in the Kattegat was entirely along the coast, and it is mentioned in one of the reports about that time, that this coastal fishery, like that on the Danish side of the Kattegat, was believed to have deteriorated. Nevertheless, a deep-sea plaice fishing in the Kattegat was started in that year by the Bohuslän fishermen and has gone on increasing ever since. In the description of the Swedish fisheries given in Part I of this work, it has been shown, that the fisheries of the Kattegat are participated in by the three provinces of Bohuslän, Halland and Malmöhus. It appears from the Reports, that the plaice fishery from Bohuslän as well as from Halland is carried on almost entirely in the Kattegat. At the present time, the “Kvasar’” fishing i. e. with welled motor boats and Danish “snurrevaad”, is of greatest importance. The main fishing grounds lie between the Skaw and Læso. The Halland and Asperö (Bohuslän) fisheries are carried on mostly with gill-nets. It is stated, however, that there is also a fishery for plaice along the Bohuslän coast which is not entered in the statistics. This may be taken to counterbalance the small quanti- ties of sole, turbot and dab which are included with the plaice in the Halland statistics. In addition to these, a considerable plaice fishery by means of “kvasar” and snurre- 1 Beretning for 1890—g1, p. 161. APPENDIX K: KYLE ee vaad is carried on in the southern Kattegat by the fishermen from Malmöhus. For 1895, the value of the plaice caught there was 50,508 Kr.; for 1896, 71,551 Kr.; and for 1902, 56,336 Kr. If we take 55,000 Kr. as the average since 1895, we should have to add ca. 200,000 kg. annually to the quantities stated below. The returns for Halland are given in kilograms, those for Bohuslän in numbers. These have been converted the one into the other on the same system that has been employed for the Danish statistics. The rapid increase in the “Kvasar’’-fishing is somewhat remarkable. In 1893, there was only one boat of that type, since then, the progress has been as follows: 1894, 6; 1806, 14; 1897, 19; 1898, 21; 1899, 23; 1900, 25; 1901, 27; 1902, 27. There are also about a dozen of these boats fishing in the southern Kattegat from Malmöhus. Table III. Plaice fishery of the Kattegat: quantity and value of the Swedish fishery‘ Bohuslän Total ‘| Average = Halland 2 T price Asperö fishing Quantity Value per kg. Ë numbers numbers kg. = | kg. kr. kr. MEIDEN NR D ete NULS ? | 23,390 9,888 DEQ A stale ese cee 40,000 21,185 35,700 11,183 0'31 LS 2 aah NEST LE SE 35,000 82,600 95,300 25,220 0:26 MEQ Spo ER RAR as 30,000 13,000 115,300 144,000 32,260 0'22 + 1,950 sc. TSOA te: ee NN: 30,000 153,860 115,230 189,400 51,058 0°27 + 1,400 sc. TEL a ME Re NS 41,000 362,000 136,800 272,800 63,945 0:23 LODOM CE PRE EE PERLES 72,500 727,300 75,600 345,500 84,517 0:24 TOG Jens aa eet ote Nee 62,500 902,700 123,700 437,400 106,762 0'24 TOO A ee 60,480 889,240 125,470 434,100 100,355 0'23 TSQO assy AN TPE 58,000 1,071,920 179,700 546,900 124,538 0:23 TOUR Ne Sey ise EEE 65,000 1,407,500 95,700 574,300 147,565 0:26 TOOT NEC ER 58,000 1,530,610 94,660 591,100 178,775 0:30 T OOD ME car dete ARE 58,000 1,610,532 179,000 700,400 213,055 0:30 The table shows the actual details of the progress made by the kvasar-fishing of Bohuslän. In 1802, it did not exist, in 1902, over half a million kg. of plaice were landed by its means. The quantities are relatively small in comparison with the Danish figures, but they are of importance in that they show a flourishing and increasingly important fishery. The average price of the plaice in Sweden has been very much the same as in Den- mark, since 1895. In that year, the quantities landed by the kvasar fishermen began to affect the market probably and made the prices fall. Here, as in Denmark, it is evident that the increase of the average price in later years is due to an increased demand for the plaice and not to any decrease in the quantity. 1 The Kattegat plaice fishery from Malméhus in the south of Sweden is not included here. Its value since 1895 has varied between 50,000 and ca. 70,000 kroner. This would mean an addition of ca. 200,000 kg. annually to the total quantities. 2 Sole, dab and turbot are also included with the plaice in the Halland statistics, but are relatively unimportant in amount. — iy = APPENDIX K: KYLE The average catch per boat and further points concerning the Swedish fishery, will be more conveniently dealt with, when the Danish and Swedish statistics are taken together. 3. Plaice fishery of the Kattegat: the Danish and Swedish statistics When the evidence, shown in preceding pages concerning the Danish and Swedish plaice fisheries, is summarised, the lowest estimate is obtained of the quantities of plaice taken annually from the Kattegat. As already mentioned, it is not possible to give the quantities taken by English and German steam trawlers, and it has been necessary also, to omit the quantities taken by the Swedish fishermen of Malmôhus. These omissions more than counterbalance the small, inevitable irregularities which arise from imperfect information, and which might tend to make the total quantities less than stated. These irregularities have been pointed out as they arose, and the endeavour has been made to obtain, so far as the statistics allowed, a fair representation of the present condition of the Kattegat plaice fishery relative to what it was in 1890. It has been shown from the Danish statistics alone, that the quantities of plaice landed annually by the Danish fishermen cannot be said to have decreased. It has also been shown, that the amount of the Danish plaice fishing, and the amount of capital invested in it, have greatly increased since 1890. These are not signs of a decreasing fishery, and even though the average price of plaice has increased and the fishing is therefore Table IV. Plaice fishery of the Kattegat:: Sweden and Denmark Sweden Denmark Total kg. kr. kg. kr. kg. kr. THERETO) 2 LOT DAME 5,093,500 983,800 102 OPA ae ere 5,402,800 1,004,900 DO er ue 4,315,500 954,800 NICH An BE RE 5,153,400 1,060,400 NEUERE acon coromesenc 144,000 32,300 4,451,300 955,900 || 4,595,300 988,200 TS OA ail cones MEN te 189,400 51,100 | 5,430,100 | 1,119,200 || 5,620,000 | 1,170,300 RE a En 272,800 63,900 3,659,900 732,000 3,932,700 795,900 TE) Sie teal 345,500 84,500 4,038,600 969,300 | 4,384,100 | 1,053,800 TSH) ot en 437,400 106,800 3,816,800 992,400 4,254,200 1,099,200 SS oc USE at, 434,100 100,400 5,505,800 | 1,431,500 5,939,900 1,531,900 HS) ca each He OR ee 546,900 124,500 4,471,800 | 1,162,700 5,018,700 1,287,200 CSS Yu PET er eee 574,300 146,500 - 3,504,200 | 1,156,400 4,078,500 | 1,304,000 LOC RE er sie 591,100 178,400. 4,447,500 5,038,600 | OO 700,400 213,100 4,150,600 1,162,200 4,851,000 | 1,375,300 ı The Malmöhus plaice fishery in the Kattegat, with ca. 200,000 kg. here, nor is the fishing of English and German steam-trawlers. * In the Danish statistics for the years 1889—1894, are included the quantities and values of the plaice landed at the Kattegat ports from the Skager Rak and North Sea. 3 If the quantities given by Dr. Johansen for the Danish plaice fishery (see footnote, p. 12) be taken, we have the following for the total quantities of the Danish and Swedish fishery: annually, is not included TOO TE 4,672,800 kg. TOGO Er 4,446,900 kg. OO GH re 5,245,500 — T900 1.4 3,674,300 — ESO Teme 4,437,400 — TOO AS: 4,991,100 — Lege 6,334,100 — 1002 5,100,400 — Appendix K APPENDIX K: KYLE APRES better paid, this is not sufficient to account for the increased fishery and its greater value in 1902 than in 1890. When we add the Swedish results to the Danish, the position thus arrived at is very much strengthened. The Swedish plaice fishery of the Kattegat has practically sprung up since 1890, and though the quantities taken by the Swedes are much less than those taken by the Danes, the evidence is unmistakeable. The quantities taken by the Swedes have decidedly increased. The total quantities of plaice taken annually in the Kattegat by the Danish and Swedish fishermen are shown in Table IV. The method by which the quantities have been expressed in kg. has been described in dealing with the Danish statistics. It is only necessary to mention again, that it has been used throughout for all the tables. The figures in the table show the impossibility of concluding that the quantities of plaice taken annually from the Kattegat have decreased. Average catch per boat. Some consideration has already been given to the question, whether the average catch per boat or per fishing day is or is not of impor- tance in determining overfishing and decrease of fish. The evidence given by these factors, it has been pointed out, is quite illusory unless the data is representative, and when the data is representative we should rely upon the total quantities landed annually and not on the average catch. Further, if we wished to employ the average catch as evidence for overfishing, we should use the values and not the quantities. An example from the Danish statistics has already been given. That shown in the following table is, however, more definite. From the returns of the cutter fishery in the Danish reports, it is possible to estimate the average annual catch of plaice in the Kattegat for a number of boats. The number of months each boat has been fishing in the Kattegat is stated in the statistics, and only Table V. Plaice fishery of the Kattegat; average catch of Danish and Swedish boats Denmark Sweden Nuriber Total Average catch Number Average catch of boats Gross | of boats Tonnage kg. kr. Ke kr. TOBO NA AURA Re Io 13,920 TOO ee 7 II8 22,710 4,445 TSO Lye ean ee ae 2 43 26,636 6,116 TOO 2A pen BEIN RE ER net 5 94. 23,752 5,143 6 8,975 3,506 18951 7 125 27,905 5,944 10 12,220 3,620 DSQG AN MERE 9 233 30,202 8,402 I4 17,533 4,379 RCo suace saeco. 20 477 . 22,233 | 5,457 19 15,441 3,911 1808 Sera gehn 23 664 27,479 8,444 21 13,762 3,126 TOO May creme ers 6 168 21,160 7,167 23 15,147 3,957 TOOOM er Ne 9 226 14,971 6,160 25 18,300 4,452 TOO shavers Ae 5 (78): 23,927 6,692 27 17,715 4,872 TOO VEN 12 (168) = 23,776 6,715 27 18,641 5,050 I netto tonnage. ho APPENDIX K: KYLE those which have been fishing for 10 months or more are included in the table. Until 1900, the gross tonnage was always given and this is stated in the second column. It will be seen from the table, that the number of Danish boats, whose records can be given, is small in comparison with the total number fishing, so that the averages given cannot, without further evidence, be considered representative of the Danish fishery. The reverse is the case with the Swedish boats, for here we have the total quantities of plaice taken and the total number of boats for the “Kvasar’’ fishery of Bosuslän. It is evident in this case, that the average catch has increased with an increase in the number of the boats. . If now, the average catch is employed as an index of the decrease of fish or even of overfishing, what conclusions could be arrived at regarding the condition of things in the Kattegat? From Table II, showing the average catch per day in Aalborg Bay, we might take the decrease to 1893 as a sign of overfishing and decrease of fish in Kattegat. From the Danish portion of the present table, we should conclude that the average annual catch per boat in the Kattegat was on the whole fairly constant, whereas, the evidence of the Swedish boats, finally, shows the reverse of a decrease of fish. ‚These three cases all refer to the Kattegat plaice fishery and the opposite conclu- sions they lead to are surely a convincing proof of the uncertain evidence offered by the average catch per boat, when taken by itself. Average catch of plaice in the Kattegat per square km. or per square mile. The main factor on which reliance is here placed for a just conception of a fishery, such as the plaice fishery, is the total quantity (weight or mass) of fish landed annually from the region under observation. When this is obtained, minor factors can be determined from it according to the information to hand, such as the average price, average catch and so on. One of these factors may be further mentioned here, viz. the quantities taken per square mile or km. The exactness with which this can be determined, is probably greater than that of the average catch per boat, either per day or year, and it therefore forms a useful method of comparing the abundance of fish and amount of fishing on different areas, and the condition of the same area at different periods. To ascertain the amount of the plaice fishing in the Kattegat by this method, we may rely for the total quantities upon the results given in Table IV. The total area of the Kattegat is, as already stated, approximately 5430 sq. sea miles or 18,600 sq. kilometers. The amounts taken per square mile or kilometer of this area Table VI. Average annual catch of plaice in the Kattegat per square mile and per square kilometer over the period 1895—1902 (a) (b) per square per square | per square | per square mile kilometer mile kilometer Tele Mores Aen ES 814 238 1221 357 BE od ES 212 62 318 93 are shown in (a); as the actual area fished over is probably not more than two-thirds of this total area, the amounts are also calculated for the two-thirds in (b). 37 APPENDIX K: KYLE EG SE Evidence from marking experiments. A second method of investigating the amount of fishing and abundance of fish on an area, is by means of marking experiments. When a large number of fish are marked, the percentage returned has been taken to indicate the intensity of fishing. It has to be noted, however, that this method has also a certain amount of unreliability. For example, if the numbers returned are small, this may be due to irregularities in marking, to the fishermen not returning the fish, and so on; if the numbers returned are large, this may be due to the fish having been replaced on grounds particularly well-fished, so that the percentage returned would not be representative of the whole area. The results of the plaice marking experiments in the Kattegat are not yet published in their entirety. From Trybom’s experiments," it appears, that 13,7°/ of the plaice marked in July 1903 and 17°5°/, of those marked in September 1903, were recovered up to June 1904. These were marked on the Swedish side, and many of them were retaken on the Danish side of the Kattegat, especially at the Skaw. According to Petersen?, 80°/, of the plaice marked in the north-western portion of the Kattegat were returned within four months. Without further information, it is obviously somewhat difficult to say, which of these percentages best represents the intensity of the fishing in the Kattegat as a whole. 4. Summary and conclusions with regard to the Kattegat plaice fishery When the matter is regarded from a broad point of view, the main conclusion which the Danish and Swedish statistics show, regarding the plaice fishery of the Kattegat, is, that the total quantities of plaice taken annually from that region have not decreased over the period 1890—1902, in spite of the fact that the fishing power has greatly increased. An endeavour must be made to reconcile this conclusion with the observations of Petersen in 1804, that the Kattegat plaice had reached its “culmination” about 1890 and thereafter or even earlier had begun to decline. It is necessary to attempt this recon- ciliation, as many may think the two conclusions quite opposed to another, whereas the Opposition is more apparent than real. ; In the first place, it has to be remarked that Petersen laid more stress on the overfishing aspect, and only put forward the view, that a decrease in the stock of plaice had occurred, somewhat hesitatingly. As explained in the beginning, the two problems are here separated, because this enables us to concentrate our attention upon the biological or scientific aspects of the matter. From the scientific standpoint, the most important question is, how can we, on biolog- ical grounds, explain the persistence of the plaice fishery in the Kattegat, in a condition not far from its maximum productivity, for a period sufficiently long to display its exhaustion? Of the phenomena described by Petersen: the decrease in the average catch per boat can be readily explained by the largely increased number of boats, and the decrease in the quantities of large plaice is a phenomenon similar to that exemplified by Hjort 1 Biologiska Undersökninger, 1901—1904. Ur Svenska Hydrografisk biologiska Kommissionens Skrifter. Häftet II. % 2 See Appendix G, p. 17. APPENDIX K: KYLE “20075 usımo,, au} seAIMO Smuremar 24} “Yoo}s poyepnumose,, jeoyeyzodAy ay} sjueserder Gy aAimo ayy ‘1095 194 }YS1TOM 2SP1I0AE 9H} a}¥OIPUI SOAINO ar} OI SOU Iejnorpuadied eux (33 %/x) spunod ysmeq ur »1095 md sYySpM 9m oessiosqe om} (sa100S Jo Jaquinu ay} juosoider ssjeurpio SL s2933n9 OS yo smınya1 9Y} MOI} ‘'Ye3ogyey 24} ur AISUSIF 20184 = SIT APPENDIX K: KYLE goes and Dahl in the Norwegian plaice fisheries; it marks the decrease and even disappearance of the “accumulated stock”. The continuation of the fishery since 1890, at its maximum intensity and high produc- tivity, can only have been possible because the young plaice annually grew sufficiently rapidly and in sufficient numbers to replace the quantity (mass or weight) of the larger plaice, which previously had formed the basis of the fishery. This so to speak second supply of plaice, which maintains the fishery after the disappearence of the accumulated stock has been called the “current stock”. It is well represented in a diagram contained in the Danish Report for 1900 (Plan II, p. 86), and as this diagram may be taken to represent the actual condition of the fishery, it is worthy of reproduction here (See p. 21). The line AS is drawn to represent “the original or accumulated” stock of plaice, the dark lines are the “current stock”. It will be remarked, that the general course of the curves agrees well with that drawn by Petersen’ for the imaginary species “P” and called by him II b. To a certain extent also, the line AS drawn here corresponds to his curve Illa, representing the accu- mulated or “orginal stock of all P.” Petersen, however, makes his III a group include III b, whereas the line AS, representing here the “accumulated stock”, cuts across the lines of the “current stock“. This difference represents an important difference in view. Petersen has drawn his curves on the assumption, that “statistics prove that the weight of “P” (his “hypothet- ical species”) annually is not at present so great as formerly’. The present curves are based on the data just shown with regard to the plaice fishery of the Kattegat. If the line AS were drawn, as Petersen has it, to include all the other curves, this would clearly be opposed to the conclusion the statistics show, namely, that the quantity of plaice taken annually from the Kattegat has not decreased over the period of years, for which statistics exist. This explanation of the persistence of the Kattegat plaice fishery is, in the light of known facts, more than a mere supposition. If the quantities of the largest plaice have decreased, the quantities of the smaller and medium-sized must have increased, in order to maintain the total quantities taken annually at the same constant level. This is a conclusion which, in slightly different forms, has already been put forward by other ob- servers. Thus, Mc Intosh and Masterman, in their work on “British Marine Food- Fishes” (pp. 99, 100) point out, that one effect of “overfishing a district, will be that of multiplying the numbers”, meaning thereby, that the removal of the large fish gives more room and sustenance to the smaller. The same idea has been expressed by Petersen in the essay cited and we have further evidence from his observations that, “in the region round Horns Reef, where the young plaice are very numerous, they grow but slowly, from 4 to 5 cm. yearly, whereas further north in the Skager Rak, where the number of plaice caught per hour is much less than at Horns Reef, they grow much faster, ca. 8 to 11 cm. per annum’’?. Finally, it has to be noted, that the natural tendency of the Kattegat plaice fishery to remain at a fairly constant level is aided by the mode and conditions of fishing. The size of mesh used in the fishing apparatus is larger than that in the narrowest parts of 1 “What is Over-fishing”; Jour. Mar. Biol. Ass., vol. VI, 1903. 2 Manuscript not yet published, — 22 — APPENDIX K: KYLE the trawls used in the North Sea, being 5 cm. from knot to knot as against 3°8 cm. at most. Consequently, the smaller plaice have a better chance to escape. Secondly, the Danish law forbids the sale of plaice under 25:6 cm. (10 Da. inches). Both these circumstances must have some influence in maintaining the numbers of the medium-sized plaice. CoE HISHERIES OL sie NORTH SEA The two cases, just described, throw considerable light on the problems of the North Sea fisheries. In the first example, that of certain Norwegian plaice fisheries, the course of a fishing on a new ground has been shown. The outstanding characteristics of such a fishery are, that the fish are very abundant and very large; they constitute what has been called an “accumulated stock” i.e. the product of many years’ peace and growth. According to all reports, the abundance and large size of fish have been, and are, charac- teristic of all new fishing grounds, and it may be said further, that the fishing-out of this stock has often been mistaken for the coming exhaustion of the fisheries. What is of particular interest in the Norwegian plaice fishery is, that the accumulated stock was fished out within a few years and that the quantities of medium-sized or smaller fish were not sufficient, until a long period of rest had intervened, to make the fishing a paying concern. Under the physical conditions which prevail on the north-west Norwegian coast and islands, the only plaice fishery possible is that which is dependent on “accumu- lated stocks”. In the case of the Kattegat, the area is much larger and the physical conditions more equable and less destructive to the early fish-life than those existing on the Norwegian coast. The plaice fishery in the Kattegat seems to have also gone through the stage when the “accumulated stock“ was being fished up. The peculiar characteristic of the Kattegat plaice fishery, as contrasted with that in Norway, is, that the fishery did not cease with the disappearance of the accumulated stock, but has persisted since that time. It has been shown, that the persistence of this fishery at practically the same level cannot be due to the increase in the price of plaice alone, but is mainly due to the stock of plaice remaining undiminished. The “accumulated stock“ of large fish has certainly no chance of reappearing, but its place has been taken by a stock of smaller medium-sized fish, which seems quite able to meet the demands of the fishermen and yet maintain the quantities of the species at a fairly constant level. This second supply of fish has been called the “current stock”, to distinguish it from the “accumulated stock”, on the one hand, and the undersized fish on the other. Since the total quantity by weight taken annually has not decreased, it follows that the “current stock” must be composed of greater numbers than the “accumulated stock”. This is explained by the theory, based on plaice-marking experiments, that the smaller plaice now grow much faster than formerly. Lastly, two main differences between the plaice fishery of the Kattegat and that of the North Sea have been noted; firstly, that the size of mesh in the nets used is larger, and secondly, that the Danish law forbids the sale of plaice under 25:6 cm. APPENDIX K: KYLE — 24 — The contrast between these two examples may also be interpreted in terms of over- fishing. It may be said, that the Norwegian plaice fisheries show the final effect of over- fishing. In the case of the Kattegat plaice fishery, it may be said, that the amount of fishing has been practically overfishing, or at least on the borders of overfishing, for a number of years. In other words, overfishing may result in a decrease of fish and an cessation of a fishery, or it may not. This shows the advisability, as stated in the beginning, of ascertaining first of all, whether a decrease of fish has or has not taken place and what the decrease really consists in. The value of the various factors which, at one time or another, have been taken to indicate overfishing or intensity of fishing, namely, average catch of the boats per day or per annum, decrease in the average size, percentage of marked fish returned etc., has been sufficiently discussed in describing the Kattegat plaice fishery. It is unnecessary, therefore, to consider the fragmentary evidence of a similar nature which has been brought forward with regard to the North Sea fisheries. The order to be followed in considering the North Sea fisheries may be put in the form of questions. 1. Do the fisheries of the North Sea resemble the cases of the Norwegian plaice fishery cited, or the plaice fishery of the Kattegat? A brief comparison of the physical conditions will show, that the North Sea is on the whole more akin to the Kattegat. Further, both are what may be called self-contained areas biologically for most of the principal species, that is, the young grow up within the regions, though not necessarily at the same places, where the adults live. The course of the fishing in the North Sea should therefore resemble that of the Kattegat, and from what is known of the fishing, it may be taken for granted, that the first stage has already been passed, namely, that the “accumulated stock” of the principal flat fishes and perhaps also of the round fishes, has practically been fished up. The problems to be faced are therefore: 2. Is the “current stock” able to meet the demands of the fishermen and yet to maintain the species at practically the same constant level; in other words, have the total quantities (weight) taken annually, of the species to be considered, remained constant? 3. It so, what is the composition of the current stock? What is the average size of the fish taken and the proportion of small to large? In addition to these, there are also subordinate questions to be considered, such as the amount of the fishing in the North Sea compared with that in the Kattegat, the amount of fishing as measured by the boats etc. To answer these questions, information has been taken from the statistics of the different countries with regard to the following species: plaice, sole, turbot, brill, haddock, cod and herring. The total quantities of all species landed at North Sea ports have also been estimated so far as that was possible. 1. Physical conditions of the North Sea in relation to the present problems In many ways, the North Sea is very similar to the Kattegat. Both have their main entrances opening to the north, and communicate by narrow channels with other large expanses of water in the south. The circulation of the waters depends, in great part, — APPENDIX K: KYLE upon this peculiar formation. The main Atlantic stream in both areas, enters from the north-west and dominates the character of the water and the direction of the currents over nearly the whole expanse. In the North Sea, this main stream passes southward along the east coast of Scotland and England as far as the coast of Norfolk, and then turns to the east and later to the north. The second stream, entering from the English Channel, retains its distinctive character for but a comparatively short distance in the North Sea and has only a special influence, as regards the fisheries, on the south-eastern corner along the Belgian and Dutch coasts. Of more importance is the fresh water of the continental rivers, which mixes with the main stream over the shallow flats on the eastern continental side. In the Kattegat, the second stream, entering from the south, is comparatively fresh water, so that, where it mixes with the main stream over the shallow southern and western parts, the resultant water has a much lower salinity than the Atlantic stream. The nature and configuration of the bottom are likewise similar in the two regions. The depth over the greater part of both is less than 44 fathoms (80 m.) and there is a broad tract under 11 fathom (20 m.) along one side, on the east in the North Sea, the west in the Kattegat. The bottom-soil is for the most part sandy down to a depth of 20 fathoms, thereafter it is of a muddy character. So far as is known at present, these two characteristics, of warm shallow sandy flats and water of reduced salinity, are important factors in the life of the plaice. The great majority of the young plaice of one to two years old are found in less than 10 fathoms, and the chief plaice fishing is carried on in less than 30 fathoms. Further, the direction and force of the oceanic currents tend to bring the pelagic young towards the flat sandy coasts, not away from them, as has been noted in the case of the Norwegian plaice fisheries. These facts are of importance, therefore, in considering the effects of fishing on the plaice population of the Kattegat and North Sea. Both are peculiarly adapted to the plaice and nowhere else do we find such large areas so suited to its requirements; further, there is no other of the principal food-fishes so specialized in this way. The real centres for the sole, brill and turbot lie further to the west and south, and their bathymetric range is much greater than that of the plaice. Amongst the principal round fishes, again, the only species that is specially at home in the North Sea like the plaice, is the haddock. As will be shown, the condition of the haddock fishery in the North Sea is similar in many respects to that of the plaice. The limits of the North Sea are here taken to be: on the west, the British Isles and a line drawn due north from Shetland to 61° N.L.; on the north, from this point along the line of 61° to Norway; on the east, Norway from 61°N.L. to the Naze and along a line from the Naze to Hanstholm in Denmark, thence the Danish, German, Dutch, Belgian and French coasts; on the south, South Foreland in England to Cape Grisnez in France. In the Norwegian fisheries reports, the northen limit of the North Sea on the Nor- wegian side is Cape Stat 62°11’N.L., and this limit is also taken by Kriimmel', whose limits otherwise, are also quite different from those taken here, and by Henking?. The limits taken here are in accordance with the International Convention of 1882. 1 Versuch einer vergleichenden Morphologie der Meeresgriinde. Leipzig 1879. 2 Mitteilungen des Deutschen Seefischerei-Vereins, 1901, p. 3. Appendix K 4 APPENDIX K: KYLE aOR es For general purposes, the difference is unimportant, but it makes a little difficulty with regard to the amount of the Norwegian fisheries, which should be included in the North Sea. The total area of the North Sea, defined as above, is c. 144,500 sq. miles or 496,400 sq. km. Within the limits taken by Krtimmel, the area is 547,623 sqare km. The whole of this area, however, is not fished in. The extreme limit of trawling at the present time is 100 fathoms (182 meters), and comparatively little is done beyond 60 fathoms. Further, within the fishing area, there are large tracts which cannot be fished on. If the Oyster Bank (see Chart) is omitted, the extent ot the rough ground or untrawl- able area is about 9°/, of the whole, but including the Oyster Bank, the potes area is 13°. of the whole". 2. Statistics of the plaice fishery in the North Sea seems appropriate to begin the consideration of the North Sea fisheries statistics with the plaice, the species most prominent in discussions on the overfishing problems. As with the remaining species to be considered, difficulties in connection with the statistics - are given in the form of notes appended to the tables. The estimate of the total quantities of plaice landed at North Sea ports since 1892, is shown in Table VII. The quantities taken by Belgium are not forthcoming, but their absence probably makes no more difference to the conclusions one may feel inclined to make, than the errors actually known to be present in the figures given. It is certain, for example, that the figures for England are from 2 to 6 million kg. too high, for each year. This is due to the quantities taken outside the North Sea but landed at ports on the east coast of England. How far this affects the difference between the first and the last years is, of course, not known. Again, some quantities of plaice are landed in Germany and Scotland from beyond the North Sea, and in the Scottish figures the increase since 1898 is referable in great part to species other than plaice. On the other hand, the figures for Denmark are from 1 to 2 million kg. too low during the later years. Balancing these against one another, it is probable finally, that the total quantities given are about 5 million kg. too high. It is not possible to conclude from these figures, that the total quantity of plaice landed annually from the North Sea has decreased over the years mentioned, even if allowance be made for the quantities taken outside this area. It seems more reasonable to think, that the quantities have remained practically constant — just as was concluded for the Kattegat plaice fishery. The question then arises, what is the composition of the total quantity of plaice landed annually from the North Sea? From the number of years the fishing for plaice has been going on in the North Sea — and the entire area frequented by the plaice has been fished over for the whole period considered — it is reasonable to conclude, that the “accumulated stock” has been fished up and that the “current stock” is now the main source of supply, as in the Kattegat. This is certainly the case for the southern 1 Mr. Martin Knudsen of Copenhagen has kindly assisted in making these calculations. The extent of the rough ground as shown in the Chart is taken from the 1903 Chart compiled by Olsen and published by Imray, London. 7 — APPENDIX K: KYLE and eastern parts of the North Sea, where the intensity of the fishing is probably as great as in the Kattegat and the plaice are of a uniformly smaller size than in the central and northen portions. In the latter regions, indeed, the problem is quite distinct from that of the southern and eastern regions, and if it had been possible, the statistics for these regions would have been considered separately. Taking the various regions as one, however, it has to be noted first of all, that the composition of the current stock is somewhat different from that in the Kattegat. In the latter region, it is composed mainly of plaice from 25 to 35 cm. (10 to 14 inches) long, and plaice of 50 cm. (20 inches) are rare. In the North Sea, it is composed of plaice from 20 to 60 cm. (8 to 24 inches) with 75 cm. (30 inches) as the upper limit. It may be concluded also, from the extent of the area and the modes of fishing, that the current stock will always have this composition, if the conditions of fishing remain the same. There is no data to hand concerning the average size of the plaice taken in the North Sea as a whole, but it is possible to show for Germany and Holland, that this average size must have decreased during recent years (see Tables VIII and X). In both countries, the proportion of large plaice has become less since 1896. As the total quantities for Germany have not increased during that period, it follows, that the : average size of the plaice landed in that country must have considerably decreased. As to Holland, Table X shows that the small plaice are in remarkable preponderance. The quantities of small plaice landed in Holland have increased so much of recent years, that a fourth class for still smaller plaice has been formed in the statistics for Ijmuiden. Again, the plaice landed in Denmark from the North Sea during recent years are all on the borderland between medium and small (see Part I, p. 26). No precise information has yet been published as to the quantities of small plaice taken by the English trawlers from the North Sea, but, from the preliminary data given by Archer‘, they must be considerable. There seems no doubt from these facts, that the proportion of small plaice taken from the North Sea has greatly increased during the period of years considered. At the present time, probably more than half the quantities (by weight) of the plaice taken from the North Sea are small plaice under 26 to 30 cm. (10 to 12 inches). If the total quan- tities landed per annum remain constant, and there is no reason for believing otherwise at present, this can only be due to an increase in the quantities of the smaller to counter- balance the decrease in the quantities of the larger. It may be concluded also, that this is not merely a statistical phenomenon but has actually occurred in the North Sea, in the same way and for the same reasons as it has occurred in the Kattegat (see p. 22). It is of interest and perhaps of some practical importance to push the comparison between the plaice fishing of the Kattegat and that of the North Sea still further. It has been shown above (p. 20), that the amount of the fishing in the Kattegat is at least 814 km. per square mile or 238 kg. per square kilometer, or if we consider that only */; rds of the area is fished over, 1221 kg. and 318 kg. respectively. The amount of the fishing in the North Sea may be estimated by the same method. The limit of the plaice fishing may be considered 80 meters (c. 44 fathoms) as for the Kattegat. The extent of the area lying within this line? (see Chart, Line I) is ca. 92,000 : Report, Sea Fisheries Bill (H. L.) 1904, pp. 14 and 180 et seq. 2 Excluding the Skager Rak. APPENDIX K: KYLE noue square miles or 316,300 square km. Omitting 1902 as abnormal, and making allowances for the quantities not caught in the North Sea, the accompanying table shows, that the average catch of plaice over the years considered does not exceed 45,000,000 kg. The average catch per square mile has therefore been ca. 490 kg., or per square km., ca. 140 kg. ; at 2/,rds of the area, the catch has been naturally 735 kg. and 210 kg. respectively. It appears from this, that the result of the plaice fishing in the North Sea per square mile is little more than half of what it is in the Kattegat. Several things have to be noted, however, in this connection. Firstly, the trawlable area in the North Sea is less than that stated, owing to the presence of rough or rocky gound. The extent of this untrawlable ground, as shown in the Chart, is (including the Oyster Bank) about 17°/, of the whole plaice area. In the Kattegat on the other hand, the extent of the untrawlable ground isless than 7 °/.. Making corrections for this, the amount of the fishing in the Kattegat is ca. 875 kg. per square mile or 256 kg. per square kg., and that in the North Sea ca. 600 kg. per square mile or 170 kg. per square km. Secondly, the mode and conditions of fishing are not the same in the two areas. In the Kattegat fishing, the smallest size of mesh used is 2 inches (5 cm.) from knot to knot, whereas in the North Sea it is, for the largest trawls, about 11/, inches (3:8 cm.) and only 1 inch (2'5 cm.) for the smaller trawls. Further, the Danish law forbids the sale of small plaice under 10 inches (25.6 cm.). Both these circumstances tend to diminish the number of small plaice landed from the Kattegat. Thirdly, the intensity of the fishing on the offshore grounds, by the steam trawlers, is only a fraction of what it is on the inshore grounds. For one thing, the plaice are scarcer there; again, it does not pay the large steam trawlers to fish a ground so intensely as the smaller sailing trawlers do. The result of this is, that the large plaice have a better chance of escaping capture than the smaller, and to this is due, probably, the constant presence of their offspring in such immense quantities on the inshore grounds. Taking these points into consideration, it is very probable that the fishing on the inshore grounds, meaning, more especially, the so-called eastern grounds extending from Horns Reef to the Dutch coast, is as great as in the Kattegat. The plaice found on these grounds are of a smaller size, on the average, than those of the Kattegat and do not enjoy the same measure of protection. The question whether a similar size limit to that prevailing in the Kattegat would be of advantage to the North Sea plaice fishery, is too complex to be discussed at any length | here. Two points may be noted however. From the Danish researches round the Horns Reef and in the Skager Rak, it has been found, that the plaice on the former area are more abundant but grow much slower than those in the Skager Rak (see p. 22). It is hardly possible to conclude otherwise, than that the abundance has some influence in retarding the rate of growth. Consequently, any protection of the young plaice would still further hinder the growth. On the other hand, it is evident from the foregoing description, that if the plaice fishery of the North Sea is allowed to continue as at present, the proportion of small plaice will become still greater at the expense of the large, and if Holland be taken as example, a still smaller size of plaice will have to be brought to market to maintain the supply. If the decision lies between these two evils, then assuredly the latter is worse than the former. a APPENDIX K: KYLE Table VII. Quantities of plaice (P/. A/atessa) landed at North Sea ports for the years and countries mentioned, in kilograms Denmark England Scotland (west coast) EST Helene (ea (east coast) aa CP ee hale 2,688,000 6,243,000 | 31,544,000 | 2,864,000 || 43,339,000 RICK, Sct Area Lense aoe 4,070,000 6,941,000 38,542,000 3,158,000 52,711,000 TEDL Ys oo goh bacon eee 4,065,000 6,599,000 39,311,000 3,404,000 33,379,000 TSB) à olivine done 698,000 | 2,945,000 | 5,352,000 | 34,054,000 | 3,331,000 || 46,380,000 DOSE re. 1,324,000 | 3,453,000 | 4,466,000 | 32,312,000 | 3,396,000 | 44,950,000 HEY) 308 ds soon sehe 943,000 2,957,000 5,519,000 33,503,000 2,853,000 || 45,775,000 MSQSi rae en. 1,18:,000 2,638,000 5,528,000 32,049,000 3,020,000 || 44,426,000 HC) apie one tee 2,160,000 3,305,000 5,748,000 35,159,000 4,161,000 | 50,533,000 TOOO EE Er ee ee 2,31 3,000 2,567,000 5,856,000 35,579,000 4,690,000 51,005,000 TOU, sso enone Oe aR 2,566,000 3,003,000 7,225,000 40,205,000 5,703,000 58,702,000 TO... 4,423,000 | 3,760,000 | 9,256,000 | 61,600,000 | 4,919,000 || 83,958,000 ISO. LASER 2,282,000 2,770,000 6,446,000 5,183,000 Notes on the Table showing quantities of plaice Denmark: The Danish statistics give the quantities of plaice partly in pounds, partly in numbers. As the values for each are given, it has been possible to change the numbers into pounds and thence to kilograms (Part I, p. 24). The quantities of plaice represented are not the total quantities taken by the Danish fishermen from the North Sea. A considerable portion is landed at the Kattegat ports by the cutters fishing in the Skager Rak and North Sea, and a further portion is landed direct at Hamburg. For the years 1902 and 1903, these together must have amounted to a further 2,000,000 kilograms, but in earlier years the quantities were somewhat less (Part I, p. 26). Since 1896, the Danish plaice fishing in the North Sea has been practi- cally confined to the south of Horns Reef. Germany: The quantities for the earlier years have been partly estimated (Part I, p. 46). The quantities given, only include the plaice landed directly and sold at the four chief ports, Hamburg, Altona, Geestemtinde and Bremerhaven. Fish landed and consumed at the smaller villages on the coast, e. g. from the fishery on the East Frisian coast, is not Table VIII. Proportions of large (plus medium) and small plaice landed at Geestemiinde (since 1895), and Bremerhaven (since 1899) arge te D A Small TOO ee 32 lo 68 %o ESQOW AMAR 31 - | 69 = USOT A oe 36 - 64 - MEQ Si Seat PES 29 - I Ue) en 19 - I Sa FOOD ee 20 - 80 - LOC ae were 17 - 83 - 10028 SA | Ta RE ae TOO EIN Bhs I ae Sane LOOK! AIG header 13 - 87 - APPENDIX K: KYLE -- 30 — included. Imported plaice, as from Denmark, are also omitted here. Altona is the chief market for these, and in 1903, the quantities of plaice imported there or sent from other parts of Germany amounted to over 150,000 kg. In the statistics for Altona, the dab (P. limanda) is included with the plaice. In the statistics for Geestemünde (Since 1895) and Bremerhaven (since 1899), two classes of plaice are distinguished, large and medium together and small. The actual limits between these are not stated, but it is of some interest to show how the proportions of these classes have varied relatively to one another (Table VII). These proportions are calculated from the weight not the numbers of plaice. Plaice from Iceland and the Færoe Isles are not separately distinguished in the statis- tics, nor those taken in the Skager Rak and Kattegat. The actual quantities taken from the North Sea by the German fishermen are therefore slightly smaller than these figures indicate. Holland: The quantities given are in part estimates (Part I, p.72). The figures in this table refer only to the plaice landed from the North Sea. In addition to these, con- siderable quantities have of recent years been brought from Iceland and the Færoes by the steam trawlers, as shown in the following table. Table IX. Quantity of plaice landed in Holland from Iceland and the Feroe-Isles, in aie fe Iceland Færoes =| Total | MOOT EE NR 37,300 37,300 TQO2 Yes aera 16,700 | 25 | 16,725 GOW) Oey ee ee 24700 | 750 | 25,450 These quantities from Iceland and the Feroes represent the fish sold at the state auction in Ijmuiden. The Dutch official statistics divide the plaice landed into three sorts, large, medium and small. In 1903, a fourth division for smaller plaice is given in the statistics for Ijmuiden. The proportions of these different groups are shown in the following table, the fourth division for 1903 being taken with the third. Table X. Proportions of large, medium and small plaice landed at Ymuiden and sold at the state auction. Large Medium Small TEEN. PATES Sun 95 Jo SGN 4 9 Yo 87 - TSQ8 EE OA 4 - 9 - 87 - 1899.27 NES 4 - 8 - 83 - TOO UMA ALES I - 5 - 94 - IHOT. u... 07 - 4 - 95 - LOD2 EME ETES I - Bun 96 - TQOZ Gh An er I - 4 - 95 - LOOAMRE EL ELLES 2 - 3 - 95 - The proportions for 1896 represent only the quantities landed during the last six months of the year. The proportions are calculated from the weights not the numbers. a = Ol — APPENDIX K: KYLE The actual limits between these various groups are not given. England: The statistics of the plaice landed on the east coast of England include large quantities brought from grounds outside the North Sea. For the earlier years, these quantities are not known, but for 1903, Archer (l.c. p. 183) estimates provisionally, that they amounted to ca. 13°/, of the total quantities of plaice landed in England and Wales. This would mean between 5 and 6 million kilograms for 1903 alone, but whether the quantities have been less or more during previous years is not known. The different classes of plaice, large, medium and small, are not separately disting- uished in the statistics up to 1902. Scotland. The “plaice” for Scotland includes: flounder, brill, megrims, witches and dabs. The increase in the total quantities since 1898 is referable in great part to these extra species (see Part I, p. 115). The quantities of plaice brought from Iceland and the Færoes and landed at ports on the east coast of Scotland are said to be small (see Part I, p. 115). Further, there is said to be no plaice of small size landed. 3. Statistics of the sole fishery in the North Sea The prominence of the plaice in discussions on overfishing has somewhat obscured the importance of the sole. This has a greater bathymetric: range than the plaice, but its distribution in the North Sea is more limited and more easily definable. The lower line (Il) drawn across the Chart encloses the maximum area to the south, where sole fishing is carried on. As the sole is the most valuable species of the North Sea fishes and is sold separately, the statistics have a greater accuracy than those of the plaice. Further, the quantities brought to North Sea ports from grounds outside the North Sea are relatively small (if any), and negligible in comparison with the numbers taken within it. The statistical data with regard to the sole have therefore the greatest value in studying the effects of severe fishing in the NorthSea. The quantities taken by Belgium, which lies close to the richest sole areas, are unfortunately not forthcoming, but to judge from the numbers of the fishing fleet (Part I, p.91) it is not probable, that the quantities landed in Belgium over the period considered have increased. Table XII shows, that the quantities of the sole landed at North Sea ports since 1892 have unmistakeably decreased. If it is assumed, that the period is sufficiently long for conclusions to be formed, there seems but one cause, apart from an actual decrease of the stock, which might explain this decrease; viz. the amount of fishing for the sole is not so great as it formerly was, i.e. the catches taken are not so representative as they formerly were. This possibility has something to be said for it. In the first place, it has to be noted that the otter trawl was introduced generally in 1895—96, and this apparatus is relatively not so suited to the capture of soles as the beam trawl. Secondly, the sailing trawlers using the beam trawl have very greatly decreased in all the countries concerned. Thirdly, if we suppose that the current stock of soles has come to have a similar composition as that of the plaice, namely, that the quantities of the small are relatively in greater abundance than formerly, the decrease in the total quantities may be in part explained by the fact, that the smaller soles escape more readily from the trawl APPENDIX K: KYLE = m — than the young plaice. This would mean that the decrease in the total quantities is due, in part at least, to the decrease in the larger soles not being counterbalanced by an increase in the catch of the smaller kinds. The last possibility is to a certain extent supported by the tables, showing the relative proportions of the small and large soles landed at certain ports in Germany and Holland: The Tables XIII & XIV show, that the proportion of large soles has somewhat decreased since 1895, though not to the same extent as was noticeable for the plaice. The German statistics give the small and medium sizes together, and but little can be concluded therefore from their relative increase. From the table for Holland it appears, that the small are almost in the same relative proportion as the medium, so far as weight is concerned, but much more abundant as regards numbers. The percentage of small, however, is not so preponderant as it was in the case of the plaice for the same country (Table X). Whatever may be the reason, the fact remains, that the quantities of soles landed from the North Sea have decreased and this arises from the. diminished capture of the larger kinds. Table XI. Average annual catch of soles in kilograms per square kilometer, over the years f 1892—1902 1892—95 1896—1900 I9OI— 1902 1892 — 1902 per squarekilom. | per square kilom. | per square kilom.|| per spuare kilom. (OT nee 29 25 19 26 For trawlable area (excluding also Oyster Bar) soda fogs © ree R PAT 37 32 24 32 Table XII. Quantities of soles (So/ea vulgaris) landed at North Sea ports for the years and countries mentioned, in kilograms ee ane Gerzung | Horn POR! | TSO 2 ne ys ART | 234,000 611,000 2,689,000 3,534,000 isla feb peach Ces ToS | 226,000 684,000 3,056,000 3,966,000 HE soo gosccnsonsas acc | 359,000 743,000 3,147,000 4,249,000 Hite Oi, ie ART EEE ATES 760 281,000 476,000 - 3,122,000 3,880,000 TEGO) a eae HA eee II5 383,000 308,000 3,043,000 3,734,000 TSG Tr a RN — 283,000 555,000 2,725,000 3,563,000 TOQS EEE ER 475 342,000 333,000 2,608,000 3,283,000 TSQO ave ra cee Re ei 30 416,000 324,000 2,577,000 3,317,000 TOC ey accion ee UE 175 278,000 335,000 2,381,000 2,994,000 TOOT RIM EN 3,000 284,000 272,000 2,162,000 2,721,000 TOO2 FT EMPIRE ALERTER 3,000 264,000 359,000 1,795,000 2,421,000 STONED Beh CR Gh A HUE 14,003 275,750 411,870 From the total quantities and the area over which this species is fished, it is possible to estimate the quantities taken per square mile. The total area as marked on the Chart (Line II) is ca. 39,000 sq. miles or 134,000 sq. kilometres, ‘The extent of the rough or — 33 — APPENDIX K: KYLE untrawlable ground is 14°/, of this not including the Oyster Bank, but 28 °/, including it. The trawlable area is thus ca. 33,500 sq. miles or 115,240 sq. kilometers, or if the Oyster Bank is included in the rough ground, ca. 28,080 sq. miles or 106,480 sq. kilometers. The quantities taken over these areas are shown in Table XI. Notes on the Table showing quantities of sole Denmark. The statistics give the quantities of soles sometimes in pounds, some- times in numbers. Where both divisions occur, the corresponding values are given, and from these values, the numbers have been changed to pounds and thence to kilograms (Part I, p. 24). A small quantity of soles taken by the Kattegat cutters fishing in the Skager Rak and North Sea, is included in the statistics for the Kattegat, and is not represented here. Germany. The quantities for the earlier years are partly estimated (Part I, p. 46). The quantities stated represent the fish landed directly from the sea and sold at the four chief ports, Hamburg, Altona, Geestemünde and Bremerhaven. A portion of the coast fishery is excluded and likewise the imports. The reason for the exclusion of these is, partly that the actual amounts are uncer- tain, partly because the same fish may have been entered in the returns elsewhere, either in Germany or other countries. The statistics for’ Geestemtinde (since 1895) and Bremerhaven (since 1899) give the quantities of soles landed in two classes, large and (medium +) small. The actual limits between these classes are not stated. The relative proportions of these, calculated from weight not numbers, are shown in the following table. Table XIII. Proportions of large and (medium -) small soles landed at Geestemünde and Bremerhaven (since 1899) mall + BRS pies TOO ENS 83 0/ 17 %/o DÉOO ys shaver ce 76 - 24 - TOO Ta te en 64 - Son - OSTERN. 60 - 40 - USI) es 68 - 32 - TOCO er 72 - 28 - TOO Le. 69 - 31 - LOO2 I TE nici 62 - 38 - TOO eine 59 - 41 - Holland. The quantities given for earlier years, are in part estimates. The pub- lished statistics give the quantities in numbers, and three classes are made, large, medium and small. The limits betveen these are not stated. The following table shows the proportionate amounts of these different classes landed at Ijmuiden since 1890. For 1896, the quantities represent only the last six months of the year, viz. July to December. The relative proportions by weight have been calculated from the equivalents given for Holland (Part I, p. 73). Appendix K 5 APPENDIX K: KYLE — 34 — Table XIV. Proportions of large, medium and small soles landed at Ijmuiden, and sold at the state auction Large Medium Small numbers kilog. numbers kilog. numbers kilog. TOO Er RR 44 0) 66 % 28 %o 25 % 28 %o 9 %o 18974. Bee 19 - 46 - Io - 15 - ce 39 - TOBIT et 25 - 48 - | 26 - Bi = 49 - Gee TOO Me AE EE DEE 2 44 - 32° - 37 - 45 - 19 - RIOO 4 MEN. Ra: 18 - 38 - 30 - 38 - 52 - 24 - TOOD ER EE 21 - 43 - 30 - 36 - 49 - 21 - 1902 er ss 18 - 40 - 2200 30 - 60 - 30 - TOO A MAN ron HE 16 - 38 - 23 - 3I - GT 31 - England. The statistical data, with regard to the sole landed on the east coast of England, may contain some small quantities brought from the English Channel and more southern waters. 4. Statistics of the turbot and brill As the turbot, like the sole, is sold separately, and the quantities are readily estimated, the statistics with regard to it should have the greatest degree of accuracy. It is probable, however, that a portion of the quantities given in Table XV come from grounds outside the North Sea. Owing to the extension of trawling within recent years into the Atlantic, to the west of Scotland and to more southern waters, the probability is also, that the quantities from outside the North Sea have been greater in later years than in earlier. If this be the case, it appears from the table that the quantities are hardly maintaining themselves. The influence which affect the catch of soles (see p. 31) cannot, so far as is known, have any effect on the catch of turbot. Table XVI shows, that the proportion of small turbot landed in Germany has greatly increased of recent years, and as the total quantities have not increased correspondingly, the quantities of the large must have decreased. The same phenomenon has probably occurred in other countries, but there are no statistics to illustrate the point. The quantities of brill are not separately distinguished, except in Germany and England. Table XVII shows, that the quantities taken of this species are considerably smaller than those of the other “prime” fish, the sole and turbot, but that a decrease in the total quantities is not so noticeable. It is worthy of remark, that the three species mentioned, namely the sole, turbot and brill, have a greater reproductive fertility than the plaice, and one of them at least, the turbot, grows much faster. It is remarkable, therefore, that the quantities of these species are so distinctly less than those of the plaice. Notes on the Table showing quantities of turbot Denmark. The turbot and brill are taken together in the Danish statistics. A small quantity of turbot and brill is also taken by the Kattegat cutters fishing in the Skager — 35 — APPENDIX K: KYLE Table XV. Quantities of turbot (Rhombus maximus) landed at North Sea ports for the years and countries mentioned, in kilograms ark nglan ee cb Germany Balsam eh a kom HAS) d LATIN RME 247,000 114,000 2,681,000 195,000 3,237,000 SOR «2e MOUSE 285,000 125,000 | 2,956,000 187,000 3,553,000 ÉVITE 293,000 153,000 3,665,000 136,000 4,247,000 MSO Steerer ei luche. 36 316,000 151,000 3,421,000 159,000 4,047,000 1 NT Re A 17 479,000 157,000 3,368,000 246,000 4,250,000 SIO faints Na eases UN 62 408,000 120,000 2,812,000 225,000 3,565,000 URS a te ai hs = 381,000 147,000 2,631,000 287,000 3,446,007 OR) are beeen eee anes = 374,000 143,000 2,531,000 311,000 3,359,000 TC AE RN — _ 302,000 187,000 2,325,000 257,000 3,071,000 MOO ist = 318,000 210,000 1,954,000 | 261,000 2,743,000 1002 EN URL dy ais = 335,000 340,000 2,181,000 275,000 3,131,000 TOO apts) ern Toys 396,000 322,000 443,000 Rak and North Sea, but landing their fish in Kattegat ports. The exact quantity is not known, and it is not known either, how much is taken in the Skager Rak, how much in the North Sea. Germany. The quantities given for the earlier years are in part estimates (see Part I, p.46). The figures given are based on the actual returns of fish sold by the auctioneers at Altona, Hamburg, Geestemünde and Bremerhaven. These represent the deep-sea fishery for the most part, the coastal fishery not being included save in so far as the fish caught are sold at these chief markets. The statistics for Bremerhaven (1899 onwards) and Geestemünde give two divisions for the turbot, Jarge and small. The proportions for a period of years are shown in the following table. Table XVI. Proportions of large (+ medium) and small turbot landed at Geestemiinde (since 1895) and Bremerhaven (since 1899) arge en Small elek A 71 %o 29 ©o TOGOR ET ber ehe 64 — 36 — 1007 enh ue EAN 79 — 30 — EL RES PE 76 — 24 — TEGO eee NEE Rene 69 — 31 — fo (9.0 ree ch, nts oan aoe oi — ASS TION ees ANR ee 57 — 43 — TOO Te MNT 47 — 53 — 1963... Tee 42 — 58 — Holland. The quantities given are in part estimates. No distinction is made between large and small turbot in the Dutch statistics, and some brill and halibut are included under the same heading. . Ips APPENDIX K: KYLE HE England and Scotland. It is probable, that some of the turbot landed on the east coast come in reality from places outside the North Sea. No distinction is made between large and small turbot in the reports. Table XVII. Quantities of brill (R/oméus /evis) landed at North Sea ports, in kilograms Germany a t) Total TOQ2 Assert Nee 52,000 741,000 793,000 DODGE PP sree haces 60,000 | 767,000 827,000 TSG Henan eh ae 84,000 | 750,000 $34,000 1805 ster ee ARR 83,000 732,000 815,000 8G (OR ORTEN ER, 102,000 727,000 829,000 WEY) oo Sos Goan bon 93,000 594,000 687,000 TROP AE Re Oe 121,000 594,000 715,000 ISOS) dut 20e oo od 156,000 632,000 788,000 TOGO wate ee 172,000 693,000 865,000 TOOT anya nore 164,000 546,000 710,000 OO A Sanam arc d à 198,000 840,000 1,038,000 UGB ohysasvonceaen 198,000 Notes on the Table showing quantities of brill For most countries, the brill is not separately distinguished. In Denmark and Holland it is taken with the turbot, in Scotland with the plaice. Germany. The quantities of the earlier years are in part estimates. The statistical tables for Bremerhaven and Geestemünde distinguish between large and small brill. The proportions of these over a period of years are shown in the following table. Table XVIII. Proportions of large (+ medium) and small brill landed at Geestemiinde (since 1895) and Bremerhaven (since 1899) Large (+ medium) Sal 1895 PAS Cr crys ECS ote etl 57 %o | 43 °/0 FS96 7 AE 63 — 37 — 1807 RENE AU 68 — 32 — LOOB RTE 68 — 32 — TOGO RE ACTA te ees 48 — 52 — LIOO u. nee 46 — 54 — TOOT uy RE ER 44 — 56 — TGO2). MEN CRE 43 — 57 — TOO CAP EC 40 — 60 — 5. Statistics of the haddock fishery in the North Sea The statistical data shown in Table XIX cannot be taken to represent the quantities of haddock fished in the North Sea, as the quantities taken from outside the North Sea are included. From the details given below with regard to Germany, it appears, that at — 37 — APPENDIX K: KYLE least 20°/, of the haddock landed in Germany during 1902 and 1903 came from Iceland and the Færoe Isles. If similar proportions are brought from those places by the English and Scottish liners and trawlers, nearly one fifth of the total quantities stated for later years have not been taken in the North Sea. The amount of uncertainty in the figures is thus very large, but it certainly seems as if the catches were at a maximum in 1895—96, the years which saw the introduction of the otter-trawl, and that they have since then steadily declined. If the quantities brought from Iceland have increased since that time, as the German statistics would indicate, there seems every possibility that the quantities taken from the North Sea have really decreased. It is only from the German and Dutch statistics, that any information is forthcoming with regard to the relative proportions of the various sizes which enter into the compo- sition of the catches. The data for Holland are the more valuable, because the smallest class of haddocks is included with the whiting in the statistics for Geestemtinde and is not represented in Table XX. It will be seen from these tables, that the proportion of small haddocks landed is very great and has increased within recent years. It may be mentioned also, that, in the Scottish Fishery Board Report for 1901, note is made of the large quantities of small haddocks which were being landed in Scotland. Whether this means that the same process is going on with regard to the haddock as has been noted in the case of the plaice, namely, that the quantities taken of the large are decreasing or at most stationary, whilst those of the small are increasing, cannot be told from existing information with certainty. Table XIX. Quantities of haddock (G. aeglefinus) landed at North Sea ports for the years and countries mentioned, in kilograms ngland cotland er CE ele Ce (es coast) Isa I tty is analy DAS. 8,823,000 3,084,000 95,080,000 | 34,930,000 | 142,517,000 TRIG ee 10,285,000 3,193,000 98,135,000 | 33,638,000 | 145,251,000 HÉCLUÉ AE EE ies Coane ee 12,774,000 3,131,000 | 108,573,000 | 39,975,000 | 164,453,000 OO Sees eee 3,178,000 14,449,000 | 3,110,000 | 121,103,000 | 49,175,000 | 191,015,000 TINS.” Se ioe en ere 3,300,000 15,126,000 4,176,000 | 126,879,000 | 48,274,000 || 197,755,000 MOOT wey none RER 2,377,000 13,971,000 2,946,000 125,976,000 | 42,677,000 || 187,947,000 LC LÉ RE 1,409,000 12,411,000 2,563,000 | 128,875,000 | 37,092,000 | 182,350,000 MODO Ne 1,059,000 9,988,000 1,623,000 | 130,350,000 | 39,194,000 || 182,214,000 ICO jah ONE SRO aes Le 727,000 8,950,000 1,880,000 | 122,805,000 | 38,157,000 | 172,519,000 MQ OR seen thes 511,000 8,576,000 2,380,000 | 117,763,000 | 41,774,000 | 171,004,000 QOD!» Sse ere en ena 597,000 10,566,000 4,780,000 | I01,115,000 | 45,220,000 | 162,278,000 GORE Er ; 1,503,000 12,395,000 5,791,000 50,076,000 Notes on the Tables showing quantities of haddock Denmark. A small quantity of whiting (G. #er/angus) is included with haddock. The quantities are sometimes stated in pounds, sometimes in numbers. From the corresponding values, it has been possible to change the numbers into pounds and these into kilograms. Germany. The quantities for earlier years have been partly estimated. The quantities imported are not included here, and the quantities of the coast fishery APPENDIX K: KYLE — 38 — are only represented in so far as they come direct from the sea to the 4 chief markets. The fishery of East Friesland, which was chiefly for haddock and cod and used to be of considerable value, is however included. In the Geestemtinde and Bremerhaven statistics for 1902 and 1903, the quantities of fish brought from Iceland are separately distinguished, as follows: Geestemtinde; haddock, 1,881,600 kg. in 1902, 2,296,500 kg. in 1903 Bremerhaven; _ 1,620,600 — — 1,855,400 — = These quantities for Bremerhaven represent all fish from Iceland together, i. e. cod and haddock at least, are included in the quantities stated. The Geestemtinde tables mention in detail only the haddock and cod as coming from Iceland. These quantities are included in the present tables. In the Geestemünde statistics for 1902 and 1903, the smallest class of haddocks is included with whiting. In the Geestemünde (since 1895) and Bremerhaven (since 1899) statistics, three classes of haddock are distinguished and the relative proportions of these are shown in the following table. Table XX. Proportions of large, medium and small haddock landed from the North Sea at Geestemiinde and Bremerhaven (since 1899) Large Medium Small MSG SR IS see tapas 22 Fo 18 %o 60 Fo T896 1. ease Nas 20 = 29 - 50 - TOO rare Qi ren 19 - 25° - 56. - 1898). ae: 17 - 26 - 57 - DSC MEME | 20 - 23 - ONE COT) sro 5 tears PU = 22 - of = LOOM! eee ae Ig - 7 = 64 - 1902. amie 19 - 18 - 63 - TOO PAPE ANNEES 13 - 20 - 67 - Holland. The quantities given are in part estimates. The figures in Table XIX refer only to the haddock caught in the North Sea. Durie recent years however, since the introduction of steam trawlers, considerable quantities of haddock have been landed in Holland from Iceland and the Færoes These are not included in Table XIX, but may be given here. The proportions used for converting salted into fresh fish are the same as those given Part I, on p. 73. Table XXI. Quantities of haddock landed in Holland from Iceland and the Feroe Isles, "A in kilograms | Iceland Færoes | Total LOT Het aera ae ee 55,900 59,900 TOO er 170,100 7,600 177,700 TOO AUTANT REIN: 172,700 8,300 … 181,000 — 39 — APPENDIX K: KVLE Mhe quantities from Iceland and the Færoes represent the haddock sold at the state auction in Ijmuiden .Whether any quantities of the fish formerly sold at the private auc- tion came from these places, was not made public. For 1903, the quantities brought from the Feroes include a small amount, 1375 kg. of salted and dried haddock. In the fresh condition, these must have weighed much more, but this has not been allowed for here. In the Dutch official statistics, the quantities of haddock landed are given under a number of divisions according as the fish are living or dead, large, medium or small. The relative proportions of the latter are as shown in the following table. Table XXII. Proportions of large, medium and small haddocks landed at Ijmuiden and sold at the state auction Large Medium Small IRSIO\S) ET APRES 86 0) 14 0/0 TOO EN ALL EEE 56 - 44 - TSGSN jae sree TAN 57 - 43 - ESQON AA PSE 80 - 2 17 - MQOOWM ee 68 - 5 - 27 - TOO rea 58 - 6 - 36 - TOOL pan omy TEE 29 | - Pa 64 - TOO MNT setts 27 = TE | 12 = The proportions for 1896 have been calculated from the quantities landed during six months only, viz. July to December. The proportions have been obtained from the numbers, by means of the factors given for Holland. England and Scotland. No distinction is made in the statistics of these coun- tries between large and small haddocks. Quantities taken outside the North Sea, e. g. Iceland and the Feeroe Isles, are also not mentioned, but are probably very considerable. 6. Statistics of the cod fisheries As with the haddock, but more so here, the quantities given in Table XXIII cannot be considered to represent the North Sea cod fishery. Probably one half of the total quantities come from places outside the North Sea. It is worthy of remark, that the quantities of cod, taken by all the countries round the North Sea together, are less than one third of the quantities taken by Norway alone (see Table IV, Part D). Notes on the Table showing quantities of cod. Sweden: Cod is obtained by the Swedish “bank” fishermen in the North Sea, but the quantities are not given in the statistics. Norway: For reasons to be given in discussing the statistics showing the total quan- tities, the cod taken in the North Sea by Norway are not included in this table. The quantities landed are very variable; e.g. over 5 million kg. in 1808, and but 300,000 kg. in 1902. The chief landing port is Stavanger, so that the main fishery for this part. of the Norwegian coast is presumably near the south-west corner of Norway. APPENDIX K: KYLE — 40 — Table XXIII. Quantities of cod (G. morrhua) landed at North Sea ports for the years and countries mentioned, in kilograms a Germany | Holland | Belgium | France en Total TOO2 PRE 2,236,000 | 2,338,000 | 94,000 16,290,000 | 20,760,000 || 41,718,000 LÉO PPS 2,386,000 | 2,233,000 | 158,000 17,472,000 | 18,849,000 || 41,098,000 Lynn 3,464,000 | 2,528,000 | 192,000 19,233,000 | 20,702,000 | 46,119,000 TOO meee 1,270,000 | 3,565,000 | 2,693,000 | 304,000 | 1,680,000} 21,788,000 | 21,419,000 || 52,719,000 MIO 2.000605 895,000 | 3,466,000 | 3,164,000 | 249,000 | 1,497,000 | 20,935,000 | 26,798,000 || 57,004,000 MELOY) oo 509 0% 637,000 | 3,310,000 | 2,737,000 | 181,000 | 1,088,000 | 22,082,000 | 27,266,000 || 57,301,000 TAUPE 499,000 | 3,577,000 | 2,001,000 | 109,000 | 732,000 | 23,346,000 | 25,010,000 | 55,274,000 USS) An 052005 618,000 | 5,037,000 | 2,282,000 | 76,000 | 983,000 | 25,508,000 | 23,552,000 || 58,056,000 TO OO 299,000 | 5,267,000 | 1,645,000 | 54,000 | 697,000 | 27,637,000 | 20,002,000 || 55,601,000 HOM ns 263,000 | 6,118,000 | 1,114,000 | 32,000 | 512,000 | 27,097,000 | 20,878,000 | 56,014,000 KO ODE 309,000 | 7,409,000 | 1,243,000 | 22,000 | 534,000 | 53,255,000 | 23,525,000 || 86,297,000 LOOSE 382,000 | 8,888,000 985,000 25,603,000 Denmark: The quantities stated are taken almost entirely from north of Horns Reef. In addition to these, considerable quantities are taken near the Færoes by the fishermen of the Færoe Isles, but these are not included here. Germany: As with haddock, the largest quantities of cod are landed at Geeste- münde, and considerable quantities come from Iceland. 1903, 3,584,100 kg. of Iceland cod were landed at Geestemünde. ; 1,620,600 kg. of Iceland fish were landed in 1902 and again At Bremerhaven, In 1902, 2,089,600 kg. and in 1,855,400 kg. in 1903, but the species are not distinguished. The probability is, however, that they are mostly haddock and cod. It appears, that this fishery for cod and haddock at Iceland first began for the German steam trawlers in 1899, at least is first represented in the statistics of that year. In the statistical tables for Altona, the hake (Merluccius vulgaris) is included with the cod from 1896 onwards. The quantities of hake are not, however, considerable. The figures given represent the quantities sold at the four principal German markets. The coast and sea fishery of East Friesland is also included. The coastal fishery else- where is not represented, except in so far as the fish taken are sold at ane four chief markets. Holland: A portion of the cod taken by the Dutch trawlers includes ling, pollack etc. (see Part I, Table XLIV), but the amount of these is relatively small. given represent the principal quantities. dition in barrels. this the weight of the salt etc., fresh cod. The cod is also landed in the living and iced condition. The figures The cod landed by liners is in the salted con- The total weight of the barrel is about 190 kg. and deducting from it is estimated, that a barrel is equivalent to 150 kg. the average weight is taken to be 5:5 kg. (Part I, p. 73). These quantities represent the cod landed from the North Sea only. To begin with 1901, separate tables have been given in the Dutch “Verslag” showing the quantities brought from Iceland and the Færoes. For the largest of these, These are partly brought by trawlers and partly by liners (from the Færoes), and the quantities salted and fresh are separately disting- a APPENDIX K: KYLE uished. Employing the equivalents mentioned in the first portion of this work, we ob- tain the following tablet. Table XXIV. Quantities of cod brought from Iceland and Færoe Isles, and sold at the state auction in Ijmuiden, in kilograms Feeroes oa 5 (trawl & Total (trawled) lines) MOOT N teeta 19,300 19,300 BOOZ AU, siege ree 342,800 | 5,500 348,300 OO ea aes 590,500 77,900 668,400 For 1903, the quantities from the Færoes include 63,800 kg. of salted and dried cod. These in the fresh condition must have weighed a great deal more, but this has not been taken account of here. Belgium. The quantities given here represent only the salted cod brought in by the line fishermen. The quantities landed by the trawlers are not stated. The same equivalents as for Holland have been employed in converting the “salted” cod into “fresh”. France. The figures given represent the quantities taken by the French fishermen from the North Sea only. Previous to 1895, the returns for the North Sea were com- bined with those for Iceland. England and Scotland. The methods are the same for both countries. The cod are landed in fresh or iced condition. No distinction is made in the statistics between large and small cod. The Scottish statistics, but not the English, distinguish between the quantities landed by the line fishermen and those landed by the trawlers. Up to 1902, no distinction is made between the fish caught in the North Sea and that taken elsewhere. 7. Statistics of the herring fisheries in the North Sea Table XXV will give some conception of the immense quantities of herring landed annually from the North Sea alone. A further hundred million kg. may be added for Norwegian and Swedish herring fisheries, and another hundred for the fisheries on the west coasts of Scotland and England and in the English Channel. Taking one kg. as ‘equivalent to 8 herring, we see that during 1902, about 5600 millions of herring were taken within the region of the international investigations. Notes on the Table showing quantities of herring Sweden: The herring fishery of the Kattegat and Bohuslän is not included in the table, though it seems probable, according to recent researches, that the herring migrate there from the North Sea and Skager Rak. The value of the fishery varies from one to three million shillings. In addition to this, there is a considerable fishery for herring in the Sound and Baltic. Norway: Norway has a large and increasingly important herring fishery along its 1 These figures are taken from the Verslag, and thus represent only the amounts sold at the state auction. A considerable quantity of fish was however sold by private auction up to 1902, but whether any of it came from Iceland and the Færoes was not made known. Appendix K 6 PPENDIX K: KYLE — m — Table XXV. Quantities of herring (C/xpea harengus) landed at North Sea ports for the years and countries mentioned, in kilograms ae Germany | Holland | Belgium | France | England | Scotland Total HID oo one 2,709,000 | 62,015,000 | 708,000 | 21,139,000} 68,289,000 | 141,400,000 || 296,260,000 1893, 0 3,070,000 | 58,543,000 | 390,000 | 23,701,000 | 65,812,000 | 177,458,000 || 328,974,000 TOO Ry eee 4,064,000 | 57,111,000} 561,000 | 18,825,000} 67,994,000 | 186,473,000 || 335,028,000 TEER ye coos ae 47,000 | 6,552,000 | 50,400,000} 460,000 | 19,194,000 | 66,424,000 | 171,918,000 || 314,995,000 TED yo EE 51,000 | 8,632,000] 56,101,000 | 600,000 | 24,661,000) 70,201,000 | 170,986,000 | 331,232,000 TSOP ut UE 118,000 | 7,147,000 | 35,995,000! 482,000 | 22,627,000! 82,742,000 | 109,836,000 || 258,947,000 TESS) 0 co ue oo 100,000 | 12,999,000 | 54,985,000 | 2,757,000 | 22,166,000 | 84,610,000 | 194,543,000 | 372,160,000 TSG. 107,000 | 7,207,000 | 29,633,000 | 1,709,000 | 19,559,000 102,761,000 | 124,546,000 285,522,000 TODOP FREE 18,000 | 12,017,000 | 46,261,000| 867,000 | 20,638,000 115,131,000 | 136,339,000 331,271,000 TOOLS ere 208,000 | 16,917,000 | 58,189,000 | 865,000 | 22,224,000 | 114,924,000 | 184,312,000 || 397,639,000 102 Soh aaa: 219,000 | 21,314,000 | 81,483,000 | 1,240,000 | 23,545,000 | 169,301,000 | 200,152,000||| 497,254,000 TOO UE 194,000 | 24,983,000 | 91,318,000 | 181,193,000 south-west North Sea coast. herring is also represented to a slight extent. taken (including sprats and small herring) amounted to ca. 15 million kg.; from 1900—02, the average quantity was ca. 38 million kg. large dimensions, from 80 to 100 million kg. per annum (see Table IV, Part I). It consists chiefly of the spring herring, though the summer From 1892—94, the average quantity The total herring fishery of Norway is of Denmark: The herring fishery of Denmark in the North Sea is mostly prosecuted to the north of Horns Reef. Germany: The herring are landed in Germany, mostly in the salted condition in the form of “tons” or barrels. These are converted into kg. on the same principle as for Holland. Holland: Herring are landed in Holland in the cured condition or lightly salted (Part I, p. 72). To estimate the total quantities of herring, it has been necessary to employ ascertained equivalents so as to convert “barrels” of herring into kg. These are as follows: 1 barrel = 865 salted herring on the average, 8 fresh herring = 1 kg. 1 barrel = 108 kg. fresh herring. Belgium: The value only of the herring landed in Belgium is given (see Part I; p. 8y). obtain the figures given in the table. Taking 10 kg. — 1 franc, the smallest price paid for North Sea herring, we should France: The French North Sea herring fishery is carried on in the same way as that from Holland and Germany, i.e. the herring are salted at sea and landed already cured in barrels. The total weight in kg. has been calculated in the same way as for Holland. England: The herring are all landed in England in the fresh condition. The usual measure is the “cran“ of about 1000 herring and weighing approximately 35 ewts or 178 kg. A “barrel” of salted herring is taken to weigh 2 cwts or 102 kg.* and contains about 800 fish on the average. Scotland: The methods and measurements used are the same as for England. 1 This is the weight used in the Custom House returns and refers probably to the weight of herring alone. If so, the English “barrel” would contain practically the same weight of herring as the Dutch. — 43 — APPENDIX K: KYLE 8. Statistics of the total quantities of fish landed for the most part at North Sea ports The preceding account of the seven species chosen will have given some idea of the present condition of fisheries statistics, and also of the value they might have. It is unnecessary to enter here into the data with regard to the remaining species, as the shortcomings in the statistics have been sufficiently exemplified and the actual data can be found in the first portion of this work. The principles which should regulate the choice of species for detailed treatment in an international system of statistics will be dealt with in Part II. It requires but a glance at Table XXVI, of the total quantities landed, to show that any discussion of a decrease of fish in general is perfectly unnecessary. The figures speak for themselves and certainly do not give any countenance to pessimistic views with regard to the future of the fisheries. Of the total quantity, about 50 °/, comes from the herring fishery (see Table XXV). The remainder is the product of the trawl and line industries. Unfortunately, for reasons already stated, it is not possible to separate the trawl from the line fishery in the statistics, nor to ascertain the amounts taken in the North Sea alone. The condition of the North Sea trawl-fishery has accordingly to be judged, for the ‘most part, from the data with regard to the principal species as shown in preceding pages. It has been shown, that the fisheries of all these species, plaice, turbot, sole and haddock have come to what may be called a critical stage’, and there is no reason for thinking, that the North Sea fisheries as a whole are in any way different. It is well, however, to enquire what this critical condition actually consists in, and not to imagine that it means or ever will mean the exhaustion of the fisheries. The various aspects of the matter may be briefly mentioned. First of all, it has to be noted, that the various phenomena usually cited as indicating the decrease of the fisheries can be viewed in various ways. Thus, any decrease in the average catch of a number of boats (see Part I; Germany, p.55 and Scotland, p. 120) may be due to a distribution of the current stock over a larger number of boats? (see also p. 18). Again, the spread of trawling from the North Sea to the north, south and west has been taken to indicate, that the trawling in the North Sea had reached a maximum some years ago. This may be quite true, but it has to be remembered that fishing beyond the North Sea, by boats belonging to the North Sea, has been going on for centuries; further, that similar indications occurred with regard to the Kattegat fishery 10 years ago, and yet what is equivalent to the trawl fishery there, brings in as large quantities of fish now as it did then. What has occurred in the Kattegat would assuredly be no less in the North Sea. It is for the most part the hope of greater gain which leads fishermen to seek for new fishing grounds, but this in no wise means, that the old grounds are deprived of their usual quantum of fish. It has to be remembered also, that theories with regard to 1 See, Henking, H: 1. c. p. 16, who refers only to the steam-boats however; also, more particularly, Heincke, Fr: “Die Ueberfischung der Nordsee und Schutzmassregeln dagegen”; Mitt. d. deutschen Seefish. Vereins, 1894. p. 61. 2 See, Fifteenth Annual Report of the Inspectors of Sea Fisheries (England and Wales), 1900; p. 5 et seq. 6* APPENDIX K: KYLE — 4A — the decrease of fish are of very ancient standing, and though these theories and the grounds on which they are based have changed their form and character in different generations and centuries, they have one and all been belied by the persistence and even increase of the fisheries‘. The increased quantities of new and less valuable species, which have been brought to market within recent years, have also been taken to indicate a decrease in the quan- tities of the more valuable kinds. The order of things has certainly changed from half a century ago, when the haddock and plaice were regarded as worthless species and not brought to market from the offshore fishing grounds. Yet the condition of things on land has also changed, and the demand for fish has increased more than a hundred-fold. The appearance on the market of the present day, of species regarded as worthless but ten years ago, is explainable in the same way. The removal of the inferior species from the sea is probably a gain to the valuable kinds, and the fishermen would regard it as the greatest blessing, if some means were devised for also removing the great pests of fishing, dog-fish, starfish, jelly-fish, sponges and the like. The severe fishing which one species undergoes may also be of benefit to others on which it feeds, just as the removal of larger individuals may be of benefit to the smaller of the same species. Thus, the large takes by the trawlers, especially of haddock, possibly also of cod, may account in part for the extreme abundance of the herring within recent years. - The conception of balance or equilibrium- may thus be employed in many useful ways, when regarding the fisheries from a practical standpoint. It need hardly be said, that the same conception is of more than mere theoretical importance when applied to the comprehension of the biology of the fishes, their growth, and their relations to one another and to the surrounding conditions. Fishes or living things in general, are not like natural products such as gold or silver, which when removed from the earth cannot be replaced. There is an instance on record of a fish having been exterminated apparently, — and yet returning after many years in its earlier abundance?. The great fertility of fishes enables them to populate the seas in numbers so great, that if counterbalancing forces were not at work, one species alone, even the least fertile, would within a year or two supply more fish for the markets than all the species together do at present. The peculiar way in which the fertility on the one hand and the counterbalancing forces on the other, work to maintain the various species in a condition of equilibrium, furnishes the main scientific problems of the fisheries. It is remarkable, for example, that the sole, with more than twice and the turbot, with more than ten times the fertility of the plaice, should yet be represented in the fishermens’s catches by but a small percentage of the quantities of the latter. The plaice indeed, seems the most favoured flat fish within the regions considered. Again, of all the chief food-fishes, the herring has by far the lowest reproductive power and yet, the quantities brought to market of this species alone exceed those of all others together. It is in the contemplation of these broad problems, that one is obliged to remember, that man’s influence on the population of the sea is but one of ı Mc. Intosh W. C..; “The Resources of the Sea” 1899 p. 224 et seq.; and Holdsworth, E. W. H., Deep sea Fishing and Fishing Boats, 1874, p. 266 et seq. 2 The American tile-fish: see, “The Fisheries etc. of the United States”, U.S. Com. of Fish and Fisheries, 1884, p. 360. Report U. S. Com. of Fish and Fisheries, 1900, p. XXIII. — 45 — APPENDIX K: KYLE many factors, known and unknown, tending to reduce the total numbers of a species, when the life-history of such a species is regarded from the beginning to the end. These general considerations will, perhaps, counteract any false impression which might be taken from the statement, that the trawling industry of the North Sea in general and the fisheries of the plaice, sole, turbot and perhaps haddock in particular, are in a critical condition. Unless the statistical data are worthless, the critical condition is evident; this is considered due to the influence of man’s fishing — a minor factor, perhaps, in comparison with the other forces keeping the multiplying tendences of the fishes in check, yet added to these and concentrated in a special direction — causing a diminution in the quantities of the large and more valuable fish. On the other hand, nature’s recuperative power as well as the conditions of fishing, will not permit the reduction of the quantities of fish below a very large minimum — so long as the present physical conditions prevail. The question, whether man by interfering with the methods of fishing, can help to keep the stock of fish above this irreducible minimum, does not call for discussion. As shown above, the possibilities one way or another are too numerous to be calculated; it can only be solved by well-regulated experiments, Table XXVI. Total quantities of fish landed for the most part at ports on the North Sea, z in 1000 Kg. Denma: | | À tlan (west es Berne Inala | Re | | ae Werte N | | I | THECD à ow my Ab nee 17,864 | 79,853 259,375 218,163 575,255 OO en. 22,208 78,295 270,286 254,704 625,493 oA circled es Bac 27,207 | 76,587 291,470 269,616 664,880 ISOS LEONE 5,309 | 31637 | 67,158 | 20,874 | 304,362 263,497 | 692,837 LÉGER 5,648 | 36,703 71,854 | 26,158 | 311,158 269,813 | 721,334 MO ARE ger 4,303 | 33,782 | 51,227 23,715 318,561 | 200,123 631,711 CCM EEE 3,348 | 37,610 | 69,061 22,898 322,318 277,223 732,458 LÉO Men Esp 4,087 | 36,783 43,564 20,543 352,007 212,113 669,099 TOOORM EN PET 3,466 158 62562178 21,334 360,237 220,881 706,724 CO ARR 3,608 44,806 | 76,271 22,736 356,845 280,090 784,356 TOO Re le. ae 5,667 56,875 105,814 24,079 447,137 | 301,167 940,739 MOORE Lt 4,566 66,819 113,197 288,832 Notes on the Table showing the total quantities It has to be remarked, that France is included here, as the quantities stated come from the North Sea. On the other hand, Belgium has to be omitted and large quantities included in the statistics for Germany, England and Scotland do not come from the North Sea. At the present time, it is quite impossible to construct a satisfactory table, showing the quantities of fish taken from the North Sea and these only. This explains the indecisive nature of the heading to the table. The quantities given, refer only to the fishes; shell-fish, such as crabs, lobsters, oysters etc., are omitted. These are mostly given in numbers in the various statistics and as a rule form a separate subdivision. Sweden. It is quite impossible to ascertain the total quantities of fish landed annually in Sweden. In 1902, the total value of the sea-fisheries, i.e. in the North Sea, APPENDIX K: KYLE — 46 — Skager Rak, Kattegat and Baltic, was at least 5,500,000 Kroner, which, at the rate of 10 kilograms for 1 Krone, gives 55 million kilograms. But of the Baltic provinces, only 4 out of 13 are represented in the statistics. j The chief difficulties in connection with the Swedish statistics are, that: (1) important species are mixed with others, e. g. cod with ling, haddock, whiting ete. plaice with turbot, sole, halibut etc.; (2) the same species is given in different ways, e. g. the herring under hectolitres, kilograms, valar (80) and tons.; (3) only the total values are given for the important deep-sea and mackerel fisheries, which are prosecuted for a great part in the NorthSea. The quantities of mackerel might be calculated from the average price given in the Norwegian tables, but this is impossible for the deep-sea fishery, where several’ species, cod, ling, torsk etc. are all included together. Norway. The Norwegian statistics are given in such detail, that the quantities of the principal species taken in the North Sea can be readily ascertained. Some difficulty arises, however, with regard to the limits to be taken for the North Sea. In the Nor- wegian reports, and in Henking’s paper on the German statistics (l. c.), the limits are the Naze in the south and Cape Stat in the north. In the present work, the northern limit fixed by international convention, viz. 61°N.L., has been taken, whilst the southern limit is the same. If the former limits are taken, the amount of the Norwegian fisheries in the North Sea can be ascertained from the proportions given in Part I, Table V. If the latter are decided on, the proportions are somewhat smaller. This is a matter which can only be decided by general agreement. For the present, the quantities taken by the Norwegian fishermen from the North Sea are omitted. For many reasons, indeed, it would be preferable to keep the Nor- wegian fisheries distinct from those of the North Sea, and to consider them in a separate class along with those of Iceland and the Feroe Isles. In the Norwegian statistics, only the principal species are separately distinguished, e. g. cod, herring, mackerel and salmon, and the coast fishery is kept distinct from the offshore fishery. Further, there is a home fishery in the fjords and amongst the islands, which is not represented in the statistics. Some notion of the immense quantities of fish landed in Norway has already been given in Part I. During 1902, the total quantities must have considerably exceeded 400 million kilograms, but during 1890—96, they must have exceeded 500 million kilograms several times. This refers to the whole of Norway. From Table XXVI, it will be seen, that England is the only country where the total quantities landed per annum are as large, and even there, it is necessary to include all coasts (see Part I, Table LXIV)" Denmark. The quantities stated here are only those landed at North Sea ports; the Skager Rak is omitted, and also the quantities taken in the North Sea by the Danish fishermen, but landed at Hamburg and ports on the Kattegat. The total amount of the latter would be, for recent years, another million or two kilograms in addition to thos stated in the Table. ; With regard to the Skager Rak, it is evident that the limit drawn between it and the North Sea viz. from the Naze to Hanstholm, is purely one of convenience, not likely to be respected by fishes. So far as the round fishes are concerned, cod, haddock and EE — A7 — APPENDIX K: KYLE hetring more especially, the Skager Rak might be included with the North Sea. With regard to the plaice, on the other hand, it appears from the marking experiments made by Sweden, that this species may migrate from the Kattegat into the Skager Rak, whilst similar experiments made by Denmark have shown that few if any migrate thither from the North Sea. It would be better, therefore, to include the Skager Rak plaice fishery with that of the Kattegat than with that of the North Sea. On account of this double nature, the Skager Rak has been omitted entirely from the present work. Its relative importance to Denmark can be ascertained from the tables in Part I (Table XI). The Danish statistics employ several different methods in stating the quantities of fish, even the same species, e. g. numbers, tons or pounds (Da.). In the cases where the values were also given, the numbers have with their assistance been converted into pounds and thence into kilograms. Germany. In Germany, as in England and Scotland, the quantities of fish landed are stated almost entirely in weight. The convenience of this, in drawing up these tables, is self-evident. It has been shown in Part I, however, that complete statistics of the German North Sea fisheries only exist for the last few years and that a regular system of publication has not yet been made in Germany. For the earlier years, especially from 1892—1896, the quantities are in part estimated. Of the 4 principal fishing ports, statistics are available for Altona and Geestemünde over the whole period considered, but those of Hamburg and Bremerhaven have had to be calculated from the values given, for the years 1892 to 1895. Minor difficulties also occur, as all the species, even the principal ones, are not separately distinguished; e. g. cod and hake, dab and plaice ete. are taken together in the statistics for Altona. Within recent years, considerable quantities of fish, especially cod and haddock, have been landed in Germany from Iceland and places beyond the North Sea. These are only partly separated in the German statistics, and are all included here in Table XXVI. Holland: The difficulties in connection with the Dutch statistics have been men- tioned in detail in Part I (p.72). It is only for the principal ports that statistics are forthcoming and only partially even from these. Except for the herring fishery, where tne quantities are as accurate as they can be made, the quantities are for a great part estimates. The quantities of fish landed in Holland, from fishing grounds outside the North Sea, are separately distinguished in the Dutch statistics and are not included here. Belgium: It is only for the cod-fishery with lines, that statistics of the quantities landed are published in Belgium. These are shown in Table XXIII. These cannot be considered representative of the Belgian fishery, however, so that Belgium has been omitted here entirely. France: The French North Sea fisheries consist mainly of the herring-fishery with drift-nets and the cod-fishery by means of long-lines, and the total quantities of these species landed are represented in the table. England and Scotland: As the quantities of the various species landed are all given in the same unit, viz. hundredweight (= 50'8 kg.), it has been a simple matter to ascertain the total quantities in kilograms. It may be said also, that the total quantities as given here for England are very approximately accurate, the uncertainties referred. to in Part I concerning rather the quantities of the separate species, un Wig 88 eC SAO veal >6% Ag had | LIBRARY I ia un à we "ret PD ry, / APPENDIX K: KYLE — 48 — Considerable quantities of several species, especially cod, haddock, ling, plaice, turbot and halibut, are landed at the North Sea ports of these countries, from fishing grounds outside the North Sea, and are included in the table above. 9. Statistics of the total value of all fish landed for the most part at North Sea ports Table XXVII shows the total value of the fish landed, in 100 shillings or marks. The endeavour has been to limit the matter as far as possible to the North Sea, but for reasons already stated, it is impossible, at the present time, to ascertain the precise value of the North Sea fisheries alone. An approximate estimate would be 90 °/, of the values stated, but this is little more than a guess. 5 The great increase in the value of the fisheries since 1892, amounting roughly to £ 35,000,000 or 70,000,000 marks, shows that, whether the fisheries are or are not in a critical condition, the remuneration obtained is sufficient encouragement for their future prosecution, The question whether man,. by legislative restrictions, could appreciably improve upon the sums represented in the table, is even more difficult to answer than the possibility of increasing the total quantities. It may be said in general, however, that for a fishery and a market approximately stable, an increase in the total value is more likely to ensue from an improvement in the quality of fish landed than from an increase in their quantity. The best index of the quality of fish is given by the average price, to the consider- ation of which we may now turn. Table XXVII. Total value of all fish landed for the most part at North Sea ports, in 100 shillings Be Germany | Holland | Belgium | France en Sn Total TOQ2 TE Le | 44,048 111,165 26,678 | 27,612 753,925 267,123 1,230,551 1803 er: 52,512 107,040 27,732 | 30,959 807,266 | 277,408 1,302,917 TSOAS Ss NI EE | 61,880 | 116,628 27,386 | 31,054 832,317 270,373 1,339,638 USO) PEN er 6,054 71,242 127,107 25,036 | 30,939 859,419 309,133 1,428,930 1806 eye Sars shen 6,491 75,958 106,983 25,342 | 33,868 855,414 | 277,280 1,381,336 TOO Tare le ae sty cs 6,519 78,422 | 121,958 26,798 | 52,285. 914,948 285,183 1,486,113 1898 .......... 5,360 85,902 | 129,012 | 33,504 | 44,182 939,426 | 325,337 | 1,562,723 NR) coop eense 7,074 91,81r | 130,978 | 37,978 | 39,515 | 1,080,140 | 380,505 || 1,768,001 1909 .......... 8,145 106,715 | 157,115 | 45,482 | 41,078 | 1,127,552 | 405,535 || 1,891,622 TOLLER NN. 8,811 111,454 | 156,947 46,688 | 53,634 | 1,089,342 396,044 1,862,920 WSO 6 5 go of ben 12,338 129,796 | 225,515 | 51,996 | 43,961 1,071,686 442,106 1,977,398 DOCS EAU 126,792 | 172,583 | 425,792 10. Statistics regarding the average price of the principal species of food fishes The average price paid for fish, in the different countries concerned, is represented in Table XXVIIL The figures have been calculated from the total values and quantities of each species, and their accuracy is affected therefore by the various shortcomings in the statistics already mentioned. ie APPENDIX K: KYLE As they stand, the figures seem to offer a good basis for comparison of the prices paid for fish in the different countries, but it has to be remembered, that the average price is significant, not only of the quantities landed and the demand for fish, but also, and more especially, of the quality of the fish. A low price, for example, is not always a sign that fish is cheap, it often means that the fish is of poor quality. Although it might seem quite reasonable beforehand, to assume that the quality of fish landed in the differ- ent countries from the same or similar regions would be the same on the whole, closer examination of the available data shows, that this assumption cannot be maintained. Not only is the quality different in different countries, it is very different at different ports of the same country. It is well-known already, that different prices per pound or per kilogram are obtained for fish of the same species but of different sizes. In general, the medium and larger sizes Obtain a higher price per pound than the smaller. This is of the greatest impor- tance in devising methods for improvement of the fisheries. In the case of the plaice, for example, the statistical data mentioned previously (p. 26) shows, that no consideration need be given to an augmentation of the quantities; the problem is simply and solely how to improve the quality of the fish brought to market. The same holds good, more or less, for the other species mentioned. Taking the average price per pound, therefore, aS an index of quality, it may be of some practical importance to show the prices paid for the different sizes of fish, so far as data can be obtained. Plaice: On the west coast of Denmark (Jutland), which is alone considered, the plaice landed are all of small size, under 11 inches (28 cm.) on the average (see Part I, p. 26). The price seems therefore somewhat high. In Germany, the statistics for Geestemtinde and Bremerhaven distinguish between large and medium together and small. The exact distinctions are not stated, but pre- sumably the small fish are on the average under 11 inches (28 cm.). Since 1900, the total quantities of the small and large and the average price of each sort, have been as follows: 1900—1903; large and medium, 856,000 kg.; average price per kg. 0'56 shillings small 4,548,000 Kg.; — — . - 020 — For Holland, the difference in the average prices is even more remarkable. As already shown (p. 30), the great majority of the plaice landed there are small, and this is reflected in the low average price. The actual data for Ymuiden may be summarised as follows: 1900—1903; large, 150,930 kg.; average price per kg. 0.8 shillings medium, 575,700 - ; — — - = 052 — small 11,239,590 -; — — - - O15 — (1903 only) second class of small, 1,557,840 - ; — — - - ol — The small plaice here dominate the price of the whole, as is evident from Table XXVIII. So far as England is concerned, statistics are not yet forthcoming with regard to the proportions of small and large in the total quantities. Evidence is given by Archer, however, (1. c. p. 182) of these proportions on the eastern grounds of the North Sea. The catches refer to the period from March 1902 to December 1903. The total quantities and the average prices are as follows: Appendix K 7 APPENDIX K: KYLE — 50 — 1902— 1903; large, 2,929,700 kg.; average price per kg., 0:35 shillings small, 9,252,400 -; — - - = O11 — The average price stated here for the “large” is really, however, for medium. Few, if any large plaice are brought from the eastern grounds. The high price obtained in Scotland by the plaice (see Table XXVIII) is due to the absence of the small sizes. Reviewing the data as a whole, it appears that one kilogram of medium plaice (pre- sumably 30 to 40 cm. or 12—16 inches) is worth 3 to 5 kg. of small (under 28 to 30 cm. or 11 to 12 inches). If the small plaice, therefore, were left in the sea for one or two more years and but one half the quantity (by weight) survived after that time, it is clear that the fishermen would be the gainers. In other words, if they took less than one half the weight of what they do at present, their fishing would be more remunerative. Sole: The evidence with regard to the sole is somewhat different to that of the‘ plaice. It is only for Germany and Holland, that a distinction can be drawn between the different sizes. For Geestemünde and Bremerhaven, the total quantities and average prices have been as follows: 1901— 1903; large and medium 364,700 kg.; average price 2°8 sh. per kg. small, 207,600 - — cae Ue ME ne RS For Ijmuiden in Holland, three sizes are distinguished. The total quantities of each, since 1900 and the average prices are as follows: , 1900—1903; large, 227,645 kg.; average price 2'8 sh. per kg. medium, 176,043 -; — RS (ao en small, 145,088 -; — NE pire TOME It appears, therefore, that medium-sized soles are as valuable as the large and there is not such a large difference between the price of the large and that of the small as for the plaice. Further, as mentioned previously, the proportion taken of the small is not SO conspicious. Turbot: The data with regard to the turbot give practically the same result as for the sole. The average price of the smaller fish per kg. is about 60°/, of that of the large. The haddock is the only other species that need be particularly mentioned in this connection. The quantities and approximate average prices for Geestemünde and Bremer- haven together, are as follows: | 1900—1903; large 3,974,000 kg.; average price O'50 sh. per kg. medium, 4,190,000 -; — BOWES Ut ee small, 13,513,000 -; — ul 40721) 2 a At Geestemünde, however, the smallest class of haddock — with presumably a still smaller average price — is included with whiting and is omitted here. Further, the large include quantities from Iceland. With regard to Holland, the following figures show the total quantities and average prices since 1900. 1900— 1903; large, 530,000 kg.; average price 0'68 sh. per kg. medium, 775,000 kg.; — - O50 - - - small, 4,653,000 - ; — = 10:20 = 0h eso ra nb APPENDIX K: KYLE XXVIII. Average price of the principal species of fish landed at North Sea ports, in shillings pr. kilogram Sole (S. vulgaris) Turbot (R. maximus) Brill (R. Zevis) 4 mn rg ns) NE a TD te) He ia neti ul 5 ar ea, mas A Ö x A Oo LE a ©) A MSO SMW RUE 1°89 1929 2°78 126 1°43, 1740 073 Tor INGO) os Sram Seb Gaara 1°89 187 275 13T 1:50 1:36 0:70 ‘ 102 TOO nn Mers 165 1°37 2:66 1:40 1:43 1.38 0°62 102 MOOS N ren 1:67 2°01 1:89 2°76 1°43 1:52 1'43 0:64 1:02 RÉGION OLA 1:66 189 2:89 2:64 TIL 138 T7 0°65 0:98 OO ‘la pip co nM — 1:98 1°89 2:89 1:26 1:43 1°22 0:62 1:07 WSs) Rare III I’9I 2°85 3:02 137 156 113 0:64 I-12 MODO gos ee I‘I10 za, | ir 3'02 149 1:60 I-19 0:66 I°12 MOCO Metre reer eke Le Il 2°49 3°32 3°11 1:60 1:68 1:38 . 0:80 1:09 ICO RSR I'22 2°47 3°76 3°13 I 61 178 1:49 079 1:23 TGC), oe I'21 217 2°87 2°82 1:36 1:55 1°42 0'72 1:00 MIG OSM ira Le 212) 2°26 2:34 1125 143 O77 Plaice (P. platessa) Cod (G. morrhua) 4 lal a > rg 3 8 EN ES aea| § 5 5 Bus dus SER le Se Sa a See oa) |e = a |lmge/saee Bo JOG Ce Sl CE en Se QE CE NCREE EINER NS D Q o pe CEE a TSG: es Dour 0:20 | O10 | O41 | 0:36 O19 0°35 0°27 015 100%, See O17 | o‘10 | 0:40 | 0:34 0:19 0°39 0:26 O15 SOAR ANNEE O19 | O10 | 038 | 034 0'I6 0°33 0°25 O14 TOO Se ae O13 | 0124 | O12 | 042 | o-41 0:08 018 032 0:44 0:24 O'T4 lo) EU ER. O12 | 0'23 | o'15 | O44 | 043 009 O17 0 28 0°62 024 O13 TS ols op oe ME 0:23 | 0°26 | o12 | 045 | 0146 0'Io O19 0730 ool 0°26 O14 Half PNR O19 | 0:28 | o'I4 | 0748 | 0°46 0:08 0:20 0°37 0'92 0'28 0:16 MSGQMAL St eis esse o17 | 026 | o'18 | 0-48 | 0745 o10 0‘19 0'35 0:64 0°29 o18 iG(SS) AR 0:22 | 027 | o17 | 047 | 0744 0'17 0'Ig O'4I 0:63 029 | O19 IC, ee 0:22 | 0:25 | 0:16 | 0:43 | 044 0‘19 O‘19 0:40 | 0:63 0°30 0‘19 HOD2ER cin ei O'I9 | O21 | O15 | O31 | 0.45 0°22 o18 0°38 0:63 0:28 0:18 TIS(OX) ER 0:29 | 0:26 | o16 0:50 0:17 0'17 Oo'41 | | O17 Haddock (G. aeglefinus) Herring (C. harengus) LEGEN a ee o'2I | 028 | 0:20 | 022 0'I5 OT O13 o’II 0'08 VO) A AR o'22 | 027 | o'2I | 0:22 014 OIL 0'13 OIL 0'07 CUS PESTE 0:20 | 0:28 | o'20 | 0:18 O15 O13 0:16 Or 0:06 NIC N stage cise! ae OIL | O18 | 0'29 | 0:19 | O16 O15 0:19 017 013 OT 0'09 L'ÉCONOMIE OIL | O'19 | 0°23 | o‘19 | o'17 o'16 O‘I4 O1l O'II 0:10 0:06 VEN T6 ao EUR O12] O19 | 0:28 | 0:22 | o"20 O15 0'22 0'23 0‘19 Orr 0'I0 USE ma tare eget ore O'13 | 0:21 | 033 | 0°23 | 0:23 0'12 0:16 0:16 0'17 0:09 0:08 WEOO een 0'Ig | 0:26 | 0°53 | 0:25 | 0:24 0'14 0:23 0°29 o18 O‘I4 O14 MOCO PNA LA. 026 | 0:30 | 048 | 0:27 | 0:26 0°22 025 0:23 | o18 O15 | O14 TOOL rares 0°34 | 0:30 | 048 | 0:28 | o°25 0:16 O19 Ola ORT, 014 | o'og MOOS er 0:39 | 0:26 | 0°36 | 0:24 | 0:22 O'21 0'21 0'19 O17 o12 orl ODA ONE er 0'21 | o‘21 | 0°33 0*I9 0°27 0:16 013 Ol A comparison of these figures with those for the plaice will show how closely the two fisheries resemble one another. The average prices of the different size-groups -are very similar and also the very large percentage of small fish. It is interesting and remark- Gi APPENDIX K: KYLE SRE able, that the haddock in Germany occupies a similar position to the Re in Holland and vice versà. What has been said above with regard to the plaice obviously holds ee here also, namely, that if the fishermen caught less of the small, their fishing would be more remunerative. j If the figures given in Table XXVIII be considered in general, it will be remarked, that the years 1900 and 1901 marked the maximum point reached by the average prices, Taking this fact along with the information given by Table XXVI, showing the total quantities, it would appear that the supply of fish has for the time being outrun then demand. So far as the principal species are concerned, the supply nowadays consists chiefly of the small classes of fish, as shown above, and this accounts for the decline in the average prices. We may conclude, therefore, that the demand in all the countries is for a better quality of fish, not a greater quantity. IL. Statistics regarding the number of boats engaged in trawling from North Sea ports The manner in which the fishing boats are recorded in the different countries is perhaps the most unsatisfactory division of the statistics with regard to the fisheries. The difficulties in the way of unifying the data with regard to the boats are indeed so great, that the task has frankly been given up as impossible for the present. An endeavour has been made in Tables XXIX and XXX to estimate the number of trawlers, sailing and steam fishing in the North Sea, as trawling is the most important branch of the fisheries for the present problems. The boats engaged in the line and drift-net fisheries may be left for future consideration. Some of the particular difficulties are mentioned in the notes; the more general may be mentioned here. The first difficulty arises from the impossibility of restricting fishing boats to any one particular region. For example, a large number of the steam-trawlers represented in the table below, do not fish regularly in the North Sea, though they all doubtless fish there occasionally. To overcome this difficulty, it is obvious that some other system than the mere enumeration of the boats must be adopted, if any estimate is to be obtained of the total amount of fishing in the North Sea. Such a system is already to harid in that adopted by Henking (l. c.), namely, the ‘enumeration of the separate voyages or the whole time away from port. A better system is, perhaps, that of the whole time taken up in the actual fishing. The second difficulty is that, even if the total number of voyages of the steam- trawlers could be obtained, with of course the quantities taken, there still remain the occasional trawlers and the sailing-trawlers. An attempt has indeed be made to reduce all the steam and sailing trawlers to one and the same unit, but how this is to be done in the case of the occasional trawlers has not yet been considered. The third difficulty is, that the mere number of boats indicates comparatively little. Further, it is by no means certain that all the boats given in the annual statistics have really been fishing during the year. The general system is, that any new boats built POP EE ee PR CR EE EL OS ET RE EC ee ul R- ‘ j | — 53 — APPENDIX K: KYLE must be registered, but the old boats which have given up fishing are not always with- drawn from the lists. The fourth and perhaps the main difficulty is, that the boats of the different coun- tries, or of different classes in the same country, are not directly comparable with one another. The tonnage system seems at first sight the simplest way of comparing the various classes of boats, but on enquiring closer into the matter, we find that different systems of assessing tonnage are employed in the different countries. In England, for example, it is usually the “net” tonnage of the boats which is given, on the continent, it is “brutto”-capacity or “netto”-capacity in cubic meters. If the gross tonnage were given everywhere, it would then be a simple matter to convert English tons to cubic meters, but net tonnage seems to vary even for the same class of boats, e. g. steam- trawlers, in a manner as yet incomprehensible to the writer. Further, in net tonnage, the large sailing trawlers and the steam trawlers are not far removed from one another, yet the fishing capacity of the steam trawler must be several times greater than that of the sailing trawler; the fishing capacities of the sailing trawlers also, differ in the different countries. Other difficulties might be mentioned, but these suffice to show, that any account of the total annual amount of fishing in the North Sea is quite excluded, from this point of view. The question arises however; of what utility for the solution of the problems of overfishing and decrease of fish, is this information with regard to the boats? The answer is, that in the case of a decrease of fish or of a stationary condition of a stock, we wish to know whether the amount of fishing has decreased or otherwise. The im- portance of such information has already been exemplified in the case of the Kattegat fishery. If we are not aware by actual data, that the amount of fishing has not decreased, we cannot well conclude from a decrease in the quantities landed, that the actual stock in the sea has decreased. It seems quite contrary to general opinion to suggest for a moment, that the amount of fishing in the North Sea has decreased. In general, there can be no doubt that it has increased, up to 1900 at least, and for most of the im- portant species, it has certainly not decreased. Nevertheless, it is worthy of con- sideration, whether the decrease in the quantities of soles (see p.31) landed annually, may not partly be due to the amount of fishing it has undergone having decreased. This point has been sufficiently discussed previously, it is only mentioned here, to illustrate the necessity for having good statistics regarding the number and fishing capacity of boats. Regarding the matter as a whole, it may be said, that the problem of overfishing would not be solved even if we knew the total number of boats fishing in the North Sea, and could reduce them all to the same unit. If 600 fishing units were trawling in the North Sea in 1892 and 1200 in 1902, this would not indicate that the stock of fish had increased, nor would the converse mean a decrease. If for example, we had determined from the statistics, that the total quantities landed had remained constant, any great change in the number of fishing units, such as that indicated, could only result from some great change in the price obtained for fish on the markets. To determine therefore, whether a well-fished area can support a larger or smaller number of fishing units than it does at any given moment — and this is the practical solution of the APPENDIX K: KYLE — 54 — problem of overfishing —- we must take into consideration the value of the fish and the income earned by the average fishing unit (see Part I, Scotland p. 121). At the present time, there does not seem any pressing necessity for obtaining such information. The preceding pages have shown, that the statistics, representing the total quantities of the various species of fish landed, and the average price obtained by them, are sufficient to show whether a fishery is deteriorating and whether it is being carried on in a rational manner. Table XXIX. Steam trawlers fishing in the North Sea or from North Sea ports! 1892 | 1893 | 1894 | 1895 | 1896 | 1897 | 1898 | 1899 | 1900 | Igor | I902 | 1903 Sweden reger =) = = = = = | = = = I I I | | Denmark { 2 OU Tes ar NNO eee Re OM aS 3 3 1 Balkan, EEA Ske AS x “hi FF a AG eis ne ie we pia TS ‘ki f| 35 57 62 70 86 Bo) II5 II4 113 108 IOI | II9 Germany eee À ï Hl - i i I a 7 7 6 5 5 f I I I 2 2 2 12 21 24 29 28| 32 Holland. eee Nl th ein ws 228$ a ER I 2 Io TA 12 Belgium. ......... 7 9 Io 12 13 TA 18 21 23 26 230 ET PAGE — 448 — — — = = 957 | 1040 | 1026 | 1024 | — Scotland ......... — 72 77 77 72 81 107 159 180 206 | 227 | 240 f 587 1275 | 1383 | 1397 | 1405 Total... \ . | 8 5 a 19 Table XXX. Approximate number of sailing trawlers (of the ıst class) fishing in the North Sea: tolé Eat htm tit re De to tte 1892 | 1893 | 1894 | 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 f Denmark....... | — — — 68 (c.129)|74 (c.76)|84 (c.100)|98 (c.40)|r10(c.103) 112(c.74)|118(c.120) 127 (c.120) 143 (e.120) i 169 | 165| 165 172 176 175 179 170 162 157 157 - 153 : BT ay on. { 121 | 112| 107 107 110 117 III 112 III 106 IOI 97 fl zx mo Wit 17208 EU 17 26 35 44 42 24 NT, HONG u. os 5: || 274 | 274 | 274 288 | 288 288 269 269 285 251 252 245 IBelsnum eer | 180 | 184 | 171 168 167 156 I50 138 145 I51 158 — England (for all fl — |2037| — — = — — 1134 925 820 807 — coasts) Yi — | 280} — — — — — 264 274 264 260 _ Î 2397 1587 1388 1288 1274 fol. à 666 645 Gn 621... |} iene Notes on Tables showing numbers of fishing boats engaged in trawling A. Steam trawlers Sweden: The steamboat mentioned is of the ordinary pattern of trawler. Germany: The boats occasionally engaged in trawling, as stated in the table, mean boats carrying on the line-fishing as well as trawling. For 1904, it is stated that 3 additional steamers took part in the drift-net fishing and trawling. Holland: The boats occasionally engaged in trawling are all steamers of the herring fleet. They carry on trawling in winter and spring. 1 The figures given in the second row for Denmark, Germany, and Holland, concern the occasional trawlers. — 55 — APPENDIX K: KYLE The gross average cubic capacity of the steam trawlers is 501 m3, varying from 369 to 637 m3. Belgium: The steam-trawlers mentioned belong entirely to Ostend. France: The number of steam-trawlers fishing in the North Sea is not known. In the XVIIth Annual Report of the Inspectors of Sea Fisheries (England and Wales) it is stated, that there were 19 steam-trawlers of French nationality tishing in the North Sea in 1901, and 3 in 1902. England: The numbers given in the table are taken from the Report from the Select Committee on the Sea Fisheries Bill (H.L.), 1904, p.158. They represent the steam trawlers fishing from English North Sea ports, but only a portion of them fish constantly in the North Sea. Reliable data can only be obtained for the years mentioned. Scotland: The numbers represent only the Scottish steam-trawlers fishing from the North Sea ports, but a portion of these are often fishing out of the North Sea: B. Sailing-trawlers Denmark: The numbers recorded refer to the cutters and large decked boats (see Part I, p. 27). Their average tonnage is over 20 tons gross. These use the “snurre- vaad” or plaice-seine, not the trawl. The numbers in brackets refer to the Kattegat boats which fish for a part of the year in the North Sea. Germany: The size and type of boat are various. The occasional trawlers include a considerable number of boats which take part in the drift-net fishing. Holland: A large number (over 500) of small coastal trawlers have been omitted (see Part I, p. 75). Belgium: The numbers given refer only to the sailing boats of Ostend. A large number of trawlers belong also to the smaller towns on the Belgian coast (see Part I, p. 91) but they are mostly small coastal trawlers. England: It is impossible to ascertain the number of sailing trawlers belonging only to the east coast of England. The numbers given in the Reports of Inspectors refer to the classes of boats, not distinguishing drift-net boats from trawlers. In the XVIIth Annual Report, however, a table is given distinguishing the various methods of fishing, and it is from this table that the present figures have been taken. The numbers refer, however, to the Ist class boats for all England and Wales (see Part I, p. 107). Reliable data exist only for the years mentioned. APPENDIX K: KYLE ie oreo D. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS The main conclusions arrived at during the progress of this work may be briefly summarised. The preliminary discussion showed the advisability of regarding overfishing as mainly a practical question. The chief problems for scientific consideration — the theoretical aspect of overfishing — are centered round the possibility of man’s influence effecting some change in the composition of the existing stock of a species or even causing a decrease in the quantities of the species These are, therefore, the points to be investigated from the statistics (p. 4). A discussion of the plaice fisheries of the north-west coast of Norway and of the plaice fishery of the Kattegat, has shown the effects of severe fishing. In the first case, the plaice of large size were fished up within a few years and the fishing ceased. In the second case, the plaice of large size have also been fished up, but the fishing has remained practically as it always was, though the intensity of the fishing has greatly increased. These phenomena are explained by reference to the physical conditions. The plaice live in moderate depths, mostly from the shore to 40 fathoms, becoming rare at 60 and 65 fathoms. On the exposed Norwegian coast, the areas adapted to the plaice are very circumscribed in extent, and the currents prevailing there are strongly against the young stages of the plaice reaching a spot favourable to their development. “The consequence is, that the suitable areas on the Norwegian coast receive but small contributions of young plaice each year, and it takes several years for a sufficient number-to collect to permit of a remunerative fishery. The fishery is thus based on an “accumulated stock” of plaice. When this stock has been reduced by man, the quantities present of the middle-sized smaller plaice, are not sufficient to support a remunerative fishery (p. 6). The physical conditions of the Kattegat, on the other hand, are specially suited to the plaice. The pelagic young are not carried away from the area by the oceanic cur- rents, and have a large tract of warm sandy flats on which they can and do grow in abundance. The removal of the “accumulated stock” of large plaice by man has not appreciably affected the fishery. The statistics show, that the total quantities taken annu- ally have remained practically about the same level for a long period of years, subject of course to fluctuations which can be explained by changes in the physical conditions. The persistence of the fishery after the “accumulated stock” had dis- appeared, has led to the conception of the “current stock’, thatis, a secon- dary supply, which is approximately equivalent to the “accumulated stock” in quantity or weight, and thus maintains the fishery, but contains greater numbers of a smaller average size. The proofs for the existence of this “current stock” are based partly on the above-mentioned results of the examination of the statist- ical data, partly on the results of plaice-marking experiments. It has been shown, that the young plaice grow faster on grounds where they are relatively less abundant than on grounds where they are more abundant. The removal of the larger plaice of then “accumulated stock”, and also the strenuous fishing, leave more room and food so that the young can now grow faster than formerly (p. 20). In discussing the Kattegat plaice fishery also, it has been pointed out, that the mode ee es Se — 57 — APPENDIX K: KYLE and conditions of fishing there are somewhat different from those in the North Sea, in that, the size of mesh used in the fishing apparatus is larger, and that the Danish law forbids the sale of small plaice under 10 inches (25:6cm.) Both these circumstances favour the small plaice in the Kattegat in comparison with their brethren of the North Sea. Consideration of the available statistics of the North Sea fisheries has shown, that the condition of the Kattegat plaice fishery is paralleled to a certain extent by that of the plaice fishery, possibly also by that of the haddock fishery, in the North Sea. In both cases, we cannot conclude from the statistics, that the annual quantities landed have decreased, nor can it be said that they have increased, since 1892. In other words, the current stock to all appearance re- mains almost constant. On the other hand, the composition of this cur- rent stock has undergone great deterioration. ‘The relative quantities of large fish landed have greatly decreased, whilst the relative quantities of small have greatly increased. Since the total quantities have not increased, it follows that the average size of the fish landed of these species must have decreased. This is in marked contrast to the Kattegat plaice fishery, where the available evidence for a period of six years (1897— 1902) shows, that the average size of plaice landed has not appreciably altered. The chief countries for the sale of small plaice are, in order: England, Holland, Denmark and Germany. The quantities for Belgium are not known. In Denmark (North Sea coast), practically all the plaice landed are small; in Holland (Ymuiden), 95°/ are small and barely 1°/ large; in Germany (Geestemünde and Bremerhaven), the percentage of small has increased from 68 in 1895 to 84 in 1903 (p. 29). The chief countries for the sale of small haddock are, in order: England (?), Germany and Holland. In the case of the “prime” fish, sole and turbot, the statistics show an unmistakeable decrease in the total quantities of each landed from the North Sea. This decrease is due entirely to a constant decrease of the large fish, whilst the quantities of the small have not increased sufficiently to counterbalance the decrease of the large in the total quantities. The comparative absence of the smaller kinds, as contrasted with the plaice, must be due to special causes. A still more funda- mental problem lies in the fact, that the reproductive fertility of the sole is more than twice, and that of the turbot more than ten times, the reproductive fertility of the plaice, and yet these species are represented in the catches of the fishermen by a mere fraction of the quantities of the plaice (p. 34). The quantities taken of the brill do not show any decrease (p. 36). The condition of the cod fishery in the North Sea cannot be deter- mined, even approximately, owing to the quantities given in the various statistics, especially of England and Scotland, including the quantities taken at Iceland, the Færoes and else- where, as well as those of the North Sea (p. 39). The quantities taken of the herring have greatly increased since 1892. They represent over 50 °/ of the total quantities landed at North Sea ports (p. 42). These are the principal species of the North Sea fisheries ; the remaining species are not dealt with. Consideration of the total quantities landed gives no countenance to pessimistic views regarding the fisheries as a whole, Nevertheless, since the trawl fishery of the North Sea depends principally upon the species mentioned, viz. plaice, haddock, (cod), sole and turbot, it is concluded from the evidence regarding these species, Appendix K 8 APPENDIX K: KYLE LA eis that this fishery is in a critical position. This has been recognised in Germany as in England. By critical position is to be understood, not the possible exhaus- tion of the fisheries, but simply, that the fisheries are coming more and more to depend upon the smaller classes and inferior kinds of fish. Theoretical consideration of the many and complicated possibilities, will not suffice to solve the problem.whether man, by interfering with the course of fishing, can help to improve the fisheries; that can only be solved by well-regulated expéri- ments (p. 45). . Consideration of the average price received on the markets for the various size- groups of the principal species, shows that the fishing may be practical but cannot be called altogether rational. The average price obtained by the smaller kinds of plaice and haddock, per pound or per kilogram, is only one third of that obtained by the larger. Apart from the question of decrease, therefore, it does not seem rational to base an industry on a commodity which obtains but one third of the value it might have. — In fishing under natural conditions, it is unavoidable that a certain proportion of fish smaller than the desired mean-size is taken. The sole fishery of Germany (Geestemünde and Bremerhaven) may be cited as an example of a fishery, where the proportion by weight of small fish taken (31°/.) is not excessive. In the case of the plaice and haddock fishery, however, the proportion of the small fish (by weight) is from 84°/, to 95 °/o for the plaice and from 60°/, to over 70°/, for the haddock. There can be no doubt that these percentages are excessive and mean a loss in the end to the fishing-population (p. 50). An important practical conclusion arises from a consideration of the total quantities and the average prices together. It has been shown, that the former have greatly — increased (Table XXVI) and that the latter, on the other hand, have decreased within recent years — even for the herring (Table XXVIII). As the increase in the total quan- tities arises from an increase in the inferior and smaller kinds of fish, it follows, that the decrease in the average price is due to the fact, that the people in all the countries concerned are desirous of a better quality of fish not a greater quantity (p.52). If so, the present mode of conducting the fishery is doubly irrational. Finally, it has proved to be impossible to give an accurate and connected summary of the number of boats and thus of the amount of fishing in the North Sea (p.52). In. asmuch as the boats of the different countries are and always will be somewhat different from one another, and the results of the fishing are dependent upon many more things than the mere numbers and kind of boats, it is not easy to arrive at any measure of the total amount of fishing from this aspect. The problem of overfishing, in so far as it involves the question — is it possible to increase the amount of fishing or number of boats? — cannot be solved from theoretical considerations. It is the value the fish receive, which is the principal cause of an increase or decrease in the amount of fishing. Conse- quently, in dealing with overfishing as a practical problem, it is necessary to consider the monetary side of the matter, the expenditure in boats and gear on the one hand and the gross and net income on the other (see Part I, p.121). With this practical aspect the present work has nothing to do, except in so far as the theoretical discussion of the scientific problems of the decrease of fish may conduce to more rational methods of conducting the fisheries in the future, sornu pneu 008 ont ons ow 09 a oe 09 PH UrIIN 009 oos 00 00€ 005 0 0 00, 009 xx 00% 0000 “27277 002 Fe LM oe Fr; (II aum) Araysıy ajos ay} jo pue (x our) Araysıy aoreyd ay} Jo uorgoi oy} *‘spunois y3noı au} SUIMOUS yedayyey pue Bag YON ay} JO JEU) | EN at <, NE Wea 5 oe | | M xipueddy FO6I—ZO6I :Hoday-erausg » \ ' ‘ ‘ 35% i f ; : ‘ re A Rapports & Procés-Verbaux des réunions Vol. I. 1902-03. Septembre 1903. Kr. 4 if » I 1903— 04. Octobre 1904. Kr. 4 i SHE EN " Août 1905.. En deux édition Kr. a Bulletin des ue acquis pendant jee OL Année 1902—703. 4 numéros. Novembre 1903. aie 5 1903— 04. 4 numeros. Novembre X = u = numéros" JA — ae pS oi ‘ala rials HA be win shou neu ia Wee oH I Se, ? I i i i fay nus i i i i ie ee t 41) N Hath HE ea 1 it ; 114 taie ait Ut Hit Kar nt N He Ar Hi melted bea ohhelbotes i I in (4 He eel cone HA $4 ln PCR Er A AE a ae a BEE Diener ste sib ates aaa a) seer int Ei Lo HR aa Kath HER HY Harn wi nr ne pie iodo lit PAC UTNE iat RAA DANS tel et cai en we Hi Ree Ih LITT beet pete ne 4! Hat EI TEIREINE HARTE jr i | freine i 4 Hate bi Ehe 4 aed a Bee Ania un a sa Heu ie Bit fie au rs BE FE = DAT La 3 EE enchant =. Rte LEE ! % et dt ml 0 Bean W Hd On per Aalen i Pani rity ih i i rH N Art I , HEN eh it te (int seth la HR thant! Han Hi a Hi ut au i phate dln eee yeh! 1} HU pines teeta is ne #4 Sarin CTP Su sys u reine vi ge ty ae HERR M Aal ah fy + à ny tHe At . tops huh a ROUEN etl hf ‘4 mahi ont (tights “ie de ar iar Biren * aiden! hits es past hote I nt 9 Res DORE # DER rested Pia et et CRAN IL D Aa rent me fi je + eh Sint REE ni h Ehre der PACOTONES ren Wah bed à vba ahnen hele tartan ae i stat D HAT